*.sty
*.dvi
*.idx
+bsysmanual/external-references.tex
+covers/pdf/*.pdf
+images/eps
+images/pdf
+images/png
+tools/list-of-anchors
+manuals/*/pdf-and-html/
+manuals/en/www-console/
+manuals/en/www-developers/
+manuals/en/www-main/
+manuals/en/www-misc/
+manuals/en/www-problems/
+manuals/en/www-utility/
+manuals/en/images/*.png
+tools/*html
*.maf
*.toc
*.mtc*
+manuals/en/old/*/version.tex
+manuals/en/old/*/update_version
+autom4te.cache
+kernsconfig
+*~
+*.~
+*.lof
+*.lot
+manuals/*/*/bacula.sty
+manuals/*/*/version.tex
+manuals/de/*/*.eps
+manuals/es/*/*.eps
+manuals/*/install/install
+manuals/*/catalog/*.pdf
+manuals/*/*.pdf
+manuals/update_version
+manuals/version.tex
+manuals/*/*.pdf
+manuals/*/concepts/concepts
+manuals/*/console/console
+manuals/*/developers/developers
+manuals/*/catalog/catalog
+manuals/*/*/version.tex
+manuals/*/*/update_version
+manuals/en/console/coverpage.tex
+manuals/en/console/index.html
+manuals/en/console/upload
+manuals/en/developers/index.html
+manuals/en/developers/upload
+manuals/en/main/index.html
+manuals/en/main/upload
+manuals/en/misc/index.html
+manuals/en/misc/upload
+manuals/en/problems/coverpage.tex
+manuals/en/problems/index.html
+manuals/en/problems/upload
+manuals/en/utility/coverpage.tex
+manuals/en/utility/index.html
+manuals/en/utility/upload
+upload
+version.tex
+images/bs_logo.png
+images/bs_logo.eps
+autoconf/Make.common
+bacula-web/version.tex
+config.log
+config.out
+config.status
+manuals/en/*/*.eps
*.aux
*.cdx
*.ddx
#
-# $Id$
-#
-# autoconf/Make.common.in -*- Makefile -*-
-# release date (man), LSM date, version number/name, current maintainer
-DATE="02 March 2014"
-LSMDATE=@LSMDATE@
-VERSION=5.3.2
-VERNAME=bacula-$(VERSION)#
-MAINT=Kern Sibbald#
-MAINTEMAIL=<kern@sibbald.com>#
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
SHELL = /bin/sh
srcdir = .
.PATH: .
-BACULASRC = /home/kern/bacula/k/bacula
+BACULASRC = /home/kern/bee/bacula/bacula
basedir = ..
topdir = ..
all_dirs = ${de_dirs} ${en_dirs} ${es_dirs} ${fr_dirs}
-DIST = Makefile.in
LANGUAGES= en fr de es
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
@echo " "
@echo -n "Building external references file..."
@find ${en_dirs} -mindepth 0 -maxdepth 1 -name "*tex" -exec grep -q '\label' {} \; -print| awk -F/ '{ print "\\externaldocument[" $$3 "-]{../"$$3"/"$$4"}"}'|sed -e 's/.tex//g' > `pwd`/latex/external-references.tex
+ @for I in ${en_dirs}; \
+ do (cd $$I; cp -f ../../version.tex .; cp -f ../../bacula.sty .;); \
+ done
@for I in ${en_dirs}; \
do (cd $$I; echo "==>Entering directory `pwd`"; \
$(MAKE) $@ || (echo ""; echo ""; echo " ====== Error in `pwd` ======"; \
@echo "External references for all manuals built."
pdftex: external-references
+ @for I in ${en_dirs}; \
+ do (cd $$I; cp -f ../../version.tex .; cp -f ../../bacula.sty .; ); \
+ done
@for I in ${en_dirs}; \
do (cd $$I; echo "==>Entering directory `pwd`"; \
$(MAKE) $@ || (echo ""; echo ""; echo " ====== Error in `pwd` ======"; \
@echo "All manuals built ..."
web:
+ @for I in ${en_dirs}; \
+ do (cd $$I; cp -f ../../version.tex .; cp -f ../../bacula.sty .;); \
+ done
@for I in ${en_dirs}; \
do (cd $$I; echo "==>Entering directory `pwd`"; \
$(MAKE) $@ || (echo ""; echo ""; echo " ====== Error in `pwd` ======"; \
fr: french
french:
+ @for I in ${fr_dirs}; do (cd $$I; cp -f ../../version.tex .; cp -f ../../bacula.sty .;); done
@for I in ${fr_dirs}; \
do (cd $$I; echo "==>Entering directory `pwd`"; \
$(MAKE) all || (echo ""; echo ""; echo " ====== Error in `pwd` ======"; \
de: german
german:
+ @for I in ${de_dirs}; do (cd $$I; cp -f ../.. .; cp -f ../../bacula.sty .;); done
@for I in ${de_dirs}; \
do (cd $$I; echo "==>Entering directory `pwd`"; \
$(MAKE) all || (echo ""; echo ""; echo " ====== Error in `pwd` ======"; \
es: spanish
spanish:
+ @for I in ${es_dirs}; do (cd $$I; cp -f ../../version.tex .; cp -f ../../bacula.sty .;); done
@for I in ${es_dirs}; \
do (cd $$I; echo "==>Entering directory `pwd`"; \
$(MAKE) all || (echo ""; echo ""; echo " ====== Error in `pwd` ======"; \
done
-configure: autoconf/configure.in autoconf/aclocal.m4 autoconf/acconfig.h
- cd $(srcdir);
- ${RMF} -f config.cache config.log config.out config.status src/config.h
- autoconf --prepend-include=$(srcdir)/autoconf \
- autoconf/configure.in > configure
- chmod 755 configure
-
-Makefile: Makefile.in
- cd $(topdir) \
- && CONFIG_FILES=$(thisdir)/$@ CONFIG_HEADERS= $(SHELL) ./config.status
-
-Makefiles:
- $(SHELL) config.status
-
-
-SEDREPLACE = -e 's%@BACULA_VERSION@%$(VERSION)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_LSMDATE@%$(LSMDATE)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_DATE@%$(DATE)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_MAINTEMAIL@%$(MAINTEMAIL)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_MAINT@%$(MAINT)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_WEBPAGE@%$(WEBPAGE)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_WEBMAINTEMAIL@%$(WEBMAINTEMAIL)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_WEBMAINT@%$(WEBMAINT)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_FTPSITENAME@%$(FTPSITENAME)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_FTPSITEDIR@%$(FTPSITEDIR)%g;'
-
-
$(basedir)/$(VERNAME).lsm: LSM.in $(srcdir)/../autoconf/Make.common.in $(srcdir)/../src/version.h
$(SED) $(SEDREPLACE) < $(srcdir)/LSM.in > $@
+++ /dev/null
-#
-# $Id$
-#
-@MCOMMON@
-
-srcdir = @srcdir@
-VPATH = @srcdir@
-.PATH: @srcdir@
-BACULASRC = @bacula@
-
-basedir = ..
-topdir = ..
-thisdir = docs
-
-#
-# Distribution variables
-#
-
-de_dirs = manuals/de/console manuals/de/developers manuals/de/main \
- manuals/de/misc manuals/de/problems manuals/de/utility
-
-
-en_dirs = manuals/en/console manuals/en/developers manuals/en/main \
- manuals/en/misc manuals/en/problems manuals/en/utility
-
-es_dirs = manuals/es/console manuals/es/developers manuals/es/main \
- manuals/es/misc manuals/es/problems manuals/es/utility
-
-fr_dirs = manuals/fr/console manuals/fr/developers manuals/fr/main \
- manuals/fr/misc manuals/fr/problems manuals/fr/utility
-
-all_dirs = ${de_dirs} ${en_dirs} ${es_dirs} ${fr_dirs}
-
-DIST = Makefile.in
-LANGUAGES= en fr de es
-
-#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-#en: pdftex
-
-all: pdftex web clean
-# @for I in ${en_dirs}; \
-# do (cd $$I; echo "==>Entering directory `pwd`"; \
-# $(MAKE) $@ || (echo ""; echo ""; echo " ====== Error in `pwd` ======"; \
-# echo ""; echo ""; exit 1;)); \
-# done
-# @echo "All manuals built ..."
-
-
-external-references:
- @echo " "
- @echo -n "Building external references file..."
- @find ${en_dirs} -mindepth 0 -maxdepth 1 -name "*tex" -exec grep -q '\label' {} \; -print| awk -F/ '{ print "\\externaldocument[" $$3 "-]{../"$$3"/"$$4"}"}'|sed -e 's/.tex//g' > `pwd`/latex/external-references.tex
- @for I in ${en_dirs}; \
- do (cd $$I; echo "==>Entering directory `pwd`"; \
- $(MAKE) $@ || (echo ""; echo ""; echo " ====== Error in `pwd` ======"; \
- echo ""; echo ""; exit 1;)); \
- done
- @echo "External references for all manuals built."
-
-pdftex: external-references
- @for I in ${en_dirs}; \
- do (cd $$I; echo "==>Entering directory `pwd`"; \
- $(MAKE) $@ || (echo ""; echo ""; echo " ====== Error in `pwd` ======"; \
- echo ""; echo ""; exit 1;)); \
- done
- @echo "All manuals built ..."
-
-web:
- @for I in ${en_dirs}; \
- do (cd $$I; echo "==>Entering directory `pwd`"; \
- $(MAKE) $@ || (echo ""; echo ""; echo " ====== Error in `pwd` ======"; \
- echo ""; echo ""; exit 1;)); \
- done
- @(cd tools ; ./htmls.sh)
- @cp ./images/png/borg-logo.png manuals/en/pdf-and-html/images
- @cp ./images/png/borg-next.png manuals/en/pdf-and-html/images/next.png
- @cp ./images/png/borg-next_g.png manuals/en/pdf-and-html/images/next_g.png
- @cp ./images/png/borg-previous.png manuals/en/pdf-and-html/images/prev.png
- @cp ./images/png/borg-previous_g.png manuals/en/pdf-and-html/images/prev_g.png
- @cp ./images/png/borg-up.png manuals/en/pdf-and-html/images/up.png
- @cp ./images/png/borg-up_g.png manuals/en/pdf-and-html/images/up_g.png
- @cp ./images/png/borg-contents.png manuals/en/pdf-and-html/images/contents.png
- @cp ./images/png/borg-index.png manuals/en/pdf-and-html/images/index.png
- @echo "All manuals built ..."
-
-
-bacula-web:
- (cd bacula-web; make)
-
-fr: french
-
-french:
- @for I in ${fr_dirs}; \
- do (cd $$I; echo "==>Entering directory `pwd`"; \
- $(MAKE) all || (echo ""; echo ""; echo " ====== Error in `pwd` ======"; \
- echo ""; echo ""; exit 1;)); \
- done
-
-de: german
-
-german:
- @for I in ${de_dirs}; \
- do (cd $$I; echo "==>Entering directory `pwd`"; \
- $(MAKE) all || (echo ""; echo ""; echo " ====== Error in `pwd` ======"; \
- echo ""; echo ""; exit 1;)); \
- done
-
-es: spanish
-
-spanish:
- @for I in ${es_dirs}; \
- do (cd $$I; echo "==>Entering directory `pwd`"; \
- $(MAKE) all || (echo ""; echo ""; echo " ====== Error in `pwd` ======"; \
- echo ""; echo ""; exit 1;)); \
- done
-
-
-configure: autoconf/configure.in autoconf/aclocal.m4 autoconf/acconfig.h
- cd $(srcdir);
- ${RMF} -f config.cache config.log config.out config.status src/config.h
- autoconf --prepend-include=$(srcdir)/autoconf \
- autoconf/configure.in > configure
- chmod 755 configure
-
-Makefile: Makefile.in
- cd $(topdir) \
- && CONFIG_FILES=$(thisdir)/$@ CONFIG_HEADERS= $(SHELL) ./config.status
-
-Makefiles:
- $(SHELL) config.status
-
-
-SEDREPLACE = -e 's%@BACULA_VERSION@%$(VERSION)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_LSMDATE@%$(LSMDATE)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_DATE@%$(DATE)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_MAINTEMAIL@%$(MAINTEMAIL)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_MAINT@%$(MAINT)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_WEBPAGE@%$(WEBPAGE)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_WEBMAINTEMAIL@%$(WEBMAINTEMAIL)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_WEBMAINT@%$(WEBMAINT)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_FTPSITENAME@%$(FTPSITENAME)%g;'\
- -e 's%@BACULA_FTPSITEDIR@%$(FTPSITEDIR)%g;'
-
-
-$(basedir)/$(VERNAME).lsm: LSM.in $(srcdir)/../autoconf/Make.common.in $(srcdir)/../src/version.h
- $(SED) $(SEDREPLACE) < $(srcdir)/LSM.in > $@
-
-clean:
- $(RMF) *~ 1 2 3 bacula-doc*.tar.gz
- (cd bacula-web; make clean)
- find . -type l -exec rm {} \;
- @for I in ${all_dirs}; \
- do (cd $$I; echo "==>Entering directory `pwd`"; ${MAKE} $@ || exit 1); done
-
-mini-clean:
- $(RMF) *~ 1 2 3 bacula-doc*.tar.gz
- (cd bacula-web; make clean)
- find . -type l -exec rm {} \;
- @for I in ${all_dirs}; \
- do (cd $$I; echo "==>Entering directory `pwd`"; ${MAKE} $@ || exit 1); done
-
-realclean: clean
-
-distclean: clean
- $(RMF) Makefile
- $(RMF) -r CVS html-manual/CVS home-page/CVS techlogs/CVS
- $(RMF) -rf autom4te.cache bacula-doc-* config.log config.out
- $(RMF) -f config.status kernsconfig
- (cd bacula-web; make distclean)
- @for I in ${all_dirs}; \
- do (cd $$I; echo "==>Entering directory `pwd`"; ${MAKE} $@ || exit 1); done
- @echo "Removing the HTML directories..."
- @for L in $(LANGUAGES) ; \
- do rm -rf manuals/$$L/pdf-and-html ; done
- @echo "HTML directories removed."
- @echo "Cleaning the latex directory..."
- @rm -f latex/external-references
- @echo "latex directory cleaned up"
-
-
-devclean:
- $(RMF) Makefile
-
-depend:
-
-install:
-# $(INSTALL_DATA) bacula.1 $(DESTDIR)$(mandir)/$(manprefix)bacula.$(manext)
-
-uninstall:
-# -cd $(mandir); $(RMF) $(manprefix)bacula.$(manext)
-This is the Bacula documentation directory. It currently contains
-the following subdirectories:
-
- Directory Contents
- home-page The Bacula Web Site
- manuals All the manuals
- manuals/en English version of the manuals
- manuals/en/catalog Catalog
- concepts Concepts
- console Console and Operators Guide
- developers Developer's guide
- install Installation and Configuration Guide
- problems Problem Resolution Guide
- utility Utility Programs
-
- manuals/de German translation of the manual
- manuals/de/catalog Catalog
- concepts Concepts
- console Console and Operators Guide
- developers Developer's guide
- install Installation and Configuration Guide
- problems Problem Resolution Guide
- utility Utility Programs
-
- manuals/fr French translation of the manual
- manuals/fr/catalog Catalog
- concepts Concepts
- console Console and Operators Guide
- developers Developer's guide
- install Installation and Configuration Guide
- problems Problem Resolution Guide
- utility Utility Programs
-
- techlogs Technical development logs
+This is the Bacula documentation directory.
Build instructions:
+See the file README.pct for more details of the
+build system. Note, all the previous xxx.in files have
+been removed except for one:
+
+ manuals/version.tex.in
+
+You normally should not edit that file, rather edit
+version.tex, see the end of this file for more on
+versions.
+
You must have at least the following packages loaded:
latex2html
te_latex
tetex
-First, you must do:
-
- cd <docs>
- ./configure --with-bacula=<path-to-bacula-source>
-
- This will find the current Bacula version, and create
- all the Makefiles from Makefile.in
-
- Do not edit the Makefiles or your changes will be lost. Always
- edit Makefile.in
-
Web site: nothing to build, simply copy the files to the
Web site, then load the documents in the appropriate
places.
A distribution is made by exporting the SVN then building everything
and finally tarring it up.
+
+Note: normally this directory is distributed with the correct
+version and date. If you want to change it, simply manually
+edit <docs>/manuals/version.tex.
+
+If you want to update the version "automatically" or synchronize
+it with the source, edit the update_version file and change the
+BACULA_SOURCE variable to point to your source file, then
+simply enter:
+
+ ./update_version
+++ /dev/null
-# autoconf/Make.common.in -*- Makefile -*-
-# release date (man), LSM date, version number/name, current maintainer
-DATE="@DATE@"
-LSMDATE=@LSMDATE@
-VERSION=@VERSION@
-VERNAME=bacula-$(VERSION)#
-MAINT=Kern Sibbald#
-MAINTEMAIL=<kern@sibbald.com>#
-#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-SHELL = /bin/sh
-
-# Installation target directories & other installation stuff
-prefix = @prefix@
-exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@
-binprefix =
-manprefix =
-sbindir = @sbindir@
-sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@
-scriptdir = @scriptdir@
-mandir = @mandir@/man1
-manext = 1
-datarootdir=@datarootdir@
-
-# Tools & program stuff
-MV = @MV@
-RM = @RM@
-RMF = @RM@ -f
-CP = @CP@
-SED = @SED@
-AWK = @AWK@
-ECHO = @ECHO@
-CMP = @CMP@
-INSTALL = @INSTALL@
-# add the -s to the following in PRODUCTION mode
-INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL@ -m @SBINPERM@
-INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL@ -m 644
-INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL@ -m @SBINPERM@
-INSTALL_CONFIG = @INSTALL@ -m 640
-
-
-# End of common section of the Makefile
-#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+++ /dev/null
-/* ------------------------------------------------------------------------- */
-/* -- CONFIGURE SPECIFIED FEATURES -- */
-/* ------------------------------------------------------------------------- */
-
-
-/* ------------------------------------------------------------------------- */
-/* -- CONFIGURE DETECTED FEATURES -- */
-/* ------------------------------------------------------------------------- */
-
-/* Operating systems */
-/* OSes */
-#undef HAVE_LINUX_OS
-#undef HAVE_FREEBSD_OS
-#undef HAVE_NETBSD_OS
-#undef HAVE_OPENBSD_OS
-#undef HAVE_BSDI_OS
-#undef HAVE_HPUX_OS
-#undef HAVE_SUN_OS
-#undef HAVE_IRIX_OS
-#undef HAVE_AIX_OS
-#undef HAVE_SGI_OS
-#undef HAVE_CYGWIN
-#undef HAVE_OSF1_OS
-#undef HAVE_DARWIN_OS
+++ /dev/null
-dnl
-
-AC_DEFUN(BA_CONDITIONAL,
-[AC_SUBST($1_TRUE)
-AC_SUBST($1_FALSE)
-if $2; then
- $1_TRUE=
- $1_FALSE='#'
-else
- $1_TRUE='#'
- $1_FALSE=
-fi])
-
-
-AC_DEFUN(BA_CHECK_OPSYS,
-[
-AC_CYGWIN
-if test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xSunOS
-then
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_SUN_OS, $TRUEPRG)
- AC_DEFINE(HAVE_SUN_OS)
-else
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_SUN_OS, $FALSEPRG)
-fi
-
-if test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xOSF1
-then
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_OSF1_OS, $TRUEPRG)
- AC_DEFINE(HAVE_OSF1_OS)
-else
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_OSF1_OS, $FALSEPRG)
-fi
-
-if test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xAIX
-then
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_AIX_OS, $TRUEPRG)
- AC_DEFINE(HAVE_AIX_OS)
-else
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_AIX_OS, $FALSEPRG)
-fi
-
-if test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xHP-UX
-then
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_HPUX_OS, $TRUEPRG)
- AC_DEFINE(HAVE_HPUX_OS)
-else
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_HPUX_OS, $FALSEPRG)
-fi
-
-if test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xLinux
-then
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_LINUX_OS, $TRUEPRG)
- AC_DEFINE(HAVE_LINUX_OS)
-else
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_LINUX_OS, $FALSEPRG)
-fi
-
-if test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xFreeBSD
-then
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_FREEBSD_OS, $TRUEPRG)
- AC_DEFINE(HAVE_FREEBSD_OS)
-else
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_FREEBSD_OS, $FALSEPRG)
-fi
-
-if test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xNetBSD
-then
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_NETBSD_OS, $TRUEPRG)
- AC_DEFINE(HAVE_NETBSD_OS)
-else
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_NETBSD_OS, $FALSEPRG)
-fi
-
-if test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xOpenBSD
-then
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_OPENBSD_OS, $TRUEPRG)
- AC_DEFINE(HAVE_OPENBSD_OS)
-else
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_OPENBSD_OS, $FALSEPRG)
-fi
-
-if test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xBSD/OS
-then
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_BSDI_OS, $TRUEPRG)
- AC_DEFINE(HAVE_BSDI_OS)
-else
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_BSDI_OS, $FALSEPRG)
-fi
-
-if test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xSGI
-then
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_SGI_OS, $TRUEPRG)
- AC_DEFINE(HAVE_SGI_OS)
-else
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_SGI_OS, $FALSEPRG)
-fi
-
-if test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xIRIX
-then
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_IRIX_OS, $TRUEPRG)
- AC_DEFINE(HAVE_IRIX_OS)
-else
- BA_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_IRIX_OS, $FALSEPRG)
-fi
-
-if test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xDarwin
-then
- AM_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_DARWIN_OS, $TRUEPRG)
- AC_DEFINE(HAVE_DARWIN_OS)
-else
- AM_CONDITIONAL(HAVE_DARWIN_OS, $FALSEPRG)
-fi
-])
-
-AC_DEFUN(BA_CHECK_OPSYS_DISTNAME,
-[AC_MSG_CHECKING(for Operating System Distribution)
-if test "x$DISTNAME" != "x"
-then
- echo "distname set to $DISTNAME"
-elif test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xOSF1
-then
- DISTNAME=alpha
-elif test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xAIX
-then
- DISTNAME=aix
-elif test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xHP-UX
-then
- DISTNAME=hpux
-elif test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xSunOS
-then
- DISTNAME=solaris
-elif test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xFreeBSD
-then
- DISTNAME=freebsd
-elif test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xNetBSD
-then
- DISTNAME=netbsd
-elif test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xOpenBSD
-then
- DISTNAME=openbsd
-elif test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xIRIX
-then
- DISTNAME=irix
-elif test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xBSD/OS
-then
- DISTNAME=bsdi
-elif test -f /etc/SuSE-release
-then
- DISTNAME=suse
-elif test -d /etc/SuSEconfig
-then
- DISTNAME=suse5
-elif test -f /etc/mandrake-release
-then
- DISTNAME=mandrake
-elif test -f /etc/whitebox-release
-then
- DISTNAME=redhat
-elif test -f /etc/redhat-release
-then
- DISTNAME=redhat
-elif test -f /etc/gentoo-release
-then
- DISTNAME=gentoo
-elif test -f /etc/debian_version
-then
- DISTNAME=debian
-elif test -f /etc/slackware-version
-then
- DISTNAME=slackware
-elif test $HAVE_UNAME=yes -a x`uname -s` = xDarwin
-then
- DISTNAME=darwin
-elif test -f /etc/engarde-version
-then
- DISTNAME=engarde
-elif test "$CYGWIN" = yes
-then
- DISTNAME=cygwin
- AC_DEFINE(HAVE_CYGWIN)
-else
- DISTNAME=unknown
-fi
-AC_MSG_RESULT(done)
-])
-
-AC_DEFUN(AM_CONDITIONAL,
-[AC_SUBST($1_TRUE)
-AC_SUBST($1_FALSE)
-if $2; then
- $1_TRUE=
- $1_FALSE='#'
-else
- $1_TRUE='#'
- $1_FALSE=
-fi])
+++ /dev/null
-#! /bin/sh
-# Attempt to guess a canonical system name.
-# Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
-# 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-timestamp='2004-09-07'
-
-# This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
-# under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
-# (at your option) any later version.
-#
-# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
-# WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
-# General Public License for more details.
-#
-# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
-# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
-#
-# As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
-# distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
-# configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
-# the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.
-
-# Originally written by Per Bothner <per@bothner.com>.
-# Please send patches to <config-patches@gnu.org>. Submit a context
-# diff and a properly formatted ChangeLog entry.
-#
-# This script attempts to guess a canonical system name similar to
-# config.sub. If it succeeds, it prints the system name on stdout, and
-# exits with 0. Otherwise, it exits with 1.
-#
-# The plan is that this can be called by configure scripts if you
-# don't specify an explicit build system type.
-
-me=`echo "$0" | sed -e 's,.*/,,'`
-
-usage="\
-Usage: $0 [OPTION]
-
-Output the configuration name of the system \`$me' is run on.
-
-Operation modes:
- -h, --help print this help, then exit
- -t, --time-stamp print date of last modification, then exit
- -v, --version print version number, then exit
-
-Report bugs and patches to <config-patches@gnu.org>."
-
-version="\
-GNU config.guess ($timestamp)
-
-Originally written by Per Bothner.
-Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004
-Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE."
-
-help="
-Try \`$me --help' for more information."
-
-# Parse command line
-while test $# -gt 0 ; do
- case $1 in
- --time-stamp | --time* | -t )
- echo "$timestamp" ; exit 0 ;;
- --version | -v )
- echo "$version" ; exit 0 ;;
- --help | --h* | -h )
- echo "$usage"; exit 0 ;;
- -- ) # Stop option processing
- shift; break ;;
- - ) # Use stdin as input.
- break ;;
- -* )
- echo "$me: invalid option $1$help" >&2
- exit 1 ;;
- * )
- break ;;
- esac
-done
-
-if test $# != 0; then
- echo "$me: too many arguments$help" >&2
- exit 1
-fi
-
-trap 'exit 1' 1 2 15
-
-# CC_FOR_BUILD -- compiler used by this script. Note that the use of a
-# compiler to aid in system detection is discouraged as it requires
-# temporary files to be created and, as you can see below, it is a
-# headache to deal with in a portable fashion.
-
-# Historically, `CC_FOR_BUILD' used to be named `HOST_CC'. We still
-# use `HOST_CC' if defined, but it is deprecated.
-
-# Portable tmp directory creation inspired by the Autoconf team.
-
-set_cc_for_build='
-trap "exitcode=\$?; (rm -f \$tmpfiles 2>/dev/null; rmdir \$tmp 2>/dev/null) && exit \$exitcode" 0 ;
-trap "rm -f \$tmpfiles 2>/dev/null; rmdir \$tmp 2>/dev/null; exit 1" 1 2 13 15 ;
-: ${TMPDIR=/tmp} ;
- { tmp=`(umask 077 && mktemp -d -q "$TMPDIR/cgXXXXXX") 2>/dev/null` && test -n "$tmp" && test -d "$tmp" ; } ||
- { test -n "$RANDOM" && tmp=$TMPDIR/cg$$-$RANDOM && (umask 077 && mkdir $tmp) ; } ||
- { tmp=$TMPDIR/cg-$$ && (umask 077 && mkdir $tmp) && echo "Warning: creating insecure temp directory" >&2 ; } ||
- { echo "$me: cannot create a temporary directory in $TMPDIR" >&2 ; exit 1 ; } ;
-dummy=$tmp/dummy ;
-tmpfiles="$dummy.c $dummy.o $dummy.rel $dummy" ;
-case $CC_FOR_BUILD,$HOST_CC,$CC in
- ,,) echo "int x;" > $dummy.c ;
- for c in cc gcc c89 c99 ; do
- if ($c -c -o $dummy.o $dummy.c) >/dev/null 2>&1 ; then
- CC_FOR_BUILD="$c"; break ;
- fi ;
- done ;
- if test x"$CC_FOR_BUILD" = x ; then
- CC_FOR_BUILD=no_compiler_found ;
- fi
- ;;
- ,,*) CC_FOR_BUILD=$CC ;;
- ,*,*) CC_FOR_BUILD=$HOST_CC ;;
-esac ;'
-
-# This is needed to find uname on a Pyramid OSx when run in the BSD universe.
-# (ghazi@noc.rutgers.edu 1994-08-24)
-if (test -f /.attbin/uname) >/dev/null 2>&1 ; then
- PATH=$PATH:/.attbin ; export PATH
-fi
-
-UNAME_MACHINE=`(uname -m) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_MACHINE=unknown
-UNAME_RELEASE=`(uname -r) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_RELEASE=unknown
-UNAME_SYSTEM=`(uname -s) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_SYSTEM=unknown
-UNAME_VERSION=`(uname -v) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_VERSION=unknown
-
-# Note: order is significant - the case branches are not exclusive.
-
-case "${UNAME_MACHINE}:${UNAME_SYSTEM}:${UNAME_RELEASE}:${UNAME_VERSION}" in
- *:NetBSD:*:*)
- # NetBSD (nbsd) targets should (where applicable) match one or
- # more of the tupples: *-*-netbsdelf*, *-*-netbsdaout*,
- # *-*-netbsdecoff* and *-*-netbsd*. For targets that recently
- # switched to ELF, *-*-netbsd* would select the old
- # object file format. This provides both forward
- # compatibility and a consistent mechanism for selecting the
- # object file format.
- #
- # Note: NetBSD doesn't particularly care about the vendor
- # portion of the name. We always set it to "unknown".
- sysctl="sysctl -n hw.machine_arch"
- UNAME_MACHINE_ARCH=`(/sbin/$sysctl 2>/dev/null || \
- /usr/sbin/$sysctl 2>/dev/null || echo unknown)`
- case "${UNAME_MACHINE_ARCH}" in
- armeb) machine=armeb-unknown ;;
- arm*) machine=arm-unknown ;;
- sh3el) machine=shl-unknown ;;
- sh3eb) machine=sh-unknown ;;
- *) machine=${UNAME_MACHINE_ARCH}-unknown ;;
- esac
- # The Operating System including object format, if it has switched
- # to ELF recently, or will in the future.
- case "${UNAME_MACHINE_ARCH}" in
- arm*|i386|m68k|ns32k|sh3*|sparc|vax)
- eval $set_cc_for_build
- if echo __ELF__ | $CC_FOR_BUILD -E - 2>/dev/null \
- | grep __ELF__ >/dev/null
- then
- # Once all utilities can be ECOFF (netbsdecoff) or a.out (netbsdaout).
- # Return netbsd for either. FIX?
- os=netbsd
- else
- os=netbsdelf
- fi
- ;;
- *)
- os=netbsd
- ;;
- esac
- # The OS release
- # Debian GNU/NetBSD machines have a different userland, and
- # thus, need a distinct triplet. However, they do not need
- # kernel version information, so it can be replaced with a
- # suitable tag, in the style of linux-gnu.
- case "${UNAME_VERSION}" in
- Debian*)
- release='-gnu'
- ;;
- *)
- release=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-_].*/\./'`
- ;;
- esac
- # Since CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-KERNEL-OPERATING_SYSTEM:
- # contains redundant information, the shorter form:
- # CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-OPERATING_SYSTEM is used.
- echo "${machine}-${os}${release}"
- exit 0 ;;
- amd64:OpenBSD:*:*)
- echo x86_64-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- amiga:OpenBSD:*:*)
- echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- cats:OpenBSD:*:*)
- echo arm-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- hp300:OpenBSD:*:*)
- echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- luna88k:OpenBSD:*:*)
- echo m88k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- mac68k:OpenBSD:*:*)
- echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- macppc:OpenBSD:*:*)
- echo powerpc-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- mvme68k:OpenBSD:*:*)
- echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- mvme88k:OpenBSD:*:*)
- echo m88k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- mvmeppc:OpenBSD:*:*)
- echo powerpc-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- sgi:OpenBSD:*:*)
- echo mips64-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- sun3:OpenBSD:*:*)
- echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- *:OpenBSD:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- *:ekkoBSD:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-ekkobsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- macppc:MirBSD:*:*)
- echo powerppc-unknown-mirbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- *:MirBSD:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-mirbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- alpha:OSF1:*:*)
- case $UNAME_RELEASE in
- *4.0)
- UNAME_RELEASE=`/usr/sbin/sizer -v | awk '{print $3}'`
- ;;
- *5.*)
- UNAME_RELEASE=`/usr/sbin/sizer -v | awk '{print $4}'`
- ;;
- esac
- # According to Compaq, /usr/sbin/psrinfo has been available on
- # OSF/1 and Tru64 systems produced since 1995. I hope that
- # covers most systems running today. This code pipes the CPU
- # types through head -n 1, so we only detect the type of CPU 0.
- ALPHA_CPU_TYPE=`/usr/sbin/psrinfo -v | sed -n -e 's/^ The alpha \(.*\) processor.*$/\1/p' | head -n 1`
- case "$ALPHA_CPU_TYPE" in
- "EV4 (21064)")
- UNAME_MACHINE="alpha" ;;
- "EV4.5 (21064)")
- UNAME_MACHINE="alpha" ;;
- "LCA4 (21066/21068)")
- UNAME_MACHINE="alpha" ;;
- "EV5 (21164)")
- UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev5" ;;
- "EV5.6 (21164A)")
- UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev56" ;;
- "EV5.6 (21164PC)")
- UNAME_MACHINE="alphapca56" ;;
- "EV5.7 (21164PC)")
- UNAME_MACHINE="alphapca57" ;;
- "EV6 (21264)")
- UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev6" ;;
- "EV6.7 (21264A)")
- UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev67" ;;
- "EV6.8CB (21264C)")
- UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev68" ;;
- "EV6.8AL (21264B)")
- UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev68" ;;
- "EV6.8CX (21264D)")
- UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev68" ;;
- "EV6.9A (21264/EV69A)")
- UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev69" ;;
- "EV7 (21364)")
- UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev7" ;;
- "EV7.9 (21364A)")
- UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev79" ;;
- esac
- # A Pn.n version is a patched version.
- # A Vn.n version is a released version.
- # A Tn.n version is a released field test version.
- # A Xn.n version is an unreleased experimental baselevel.
- # 1.2 uses "1.2" for uname -r.
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-dec-osf`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/^[PVTX]//' | tr 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ' 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz'`
- exit 0 ;;
- Alpha\ *:Windows_NT*:*)
- # How do we know it's Interix rather than the generic POSIX subsystem?
- # Should we change UNAME_MACHINE based on the output of uname instead
- # of the specific Alpha model?
- echo alpha-pc-interix
- exit 0 ;;
- 21064:Windows_NT:50:3)
- echo alpha-dec-winnt3.5
- exit 0 ;;
- Amiga*:UNIX_System_V:4.0:*)
- echo m68k-unknown-sysv4
- exit 0;;
- *:[Aa]miga[Oo][Ss]:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-amigaos
- exit 0 ;;
- *:[Mm]orph[Oo][Ss]:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-morphos
- exit 0 ;;
- *:OS/390:*:*)
- echo i370-ibm-openedition
- exit 0 ;;
- *:OS400:*:*)
- echo powerpc-ibm-os400
- exit 0 ;;
- arm:RISC*:1.[012]*:*|arm:riscix:1.[012]*:*)
- echo arm-acorn-riscix${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0;;
- SR2?01:HI-UX/MPP:*:* | SR8000:HI-UX/MPP:*:*)
- echo hppa1.1-hitachi-hiuxmpp
- exit 0;;
- Pyramid*:OSx*:*:* | MIS*:OSx*:*:* | MIS*:SMP_DC-OSx*:*:*)
- # akee@wpdis03.wpafb.af.mil (Earle F. Ake) contributed MIS and NILE.
- if test "`(/bin/universe) 2>/dev/null`" = att ; then
- echo pyramid-pyramid-sysv3
- else
- echo pyramid-pyramid-bsd
- fi
- exit 0 ;;
- NILE*:*:*:dcosx)
- echo pyramid-pyramid-svr4
- exit 0 ;;
- DRS?6000:unix:4.0:6*)
- echo sparc-icl-nx6
- exit 0 ;;
- DRS?6000:UNIX_SV:4.2*:7*)
- case `/usr/bin/uname -p` in
- sparc) echo sparc-icl-nx7 && exit 0 ;;
- esac ;;
- sun4H:SunOS:5.*:*)
- echo sparc-hal-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
- exit 0 ;;
- sun4*:SunOS:5.*:* | tadpole*:SunOS:5.*:*)
- echo sparc-sun-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
- exit 0 ;;
- i86pc:SunOS:5.*:*)
- echo i386-pc-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
- exit 0 ;;
- sun4*:SunOS:6*:*)
- # According to config.sub, this is the proper way to canonicalize
- # SunOS6. Hard to guess exactly what SunOS6 will be like, but
- # it's likely to be more like Solaris than SunOS4.
- echo sparc-sun-solaris3`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
- exit 0 ;;
- sun4*:SunOS:*:*)
- case "`/usr/bin/arch -k`" in
- Series*|S4*)
- UNAME_RELEASE=`uname -v`
- ;;
- esac
- # Japanese Language versions have a version number like `4.1.3-JL'.
- echo sparc-sun-sunos`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/-/_/'`
- exit 0 ;;
- sun3*:SunOS:*:*)
- echo m68k-sun-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- sun*:*:4.2BSD:*)
- UNAME_RELEASE=`(sed 1q /etc/motd | awk '{print substr($5,1,3)}') 2>/dev/null`
- test "x${UNAME_RELEASE}" = "x" && UNAME_RELEASE=3
- case "`/bin/arch`" in
- sun3)
- echo m68k-sun-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE}
- ;;
- sun4)
- echo sparc-sun-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE}
- ;;
- esac
- exit 0 ;;
- aushp:SunOS:*:*)
- echo sparc-auspex-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- # The situation for MiNT is a little confusing. The machine name
- # can be virtually everything (everything which is not
- # "atarist" or "atariste" at least should have a processor
- # > m68000). The system name ranges from "MiNT" over "FreeMiNT"
- # to the lowercase version "mint" (or "freemint"). Finally
- # the system name "TOS" denotes a system which is actually not
- # MiNT. But MiNT is downward compatible to TOS, so this should
- # be no problem.
- atarist[e]:*MiNT:*:* | atarist[e]:*mint:*:* | atarist[e]:*TOS:*:*)
- echo m68k-atari-mint${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- atari*:*MiNT:*:* | atari*:*mint:*:* | atarist[e]:*TOS:*:*)
- echo m68k-atari-mint${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- *falcon*:*MiNT:*:* | *falcon*:*mint:*:* | *falcon*:*TOS:*:*)
- echo m68k-atari-mint${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- milan*:*MiNT:*:* | milan*:*mint:*:* | *milan*:*TOS:*:*)
- echo m68k-milan-mint${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- hades*:*MiNT:*:* | hades*:*mint:*:* | *hades*:*TOS:*:*)
- echo m68k-hades-mint${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- *:*MiNT:*:* | *:*mint:*:* | *:*TOS:*:*)
- echo m68k-unknown-mint${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- m68k:machten:*:*)
- echo m68k-apple-machten${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- powerpc:machten:*:*)
- echo powerpc-apple-machten${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- RISC*:Mach:*:*)
- echo mips-dec-mach_bsd4.3
- exit 0 ;;
- RISC*:ULTRIX:*:*)
- echo mips-dec-ultrix${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- VAX*:ULTRIX*:*:*)
- echo vax-dec-ultrix${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- 2020:CLIX:*:* | 2430:CLIX:*:*)
- echo clipper-intergraph-clix${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- mips:*:*:UMIPS | mips:*:*:RISCos)
- eval $set_cc_for_build
- sed 's/^ //' << EOF >$dummy.c
-#ifdef __cplusplus
-#include <stdio.h> /* for printf() prototype */
- int main (int argc, char *argv[]) {
-#else
- int main (argc, argv) int argc; char *argv[]; {
-#endif
- #if defined (host_mips) && defined (MIPSEB)
- #if defined (SYSTYPE_SYSV)
- printf ("mips-mips-riscos%ssysv\n", argv[1]); exit (0);
- #endif
- #if defined (SYSTYPE_SVR4)
- printf ("mips-mips-riscos%ssvr4\n", argv[1]); exit (0);
- #endif
- #if defined (SYSTYPE_BSD43) || defined(SYSTYPE_BSD)
- printf ("mips-mips-riscos%sbsd\n", argv[1]); exit (0);
- #endif
- #endif
- exit (-1);
- }
-EOF
- $CC_FOR_BUILD -o $dummy $dummy.c \
- && $dummy `echo "${UNAME_RELEASE}" | sed -n 's/\([0-9]*\).*/\1/p'` \
- && exit 0
- echo mips-mips-riscos${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- Motorola:PowerMAX_OS:*:*)
- echo powerpc-motorola-powermax
- exit 0 ;;
- Motorola:*:4.3:PL8-*)
- echo powerpc-harris-powermax
- exit 0 ;;
- Night_Hawk:*:*:PowerMAX_OS | Synergy:PowerMAX_OS:*:*)
- echo powerpc-harris-powermax
- exit 0 ;;
- Night_Hawk:Power_UNIX:*:*)
- echo powerpc-harris-powerunix
- exit 0 ;;
- m88k:CX/UX:7*:*)
- echo m88k-harris-cxux7
- exit 0 ;;
- m88k:*:4*:R4*)
- echo m88k-motorola-sysv4
- exit 0 ;;
- m88k:*:3*:R3*)
- echo m88k-motorola-sysv3
- exit 0 ;;
- AViiON:dgux:*:*)
- # DG/UX returns AViiON for all architectures
- UNAME_PROCESSOR=`/usr/bin/uname -p`
- if [ $UNAME_PROCESSOR = mc88100 ] || [ $UNAME_PROCESSOR = mc88110 ]
- then
- if [ ${TARGET_BINARY_INTERFACE}x = m88kdguxelfx ] || \
- [ ${TARGET_BINARY_INTERFACE}x = x ]
- then
- echo m88k-dg-dgux${UNAME_RELEASE}
- else
- echo m88k-dg-dguxbcs${UNAME_RELEASE}
- fi
- else
- echo i586-dg-dgux${UNAME_RELEASE}
- fi
- exit 0 ;;
- M88*:DolphinOS:*:*) # DolphinOS (SVR3)
- echo m88k-dolphin-sysv3
- exit 0 ;;
- M88*:*:R3*:*)
- # Delta 88k system running SVR3
- echo m88k-motorola-sysv3
- exit 0 ;;
- XD88*:*:*:*) # Tektronix XD88 system running UTekV (SVR3)
- echo m88k-tektronix-sysv3
- exit 0 ;;
- Tek43[0-9][0-9]:UTek:*:*) # Tektronix 4300 system running UTek (BSD)
- echo m68k-tektronix-bsd
- exit 0 ;;
- *:IRIX*:*:*)
- echo mips-sgi-irix`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/-/_/g'`
- exit 0 ;;
- ????????:AIX?:[12].1:2) # AIX 2.2.1 or AIX 2.1.1 is RT/PC AIX.
- echo romp-ibm-aix # uname -m gives an 8 hex-code CPU id
- exit 0 ;; # Note that: echo "'`uname -s`'" gives 'AIX '
- i*86:AIX:*:*)
- echo i386-ibm-aix
- exit 0 ;;
- ia64:AIX:*:*)
- if [ -x /usr/bin/oslevel ] ; then
- IBM_REV=`/usr/bin/oslevel`
- else
- IBM_REV=${UNAME_VERSION}.${UNAME_RELEASE}
- fi
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-ibm-aix${IBM_REV}
- exit 0 ;;
- *:AIX:2:3)
- if grep bos325 /usr/include/stdio.h >/dev/null 2>&1; then
- eval $set_cc_for_build
- sed 's/^ //' << EOF >$dummy.c
- #include <sys/systemcfg.h>
-
- main()
- {
- if (!__power_pc())
- exit(1);
- puts("powerpc-ibm-aix3.2.5");
- exit(0);
- }
-EOF
- $CC_FOR_BUILD -o $dummy $dummy.c && $dummy && exit 0
- echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2.5
- elif grep bos324 /usr/include/stdio.h >/dev/null 2>&1; then
- echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2.4
- else
- echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2
- fi
- exit 0 ;;
- *:AIX:*:[45])
- IBM_CPU_ID=`/usr/sbin/lsdev -C -c processor -S available | sed 1q | awk '{ print $1 }'`
- if /usr/sbin/lsattr -El ${IBM_CPU_ID} | grep ' POWER' >/dev/null 2>&1; then
- IBM_ARCH=rs6000
- else
- IBM_ARCH=powerpc
- fi
- if [ -x /usr/bin/oslevel ] ; then
- IBM_REV=`/usr/bin/oslevel`
- else
- IBM_REV=${UNAME_VERSION}.${UNAME_RELEASE}
- fi
- echo ${IBM_ARCH}-ibm-aix${IBM_REV}
- exit 0 ;;
- *:AIX:*:*)
- echo rs6000-ibm-aix
- exit 0 ;;
- ibmrt:4.4BSD:*|romp-ibm:BSD:*)
- echo romp-ibm-bsd4.4
- exit 0 ;;
- ibmrt:*BSD:*|romp-ibm:BSD:*) # covers RT/PC BSD and
- echo romp-ibm-bsd${UNAME_RELEASE} # 4.3 with uname added to
- exit 0 ;; # report: romp-ibm BSD 4.3
- *:BOSX:*:*)
- echo rs6000-bull-bosx
- exit 0 ;;
- DPX/2?00:B.O.S.:*:*)
- echo m68k-bull-sysv3
- exit 0 ;;
- 9000/[34]??:4.3bsd:1.*:*)
- echo m68k-hp-bsd
- exit 0 ;;
- hp300:4.4BSD:*:* | 9000/[34]??:4.3bsd:2.*:*)
- echo m68k-hp-bsd4.4
- exit 0 ;;
- 9000/[34678]??:HP-UX:*:*)
- HPUX_REV=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*.[0B]*//'`
- case "${UNAME_MACHINE}" in
- 9000/31? ) HP_ARCH=m68000 ;;
- 9000/[34]?? ) HP_ARCH=m68k ;;
- 9000/[678][0-9][0-9])
- if [ -x /usr/bin/getconf ]; then
- sc_cpu_version=`/usr/bin/getconf SC_CPU_VERSION 2>/dev/null`
- sc_kernel_bits=`/usr/bin/getconf SC_KERNEL_BITS 2>/dev/null`
- case "${sc_cpu_version}" in
- 523) HP_ARCH="hppa1.0" ;; # CPU_PA_RISC1_0
- 528) HP_ARCH="hppa1.1" ;; # CPU_PA_RISC1_1
- 532) # CPU_PA_RISC2_0
- case "${sc_kernel_bits}" in
- 32) HP_ARCH="hppa2.0n" ;;
- 64) HP_ARCH="hppa2.0w" ;;
- '') HP_ARCH="hppa2.0" ;; # HP-UX 10.20
- esac ;;
- esac
- fi
- if [ "${HP_ARCH}" = "" ]; then
- eval $set_cc_for_build
- sed 's/^ //' << EOF >$dummy.c
-
- #define _HPUX_SOURCE
- #include <stdlib.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
-
- int main ()
- {
- #if defined(_SC_KERNEL_BITS)
- long bits = sysconf(_SC_KERNEL_BITS);
- #endif
- long cpu = sysconf (_SC_CPU_VERSION);
-
- switch (cpu)
- {
- case CPU_PA_RISC1_0: puts ("hppa1.0"); break;
- case CPU_PA_RISC1_1: puts ("hppa1.1"); break;
- case CPU_PA_RISC2_0:
- #if defined(_SC_KERNEL_BITS)
- switch (bits)
- {
- case 64: puts ("hppa2.0w"); break;
- case 32: puts ("hppa2.0n"); break;
- default: puts ("hppa2.0"); break;
- } break;
- #else /* !defined(_SC_KERNEL_BITS) */
- puts ("hppa2.0"); break;
- #endif
- default: puts ("hppa1.0"); break;
- }
- exit (0);
- }
-EOF
- (CCOPTS= $CC_FOR_BUILD -o $dummy $dummy.c 2>/dev/null) && HP_ARCH=`$dummy`
- test -z "$HP_ARCH" && HP_ARCH=hppa
- fi ;;
- esac
- if [ ${HP_ARCH} = "hppa2.0w" ]
- then
- # avoid double evaluation of $set_cc_for_build
- test -n "$CC_FOR_BUILD" || eval $set_cc_for_build
- if echo __LP64__ | (CCOPTS= $CC_FOR_BUILD -E -) | grep __LP64__ >/dev/null
- then
- HP_ARCH="hppa2.0w"
- else
- HP_ARCH="hppa64"
- fi
- fi
- echo ${HP_ARCH}-hp-hpux${HPUX_REV}
- exit 0 ;;
- ia64:HP-UX:*:*)
- HPUX_REV=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*.[0B]*//'`
- echo ia64-hp-hpux${HPUX_REV}
- exit 0 ;;
- 3050*:HI-UX:*:*)
- eval $set_cc_for_build
- sed 's/^ //' << EOF >$dummy.c
- #include <unistd.h>
- int
- main ()
- {
- long cpu = sysconf (_SC_CPU_VERSION);
- /* The order matters, because CPU_IS_HP_MC68K erroneously returns
- true for CPU_PA_RISC1_0. CPU_IS_PA_RISC returns correct
- results, however. */
- if (CPU_IS_PA_RISC (cpu))
- {
- switch (cpu)
- {
- case CPU_PA_RISC1_0: puts ("hppa1.0-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break;
- case CPU_PA_RISC1_1: puts ("hppa1.1-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break;
- case CPU_PA_RISC2_0: puts ("hppa2.0-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break;
- default: puts ("hppa-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break;
- }
- }
- else if (CPU_IS_HP_MC68K (cpu))
- puts ("m68k-hitachi-hiuxwe2");
- else puts ("unknown-hitachi-hiuxwe2");
- exit (0);
- }
-EOF
- $CC_FOR_BUILD -o $dummy $dummy.c && $dummy && exit 0
- echo unknown-hitachi-hiuxwe2
- exit 0 ;;
- 9000/7??:4.3bsd:*:* | 9000/8?[79]:4.3bsd:*:* )
- echo hppa1.1-hp-bsd
- exit 0 ;;
- 9000/8??:4.3bsd:*:*)
- echo hppa1.0-hp-bsd
- exit 0 ;;
- *9??*:MPE/iX:*:* | *3000*:MPE/iX:*:*)
- echo hppa1.0-hp-mpeix
- exit 0 ;;
- hp7??:OSF1:*:* | hp8?[79]:OSF1:*:* )
- echo hppa1.1-hp-osf
- exit 0 ;;
- hp8??:OSF1:*:*)
- echo hppa1.0-hp-osf
- exit 0 ;;
- i*86:OSF1:*:*)
- if [ -x /usr/sbin/sysversion ] ; then
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-osf1mk
- else
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-osf1
- fi
- exit 0 ;;
- parisc*:Lites*:*:*)
- echo hppa1.1-hp-lites
- exit 0 ;;
- C1*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C1*:*)
- echo c1-convex-bsd
- exit 0 ;;
- C2*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C2*:*)
- if getsysinfo -f scalar_acc
- then echo c32-convex-bsd
- else echo c2-convex-bsd
- fi
- exit 0 ;;
- C34*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C34*:*)
- echo c34-convex-bsd
- exit 0 ;;
- C38*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C38*:*)
- echo c38-convex-bsd
- exit 0 ;;
- C4*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C4*:*)
- echo c4-convex-bsd
- exit 0 ;;
- CRAY*Y-MP:*:*:*)
- echo ymp-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$/.X/'
- exit 0 ;;
- CRAY*[A-Z]90:*:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE} \
- | sed -e 's/CRAY.*\([A-Z]90\)/\1/' \
- -e y/ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ/abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz/ \
- -e 's/\.[^.]*$/.X/'
- exit 0 ;;
- CRAY*TS:*:*:*)
- echo t90-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$/.X/'
- exit 0 ;;
- CRAY*T3E:*:*:*)
- echo alphaev5-cray-unicosmk${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$/.X/'
- exit 0 ;;
- CRAY*SV1:*:*:*)
- echo sv1-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$/.X/'
- exit 0 ;;
- *:UNICOS/mp:*:*)
- echo craynv-cray-unicosmp${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$/.X/'
- exit 0 ;;
- F30[01]:UNIX_System_V:*:* | F700:UNIX_System_V:*:*)
- FUJITSU_PROC=`uname -m | tr 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ' 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz'`
- FUJITSU_SYS=`uname -p | tr 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ' 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz' | sed -e 's/\///'`
- FUJITSU_REL=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/ /_/'`
- echo "${FUJITSU_PROC}-fujitsu-${FUJITSU_SYS}${FUJITSU_REL}"
- exit 0 ;;
- 5000:UNIX_System_V:4.*:*)
- FUJITSU_SYS=`uname -p | tr 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ' 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz' | sed -e 's/\///'`
- FUJITSU_REL=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE} | tr 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ' 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz' | sed -e 's/ /_/'`
- echo "sparc-fujitsu-${FUJITSU_SYS}${FUJITSU_REL}"
- exit 0 ;;
- i*86:BSD/386:*:* | i*86:BSD/OS:*:* | *:Ascend\ Embedded/OS:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-bsdi${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- sparc*:BSD/OS:*:*)
- echo sparc-unknown-bsdi${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- *:BSD/OS:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-bsdi${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- *:FreeBSD:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-freebsd`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-(].*//'`
- exit 0 ;;
- i*:CYGWIN*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-cygwin
- exit 0 ;;
- i*:MINGW*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-mingw32
- exit 0 ;;
- i*:PW*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-pw32
- exit 0 ;;
- x86:Interix*:[34]*)
- echo i586-pc-interix${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/\..*//'
- exit 0 ;;
- [345]86:Windows_95:* | [345]86:Windows_98:* | [345]86:Windows_NT:*)
- echo i${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-mks
- exit 0 ;;
- i*:Windows_NT*:* | Pentium*:Windows_NT*:*)
- # How do we know it's Interix rather than the generic POSIX subsystem?
- # It also conflicts with pre-2.0 versions of AT&T UWIN. Should we
- # UNAME_MACHINE based on the output of uname instead of i386?
- echo i586-pc-interix
- exit 0 ;;
- i*:UWIN*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-uwin
- exit 0 ;;
- p*:CYGWIN*:*)
- echo powerpcle-unknown-cygwin
- exit 0 ;;
- prep*:SunOS:5.*:*)
- echo powerpcle-unknown-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
- exit 0 ;;
- *:GNU:*:*)
- # the GNU system
- echo `echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}|sed -e 's,[-/].*$,,'`-unknown-gnu`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's,/.*$,,'`
- exit 0 ;;
- *:GNU/*:*:*)
- # other systems with GNU libc and userland
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-`echo ${UNAME_SYSTEM} | sed 's,^[^/]*/,,' | tr '[A-Z]' '[a-z]'``echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-(].*//'`-gnu
- exit 0 ;;
- i*86:Minix:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-minix
- exit 0 ;;
- arm*:Linux:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu
- exit 0 ;;
- cris:Linux:*:*)
- echo cris-axis-linux-gnu
- exit 0 ;;
- crisv32:Linux:*:*)
- echo crisv32-axis-linux-gnu
- exit 0 ;;
- frv:Linux:*:*)
- echo frv-unknown-linux-gnu
- exit 0 ;;
- ia64:Linux:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu
- exit 0 ;;
- m32r*:Linux:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu
- exit 0 ;;
- m68*:Linux:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu
- exit 0 ;;
- mips:Linux:*:*)
- eval $set_cc_for_build
- sed 's/^ //' << EOF >$dummy.c
- #undef CPU
- #undef mips
- #undef mipsel
- #if defined(__MIPSEL__) || defined(__MIPSEL) || defined(_MIPSEL) || defined(MIPSEL)
- CPU=mipsel
- #else
- #if defined(__MIPSEB__) || defined(__MIPSEB) || defined(_MIPSEB) || defined(MIPSEB)
- CPU=mips
- #else
- CPU=
- #endif
- #endif
-EOF
- eval `$CC_FOR_BUILD -E $dummy.c 2>/dev/null | grep ^CPU=`
- test x"${CPU}" != x && echo "${CPU}-unknown-linux-gnu" && exit 0
- ;;
- mips64:Linux:*:*)
- eval $set_cc_for_build
- sed 's/^ //' << EOF >$dummy.c
- #undef CPU
- #undef mips64
- #undef mips64el
- #if defined(__MIPSEL__) || defined(__MIPSEL) || defined(_MIPSEL) || defined(MIPSEL)
- CPU=mips64el
- #else
- #if defined(__MIPSEB__) || defined(__MIPSEB) || defined(_MIPSEB) || defined(MIPSEB)
- CPU=mips64
- #else
- CPU=
- #endif
- #endif
-EOF
- eval `$CC_FOR_BUILD -E $dummy.c 2>/dev/null | grep ^CPU=`
- test x"${CPU}" != x && echo "${CPU}-unknown-linux-gnu" && exit 0
- ;;
- ppc:Linux:*:*)
- echo powerpc-unknown-linux-gnu
- exit 0 ;;
- ppc64:Linux:*:*)
- echo powerpc64-unknown-linux-gnu
- exit 0 ;;
- alpha:Linux:*:*)
- case `sed -n '/^cpu model/s/^.*: \(.*\)/\1/p' < /proc/cpuinfo` in
- EV5) UNAME_MACHINE=alphaev5 ;;
- EV56) UNAME_MACHINE=alphaev56 ;;
- PCA56) UNAME_MACHINE=alphapca56 ;;
- PCA57) UNAME_MACHINE=alphapca56 ;;
- EV6) UNAME_MACHINE=alphaev6 ;;
- EV67) UNAME_MACHINE=alphaev67 ;;
- EV68*) UNAME_MACHINE=alphaev68 ;;
- esac
- objdump --private-headers /bin/sh | grep ld.so.1 >/dev/null
- if test "$?" = 0 ; then LIBC="libc1" ; else LIBC="" ; fi
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu${LIBC}
- exit 0 ;;
- parisc:Linux:*:* | hppa:Linux:*:*)
- # Look for CPU level
- case `grep '^cpu[^a-z]*:' /proc/cpuinfo 2>/dev/null | cut -d' ' -f2` in
- PA7*) echo hppa1.1-unknown-linux-gnu ;;
- PA8*) echo hppa2.0-unknown-linux-gnu ;;
- *) echo hppa-unknown-linux-gnu ;;
- esac
- exit 0 ;;
- parisc64:Linux:*:* | hppa64:Linux:*:*)
- echo hppa64-unknown-linux-gnu
- exit 0 ;;
- s390:Linux:*:* | s390x:Linux:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-ibm-linux
- exit 0 ;;
- sh64*:Linux:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu
- exit 0 ;;
- sh*:Linux:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu
- exit 0 ;;
- sparc:Linux:*:* | sparc64:Linux:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu
- exit 0 ;;
- x86_64:Linux:*:*)
- echo x86_64-unknown-linux-gnu
- exit 0 ;;
- i*86:Linux:*:*)
- # The BFD linker knows what the default object file format is, so
- # first see if it will tell us. cd to the root directory to prevent
- # problems with other programs or directories called `ld' in the path.
- # Set LC_ALL=C to ensure ld outputs messages in English.
- ld_supported_targets=`cd /; LC_ALL=C ld --help 2>&1 \
- | sed -ne '/supported targets:/!d
- s/[ ][ ]*/ /g
- s/.*supported targets: *//
- s/ .*//
- p'`
- case "$ld_supported_targets" in
- elf32-i386)
- TENTATIVE="${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnu"
- ;;
- a.out-i386-linux)
- echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnuaout"
- exit 0 ;;
- coff-i386)
- echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnucoff"
- exit 0 ;;
- "")
- # Either a pre-BFD a.out linker (linux-gnuoldld) or
- # one that does not give us useful --help.
- echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnuoldld"
- exit 0 ;;
- esac
- # Determine whether the default compiler is a.out or elf
- eval $set_cc_for_build
- sed 's/^ //' << EOF >$dummy.c
- #include <features.h>
- #ifdef __ELF__
- # ifdef __GLIBC__
- # if __GLIBC__ >= 2
- LIBC=gnu
- # else
- LIBC=gnulibc1
- # endif
- # else
- LIBC=gnulibc1
- # endif
- #else
- #ifdef __INTEL_COMPILER
- LIBC=gnu
- #else
- LIBC=gnuaout
- #endif
- #endif
- #ifdef __dietlibc__
- LIBC=dietlibc
- #endif
-EOF
- eval `$CC_FOR_BUILD -E $dummy.c 2>/dev/null | grep ^LIBC=`
- test x"${LIBC}" != x && echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-${LIBC}" && exit 0
- test x"${TENTATIVE}" != x && echo "${TENTATIVE}" && exit 0
- ;;
- i*86:DYNIX/ptx:4*:*)
- # ptx 4.0 does uname -s correctly, with DYNIX/ptx in there.
- # earlier versions are messed up and put the nodename in both
- # sysname and nodename.
- echo i386-sequent-sysv4
- exit 0 ;;
- i*86:UNIX_SV:4.2MP:2.*)
- # Unixware is an offshoot of SVR4, but it has its own version
- # number series starting with 2...
- # I am not positive that other SVR4 systems won't match this,
- # I just have to hope. -- rms.
- # Use sysv4.2uw... so that sysv4* matches it.
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sysv4.2uw${UNAME_VERSION}
- exit 0 ;;
- i*86:OS/2:*:*)
- # If we were able to find `uname', then EMX Unix compatibility
- # is probably installed.
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-os2-emx
- exit 0 ;;
- i*86:XTS-300:*:STOP)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-stop
- exit 0 ;;
- i*86:atheos:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-atheos
- exit 0 ;;
- i*86:syllable:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-syllable
- exit 0 ;;
- i*86:LynxOS:2.*:* | i*86:LynxOS:3.[01]*:* | i*86:LynxOS:4.0*:*)
- echo i386-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- i*86:*DOS:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-msdosdjgpp
- exit 0 ;;
- i*86:*:4.*:* | i*86:SYSTEM_V:4.*:*)
- UNAME_REL=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed 's/\/MP$//'`
- if grep Novell /usr/include/link.h >/dev/null 2>/dev/null; then
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-univel-sysv${UNAME_REL}
- else
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sysv${UNAME_REL}
- fi
- exit 0 ;;
- i*86:*:5:[78]*)
- case `/bin/uname -X | grep "^Machine"` in
- *486*) UNAME_MACHINE=i486 ;;
- *Pentium) UNAME_MACHINE=i586 ;;
- *Pent*|*Celeron) UNAME_MACHINE=i686 ;;
- esac
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}${UNAME_SYSTEM}${UNAME_VERSION}
- exit 0 ;;
- i*86:*:3.2:*)
- if test -f /usr/options/cb.name; then
- UNAME_REL=`sed -n 's/.*Version //p' </usr/options/cb.name`
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-isc$UNAME_REL
- elif /bin/uname -X 2>/dev/null >/dev/null ; then
- UNAME_REL=`(/bin/uname -X|grep Release|sed -e 's/.*= //')`
- (/bin/uname -X|grep i80486 >/dev/null) && UNAME_MACHINE=i486
- (/bin/uname -X|grep '^Machine.*Pentium' >/dev/null) \
- && UNAME_MACHINE=i586
- (/bin/uname -X|grep '^Machine.*Pent *II' >/dev/null) \
- && UNAME_MACHINE=i686
- (/bin/uname -X|grep '^Machine.*Pentium Pro' >/dev/null) \
- && UNAME_MACHINE=i686
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sco$UNAME_REL
- else
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sysv32
- fi
- exit 0 ;;
- pc:*:*:*)
- # Left here for compatibility:
- # uname -m prints for DJGPP always 'pc', but it prints nothing about
- # the processor, so we play safe by assuming i386.
- echo i386-pc-msdosdjgpp
- exit 0 ;;
- Intel:Mach:3*:*)
- echo i386-pc-mach3
- exit 0 ;;
- paragon:*:*:*)
- echo i860-intel-osf1
- exit 0 ;;
- i860:*:4.*:*) # i860-SVR4
- if grep Stardent /usr/include/sys/uadmin.h >/dev/null 2>&1 ; then
- echo i860-stardent-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} # Stardent Vistra i860-SVR4
- else # Add other i860-SVR4 vendors below as they are discovered.
- echo i860-unknown-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} # Unknown i860-SVR4
- fi
- exit 0 ;;
- mini*:CTIX:SYS*5:*)
- # "miniframe"
- echo m68010-convergent-sysv
- exit 0 ;;
- mc68k:UNIX:SYSTEM5:3.51m)
- echo m68k-convergent-sysv
- exit 0 ;;
- M680?0:D-NIX:5.3:*)
- echo m68k-diab-dnix
- exit 0 ;;
- M68*:*:R3V[5678]*:*)
- test -r /sysV68 && echo 'm68k-motorola-sysv' && exit 0 ;;
- 3[345]??:*:4.0:3.0 | 3[34]??A:*:4.0:3.0 | 3[34]??,*:*:4.0:3.0 | 3[34]??/*:*:4.0:3.0 | 4400:*:4.0:3.0 | 4850:*:4.0:3.0 | SKA40:*:4.0:3.0 | SDS2:*:4.0:3.0 | SHG2:*:4.0:3.0 | S7501*:*:4.0:3.0)
- OS_REL=''
- test -r /etc/.relid \
- && OS_REL=.`sed -n 's/[^ ]* [^ ]* \([0-9][0-9]\).*/\1/p' < /etc/.relid`
- /bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | grep 86 >/dev/null \
- && echo i486-ncr-sysv4.3${OS_REL} && exit 0
- /bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | /bin/grep entium >/dev/null \
- && echo i586-ncr-sysv4.3${OS_REL} && exit 0 ;;
- 3[34]??:*:4.0:* | 3[34]??,*:*:4.0:*)
- /bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | grep 86 >/dev/null \
- && echo i486-ncr-sysv4 && exit 0 ;;
- m68*:LynxOS:2.*:* | m68*:LynxOS:3.0*:*)
- echo m68k-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- mc68030:UNIX_System_V:4.*:*)
- echo m68k-atari-sysv4
- exit 0 ;;
- TSUNAMI:LynxOS:2.*:*)
- echo sparc-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- rs6000:LynxOS:2.*:*)
- echo rs6000-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- PowerPC:LynxOS:2.*:* | PowerPC:LynxOS:3.[01]*:* | PowerPC:LynxOS:4.0*:*)
- echo powerpc-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- SM[BE]S:UNIX_SV:*:*)
- echo mips-dde-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- RM*:ReliantUNIX-*:*:*)
- echo mips-sni-sysv4
- exit 0 ;;
- RM*:SINIX-*:*:*)
- echo mips-sni-sysv4
- exit 0 ;;
- *:SINIX-*:*:*)
- if uname -p 2>/dev/null >/dev/null ; then
- UNAME_MACHINE=`(uname -p) 2>/dev/null`
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-sni-sysv4
- else
- echo ns32k-sni-sysv
- fi
- exit 0 ;;
- PENTIUM:*:4.0*:*) # Unisys `ClearPath HMP IX 4000' SVR4/MP effort
- # says <Richard.M.Bartel@ccMail.Census.GOV>
- echo i586-unisys-sysv4
- exit 0 ;;
- *:UNIX_System_V:4*:FTX*)
- # From Gerald Hewes <hewes@openmarket.com>.
- # How about differentiating between stratus architectures? -djm
- echo hppa1.1-stratus-sysv4
- exit 0 ;;
- *:*:*:FTX*)
- # From seanf@swdc.stratus.com.
- echo i860-stratus-sysv4
- exit 0 ;;
- *:VOS:*:*)
- # From Paul.Green@stratus.com.
- echo hppa1.1-stratus-vos
- exit 0 ;;
- mc68*:A/UX:*:*)
- echo m68k-apple-aux${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- news*:NEWS-OS:6*:*)
- echo mips-sony-newsos6
- exit 0 ;;
- R[34]000:*System_V*:*:* | R4000:UNIX_SYSV:*:* | R*000:UNIX_SV:*:*)
- if [ -d /usr/nec ]; then
- echo mips-nec-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
- else
- echo mips-unknown-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
- fi
- exit 0 ;;
- BeBox:BeOS:*:*) # BeOS running on hardware made by Be, PPC only.
- echo powerpc-be-beos
- exit 0 ;;
- BeMac:BeOS:*:*) # BeOS running on Mac or Mac clone, PPC only.
- echo powerpc-apple-beos
- exit 0 ;;
- BePC:BeOS:*:*) # BeOS running on Intel PC compatible.
- echo i586-pc-beos
- exit 0 ;;
- SX-4:SUPER-UX:*:*)
- echo sx4-nec-superux${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- SX-5:SUPER-UX:*:*)
- echo sx5-nec-superux${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- SX-6:SUPER-UX:*:*)
- echo sx6-nec-superux${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- Power*:Rhapsody:*:*)
- echo powerpc-apple-rhapsody${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- *:Rhapsody:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-apple-rhapsody${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- *:Darwin:*:*)
- UNAME_PROCESSOR=`uname -p` || UNAME_PROCESSOR=unknown
- case $UNAME_PROCESSOR in
- *86) UNAME_PROCESSOR=i686 ;;
- unknown) UNAME_PROCESSOR=powerpc ;;
- esac
- echo ${UNAME_PROCESSOR}-apple-darwin${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- *:procnto*:*:* | *:QNX:[0123456789]*:*)
- UNAME_PROCESSOR=`uname -p`
- if test "$UNAME_PROCESSOR" = "x86"; then
- UNAME_PROCESSOR=i386
- UNAME_MACHINE=pc
- fi
- echo ${UNAME_PROCESSOR}-${UNAME_MACHINE}-nto-qnx${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- *:QNX:*:4*)
- echo i386-pc-qnx
- exit 0 ;;
- NSR-?:NONSTOP_KERNEL:*:*)
- echo nsr-tandem-nsk${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- *:NonStop-UX:*:*)
- echo mips-compaq-nonstopux
- exit 0 ;;
- BS2000:POSIX*:*:*)
- echo bs2000-siemens-sysv
- exit 0 ;;
- DS/*:UNIX_System_V:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-${UNAME_SYSTEM}-${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- *:Plan9:*:*)
- # "uname -m" is not consistent, so use $cputype instead. 386
- # is converted to i386 for consistency with other x86
- # operating systems.
- if test "$cputype" = "386"; then
- UNAME_MACHINE=i386
- else
- UNAME_MACHINE="$cputype"
- fi
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-plan9
- exit 0 ;;
- *:TOPS-10:*:*)
- echo pdp10-unknown-tops10
- exit 0 ;;
- *:TENEX:*:*)
- echo pdp10-unknown-tenex
- exit 0 ;;
- KS10:TOPS-20:*:* | KL10:TOPS-20:*:* | TYPE4:TOPS-20:*:*)
- echo pdp10-dec-tops20
- exit 0 ;;
- XKL-1:TOPS-20:*:* | TYPE5:TOPS-20:*:*)
- echo pdp10-xkl-tops20
- exit 0 ;;
- *:TOPS-20:*:*)
- echo pdp10-unknown-tops20
- exit 0 ;;
- *:ITS:*:*)
- echo pdp10-unknown-its
- exit 0 ;;
- SEI:*:*:SEIUX)
- echo mips-sei-seiux${UNAME_RELEASE}
- exit 0 ;;
- *:DragonFly:*:*)
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-dragonfly`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-(].*//'`
- exit 0 ;;
- *:*VMS:*:*)
- UNAME_MACHINE=`(uname -p) 2>/dev/null`
- case "${UNAME_MACHINE}" in
- A*) echo alpha-dec-vms && exit 0 ;;
- I*) echo ia64-dec-vms && exit 0 ;;
- V*) echo vax-dec-vms && exit 0 ;;
- esac
-esac
-
-#echo '(No uname command or uname output not recognized.)' 1>&2
-#echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}:${UNAME_SYSTEM}:${UNAME_RELEASE}:${UNAME_VERSION}" 1>&2
-
-eval $set_cc_for_build
-cat >$dummy.c <<EOF
-#ifdef _SEQUENT_
-# include <sys/types.h>
-# include <sys/utsname.h>
-#endif
-main ()
-{
-#if defined (sony)
-#if defined (MIPSEB)
- /* BFD wants "bsd" instead of "newsos". Perhaps BFD should be changed,
- I don't know.... */
- printf ("mips-sony-bsd\n"); exit (0);
-#else
-#include <sys/param.h>
- printf ("m68k-sony-newsos%s\n",
-#ifdef NEWSOS4
- "4"
-#else
- ""
-#endif
- ); exit (0);
-#endif
-#endif
-
-#if defined (__arm) && defined (__acorn) && defined (__unix)
- printf ("arm-acorn-riscix"); exit (0);
-#endif
-
-#if defined (hp300) && !defined (hpux)
- printf ("m68k-hp-bsd\n"); exit (0);
-#endif
-
-#if defined (NeXT)
-#if !defined (__ARCHITECTURE__)
-#define __ARCHITECTURE__ "m68k"
-#endif
- int version;
- version=`(hostinfo | sed -n 's/.*NeXT Mach \([0-9]*\).*/\1/p') 2>/dev/null`;
- if (version < 4)
- printf ("%s-next-nextstep%d\n", __ARCHITECTURE__, version);
- else
- printf ("%s-next-openstep%d\n", __ARCHITECTURE__, version);
- exit (0);
-#endif
-
-#if defined (MULTIMAX) || defined (n16)
-#if defined (UMAXV)
- printf ("ns32k-encore-sysv\n"); exit (0);
-#else
-#if defined (CMU)
- printf ("ns32k-encore-mach\n"); exit (0);
-#else
- printf ("ns32k-encore-bsd\n"); exit (0);
-#endif
-#endif
-#endif
-
-#if defined (__386BSD__)
- printf ("i386-pc-bsd\n"); exit (0);
-#endif
-
-#if defined (sequent)
-#if defined (i386)
- printf ("i386-sequent-dynix\n"); exit (0);
-#endif
-#if defined (ns32000)
- printf ("ns32k-sequent-dynix\n"); exit (0);
-#endif
-#endif
-
-#if defined (_SEQUENT_)
- struct utsname un;
-
- uname(&un);
-
- if (strncmp(un.version, "V2", 2) == 0) {
- printf ("i386-sequent-ptx2\n"); exit (0);
- }
- if (strncmp(un.version, "V1", 2) == 0) { /* XXX is V1 correct? */
- printf ("i386-sequent-ptx1\n"); exit (0);
- }
- printf ("i386-sequent-ptx\n"); exit (0);
-
-#endif
-
-#if defined (vax)
-# if !defined (ultrix)
-# include <sys/param.h>
-# if defined (BSD)
-# if BSD == 43
- printf ("vax-dec-bsd4.3\n"); exit (0);
-# else
-# if BSD == 199006
- printf ("vax-dec-bsd4.3reno\n"); exit (0);
-# else
- printf ("vax-dec-bsd\n"); exit (0);
-# endif
-# endif
-# else
- printf ("vax-dec-bsd\n"); exit (0);
-# endif
-# else
- printf ("vax-dec-ultrix\n"); exit (0);
-# endif
-#endif
-
-#if defined (alliant) && defined (i860)
- printf ("i860-alliant-bsd\n"); exit (0);
-#endif
-
- exit (1);
-}
-EOF
-
-$CC_FOR_BUILD -o $dummy $dummy.c 2>/dev/null && $dummy && exit 0
-
-# Apollos put the system type in the environment.
-
-test -d /usr/apollo && { echo ${ISP}-apollo-${SYSTYPE}; exit 0; }
-
-# Convex versions that predate uname can use getsysinfo(1)
-
-if [ -x /usr/convex/getsysinfo ]
-then
- case `getsysinfo -f cpu_type` in
- c1*)
- echo c1-convex-bsd
- exit 0 ;;
- c2*)
- if getsysinfo -f scalar_acc
- then echo c32-convex-bsd
- else echo c2-convex-bsd
- fi
- exit 0 ;;
- c34*)
- echo c34-convex-bsd
- exit 0 ;;
- c38*)
- echo c38-convex-bsd
- exit 0 ;;
- c4*)
- echo c4-convex-bsd
- exit 0 ;;
- esac
-fi
-
-cat >&2 <<EOF
-$0: unable to guess system type
-
-This script, last modified $timestamp, has failed to recognize
-the operating system you are using. It is advised that you
-download the most up to date version of the config scripts from
-
- ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/config/
-
-If the version you run ($0) is already up to date, please
-send the following data and any information you think might be
-pertinent to <config-patches@gnu.org> in order to provide the needed
-information to handle your system.
-
-config.guess timestamp = $timestamp
-
-uname -m = `(uname -m) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-uname -r = `(uname -r) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-uname -s = `(uname -s) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-uname -v = `(uname -v) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-
-/usr/bin/uname -p = `(/usr/bin/uname -p) 2>/dev/null`
-/bin/uname -X = `(/bin/uname -X) 2>/dev/null`
-
-hostinfo = `(hostinfo) 2>/dev/null`
-/bin/universe = `(/bin/universe) 2>/dev/null`
-/usr/bin/arch -k = `(/usr/bin/arch -k) 2>/dev/null`
-/bin/arch = `(/bin/arch) 2>/dev/null`
-/usr/bin/oslevel = `(/usr/bin/oslevel) 2>/dev/null`
-/usr/convex/getsysinfo = `(/usr/convex/getsysinfo) 2>/dev/null`
-
-UNAME_MACHINE = ${UNAME_MACHINE}
-UNAME_RELEASE = ${UNAME_RELEASE}
-UNAME_SYSTEM = ${UNAME_SYSTEM}
-UNAME_VERSION = ${UNAME_VERSION}
-EOF
-
-exit 1
-
-# Local variables:
-# eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
-# time-stamp-start: "timestamp='"
-# time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d"
-# time-stamp-end: "'"
-# End:
+++ /dev/null
-#! /bin/sh
-# Configuration validation subroutine script.
-# Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
-# 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-timestamp='2004-08-29'
-
-# This file is (in principle) common to ALL GNU software.
-# The presence of a machine in this file suggests that SOME GNU software
-# can handle that machine. It does not imply ALL GNU software can.
-#
-# This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
-# (at your option) any later version.
-#
-# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-# GNU General Public License for more details.
-#
-# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
-# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
-# Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
-
-# As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
-# distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
-# configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
-# the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.
-
-# Please send patches to <config-patches@gnu.org>. Submit a context
-# diff and a properly formatted ChangeLog entry.
-#
-# Configuration subroutine to validate and canonicalize a configuration type.
-# Supply the specified configuration type as an argument.
-# If it is invalid, we print an error message on stderr and exit with code 1.
-# Otherwise, we print the canonical config type on stdout and succeed.
-
-# This file is supposed to be the same for all GNU packages
-# and recognize all the CPU types, system types and aliases
-# that are meaningful with *any* GNU software.
-# Each package is responsible for reporting which valid configurations
-# it does not support. The user should be able to distinguish
-# a failure to support a valid configuration from a meaningless
-# configuration.
-
-# The goal of this file is to map all the various variations of a given
-# machine specification into a single specification in the form:
-# CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-OPERATING_SYSTEM
-# or in some cases, the newer four-part form:
-# CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-KERNEL-OPERATING_SYSTEM
-# It is wrong to echo any other type of specification.
-
-me=`echo "$0" | sed -e 's,.*/,,'`
-
-usage="\
-Usage: $0 [OPTION] CPU-MFR-OPSYS
- $0 [OPTION] ALIAS
-
-Canonicalize a configuration name.
-
-Operation modes:
- -h, --help print this help, then exit
- -t, --time-stamp print date of last modification, then exit
- -v, --version print version number, then exit
-
-Report bugs and patches to <config-patches@gnu.org>."
-
-version="\
-GNU config.sub ($timestamp)
-
-Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004
-Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE."
-
-help="
-Try \`$me --help' for more information."
-
-# Parse command line
-while test $# -gt 0 ; do
- case $1 in
- --time-stamp | --time* | -t )
- echo "$timestamp" ; exit 0 ;;
- --version | -v )
- echo "$version" ; exit 0 ;;
- --help | --h* | -h )
- echo "$usage"; exit 0 ;;
- -- ) # Stop option processing
- shift; break ;;
- - ) # Use stdin as input.
- break ;;
- -* )
- echo "$me: invalid option $1$help"
- exit 1 ;;
-
- *local*)
- # First pass through any local machine types.
- echo $1
- exit 0;;
-
- * )
- break ;;
- esac
-done
-
-case $# in
- 0) echo "$me: missing argument$help" >&2
- exit 1;;
- 1) ;;
- *) echo "$me: too many arguments$help" >&2
- exit 1;;
-esac
-
-# Separate what the user gave into CPU-COMPANY and OS or KERNEL-OS (if any).
-# Here we must recognize all the valid KERNEL-OS combinations.
-maybe_os=`echo $1 | sed 's/^\(.*\)-\([^-]*-[^-]*\)$/\2/'`
-case $maybe_os in
- nto-qnx* | linux-gnu* | linux-dietlibc | linux-uclibc* | uclinux-uclibc* | uclinux-gnu* | \
- kfreebsd*-gnu* | knetbsd*-gnu* | netbsd*-gnu* | storm-chaos* | os2-emx* | rtmk-nova*)
- os=-$maybe_os
- basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed 's/^\(.*\)-\([^-]*-[^-]*\)$/\1/'`
- ;;
- *)
- basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed 's/-[^-]*$//'`
- if [ $basic_machine != $1 ]
- then os=`echo $1 | sed 's/.*-/-/'`
- else os=; fi
- ;;
-esac
-
-### Let's recognize common machines as not being operating systems so
-### that things like config.sub decstation-3100 work. We also
-### recognize some manufacturers as not being operating systems, so we
-### can provide default operating systems below.
-case $os in
- -sun*os*)
- # Prevent following clause from handling this invalid input.
- ;;
- -dec* | -mips* | -sequent* | -encore* | -pc532* | -sgi* | -sony* | \
- -att* | -7300* | -3300* | -delta* | -motorola* | -sun[234]* | \
- -unicom* | -ibm* | -next | -hp | -isi* | -apollo | -altos* | \
- -convergent* | -ncr* | -news | -32* | -3600* | -3100* | -hitachi* |\
- -c[123]* | -convex* | -sun | -crds | -omron* | -dg | -ultra | -tti* | \
- -harris | -dolphin | -highlevel | -gould | -cbm | -ns | -masscomp | \
- -apple | -axis | -knuth | -cray)
- os=
- basic_machine=$1
- ;;
- -sim | -cisco | -oki | -wec | -winbond)
- os=
- basic_machine=$1
- ;;
- -scout)
- ;;
- -wrs)
- os=-vxworks
- basic_machine=$1
- ;;
- -chorusos*)
- os=-chorusos
- basic_machine=$1
- ;;
- -chorusrdb)
- os=-chorusrdb
- basic_machine=$1
- ;;
- -hiux*)
- os=-hiuxwe2
- ;;
- -sco5)
- os=-sco3.2v5
- basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
- ;;
- -sco4)
- os=-sco3.2v4
- basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
- ;;
- -sco3.2.[4-9]*)
- os=`echo $os | sed -e 's/sco3.2./sco3.2v/'`
- basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
- ;;
- -sco3.2v[4-9]*)
- # Don't forget version if it is 3.2v4 or newer.
- basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
- ;;
- -sco*)
- os=-sco3.2v2
- basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
- ;;
- -udk*)
- basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
- ;;
- -isc)
- os=-isc2.2
- basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
- ;;
- -clix*)
- basic_machine=clipper-intergraph
- ;;
- -isc*)
- basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
- ;;
- -lynx*)
- os=-lynxos
- ;;
- -ptx*)
- basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-sequent/'`
- ;;
- -windowsnt*)
- os=`echo $os | sed -e 's/windowsnt/winnt/'`
- ;;
- -psos*)
- os=-psos
- ;;
- -mint | -mint[0-9]*)
- basic_machine=m68k-atari
- os=-mint
- ;;
-esac
-
-# Decode aliases for certain CPU-COMPANY combinations.
-case $basic_machine in
- # Recognize the basic CPU types without company name.
- # Some are omitted here because they have special meanings below.
- 1750a | 580 \
- | a29k \
- | alpha | alphaev[4-8] | alphaev56 | alphaev6[78] | alphapca5[67] \
- | alpha64 | alpha64ev[4-8] | alpha64ev56 | alpha64ev6[78] | alpha64pca5[67] \
- | am33_2.0 \
- | arc | arm | arm[bl]e | arme[lb] | armv[2345] | armv[345][lb] | avr \
- | c4x | clipper \
- | d10v | d30v | dlx | dsp16xx \
- | fr30 | frv \
- | h8300 | h8500 | hppa | hppa1.[01] | hppa2.0 | hppa2.0[nw] | hppa64 \
- | i370 | i860 | i960 | ia64 \
- | ip2k | iq2000 \
- | m32r | m32rle | m68000 | m68k | m88k | mcore \
- | mips | mipsbe | mipseb | mipsel | mipsle \
- | mips16 \
- | mips64 | mips64el \
- | mips64vr | mips64vrel \
- | mips64orion | mips64orionel \
- | mips64vr4100 | mips64vr4100el \
- | mips64vr4300 | mips64vr4300el \
- | mips64vr5000 | mips64vr5000el \
- | mipsisa32 | mipsisa32el \
- | mipsisa32r2 | mipsisa32r2el \
- | mipsisa64 | mipsisa64el \
- | mipsisa64r2 | mipsisa64r2el \
- | mipsisa64sb1 | mipsisa64sb1el \
- | mipsisa64sr71k | mipsisa64sr71kel \
- | mipstx39 | mipstx39el \
- | mn10200 | mn10300 \
- | msp430 \
- | ns16k | ns32k \
- | openrisc | or32 \
- | pdp10 | pdp11 | pj | pjl \
- | powerpc | powerpc64 | powerpc64le | powerpcle | ppcbe \
- | pyramid \
- | sh | sh[1234] | sh[23]e | sh[34]eb | shbe | shle | sh[1234]le | sh3ele \
- | sh64 | sh64le \
- | sparc | sparc64 | sparc86x | sparclet | sparclite | sparcv8 | sparcv9 | sparcv9b \
- | strongarm \
- | tahoe | thumb | tic4x | tic80 | tron \
- | v850 | v850e \
- | we32k \
- | x86 | xscale | xstormy16 | xtensa \
- | z8k)
- basic_machine=$basic_machine-unknown
- ;;
- m6811 | m68hc11 | m6812 | m68hc12)
- # Motorola 68HC11/12.
- basic_machine=$basic_machine-unknown
- os=-none
- ;;
- m88110 | m680[12346]0 | m683?2 | m68360 | m5200 | v70 | w65 | z8k)
- ;;
-
- # We use `pc' rather than `unknown'
- # because (1) that's what they normally are, and
- # (2) the word "unknown" tends to confuse beginning users.
- i*86 | x86_64)
- basic_machine=$basic_machine-pc
- ;;
- # Object if more than one company name word.
- *-*-*)
- echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': machine \`$basic_machine\' not recognized 1>&2
- exit 1
- ;;
- # Recognize the basic CPU types with company name.
- 580-* \
- | a29k-* \
- | alpha-* | alphaev[4-8]-* | alphaev56-* | alphaev6[78]-* \
- | alpha64-* | alpha64ev[4-8]-* | alpha64ev56-* | alpha64ev6[78]-* \
- | alphapca5[67]-* | alpha64pca5[67]-* | arc-* \
- | arm-* | armbe-* | armle-* | armeb-* | armv*-* \
- | avr-* \
- | bs2000-* \
- | c[123]* | c30-* | [cjt]90-* | c4x-* | c54x-* | c55x-* | c6x-* \
- | clipper-* | craynv-* | cydra-* \
- | d10v-* | d30v-* | dlx-* \
- | elxsi-* \
- | f30[01]-* | f700-* | fr30-* | frv-* | fx80-* \
- | h8300-* | h8500-* \
- | hppa-* | hppa1.[01]-* | hppa2.0-* | hppa2.0[nw]-* | hppa64-* \
- | i*86-* | i860-* | i960-* | ia64-* \
- | ip2k-* | iq2000-* \
- | m32r-* | m32rle-* \
- | m68000-* | m680[012346]0-* | m68360-* | m683?2-* | m68k-* \
- | m88110-* | m88k-* | mcore-* \
- | mips-* | mipsbe-* | mipseb-* | mipsel-* | mipsle-* \
- | mips16-* \
- | mips64-* | mips64el-* \
- | mips64vr-* | mips64vrel-* \
- | mips64orion-* | mips64orionel-* \
- | mips64vr4100-* | mips64vr4100el-* \
- | mips64vr4300-* | mips64vr4300el-* \
- | mips64vr5000-* | mips64vr5000el-* \
- | mipsisa32-* | mipsisa32el-* \
- | mipsisa32r2-* | mipsisa32r2el-* \
- | mipsisa64-* | mipsisa64el-* \
- | mipsisa64r2-* | mipsisa64r2el-* \
- | mipsisa64sb1-* | mipsisa64sb1el-* \
- | mipsisa64sr71k-* | mipsisa64sr71kel-* \
- | mipstx39-* | mipstx39el-* \
- | mmix-* \
- | msp430-* \
- | none-* | np1-* | ns16k-* | ns32k-* \
- | orion-* \
- | pdp10-* | pdp11-* | pj-* | pjl-* | pn-* | power-* \
- | powerpc-* | powerpc64-* | powerpc64le-* | powerpcle-* | ppcbe-* \
- | pyramid-* \
- | romp-* | rs6000-* \
- | sh-* | sh[1234]-* | sh[23]e-* | sh[34]eb-* | shbe-* \
- | shle-* | sh[1234]le-* | sh3ele-* | sh64-* | sh64le-* \
- | sparc-* | sparc64-* | sparc86x-* | sparclet-* | sparclite-* \
- | sparcv8-* | sparcv9-* | sparcv9b-* | strongarm-* | sv1-* | sx?-* \
- | tahoe-* | thumb-* \
- | tic30-* | tic4x-* | tic54x-* | tic55x-* | tic6x-* | tic80-* \
- | tron-* \
- | v850-* | v850e-* | vax-* \
- | we32k-* \
- | x86-* | x86_64-* | xps100-* | xscale-* | xstormy16-* \
- | xtensa-* \
- | ymp-* \
- | z8k-*)
- ;;
- # Recognize the various machine names and aliases which stand
- # for a CPU type and a company and sometimes even an OS.
- 386bsd)
- basic_machine=i386-unknown
- os=-bsd
- ;;
- 3b1 | 7300 | 7300-att | att-7300 | pc7300 | safari | unixpc)
- basic_machine=m68000-att
- ;;
- 3b*)
- basic_machine=we32k-att
- ;;
- a29khif)
- basic_machine=a29k-amd
- os=-udi
- ;;
- abacus)
- basic_machine=abacus-unknown
- ;;
- adobe68k)
- basic_machine=m68010-adobe
- os=-scout
- ;;
- alliant | fx80)
- basic_machine=fx80-alliant
- ;;
- altos | altos3068)
- basic_machine=m68k-altos
- ;;
- am29k)
- basic_machine=a29k-none
- os=-bsd
- ;;
- amd64)
- basic_machine=x86_64-pc
- ;;
- amd64-*)
- basic_machine=x86_64-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
- ;;
- amdahl)
- basic_machine=580-amdahl
- os=-sysv
- ;;
- amiga | amiga-*)
- basic_machine=m68k-unknown
- ;;
- amigaos | amigados)
- basic_machine=m68k-unknown
- os=-amigaos
- ;;
- amigaunix | amix)
- basic_machine=m68k-unknown
- os=-sysv4
- ;;
- apollo68)
- basic_machine=m68k-apollo
- os=-sysv
- ;;
- apollo68bsd)
- basic_machine=m68k-apollo
- os=-bsd
- ;;
- aux)
- basic_machine=m68k-apple
- os=-aux
- ;;
- balance)
- basic_machine=ns32k-sequent
- os=-dynix
- ;;
- c90)
- basic_machine=c90-cray
- os=-unicos
- ;;
- convex-c1)
- basic_machine=c1-convex
- os=-bsd
- ;;
- convex-c2)
- basic_machine=c2-convex
- os=-bsd
- ;;
- convex-c32)
- basic_machine=c32-convex
- os=-bsd
- ;;
- convex-c34)
- basic_machine=c34-convex
- os=-bsd
- ;;
- convex-c38)
- basic_machine=c38-convex
- os=-bsd
- ;;
- cray | j90)
- basic_machine=j90-cray
- os=-unicos
- ;;
- craynv)
- basic_machine=craynv-cray
- os=-unicosmp
- ;;
- cr16c)
- basic_machine=cr16c-unknown
- os=-elf
- ;;
- crds | unos)
- basic_machine=m68k-crds
- ;;
- crisv32 | crisv32-* | etraxfs*)
- basic_machine=crisv32-axis
- ;;
- cris | cris-* | etrax*)
- basic_machine=cris-axis
- ;;
- crx)
- basic_machine=crx-unknown
- os=-elf
- ;;
- da30 | da30-*)
- basic_machine=m68k-da30
- ;;
- decstation | decstation-3100 | pmax | pmax-* | pmin | dec3100 | decstatn)
- basic_machine=mips-dec
- ;;
- decsystem10* | dec10*)
- basic_machine=pdp10-dec
- os=-tops10
- ;;
- decsystem20* | dec20*)
- basic_machine=pdp10-dec
- os=-tops20
- ;;
- delta | 3300 | motorola-3300 | motorola-delta \
- | 3300-motorola | delta-motorola)
- basic_machine=m68k-motorola
- ;;
- delta88)
- basic_machine=m88k-motorola
- os=-sysv3
- ;;
- dpx20 | dpx20-*)
- basic_machine=rs6000-bull
- os=-bosx
- ;;
- dpx2* | dpx2*-bull)
- basic_machine=m68k-bull
- os=-sysv3
- ;;
- ebmon29k)
- basic_machine=a29k-amd
- os=-ebmon
- ;;
- elxsi)
- basic_machine=elxsi-elxsi
- os=-bsd
- ;;
- encore | umax | mmax)
- basic_machine=ns32k-encore
- ;;
- es1800 | OSE68k | ose68k | ose | OSE)
- basic_machine=m68k-ericsson
- os=-ose
- ;;
- fx2800)
- basic_machine=i860-alliant
- ;;
- genix)
- basic_machine=ns32k-ns
- ;;
- gmicro)
- basic_machine=tron-gmicro
- os=-sysv
- ;;
- go32)
- basic_machine=i386-pc
- os=-go32
- ;;
- h3050r* | hiux*)
- basic_machine=hppa1.1-hitachi
- os=-hiuxwe2
- ;;
- h8300hms)
- basic_machine=h8300-hitachi
- os=-hms
- ;;
- h8300xray)
- basic_machine=h8300-hitachi
- os=-xray
- ;;
- h8500hms)
- basic_machine=h8500-hitachi
- os=-hms
- ;;
- harris)
- basic_machine=m88k-harris
- os=-sysv3
- ;;
- hp300-*)
- basic_machine=m68k-hp
- ;;
- hp300bsd)
- basic_machine=m68k-hp
- os=-bsd
- ;;
- hp300hpux)
- basic_machine=m68k-hp
- os=-hpux
- ;;
- hp3k9[0-9][0-9] | hp9[0-9][0-9])
- basic_machine=hppa1.0-hp
- ;;
- hp9k2[0-9][0-9] | hp9k31[0-9])
- basic_machine=m68000-hp
- ;;
- hp9k3[2-9][0-9])
- basic_machine=m68k-hp
- ;;
- hp9k6[0-9][0-9] | hp6[0-9][0-9])
- basic_machine=hppa1.0-hp
- ;;
- hp9k7[0-79][0-9] | hp7[0-79][0-9])
- basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp
- ;;
- hp9k78[0-9] | hp78[0-9])
- # FIXME: really hppa2.0-hp
- basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp
- ;;
- hp9k8[67]1 | hp8[67]1 | hp9k80[24] | hp80[24] | hp9k8[78]9 | hp8[78]9 | hp9k893 | hp893)
- # FIXME: really hppa2.0-hp
- basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp
- ;;
- hp9k8[0-9][13679] | hp8[0-9][13679])
- basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp
- ;;
- hp9k8[0-9][0-9] | hp8[0-9][0-9])
- basic_machine=hppa1.0-hp
- ;;
- hppa-next)
- os=-nextstep3
- ;;
- hppaosf)
- basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp
- os=-osf
- ;;
- hppro)
- basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp
- os=-proelf
- ;;
- i370-ibm* | ibm*)
- basic_machine=i370-ibm
- ;;
-# I'm not sure what "Sysv32" means. Should this be sysv3.2?
- i*86v32)
- basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'`
- os=-sysv32
- ;;
- i*86v4*)
- basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'`
- os=-sysv4
- ;;
- i*86v)
- basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'`
- os=-sysv
- ;;
- i*86sol2)
- basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'`
- os=-solaris2
- ;;
- i386mach)
- basic_machine=i386-mach
- os=-mach
- ;;
- i386-vsta | vsta)
- basic_machine=i386-unknown
- os=-vsta
- ;;
- iris | iris4d)
- basic_machine=mips-sgi
- case $os in
- -irix*)
- ;;
- *)
- os=-irix4
- ;;
- esac
- ;;
- isi68 | isi)
- basic_machine=m68k-isi
- os=-sysv
- ;;
- m88k-omron*)
- basic_machine=m88k-omron
- ;;
- magnum | m3230)
- basic_machine=mips-mips
- os=-sysv
- ;;
- merlin)
- basic_machine=ns32k-utek
- os=-sysv
- ;;
- mingw32)
- basic_machine=i386-pc
- os=-mingw32
- ;;
- miniframe)
- basic_machine=m68000-convergent
- ;;
- *mint | -mint[0-9]* | *MiNT | *MiNT[0-9]*)
- basic_machine=m68k-atari
- os=-mint
- ;;
- mips3*-*)
- basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed -e 's/mips3/mips64/'`
- ;;
- mips3*)
- basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed -e 's/mips3/mips64/'`-unknown
- ;;
- monitor)
- basic_machine=m68k-rom68k
- os=-coff
- ;;
- morphos)
- basic_machine=powerpc-unknown
- os=-morphos
- ;;
- msdos)
- basic_machine=i386-pc
- os=-msdos
- ;;
- mvs)
- basic_machine=i370-ibm
- os=-mvs
- ;;
- ncr3000)
- basic_machine=i486-ncr
- os=-sysv4
- ;;
- netbsd386)
- basic_machine=i386-unknown
- os=-netbsd
- ;;
- netwinder)
- basic_machine=armv4l-rebel
- os=-linux
- ;;
- news | news700 | news800 | news900)
- basic_machine=m68k-sony
- os=-newsos
- ;;
- news1000)
- basic_machine=m68030-sony
- os=-newsos
- ;;
- news-3600 | risc-news)
- basic_machine=mips-sony
- os=-newsos
- ;;
- necv70)
- basic_machine=v70-nec
- os=-sysv
- ;;
- next | m*-next )
- basic_machine=m68k-next
- case $os in
- -nextstep* )
- ;;
- -ns2*)
- os=-nextstep2
- ;;
- *)
- os=-nextstep3
- ;;
- esac
- ;;
- nh3000)
- basic_machine=m68k-harris
- os=-cxux
- ;;
- nh[45]000)
- basic_machine=m88k-harris
- os=-cxux
- ;;
- nindy960)
- basic_machine=i960-intel
- os=-nindy
- ;;
- mon960)
- basic_machine=i960-intel
- os=-mon960
- ;;
- nonstopux)
- basic_machine=mips-compaq
- os=-nonstopux
- ;;
- np1)
- basic_machine=np1-gould
- ;;
- nsr-tandem)
- basic_machine=nsr-tandem
- ;;
- op50n-* | op60c-*)
- basic_machine=hppa1.1-oki
- os=-proelf
- ;;
- or32 | or32-*)
- basic_machine=or32-unknown
- os=-coff
- ;;
- os400)
- basic_machine=powerpc-ibm
- os=-os400
- ;;
- OSE68000 | ose68000)
- basic_machine=m68000-ericsson
- os=-ose
- ;;
- os68k)
- basic_machine=m68k-none
- os=-os68k
- ;;
- pa-hitachi)
- basic_machine=hppa1.1-hitachi
- os=-hiuxwe2
- ;;
- paragon)
- basic_machine=i860-intel
- os=-osf
- ;;
- pbd)
- basic_machine=sparc-tti
- ;;
- pbb)
- basic_machine=m68k-tti
- ;;
- pc532 | pc532-*)
- basic_machine=ns32k-pc532
- ;;
- pentium | p5 | k5 | k6 | nexgen | viac3)
- basic_machine=i586-pc
- ;;
- pentiumpro | p6 | 6x86 | athlon | athlon_*)
- basic_machine=i686-pc
- ;;
- pentiumii | pentium2 | pentiumiii | pentium3)
- basic_machine=i686-pc
- ;;
- pentium4)
- basic_machine=i786-pc
- ;;
- pentium-* | p5-* | k5-* | k6-* | nexgen-* | viac3-*)
- basic_machine=i586-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
- ;;
- pentiumpro-* | p6-* | 6x86-* | athlon-*)
- basic_machine=i686-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
- ;;
- pentiumii-* | pentium2-* | pentiumiii-* | pentium3-*)
- basic_machine=i686-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
- ;;
- pentium4-*)
- basic_machine=i786-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
- ;;
- pn)
- basic_machine=pn-gould
- ;;
- power) basic_machine=power-ibm
- ;;
- ppc) basic_machine=powerpc-unknown
- ;;
- ppc-*) basic_machine=powerpc-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
- ;;
- ppcle | powerpclittle | ppc-le | powerpc-little)
- basic_machine=powerpcle-unknown
- ;;
- ppcle-* | powerpclittle-*)
- basic_machine=powerpcle-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
- ;;
- ppc64) basic_machine=powerpc64-unknown
- ;;
- ppc64-*) basic_machine=powerpc64-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
- ;;
- ppc64le | powerpc64little | ppc64-le | powerpc64-little)
- basic_machine=powerpc64le-unknown
- ;;
- ppc64le-* | powerpc64little-*)
- basic_machine=powerpc64le-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
- ;;
- ps2)
- basic_machine=i386-ibm
- ;;
- pw32)
- basic_machine=i586-unknown
- os=-pw32
- ;;
- rom68k)
- basic_machine=m68k-rom68k
- os=-coff
- ;;
- rm[46]00)
- basic_machine=mips-siemens
- ;;
- rtpc | rtpc-*)
- basic_machine=romp-ibm
- ;;
- s390 | s390-*)
- basic_machine=s390-ibm
- ;;
- s390x | s390x-*)
- basic_machine=s390x-ibm
- ;;
- sa29200)
- basic_machine=a29k-amd
- os=-udi
- ;;
- sb1)
- basic_machine=mipsisa64sb1-unknown
- ;;
- sb1el)
- basic_machine=mipsisa64sb1el-unknown
- ;;
- sei)
- basic_machine=mips-sei
- os=-seiux
- ;;
- sequent)
- basic_machine=i386-sequent
- ;;
- sh)
- basic_machine=sh-hitachi
- os=-hms
- ;;
- sh64)
- basic_machine=sh64-unknown
- ;;
- sparclite-wrs | simso-wrs)
- basic_machine=sparclite-wrs
- os=-vxworks
- ;;
- sps7)
- basic_machine=m68k-bull
- os=-sysv2
- ;;
- spur)
- basic_machine=spur-unknown
- ;;
- st2000)
- basic_machine=m68k-tandem
- ;;
- stratus)
- basic_machine=i860-stratus
- os=-sysv4
- ;;
- sun2)
- basic_machine=m68000-sun
- ;;
- sun2os3)
- basic_machine=m68000-sun
- os=-sunos3
- ;;
- sun2os4)
- basic_machine=m68000-sun
- os=-sunos4
- ;;
- sun3os3)
- basic_machine=m68k-sun
- os=-sunos3
- ;;
- sun3os4)
- basic_machine=m68k-sun
- os=-sunos4
- ;;
- sun4os3)
- basic_machine=sparc-sun
- os=-sunos3
- ;;
- sun4os4)
- basic_machine=sparc-sun
- os=-sunos4
- ;;
- sun4sol2)
- basic_machine=sparc-sun
- os=-solaris2
- ;;
- sun3 | sun3-*)
- basic_machine=m68k-sun
- ;;
- sun4)
- basic_machine=sparc-sun
- ;;
- sun386 | sun386i | roadrunner)
- basic_machine=i386-sun
- ;;
- sv1)
- basic_machine=sv1-cray
- os=-unicos
- ;;
- symmetry)
- basic_machine=i386-sequent
- os=-dynix
- ;;
- t3e)
- basic_machine=alphaev5-cray
- os=-unicos
- ;;
- t90)
- basic_machine=t90-cray
- os=-unicos
- ;;
- tic54x | c54x*)
- basic_machine=tic54x-unknown
- os=-coff
- ;;
- tic55x | c55x*)
- basic_machine=tic55x-unknown
- os=-coff
- ;;
- tic6x | c6x*)
- basic_machine=tic6x-unknown
- os=-coff
- ;;
- tx39)
- basic_machine=mipstx39-unknown
- ;;
- tx39el)
- basic_machine=mipstx39el-unknown
- ;;
- toad1)
- basic_machine=pdp10-xkl
- os=-tops20
- ;;
- tower | tower-32)
- basic_machine=m68k-ncr
- ;;
- tpf)
- basic_machine=s390x-ibm
- os=-tpf
- ;;
- udi29k)
- basic_machine=a29k-amd
- os=-udi
- ;;
- ultra3)
- basic_machine=a29k-nyu
- os=-sym1
- ;;
- v810 | necv810)
- basic_machine=v810-nec
- os=-none
- ;;
- vaxv)
- basic_machine=vax-dec
- os=-sysv
- ;;
- vms)
- basic_machine=vax-dec
- os=-vms
- ;;
- vpp*|vx|vx-*)
- basic_machine=f301-fujitsu
- ;;
- vxworks960)
- basic_machine=i960-wrs
- os=-vxworks
- ;;
- vxworks68)
- basic_machine=m68k-wrs
- os=-vxworks
- ;;
- vxworks29k)
- basic_machine=a29k-wrs
- os=-vxworks
- ;;
- w65*)
- basic_machine=w65-wdc
- os=-none
- ;;
- w89k-*)
- basic_machine=hppa1.1-winbond
- os=-proelf
- ;;
- xps | xps100)
- basic_machine=xps100-honeywell
- ;;
- ymp)
- basic_machine=ymp-cray
- os=-unicos
- ;;
- z8k-*-coff)
- basic_machine=z8k-unknown
- os=-sim
- ;;
- none)
- basic_machine=none-none
- os=-none
- ;;
-
-# Here we handle the default manufacturer of certain CPU types. It is in
-# some cases the only manufacturer, in others, it is the most popular.
- w89k)
- basic_machine=hppa1.1-winbond
- ;;
- op50n)
- basic_machine=hppa1.1-oki
- ;;
- op60c)
- basic_machine=hppa1.1-oki
- ;;
- romp)
- basic_machine=romp-ibm
- ;;
- mmix)
- basic_machine=mmix-knuth
- ;;
- rs6000)
- basic_machine=rs6000-ibm
- ;;
- vax)
- basic_machine=vax-dec
- ;;
- pdp10)
- # there are many clones, so DEC is not a safe bet
- basic_machine=pdp10-unknown
- ;;
- pdp11)
- basic_machine=pdp11-dec
- ;;
- we32k)
- basic_machine=we32k-att
- ;;
- sh3 | sh4 | sh[34]eb | sh[1234]le | sh[23]ele)
- basic_machine=sh-unknown
- ;;
- sh64)
- basic_machine=sh64-unknown
- ;;
- sparc | sparcv8 | sparcv9 | sparcv9b)
- basic_machine=sparc-sun
- ;;
- cydra)
- basic_machine=cydra-cydrome
- ;;
- orion)
- basic_machine=orion-highlevel
- ;;
- orion105)
- basic_machine=clipper-highlevel
- ;;
- mac | mpw | mac-mpw)
- basic_machine=m68k-apple
- ;;
- pmac | pmac-mpw)
- basic_machine=powerpc-apple
- ;;
- *-unknown)
- # Make sure to match an already-canonicalized machine name.
- ;;
- *)
- echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': machine \`$basic_machine\' not recognized 1>&2
- exit 1
- ;;
-esac
-
-# Here we canonicalize certain aliases for manufacturers.
-case $basic_machine in
- *-digital*)
- basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/digital.*/dec/'`
- ;;
- *-commodore*)
- basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/commodore.*/cbm/'`
- ;;
- *)
- ;;
-esac
-
-# Decode manufacturer-specific aliases for certain operating systems.
-
-if [ x"$os" != x"" ]
-then
-case $os in
- # First match some system type aliases
- # that might get confused with valid system types.
- # -solaris* is a basic system type, with this one exception.
- -solaris1 | -solaris1.*)
- os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|solaris1|sunos4|'`
- ;;
- -solaris)
- os=-solaris2
- ;;
- -svr4*)
- os=-sysv4
- ;;
- -unixware*)
- os=-sysv4.2uw
- ;;
- -gnu/linux*)
- os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|gnu/linux|linux-gnu|'`
- ;;
- # First accept the basic system types.
- # The portable systems comes first.
- # Each alternative MUST END IN A *, to match a version number.
- # -sysv* is not here because it comes later, after sysvr4.
- -gnu* | -bsd* | -mach* | -minix* | -genix* | -ultrix* | -irix* \
- | -*vms* | -sco* | -esix* | -isc* | -aix* | -sunos | -sunos[34]*\
- | -hpux* | -unos* | -osf* | -luna* | -dgux* | -solaris* | -sym* \
- | -amigaos* | -amigados* | -msdos* | -newsos* | -unicos* | -aof* \
- | -aos* \
- | -nindy* | -vxsim* | -vxworks* | -ebmon* | -hms* | -mvs* \
- | -clix* | -riscos* | -uniplus* | -iris* | -rtu* | -xenix* \
- | -hiux* | -386bsd* | -knetbsd* | -mirbsd* | -netbsd* | -openbsd* \
- | -ekkobsd* | -kfreebsd* | -freebsd* | -riscix* | -lynxos* \
- | -bosx* | -nextstep* | -cxux* | -aout* | -elf* | -oabi* \
- | -ptx* | -coff* | -ecoff* | -winnt* | -domain* | -vsta* \
- | -udi* | -eabi* | -lites* | -ieee* | -go32* | -aux* \
- | -chorusos* | -chorusrdb* \
- | -cygwin* | -pe* | -psos* | -moss* | -proelf* | -rtems* \
- | -mingw32* | -linux-gnu* | -linux-uclibc* | -uxpv* | -beos* | -mpeix* | -udk* \
- | -interix* | -uwin* | -mks* | -rhapsody* | -darwin* | -opened* \
- | -openstep* | -oskit* | -conix* | -pw32* | -nonstopux* \
- | -storm-chaos* | -tops10* | -tenex* | -tops20* | -its* \
- | -os2* | -vos* | -palmos* | -uclinux* | -nucleus* \
- | -morphos* | -superux* | -rtmk* | -rtmk-nova* | -windiss* \
- | -powermax* | -dnix* | -nx6 | -nx7 | -sei* | -dragonfly*)
- # Remember, each alternative MUST END IN *, to match a version number.
- ;;
- -qnx*)
- case $basic_machine in
- x86-* | i*86-*)
- ;;
- *)
- os=-nto$os
- ;;
- esac
- ;;
- -nto-qnx*)
- ;;
- -nto*)
- os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|nto|nto-qnx|'`
- ;;
- -sim | -es1800* | -hms* | -xray | -os68k* | -none* | -v88r* \
- | -windows* | -osx | -abug | -netware* | -os9* | -beos* \
- | -macos* | -mpw* | -magic* | -mmixware* | -mon960* | -lnews*)
- ;;
- -mac*)
- os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|mac|macos|'`
- ;;
- -linux-dietlibc)
- os=-linux-dietlibc
- ;;
- -linux*)
- os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|linux|linux-gnu|'`
- ;;
- -sunos5*)
- os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sunos5|solaris2|'`
- ;;
- -sunos6*)
- os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sunos6|solaris3|'`
- ;;
- -opened*)
- os=-openedition
- ;;
- -os400*)
- os=-os400
- ;;
- -wince*)
- os=-wince
- ;;
- -osfrose*)
- os=-osfrose
- ;;
- -osf*)
- os=-osf
- ;;
- -utek*)
- os=-bsd
- ;;
- -dynix*)
- os=-bsd
- ;;
- -acis*)
- os=-aos
- ;;
- -atheos*)
- os=-atheos
- ;;
- -syllable*)
- os=-syllable
- ;;
- -386bsd)
- os=-bsd
- ;;
- -ctix* | -uts*)
- os=-sysv
- ;;
- -nova*)
- os=-rtmk-nova
- ;;
- -ns2 )
- os=-nextstep2
- ;;
- -nsk*)
- os=-nsk
- ;;
- # Preserve the version number of sinix5.
- -sinix5.*)
- os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sinix|sysv|'`
- ;;
- -sinix*)
- os=-sysv4
- ;;
- -tpf*)
- os=-tpf
- ;;
- -triton*)
- os=-sysv3
- ;;
- -oss*)
- os=-sysv3
- ;;
- -svr4)
- os=-sysv4
- ;;
- -svr3)
- os=-sysv3
- ;;
- -sysvr4)
- os=-sysv4
- ;;
- # This must come after -sysvr4.
- -sysv*)
- ;;
- -ose*)
- os=-ose
- ;;
- -es1800*)
- os=-ose
- ;;
- -xenix)
- os=-xenix
- ;;
- -*mint | -mint[0-9]* | -*MiNT | -MiNT[0-9]*)
- os=-mint
- ;;
- -aros*)
- os=-aros
- ;;
- -kaos*)
- os=-kaos
- ;;
- -none)
- ;;
- *)
- # Get rid of the `-' at the beginning of $os.
- os=`echo $os | sed 's/[^-]*-//'`
- echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': system \`$os\' not recognized 1>&2
- exit 1
- ;;
-esac
-else
-
-# Here we handle the default operating systems that come with various machines.
-# The value should be what the vendor currently ships out the door with their
-# machine or put another way, the most popular os provided with the machine.
-
-# Note that if you're going to try to match "-MANUFACTURER" here (say,
-# "-sun"), then you have to tell the case statement up towards the top
-# that MANUFACTURER isn't an operating system. Otherwise, code above
-# will signal an error saying that MANUFACTURER isn't an operating
-# system, and we'll never get to this point.
-
-case $basic_machine in
- *-acorn)
- os=-riscix1.2
- ;;
- arm*-rebel)
- os=-linux
- ;;
- arm*-semi)
- os=-aout
- ;;
- c4x-* | tic4x-*)
- os=-coff
- ;;
- # This must come before the *-dec entry.
- pdp10-*)
- os=-tops20
- ;;
- pdp11-*)
- os=-none
- ;;
- *-dec | vax-*)
- os=-ultrix4.2
- ;;
- m68*-apollo)
- os=-domain
- ;;
- i386-sun)
- os=-sunos4.0.2
- ;;
- m68000-sun)
- os=-sunos3
- # This also exists in the configure program, but was not the
- # default.
- # os=-sunos4
- ;;
- m68*-cisco)
- os=-aout
- ;;
- mips*-cisco)
- os=-elf
- ;;
- mips*-*)
- os=-elf
- ;;
- or32-*)
- os=-coff
- ;;
- *-tti) # must be before sparc entry or we get the wrong os.
- os=-sysv3
- ;;
- sparc-* | *-sun)
- os=-sunos4.1.1
- ;;
- *-be)
- os=-beos
- ;;
- *-ibm)
- os=-aix
- ;;
- *-knuth)
- os=-mmixware
- ;;
- *-wec)
- os=-proelf
- ;;
- *-winbond)
- os=-proelf
- ;;
- *-oki)
- os=-proelf
- ;;
- *-hp)
- os=-hpux
- ;;
- *-hitachi)
- os=-hiux
- ;;
- i860-* | *-att | *-ncr | *-altos | *-motorola | *-convergent)
- os=-sysv
- ;;
- *-cbm)
- os=-amigaos
- ;;
- *-dg)
- os=-dgux
- ;;
- *-dolphin)
- os=-sysv3
- ;;
- m68k-ccur)
- os=-rtu
- ;;
- m88k-omron*)
- os=-luna
- ;;
- *-next )
- os=-nextstep
- ;;
- *-sequent)
- os=-ptx
- ;;
- *-crds)
- os=-unos
- ;;
- *-ns)
- os=-genix
- ;;
- i370-*)
- os=-mvs
- ;;
- *-next)
- os=-nextstep3
- ;;
- *-gould)
- os=-sysv
- ;;
- *-highlevel)
- os=-bsd
- ;;
- *-encore)
- os=-bsd
- ;;
- *-sgi)
- os=-irix
- ;;
- *-siemens)
- os=-sysv4
- ;;
- *-masscomp)
- os=-rtu
- ;;
- f30[01]-fujitsu | f700-fujitsu)
- os=-uxpv
- ;;
- *-rom68k)
- os=-coff
- ;;
- *-*bug)
- os=-coff
- ;;
- *-apple)
- os=-macos
- ;;
- *-atari*)
- os=-mint
- ;;
- *)
- os=-none
- ;;
-esac
-fi
-
-# Here we handle the case where we know the os, and the CPU type, but not the
-# manufacturer. We pick the logical manufacturer.
-vendor=unknown
-case $basic_machine in
- *-unknown)
- case $os in
- -riscix*)
- vendor=acorn
- ;;
- -sunos*)
- vendor=sun
- ;;
- -aix*)
- vendor=ibm
- ;;
- -beos*)
- vendor=be
- ;;
- -hpux*)
- vendor=hp
- ;;
- -mpeix*)
- vendor=hp
- ;;
- -hiux*)
- vendor=hitachi
- ;;
- -unos*)
- vendor=crds
- ;;
- -dgux*)
- vendor=dg
- ;;
- -luna*)
- vendor=omron
- ;;
- -genix*)
- vendor=ns
- ;;
- -mvs* | -opened*)
- vendor=ibm
- ;;
- -os400*)
- vendor=ibm
- ;;
- -ptx*)
- vendor=sequent
- ;;
- -tpf*)
- vendor=ibm
- ;;
- -vxsim* | -vxworks* | -windiss*)
- vendor=wrs
- ;;
- -aux*)
- vendor=apple
- ;;
- -hms*)
- vendor=hitachi
- ;;
- -mpw* | -macos*)
- vendor=apple
- ;;
- -*mint | -mint[0-9]* | -*MiNT | -MiNT[0-9]*)
- vendor=atari
- ;;
- -vos*)
- vendor=stratus
- ;;
- esac
- basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed "s/unknown/$vendor/"`
- ;;
-esac
-
-echo $basic_machine$os
-exit 0
-
-# Local variables:
-# eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
-# time-stamp-start: "timestamp='"
-# time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d"
-# time-stamp-end: "'"
-# End:
+++ /dev/null
-lal#
-dnl#
-dnl# Process this file with autoconf to produce a configure script.
-dnl#
-AC_INIT(autoconf/configure.in)
-BUILD_DIR=`pwd`
-cd ..
-TOP_DIR=`pwd`
-cd ${BUILD_DIR}
-AC_SUBST(BUILD_DIR)
-AC_CONFIG_AUX_DIR(${BUILD_DIR}/autoconf)
-
-dnl require a recent autoconf
-AC_PREREQ(2.61)
-
-
-
-# ------------------------------------------
-# Where to get Bacula source
-# ------------------------------------------
-AC_ARG_WITH(bacula,
- [ --with-bacula=PATH specify path to Bacula source],
- [
- if test "x$withval" != "xno" ; then
- bacula=$withval
- fi
- ]
-)
-
-AC_SUBST(bacula)
-if test "x$bacula" = "x" ; then
- AC_MSG_ERROR(The Bacula source directory must be specified. Use --with-bacula=<path>)
-fi
-
-dnl Bacula version
-VERSION=`sed -n -e 's/^#define VERSION.*"\(.*\)"$/\1/p' ${bacula}/src/version.h`
-DATE=`sed -n -e 's/^#define BDATE.*"\(.*\)"$/\1/p' ${bacula}/src/version.h`
-AC_SUBST(VERSION)dnl
-AC_SUBST(DATE)dnl
-if test "x$VERSION" = "x" ; then
- AC_MSG_ERROR(Bacula version not found)
-fi
-echo "configuring for Bacula $VERSION ($DATE)"
-
-dnl -------------------------------------------------------
-dnl# Check for programs.
-dnl ------------------------------------------------------
-AC_PATH_PROGS(TRUEPRG, true, :)
-AC_PATH_PROGS(FALSEPRG, false, :)
-AC_PROG_INSTALL
-AC_PATH_PROG(MV, mv, mv)
-AC_PATH_PROG(RM, rm, rm)
-AC_PATH_PROG(CP, cp, cp)
-AC_PATH_PROG(ECHO, echo, echo)
-AC_PATH_PROG(AR, ar, ar)
-AC_PROG_AWK
-# Some AWK programs fail, so test it and warn the user
-if echo xfoo | $AWK 'BEGIN { prog=ARGV[1]; ARGC=1 }
- { if ((prog == $2) || (("(" prog ")") == $2) ||
- (("[" prog "]") == $2) ||
- ((prog ":") == $2)) { print $1 ; exit 0 } }' xfoo>/dev/null; then :;
-else
- AC_MSG_ERROR([!!!!!!!!! WARNING !!!!!!!!!!!!!!
- The regex engine of $AWK is too broken to be used you
- might want to install GNU AWK.
- !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!])
-fi
-THE_AWK=$AWK
-AC_PATH_PROG(AWK, $THE_AWK, $THE_AWK)
-
-# -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# If the user has not set --exec-prefix, we default to ${prefix}
-# -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-if test x${exec_prefix} = xNONE ; then
- exec_prefix=${prefix}
-fi
-
-
-dnl# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
-dnl# CHECKING COMMAND LINE OPTIONS
-dnl# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-dnl# common parts of the Makefile
-MCOMMON=./autoconf/Make.common
-AC_SUBST_FILE(MCOMMON)
-
-
-AC_OUTPUT([ \
- autoconf/Make.common \
- Makefile \
- manuals/update_version \
- manuals/version.tex \
- manuals/bacula.sty \
- manuals/en/console/Makefile \
- manuals/en/main/Makefile \
- manuals/en/developers/Makefile \
- manuals/en/problems/Makefile \
- manuals/en/utility/Makefile \
- manuals/en/misc/Makefile \
- manuals/de/console/Makefile \
- manuals/de/main/Makefile \
- manuals/de/developers/Makefile \
- manuals/de/problems/Makefile \
- manuals/de/utility/Makefile \
- manuals/de/misc/Makefile \
- manuals/fr/console/Makefile \
- manuals/fr/main/Makefile \
- manuals/fr/developers/Makefile \
- manuals/fr/problems/Makefile \
- manuals/fr/utility/Makefile \
- manuals/fr/misc/Makefile \
- manuals/es/console/Makefile \
- manuals/es/main/Makefile \
- manuals/es/developers/Makefile \
- manuals/es/problems/Makefile \
- manuals/es/utility/Makefile \
- manuals/es/misc/Makefile \
- bacula-web/Makefile \
- bacula-web/version.tex \
- $PFILES ],
- [ ]
-)
-
-chmod 766 manuals/update_version
-
-# Now move common files into each subdirectory
-for i in manuals/version.tex manuals/bacula.sty ; do
- for j in console developers main misc problems utility ; do
- cp -f $i manuals/de/$j/
- cp -f $i manuals/en/$j/
- cp -f $i manuals/es/$j/
- cp -f $i manuals/fr/$j/
- done
-done
-
-echo "
-Configuration on `date`:
-
- Bacula version: ${VERSION} (${DATE})
- Bacula source code: ${bacula}
-
- " > config.out
-
-cat config.out
+++ /dev/null
-#!/bin/sh
-#
-# install - install a program, script, or datafile
-# This comes from X11R5 (mit/util/scripts/install.sh).
-#
-# Copyright 1991 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
-#
-# Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its
-# documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that
-# the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
-# copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
-# documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used in advertising or
-# publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific,
-# written prior permission. M.I.T. makes no representations about the
-# suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is"
-# without express or implied warranty.
-#
-# Calling this script install-sh is preferred over install.sh, to prevent
-# `make' implicit rules from creating a file called install from it
-# when there is no Makefile.
-#
-# This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written
-# from scratch. It can only install one file at a time, a restriction
-# shared with many OS's install programs.
-
-
-# set DOITPROG to echo to test this script
-
-# Don't use :- since 4.3BSD and earlier shells don't like it.
-doit="${DOITPROG-}"
-
-
-# put in absolute paths if you don't have them in your path; or use env. vars.
-
-mvprog="${MVPROG-mv}"
-cpprog="${CPPROG-cp}"
-chmodprog="${CHMODPROG-chmod}"
-chownprog="${CHOWNPROG-chown}"
-chgrpprog="${CHGRPPROG-chgrp}"
-stripprog="${STRIPPROG-strip}"
-rmprog="${RMPROG-rm}"
-mkdirprog="${MKDIRPROG-mkdir}"
-
-transformbasename=""
-transform_arg=""
-instcmd="$mvprog"
-chmodcmd="$chmodprog 0755"
-chowncmd=""
-chgrpcmd=""
-stripcmd=""
-rmcmd="$rmprog -f"
-mvcmd="$mvprog"
-src=""
-dst=""
-dir_arg=""
-
-while [ x"$1" != x ]; do
- case $1 in
- -c) instcmd="$cpprog"
- shift
- continue;;
-
- -d) dir_arg=true
- shift
- continue;;
-
- -m) chmodcmd="$chmodprog $2"
- shift
- shift
- continue;;
-
- -o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2"
- shift
- shift
- continue;;
-
- -g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2"
- shift
- shift
- continue;;
-
- -s) stripcmd="$stripprog"
- shift
- continue;;
-
- -t=*) transformarg=`echo $1 | sed 's/-t=//'`
- shift
- continue;;
-
- -b=*) transformbasename=`echo $1 | sed 's/-b=//'`
- shift
- continue;;
-
- *) if [ x"$src" = x ]
- then
- src=$1
- else
- # this colon is to work around a 386BSD /bin/sh bug
- :
- dst=$1
- fi
- shift
- continue;;
- esac
-done
-
-if [ x"$src" = x ]
-then
- echo "install: no input file specified"
- exit 1
-else
- :
-fi
-
-if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ]; then
- dst=$src
- src=""
-
- if [ -d $dst ]; then
- instcmd=:
- chmodcmd=""
- else
- instcmd=$mkdirprog
- fi
-else
-
-# Waiting for this to be detected by the "$instcmd $src $dsttmp" command
-# might cause directories to be created, which would be especially bad
-# if $src (and thus $dsttmp) contains '*'.
-
- if [ -f "$src" ] || [ -d "$src" ]
- then
- :
- else
- echo "install: $src does not exist"
- exit 1
- fi
-
- if [ x"$dst" = x ]
- then
- echo "install: no destination specified"
- exit 1
- else
- :
- fi
-
-# If destination is a directory, append the input filename; if your system
-# does not like double slashes in filenames, you may need to add some logic
-
- if [ -d $dst ]
- then
- dst="$dst"/`basename $src`
- else
- :
- fi
-fi
-
-## this sed command emulates the dirname command
-dstdir=`echo $dst | sed -e 's,[^/]*$,,;s,/$,,;s,^$,.,'`
-
-# Make sure that the destination directory exists.
-# this part is taken from Noah Friedman's mkinstalldirs script
-
-# Skip lots of stat calls in the usual case.
-if [ ! -d "$dstdir" ]; then
-defaultIFS='
- '
-IFS="${IFS-${defaultIFS}}"
-
-oIFS="${IFS}"
-# Some sh's can't handle IFS=/ for some reason.
-IFS='%'
-set - `echo ${dstdir} | sed -e 's@/@%@g' -e 's@^%@/@'`
-IFS="${oIFS}"
-
-pathcomp=''
-
-while [ $# -ne 0 ] ; do
- pathcomp="${pathcomp}${1}"
- shift
-
- if [ ! -d "${pathcomp}" ] ;
- then
- $mkdirprog "${pathcomp}"
- else
- :
- fi
-
- pathcomp="${pathcomp}/"
-done
-fi
-
-if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ]
-then
- $doit $instcmd $dst &&
-
- if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dst; else : ; fi &&
- if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dst; else : ; fi &&
- if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dst; else : ; fi &&
- if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dst; else : ; fi
-else
-
-# If we're going to rename the final executable, determine the name now.
-
- if [ x"$transformarg" = x ]
- then
- dstfile=`basename $dst`
- else
- dstfile=`basename $dst $transformbasename |
- sed $transformarg`$transformbasename
- fi
-
-# don't allow the sed command to completely eliminate the filename
-
- if [ x"$dstfile" = x ]
- then
- dstfile=`basename $dst`
- else
- :
- fi
-
-# Make a temp file name in the proper directory.
-
- dsttmp=$dstdir/#inst.$$#
-
-# Move or copy the file name to the temp name
-
- $doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp &&
-
- trap "rm -f ${dsttmp}" 0 &&
-
-# and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits
-
-# If any of these fail, we abort the whole thing. If we want to
-# ignore errors from any of these, just make sure not to ignore
-# errors from the above "$doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp" command.
-
- if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dsttmp; else :;fi &&
- if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dsttmp; else :;fi &&
- if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dsttmp; else :;fi &&
- if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dsttmp; else :;fi &&
-
-# Now rename the file to the real destination.
-
- $doit $rmcmd -f $dstdir/$dstfile &&
- $doit $mvcmd $dsttmp $dstdir/$dstfile
-
-fi &&
-
-
-exit 0
+++ /dev/null
-#!/bin/sh
-#
-# install - install a program, script, or datafile
-# This comes from X11R5.
-#
-# $XConsortium: install.sh,v 1.2 89/12/18 14:47:22 jim Exp $
-#
-# This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written
-# from scratch.
-#
-
-# set DOITPROG to echo to test this script
-
-# Don't use :- since 4.3BSD and earlier shells don't like it.
-doit="${DOITPROG-}"
-
-
-# put in absolute paths if you don't have them in your path; or use env. vars.
-
-mvprog="${MVPROG-mv}"
-cpprog="${CPPROG-cp}"
-chmodprog="${CHMODPROG-chmod}"
-chownprog="${CHOWNPROG-chown}"
-chgrpprog="${CHGRPPROG-chgrp}"
-stripprog="${STRIPPROG-strip}"
-rmprog="${RMPROG-rm}"
-mkdirprog="${MKDIRPROG-mkdir}"
-
-tranformbasename=""
-transform_arg=""
-instcmd="$mvprog"
-chmodcmd="$chmodprog 0755"
-chowncmd=""
-chgrpcmd=""
-stripcmd=""
-rmcmd="$rmprog -f"
-mvcmd="$mvprog"
-src=""
-dst=""
-dir_arg=""
-
-while [ x"$1" != x ]; do
- case $1 in
- -c) instcmd="$cpprog"
- shift
- continue;;
-
- -d) dir_arg=true
- shift
- continue;;
-
- -m) chmodcmd="$chmodprog $2"
- shift
- shift
- continue;;
-
- -o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2"
- shift
- shift
- continue;;
-
- -g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2"
- shift
- shift
- continue;;
-
- -s) stripcmd="$stripprog"
- shift
- continue;;
-
- -t=*) transformarg=`echo $1 | sed 's/-t=//'`
- shift
- continue;;
-
- -b=*) transformbasename=`echo $1 | sed 's/-b=//'`
- shift
- continue;;
-
- *) if [ x"$src" = x ]
- then
- src=$1
- else
- # this colon is to work around a 386BSD /bin/sh bug
- :
- dst=$1
- fi
- shift
- continue;;
- esac
-done
-
-if [ x"$src" = x ]
-then
- echo "install: no input file specified"
- exit 1
-else
- true
-fi
-
-if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ]; then
- dst=$src
- src=""
-
- if [ -d $dst ]; then
- instcmd=:
- else
- instcmd=mkdir
- fi
-else
-
-# Waiting for this to be detected by the "$instcmd $src $dsttmp" command
-# might cause directories to be created, which would be especially bad
-# if $src (and thus $dsttmp) contains '*'.
-
- if [ -f $src -o -d $src ]
- then
- true
- else
- echo "install: $src does not exist"
- exit 1
- fi
-
- if [ x"$dst" = x ]
- then
- echo "install: no destination specified"
- exit 1
- else
- true
- fi
-
-# If destination is a directory, append the input filename; if your system
-# does not like double slashes in filenames, you may need to add some logic
-
- if [ -d $dst ]
- then
- dst="$dst"/`basename $src`
- else
- true
- fi
-fi
-
-## this sed command emulates the dirname command
-dstdir=`echo $dst | sed -e 's,[^/]*$,,;s,/$,,;s,^$,.,'`
-
-# Make sure that the destination directory exists.
-# this part is taken from Noah Friedman's mkinstalldirs script
-
-# Skip lots of stat calls in the usual case.
-if [ ! -d "$dstdir" ]; then
-defaultIFS='
-'
-IFS="${IFS-${defaultIFS}}"
-
-oIFS="${IFS}"
-# Some sh's can't handle IFS=/ for some reason.
-IFS='%'
-set - `echo ${dstdir} | sed -e 's@/@%@g' -e 's@^%@/@'`
-IFS="${oIFS}"
-
-pathcomp=''
-
-while [ $# -ne 0 ] ; do
- pathcomp="${pathcomp}${1}"
- shift
-
- if [ ! -d "${pathcomp}" ] ;
- then
- $mkdirprog "${pathcomp}"
- else
- true
- fi
-
- pathcomp="${pathcomp}/"
-done
-fi
-
-if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ]
-then
- $doit $instcmd $dst &&
-
- if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dst; else true ; fi &&
- if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dst; else true ; fi &&
- if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dst; else true ; fi &&
- if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dst; else true ; fi
-else
-
-# If we're going to rename the final executable, determine the name now.
-
- if [ x"$transformarg" = x ]
- then
- dstfile=`basename $dst`
- else
- dstfile=`basename $dst $transformbasename |
- sed $transformarg`$transformbasename
- fi
-
-# don't allow the sed command to completely eliminate the filename
-
- if [ x"$dstfile" = x ]
- then
- dstfile=`basename $dst`
- else
- true
- fi
-
-# Make a temp file name in the proper directory.
-
- dsttmp=$dstdir/#inst.$$#
-
-# Move or copy the file name to the temp name
-
- $doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp &&
-
- trap "rm -f ${dsttmp}" 0 &&
-
-# and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits
-
-# If any of these fail, we abort the whole thing. If we want to
-# ignore errors from any of these, just make sure not to ignore
-# errors from the above "$doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp" command.
-
- if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
- if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
- if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
- if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
-
-# Now rename the file to the real destination.
-
- $doit $rmcmd -f $dstdir/$dstfile &&
- $doit $mvcmd $dsttmp $dstdir/$dstfile
-
-fi &&
-
-
-exit 0
+++ /dev/null
-#! /bin/sh
-# mkinstalldirs --- make directory hierarchy
-# Author: Noah Friedman <friedman@prep.ai.mit.edu>
-# Created: 1993-05-16
-# Public domain
-
-errstatus=0
-dirmode=""
-
-usage="\
-Usage: mkinstalldirs [-h] [--help] [-m mode] dir ..."
-
-# process command line arguments
-while test $# -gt 0 ; do
- case "${1}" in
- -h | --help | --h* ) # -h for help
- echo "${usage}" 1>&2; exit 0 ;;
- -m ) # -m PERM arg
- shift
- test $# -eq 0 && { echo "${usage}" 1>&2; exit 1; }
- dirmode="${1}"
- shift ;;
- -- ) shift; break ;; # stop option processing
- -* ) echo "${usage}" 1>&2; exit 1 ;; # unknown option
- * ) break ;; # first non-opt arg
- esac
-done
-
-for file
-do
- if test -d "$file"; then
- shift
- else
- break
- fi
-done
-
-case $# in
-0) exit 0 ;;
-esac
-
-case $dirmode in
-'')
- if mkdir -p -- . 2>/dev/null; then
- echo "mkdir -p -- $*"
- exec mkdir -p -- "$@"
- fi ;;
-*)
- if mkdir -m "$dirmode" -p -- . 2>/dev/null; then
- echo "mkdir -m $dirmode -p -- $*"
- exec mkdir -m "$dirmode" -p -- "$@"
- fi ;;
-esac
-
-for file
-do
- set fnord `echo ":$file" | sed -ne 's/^:\//#/;s/^://;s/\// /g;s/^#/\//;p'`
- shift
-
- pathcomp=
- for d
- do
- pathcomp="$pathcomp$d"
- case "$pathcomp" in
- -* ) pathcomp=./$pathcomp ;;
- esac
-
- if test ! -d "$pathcomp"; then
- echo "mkdir $pathcomp"
-
- mkdir "$pathcomp" || lasterr=$?
-
- if test ! -d "$pathcomp"; then
- errstatus=$lasterr
- else
- if test ! -z "$dirmode"; then
- echo "chmod $dirmode $pathcomp"
-
- lasterr=""
- chmod "$dirmode" "$pathcomp" || lasterr=$?
-
- if test ! -z "$lasterr"; then
- errstatus=$lasterr
- fi
- fi
- fi
- fi
-
- pathcomp="$pathcomp/"
- done
-done
-
-exit $errstatus
-
-# Local Variables:
-# mode: shell-script
-# sh-indentation: 3
-# End:
-# mkinstalldirs ends here
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-
-IMAGES=../images
-
-first_rule: bacula
-
-bacula: tex web html dvipdf
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- touch bacula-web.idx bacula-webi-general.tex
- -latex -interaction=batchmode bacula-web.tex
- makeindex bacula-web.idx >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- -latex -interaction=batchmode bacula-web.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making bacula-web pdf manual"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf bacula-web.dvi bacula-web.pdf
- @rm -f *.eps *.old
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making bacula-web pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 bacula-web.dvi
- @rm -f *.eps *.old
-
-html:
- @echo "Making bacula-web html manual"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -e imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names bacula-web.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl bacula-web >tex.out 2>&1
- ./translate_images.pl --to_meaningful_names bacula-web.html
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.old
-
-web:
- @echo "Making bacula-web web manual"
- @mkdir -p bacula-web
- @rm -f bacula-web/*
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps ${IMAGES}/*.png bacula-web/
- @rm -f bacula-web/next.eps bacula-web/next.png bacula-web/prev.eps bacula-web/prev.png bacula-web/up.eps bacula-web/up.png
- @(if [ -e bacula-web/imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --to_meaningful_names bacula-web/Bacula_Users_Guide.html; \
- fi)
- @rm -rf bacula-web/*.html
- latex2html -split 4 -local_icons -t "Bacula-web Guide" -long_titles 4 \
- -contents_in_nav -toc_stars -white -notransparent bacula-web >/dev/null
- ./translate_images.pl --to_meaningful_names bacula-web/Bacula_web_Guide.html
- @cp -f bacula-web/Bacula_web_Guide.html bacula-web/index.html
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg bacula-web/*.eps *.old
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl bacula-web.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.pdf *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -rf bacula-web
- @rm -f images.tex bacula-webi-general.tex
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.tex bacula-webi-general.tex
- @rm -f version.tex Makefile
+++ /dev/null
-#! /bin/sh
-# Guess values for system-dependent variables and create Makefiles.
-# Generated by GNU Autoconf 2.68.
-#
-#
-# Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001,
-# 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 Free Software
-# Foundation, Inc.
-#
-#
-# This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation
-# gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it.
-## -------------------- ##
-## M4sh Initialization. ##
-## -------------------- ##
-
-# Be more Bourne compatible
-DUALCASE=1; export DUALCASE # for MKS sh
-if test -n "${ZSH_VERSION+set}" && (emulate sh) >/dev/null 2>&1; then :
- emulate sh
- NULLCMD=:
- # Pre-4.2 versions of Zsh do word splitting on ${1+"$@"}, which
- # is contrary to our usage. Disable this feature.
- alias -g '${1+"$@"}'='"$@"'
- setopt NO_GLOB_SUBST
-else
- case `(set -o) 2>/dev/null` in #(
- *posix*) :
- set -o posix ;; #(
- *) :
- ;;
-esac
-fi
-
-
-as_nl='
-'
-export as_nl
-# Printing a long string crashes Solaris 7 /usr/bin/printf.
-as_echo='\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'
-as_echo=$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo
-as_echo=$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo
-# Prefer a ksh shell builtin over an external printf program on Solaris,
-# but without wasting forks for bash or zsh.
-if test -z "$BASH_VERSION$ZSH_VERSION" \
- && (test "X`print -r -- $as_echo`" = "X$as_echo") 2>/dev/null; then
- as_echo='print -r --'
- as_echo_n='print -rn --'
-elif (test "X`printf %s $as_echo`" = "X$as_echo") 2>/dev/null; then
- as_echo='printf %s\n'
- as_echo_n='printf %s'
-else
- if test "X`(/usr/ucb/echo -n -n $as_echo) 2>/dev/null`" = "X-n $as_echo"; then
- as_echo_body='eval /usr/ucb/echo -n "$1$as_nl"'
- as_echo_n='/usr/ucb/echo -n'
- else
- as_echo_body='eval expr "X$1" : "X\\(.*\\)"'
- as_echo_n_body='eval
- arg=$1;
- case $arg in #(
- *"$as_nl"*)
- expr "X$arg" : "X\\(.*\\)$as_nl";
- arg=`expr "X$arg" : ".*$as_nl\\(.*\\)"`;;
- esac;
- expr "X$arg" : "X\\(.*\\)" | tr -d "$as_nl"
- '
- export as_echo_n_body
- as_echo_n='sh -c $as_echo_n_body as_echo'
- fi
- export as_echo_body
- as_echo='sh -c $as_echo_body as_echo'
-fi
-
-# The user is always right.
-if test "${PATH_SEPARATOR+set}" != set; then
- PATH_SEPARATOR=:
- (PATH='/bin;/bin'; FPATH=$PATH; sh -c :) >/dev/null 2>&1 && {
- (PATH='/bin:/bin'; FPATH=$PATH; sh -c :) >/dev/null 2>&1 ||
- PATH_SEPARATOR=';'
- }
-fi
-
-
-# IFS
-# We need space, tab and new line, in precisely that order. Quoting is
-# there to prevent editors from complaining about space-tab.
-# (If _AS_PATH_WALK were called with IFS unset, it would disable word
-# splitting by setting IFS to empty value.)
-IFS=" "" $as_nl"
-
-# Find who we are. Look in the path if we contain no directory separator.
-as_myself=
-case $0 in #((
- *[\\/]* ) as_myself=$0 ;;
- *) as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
-for as_dir in $PATH
-do
- IFS=$as_save_IFS
- test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
- test -r "$as_dir/$0" && as_myself=$as_dir/$0 && break
- done
-IFS=$as_save_IFS
-
- ;;
-esac
-# We did not find ourselves, most probably we were run as `sh COMMAND'
-# in which case we are not to be found in the path.
-if test "x$as_myself" = x; then
- as_myself=$0
-fi
-if test ! -f "$as_myself"; then
- $as_echo "$as_myself: error: cannot find myself; rerun with an absolute file name" >&2
- exit 1
-fi
-
-# Unset variables that we do not need and which cause bugs (e.g. in
-# pre-3.0 UWIN ksh). But do not cause bugs in bash 2.01; the "|| exit 1"
-# suppresses any "Segmentation fault" message there. '((' could
-# trigger a bug in pdksh 5.2.14.
-for as_var in BASH_ENV ENV MAIL MAILPATH
-do eval test x\${$as_var+set} = xset \
- && ( (unset $as_var) || exit 1) >/dev/null 2>&1 && unset $as_var || :
-done
-PS1='$ '
-PS2='> '
-PS4='+ '
-
-# NLS nuisances.
-LC_ALL=C
-export LC_ALL
-LANGUAGE=C
-export LANGUAGE
-
-# CDPATH.
-(unset CDPATH) >/dev/null 2>&1 && unset CDPATH
-
-if test "x$CONFIG_SHELL" = x; then
- as_bourne_compatible="if test -n \"\${ZSH_VERSION+set}\" && (emulate sh) >/dev/null 2>&1; then :
- emulate sh
- NULLCMD=:
- # Pre-4.2 versions of Zsh do word splitting on \${1+\"\$@\"}, which
- # is contrary to our usage. Disable this feature.
- alias -g '\${1+\"\$@\"}'='\"\$@\"'
- setopt NO_GLOB_SUBST
-else
- case \`(set -o) 2>/dev/null\` in #(
- *posix*) :
- set -o posix ;; #(
- *) :
- ;;
-esac
-fi
-"
- as_required="as_fn_return () { (exit \$1); }
-as_fn_success () { as_fn_return 0; }
-as_fn_failure () { as_fn_return 1; }
-as_fn_ret_success () { return 0; }
-as_fn_ret_failure () { return 1; }
-
-exitcode=0
-as_fn_success || { exitcode=1; echo as_fn_success failed.; }
-as_fn_failure && { exitcode=1; echo as_fn_failure succeeded.; }
-as_fn_ret_success || { exitcode=1; echo as_fn_ret_success failed.; }
-as_fn_ret_failure && { exitcode=1; echo as_fn_ret_failure succeeded.; }
-if ( set x; as_fn_ret_success y && test x = \"\$1\" ); then :
-
-else
- exitcode=1; echo positional parameters were not saved.
-fi
-test x\$exitcode = x0 || exit 1"
- as_suggested=" as_lineno_1=";as_suggested=$as_suggested$LINENO;as_suggested=$as_suggested" as_lineno_1a=\$LINENO
- as_lineno_2=";as_suggested=$as_suggested$LINENO;as_suggested=$as_suggested" as_lineno_2a=\$LINENO
- eval 'test \"x\$as_lineno_1'\$as_run'\" != \"x\$as_lineno_2'\$as_run'\" &&
- test \"x\`expr \$as_lineno_1'\$as_run' + 1\`\" = \"x\$as_lineno_2'\$as_run'\"' || exit 1"
- if (eval "$as_required") 2>/dev/null; then :
- as_have_required=yes
-else
- as_have_required=no
-fi
- if test x$as_have_required = xyes && (eval "$as_suggested") 2>/dev/null; then :
-
-else
- as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
-as_found=false
-for as_dir in /bin$PATH_SEPARATOR/usr/bin$PATH_SEPARATOR$PATH
-do
- IFS=$as_save_IFS
- test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
- as_found=:
- case $as_dir in #(
- /*)
- for as_base in sh bash ksh sh5; do
- # Try only shells that exist, to save several forks.
- as_shell=$as_dir/$as_base
- if { test -f "$as_shell" || test -f "$as_shell.exe"; } &&
- { $as_echo "$as_bourne_compatible""$as_required" | as_run=a "$as_shell"; } 2>/dev/null; then :
- CONFIG_SHELL=$as_shell as_have_required=yes
- if { $as_echo "$as_bourne_compatible""$as_suggested" | as_run=a "$as_shell"; } 2>/dev/null; then :
- break 2
-fi
-fi
- done;;
- esac
- as_found=false
-done
-$as_found || { if { test -f "$SHELL" || test -f "$SHELL.exe"; } &&
- { $as_echo "$as_bourne_compatible""$as_required" | as_run=a "$SHELL"; } 2>/dev/null; then :
- CONFIG_SHELL=$SHELL as_have_required=yes
-fi; }
-IFS=$as_save_IFS
-
-
- if test "x$CONFIG_SHELL" != x; then :
- # We cannot yet assume a decent shell, so we have to provide a
- # neutralization value for shells without unset; and this also
- # works around shells that cannot unset nonexistent variables.
- # Preserve -v and -x to the replacement shell.
- BASH_ENV=/dev/null
- ENV=/dev/null
- (unset BASH_ENV) >/dev/null 2>&1 && unset BASH_ENV ENV
- export CONFIG_SHELL
- case $- in # ((((
- *v*x* | *x*v* ) as_opts=-vx ;;
- *v* ) as_opts=-v ;;
- *x* ) as_opts=-x ;;
- * ) as_opts= ;;
- esac
- exec "$CONFIG_SHELL" $as_opts "$as_myself" ${1+"$@"}
-fi
-
- if test x$as_have_required = xno; then :
- $as_echo "$0: This script requires a shell more modern than all"
- $as_echo "$0: the shells that I found on your system."
- if test x${ZSH_VERSION+set} = xset ; then
- $as_echo "$0: In particular, zsh $ZSH_VERSION has bugs and should"
- $as_echo "$0: be upgraded to zsh 4.3.4 or later."
- else
- $as_echo "$0: Please tell bug-autoconf@gnu.org about your system,
-$0: including any error possibly output before this
-$0: message. Then install a modern shell, or manually run
-$0: the script under such a shell if you do have one."
- fi
- exit 1
-fi
-fi
-fi
-SHELL=${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh}
-export SHELL
-# Unset more variables known to interfere with behavior of common tools.
-CLICOLOR_FORCE= GREP_OPTIONS=
-unset CLICOLOR_FORCE GREP_OPTIONS
-
-## --------------------- ##
-## M4sh Shell Functions. ##
-## --------------------- ##
-# as_fn_unset VAR
-# ---------------
-# Portably unset VAR.
-as_fn_unset ()
-{
- { eval $1=; unset $1;}
-}
-as_unset=as_fn_unset
-
-# as_fn_set_status STATUS
-# -----------------------
-# Set $? to STATUS, without forking.
-as_fn_set_status ()
-{
- return $1
-} # as_fn_set_status
-
-# as_fn_exit STATUS
-# -----------------
-# Exit the shell with STATUS, even in a "trap 0" or "set -e" context.
-as_fn_exit ()
-{
- set +e
- as_fn_set_status $1
- exit $1
-} # as_fn_exit
-
-# as_fn_mkdir_p
-# -------------
-# Create "$as_dir" as a directory, including parents if necessary.
-as_fn_mkdir_p ()
-{
-
- case $as_dir in #(
- -*) as_dir=./$as_dir;;
- esac
- test -d "$as_dir" || eval $as_mkdir_p || {
- as_dirs=
- while :; do
- case $as_dir in #(
- *\'*) as_qdir=`$as_echo "$as_dir" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"`;; #'(
- *) as_qdir=$as_dir;;
- esac
- as_dirs="'$as_qdir' $as_dirs"
- as_dir=`$as_dirname -- "$as_dir" ||
-$as_expr X"$as_dir" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \
- X"$as_dir" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \
- X"$as_dir" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \
- X"$as_dir" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null ||
-$as_echo X"$as_dir" |
- sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- /^X\(\/\/\)$/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- /^X\(\/\).*/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- s/.*/./; q'`
- test -d "$as_dir" && break
- done
- test -z "$as_dirs" || eval "mkdir $as_dirs"
- } || test -d "$as_dir" || as_fn_error $? "cannot create directory $as_dir"
-
-
-} # as_fn_mkdir_p
-# as_fn_append VAR VALUE
-# ----------------------
-# Append the text in VALUE to the end of the definition contained in VAR. Take
-# advantage of any shell optimizations that allow amortized linear growth over
-# repeated appends, instead of the typical quadratic growth present in naive
-# implementations.
-if (eval "as_var=1; as_var+=2; test x\$as_var = x12") 2>/dev/null; then :
- eval 'as_fn_append ()
- {
- eval $1+=\$2
- }'
-else
- as_fn_append ()
- {
- eval $1=\$$1\$2
- }
-fi # as_fn_append
-
-# as_fn_arith ARG...
-# ------------------
-# Perform arithmetic evaluation on the ARGs, and store the result in the
-# global $as_val. Take advantage of shells that can avoid forks. The arguments
-# must be portable across $(()) and expr.
-if (eval "test \$(( 1 + 1 )) = 2") 2>/dev/null; then :
- eval 'as_fn_arith ()
- {
- as_val=$(( $* ))
- }'
-else
- as_fn_arith ()
- {
- as_val=`expr "$@" || test $? -eq 1`
- }
-fi # as_fn_arith
-
-
-# as_fn_error STATUS ERROR [LINENO LOG_FD]
-# ----------------------------------------
-# Output "`basename $0`: error: ERROR" to stderr. If LINENO and LOG_FD are
-# provided, also output the error to LOG_FD, referencing LINENO. Then exit the
-# script with STATUS, using 1 if that was 0.
-as_fn_error ()
-{
- as_status=$1; test $as_status -eq 0 && as_status=1
- if test "$4"; then
- as_lineno=${as_lineno-"$3"} as_lineno_stack=as_lineno_stack=$as_lineno_stack
- $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: $2" >&$4
- fi
- $as_echo "$as_me: error: $2" >&2
- as_fn_exit $as_status
-} # as_fn_error
-
-if expr a : '\(a\)' >/dev/null 2>&1 &&
- test "X`expr 00001 : '.*\(...\)'`" = X001; then
- as_expr=expr
-else
- as_expr=false
-fi
-
-if (basename -- /) >/dev/null 2>&1 && test "X`basename -- / 2>&1`" = "X/"; then
- as_basename=basename
-else
- as_basename=false
-fi
-
-if (as_dir=`dirname -- /` && test "X$as_dir" = X/) >/dev/null 2>&1; then
- as_dirname=dirname
-else
- as_dirname=false
-fi
-
-as_me=`$as_basename -- "$0" ||
-$as_expr X/"$0" : '.*/\([^/][^/]*\)/*$' \| \
- X"$0" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \
- X"$0" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null ||
-$as_echo X/"$0" |
- sed '/^.*\/\([^/][^/]*\)\/*$/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- /^X\/\(\/\/\)$/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- /^X\/\(\/\).*/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- s/.*/./; q'`
-
-# Avoid depending upon Character Ranges.
-as_cr_letters='abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz'
-as_cr_LETTERS='ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ'
-as_cr_Letters=$as_cr_letters$as_cr_LETTERS
-as_cr_digits='0123456789'
-as_cr_alnum=$as_cr_Letters$as_cr_digits
-
-
- as_lineno_1=$LINENO as_lineno_1a=$LINENO
- as_lineno_2=$LINENO as_lineno_2a=$LINENO
- eval 'test "x$as_lineno_1'$as_run'" != "x$as_lineno_2'$as_run'" &&
- test "x`expr $as_lineno_1'$as_run' + 1`" = "x$as_lineno_2'$as_run'"' || {
- # Blame Lee E. McMahon (1931-1989) for sed's syntax. :-)
- sed -n '
- p
- /[$]LINENO/=
- ' <$as_myself |
- sed '
- s/[$]LINENO.*/&-/
- t lineno
- b
- :lineno
- N
- :loop
- s/[$]LINENO\([^'$as_cr_alnum'_].*\n\)\(.*\)/\2\1\2/
- t loop
- s/-\n.*//
- ' >$as_me.lineno &&
- chmod +x "$as_me.lineno" ||
- { $as_echo "$as_me: error: cannot create $as_me.lineno; rerun with a POSIX shell" >&2; as_fn_exit 1; }
-
- # Don't try to exec as it changes $[0], causing all sort of problems
- # (the dirname of $[0] is not the place where we might find the
- # original and so on. Autoconf is especially sensitive to this).
- . "./$as_me.lineno"
- # Exit status is that of the last command.
- exit
-}
-
-ECHO_C= ECHO_N= ECHO_T=
-case `echo -n x` in #(((((
--n*)
- case `echo 'xy\c'` in
- *c*) ECHO_T=' ';; # ECHO_T is single tab character.
- xy) ECHO_C='\c';;
- *) echo `echo ksh88 bug on AIX 6.1` > /dev/null
- ECHO_T=' ';;
- esac;;
-*)
- ECHO_N='-n';;
-esac
-
-rm -f conf$$ conf$$.exe conf$$.file
-if test -d conf$$.dir; then
- rm -f conf$$.dir/conf$$.file
-else
- rm -f conf$$.dir
- mkdir conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null
-fi
-if (echo >conf$$.file) 2>/dev/null; then
- if ln -s conf$$.file conf$$ 2>/dev/null; then
- as_ln_s='ln -s'
- # ... but there are two gotchas:
- # 1) On MSYS, both `ln -s file dir' and `ln file dir' fail.
- # 2) DJGPP < 2.04 has no symlinks; `ln -s' creates a wrapper executable.
- # In both cases, we have to default to `cp -p'.
- ln -s conf$$.file conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null && test ! -f conf$$.exe ||
- as_ln_s='cp -p'
- elif ln conf$$.file conf$$ 2>/dev/null; then
- as_ln_s=ln
- else
- as_ln_s='cp -p'
- fi
-else
- as_ln_s='cp -p'
-fi
-rm -f conf$$ conf$$.exe conf$$.dir/conf$$.file conf$$.file
-rmdir conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null
-
-if mkdir -p . 2>/dev/null; then
- as_mkdir_p='mkdir -p "$as_dir"'
-else
- test -d ./-p && rmdir ./-p
- as_mkdir_p=false
-fi
-
-if test -x / >/dev/null 2>&1; then
- as_test_x='test -x'
-else
- if ls -dL / >/dev/null 2>&1; then
- as_ls_L_option=L
- else
- as_ls_L_option=
- fi
- as_test_x='
- eval sh -c '\''
- if test -d "$1"; then
- test -d "$1/.";
- else
- case $1 in #(
- -*)set "./$1";;
- esac;
- case `ls -ld'$as_ls_L_option' "$1" 2>/dev/null` in #((
- ???[sx]*):;;*)false;;esac;fi
- '\'' sh
- '
-fi
-as_executable_p=$as_test_x
-
-# Sed expression to map a string onto a valid CPP name.
-as_tr_cpp="eval sed 'y%*$as_cr_letters%P$as_cr_LETTERS%;s%[^_$as_cr_alnum]%_%g'"
-
-# Sed expression to map a string onto a valid variable name.
-as_tr_sh="eval sed 'y%*+%pp%;s%[^_$as_cr_alnum]%_%g'"
-
-
-test -n "$DJDIR" || exec 7<&0 </dev/null
-exec 6>&1
-
-# Name of the host.
-# hostname on some systems (SVR3.2, old GNU/Linux) returns a bogus exit status,
-# so uname gets run too.
-ac_hostname=`(hostname || uname -n) 2>/dev/null | sed 1q`
-
-#
-# Initializations.
-#
-ac_default_prefix=/usr/local
-ac_clean_files=
-ac_config_libobj_dir=.
-LIBOBJS=
-cross_compiling=no
-subdirs=
-MFLAGS=
-MAKEFLAGS=
-
-# Identity of this package.
-PACKAGE_NAME=
-PACKAGE_TARNAME=
-PACKAGE_VERSION=
-PACKAGE_STRING=
-PACKAGE_BUGREPORT=
-PACKAGE_URL=
-
-ac_unique_file="autoconf/configure.in"
-ac_subst_vars='LTLIBOBJS
-LIBOBJS
-AWK
-AR
-ECHO
-CP
-RM
-MV
-INSTALL_DATA
-INSTALL_SCRIPT
-INSTALL_PROGRAM
-FALSEPRG
-TRUEPRG
-DATE
-VERSION
-bacula
-BUILD_DIR
-target_alias
-host_alias
-build_alias
-LIBS
-ECHO_T
-ECHO_N
-ECHO_C
-DEFS
-mandir
-localedir
-libdir
-psdir
-pdfdir
-dvidir
-htmldir
-infodir
-docdir
-oldincludedir
-includedir
-localstatedir
-sharedstatedir
-sysconfdir
-datadir
-datarootdir
-libexecdir
-sbindir
-bindir
-program_transform_name
-prefix
-exec_prefix
-PACKAGE_URL
-PACKAGE_BUGREPORT
-PACKAGE_STRING
-PACKAGE_VERSION
-PACKAGE_TARNAME
-PACKAGE_NAME
-PATH_SEPARATOR
-SHELL'
-ac_subst_files='MCOMMON'
-ac_user_opts='
-enable_option_checking
-with_bacula
-'
- ac_precious_vars='build_alias
-host_alias
-target_alias'
-
-
-# Initialize some variables set by options.
-ac_init_help=
-ac_init_version=false
-ac_unrecognized_opts=
-ac_unrecognized_sep=
-# The variables have the same names as the options, with
-# dashes changed to underlines.
-cache_file=/dev/null
-exec_prefix=NONE
-no_create=
-no_recursion=
-prefix=NONE
-program_prefix=NONE
-program_suffix=NONE
-program_transform_name=s,x,x,
-silent=
-site=
-srcdir=
-verbose=
-x_includes=NONE
-x_libraries=NONE
-
-# Installation directory options.
-# These are left unexpanded so users can "make install exec_prefix=/foo"
-# and all the variables that are supposed to be based on exec_prefix
-# by default will actually change.
-# Use braces instead of parens because sh, perl, etc. also accept them.
-# (The list follows the same order as the GNU Coding Standards.)
-bindir='${exec_prefix}/bin'
-sbindir='${exec_prefix}/sbin'
-libexecdir='${exec_prefix}/libexec'
-datarootdir='${prefix}/share'
-datadir='${datarootdir}'
-sysconfdir='${prefix}/etc'
-sharedstatedir='${prefix}/com'
-localstatedir='${prefix}/var'
-includedir='${prefix}/include'
-oldincludedir='/usr/include'
-docdir='${datarootdir}/doc/${PACKAGE}'
-infodir='${datarootdir}/info'
-htmldir='${docdir}'
-dvidir='${docdir}'
-pdfdir='${docdir}'
-psdir='${docdir}'
-libdir='${exec_prefix}/lib'
-localedir='${datarootdir}/locale'
-mandir='${datarootdir}/man'
-
-ac_prev=
-ac_dashdash=
-for ac_option
-do
- # If the previous option needs an argument, assign it.
- if test -n "$ac_prev"; then
- eval $ac_prev=\$ac_option
- ac_prev=
- continue
- fi
-
- case $ac_option in
- *=?*) ac_optarg=`expr "X$ac_option" : '[^=]*=\(.*\)'` ;;
- *=) ac_optarg= ;;
- *) ac_optarg=yes ;;
- esac
-
- # Accept the important Cygnus configure options, so we can diagnose typos.
-
- case $ac_dashdash$ac_option in
- --)
- ac_dashdash=yes ;;
-
- -bindir | --bindir | --bindi | --bind | --bin | --bi)
- ac_prev=bindir ;;
- -bindir=* | --bindir=* | --bindi=* | --bind=* | --bin=* | --bi=*)
- bindir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -build | --build | --buil | --bui | --bu)
- ac_prev=build_alias ;;
- -build=* | --build=* | --buil=* | --bui=* | --bu=*)
- build_alias=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -cache-file | --cache-file | --cache-fil | --cache-fi \
- | --cache-f | --cache- | --cache | --cach | --cac | --ca | --c)
- ac_prev=cache_file ;;
- -cache-file=* | --cache-file=* | --cache-fil=* | --cache-fi=* \
- | --cache-f=* | --cache-=* | --cache=* | --cach=* | --cac=* | --ca=* | --c=*)
- cache_file=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- --config-cache | -C)
- cache_file=config.cache ;;
-
- -datadir | --datadir | --datadi | --datad)
- ac_prev=datadir ;;
- -datadir=* | --datadir=* | --datadi=* | --datad=*)
- datadir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -datarootdir | --datarootdir | --datarootdi | --datarootd | --dataroot \
- | --dataroo | --dataro | --datar)
- ac_prev=datarootdir ;;
- -datarootdir=* | --datarootdir=* | --datarootdi=* | --datarootd=* \
- | --dataroot=* | --dataroo=* | --dataro=* | --datar=*)
- datarootdir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -disable-* | --disable-*)
- ac_useropt=`expr "x$ac_option" : 'x-*disable-\(.*\)'`
- # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
- expr "x$ac_useropt" : ".*[^-+._$as_cr_alnum]" >/dev/null &&
- as_fn_error $? "invalid feature name: $ac_useropt"
- ac_useropt_orig=$ac_useropt
- ac_useropt=`$as_echo "$ac_useropt" | sed 's/[-+.]/_/g'`
- case $ac_user_opts in
- *"
-"enable_$ac_useropt"
-"*) ;;
- *) ac_unrecognized_opts="$ac_unrecognized_opts$ac_unrecognized_sep--disable-$ac_useropt_orig"
- ac_unrecognized_sep=', ';;
- esac
- eval enable_$ac_useropt=no ;;
-
- -docdir | --docdir | --docdi | --doc | --do)
- ac_prev=docdir ;;
- -docdir=* | --docdir=* | --docdi=* | --doc=* | --do=*)
- docdir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -dvidir | --dvidir | --dvidi | --dvid | --dvi | --dv)
- ac_prev=dvidir ;;
- -dvidir=* | --dvidir=* | --dvidi=* | --dvid=* | --dvi=* | --dv=*)
- dvidir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -enable-* | --enable-*)
- ac_useropt=`expr "x$ac_option" : 'x-*enable-\([^=]*\)'`
- # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
- expr "x$ac_useropt" : ".*[^-+._$as_cr_alnum]" >/dev/null &&
- as_fn_error $? "invalid feature name: $ac_useropt"
- ac_useropt_orig=$ac_useropt
- ac_useropt=`$as_echo "$ac_useropt" | sed 's/[-+.]/_/g'`
- case $ac_user_opts in
- *"
-"enable_$ac_useropt"
-"*) ;;
- *) ac_unrecognized_opts="$ac_unrecognized_opts$ac_unrecognized_sep--enable-$ac_useropt_orig"
- ac_unrecognized_sep=', ';;
- esac
- eval enable_$ac_useropt=\$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -exec-prefix | --exec_prefix | --exec-prefix | --exec-prefi \
- | --exec-pref | --exec-pre | --exec-pr | --exec-p | --exec- \
- | --exec | --exe | --ex)
- ac_prev=exec_prefix ;;
- -exec-prefix=* | --exec_prefix=* | --exec-prefix=* | --exec-prefi=* \
- | --exec-pref=* | --exec-pre=* | --exec-pr=* | --exec-p=* | --exec-=* \
- | --exec=* | --exe=* | --ex=*)
- exec_prefix=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -gas | --gas | --ga | --g)
- # Obsolete; use --with-gas.
- with_gas=yes ;;
-
- -help | --help | --hel | --he | -h)
- ac_init_help=long ;;
- -help=r* | --help=r* | --hel=r* | --he=r* | -hr*)
- ac_init_help=recursive ;;
- -help=s* | --help=s* | --hel=s* | --he=s* | -hs*)
- ac_init_help=short ;;
-
- -host | --host | --hos | --ho)
- ac_prev=host_alias ;;
- -host=* | --host=* | --hos=* | --ho=*)
- host_alias=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -htmldir | --htmldir | --htmldi | --htmld | --html | --htm | --ht)
- ac_prev=htmldir ;;
- -htmldir=* | --htmldir=* | --htmldi=* | --htmld=* | --html=* | --htm=* \
- | --ht=*)
- htmldir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -includedir | --includedir | --includedi | --included | --include \
- | --includ | --inclu | --incl | --inc)
- ac_prev=includedir ;;
- -includedir=* | --includedir=* | --includedi=* | --included=* | --include=* \
- | --includ=* | --inclu=* | --incl=* | --inc=*)
- includedir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -infodir | --infodir | --infodi | --infod | --info | --inf)
- ac_prev=infodir ;;
- -infodir=* | --infodir=* | --infodi=* | --infod=* | --info=* | --inf=*)
- infodir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -libdir | --libdir | --libdi | --libd)
- ac_prev=libdir ;;
- -libdir=* | --libdir=* | --libdi=* | --libd=*)
- libdir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -libexecdir | --libexecdir | --libexecdi | --libexecd | --libexec \
- | --libexe | --libex | --libe)
- ac_prev=libexecdir ;;
- -libexecdir=* | --libexecdir=* | --libexecdi=* | --libexecd=* | --libexec=* \
- | --libexe=* | --libex=* | --libe=*)
- libexecdir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -localedir | --localedir | --localedi | --localed | --locale)
- ac_prev=localedir ;;
- -localedir=* | --localedir=* | --localedi=* | --localed=* | --locale=*)
- localedir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -localstatedir | --localstatedir | --localstatedi | --localstated \
- | --localstate | --localstat | --localsta | --localst | --locals)
- ac_prev=localstatedir ;;
- -localstatedir=* | --localstatedir=* | --localstatedi=* | --localstated=* \
- | --localstate=* | --localstat=* | --localsta=* | --localst=* | --locals=*)
- localstatedir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -mandir | --mandir | --mandi | --mand | --man | --ma | --m)
- ac_prev=mandir ;;
- -mandir=* | --mandir=* | --mandi=* | --mand=* | --man=* | --ma=* | --m=*)
- mandir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -nfp | --nfp | --nf)
- # Obsolete; use --without-fp.
- with_fp=no ;;
-
- -no-create | --no-create | --no-creat | --no-crea | --no-cre \
- | --no-cr | --no-c | -n)
- no_create=yes ;;
-
- -no-recursion | --no-recursion | --no-recursio | --no-recursi \
- | --no-recurs | --no-recur | --no-recu | --no-rec | --no-re | --no-r)
- no_recursion=yes ;;
-
- -oldincludedir | --oldincludedir | --oldincludedi | --oldincluded \
- | --oldinclude | --oldinclud | --oldinclu | --oldincl | --oldinc \
- | --oldin | --oldi | --old | --ol | --o)
- ac_prev=oldincludedir ;;
- -oldincludedir=* | --oldincludedir=* | --oldincludedi=* | --oldincluded=* \
- | --oldinclude=* | --oldinclud=* | --oldinclu=* | --oldincl=* | --oldinc=* \
- | --oldin=* | --oldi=* | --old=* | --ol=* | --o=*)
- oldincludedir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -prefix | --prefix | --prefi | --pref | --pre | --pr | --p)
- ac_prev=prefix ;;
- -prefix=* | --prefix=* | --prefi=* | --pref=* | --pre=* | --pr=* | --p=*)
- prefix=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -program-prefix | --program-prefix | --program-prefi | --program-pref \
- | --program-pre | --program-pr | --program-p)
- ac_prev=program_prefix ;;
- -program-prefix=* | --program-prefix=* | --program-prefi=* \
- | --program-pref=* | --program-pre=* | --program-pr=* | --program-p=*)
- program_prefix=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -program-suffix | --program-suffix | --program-suffi | --program-suff \
- | --program-suf | --program-su | --program-s)
- ac_prev=program_suffix ;;
- -program-suffix=* | --program-suffix=* | --program-suffi=* \
- | --program-suff=* | --program-suf=* | --program-su=* | --program-s=*)
- program_suffix=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -program-transform-name | --program-transform-name \
- | --program-transform-nam | --program-transform-na \
- | --program-transform-n | --program-transform- \
- | --program-transform | --program-transfor \
- | --program-transfo | --program-transf \
- | --program-trans | --program-tran \
- | --progr-tra | --program-tr | --program-t)
- ac_prev=program_transform_name ;;
- -program-transform-name=* | --program-transform-name=* \
- | --program-transform-nam=* | --program-transform-na=* \
- | --program-transform-n=* | --program-transform-=* \
- | --program-transform=* | --program-transfor=* \
- | --program-transfo=* | --program-transf=* \
- | --program-trans=* | --program-tran=* \
- | --progr-tra=* | --program-tr=* | --program-t=*)
- program_transform_name=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -pdfdir | --pdfdir | --pdfdi | --pdfd | --pdf | --pd)
- ac_prev=pdfdir ;;
- -pdfdir=* | --pdfdir=* | --pdfdi=* | --pdfd=* | --pdf=* | --pd=*)
- pdfdir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -psdir | --psdir | --psdi | --psd | --ps)
- ac_prev=psdir ;;
- -psdir=* | --psdir=* | --psdi=* | --psd=* | --ps=*)
- psdir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -q | -quiet | --quiet | --quie | --qui | --qu | --q \
- | -silent | --silent | --silen | --sile | --sil)
- silent=yes ;;
-
- -sbindir | --sbindir | --sbindi | --sbind | --sbin | --sbi | --sb)
- ac_prev=sbindir ;;
- -sbindir=* | --sbindir=* | --sbindi=* | --sbind=* | --sbin=* \
- | --sbi=* | --sb=*)
- sbindir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -sharedstatedir | --sharedstatedir | --sharedstatedi \
- | --sharedstated | --sharedstate | --sharedstat | --sharedsta \
- | --sharedst | --shareds | --shared | --share | --shar \
- | --sha | --sh)
- ac_prev=sharedstatedir ;;
- -sharedstatedir=* | --sharedstatedir=* | --sharedstatedi=* \
- | --sharedstated=* | --sharedstate=* | --sharedstat=* | --sharedsta=* \
- | --sharedst=* | --shareds=* | --shared=* | --share=* | --shar=* \
- | --sha=* | --sh=*)
- sharedstatedir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -site | --site | --sit)
- ac_prev=site ;;
- -site=* | --site=* | --sit=*)
- site=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -srcdir | --srcdir | --srcdi | --srcd | --src | --sr)
- ac_prev=srcdir ;;
- -srcdir=* | --srcdir=* | --srcdi=* | --srcd=* | --src=* | --sr=*)
- srcdir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -sysconfdir | --sysconfdir | --sysconfdi | --sysconfd | --sysconf \
- | --syscon | --sysco | --sysc | --sys | --sy)
- ac_prev=sysconfdir ;;
- -sysconfdir=* | --sysconfdir=* | --sysconfdi=* | --sysconfd=* | --sysconf=* \
- | --syscon=* | --sysco=* | --sysc=* | --sys=* | --sy=*)
- sysconfdir=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -target | --target | --targe | --targ | --tar | --ta | --t)
- ac_prev=target_alias ;;
- -target=* | --target=* | --targe=* | --targ=* | --tar=* | --ta=* | --t=*)
- target_alias=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -v | -verbose | --verbose | --verbos | --verbo | --verb)
- verbose=yes ;;
-
- -version | --version | --versio | --versi | --vers | -V)
- ac_init_version=: ;;
-
- -with-* | --with-*)
- ac_useropt=`expr "x$ac_option" : 'x-*with-\([^=]*\)'`
- # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
- expr "x$ac_useropt" : ".*[^-+._$as_cr_alnum]" >/dev/null &&
- as_fn_error $? "invalid package name: $ac_useropt"
- ac_useropt_orig=$ac_useropt
- ac_useropt=`$as_echo "$ac_useropt" | sed 's/[-+.]/_/g'`
- case $ac_user_opts in
- *"
-"with_$ac_useropt"
-"*) ;;
- *) ac_unrecognized_opts="$ac_unrecognized_opts$ac_unrecognized_sep--with-$ac_useropt_orig"
- ac_unrecognized_sep=', ';;
- esac
- eval with_$ac_useropt=\$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -without-* | --without-*)
- ac_useropt=`expr "x$ac_option" : 'x-*without-\(.*\)'`
- # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
- expr "x$ac_useropt" : ".*[^-+._$as_cr_alnum]" >/dev/null &&
- as_fn_error $? "invalid package name: $ac_useropt"
- ac_useropt_orig=$ac_useropt
- ac_useropt=`$as_echo "$ac_useropt" | sed 's/[-+.]/_/g'`
- case $ac_user_opts in
- *"
-"with_$ac_useropt"
-"*) ;;
- *) ac_unrecognized_opts="$ac_unrecognized_opts$ac_unrecognized_sep--without-$ac_useropt_orig"
- ac_unrecognized_sep=', ';;
- esac
- eval with_$ac_useropt=no ;;
-
- --x)
- # Obsolete; use --with-x.
- with_x=yes ;;
-
- -x-includes | --x-includes | --x-include | --x-includ | --x-inclu \
- | --x-incl | --x-inc | --x-in | --x-i)
- ac_prev=x_includes ;;
- -x-includes=* | --x-includes=* | --x-include=* | --x-includ=* | --x-inclu=* \
- | --x-incl=* | --x-inc=* | --x-in=* | --x-i=*)
- x_includes=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -x-libraries | --x-libraries | --x-librarie | --x-librari \
- | --x-librar | --x-libra | --x-libr | --x-lib | --x-li | --x-l)
- ac_prev=x_libraries ;;
- -x-libraries=* | --x-libraries=* | --x-librarie=* | --x-librari=* \
- | --x-librar=* | --x-libra=* | --x-libr=* | --x-lib=* | --x-li=* | --x-l=*)
- x_libraries=$ac_optarg ;;
-
- -*) as_fn_error $? "unrecognized option: \`$ac_option'
-Try \`$0 --help' for more information"
- ;;
-
- *=*)
- ac_envvar=`expr "x$ac_option" : 'x\([^=]*\)='`
- # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
- case $ac_envvar in #(
- '' | [0-9]* | *[!_$as_cr_alnum]* )
- as_fn_error $? "invalid variable name: \`$ac_envvar'" ;;
- esac
- eval $ac_envvar=\$ac_optarg
- export $ac_envvar ;;
-
- *)
- # FIXME: should be removed in autoconf 3.0.
- $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: you should use --build, --host, --target" >&2
- expr "x$ac_option" : ".*[^-._$as_cr_alnum]" >/dev/null &&
- $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: invalid host type: $ac_option" >&2
- : "${build_alias=$ac_option} ${host_alias=$ac_option} ${target_alias=$ac_option}"
- ;;
-
- esac
-done
-
-if test -n "$ac_prev"; then
- ac_option=--`echo $ac_prev | sed 's/_/-/g'`
- as_fn_error $? "missing argument to $ac_option"
-fi
-
-if test -n "$ac_unrecognized_opts"; then
- case $enable_option_checking in
- no) ;;
- fatal) as_fn_error $? "unrecognized options: $ac_unrecognized_opts" ;;
- *) $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: unrecognized options: $ac_unrecognized_opts" >&2 ;;
- esac
-fi
-
-# Check all directory arguments for consistency.
-for ac_var in exec_prefix prefix bindir sbindir libexecdir datarootdir \
- datadir sysconfdir sharedstatedir localstatedir includedir \
- oldincludedir docdir infodir htmldir dvidir pdfdir psdir \
- libdir localedir mandir
-do
- eval ac_val=\$$ac_var
- # Remove trailing slashes.
- case $ac_val in
- */ )
- ac_val=`expr "X$ac_val" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)' \| "X$ac_val" : 'X\(.*\)'`
- eval $ac_var=\$ac_val;;
- esac
- # Be sure to have absolute directory names.
- case $ac_val in
- [\\/$]* | ?:[\\/]* ) continue;;
- NONE | '' ) case $ac_var in *prefix ) continue;; esac;;
- esac
- as_fn_error $? "expected an absolute directory name for --$ac_var: $ac_val"
-done
-
-# There might be people who depend on the old broken behavior: `$host'
-# used to hold the argument of --host etc.
-# FIXME: To remove some day.
-build=$build_alias
-host=$host_alias
-target=$target_alias
-
-# FIXME: To remove some day.
-if test "x$host_alias" != x; then
- if test "x$build_alias" = x; then
- cross_compiling=maybe
- $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: if you wanted to set the --build type, don't use --host.
- If a cross compiler is detected then cross compile mode will be used" >&2
- elif test "x$build_alias" != "x$host_alias"; then
- cross_compiling=yes
- fi
-fi
-
-ac_tool_prefix=
-test -n "$host_alias" && ac_tool_prefix=$host_alias-
-
-test "$silent" = yes && exec 6>/dev/null
-
-
-ac_pwd=`pwd` && test -n "$ac_pwd" &&
-ac_ls_di=`ls -di .` &&
-ac_pwd_ls_di=`cd "$ac_pwd" && ls -di .` ||
- as_fn_error $? "working directory cannot be determined"
-test "X$ac_ls_di" = "X$ac_pwd_ls_di" ||
- as_fn_error $? "pwd does not report name of working directory"
-
-
-# Find the source files, if location was not specified.
-if test -z "$srcdir"; then
- ac_srcdir_defaulted=yes
- # Try the directory containing this script, then the parent directory.
- ac_confdir=`$as_dirname -- "$as_myself" ||
-$as_expr X"$as_myself" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \
- X"$as_myself" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \
- X"$as_myself" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \
- X"$as_myself" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null ||
-$as_echo X"$as_myself" |
- sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- /^X\(\/\/\)$/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- /^X\(\/\).*/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- s/.*/./; q'`
- srcdir=$ac_confdir
- if test ! -r "$srcdir/$ac_unique_file"; then
- srcdir=..
- fi
-else
- ac_srcdir_defaulted=no
-fi
-if test ! -r "$srcdir/$ac_unique_file"; then
- test "$ac_srcdir_defaulted" = yes && srcdir="$ac_confdir or .."
- as_fn_error $? "cannot find sources ($ac_unique_file) in $srcdir"
-fi
-ac_msg="sources are in $srcdir, but \`cd $srcdir' does not work"
-ac_abs_confdir=`(
- cd "$srcdir" && test -r "./$ac_unique_file" || as_fn_error $? "$ac_msg"
- pwd)`
-# When building in place, set srcdir=.
-if test "$ac_abs_confdir" = "$ac_pwd"; then
- srcdir=.
-fi
-# Remove unnecessary trailing slashes from srcdir.
-# Double slashes in file names in object file debugging info
-# mess up M-x gdb in Emacs.
-case $srcdir in
-*/) srcdir=`expr "X$srcdir" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)' \| "X$srcdir" : 'X\(.*\)'`;;
-esac
-for ac_var in $ac_precious_vars; do
- eval ac_env_${ac_var}_set=\${${ac_var}+set}
- eval ac_env_${ac_var}_value=\$${ac_var}
- eval ac_cv_env_${ac_var}_set=\${${ac_var}+set}
- eval ac_cv_env_${ac_var}_value=\$${ac_var}
-done
-
-#
-# Report the --help message.
-#
-if test "$ac_init_help" = "long"; then
- # Omit some internal or obsolete options to make the list less imposing.
- # This message is too long to be a string in the A/UX 3.1 sh.
- cat <<_ACEOF
-\`configure' configures this package to adapt to many kinds of systems.
-
-Usage: $0 [OPTION]... [VAR=VALUE]...
-
-To assign environment variables (e.g., CC, CFLAGS...), specify them as
-VAR=VALUE. See below for descriptions of some of the useful variables.
-
-Defaults for the options are specified in brackets.
-
-Configuration:
- -h, --help display this help and exit
- --help=short display options specific to this package
- --help=recursive display the short help of all the included packages
- -V, --version display version information and exit
- -q, --quiet, --silent do not print \`checking ...' messages
- --cache-file=FILE cache test results in FILE [disabled]
- -C, --config-cache alias for \`--cache-file=config.cache'
- -n, --no-create do not create output files
- --srcdir=DIR find the sources in DIR [configure dir or \`..']
-
-Installation directories:
- --prefix=PREFIX install architecture-independent files in PREFIX
- [$ac_default_prefix]
- --exec-prefix=EPREFIX install architecture-dependent files in EPREFIX
- [PREFIX]
-
-By default, \`make install' will install all the files in
-\`$ac_default_prefix/bin', \`$ac_default_prefix/lib' etc. You can specify
-an installation prefix other than \`$ac_default_prefix' using \`--prefix',
-for instance \`--prefix=\$HOME'.
-
-For better control, use the options below.
-
-Fine tuning of the installation directories:
- --bindir=DIR user executables [EPREFIX/bin]
- --sbindir=DIR system admin executables [EPREFIX/sbin]
- --libexecdir=DIR program executables [EPREFIX/libexec]
- --sysconfdir=DIR read-only single-machine data [PREFIX/etc]
- --sharedstatedir=DIR modifiable architecture-independent data [PREFIX/com]
- --localstatedir=DIR modifiable single-machine data [PREFIX/var]
- --libdir=DIR object code libraries [EPREFIX/lib]
- --includedir=DIR C header files [PREFIX/include]
- --oldincludedir=DIR C header files for non-gcc [/usr/include]
- --datarootdir=DIR read-only arch.-independent data root [PREFIX/share]
- --datadir=DIR read-only architecture-independent data [DATAROOTDIR]
- --infodir=DIR info documentation [DATAROOTDIR/info]
- --localedir=DIR locale-dependent data [DATAROOTDIR/locale]
- --mandir=DIR man documentation [DATAROOTDIR/man]
- --docdir=DIR documentation root [DATAROOTDIR/doc/PACKAGE]
- --htmldir=DIR html documentation [DOCDIR]
- --dvidir=DIR dvi documentation [DOCDIR]
- --pdfdir=DIR pdf documentation [DOCDIR]
- --psdir=DIR ps documentation [DOCDIR]
-_ACEOF
-
- cat <<\_ACEOF
-_ACEOF
-fi
-
-if test -n "$ac_init_help"; then
-
- cat <<\_ACEOF
-
-Optional Packages:
- --with-PACKAGE[=ARG] use PACKAGE [ARG=yes]
- --without-PACKAGE do not use PACKAGE (same as --with-PACKAGE=no)
- --with-bacula=PATH specify path to Bacula source
-
-Report bugs to the package provider.
-_ACEOF
-ac_status=$?
-fi
-
-if test "$ac_init_help" = "recursive"; then
- # If there are subdirs, report their specific --help.
- for ac_dir in : $ac_subdirs_all; do test "x$ac_dir" = x: && continue
- test -d "$ac_dir" ||
- { cd "$srcdir" && ac_pwd=`pwd` && srcdir=. && test -d "$ac_dir"; } ||
- continue
- ac_builddir=.
-
-case "$ac_dir" in
-.) ac_dir_suffix= ac_top_builddir_sub=. ac_top_build_prefix= ;;
-*)
- ac_dir_suffix=/`$as_echo "$ac_dir" | sed 's|^\.[\\/]||'`
- # A ".." for each directory in $ac_dir_suffix.
- ac_top_builddir_sub=`$as_echo "$ac_dir_suffix" | sed 's|/[^\\/]*|/..|g;s|/||'`
- case $ac_top_builddir_sub in
- "") ac_top_builddir_sub=. ac_top_build_prefix= ;;
- *) ac_top_build_prefix=$ac_top_builddir_sub/ ;;
- esac ;;
-esac
-ac_abs_top_builddir=$ac_pwd
-ac_abs_builddir=$ac_pwd$ac_dir_suffix
-# for backward compatibility:
-ac_top_builddir=$ac_top_build_prefix
-
-case $srcdir in
- .) # We are building in place.
- ac_srcdir=.
- ac_top_srcdir=$ac_top_builddir_sub
- ac_abs_top_srcdir=$ac_pwd ;;
- [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]* ) # Absolute name.
- ac_srcdir=$srcdir$ac_dir_suffix;
- ac_top_srcdir=$srcdir
- ac_abs_top_srcdir=$srcdir ;;
- *) # Relative name.
- ac_srcdir=$ac_top_build_prefix$srcdir$ac_dir_suffix
- ac_top_srcdir=$ac_top_build_prefix$srcdir
- ac_abs_top_srcdir=$ac_pwd/$srcdir ;;
-esac
-ac_abs_srcdir=$ac_abs_top_srcdir$ac_dir_suffix
-
- cd "$ac_dir" || { ac_status=$?; continue; }
- # Check for guested configure.
- if test -f "$ac_srcdir/configure.gnu"; then
- echo &&
- $SHELL "$ac_srcdir/configure.gnu" --help=recursive
- elif test -f "$ac_srcdir/configure"; then
- echo &&
- $SHELL "$ac_srcdir/configure" --help=recursive
- else
- $as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: no configuration information is in $ac_dir" >&2
- fi || ac_status=$?
- cd "$ac_pwd" || { ac_status=$?; break; }
- done
-fi
-
-test -n "$ac_init_help" && exit $ac_status
-if $ac_init_version; then
- cat <<\_ACEOF
-configure
-generated by GNU Autoconf 2.68
-
-Copyright (C) 2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation
-gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it.
-_ACEOF
- exit
-fi
-
-## ------------------------ ##
-## Autoconf initialization. ##
-## ------------------------ ##
-cat >config.log <<_ACEOF
-This file contains any messages produced by compilers while
-running configure, to aid debugging if configure makes a mistake.
-
-It was created by $as_me, which was
-generated by GNU Autoconf 2.68. Invocation command line was
-
- $ $0 $@
-
-_ACEOF
-exec 5>>config.log
-{
-cat <<_ASUNAME
-## --------- ##
-## Platform. ##
-## --------- ##
-
-hostname = `(hostname || uname -n) 2>/dev/null | sed 1q`
-uname -m = `(uname -m) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-uname -r = `(uname -r) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-uname -s = `(uname -s) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-uname -v = `(uname -v) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-
-/usr/bin/uname -p = `(/usr/bin/uname -p) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-/bin/uname -X = `(/bin/uname -X) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-
-/bin/arch = `(/bin/arch) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-/usr/bin/arch -k = `(/usr/bin/arch -k) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-/usr/convex/getsysinfo = `(/usr/convex/getsysinfo) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-/usr/bin/hostinfo = `(/usr/bin/hostinfo) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-/bin/machine = `(/bin/machine) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-/usr/bin/oslevel = `(/usr/bin/oslevel) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-/bin/universe = `(/bin/universe) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown`
-
-_ASUNAME
-
-as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
-for as_dir in $PATH
-do
- IFS=$as_save_IFS
- test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
- $as_echo "PATH: $as_dir"
- done
-IFS=$as_save_IFS
-
-} >&5
-
-cat >&5 <<_ACEOF
-
-
-## ----------- ##
-## Core tests. ##
-## ----------- ##
-
-_ACEOF
-
-
-# Keep a trace of the command line.
-# Strip out --no-create and --no-recursion so they do not pile up.
-# Strip out --silent because we don't want to record it for future runs.
-# Also quote any args containing shell meta-characters.
-# Make two passes to allow for proper duplicate-argument suppression.
-ac_configure_args=
-ac_configure_args0=
-ac_configure_args1=
-ac_must_keep_next=false
-for ac_pass in 1 2
-do
- for ac_arg
- do
- case $ac_arg in
- -no-create | --no-c* | -n | -no-recursion | --no-r*) continue ;;
- -q | -quiet | --quiet | --quie | --qui | --qu | --q \
- | -silent | --silent | --silen | --sile | --sil)
- continue ;;
- *\'*)
- ac_arg=`$as_echo "$ac_arg" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"` ;;
- esac
- case $ac_pass in
- 1) as_fn_append ac_configure_args0 " '$ac_arg'" ;;
- 2)
- as_fn_append ac_configure_args1 " '$ac_arg'"
- if test $ac_must_keep_next = true; then
- ac_must_keep_next=false # Got value, back to normal.
- else
- case $ac_arg in
- *=* | --config-cache | -C | -disable-* | --disable-* \
- | -enable-* | --enable-* | -gas | --g* | -nfp | --nf* \
- | -q | -quiet | --q* | -silent | --sil* | -v | -verb* \
- | -with-* | --with-* | -without-* | --without-* | --x)
- case "$ac_configure_args0 " in
- "$ac_configure_args1"*" '$ac_arg' "* ) continue ;;
- esac
- ;;
- -* ) ac_must_keep_next=true ;;
- esac
- fi
- as_fn_append ac_configure_args " '$ac_arg'"
- ;;
- esac
- done
-done
-{ ac_configure_args0=; unset ac_configure_args0;}
-{ ac_configure_args1=; unset ac_configure_args1;}
-
-# When interrupted or exit'd, cleanup temporary files, and complete
-# config.log. We remove comments because anyway the quotes in there
-# would cause problems or look ugly.
-# WARNING: Use '\'' to represent an apostrophe within the trap.
-# WARNING: Do not start the trap code with a newline, due to a FreeBSD 4.0 bug.
-trap 'exit_status=$?
- # Save into config.log some information that might help in debugging.
- {
- echo
-
- $as_echo "## ---------------- ##
-## Cache variables. ##
-## ---------------- ##"
- echo
- # The following way of writing the cache mishandles newlines in values,
-(
- for ac_var in `(set) 2>&1 | sed -n '\''s/^\([a-zA-Z_][a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)=.*/\1/p'\''`; do
- eval ac_val=\$$ac_var
- case $ac_val in #(
- *${as_nl}*)
- case $ac_var in #(
- *_cv_*) { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: cache variable $ac_var contains a newline" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: cache variable $ac_var contains a newline" >&2;} ;;
- esac
- case $ac_var in #(
- _ | IFS | as_nl) ;; #(
- BASH_ARGV | BASH_SOURCE) eval $ac_var= ;; #(
- *) { eval $ac_var=; unset $ac_var;} ;;
- esac ;;
- esac
- done
- (set) 2>&1 |
- case $as_nl`(ac_space='\'' '\''; set) 2>&1` in #(
- *${as_nl}ac_space=\ *)
- sed -n \
- "s/'\''/'\''\\\\'\'''\''/g;
- s/^\\([_$as_cr_alnum]*_cv_[_$as_cr_alnum]*\\)=\\(.*\\)/\\1='\''\\2'\''/p"
- ;; #(
- *)
- sed -n "/^[_$as_cr_alnum]*_cv_[_$as_cr_alnum]*=/p"
- ;;
- esac |
- sort
-)
- echo
-
- $as_echo "## ----------------- ##
-## Output variables. ##
-## ----------------- ##"
- echo
- for ac_var in $ac_subst_vars
- do
- eval ac_val=\$$ac_var
- case $ac_val in
- *\'\''*) ac_val=`$as_echo "$ac_val" | sed "s/'\''/'\''\\\\\\\\'\'''\''/g"`;;
- esac
- $as_echo "$ac_var='\''$ac_val'\''"
- done | sort
- echo
-
- if test -n "$ac_subst_files"; then
- $as_echo "## ------------------- ##
-## File substitutions. ##
-## ------------------- ##"
- echo
- for ac_var in $ac_subst_files
- do
- eval ac_val=\$$ac_var
- case $ac_val in
- *\'\''*) ac_val=`$as_echo "$ac_val" | sed "s/'\''/'\''\\\\\\\\'\'''\''/g"`;;
- esac
- $as_echo "$ac_var='\''$ac_val'\''"
- done | sort
- echo
- fi
-
- if test -s confdefs.h; then
- $as_echo "## ----------- ##
-## confdefs.h. ##
-## ----------- ##"
- echo
- cat confdefs.h
- echo
- fi
- test "$ac_signal" != 0 &&
- $as_echo "$as_me: caught signal $ac_signal"
- $as_echo "$as_me: exit $exit_status"
- } >&5
- rm -f core *.core core.conftest.* &&
- rm -f -r conftest* confdefs* conf$$* $ac_clean_files &&
- exit $exit_status
-' 0
-for ac_signal in 1 2 13 15; do
- trap 'ac_signal='$ac_signal'; as_fn_exit 1' $ac_signal
-done
-ac_signal=0
-
-# confdefs.h avoids OS command line length limits that DEFS can exceed.
-rm -f -r conftest* confdefs.h
-
-$as_echo "/* confdefs.h */" > confdefs.h
-
-# Predefined preprocessor variables.
-
-cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
-#define PACKAGE_NAME "$PACKAGE_NAME"
-_ACEOF
-
-cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
-#define PACKAGE_TARNAME "$PACKAGE_TARNAME"
-_ACEOF
-
-cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
-#define PACKAGE_VERSION "$PACKAGE_VERSION"
-_ACEOF
-
-cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
-#define PACKAGE_STRING "$PACKAGE_STRING"
-_ACEOF
-
-cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
-#define PACKAGE_BUGREPORT "$PACKAGE_BUGREPORT"
-_ACEOF
-
-cat >>confdefs.h <<_ACEOF
-#define PACKAGE_URL "$PACKAGE_URL"
-_ACEOF
-
-
-# Let the site file select an alternate cache file if it wants to.
-# Prefer an explicitly selected file to automatically selected ones.
-ac_site_file1=NONE
-ac_site_file2=NONE
-if test -n "$CONFIG_SITE"; then
- # We do not want a PATH search for config.site.
- case $CONFIG_SITE in #((
- -*) ac_site_file1=./$CONFIG_SITE;;
- */*) ac_site_file1=$CONFIG_SITE;;
- *) ac_site_file1=./$CONFIG_SITE;;
- esac
-elif test "x$prefix" != xNONE; then
- ac_site_file1=$prefix/share/config.site
- ac_site_file2=$prefix/etc/config.site
-else
- ac_site_file1=$ac_default_prefix/share/config.site
- ac_site_file2=$ac_default_prefix/etc/config.site
-fi
-for ac_site_file in "$ac_site_file1" "$ac_site_file2"
-do
- test "x$ac_site_file" = xNONE && continue
- if test /dev/null != "$ac_site_file" && test -r "$ac_site_file"; then
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: loading site script $ac_site_file" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: loading site script $ac_site_file" >&6;}
- sed 's/^/| /' "$ac_site_file" >&5
- . "$ac_site_file" \
- || { { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;}
-as_fn_error $? "failed to load site script $ac_site_file
-See \`config.log' for more details" "$LINENO" 5; }
- fi
-done
-
-if test -r "$cache_file"; then
- # Some versions of bash will fail to source /dev/null (special files
- # actually), so we avoid doing that. DJGPP emulates it as a regular file.
- if test /dev/null != "$cache_file" && test -f "$cache_file"; then
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: loading cache $cache_file" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: loading cache $cache_file" >&6;}
- case $cache_file in
- [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]* ) . "$cache_file";;
- *) . "./$cache_file";;
- esac
- fi
-else
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: creating cache $cache_file" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: creating cache $cache_file" >&6;}
- >$cache_file
-fi
-
-# Check that the precious variables saved in the cache have kept the same
-# value.
-ac_cache_corrupted=false
-for ac_var in $ac_precious_vars; do
- eval ac_old_set=\$ac_cv_env_${ac_var}_set
- eval ac_new_set=\$ac_env_${ac_var}_set
- eval ac_old_val=\$ac_cv_env_${ac_var}_value
- eval ac_new_val=\$ac_env_${ac_var}_value
- case $ac_old_set,$ac_new_set in
- set,)
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: \`$ac_var' was set to \`$ac_old_val' in the previous run" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: error: \`$ac_var' was set to \`$ac_old_val' in the previous run" >&2;}
- ac_cache_corrupted=: ;;
- ,set)
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: \`$ac_var' was not set in the previous run" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: error: \`$ac_var' was not set in the previous run" >&2;}
- ac_cache_corrupted=: ;;
- ,);;
- *)
- if test "x$ac_old_val" != "x$ac_new_val"; then
- # differences in whitespace do not lead to failure.
- ac_old_val_w=`echo x $ac_old_val`
- ac_new_val_w=`echo x $ac_new_val`
- if test "$ac_old_val_w" != "$ac_new_val_w"; then
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: \`$ac_var' has changed since the previous run:" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: error: \`$ac_var' has changed since the previous run:" >&2;}
- ac_cache_corrupted=:
- else
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: warning: ignoring whitespace changes in \`$ac_var' since the previous run:" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: warning: ignoring whitespace changes in \`$ac_var' since the previous run:" >&2;}
- eval $ac_var=\$ac_old_val
- fi
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: former value: \`$ac_old_val'" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: former value: \`$ac_old_val'" >&2;}
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: current value: \`$ac_new_val'" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: current value: \`$ac_new_val'" >&2;}
- fi;;
- esac
- # Pass precious variables to config.status.
- if test "$ac_new_set" = set; then
- case $ac_new_val in
- *\'*) ac_arg=$ac_var=`$as_echo "$ac_new_val" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"` ;;
- *) ac_arg=$ac_var=$ac_new_val ;;
- esac
- case " $ac_configure_args " in
- *" '$ac_arg' "*) ;; # Avoid dups. Use of quotes ensures accuracy.
- *) as_fn_append ac_configure_args " '$ac_arg'" ;;
- esac
- fi
-done
-if $ac_cache_corrupted; then
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: error: in \`$ac_pwd':" >&2;}
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: changes in the environment can compromise the build" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: error: changes in the environment can compromise the build" >&2;}
- as_fn_error $? "run \`make distclean' and/or \`rm $cache_file' and start over" "$LINENO" 5
-fi
-## -------------------- ##
-## Main body of script. ##
-## -------------------- ##
-
-ac_ext=c
-ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
-ac_compile='$CC -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext >&5'
-ac_link='$CC -o conftest$ac_exeext $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS >&5'
-ac_compiler_gnu=$ac_cv_c_compiler_gnu
-
-
-BUILD_DIR=`pwd`
-cd ..
-TOP_DIR=`pwd`
-cd ${BUILD_DIR}
-
-ac_aux_dir=
-for ac_dir in ${BUILD_DIR}/autoconf "$srcdir"/${BUILD_DIR}/autoconf; do
- if test -f "$ac_dir/install-sh"; then
- ac_aux_dir=$ac_dir
- ac_install_sh="$ac_aux_dir/install-sh -c"
- break
- elif test -f "$ac_dir/install.sh"; then
- ac_aux_dir=$ac_dir
- ac_install_sh="$ac_aux_dir/install.sh -c"
- break
- elif test -f "$ac_dir/shtool"; then
- ac_aux_dir=$ac_dir
- ac_install_sh="$ac_aux_dir/shtool install -c"
- break
- fi
-done
-if test -z "$ac_aux_dir"; then
- as_fn_error $? "cannot find install-sh, install.sh, or shtool in ${BUILD_DIR}/autoconf \"$srcdir\"/${BUILD_DIR}/autoconf" "$LINENO" 5
-fi
-
-# These three variables are undocumented and unsupported,
-# and are intended to be withdrawn in a future Autoconf release.
-# They can cause serious problems if a builder's source tree is in a directory
-# whose full name contains unusual characters.
-ac_config_guess="$SHELL $ac_aux_dir/config.guess" # Please don't use this var.
-ac_config_sub="$SHELL $ac_aux_dir/config.sub" # Please don't use this var.
-ac_configure="$SHELL $ac_aux_dir/configure" # Please don't use this var.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-# ------------------------------------------
-# Where to get Bacula source
-# ------------------------------------------
-
-# Check whether --with-bacula was given.
-if test "${with_bacula+set}" = set; then :
- withval=$with_bacula;
- if test "x$withval" != "xno" ; then
- bacula=$withval
- fi
-
-
-fi
-
-
-
-if test "x$bacula" = "x" ; then
- as_fn_error $? "The Bacula source directory must be specified. Use --with-bacula=<path>" "$LINENO" 5
-fi
-
-VERSION=`sed -n -e 's/^#define VERSION.*"\(.*\)"$/\1/p' ${bacula}/src/version.h`
-DATE=`sed -n -e 's/^#define BDATE.*"\(.*\)"$/\1/p' ${bacula}/src/version.h`
-if test "x$VERSION" = "x" ; then
- as_fn_error $? "Bacula version not found" "$LINENO" 5
-fi
-echo "configuring for Bacula $VERSION ($DATE)"
-
-for ac_prog in true
-do
- # Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args.
-set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2
-{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
-$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
-if ${ac_cv_path_TRUEPRG+:} false; then :
- $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
-else
- case $TRUEPRG in
- [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*)
- ac_cv_path_TRUEPRG="$TRUEPRG" # Let the user override the test with a path.
- ;;
- *)
- as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
-for as_dir in $PATH
-do
- IFS=$as_save_IFS
- test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
- for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
- if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then
- ac_cv_path_TRUEPRG="$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"
- $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
- break 2
- fi
-done
- done
-IFS=$as_save_IFS
-
- ;;
-esac
-fi
-TRUEPRG=$ac_cv_path_TRUEPRG
-if test -n "$TRUEPRG"; then
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $TRUEPRG" >&5
-$as_echo "$TRUEPRG" >&6; }
-else
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
-$as_echo "no" >&6; }
-fi
-
-
- test -n "$TRUEPRG" && break
-done
-test -n "$TRUEPRG" || TRUEPRG=":"
-
-for ac_prog in false
-do
- # Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args.
-set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2
-{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
-$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
-if ${ac_cv_path_FALSEPRG+:} false; then :
- $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
-else
- case $FALSEPRG in
- [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*)
- ac_cv_path_FALSEPRG="$FALSEPRG" # Let the user override the test with a path.
- ;;
- *)
- as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
-for as_dir in $PATH
-do
- IFS=$as_save_IFS
- test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
- for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
- if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then
- ac_cv_path_FALSEPRG="$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"
- $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
- break 2
- fi
-done
- done
-IFS=$as_save_IFS
-
- ;;
-esac
-fi
-FALSEPRG=$ac_cv_path_FALSEPRG
-if test -n "$FALSEPRG"; then
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $FALSEPRG" >&5
-$as_echo "$FALSEPRG" >&6; }
-else
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
-$as_echo "no" >&6; }
-fi
-
-
- test -n "$FALSEPRG" && break
-done
-test -n "$FALSEPRG" || FALSEPRG=":"
-
-# Find a good install program. We prefer a C program (faster),
-# so one script is as good as another. But avoid the broken or
-# incompatible versions:
-# SysV /etc/install, /usr/sbin/install
-# SunOS /usr/etc/install
-# IRIX /sbin/install
-# AIX /bin/install
-# AmigaOS /C/install, which installs bootblocks on floppy discs
-# AIX 4 /usr/bin/installbsd, which doesn't work without a -g flag
-# AFS /usr/afsws/bin/install, which mishandles nonexistent args
-# SVR4 /usr/ucb/install, which tries to use the nonexistent group "staff"
-# OS/2's system install, which has a completely different semantic
-# ./install, which can be erroneously created by make from ./install.sh.
-# Reject install programs that cannot install multiple files.
-{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for a BSD-compatible install" >&5
-$as_echo_n "checking for a BSD-compatible install... " >&6; }
-if test -z "$INSTALL"; then
-if ${ac_cv_path_install+:} false; then :
- $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
-else
- as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
-for as_dir in $PATH
-do
- IFS=$as_save_IFS
- test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
- # Account for people who put trailing slashes in PATH elements.
-case $as_dir/ in #((
- ./ | .// | /[cC]/* | \
- /etc/* | /usr/sbin/* | /usr/etc/* | /sbin/* | /usr/afsws/bin/* | \
- ?:[\\/]os2[\\/]install[\\/]* | ?:[\\/]OS2[\\/]INSTALL[\\/]* | \
- /usr/ucb/* ) ;;
- *)
- # OSF1 and SCO ODT 3.0 have their own names for install.
- # Don't use installbsd from OSF since it installs stuff as root
- # by default.
- for ac_prog in ginstall scoinst install; do
- for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
- if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext"; }; then
- if test $ac_prog = install &&
- grep dspmsg "$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext" >/dev/null 2>&1; then
- # AIX install. It has an incompatible calling convention.
- :
- elif test $ac_prog = install &&
- grep pwplus "$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext" >/dev/null 2>&1; then
- # program-specific install script used by HP pwplus--don't use.
- :
- else
- rm -rf conftest.one conftest.two conftest.dir
- echo one > conftest.one
- echo two > conftest.two
- mkdir conftest.dir
- if "$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext" -c conftest.one conftest.two "`pwd`/conftest.dir" &&
- test -s conftest.one && test -s conftest.two &&
- test -s conftest.dir/conftest.one &&
- test -s conftest.dir/conftest.two
- then
- ac_cv_path_install="$as_dir/$ac_prog$ac_exec_ext -c"
- break 3
- fi
- fi
- fi
- done
- done
- ;;
-esac
-
- done
-IFS=$as_save_IFS
-
-rm -rf conftest.one conftest.two conftest.dir
-
-fi
- if test "${ac_cv_path_install+set}" = set; then
- INSTALL=$ac_cv_path_install
- else
- # As a last resort, use the slow shell script. Don't cache a
- # value for INSTALL within a source directory, because that will
- # break other packages using the cache if that directory is
- # removed, or if the value is a relative name.
- INSTALL=$ac_install_sh
- fi
-fi
-{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $INSTALL" >&5
-$as_echo "$INSTALL" >&6; }
-
-# Use test -z because SunOS4 sh mishandles braces in ${var-val}.
-# It thinks the first close brace ends the variable substitution.
-test -z "$INSTALL_PROGRAM" && INSTALL_PROGRAM='${INSTALL}'
-
-test -z "$INSTALL_SCRIPT" && INSTALL_SCRIPT='${INSTALL}'
-
-test -z "$INSTALL_DATA" && INSTALL_DATA='${INSTALL} -m 644'
-
-# Extract the first word of "mv", so it can be a program name with args.
-set dummy mv; ac_word=$2
-{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
-$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
-if ${ac_cv_path_MV+:} false; then :
- $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
-else
- case $MV in
- [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*)
- ac_cv_path_MV="$MV" # Let the user override the test with a path.
- ;;
- *)
- as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
-for as_dir in $PATH
-do
- IFS=$as_save_IFS
- test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
- for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
- if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then
- ac_cv_path_MV="$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"
- $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
- break 2
- fi
-done
- done
-IFS=$as_save_IFS
-
- test -z "$ac_cv_path_MV" && ac_cv_path_MV="mv"
- ;;
-esac
-fi
-MV=$ac_cv_path_MV
-if test -n "$MV"; then
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $MV" >&5
-$as_echo "$MV" >&6; }
-else
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
-$as_echo "no" >&6; }
-fi
-
-
-# Extract the first word of "rm", so it can be a program name with args.
-set dummy rm; ac_word=$2
-{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
-$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
-if ${ac_cv_path_RM+:} false; then :
- $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
-else
- case $RM in
- [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*)
- ac_cv_path_RM="$RM" # Let the user override the test with a path.
- ;;
- *)
- as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
-for as_dir in $PATH
-do
- IFS=$as_save_IFS
- test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
- for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
- if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then
- ac_cv_path_RM="$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"
- $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
- break 2
- fi
-done
- done
-IFS=$as_save_IFS
-
- test -z "$ac_cv_path_RM" && ac_cv_path_RM="rm"
- ;;
-esac
-fi
-RM=$ac_cv_path_RM
-if test -n "$RM"; then
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $RM" >&5
-$as_echo "$RM" >&6; }
-else
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
-$as_echo "no" >&6; }
-fi
-
-
-# Extract the first word of "cp", so it can be a program name with args.
-set dummy cp; ac_word=$2
-{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
-$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
-if ${ac_cv_path_CP+:} false; then :
- $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
-else
- case $CP in
- [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*)
- ac_cv_path_CP="$CP" # Let the user override the test with a path.
- ;;
- *)
- as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
-for as_dir in $PATH
-do
- IFS=$as_save_IFS
- test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
- for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
- if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then
- ac_cv_path_CP="$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"
- $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
- break 2
- fi
-done
- done
-IFS=$as_save_IFS
-
- test -z "$ac_cv_path_CP" && ac_cv_path_CP="cp"
- ;;
-esac
-fi
-CP=$ac_cv_path_CP
-if test -n "$CP"; then
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $CP" >&5
-$as_echo "$CP" >&6; }
-else
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
-$as_echo "no" >&6; }
-fi
-
-
-# Extract the first word of "echo", so it can be a program name with args.
-set dummy echo; ac_word=$2
-{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
-$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
-if ${ac_cv_path_ECHO+:} false; then :
- $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
-else
- case $ECHO in
- [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*)
- ac_cv_path_ECHO="$ECHO" # Let the user override the test with a path.
- ;;
- *)
- as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
-for as_dir in $PATH
-do
- IFS=$as_save_IFS
- test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
- for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
- if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then
- ac_cv_path_ECHO="$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"
- $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
- break 2
- fi
-done
- done
-IFS=$as_save_IFS
-
- test -z "$ac_cv_path_ECHO" && ac_cv_path_ECHO="echo"
- ;;
-esac
-fi
-ECHO=$ac_cv_path_ECHO
-if test -n "$ECHO"; then
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $ECHO" >&5
-$as_echo "$ECHO" >&6; }
-else
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
-$as_echo "no" >&6; }
-fi
-
-
-# Extract the first word of "ar", so it can be a program name with args.
-set dummy ar; ac_word=$2
-{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
-$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
-if ${ac_cv_path_AR+:} false; then :
- $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
-else
- case $AR in
- [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*)
- ac_cv_path_AR="$AR" # Let the user override the test with a path.
- ;;
- *)
- as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
-for as_dir in $PATH
-do
- IFS=$as_save_IFS
- test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
- for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
- if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then
- ac_cv_path_AR="$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"
- $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
- break 2
- fi
-done
- done
-IFS=$as_save_IFS
-
- test -z "$ac_cv_path_AR" && ac_cv_path_AR="ar"
- ;;
-esac
-fi
-AR=$ac_cv_path_AR
-if test -n "$AR"; then
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $AR" >&5
-$as_echo "$AR" >&6; }
-else
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
-$as_echo "no" >&6; }
-fi
-
-
-for ac_prog in gawk mawk nawk awk
-do
- # Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args.
-set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2
-{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
-$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
-if ${ac_cv_prog_AWK+:} false; then :
- $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
-else
- if test -n "$AWK"; then
- ac_cv_prog_AWK="$AWK" # Let the user override the test.
-else
-as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
-for as_dir in $PATH
-do
- IFS=$as_save_IFS
- test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
- for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
- if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then
- ac_cv_prog_AWK="$ac_prog"
- $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
- break 2
- fi
-done
- done
-IFS=$as_save_IFS
-
-fi
-fi
-AWK=$ac_cv_prog_AWK
-if test -n "$AWK"; then
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $AWK" >&5
-$as_echo "$AWK" >&6; }
-else
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
-$as_echo "no" >&6; }
-fi
-
-
- test -n "$AWK" && break
-done
-
-# Some AWK programs fail, so test it and warn the user
-if echo xfoo | $AWK 'BEGIN { prog=ARGV1; ARGC=1 }
- { if ((prog == $2) || (("(" prog ")") == $2) ||
- (("" prog "") == $2) ||
- ((prog ":") == $2)) { print $1 ; exit 0 } }' xfoo>/dev/null; then :;
-else
- as_fn_error $? "!!!!!!!!! WARNING !!!!!!!!!!!!!!
- The regex engine of $AWK is too broken to be used you
- might want to install GNU AWK.
- !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!" "$LINENO" 5
-fi
-THE_AWK=$AWK
-# Extract the first word of "$THE_AWK", so it can be a program name with args.
-set dummy $THE_AWK; ac_word=$2
-{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: checking for $ac_word" >&5
-$as_echo_n "checking for $ac_word... " >&6; }
-if ${ac_cv_path_AWK+:} false; then :
- $as_echo_n "(cached) " >&6
-else
- case $AWK in
- [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*)
- ac_cv_path_AWK="$AWK" # Let the user override the test with a path.
- ;;
- *)
- as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
-for as_dir in $PATH
-do
- IFS=$as_save_IFS
- test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
- for ac_exec_ext in '' $ac_executable_extensions; do
- if { test -f "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" && $as_test_x "$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"; }; then
- ac_cv_path_AWK="$as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext"
- $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: found $as_dir/$ac_word$ac_exec_ext" >&5
- break 2
- fi
-done
- done
-IFS=$as_save_IFS
-
- test -z "$ac_cv_path_AWK" && ac_cv_path_AWK="$THE_AWK"
- ;;
-esac
-fi
-AWK=$ac_cv_path_AWK
-if test -n "$AWK"; then
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: $AWK" >&5
-$as_echo "$AWK" >&6; }
-else
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: result: no" >&5
-$as_echo "no" >&6; }
-fi
-
-
-
-# -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# If the user has not set --exec-prefix, we default to ${prefix}
-# -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-if test x${exec_prefix} = xNONE ; then
- exec_prefix=${prefix}
-fi
-
-
-
-
-
-MCOMMON=./autoconf/Make.common
-
-
-
-ac_config_files="$ac_config_files autoconf/Make.common Makefile manuals/update_version manuals/version.tex manuals/bacula.sty manuals/en/console/Makefile manuals/en/main/Makefile manuals/en/developers/Makefile manuals/en/problems/Makefile manuals/en/utility/Makefile manuals/en/misc/Makefile manuals/de/console/Makefile manuals/de/main/Makefile manuals/de/developers/Makefile manuals/de/problems/Makefile manuals/de/utility/Makefile manuals/de/misc/Makefile manuals/fr/console/Makefile manuals/fr/main/Makefile manuals/fr/developers/Makefile manuals/fr/problems/Makefile manuals/fr/utility/Makefile manuals/fr/misc/Makefile manuals/es/console/Makefile manuals/es/main/Makefile manuals/es/developers/Makefile manuals/es/problems/Makefile manuals/es/utility/Makefile manuals/es/misc/Makefile bacula-web/Makefile bacula-web/version.tex $PFILES"
-
-ac_config_commands="$ac_config_commands default"
-
-cat >confcache <<\_ACEOF
-# This file is a shell script that caches the results of configure
-# tests run on this system so they can be shared between configure
-# scripts and configure runs, see configure's option --config-cache.
-# It is not useful on other systems. If it contains results you don't
-# want to keep, you may remove or edit it.
-#
-# config.status only pays attention to the cache file if you give it
-# the --recheck option to rerun configure.
-#
-# `ac_cv_env_foo' variables (set or unset) will be overridden when
-# loading this file, other *unset* `ac_cv_foo' will be assigned the
-# following values.
-
-_ACEOF
-
-# The following way of writing the cache mishandles newlines in values,
-# but we know of no workaround that is simple, portable, and efficient.
-# So, we kill variables containing newlines.
-# Ultrix sh set writes to stderr and can't be redirected directly,
-# and sets the high bit in the cache file unless we assign to the vars.
-(
- for ac_var in `(set) 2>&1 | sed -n 's/^\([a-zA-Z_][a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)=.*/\1/p'`; do
- eval ac_val=\$$ac_var
- case $ac_val in #(
- *${as_nl}*)
- case $ac_var in #(
- *_cv_*) { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: cache variable $ac_var contains a newline" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: cache variable $ac_var contains a newline" >&2;} ;;
- esac
- case $ac_var in #(
- _ | IFS | as_nl) ;; #(
- BASH_ARGV | BASH_SOURCE) eval $ac_var= ;; #(
- *) { eval $ac_var=; unset $ac_var;} ;;
- esac ;;
- esac
- done
-
- (set) 2>&1 |
- case $as_nl`(ac_space=' '; set) 2>&1` in #(
- *${as_nl}ac_space=\ *)
- # `set' does not quote correctly, so add quotes: double-quote
- # substitution turns \\\\ into \\, and sed turns \\ into \.
- sed -n \
- "s/'/'\\\\''/g;
- s/^\\([_$as_cr_alnum]*_cv_[_$as_cr_alnum]*\\)=\\(.*\\)/\\1='\\2'/p"
- ;; #(
- *)
- # `set' quotes correctly as required by POSIX, so do not add quotes.
- sed -n "/^[_$as_cr_alnum]*_cv_[_$as_cr_alnum]*=/p"
- ;;
- esac |
- sort
-) |
- sed '
- /^ac_cv_env_/b end
- t clear
- :clear
- s/^\([^=]*\)=\(.*[{}].*\)$/test "${\1+set}" = set || &/
- t end
- s/^\([^=]*\)=\(.*\)$/\1=${\1=\2}/
- :end' >>confcache
-if diff "$cache_file" confcache >/dev/null 2>&1; then :; else
- if test -w "$cache_file"; then
- if test "x$cache_file" != "x/dev/null"; then
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: updating cache $cache_file" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: updating cache $cache_file" >&6;}
- if test ! -f "$cache_file" || test -h "$cache_file"; then
- cat confcache >"$cache_file"
- else
- case $cache_file in #(
- */* | ?:*)
- mv -f confcache "$cache_file"$$ &&
- mv -f "$cache_file"$$ "$cache_file" ;; #(
- *)
- mv -f confcache "$cache_file" ;;
- esac
- fi
- fi
- else
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: not updating unwritable cache $cache_file" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: not updating unwritable cache $cache_file" >&6;}
- fi
-fi
-rm -f confcache
-
-test "x$prefix" = xNONE && prefix=$ac_default_prefix
-# Let make expand exec_prefix.
-test "x$exec_prefix" = xNONE && exec_prefix='${prefix}'
-
-# Transform confdefs.h into DEFS.
-# Protect against shell expansion while executing Makefile rules.
-# Protect against Makefile macro expansion.
-#
-# If the first sed substitution is executed (which looks for macros that
-# take arguments), then branch to the quote section. Otherwise,
-# look for a macro that doesn't take arguments.
-ac_script='
-:mline
-/\\$/{
- N
- s,\\\n,,
- b mline
-}
-t clear
-:clear
-s/^[ ]*#[ ]*define[ ][ ]*\([^ (][^ (]*([^)]*)\)[ ]*\(.*\)/-D\1=\2/g
-t quote
-s/^[ ]*#[ ]*define[ ][ ]*\([^ ][^ ]*\)[ ]*\(.*\)/-D\1=\2/g
-t quote
-b any
-:quote
-s/[ `~#$^&*(){}\\|;'\''"<>?]/\\&/g
-s/\[/\\&/g
-s/\]/\\&/g
-s/\$/$$/g
-H
-:any
-${
- g
- s/^\n//
- s/\n/ /g
- p
-}
-'
-DEFS=`sed -n "$ac_script" confdefs.h`
-
-
-ac_libobjs=
-ac_ltlibobjs=
-U=
-for ac_i in : $LIBOBJS; do test "x$ac_i" = x: && continue
- # 1. Remove the extension, and $U if already installed.
- ac_script='s/\$U\././;s/\.o$//;s/\.obj$//'
- ac_i=`$as_echo "$ac_i" | sed "$ac_script"`
- # 2. Prepend LIBOBJDIR. When used with automake>=1.10 LIBOBJDIR
- # will be set to the directory where LIBOBJS objects are built.
- as_fn_append ac_libobjs " \${LIBOBJDIR}$ac_i\$U.$ac_objext"
- as_fn_append ac_ltlibobjs " \${LIBOBJDIR}$ac_i"'$U.lo'
-done
-LIBOBJS=$ac_libobjs
-
-LTLIBOBJS=$ac_ltlibobjs
-
-
-
-: "${CONFIG_STATUS=./config.status}"
-ac_write_fail=0
-ac_clean_files_save=$ac_clean_files
-ac_clean_files="$ac_clean_files $CONFIG_STATUS"
-{ $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: creating $CONFIG_STATUS" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: creating $CONFIG_STATUS" >&6;}
-as_write_fail=0
-cat >$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ASEOF || as_write_fail=1
-#! $SHELL
-# Generated by $as_me.
-# Run this file to recreate the current configuration.
-# Compiler output produced by configure, useful for debugging
-# configure, is in config.log if it exists.
-
-debug=false
-ac_cs_recheck=false
-ac_cs_silent=false
-
-SHELL=\${CONFIG_SHELL-$SHELL}
-export SHELL
-_ASEOF
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ASEOF || as_write_fail=1
-## -------------------- ##
-## M4sh Initialization. ##
-## -------------------- ##
-
-# Be more Bourne compatible
-DUALCASE=1; export DUALCASE # for MKS sh
-if test -n "${ZSH_VERSION+set}" && (emulate sh) >/dev/null 2>&1; then :
- emulate sh
- NULLCMD=:
- # Pre-4.2 versions of Zsh do word splitting on ${1+"$@"}, which
- # is contrary to our usage. Disable this feature.
- alias -g '${1+"$@"}'='"$@"'
- setopt NO_GLOB_SUBST
-else
- case `(set -o) 2>/dev/null` in #(
- *posix*) :
- set -o posix ;; #(
- *) :
- ;;
-esac
-fi
-
-
-as_nl='
-'
-export as_nl
-# Printing a long string crashes Solaris 7 /usr/bin/printf.
-as_echo='\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'
-as_echo=$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo
-as_echo=$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo$as_echo
-# Prefer a ksh shell builtin over an external printf program on Solaris,
-# but without wasting forks for bash or zsh.
-if test -z "$BASH_VERSION$ZSH_VERSION" \
- && (test "X`print -r -- $as_echo`" = "X$as_echo") 2>/dev/null; then
- as_echo='print -r --'
- as_echo_n='print -rn --'
-elif (test "X`printf %s $as_echo`" = "X$as_echo") 2>/dev/null; then
- as_echo='printf %s\n'
- as_echo_n='printf %s'
-else
- if test "X`(/usr/ucb/echo -n -n $as_echo) 2>/dev/null`" = "X-n $as_echo"; then
- as_echo_body='eval /usr/ucb/echo -n "$1$as_nl"'
- as_echo_n='/usr/ucb/echo -n'
- else
- as_echo_body='eval expr "X$1" : "X\\(.*\\)"'
- as_echo_n_body='eval
- arg=$1;
- case $arg in #(
- *"$as_nl"*)
- expr "X$arg" : "X\\(.*\\)$as_nl";
- arg=`expr "X$arg" : ".*$as_nl\\(.*\\)"`;;
- esac;
- expr "X$arg" : "X\\(.*\\)" | tr -d "$as_nl"
- '
- export as_echo_n_body
- as_echo_n='sh -c $as_echo_n_body as_echo'
- fi
- export as_echo_body
- as_echo='sh -c $as_echo_body as_echo'
-fi
-
-# The user is always right.
-if test "${PATH_SEPARATOR+set}" != set; then
- PATH_SEPARATOR=:
- (PATH='/bin;/bin'; FPATH=$PATH; sh -c :) >/dev/null 2>&1 && {
- (PATH='/bin:/bin'; FPATH=$PATH; sh -c :) >/dev/null 2>&1 ||
- PATH_SEPARATOR=';'
- }
-fi
-
-
-# IFS
-# We need space, tab and new line, in precisely that order. Quoting is
-# there to prevent editors from complaining about space-tab.
-# (If _AS_PATH_WALK were called with IFS unset, it would disable word
-# splitting by setting IFS to empty value.)
-IFS=" "" $as_nl"
-
-# Find who we are. Look in the path if we contain no directory separator.
-as_myself=
-case $0 in #((
- *[\\/]* ) as_myself=$0 ;;
- *) as_save_IFS=$IFS; IFS=$PATH_SEPARATOR
-for as_dir in $PATH
-do
- IFS=$as_save_IFS
- test -z "$as_dir" && as_dir=.
- test -r "$as_dir/$0" && as_myself=$as_dir/$0 && break
- done
-IFS=$as_save_IFS
-
- ;;
-esac
-# We did not find ourselves, most probably we were run as `sh COMMAND'
-# in which case we are not to be found in the path.
-if test "x$as_myself" = x; then
- as_myself=$0
-fi
-if test ! -f "$as_myself"; then
- $as_echo "$as_myself: error: cannot find myself; rerun with an absolute file name" >&2
- exit 1
-fi
-
-# Unset variables that we do not need and which cause bugs (e.g. in
-# pre-3.0 UWIN ksh). But do not cause bugs in bash 2.01; the "|| exit 1"
-# suppresses any "Segmentation fault" message there. '((' could
-# trigger a bug in pdksh 5.2.14.
-for as_var in BASH_ENV ENV MAIL MAILPATH
-do eval test x\${$as_var+set} = xset \
- && ( (unset $as_var) || exit 1) >/dev/null 2>&1 && unset $as_var || :
-done
-PS1='$ '
-PS2='> '
-PS4='+ '
-
-# NLS nuisances.
-LC_ALL=C
-export LC_ALL
-LANGUAGE=C
-export LANGUAGE
-
-# CDPATH.
-(unset CDPATH) >/dev/null 2>&1 && unset CDPATH
-
-
-# as_fn_error STATUS ERROR [LINENO LOG_FD]
-# ----------------------------------------
-# Output "`basename $0`: error: ERROR" to stderr. If LINENO and LOG_FD are
-# provided, also output the error to LOG_FD, referencing LINENO. Then exit the
-# script with STATUS, using 1 if that was 0.
-as_fn_error ()
-{
- as_status=$1; test $as_status -eq 0 && as_status=1
- if test "$4"; then
- as_lineno=${as_lineno-"$3"} as_lineno_stack=as_lineno_stack=$as_lineno_stack
- $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: error: $2" >&$4
- fi
- $as_echo "$as_me: error: $2" >&2
- as_fn_exit $as_status
-} # as_fn_error
-
-
-# as_fn_set_status STATUS
-# -----------------------
-# Set $? to STATUS, without forking.
-as_fn_set_status ()
-{
- return $1
-} # as_fn_set_status
-
-# as_fn_exit STATUS
-# -----------------
-# Exit the shell with STATUS, even in a "trap 0" or "set -e" context.
-as_fn_exit ()
-{
- set +e
- as_fn_set_status $1
- exit $1
-} # as_fn_exit
-
-# as_fn_unset VAR
-# ---------------
-# Portably unset VAR.
-as_fn_unset ()
-{
- { eval $1=; unset $1;}
-}
-as_unset=as_fn_unset
-# as_fn_append VAR VALUE
-# ----------------------
-# Append the text in VALUE to the end of the definition contained in VAR. Take
-# advantage of any shell optimizations that allow amortized linear growth over
-# repeated appends, instead of the typical quadratic growth present in naive
-# implementations.
-if (eval "as_var=1; as_var+=2; test x\$as_var = x12") 2>/dev/null; then :
- eval 'as_fn_append ()
- {
- eval $1+=\$2
- }'
-else
- as_fn_append ()
- {
- eval $1=\$$1\$2
- }
-fi # as_fn_append
-
-# as_fn_arith ARG...
-# ------------------
-# Perform arithmetic evaluation on the ARGs, and store the result in the
-# global $as_val. Take advantage of shells that can avoid forks. The arguments
-# must be portable across $(()) and expr.
-if (eval "test \$(( 1 + 1 )) = 2") 2>/dev/null; then :
- eval 'as_fn_arith ()
- {
- as_val=$(( $* ))
- }'
-else
- as_fn_arith ()
- {
- as_val=`expr "$@" || test $? -eq 1`
- }
-fi # as_fn_arith
-
-
-if expr a : '\(a\)' >/dev/null 2>&1 &&
- test "X`expr 00001 : '.*\(...\)'`" = X001; then
- as_expr=expr
-else
- as_expr=false
-fi
-
-if (basename -- /) >/dev/null 2>&1 && test "X`basename -- / 2>&1`" = "X/"; then
- as_basename=basename
-else
- as_basename=false
-fi
-
-if (as_dir=`dirname -- /` && test "X$as_dir" = X/) >/dev/null 2>&1; then
- as_dirname=dirname
-else
- as_dirname=false
-fi
-
-as_me=`$as_basename -- "$0" ||
-$as_expr X/"$0" : '.*/\([^/][^/]*\)/*$' \| \
- X"$0" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \
- X"$0" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null ||
-$as_echo X/"$0" |
- sed '/^.*\/\([^/][^/]*\)\/*$/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- /^X\/\(\/\/\)$/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- /^X\/\(\/\).*/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- s/.*/./; q'`
-
-# Avoid depending upon Character Ranges.
-as_cr_letters='abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz'
-as_cr_LETTERS='ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ'
-as_cr_Letters=$as_cr_letters$as_cr_LETTERS
-as_cr_digits='0123456789'
-as_cr_alnum=$as_cr_Letters$as_cr_digits
-
-ECHO_C= ECHO_N= ECHO_T=
-case `echo -n x` in #(((((
--n*)
- case `echo 'xy\c'` in
- *c*) ECHO_T=' ';; # ECHO_T is single tab character.
- xy) ECHO_C='\c';;
- *) echo `echo ksh88 bug on AIX 6.1` > /dev/null
- ECHO_T=' ';;
- esac;;
-*)
- ECHO_N='-n';;
-esac
-
-rm -f conf$$ conf$$.exe conf$$.file
-if test -d conf$$.dir; then
- rm -f conf$$.dir/conf$$.file
-else
- rm -f conf$$.dir
- mkdir conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null
-fi
-if (echo >conf$$.file) 2>/dev/null; then
- if ln -s conf$$.file conf$$ 2>/dev/null; then
- as_ln_s='ln -s'
- # ... but there are two gotchas:
- # 1) On MSYS, both `ln -s file dir' and `ln file dir' fail.
- # 2) DJGPP < 2.04 has no symlinks; `ln -s' creates a wrapper executable.
- # In both cases, we have to default to `cp -p'.
- ln -s conf$$.file conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null && test ! -f conf$$.exe ||
- as_ln_s='cp -p'
- elif ln conf$$.file conf$$ 2>/dev/null; then
- as_ln_s=ln
- else
- as_ln_s='cp -p'
- fi
-else
- as_ln_s='cp -p'
-fi
-rm -f conf$$ conf$$.exe conf$$.dir/conf$$.file conf$$.file
-rmdir conf$$.dir 2>/dev/null
-
-
-# as_fn_mkdir_p
-# -------------
-# Create "$as_dir" as a directory, including parents if necessary.
-as_fn_mkdir_p ()
-{
-
- case $as_dir in #(
- -*) as_dir=./$as_dir;;
- esac
- test -d "$as_dir" || eval $as_mkdir_p || {
- as_dirs=
- while :; do
- case $as_dir in #(
- *\'*) as_qdir=`$as_echo "$as_dir" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"`;; #'(
- *) as_qdir=$as_dir;;
- esac
- as_dirs="'$as_qdir' $as_dirs"
- as_dir=`$as_dirname -- "$as_dir" ||
-$as_expr X"$as_dir" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \
- X"$as_dir" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \
- X"$as_dir" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \
- X"$as_dir" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null ||
-$as_echo X"$as_dir" |
- sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- /^X\(\/\/\)$/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- /^X\(\/\).*/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- s/.*/./; q'`
- test -d "$as_dir" && break
- done
- test -z "$as_dirs" || eval "mkdir $as_dirs"
- } || test -d "$as_dir" || as_fn_error $? "cannot create directory $as_dir"
-
-
-} # as_fn_mkdir_p
-if mkdir -p . 2>/dev/null; then
- as_mkdir_p='mkdir -p "$as_dir"'
-else
- test -d ./-p && rmdir ./-p
- as_mkdir_p=false
-fi
-
-if test -x / >/dev/null 2>&1; then
- as_test_x='test -x'
-else
- if ls -dL / >/dev/null 2>&1; then
- as_ls_L_option=L
- else
- as_ls_L_option=
- fi
- as_test_x='
- eval sh -c '\''
- if test -d "$1"; then
- test -d "$1/.";
- else
- case $1 in #(
- -*)set "./$1";;
- esac;
- case `ls -ld'$as_ls_L_option' "$1" 2>/dev/null` in #((
- ???[sx]*):;;*)false;;esac;fi
- '\'' sh
- '
-fi
-as_executable_p=$as_test_x
-
-# Sed expression to map a string onto a valid CPP name.
-as_tr_cpp="eval sed 'y%*$as_cr_letters%P$as_cr_LETTERS%;s%[^_$as_cr_alnum]%_%g'"
-
-# Sed expression to map a string onto a valid variable name.
-as_tr_sh="eval sed 'y%*+%pp%;s%[^_$as_cr_alnum]%_%g'"
-
-
-exec 6>&1
-## ----------------------------------- ##
-## Main body of $CONFIG_STATUS script. ##
-## ----------------------------------- ##
-_ASEOF
-test $as_write_fail = 0 && chmod +x $CONFIG_STATUS || ac_write_fail=1
-
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
-# Save the log message, to keep $0 and so on meaningful, and to
-# report actual input values of CONFIG_FILES etc. instead of their
-# values after options handling.
-ac_log="
-This file was extended by $as_me, which was
-generated by GNU Autoconf 2.68. Invocation command line was
-
- CONFIG_FILES = $CONFIG_FILES
- CONFIG_HEADERS = $CONFIG_HEADERS
- CONFIG_LINKS = $CONFIG_LINKS
- CONFIG_COMMANDS = $CONFIG_COMMANDS
- $ $0 $@
-
-on `(hostname || uname -n) 2>/dev/null | sed 1q`
-"
-
-_ACEOF
-
-case $ac_config_files in *"
-"*) set x $ac_config_files; shift; ac_config_files=$*;;
-esac
-
-
-
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
-# Files that config.status was made for.
-config_files="$ac_config_files"
-config_commands="$ac_config_commands"
-
-_ACEOF
-
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
-ac_cs_usage="\
-\`$as_me' instantiates files and other configuration actions
-from templates according to the current configuration. Unless the files
-and actions are specified as TAGs, all are instantiated by default.
-
-Usage: $0 [OPTION]... [TAG]...
-
- -h, --help print this help, then exit
- -V, --version print version number and configuration settings, then exit
- --config print configuration, then exit
- -q, --quiet, --silent
- do not print progress messages
- -d, --debug don't remove temporary files
- --recheck update $as_me by reconfiguring in the same conditions
- --file=FILE[:TEMPLATE]
- instantiate the configuration file FILE
-
-Configuration files:
-$config_files
-
-Configuration commands:
-$config_commands
-
-Report bugs to the package provider."
-
-_ACEOF
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
-ac_cs_config="`$as_echo "$ac_configure_args" | sed 's/^ //; s/[\\""\`\$]/\\\\&/g'`"
-ac_cs_version="\\
-config.status
-configured by $0, generated by GNU Autoconf 2.68,
- with options \\"\$ac_cs_config\\"
-
-Copyright (C) 2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-This config.status script is free software; the Free Software Foundation
-gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it."
-
-ac_pwd='$ac_pwd'
-srcdir='$srcdir'
-INSTALL='$INSTALL'
-AWK='$AWK'
-test -n "\$AWK" || AWK=awk
-_ACEOF
-
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
-# The default lists apply if the user does not specify any file.
-ac_need_defaults=:
-while test $# != 0
-do
- case $1 in
- --*=?*)
- ac_option=`expr "X$1" : 'X\([^=]*\)='`
- ac_optarg=`expr "X$1" : 'X[^=]*=\(.*\)'`
- ac_shift=:
- ;;
- --*=)
- ac_option=`expr "X$1" : 'X\([^=]*\)='`
- ac_optarg=
- ac_shift=:
- ;;
- *)
- ac_option=$1
- ac_optarg=$2
- ac_shift=shift
- ;;
- esac
-
- case $ac_option in
- # Handling of the options.
- -recheck | --recheck | --rechec | --reche | --rech | --rec | --re | --r)
- ac_cs_recheck=: ;;
- --version | --versio | --versi | --vers | --ver | --ve | --v | -V )
- $as_echo "$ac_cs_version"; exit ;;
- --config | --confi | --conf | --con | --co | --c )
- $as_echo "$ac_cs_config"; exit ;;
- --debug | --debu | --deb | --de | --d | -d )
- debug=: ;;
- --file | --fil | --fi | --f )
- $ac_shift
- case $ac_optarg in
- *\'*) ac_optarg=`$as_echo "$ac_optarg" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"` ;;
- '') as_fn_error $? "missing file argument" ;;
- esac
- as_fn_append CONFIG_FILES " '$ac_optarg'"
- ac_need_defaults=false;;
- --he | --h | --help | --hel | -h )
- $as_echo "$ac_cs_usage"; exit ;;
- -q | -quiet | --quiet | --quie | --qui | --qu | --q \
- | -silent | --silent | --silen | --sile | --sil | --si | --s)
- ac_cs_silent=: ;;
-
- # This is an error.
- -*) as_fn_error $? "unrecognized option: \`$1'
-Try \`$0 --help' for more information." ;;
-
- *) as_fn_append ac_config_targets " $1"
- ac_need_defaults=false ;;
-
- esac
- shift
-done
-
-ac_configure_extra_args=
-
-if $ac_cs_silent; then
- exec 6>/dev/null
- ac_configure_extra_args="$ac_configure_extra_args --silent"
-fi
-
-_ACEOF
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
-if \$ac_cs_recheck; then
- set X '$SHELL' '$0' $ac_configure_args \$ac_configure_extra_args --no-create --no-recursion
- shift
- \$as_echo "running CONFIG_SHELL=$SHELL \$*" >&6
- CONFIG_SHELL='$SHELL'
- export CONFIG_SHELL
- exec "\$@"
-fi
-
-_ACEOF
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
-exec 5>>config.log
-{
- echo
- sed 'h;s/./-/g;s/^.../## /;s/...$/ ##/;p;x;p;x' <<_ASBOX
-## Running $as_me. ##
-_ASBOX
- $as_echo "$ac_log"
-} >&5
-
-_ACEOF
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
-_ACEOF
-
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
-
-# Handling of arguments.
-for ac_config_target in $ac_config_targets
-do
- case $ac_config_target in
- "autoconf/Make.common") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES autoconf/Make.common" ;;
- "Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/update_version") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/update_version" ;;
- "manuals/version.tex") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/version.tex" ;;
- "manuals/bacula.sty") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/bacula.sty" ;;
- "manuals/en/console/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/en/console/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/en/main/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/en/main/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/en/developers/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/en/developers/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/en/problems/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/en/problems/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/en/utility/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/en/utility/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/en/misc/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/en/misc/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/de/console/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/de/console/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/de/main/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/de/main/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/de/developers/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/de/developers/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/de/problems/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/de/problems/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/de/utility/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/de/utility/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/de/misc/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/de/misc/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/fr/console/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/fr/console/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/fr/main/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/fr/main/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/fr/developers/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/fr/developers/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/fr/problems/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/fr/problems/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/fr/utility/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/fr/utility/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/fr/misc/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/fr/misc/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/es/console/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/es/console/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/es/main/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/es/main/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/es/developers/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/es/developers/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/es/problems/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/es/problems/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/es/utility/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/es/utility/Makefile" ;;
- "manuals/es/misc/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES manuals/es/misc/Makefile" ;;
- "bacula-web/Makefile") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES bacula-web/Makefile" ;;
- "bacula-web/version.tex") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES bacula-web/version.tex" ;;
- "$PFILES") CONFIG_FILES="$CONFIG_FILES $PFILES" ;;
- "default") CONFIG_COMMANDS="$CONFIG_COMMANDS default" ;;
-
- *) as_fn_error $? "invalid argument: \`$ac_config_target'" "$LINENO" 5;;
- esac
-done
-
-
-# If the user did not use the arguments to specify the items to instantiate,
-# then the envvar interface is used. Set only those that are not.
-# We use the long form for the default assignment because of an extremely
-# bizarre bug on SunOS 4.1.3.
-if $ac_need_defaults; then
- test "${CONFIG_FILES+set}" = set || CONFIG_FILES=$config_files
- test "${CONFIG_COMMANDS+set}" = set || CONFIG_COMMANDS=$config_commands
-fi
-
-# Have a temporary directory for convenience. Make it in the build tree
-# simply because there is no reason against having it here, and in addition,
-# creating and moving files from /tmp can sometimes cause problems.
-# Hook for its removal unless debugging.
-# Note that there is a small window in which the directory will not be cleaned:
-# after its creation but before its name has been assigned to `$tmp'.
-$debug ||
-{
- tmp= ac_tmp=
- trap 'exit_status=$?
- : "${ac_tmp:=$tmp}"
- { test ! -d "$ac_tmp" || rm -fr "$ac_tmp"; } && exit $exit_status
-' 0
- trap 'as_fn_exit 1' 1 2 13 15
-}
-# Create a (secure) tmp directory for tmp files.
-
-{
- tmp=`(umask 077 && mktemp -d "./confXXXXXX") 2>/dev/null` &&
- test -d "$tmp"
-} ||
-{
- tmp=./conf$$-$RANDOM
- (umask 077 && mkdir "$tmp")
-} || as_fn_error $? "cannot create a temporary directory in ." "$LINENO" 5
-ac_tmp=$tmp
-
-# Set up the scripts for CONFIG_FILES section.
-# No need to generate them if there are no CONFIG_FILES.
-# This happens for instance with `./config.status config.h'.
-if test -n "$CONFIG_FILES"; then
-
-if $AWK 'BEGIN { getline <"/dev/null" }' </dev/null 2>/dev/null; then
- ac_cs_awk_getline=:
- ac_cs_awk_pipe_init=
- ac_cs_awk_read_file='
- while ((getline aline < (F[key])) > 0)
- print(aline)
- close(F[key])'
- ac_cs_awk_pipe_fini=
-else
- ac_cs_awk_getline=false
- ac_cs_awk_pipe_init="print \"cat <<'|#_!!_#|' &&\""
- ac_cs_awk_read_file='
- print "|#_!!_#|"
- print "cat " F[key] " &&"
- '$ac_cs_awk_pipe_init
- # The final `:' finishes the AND list.
- ac_cs_awk_pipe_fini='END { print "|#_!!_#|"; print ":" }'
-fi
-ac_cr=`echo X | tr X '\015'`
-# On cygwin, bash can eat \r inside `` if the user requested igncr.
-# But we know of no other shell where ac_cr would be empty at this
-# point, so we can use a bashism as a fallback.
-if test "x$ac_cr" = x; then
- eval ac_cr=\$\'\\r\'
-fi
-ac_cs_awk_cr=`$AWK 'BEGIN { print "a\rb" }' </dev/null 2>/dev/null`
-if test "$ac_cs_awk_cr" = "a${ac_cr}b"; then
- ac_cs_awk_cr='\\r'
-else
- ac_cs_awk_cr=$ac_cr
-fi
-
-echo 'BEGIN {' >"$ac_tmp/subs1.awk" &&
-_ACEOF
-
-# Create commands to substitute file output variables.
-{
- echo "cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1" &&
- echo 'cat >>"\$ac_tmp/subs1.awk" <<\\_ACAWK &&' &&
- echo "$ac_subst_files" | sed 's/.*/F["&"]="$&"/' &&
- echo "_ACAWK" &&
- echo "_ACEOF"
-} >conf$$files.sh &&
-. ./conf$$files.sh ||
- as_fn_error $? "could not make $CONFIG_STATUS" "$LINENO" 5
-rm -f conf$$files.sh
-
-{
- echo "cat >conf$$subs.awk <<_ACEOF" &&
- echo "$ac_subst_vars" | sed 's/.*/&!$&$ac_delim/' &&
- echo "_ACEOF"
-} >conf$$subs.sh ||
- as_fn_error $? "could not make $CONFIG_STATUS" "$LINENO" 5
-ac_delim_num=`echo "$ac_subst_vars" | grep -c '^'`
-ac_delim='%!_!# '
-for ac_last_try in false false false false false :; do
- . ./conf$$subs.sh ||
- as_fn_error $? "could not make $CONFIG_STATUS" "$LINENO" 5
-
- ac_delim_n=`sed -n "s/.*$ac_delim\$/X/p" conf$$subs.awk | grep -c X`
- if test $ac_delim_n = $ac_delim_num; then
- break
- elif $ac_last_try; then
- as_fn_error $? "could not make $CONFIG_STATUS" "$LINENO" 5
- else
- ac_delim="$ac_delim!$ac_delim _$ac_delim!! "
- fi
-done
-rm -f conf$$subs.sh
-
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
-cat >>"\$ac_tmp/subs1.awk" <<\\_ACAWK &&
-_ACEOF
-sed -n '
-h
-s/^/S["/; s/!.*/"]=/
-p
-g
-s/^[^!]*!//
-:repl
-t repl
-s/'"$ac_delim"'$//
-t delim
-:nl
-h
-s/\(.\{148\}\)..*/\1/
-t more1
-s/["\\]/\\&/g; s/^/"/; s/$/\\n"\\/
-p
-n
-b repl
-:more1
-s/["\\]/\\&/g; s/^/"/; s/$/"\\/
-p
-g
-s/.\{148\}//
-t nl
-:delim
-h
-s/\(.\{148\}\)..*/\1/
-t more2
-s/["\\]/\\&/g; s/^/"/; s/$/"/
-p
-b
-:more2
-s/["\\]/\\&/g; s/^/"/; s/$/"\\/
-p
-g
-s/.\{148\}//
-t delim
-' <conf$$subs.awk | sed '
-/^[^""]/{
- N
- s/\n//
-}
-' >>$CONFIG_STATUS || ac_write_fail=1
-rm -f conf$$subs.awk
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
-_ACAWK
-cat >>"\$ac_tmp/subs1.awk" <<_ACAWK &&
- for (key in S) S_is_set[key] = 1
- FS = "\a"
- \$ac_cs_awk_pipe_init
-}
-{
- line = $ 0
- nfields = split(line, field, "@")
- substed = 0
- len = length(field[1])
- for (i = 2; i < nfields; i++) {
- key = field[i]
- keylen = length(key)
- if (S_is_set[key]) {
- value = S[key]
- line = substr(line, 1, len) "" value "" substr(line, len + keylen + 3)
- len += length(value) + length(field[++i])
- substed = 1
- } else
- len += 1 + keylen
- }
- if (nfields == 3 && !substed) {
- key = field[2]
- if (F[key] != "" && line ~ /^[ ]*@.*@[ ]*$/) {
- \$ac_cs_awk_read_file
- next
- }
- }
- print line
-}
-\$ac_cs_awk_pipe_fini
-_ACAWK
-_ACEOF
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
-if sed "s/$ac_cr//" < /dev/null > /dev/null 2>&1; then
- sed "s/$ac_cr\$//; s/$ac_cr/$ac_cs_awk_cr/g"
-else
- cat
-fi < "$ac_tmp/subs1.awk" > "$ac_tmp/subs.awk" \
- || as_fn_error $? "could not setup config files machinery" "$LINENO" 5
-_ACEOF
-
-# VPATH may cause trouble with some makes, so we remove sole $(srcdir),
-# ${srcdir} and @srcdir@ entries from VPATH if srcdir is ".", strip leading and
-# trailing colons and then remove the whole line if VPATH becomes empty
-# (actually we leave an empty line to preserve line numbers).
-if test "x$srcdir" = x.; then
- ac_vpsub='/^[ ]*VPATH[ ]*=[ ]*/{
-h
-s///
-s/^/:/
-s/[ ]*$/:/
-s/:\$(srcdir):/:/g
-s/:\${srcdir}:/:/g
-s/:@srcdir@:/:/g
-s/^:*//
-s/:*$//
-x
-s/\(=[ ]*\).*/\1/
-G
-s/\n//
-s/^[^=]*=[ ]*$//
-}'
-fi
-
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
-fi # test -n "$CONFIG_FILES"
-
-
-eval set X " :F $CONFIG_FILES :C $CONFIG_COMMANDS"
-shift
-for ac_tag
-do
- case $ac_tag in
- :[FHLC]) ac_mode=$ac_tag; continue;;
- esac
- case $ac_mode$ac_tag in
- :[FHL]*:*);;
- :L* | :C*:*) as_fn_error $? "invalid tag \`$ac_tag'" "$LINENO" 5;;
- :[FH]-) ac_tag=-:-;;
- :[FH]*) ac_tag=$ac_tag:$ac_tag.in;;
- esac
- ac_save_IFS=$IFS
- IFS=:
- set x $ac_tag
- IFS=$ac_save_IFS
- shift
- ac_file=$1
- shift
-
- case $ac_mode in
- :L) ac_source=$1;;
- :[FH])
- ac_file_inputs=
- for ac_f
- do
- case $ac_f in
- -) ac_f="$ac_tmp/stdin";;
- *) # Look for the file first in the build tree, then in the source tree
- # (if the path is not absolute). The absolute path cannot be DOS-style,
- # because $ac_f cannot contain `:'.
- test -f "$ac_f" ||
- case $ac_f in
- [\\/$]*) false;;
- *) test -f "$srcdir/$ac_f" && ac_f="$srcdir/$ac_f";;
- esac ||
- as_fn_error 1 "cannot find input file: \`$ac_f'" "$LINENO" 5;;
- esac
- case $ac_f in *\'*) ac_f=`$as_echo "$ac_f" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"`;; esac
- as_fn_append ac_file_inputs " '$ac_f'"
- done
-
- # Let's still pretend it is `configure' which instantiates (i.e., don't
- # use $as_me), people would be surprised to read:
- # /* config.h. Generated by config.status. */
- configure_input='Generated from '`
- $as_echo "$*" | sed 's|^[^:]*/||;s|:[^:]*/|, |g'
- `' by configure.'
- if test x"$ac_file" != x-; then
- configure_input="$ac_file. $configure_input"
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: creating $ac_file" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: creating $ac_file" >&6;}
- fi
- # Neutralize special characters interpreted by sed in replacement strings.
- case $configure_input in #(
- *\&* | *\|* | *\\* )
- ac_sed_conf_input=`$as_echo "$configure_input" |
- sed 's/[\\\\&|]/\\\\&/g'`;; #(
- *) ac_sed_conf_input=$configure_input;;
- esac
-
- case $ac_tag in
- *:-:* | *:-) cat >"$ac_tmp/stdin" \
- || as_fn_error $? "could not create $ac_file" "$LINENO" 5 ;;
- esac
- ;;
- esac
-
- ac_dir=`$as_dirname -- "$ac_file" ||
-$as_expr X"$ac_file" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \
- X"$ac_file" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \
- X"$ac_file" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \
- X"$ac_file" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null ||
-$as_echo X"$ac_file" |
- sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- /^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- /^X\(\/\/\)$/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- /^X\(\/\).*/{
- s//\1/
- q
- }
- s/.*/./; q'`
- as_dir="$ac_dir"; as_fn_mkdir_p
- ac_builddir=.
-
-case "$ac_dir" in
-.) ac_dir_suffix= ac_top_builddir_sub=. ac_top_build_prefix= ;;
-*)
- ac_dir_suffix=/`$as_echo "$ac_dir" | sed 's|^\.[\\/]||'`
- # A ".." for each directory in $ac_dir_suffix.
- ac_top_builddir_sub=`$as_echo "$ac_dir_suffix" | sed 's|/[^\\/]*|/..|g;s|/||'`
- case $ac_top_builddir_sub in
- "") ac_top_builddir_sub=. ac_top_build_prefix= ;;
- *) ac_top_build_prefix=$ac_top_builddir_sub/ ;;
- esac ;;
-esac
-ac_abs_top_builddir=$ac_pwd
-ac_abs_builddir=$ac_pwd$ac_dir_suffix
-# for backward compatibility:
-ac_top_builddir=$ac_top_build_prefix
-
-case $srcdir in
- .) # We are building in place.
- ac_srcdir=.
- ac_top_srcdir=$ac_top_builddir_sub
- ac_abs_top_srcdir=$ac_pwd ;;
- [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]* ) # Absolute name.
- ac_srcdir=$srcdir$ac_dir_suffix;
- ac_top_srcdir=$srcdir
- ac_abs_top_srcdir=$srcdir ;;
- *) # Relative name.
- ac_srcdir=$ac_top_build_prefix$srcdir$ac_dir_suffix
- ac_top_srcdir=$ac_top_build_prefix$srcdir
- ac_abs_top_srcdir=$ac_pwd/$srcdir ;;
-esac
-ac_abs_srcdir=$ac_abs_top_srcdir$ac_dir_suffix
-
-
- case $ac_mode in
- :F)
- #
- # CONFIG_FILE
- #
-
- case $INSTALL in
- [\\/$]* | ?:[\\/]* ) ac_INSTALL=$INSTALL ;;
- *) ac_INSTALL=$ac_top_build_prefix$INSTALL ;;
- esac
-_ACEOF
-
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
-# If the template does not know about datarootdir, expand it.
-# FIXME: This hack should be removed a few years after 2.60.
-ac_datarootdir_hack=; ac_datarootdir_seen=
-ac_sed_dataroot='
-/datarootdir/ {
- p
- q
-}
-/@datadir@/p
-/@docdir@/p
-/@infodir@/p
-/@localedir@/p
-/@mandir@/p'
-case `eval "sed -n \"\$ac_sed_dataroot\" $ac_file_inputs"` in
-*datarootdir*) ac_datarootdir_seen=yes;;
-*@datadir@*|*@docdir@*|*@infodir@*|*@localedir@*|*@mandir@*)
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: $ac_file_inputs seems to ignore the --datarootdir setting" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: $ac_file_inputs seems to ignore the --datarootdir setting" >&2;}
-_ACEOF
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
- ac_datarootdir_hack='
- s&@datadir@&$datadir&g
- s&@docdir@&$docdir&g
- s&@infodir@&$infodir&g
- s&@localedir@&$localedir&g
- s&@mandir@&$mandir&g
- s&\\\${datarootdir}&$datarootdir&g' ;;
-esac
-_ACEOF
-
-# Neutralize VPATH when `$srcdir' = `.'.
-# Shell code in configure.ac might set extrasub.
-# FIXME: do we really want to maintain this feature?
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
-ac_sed_extra="$ac_vpsub
-$extrasub
-_ACEOF
-cat >>$CONFIG_STATUS <<\_ACEOF || ac_write_fail=1
-:t
-/@[a-zA-Z_][a-zA-Z_0-9]*@/!b
-s|@configure_input@|$ac_sed_conf_input|;t t
-s&@top_builddir@&$ac_top_builddir_sub&;t t
-s&@top_build_prefix@&$ac_top_build_prefix&;t t
-s&@srcdir@&$ac_srcdir&;t t
-s&@abs_srcdir@&$ac_abs_srcdir&;t t
-s&@top_srcdir@&$ac_top_srcdir&;t t
-s&@abs_top_srcdir@&$ac_abs_top_srcdir&;t t
-s&@builddir@&$ac_builddir&;t t
-s&@abs_builddir@&$ac_abs_builddir&;t t
-s&@abs_top_builddir@&$ac_abs_top_builddir&;t t
-s&@INSTALL@&$ac_INSTALL&;t t
-$ac_datarootdir_hack
-"
-eval sed \"\$ac_sed_extra\" "$ac_file_inputs" |
-if $ac_cs_awk_getline; then
- $AWK -f "$ac_tmp/subs.awk"
-else
- $AWK -f "$ac_tmp/subs.awk" | $SHELL
-fi \
- >$ac_tmp/out || as_fn_error $? "could not create $ac_file" "$LINENO" 5
-
-test -z "$ac_datarootdir_hack$ac_datarootdir_seen" &&
- { ac_out=`sed -n '/\${datarootdir}/p' "$ac_tmp/out"`; test -n "$ac_out"; } &&
- { ac_out=`sed -n '/^[ ]*datarootdir[ ]*:*=/p' \
- "$ac_tmp/out"`; test -z "$ac_out"; } &&
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: $ac_file contains a reference to the variable \`datarootdir'
-which seems to be undefined. Please make sure it is defined" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: $ac_file contains a reference to the variable \`datarootdir'
-which seems to be undefined. Please make sure it is defined" >&2;}
-
- rm -f "$ac_tmp/stdin"
- case $ac_file in
- -) cat "$ac_tmp/out" && rm -f "$ac_tmp/out";;
- *) rm -f "$ac_file" && mv "$ac_tmp/out" "$ac_file";;
- esac \
- || as_fn_error $? "could not create $ac_file" "$LINENO" 5
- ;;
-
-
- :C) { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: executing $ac_file commands" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: executing $ac_file commands" >&6;}
- ;;
- esac
-
-
- case $ac_file$ac_mode in
- "default":C)
- ;;
-
- esac
-done # for ac_tag
-
-
-as_fn_exit 0
-_ACEOF
-ac_clean_files=$ac_clean_files_save
-
-test $ac_write_fail = 0 ||
- as_fn_error $? "write failure creating $CONFIG_STATUS" "$LINENO" 5
-
-
-# configure is writing to config.log, and then calls config.status.
-# config.status does its own redirection, appending to config.log.
-# Unfortunately, on DOS this fails, as config.log is still kept open
-# by configure, so config.status won't be able to write to it; its
-# output is simply discarded. So we exec the FD to /dev/null,
-# effectively closing config.log, so it can be properly (re)opened and
-# appended to by config.status. When coming back to configure, we
-# need to make the FD available again.
-if test "$no_create" != yes; then
- ac_cs_success=:
- ac_config_status_args=
- test "$silent" = yes &&
- ac_config_status_args="$ac_config_status_args --quiet"
- exec 5>/dev/null
- $SHELL $CONFIG_STATUS $ac_config_status_args || ac_cs_success=false
- exec 5>>config.log
- # Use ||, not &&, to avoid exiting from the if with $? = 1, which
- # would make configure fail if this is the last instruction.
- $ac_cs_success || as_fn_exit 1
-fi
-if test -n "$ac_unrecognized_opts" && test "$enable_option_checking" != no; then
- { $as_echo "$as_me:${as_lineno-$LINENO}: WARNING: unrecognized options: $ac_unrecognized_opts" >&5
-$as_echo "$as_me: WARNING: unrecognized options: $ac_unrecognized_opts" >&2;}
-fi
-
-
-chmod 766 manuals/update_version
-
-# Now move common files into each subdirectory
-for i in manuals/version.tex manuals/bacula.sty ; do
- for j in console developers main misc problems utility ; do
- cp -f $i manuals/de/$j/
- cp -f $i manuals/en/$j/
- cp -f $i manuals/es/$j/
- cp -f $i manuals/fr/$j/
- done
-done
-
-echo "
-Configuration on `date`:
-
- Bacula version: ${VERSION} (${DATE})
- Bacula source code: ${bacula}
-
- " > config.out
-
-cat config.out
\input{external-references}
%%
%%
-%% define images directory -- KES 15Aug08
-%\def\idir{/home/kern/bacula/docs/docs/images/} %% images directory
\def\idir{}
\newcolumntype{Y}{>{\centering\arraybackslash}X}
%% LaTeX GraphicPath directive is able to manage this.
\pdfminorversion=4
-\def\version{5.3.2}
+\def\version{@VERSION@}
%%
+++ /dev/null
-%% bacula.sty
-%% Provides macros and other stuff for the bacula manual
-%%
-%% Original Creation -- K. Cunningham 2005-01-09
-%%
-%%
-%%
-%% New Commands Currently implemented:
-%%
-%% \elink{target}{text}
-%% Inserts the text indicated (highlighted) and provides
-%% an external hyperlink to the target.
-%%
-%%
-%% \ilink{target}{text}
-%% Inserts the text indicated (highlighted) and provides
-%% an internal hyperlink to the target. Target must be a
-%% \label somewhere in the same document.
-%%
-%% \lt
-%% Inserts a less-than character (<).
-%%
-%% \gt
-%% Inserts a greater-than character (>).
-%%
-%% \idir
-%% Inserts the path to the images
-%%
-%%
-%%
-\ProvidesPackage{bacula}[2008/10/03]
-\usepackage{ltxtable,varioref}
-\usepackage{babel,xr-hyper}
-\usepackage{xr}
-\input{external-references}
-%%
-%%
-%% define images directory -- KES 15Aug08
-%\def\idir{@BUILD_DIR@/images/} %% images directory
-\def\idir{}
-\newcolumntype{Y}{>{\centering\arraybackslash}X}
-%% LaTeX GraphicPath directive is able to manage this.
-%% manuals/_lang_/_manual_name/
-\graphicspath{{../../../images/pdf/}{../../../images/png/}{../../../images/jpeg/}{../../../images/}{../../../images/eps/}{../../../images/hires/}}
-%% In tex files: do _not_ put the filename extension
-%% Below, define the precedence for filetypes
-\include{graphicspolicy}
-%% Some definition for external references.
-\def\mbacula{Bacula Community}
-\def\miscman{\mbacula{} Misc Manual}
-\def\consoleman{\mbacula{} Console Manual}
-\def\mainman{\mbacula{} Main Manual}
-\def\devman{\mbacula{} Developers Manual}
-\def\utilityman{\mbacula{} Utility programs}
-\def\problemsman{\mbacula{} Problem Resolution Guide}
-%%
-%% eXternal References macro: borgxrlink
-%%% #1: Text to display
-%%% #2: Label defined
-%%% #3: manual: main, console, misc, developers
-%%% #4: text as reference level. will be displayed ``as is''
-%%%
-%%% Example:
-%%% \borgxrlink{Console Configuration}{ConsoleConfChapter}{main}{chapter}
-%%% will display
-%%% Console Configuration chapter (chapter 30 on page 269)
-\newcommand*{\borgxrlink}[4]{%
- \href{../#3/#3}{\textbf{#1}} #4 (#4 \vref{#3-#2})
-}
-%%
-%% Same for pointing to document.
-%% \borgxrlinkdocument{Text}{label}{manual}{type-of-reference}
-%% Will display
-%% Text (chapter XX on page YY)
-\newcommand*{\borgxrlinkdocument}[4]{%
- \href{../#3/#3}{\textbf{#1}} (#4 \vref{#3-#2})
-}
-
-\usepackage{multirow}
-\def\arraystretch{1.5}
-\pdfminorversion=4
-
-
-\def\version{@VERSION@}
-
-
-%%
-\newcommand*{\elink}[2]{%
- %\htmladdnormallink{#1}{#2}%
- \href{#2}{#1}
-}
-%%
-\newcommand*{\ilink}[2]{%
- \htmlref{\textcolor{black}{#1}}{#2}%
-% #1 (cf. \vref{#2})%\htmlref{#1}{#2}%
-}
-\newcommand*{\borgref}[1]{%
- %% displays 'the_reference on page p'
- \vref{#1}
-}
-%%
-\newcommand{\dq}{\verb+"+}
-\newcommand{\vb}{$|$}
-\newcommand{\lt}{$<$}
-\newcommand{\gt}{$>$}
-
-%% copied from /usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/base/book.cls, and
-%% modified to suit. KEC 4-28-05
-%% KEC: Removed the two-column arrangement, and added \newpage
-\renewenvironment{theindex}
- {\if@twocolumn
- \@restonecolfalse
- \else
- \@restonecoltrue
- \fi
-%% KEC: Switch to one column.
-%% \columnseprule \z@
-%% \columnsep 35\p@
-%% \twocolumn[\@makeschapterhead{\indexname}]%
- \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
- {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
- \clearpage
- \subsection*{\indexname}
- \addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{\indexname}
- \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@
- \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
- \let\item\@idxitem}
- {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi} %% Is this needed???
-
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=console
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Console_Operators_Gu.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} .; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/next.eps ${DOC}/next.png ${DOC}/prev.eps ${DOC}/prev.png ${DOC}/up.eps ${DOC}/up.png
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Console and Operators Guide" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=developers
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web pdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- touch ${DOC}.idx ${DOC}i-general.tex
- -latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- -latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making ${DOC} pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
- @rm -f *.eps *.old
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making ${DOC} pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi >tex.out 2>&1
-
-html:
- @echo "Making ${DOC} html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @touch ${DOC}.html
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @rm -f *.eps *.gif *.jpg *.old
-
-web:
- @echo "Making ${DOC} web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f ${DOC}/imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --to_meaningful_names ${DOC}/Developer*Guide.html; \
- fi)
- @rm -rf ${DOC}/*.html
- latex2html -split 4 -local_icons -t "Developer's Guide" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/Bacula_Developer_Notes.html ${DOC}/index.html
- @rm -f *.eps *.gif *.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps *.old
- @rm -f ${DOC}/idle.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/win32-*.png ${DOC}/wx-console*.png ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.pl ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.out WARNINGS
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.pdf *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @rm -f images.tex ${DOC}i.tex
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f ${DOC}.html ${DOC}.pdf
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-# Makefile for Bacula LaTeX Manual
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=main
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Main_Reference.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.ddx -o ${DOC}.dnd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.fdx -o ${DOC}.fnd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.sdx -o ${DOC}.snd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.cdx -o ${DOC}.cnd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Main Reference" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=misc
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Miscellaneous_Guide.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}/${MAINDOC}; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/next.eps ${DOC}/next.png ${DOC}/prev.eps ${DOC}/prev.png ${DOC}/up.eps ${DOC}/up.png
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Miscellaneous Guide" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}/${MAINDOC}; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=problems
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Problem_Resolution_G.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/next.eps ${DOC}/next.png ${DOC}/prev.eps ${DOC}/prev.png ${DOC}/up.eps ${DOC}/up.png
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Problem Resolution Guide" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=utility
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Utility_Programs.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- cp ${IMAGES}/bacula-logo.png ${DOC}
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/next.eps ${DOC}/next.png ${DOC}/prev.eps ${DOC}/prev.png ${DOC}/up.eps ${DOC}/up.png
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Utility Programs" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-# Avoid that @VERSION@ and @DATE@ are changed by configure
-# This file is sourced by update_version
-#
-echo "s%@VERSION@%${VERSION}%g" >${out}
-echo "s%@DATE@%${DATE}%g" >>${out}
# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
#
-IMAGES=/home/kern/bacula/docs/docs/images/
+IMAGES=../../../images/
DOC=console
MAINDOC=Bacula_Console_Operators_Gu.html
.PHONY:
.DONTCARE:
-updateversion:
- @/bin/bash ../../update_version
-
destdir:
@echo
@echo "Making output directories..."
@echo "Making PDF manual with PDFLATEX compile..."
@echo "\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg,.jpeg,.eps}\n" > graphicspolicy.tex
@export TEXINPUTS=.:../../../latex//: ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC); makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC); $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC)
+epscovers:
+ @echo " "
+ @echo -n "Linking coverpage and background EPS format..."
+ @(cd $(SVGCOVERSDIR) ; make eps)
+ @ln -sf `pwd`/${EPSCOVERSDIR}/${COVERNAME}.eps `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.eps
+ @rm -f `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.pdf
+ @echo "Done."
+
+commonfiles:
+ @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
+ @echo -n "Linking shared files..."
+ @(for L in $(LICENCES); do ln -sf $$L .; done)
@echo "Done"
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=@BUILD_DIR@/images/
-
-DOC=console
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Console_Operators_Gu.html
-DOCDIR=`pwd`
-TEXFILES=$(wildcard *tex)
-MAKEFORWEB=$(DOCDIR)/web.makefile
-WEBFILESTOLINK=$(DOCDIR)/latex2html-init.pl $(DOCDIR)/bacula.sty $(DOCDIR)/translate_images.pl
-#
-# Main directory where to find all the documentation
-DESTDIR=../pdf-and-html
-#
-# Location of documentation in PDF
-PDF_DEST_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/$(DOC)
-#
-# Location of HTML documentation
-HTML_DEST_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/$(DOC)
-#
-# Temporary directory to translate tex to HTML
-WWW_BUILD_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/www-$(DOC)
-#
-# LATEX compiler
-LATEX_TO_PDF= pdflatex --output-directory $(PDF_DEST_DIR)
-first_rule: all
-
-all: pdftex web mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-updateversion:
- @/bin/bash ../../update_version
-
-destdir:
- @echo
- @echo "Making output directories..."
- @mkdir -p $(PDF_DEST_DIR) $(HTML_DEST_DIR)
- echo "Output directories done"
-
-pdfcovers:
- @echo ""
- @echo "Making covers for $(DOC)"
- @(cd $(IMAGES)/svg ; make pdf)
- @echo "Covers done."
- @echo ""
-
-external-references: destdir updateversion pdfcovers
- @echo " "
- @echo "Building external references for $(DOC)"
- @echo "\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg,.jpeg,.eps}\n" > graphicspolicy.tex
- @export TEXINPUTS=.:../../../latex//: ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC)
- @rm -f $(PDF_DEST_DIR)/$(DOC).pdf
- @echo "$(DOC) external references done."
-
-pdftex: updateversion destdir pdfcovers
- @echo ""
- @echo "Making PDF manual with PDFLATEX compile..."
- @echo "\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg,.jpeg,.eps}\n" > graphicspolicy.tex
- @export TEXINPUTS=.:../../../latex//: ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC); makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC); $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC)
- @echo "Done"
-
-
-web: mini-clean
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @mkdir -p $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @echo "Adapting $(DOC) tex files for HTML documentation..."
- @(for F in $(TEXFILES) ;\
- do \
- cat $$F | sed -f ../pattern-to-handle > $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/$$F ; \
- done)
- @ln -sf $(MAKEFORWEB) $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/Makefile
- @(for F in $(WEBFILESTOLINK);\
- do \
- ln -sf $$F $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/;\
- done)
- (cd $(WWW_BUILD_DIR) ; make )
- @echo "Done making web"
-
-show:
- evince $(PDF_DEST_DIR)/${DOC}.pdf
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
-
-clean:
- @rm -f graphicspolicy.tex
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @rm -rf $(HTML_DEST_DIR)
# make
#
-IMAGES=/home/kern/bacula/docs/docs/images
+IMAGES=../../../images
DOC=developers
MAINDOC=Developer_s_Guide.html
.DONTCARE:
-updateversion:
- @/bin/bash ../../update_version
+pdfcovers:
+ @echo -n "Linking coverpage and background PDF format..."
+ @(cd $(SVGCOVERSDIR) ; make pdf)
+ @ln -sf `pwd`/${PDFCOVERSDIR}/${COVERNAME}.pdf `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.pdf
+ @echo "Done."
+
+pdfimages:
+ @echo "Generating PDF images..."
+ @(cd ${IMAGES}/svg ; make pdf)
+ @echo "Done."
+
+pngimages:
+ @echo "Generating PNG images..."
+ @(cd ${IMAGES}/svg ; make png)
+ @echo "Done."
+
+epsimages:
+ @echo "Generating EPS images..."
+ @(cd ${IMAGES}/svg ; make eps)
+ @rm -rf ${IMAGES}/png
+ @rm -rf ${IMAGES}/pdf
+ @echo "Done."
+
+epscovers:
+ @echo -n "Linking coverpage and background EPS format..."
+ @(cd $(SVGCOVERSDIR) ; make eps)
+ @ln -sf `pwd`/${EPSCOVERSDIR}/${COVERNAME}.eps `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.eps
+ @rm -f `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.pdf
+ @echo "Done."
+
+commonfiles:
+ @echo -n "Making version `cat version.tex`"
+ @echo -n "Linking shared files..."
+ @(for L in $(LICENCES); do ln -sf $$L .; done)
+ @echo "Done"
+
+tex: epscovers epsimages commonfiles
+ @ln -sf $(TEXCOMPILERFILE) $(BSYSCOMPILERFILE)
+ touch ${DOC}.idx ${DOC}i-general.tex
+ -latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
+ makeindex ${DOC}.idx >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
+ -latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
destdir:
@echo
@rm -f Makefile version.tex
@rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
@rm -rf $(HTML_DEST_DIR)
-
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-
-IMAGES=@BUILD_DIR@/images
-
-DOC=developers
-MAINDOC=Developer_s_Guide.html
-DOCDIR=`pwd`
-TEXFILES=$(wildcard *tex)
-MAKEFORWEB=$(DOCDIR)/web.makefile
-WEBFILESTOLINK=$(DOCDIR)/latex2html-init.pl $(DOCDIR)/bacula.sty $(DOCDIR)/translate_images.pl
-#
-# Main directory where to find all the documentation
-DESTDIR=../pdf-and-html
-#
-# Location of documentation in PDF
-PDF_DEST_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/$(DOC)
-#
-# Location of HTML documentation
-HTML_DEST_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/$(DOC)
-#
-# Temporary directory to translate tex to HTML
-WWW_BUILD_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/www-$(DOC)
-#
-# LATEX compiler
-LATEX_TO_PDF= pdflatex --output-directory $(PDF_DEST_DIR)
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: pdftex web mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-updateversion:
- @/bin/bash ../../update_version
-
-destdir:
- @echo
- @echo "Making output directories..."
- @mkdir -p $(PDF_DEST_DIR) $(HTML_DEST_DIR)
- echo "Output directories done"
-
-pdfcovers:
- @echo ""
- @echo "Making covers for $(DOC)"
- @(cd $(IMAGES)/svg ; make pdf)
- @echo "Covers done."
- @echo ""
-
-external-references: updateversion destdir pdfcovers
- @echo " "
- @echo "Building external references for $(DOC)"
- @echo "\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg,.jpeg,.eps}\n" > graphicspolicy.tex
- @export TEXINPUTS=.:../../../latex//: ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC)
- @rm -f $(PDF_DEST_DIR)/$(DOC).pdf
- @echo "$(DOC) external references done."
-
-pdftex: updateversion destdir pdfcovers
- @echo ""
- @echo "Making PDF manual with $(LATEX_TO_PDF)compile..."
- @echo "\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg,.jpeg,.eps}\n" > graphicspolicy.tex
- @export TEXINPUTS=.:../../../latex//: ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC); makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC); $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC)
- @echo "Done"
-
-
-web: mini-clean
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @mkdir -p $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @echo "Adapting $(DOC) tex files for HTML documentation..."
- @(for F in $(TEXFILES) ;\
- do \
- cat $$F | sed -f ../pattern-to-handle > $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/$$F ; \
- done)
- @ln -sf $(MAKEFORWEB) $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/Makefile
- @(for F in $(WEBFILESTOLINK);\
- do \
- ln -sf $$F $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/;\
- done)
- (cd $(WWW_BUILD_DIR) ; make )
- @echo "Done making web"
-
-
-show:
- evince $(PDF_DEST_DIR)/${DOC}.pdf
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
- @rm -rf ../www-$(DOC)
-
-clean:
- @rm -f graphicspolicy.tex
- @rm -f 1 2 3
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.pdf *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f images.tex ${DOC}i.tex
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f ${DOC}.html ${DOC}.pdf
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @rm -rf $(HTML_DEST_DIR)
-
#
DOC=main
MAINDOC=Bacula_Main_Reference.html
-IMAGES=/home/kern/bacula/docs/docs/images
+IMAGES=../../../images
DOCDIR=`pwd`
TEXFILES=$(wildcard *tex)
MAKEFORWEB=$(DOCDIR)/web.makefile
.DONTCARE:
-updateversion:
- @/bin/bash ../../update_version
-
destdir:
@echo
@echo "Making output directories..."
@(cd $(IMAGES)/svg ; make pdf)
@echo "Covers done."
@echo ""
+ @echo -n "Linking coverpage and background PDF format..."
+ @(cd $(SVGCOVERSDIR) ; make pdf)
+ @ln -sf `pwd`/${PDFCOVERSDIR}/${COVERNAME}.pdf `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.pdf
+ @echo "Done."
+
+pdfimages:
+ @echo "Generating PDF images..."
+ @(cd ${IMAGES}/svg ; make pdf)
+ @echo "Done."
+
+pngimages:
+ @echo "Generating PNG images..."
+ @(cd ${IMAGES}/svg ; make png)
+ @echo "Done."
+
+epsimages:
+ @echo "Generating EPS images..."
+ @(cd ${IMAGES}/svg ; make eps)
+ @rm -rf ${IMAGES}/png
+ @rm -rf ${IMAGES}/pdf
+ @echo "Done."
+
+epscovers:
+ @echo -n "Linking coverpage and background EPS format..."
+ @(cd $(SVGCOVERSDIR) ; make eps)
+ @ln -sf `pwd`/${EPSCOVERSDIR}/${COVERNAME}.eps `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.eps
+ @rm -f `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.pdf
+ @echo "Done."
+
+commonfiles:
+ @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
+ @echo -n "Linking shared files..."
+ @(for L in $(LICENCES); do ln -sf $$L .; done)
+ @echo "Done"
external-references: updateversion destdir pdfcovers
@echo " "
@export TEXINPUTS=.:../../../latex//: ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC); makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC); $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC)
@echo "Done"
+pdflatex: external-references
+ @echo " "
+ @echo " Generating the PDF version of $(DOC)"
+ @echo " building indexes"
+ @makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
+ @echo -n " compiling..."
+ @$(PDFLATEX) $(PDFLATEXOPTIONS) ${DOC}.tex
+ @$(PDFLATEX) $(PDFLATEXOPTIONS) ${DOC}.tex
+ @echo "$(DOC).pdf generated."
+
+html:
+ @echo " "
+ @echo "Making html"
+ @ln -sf $(WEBCOMPILERFILE) $(BSYSCOMPILERFILE)
+# @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
+# @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
+ @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
+ ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
+ fi)
+ latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
+ -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
+ @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
+ ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
+ fi)
+ (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
+ @echo "Done making html"
+
web: mini-clean
@echo "Making web"
@rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
@rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f ${DOC}.html ${DOC}.pdf
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @rm -rf $(HTML_DEST_DIR)
+webclean:
+ @rm -rf $(WWWDIR)
+
+distclean: webclean clean
+ @rm -f *.pdf
+ @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
+ @rm -f Makefile version.tex bacula.sty
+++ /dev/null
-#
-# Makefile for Bacula LaTeX Manual
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-DOC=main
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Main_Reference.html
-IMAGES=@BUILD_DIR@/images
-DOCDIR=`pwd`
-TEXFILES=$(wildcard *tex)
-MAKEFORWEB=$(DOCDIR)/web.makefile
-WEBFILESTOLINK=$(DOCDIR)/latex2html-init.pl $(DOCDIR)/bacula.sty $(DOCDIR)/translate_images.pl
-#
-# Main directory where to find all the documentation
-DESTDIR=../pdf-and-html
-#
-# Location of documentation in PDF
-PDF_DEST_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/$(DOC)
-#
-# Location of HTML documentation
-HTML_DEST_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/$(DOC)
-#
-# Temporary directory to translate tex to HTML
-WWW_BUILD_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/www-$(DOC)
-#
-# LATEX compiler
-LATEX_TO_PDF= pdflatex --output-directory $(PDF_DEST_DIR)
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: pdftex web mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-updateversion:
- @/bin/bash ../../update_version
-
-destdir:
- @echo
- @echo "Making output directories..."
- @mkdir -p $(PDF_DEST_DIR) $(HTML_DEST_DIR)
- echo "Output directories done"
-
-pdfcovers:
- @echo ""
- @echo "Making covers for $(DOC)"
- @(cd $(IMAGES)/svg ; make pdf)
- @echo "Covers done."
- @echo ""
-
-external-references: updateversion destdir pdfcovers
- @echo " "
- @echo "Building external references for $(DOC)"
- @echo "\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg,.jpeg,.eps}\n" > graphicspolicy.tex
- @export TEXINPUTS=.:../../../latex//: ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC)
- @rm -f $(PDF_DEST_DIR)/$(DOC).pdf
- @echo "$(DOC) external references done."
-
-pdftex: updateversion destdir pdfcovers
- @echo ""
- @echo "Making PDF manual with $(LATEX_TO_PDF)compile..."
- @echo "\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg,.jpeg,.eps}\n" > graphicspolicy.tex
- @export TEXINPUTS=.:../../../latex//: ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC); makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC); $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC)
- @echo "Done"
-
-
-web: mini-clean
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @mkdir -p $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @echo "Adapting $(DOC) tex files for HTML documentation..."
- @(for F in $(TEXFILES) ;\
- do \
- cat $$F | sed -f ../pattern-to-handle > $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/$$F ; \
- done)
- @ln -sf $(MAKEFORWEB) $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/Makefile
- @(for F in $(WEBFILESTOLINK);\
- do \
- ln -sf $$F $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/;\
- done)
- (cd $(WWW_BUILD_DIR) ; make )
- @echo "Done making web"
-
-
-show:
- evince $(PDF_DEST_DIR)/${DOC}.pdf
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
- @rm -rf ../www-$(DOC)
-
-clean:
- @rm -f graphicspolicy.tex
- @rm -f 1 2 3
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.pdf *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f images.tex ${DOC}i.tex
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f ${DOC}.html ${DOC}.pdf
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @rm -rf $(HTML_DEST_DIR)
DOC=misc
MAINDOC=Bacula_Miscellaneous_Guide.html
-IMAGES=/home/kern/bacula/docs/docs/images
+IMAGES=@BUILD_DIR@/images
DOCDIR=`pwd`
TEXFILES=$(wildcard *tex)
MAKEFORWEB=$(DOCDIR)/web.makefile
.DONTCARE:
-updateversion:
- @/bin/bash ../../update_version
-
destdir:
@echo
@echo "Making output directories..."
@mkdir -p $(PDF_DEST_DIR) $(HTML_DEST_DIR)
echo "Output directories done"
+pdfcovers:
+ @echo -n "Linking coverpage and background PDF format..."
+ @(cd $(SVGCOVERSDIR) ; make pdf)
+ @ln -sf `pwd`/${PDFCOVERSDIR}/${COVERNAME}.pdf `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.pdf
+ @echo "Done."
+
+pdfimages:
+ @echo "Generating PDF images..."
+ @(cd ${IMAGES}/svg ; make pdf)
+ @echo "Done."
+
+pngimages:
+ @echo "Generating PNG images..."
+ @(cd ${IMAGES}/svg ; make png)
+ @echo "Done."
+
+epsimages:
+ @echo "Generating EPS images..."
+ @(cd ${IMAGES}/svg ; make eps)
+ @rm -rf ${IMAGES}/png
+ @rm -rf ${IMAGES}/pdf
+ @echo "Done."
+
+epscovers:
+ @echo -n "Linking coverpage and background EPS format..."
+ @(cd $(SVGCOVERSDIR) ; make eps)
+ @ln -sf `pwd`/${EPSCOVERSDIR}/${COVERNAME}.eps `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.eps
+ @rm -f `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.pdf
+ @echo "Done."
+
+commonfiles:
+ @echo -n "Making version `cat version.tex`"
+ @echo -n "Linking shared files..."
+ @(for L in $(LICENCES); do ln -sf $$L .; done)
+ @echo "Done"
+
pdfcovers:
@echo ""
@echo "Making covers for $(DOC)"
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-DOC=misc
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Miscellaneous_Guide.html
-IMAGES=@BUILD_DIR@/images
-DOCDIR=`pwd`
-TEXFILES=$(wildcard *tex)
-MAKEFORWEB=$(DOCDIR)/web.makefile
-WEBFILESTOLINK=$(DOCDIR)/latex2html-init.pl $(DOCDIR)/bacula.sty $(DOCDIR)/translate_images.pl
-#
-# Main directory where to find all the documentation
-DESTDIR=../pdf-and-html
-#
-# Location of documentation in PDF
-PDF_DEST_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/$(DOC)
-#
-# Location of HTML documentation
-HTML_DEST_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/$(DOC)
-#
-# Temporary directory to translate tex to HTML
-WWW_BUILD_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/www-$(DOC)
-#
-# LATEX compiler
-LATEX_TO_PDF= pdflatex --output-directory $(PDF_DEST_DIR)
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: pdftex web mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-updateversion:
- @/bin/bash ../../update_version
-
-destdir:
- @echo
- @echo "Making output directories..."
- @mkdir -p $(PDF_DEST_DIR) $(HTML_DEST_DIR)
- echo "Output directories done"
-
-pdfcovers:
- @echo ""
- @echo "Making covers for $(DOC)"
- @(cd $(IMAGES)/svg ; make pdf)
- @echo "Covers done."
- @echo ""
-
-external-references: updateversion destdir pdfcovers
- @echo " "
- @echo "Building external references for $(DOC)"
- @echo "\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg,.jpeg,.eps}\n" > graphicspolicy.tex
- @export TEXINPUTS=.:../../../latex//: ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC)
- @rm -f $(PDF_DEST_DIR)/$(DOC).pdf
- @echo "$(DOC) external references done."
-
-pdftex: updateversion destdir pdfcovers
- @echo ""
- @echo "Making PDF manual with $(LATEX_TO_PDF)compile..."
- @echo "\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg,.jpeg,.eps}\n" > graphicspolicy.tex
- @export TEXINPUTS=.:../../../latex//: ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC); makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC); $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC)
- @echo "Done"
-
-
-web: mini-clean
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @mkdir -p $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @echo "Adapting $(DOC) tex files for HTML documentation..."
- @(for F in $(TEXFILES) ;\
- do \
- cat $$F | sed -f ../pattern-to-handle > $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/$$F ; \
- done)
- @ln -sf $(MAKEFORWEB) $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/Makefile
- @(for F in $(WEBFILESTOLINK);\
- do \
- ln -sf $$F $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/;\
- done)
- (cd $(WWW_BUILD_DIR) ; make )
- @echo "Done making web"
-
-
-show:
- evince $(PDF_DEST_DIR)/${DOC}.pdf
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
- @rm -rf ../www-$(DOC)
-
-clean:
- @rm -f graphicspolicy.tex
- @rm -f 1 2 3
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.pdf *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f images.tex ${DOC}i.tex
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f ${DOC}.html ${DOC}.pdf
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @rm -rf $(HTML_DEST_DIR)
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=catalog
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Catalog_Database_Gui.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @./update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps ${DOC}/
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps ${IMAGES}/*.png ${DOC}/
- @rm -f ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/next.eps ${DOC}/next.png ${DOC}/prev.eps ${DOC}/prev.png ${DOC}/up.eps ${DOC}/up.png
- @rm -rf ${DOC}/*.html
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Catalog Database Guide" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-/* Century Schoolbook font is very similar to Computer Modern Math: cmmi */
-.MATH { font-family: "Century Schoolbook", serif; }
-.MATH I { font-family: "Century Schoolbook", serif; font-style: italic }
-.BOLDMATH { font-family: "Century Schoolbook", serif; font-weight: bold }
-
-/* implement both fixed-size and relative sizes */
-SMALL.XTINY { font-size : xx-small }
-SMALL.TINY { font-size : x-small }
-SMALL.SCRIPTSIZE { font-size : smaller }
-SMALL.FOOTNOTESIZE { font-size : small }
-SMALL.SMALL { }
-BIG.LARGE { }
-BIG.XLARGE { font-size : large }
-BIG.XXLARGE { font-size : x-large }
-BIG.HUGE { font-size : larger }
-BIG.XHUGE { font-size : xx-large }
-
-/* heading styles */
-H1 { }
-H2 { }
-H3 { }
-H4 { }
-H5 { }
-
-/* mathematics styles */
-DIV.displaymath { } /* math displays */
-TD.eqno { } /* equation-number cells */
-
-
-/* document-specific styles come next */
+++ /dev/null
-[General]
-img_extIsRegExp=false
-img_extensions=.eps .jpg .jpeg .png .pdf .ps .fig .gif
-kileprversion=2
-kileversion=2.0
-lastDocument=
-masterDocument=
-name=Catalog
-pkg_extIsRegExp=false
-pkg_extensions=.cls .sty
-src_extIsRegExp=false
-src_extensions=.tex .ltx .latex .dtx .ins
-
-[Tools]
-MakeIndex=
-QuickBuild=
-
-[item:catalog.kilepr]
-archive=true
-column=144342808
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:catalog.tex]
-archive=true
-column=36
-encoding=UTF-8
-highlight=LaTeX
-line=46
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:catmaintenance.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:mysql.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:postgresql.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:sqlite.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:version.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-%% The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-%% to be entered as printable characters:
-%%
-%% # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-%%
-
-\documentclass[10pt,a4paper]{book}
-
-\topmargin -0.5in
-\oddsidemargin 0.0in
-\evensidemargin 0.0in
-\textheight 10in
-\textwidth 6.5in
-
-\usepackage{html}
-\usepackage{float}
-\usepackage{graphicx}
-\usepackage{bacula}
-\usepackage{longtable}
-\usepackage{makeidx}
-\usepackage{index}
-\usepackage{setspace}
-\usepackage{hyperref}
-\usepackage{url}
-
-
-\makeindex
-\newindex{general}{idx}{ind}{General Index}
-
-\sloppy
-
-\begin{document}
-\sloppy
-
-\newfont{\bighead}{cmr17 at 36pt}
-\parskip 10pt
-\parindent 0pt
-
-\title{\includegraphics{\idir bacula-logo.eps} \\ \bigskip
- \Huge{Bacula Catalog Database Guide}
- \begin{center}
- \large{It comes in the night and sucks
- the essence from your computers. }
- \end{center}
-}
-
-
-\author{Kern Sibbald}
-\date{\vspace{1.0in}\today \\
- This manual documents Bacula version \input{version} \\
- \vspace{0.2in}
- Copyright \copyright 1999-2009, Free Software Foundation Europe
- e.V. \\
- \vspace{0.2in}
- Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the
- GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 published by the Free Software Foundation;
- with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
- A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
-}
-
-\maketitle
-
-\clearpage
-\tableofcontents
-\clearpage
-
-\include{catmaintenance}
-\include{mysql}
-\include{postgresql}
-\include{sqlite}
-\include{fdl}
-
-
-% The following line tells link_resolver.pl to not include these files:
-% nolinks developersi baculai-dir baculai-fd baculai-sd baculai-console baculai-main
-
-% pull in the index
-\clearpage
-\printindex[general]
-
-\end{document}
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Catalog Maintenance}
-\label{CatMaintenanceChapter}
-\index[general]{Maintenance!Catalog }
-\index[general]{Catalog Maintenance }
-
-Without proper setup and maintenance, your Catalog may continue to grow
-indefinitely as you run Jobs and backup Files, and/or it may become
-very inefficient and slow. How fast the size of your
-Catalog grows depends on the number of Jobs you run and how many files they
-backup. By deleting records within the database, you can make space available
-for the new records that will be added during the next Job. By constantly
-deleting old expired records (dates older than the Retention period), your
-database size will remain constant.
-
-If you started with the default configuration files, they already contain
-reasonable defaults for a small number of machines (less than 5), so if you
-fall into that case, catalog maintenance will not be urgent if you have a few
-hundred megabytes of disk space free. Whatever the case may be, some knowledge
-of retention periods will be useful.
-\label{Retention}
-
-\section{Setting Retention Periods}
-\index[general]{Setting Retention Periods }
-\index[general]{Periods!Setting Retention }
-
-{\bf Bacula} uses three Retention periods: the {\bf File Retention} period,
-the {\bf Job Retention} period, and the {\bf Volume Retention} period. Of
-these three, the File Retention period is by far the most important in
-determining how large your database will become.
-
-The {\bf File Retention} and the {\bf Job Retention} are specified in each
-Client resource as is shown below. The {\bf Volume Retention} period is
-specified in the Pool resource, and the details are given in the next chapter
-of this manual.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [File Retention = \lt{}time-period-specification\gt{}]
- \index[general]{File Retention }
- The File Retention record defines the length of time that Bacula will keep
-File records in the Catalog database. When this time period expires, and if
-{\bf AutoPrune} is set to {\bf yes}, Bacula will prune (remove) File records
-that are older than the specified File Retention period. The pruning will
-occur at the end of a backup Job for the given Client. Note that the Client
-database record contains a copy of the File and Job retention periods, but
-Bacula uses the current values found in the Director's Client resource to do
-the pruning.
-
-Since File records in the database account for probably 80 percent of the
-size of the database, you should carefully determine exactly what File
-Retention period you need. Once the File records have been removed from
-the database, you will no longer be able to restore individual files
-in a Job. However, with Bacula version 1.37 and later, as long as the
-Job record still exists, you will be able to restore all files in the
-job.
-
-Retention periods are specified in seconds, but as a convenience, there are
-a number of modifiers that permit easy specification in terms of minutes,
-hours, days, weeks, months, quarters, or years on the record. See the
-\ilink{ Configuration chapter}{Time} of this manual for additional details
-of modifier specification.
-
-The default File retention period is 60 days.
-
-\item [Job Retention = \lt{}time-period-specification\gt{}]
- \index[general]{Job Retention }
- The Job Retention record defines the length of time that {\bf Bacula}
-will keep Job records in the Catalog database. When this time period
-expires, and if {\bf AutoPrune} is set to {\bf yes} Bacula will prune
-(remove) Job records that are older than the specified Job Retention
-period. Note, if a Job record is selected for pruning, all associated File
-and JobMedia records will also be pruned regardless of the File Retention
-period set. As a consequence, you normally will set the File retention
-period to be less than the Job retention period.
-
-As mentioned above, once the File records are removed from the database,
-you will no longer be able to restore individual files from the Job.
-However, as long as the Job record remains in the database, you will be
-able to restore all the files backuped for the Job (on version 1.37 and
-later). As a consequence, it is generally a good idea to retain the Job
-records much longer than the File records.
-
-The retention period is specified in seconds, but as a convenience, there
-are a number of modifiers that permit easy specification in terms of
-minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, quarters, or years. See the \ilink{
-Configuration chapter}{Time} of this manual for additional details of
-modifier specification.
-
-The default Job Retention period is 180 days.
-
-\item [AutoPrune = \lt{}yes/no\gt{}]
- \index[general]{AutoPrune }
- If AutoPrune is set to {\bf yes} (default), Bacula will automatically apply
-the File retention period and the Job retention period for the Client at the
-end of the Job.
-
-If you turn this off by setting it to {\bf no}, your Catalog will grow each
-time you run a Job.
-\end{description}
-
-\label{CompactingMySQL}
-\section{Compacting Your MySQL Database}
-\index[general]{Database!Compacting Your MySQL }
-\index[general]{Compacting Your MySQL Database }
-
-Over time, as noted above, your database will tend to grow. I've noticed that
-even though Bacula regularly prunes files, {\bf MySQL} does not effectively
-use the space, and instead continues growing. To avoid this, from time to
-time, you must compact your database. Normally, large commercial database such
-as Oracle have commands that will compact a database to reclaim wasted file
-space. MySQL has the {\bf OPTIMIZE TABLE} command that you can use, and SQLite
-version 2.8.4 and greater has the {\bf VACUUM} command. We leave it to you to
-explore the utility of the {\bf OPTIMIZE TABLE} command in MySQL.
-
-All database programs have some means of writing the database out in ASCII
-format and then reloading it. Doing so will re-create the database from
-scratch producing a compacted result, so below, we show you how you can do
-this for MySQL, PostgreSQL and SQLite.
-
-For a {\bf MySQL} database, you could write the Bacula database as an ASCII
-file (bacula.sql) then reload it by doing the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-mysqldump -f --opt bacula > bacula.sql
-mysql bacula < bacula.sql
-rm -f bacula.sql
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Depending on the size of your database, this will take more or less time and a
-fair amount of disk space. For example, if I cd to the location of the MySQL
-Bacula database (typically /opt/mysql/var or something similar) and enter:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-du bacula
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-I get {\bf 620,644} which means there are that many blocks containing 1024
-bytes each or approximately 635 MB of data. After doing the {\bf mysqldump}, I
-had a bacula.sql file that had {\bf 174,356} blocks, and after doing the {\bf
-mysql} command to recreate the database, I ended up with a total of {\bf
-210,464} blocks rather than the original {\bf 629,644}. In other words, the
-compressed version of the database took approximately one third of the space
-of the database that had been in use for about a year.
-
-As a consequence, I suggest you monitor the size of your database and from
-time to time (once every six months or year), compress it.
-
-\label{DatabaseRepair}
-\label{RepairingMySQL}
-\section{Repairing Your MySQL Database}
-\index[general]{Database!Repairing Your MySQL }
-\index[general]{Repairing Your MySQL Database }
-
-If you find that you are getting errors writing to your MySQL database, or
-Bacula hangs each time it tries to access the database, you should consider
-running MySQL's database check and repair routines. The program you need to
-run depends on the type of database indexing you are using. If you are using
-the default, you will probably want to use {\bf myisamchk}. For more details
-on how to do this, please consult the MySQL document at:
-\elink{
-http://www.mysql.com/doc/en/Repair.html}
-{http://www.mysql.com/doc/en/Repair.html}.
-
-If the errors you are getting are simply SQL warnings, then you might try
-running dbcheck before (or possibly after) using the MySQL database repair
-program. It can clean up many of the orphaned record problems, and certain
-other inconsistencies in the Bacula database.
-
-A typical cause of MySQL database problems is if your partition fills. In
-such a case, you will need to create additional space on the partition or
-free up some space then repair the database probably using {\bf myisamchk}.
-Recently my root partition filled and the MySQL database was corrupted.
-Simply running {\bf myisamchk -r} did not fix the problem. However,
-the following script did the trick for me:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#!/bin/sh
-for i in *.MYD ; do
- mv $i x${i}
- t=`echo $i | cut -f 1 -d '.' -`
- mysql bacula <<END_OF_DATA
-set autocommit=1;
-truncate table $t;
-quit
-END_OF_DATA
- cp x${i} ${i}
- chown mysql:mysql ${i}
- myisamchk -r ${t}
-done
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-I invoked it with the following commands:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-cd /var/lib/mysql/bacula
-./repair
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Then after ensuring that the database was correctly fixed, I did:
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-cd /var/lib/mysql/bacula
-rm -f x*.MYD
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{MySQL Table is Full}
-\index[general]{Database!MySQL Table is Full}
-\index[general]{MySQL Table is Full}
-
-If you are running into the error {\bf The table 'File' is full ...},
-it is probably because on version 4.x MySQL, the table is limited by
-default to a maximum size of 4 GB and you have probably run into
-the limit. The solution can be found at:
-\elink{http://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/5.0/en/full-table.html}
-{http://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/5.0/en/full-table.html}
-
-You can display the maximum length of your table with:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-mysql bacula
-SHOW TABLE STATUS FROM bacula like "File";
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If the column labeled "Max\_data\_length" is around 4Gb, this is likely
-to be the source of your problem, and you can modify it with:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-mysql bacula
-ALTER TABLE File MAX_ROWS=281474976710656;
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Alternatively you can modify your /etc/my.conf file before creating the
-Bacula tables, and in the [mysqld] section set:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-set-variable = myisam_data_pointer_size=6
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The above myisam data pointer size must be made before you create your
-Bacula tables or it will have no effect.
-
-The row and pointer size changes should already be the default on MySQL
-version 5.x, so making these changes should only be necessary on MySQL 4.x
-depending on the size of your catalog database.
-
-\section{MySQL Server Has Gone Away}
-\index[general]{Database!MySQL Server Has Gone Away}
-\index[general]{MySQL Server Has Gone Away}
-If you are having problems with the MySQL server disconnecting or with
-messages saying that your MySQL server has gone away, then please read
-the MySQL documentation, which can be found at:
-
-\elink{http://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/5.0/en/gone-away.html}
-{http://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/5.0/en/gone-away.html}
-
-\section{MySQL Temporary Tables}
-When doing backups with large numbers of files, MySQL creates some
-temporary tables. When these tables are small they can be held in
-system memory, but as they approach some size, they
-spool off to disk. The default location for these temp tables is
-/tmp. Once that space fills up, Bacula daemons such as the Storage
-daemon doing spooling can get strange errors. E.g.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Fatal error: spool.c:402 Spool data read error.
-Fatal error: backup.c:892 Network send error to SD. ERR=Connection reset by
-peer
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-What you need to do is setup MySQL to use a different (larger) temp
-directory, which can be set in the /etc/my.cnf with these variables
-set:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- tmpdir=/path/to/larger/tmpdir
- bdb_tmpdir=/path/to/larger/tmpdir
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\label{RepairingPSQL}
-\section{Repairing Your PostgreSQL Database}
-\index[general]{Database!Repairing Your PostgreSQL }
-\index[general]{Repairing Your PostgreSQL Database }
-
-The same considerations apply that are indicated above for MySQL. That is,
-consult the PostgreSQL documents for how to repair the database, and also
-consider using Bacula's dbcheck program if the conditions are reasonable for
-using (see above).
-
-\label{DatabasePerformance}
-\section{Database Performance Issues}
-\index[general]{Database Performance Issues}
-\index[general]{Performance!Database}
-
-There are a considerable number of ways each of the databases can be
-tuned to improve the performance. Going from an untuned database to one
-that is properly tuned can make a difference of a factor of 100 or more
-in the time to insert or search for records.
-
-For each of the databases, you may get significant improvements by adding
-additional indexes. The comments in the Bacula make\_xxx\_tables give some
-indications as to what indexes may be appropriate. Please see below
-for specific instructions on checking indexes.
-
-For MySQL, what is very important is to use the examine the
-my.cnf file (usually in /etc/my.cnf).
-You may obtain significant performances by switching to
-the my-large.cnf or my-huge.cnf files that come with the MySQL source
-code.
-
-For SQLite3, one significant factor in improving the performance is
-to ensure that there is a "PRAGMA synchronous = NORMAL;" statement.
-This reduces the number of times that the database flushes the in memory
-cache to disk. There are other settings for this PRAGMA that can
-give even further performance improvements at the risk of a database
-corruption if your system crashes.
-
-For PostgreSQL, you might want to consider turning fsync off. Of course
-doing so can cause corrupted databases in the event of a machine crash.
-There are many different ways that you can tune PostgreSQL, the
-following document discusses a few of them:
-\elink{
-http://www.varlena.com/varlena/GeneralBits/Tidbits/perf.html}
-{http://www.varlena.com/varlena/GeneralBits/Tidbits/perf.html}.
-
-There is also a PostgreSQL FAQ question number 3.3 that may
-answer some of your questions about how to improve performance
-of the PostgreSQL engine:
-\elink{
-http://www.postgresql.org/docs/faqs.FAQ.html\#3.3}
-{http://www.postgresql.org/docs/faqs.FAQ.html\#3.3}.
-% TODO: verify above is correct. is this okay for book?
-
-Also for PostgreSQL, look at what "effective\_cache\_size". For a 2GB memory
-machine, you probably want to set it at 131072, but don't set it too high.
-In addition, for a 2GB system, work\_mem = 256000 and
-maintenance\_work\_mem = 256000 seem to be reasonable values. Make
-sure your checkpoint\_segments is set to at least 8.
-
-
-
-\section{Performance Issues Indexes}
-\index[general]{Database Performance Issues Indexes}
-\index[general]{Performance!Database}
-One of the most important considerations for improving performance on
-the Bacula database is to ensure that it has all the appropriate indexes.
-Several users have reported finding that their database did not have
-all the indexes in the default configuration. In addition, you may
-find that because of your own usage patterns, you need additional indexes.
-
-The most important indexes for performance are the two indexes on the
-{\bf File} table. The first index is on {\bf FileId} and is automatically
-made because it is the unique key used to access the table. The other
-one is the (JobId, PathId, Filename) index. If these Indexes
-are not present, your performance may suffer a lot.
-
-\subsection{PostgreSQL Indexes}
-On PostgreSQL, you can check to see if you have the proper indexes using
-the following commands:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-psql bacula
-select * from pg_indexes where tablename='file';
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If you do not see output that indicates that all three indexes
-are created, you can create the two additional indexes using:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-psql bacula
-CREATE INDEX file_jobid_idx on file (jobid);
-CREATE INDEX file_fp_idx on file (jobid, pathid, filenameid);
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\subsection{MySQL Indexes}
-On MySQL, you can check if you have the proper indexes by:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-mysql bacula
-show index from File;
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If the indexes are not present, especially the JobId index, you can
-create them with the following commands:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-mysql bacula
-CREATE INDEX file_jobid_idx on File (JobId);
-CREATE INDEX file_jpf_idx on File (JobId, FilenameId, PathId);
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Though normally not a problem, you should ensure that the indexes
-defined for Filename and Path are both set to 255 characters. Some users
-reported performance problems when their indexes were set to 50 characters.
-To check, do:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-mysql bacula
-show index from Filename;
-show index from Path;
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-and what is important is that for Filename, you have an index with
-Key\_name "Name" and Sub\_part "255". For Path, you should have a Key\_name
-"Path" and Sub\_part "255". If one or the other does not exist or the
-Sub\_part is less that 255, you can drop and recreate the appropriate
-index with:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-mysql bacula
-DROP INDEX Path on Path;
-CREATE INDEX Path on Path (Path(255);
-
-DROP INDEX Name on Filename;
-CREATE INDEX Name on Filename (Name(255));
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-
-\subsection{SQLite Indexes}
-On SQLite, you can check if you have the proper indexes by:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-sqlite <path>/bacula.db
-select * from sqlite_master where type='index' and tbl_name='File';
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If the indexes are not present, especially the JobId index, you can
-create them with the following commands:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-sqlite <path>/bacula.db
-CREATE INDEX file_jobid_idx on File (JobId);
-CREATE INDEX file_jfp_idx on File (JobId, PathId, FilenameId);
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-
-
-\label{CompactingPostgres}
-\section{Compacting Your PostgreSQL Database}
-\index[general]{Database!Compacting Your PostgreSQL }
-\index[general]{Compacting Your PostgreSQL Database }
-
-Over time, as noted above, your database will tend to grow. I've noticed that
-even though Bacula regularly prunes files, PostgreSQL has a {\bf VACUUM}
-command that will compact your database for you. Alternatively you may want to
-use the {\bf vacuumdb} command, which can be run from a cron job.
-
-All database programs have some means of writing the database out in ASCII
-format and then reloading it. Doing so will re-create the database from
-scratch producing a compacted result, so below, we show you how you can do
-this for PostgreSQL.
-
-For a {\bf PostgreSQL} database, you could write the Bacula database as an
-ASCII file (bacula.sql) then reload it by doing the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-pg_dump -c bacula > bacula.sql
-cat bacula.sql | psql bacula
-rm -f bacula.sql
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Depending on the size of your database, this will take more or less time and a
-fair amount of disk space. For example, you can {\bf cd} to the location of
-the Bacula database (typically /usr/local/pgsql/data or possible
-/var/lib/pgsql/data) and check the size.
-
-There are certain PostgreSQL users who do not recommend the above
-procedure. They have the following to say:
-PostgreSQL does not
-need to be dumped/restored to keep the database efficient. A normal
-process of vacuuming will prevent the database from every getting too
-large. If you want to fine-tweak the database storage, commands such
-as VACUUM FULL, REINDEX, and CLUSTER exist specifically to keep you
-from having to do a dump/restore.
-
-Finally, you might want to look at the PostgreSQL documentation on
-this subject at
-\elink{http://www.postgresql.org/docs/8.1/interactive/maintenance.html}
-{http://www.postgresql.org/docs/8.1/interactive/maintenance.html}.
-
-\section{Compacting Your SQLite Database}
-\index[general]{Compacting Your SQLite Database }
-\index[general]{Database!Compacting Your SQLite }
-
-First please read the previous section that explains why it is necessary to
-compress a database. SQLite version 2.8.4 and greater have the {\bf Vacuum}
-command for compacting the database.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-cd {\bf working-directory}
-echo 'vacuum;' | sqlite bacula.db
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-As an alternative, you can use the following commands, adapted to your system:
-
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-cd {\bf working-directory}
-echo '.dump' | sqlite bacula.db > bacula.sql
-rm -f bacula.db
-sqlite bacula.db < bacula.sql
-rm -f bacula.sql
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Where {\bf working-directory} is the directory that you specified in the
-Director's configuration file. Note, in the case of SQLite, it is necessary to
-completely delete (rm) the old database before creating a new compressed
-version.
-
-\section{Migrating from SQLite to MySQL or PostgreSQL}
-\index[general]{MySQL!Migrating from SQLite to }
-\index[general]{Migrating from SQLite to MySQL or PostgreSQL}
-
-You may begin using Bacula with SQLite then later find that you want to switch
-to MySQL or Postgres for any of a number of reasons: SQLite tends to use more
-disk than MySQL; when the database is corrupted it is often more catastrophic
-than with MySQL or PostgreSQL. Several users have succeeded in converting by
-exporting the SQLite data and then processing it with Perl scripts prior to
-putting it into MySQL or PostgreSQL. This is, however, not a simple process.
-Scripts are available on bacula source distribution under
-\texttt{examples/database}.
-
-\label{BackingUpBacula}
-\section{Backing Up Your Bacula Database}
-\index[general]{Backing Up Your Bacula Database }
-\index[general]{Database!Backing Up Your Bacula }
-
-If ever the machine on which your Bacula database crashes, and you need to
-restore from backup tapes, one of your first priorities will probably be to
-recover the database. Although Bacula will happily backup your catalog
-database if it is specified in the FileSet, this is not a very good way to do
-it, because the database will be saved while Bacula is modifying it. Thus the
-database may be in an instable state. Worse yet, you will backup the database
-before all the Bacula updates have been applied.
-
-To resolve these problems, you need to backup the database after all the backup
-jobs have been run. In addition, you will want to make a copy while Bacula is
-not modifying it. To do so, you can use two scripts provided in the release
-{\bf make\_catalog\_backup} and {\bf delete\_catalog\_backup}. These files
-will be automatically generated along with all the other Bacula scripts. The
-first script will make an ASCII copy of your Bacula database into {\bf
-bacula.sql} in the working directory you specified in your configuration, and
-the second will delete the {\bf bacula.sql} file.
-
-The basic sequence of events to make this work correctly is as follows:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Run all your nightly backups
-\item After running your nightly backups, run a Catalog backup Job
-\item The Catalog backup job must be scheduled after your last nightly backup
-
-\item You use {\bf RunBeforeJob} to create the ASCII backup file and {\bf
- RunAfterJob} to clean up
-\end{itemize}
-
-Assuming that you start all your nightly backup jobs at 1:05 am (and that they
-run one after another), you can do the catalog backup with the following
-additional Director configuration statements:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-# Backup the catalog database (after the nightly save)
-Job {
- Name = "BackupCatalog"
- Type = Backup
- Client=rufus-fd
- FileSet="Catalog"
- Schedule = "WeeklyCycleAfterBackup"
- Storage = DLTDrive
- Messages = Standard
- Pool = Default
- # WARNING!!! Passing the password via the command line is insecure.
- # see comments in make_catalog_backup for details.
- RunBeforeJob = "/home/kern/bacula/bin/make_catalog_backup"
- RunAfterJob = "/home/kern/bacula/bin/delete_catalog_backup"
- Write Bootstrap = "/home/kern/bacula/working/BackupCatalog.bsr"
-}
-# This schedule does the catalog. It starts after the WeeklyCycle
-Schedule {
- Name = "WeeklyCycleAfterBackup
- Run = Level=Full sun-sat at 1:10
-}
-# This is the backup of the catalog
-FileSet {
- Name = "Catalog"
- Include {
- Options {
- signature=MD5
- }
- File = \lt{}working_directory\gt{}/bacula.sql
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Be sure to write a bootstrap file as in the above example. However, it is preferable
-to write or copy the bootstrap file to another computer. It will allow
-you to quickly recover the database backup should that be necessary. If
-you do not have a bootstrap file, it is still possible to recover your
-database backup, but it will be more work and take longer.
-
-
-\label{BackingUpBaculaSecurityConsiderations}
-\section{Security considerations}
-\index[general]{Backing Up Your Bacula Database - Security Considerations }
-\index[general]{Database!Backing Up Your Bacula Database - Security Considerations }
-
-We provide make\_catalog\_backup as an example of what can be used to backup
-your Bacula database. We expect you to take security precautions relevant
-to your situation. make\_catalog\_backup is designed to take a password on
-the command line. This is fine on machines with only trusted users. It is
-not acceptable on machines without trusted users. Most database systems
-provide a alternative method, which does not place the password on the
-command line.
-
-The make\_catalog\_backup script contains some warnings about how to use it. Please
-read those tips.
-
-To help you get started, we know PostgreSQL has a password file,
-\elink{
-.pgpass}{http://www.postgresql.org/docs/8.2/static/libpq-pgpass.html}, and
-we know MySQL has
-\elink{ .my.cnf}{http://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/4.1/en/password-security.html}.
-
-Only you can decide what is appropriate for your situation. We have provided
-you with a starting point. We hope it helps.
-
-
-\label{BackingUPOtherDBs}
-\section{Backing Up Third Party Databases}
-\index[general]{Backing Up Third Party Databases }
-\index[general]{Databases!Backing Up Third Party }
-
-If you are running a database in production mode on your machine, Bacula will
-happily backup the files, but if the database is in use while Bacula is
-reading it, you may back it up in an unstable state.
-
-The best solution is to shutdown your database before backing it up, or use
-some tool specific to your database to make a valid live copy perhaps by
-dumping the database in ASCII format. I am not a database expert, so I cannot
-provide you advice on how to do this, but if you are unsure about how to
-backup your database, you might try visiting the Backup Central site, which
-has been renamed Storage Mountain (www.backupcentral.com). In particular,
-their
-\elink{ Free Backup and Recovery
-Software}{http://www.backupcentral.com/toc-free-backup-software.html} page has
-links to scripts that show you how to shutdown and backup most major
-databases.
-\label{Size}
-
-\section{Database Size}
-\index[general]{Size!Database }
-\index[general]{Database Size }
-
-As mentioned above, if you do not do automatic pruning, your Catalog will grow
-each time you run a Job. Normally, you should decide how long you want File
-records to be maintained in the Catalog and set the {\bf File Retention}
-period to that time. Then you can either wait and see how big your Catalog
-gets or make a calculation assuming approximately 154 bytes for each File
-saved and knowing the number of Files that are saved during each backup and
-the number of Clients you backup.
-
-For example, suppose you do a backup of two systems, each with 100,000 files.
-Suppose further that you do a Full backup weekly and an Incremental every day,
-and that the Incremental backup typically saves 4,000 files. The size of your
-database after a month can roughly be calculated as:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Size = 154 * No. Systems * (100,000 * 4 + 10,000 * 26)
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-where we have assumed four weeks in a month and 26 incremental backups per month.
-This would give the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Size = 154 * 2 * (100,000 * 4 + 10,000 * 26)
-or
- Size = 308 * (400,000 + 260,000)
-or
- Size = 203,280,000 bytes
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-So for the above two systems, we should expect to have a database size of
-approximately 200 Megabytes. Of course, this will vary according to how many
-files are actually backed up.
-
-Below are some statistics for a MySQL database containing Job records for five
-Clients beginning September 2001 through May 2002 (8.5 months) and File
-records for the last 80 days. (Older File records have been pruned). For these
-systems, only the user files and system files that change are backed up. The
-core part of the system is assumed to be easily reloaded from the Red Hat rpms.
-
-
-In the list below, the files (corresponding to Bacula Tables) with the
-extension .MYD contain the data records whereas files with the extension .MYI
-contain indexes.
-
-You will note that the File records (containing the file attributes) make up
-the large bulk of the number of records as well as the space used (459 Mega
-Bytes including the indexes). As a consequence, the most important Retention
-period will be the {\bf File Retention} period. A quick calculation shows that
-for each File that is saved, the database grows by approximately 150 bytes.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Size in
- Bytes Records File
- ============ ========= ===========
- 168 5 Client.MYD
- 3,072 Client.MYI
- 344,394,684 3,080,191 File.MYD
- 115,280,896 File.MYI
- 2,590,316 106,902 Filename.MYD
- 3,026,944 Filename.MYI
- 184 4 FileSet.MYD
- 2,048 FileSet.MYI
- 49,062 1,326 JobMedia.MYD
- 30,720 JobMedia.MYI
- 141,752 1,378 Job.MYD
- 13,312 Job.MYI
- 1,004 11 Media.MYD
- 3,072 Media.MYI
- 1,299,512 22,233 Path.MYD
- 581,632 Path.MYI
- 36 1 Pool.MYD
- 3,072 Pool.MYI
- 5 1 Version.MYD
- 1,024 Version.MYI
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-This database has a total size of approximately 450 Megabytes.
-
-If we were using SQLite, the determination of the total database size would be
-much easier since it is a single file, but we would have less insight to the
-size of the individual tables as we have in this case.
-
-Note, SQLite databases may be as much as 50\% larger than MySQL databases due
-to the fact that all data is stored as ASCII strings. That is even binary
-integers are stored as ASCII strings, and this seems to increase the space
-needed.
+++ /dev/null
-#!/usr/bin/perl -w
-# Finds potential problems in tex files, and issues warnings to the console
-# about what it finds. Takes a list of files as its only arguments,
-# and does checks on all the files listed. The assumption is that these are
-# valid (or close to valid) LaTeX files. It follows \include statements
-# recursively to pick up any included tex files.
-#
-#
-#
-# Currently the following checks are made:
-#
-# -- Multiple hyphens not inside a verbatim environment (or \verb). These
-# should be placed inside a \verb{} contruct so they will not be converted
-# to single hyphen by latex and latex2html.
-
-
-# Original creation 3-8-05 by Karl Cunningham karlc -at- keckec -dot- com
-#
-#
-
-use strict;
-
-# The following builds the test string to identify and change multiple
-# hyphens in the tex files. Several constructs are identified but only
-# multiple hyphens are changed; the others are fed to the output
-# unchanged.
-my $b = '\\\\begin\\*?\\s*\\{\\s*'; # \begin{
-my $e = '\\\\end\\*?\\s*\\{\\s*'; # \end{
-my $c = '\\s*\\}'; # closing curly brace
-
-# This captures entire verbatim environments. These are passed to the output
-# file unchanged.
-my $verbatimenv = $b . "verbatim" . $c . ".*?" . $e . "verbatim" . $c;
-
-# This captures \verb{..{ constructs. They are passed to the output unchanged.
-my $verb = '\\\\verb\\*?(.).*?\\1';
-
-# This captures multiple hyphens with a leading and trailing space. These are not changed.
-my $hyphsp = '\\s\\-{2,}\\s';
-
-# This identifies other multiple hyphens.
-my $hyphens = '\\-{2,}';
-
-# This identifies \hyperpage{..} commands, which should be ignored.
-my $hyperpage = '\\\\hyperpage\\*?\\{.*?\\}';
-
-# This builds the actual test string from the above strings.
-#my $teststr = "$verbatimenv|$verb|$tocentry|$hyphens";
-my $teststr = "$verbatimenv|$verb|$hyphsp|$hyperpage|$hyphens";
-
-
-sub get_includes {
- # Get a list of include files from the top-level tex file. The first
- # argument is a pointer to the list of files found. The rest of the
- # arguments is a list of filenames to check for includes.
- my $files = shift;
- my ($fileline,$includefile,$includes);
-
- while (my $filename = shift) {
- # Get a list of all the html files in the directory.
- open my $if,"<$filename" or die "Cannot open input file $filename\n";
- $fileline = 0;
- $includes = 0;
- while (<$if>) {
- chomp;
- $fileline++;
- # If a file is found in an include, process it.
- if (($includefile) = /\\include\s*\{(.*?)\}/) {
- $includes++;
- # Append .tex to the filename
- $includefile .= '.tex';
-
- # If the include file has already been processed, issue a warning
- # and don't do it again.
- my $found = 0;
- foreach (@$files) {
- if ($_ eq $includefile) {
- $found = 1;
- last;
- }
- }
- if ($found) {
- print "$includefile found at line $fileline in $filename was previously included\n";
- } else {
- # The file has not been previously found. Save it and
- # recursively process it.
- push (@$files,$includefile);
- get_includes($files,$includefile);
- }
- }
- }
- close IF;
- }
-}
-
-
-sub check_hyphens {
- my (@files) = @_;
- my ($filedata,$this,$linecnt,$before);
-
- # Build the test string to check for the various environments.
- # We only do the conversion if the multiple hyphens are outside of a
- # verbatim environment (either \begin{verbatim}...\end{verbatim} or
- # \verb{--}). Capture those environments and pass them to the output
- # unchanged.
-
- foreach my $file (@files) {
- # Open the file and load the whole thing into $filedata. A bit wasteful but
- # easier to deal with, and we don't have a problem with speed here.
- $filedata = "";
- open IF,"<$file" or die "Cannot open input file $file";
- while (<IF>) {
- $filedata .= $_;
- }
- close IF;
-
- # Set up to process the file data.
- $linecnt = 1;
-
- # Go through the file data from beginning to end. For each match, save what
- # came before it and what matched. $filedata now becomes only what came
- # after the match.
- # Chech the match to see if it starts with a multiple-hyphen. If so
- # warn the user. Keep track of line numbers so they can be output
- # with the warning message.
- while ($filedata =~ /$teststr/os) {
- $this = $&;
- $before = $`;
- $filedata = $';
- $linecnt += $before =~ tr/\n/\n/;
-
- # Check if the multiple hyphen is present outside of one of the
- # acceptable constructs.
- if ($this =~ /^\-+/) {
- print "Possible unwanted multiple hyphen found in line ",
- "$linecnt of file $file\n";
- }
- $linecnt += $this =~ tr/\n/\n/;
- }
- }
-}
-##################################################################
-# MAIN ####
-##################################################################
-
-my (@includes,$cnt);
-
-# Examine the file pointed to by the first argument to get a list of
-# includes to test.
-get_includes(\@includes,@ARGV);
-
-check_hyphens(@includes);
+++ /dev/null
-#
-# Avoid that @VERSION@ and @DATE@ are changed by configure
-# This file is sourced by update_version
-#
-echo "s%@VERSION@%${VERSION}%g" >${out}
-echo "s%@DATE@%${DATE}%g" >>${out}
+++ /dev/null
-% TODO: maybe get rid of centering
-
-\chapter{GNU Free Documentation License}
-\index[general]{GNU Free Documentation License}
-\index[general]{License!GNU Free Documentation}
-
-\label{label_fdl}
-
- \begin{center}
-
- Version 1.2, November 2002
-
-
- Copyright \copyright 2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
- \bigskip
-
- 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
-
- \bigskip
-
- Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
- of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
-\end{center}
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\bf\large Preamble}
-\end{center}
-
-The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
-functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
-assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
-with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.
-Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way
-to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible
-for modifications made by others.
-
-This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
-works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It
-complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
-license designed for free software.
-
-We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free
-software, because free software needs free documentation: a free
-program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the
-software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals;
-it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or
-whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License
-principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS}
-\end{center}
-
-This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that
-contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be
-distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a
-world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that
-work under the conditions stated herein. The \textbf{"Document"}, below,
-refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a
-licensee, and is addressed as \textbf{"you"}. You accept the license if you
-copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission
-under copyright law.
-
-A \textbf{"Modified Version"} of the Document means any work containing the
-Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
-modifications and/or translated into another language.
-
-A \textbf{"Secondary Section"} is a named appendix or a front-matter section of
-the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
-publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject
-(or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly
-within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a
-textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any
-mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical
-connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal,
-commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding
-them.
-
-The \textbf{"Invariant Sections"} are certain Secondary Sections whose titles
-are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice
-that says that the Document is released under this License. If a
-section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not
-allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero
-Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant
-Sections then there are none.
-
-The \textbf{"Cover Texts"} are certain short passages of text that are listed,
-as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that
-the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may
-be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
-
-A \textbf{"Transparent"} copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
-represented in a format whose specification is available to the
-general public, that is suitable for revising the document
-straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of
-pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available
-drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or
-for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input
-to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file
-format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart
-or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent.
-An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount
-of text. A copy that is not "Transparent" is called \textbf{"Opaque"}.
-
-Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
-ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML
-or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple
-HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of
-transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats
-include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by
-proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or
-processing tools are not generally available, and the
-machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
-processors for output purposes only.
-
-The \textbf{"Title Page"} means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
-plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material
-this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in
-formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title Page" means
-the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title,
-preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
-
-A section \textbf{"Entitled XYZ"} means a named subunit of the Document whose
-title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following
-text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a
-specific section name mentioned below, such as \textbf{"Acknowledgements"},
-\textbf{"Dedications"}, \textbf{"Endorsements"}, or \textbf{"History"}.)
-To \textbf{"Preserve the Title"}
-of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a
-section "Entitled XYZ" according to this definition.
-
-The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which
-states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty
-Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this
-License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
-implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has
-no effect on the meaning of this License.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 2. VERBATIM COPYING}
-\end{center}
-
-You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
-commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
-copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies
-to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other
-conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use
-technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further
-copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept
-compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough
-number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
-
-You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and
-you may publicly display copies.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY}
-\end{center}
-
-
-If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have
-printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the
-Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the
-copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover
-Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on
-the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify
-you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present
-the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and
-visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition.
-Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve
-the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated
-as verbatim copying in other respects.
-
-If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
-legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
-reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent
-pages.
-
-If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering
-more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent
-copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy
-a computer-network location from which the general network-using
-public has access to download using public-standard network protocols
-a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material.
-If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps,
-when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure
-that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
-location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an
-Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that
-edition to the public.
-
-It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the
-Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give
-them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 4. MODIFICATIONS}
-\end{center}
-
-You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under
-the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
-the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
-Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
-and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy
-of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item[A.]
- Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct
- from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions
- (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section
- of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version
- if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
-
-\item[B.]
- List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities
- responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified
- Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the
- Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five),
- unless they release you from this requirement.
-
-\item[C.]
- State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
- Modified Version, as the publisher.
-
-\item[D.]
- Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
-
-\item[E.]
- Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
- adjacent to the other copyright notices.
-
-\item[F.]
- Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice
- giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the
- terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
-
-\item[G.]
- Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections
- and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
-
-\item[H.]
- Include an unaltered copy of this License.
-
-\item[I.]
- Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title, and add
- to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
- publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If
- there is no section Entitled "History" in the Document, create one
- stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
- given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
- Version as stated in the previous sentence.
-
-\item[J.]
- Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
- public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
- the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
- it was based on. These may be placed in the "History" section.
- You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
- least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
- publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
-
-\item[K.]
- For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
- Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all
- the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
- and/or dedications given therein.
-
-\item[L.]
- Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
- unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers
- or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
-
-\item[M.]
- Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section
- may not be included in the Modified Version.
-
-\item[N.]
- Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled "Endorsements"
- or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
-
-\item[O.]
- Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
-\end{itemize}
-
-If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
-appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material
-copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all
-of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the
-list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice.
-These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
-
-You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
-nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
-parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
-been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a
-standard.
-
-You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a
-passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list
-of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of
-Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
-through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already
-includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or
-by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of,
-you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit
-permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
-
-The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License
-give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or
-imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS}
-\end{center}
-
-
-You may combine the Document with other documents released under this
-License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified
-versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the
-Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
-list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its
-license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
-
-The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
-multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
-copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but
-different contents, make the title of each such section unique by
-adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
-author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number.
-Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of
-Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
-
-In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled "History"
-in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled
-"History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled "Acknowledgements",
-and any sections Entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections
-Entitled "Endorsements".
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS}
-\end{center}
-
-You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents
-released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this
-License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in
-the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for
-verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
-
-You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute
-it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this
-License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all
-other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS}
-\end{center}
-
-
-A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate
-and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or
-distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the copyright
-resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights
-of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit.
-When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not
-apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves
-derivative works of the Document.
-
-If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
-copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of
-the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on
-covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
-electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form.
-Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole
-aggregate.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 8. TRANSLATION}
-\end{center}
-
-
-Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
-distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4.
-Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
-permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
-translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
-original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
-translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
-Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include
-the original English version of this License and the original versions
-of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between
-the translation and the original version of this License or a notice
-or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
-
-If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
-"Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to Preserve
-its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual
-title.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 9. TERMINATION}
-\end{center}
-
-
-You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except
-as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to
-copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will
-automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,
-parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
-License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
-parties remain in full compliance.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE}
-\end{center}
-
-
-The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions
-of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new
-versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
-differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See
-http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
-
-Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number.
-If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this
-License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of
-following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or
-of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
-Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version
-number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not
-as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents}
-% TODO: this is too long for table of contents
-\end{center}
-
-To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
-the License in the document and put the following copyright and
-license notices just after the title page:
-
-\bigskip
-\begin{quote}
- Copyright \copyright YEAR YOUR NAME.
- Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
- under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
- or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
- with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
- A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
- Free Documentation License".
-\end{quote}
-\bigskip
-
-If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts,
-replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
-
-\bigskip
-\begin{quote}
- with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
- Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
-\end{quote}
-\bigskip
-
-If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
-combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
-situation.
-
-If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
-recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
-free software license, such as the GNU General Public License,
-to permit their use in free software.
-
-%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+++ /dev/null
-#!/usr/bin/perl -w
-# Fixes various things within tex files.
-
-use strict;
-
-my %args;
-
-
-sub get_includes {
- # Get a list of include files from the top-level tex file.
- my (@list,$file);
-
- foreach my $filename (@_) {
- $filename or next;
- # Start with the top-level latex file so it gets checked too.
- push (@list,$filename);
-
- # Get a list of all the html files in the directory.
- open IF,"<$filename" or die "Cannot open input file $filename";
- while (<IF>) {
- chomp;
- push @list,"$1.tex" if (/\\include\{(.*?)\}/);
- }
-
- close IF;
- }
- return @list;
-}
-
-sub convert_files {
- my (@files) = @_;
- my ($linecnt,$filedata,$output,$itemcnt,$indentcnt,$cnt);
-
- $cnt = 0;
- foreach my $file (@files) {
- # Open the file and load the whole thing into $filedata. A bit wasteful but
- # easier to deal with, and we don't have a problem with speed here.
- $filedata = "";
- open IF,"<$file" or die "Cannot open input file $file";
- while (<IF>) {
- $filedata .= $_;
- }
- close IF;
-
- # We look for a line that starts with \item, and indent the two next lines (if not blank)
- # by three spaces.
- my $linecnt = 3;
- $indentcnt = 0;
- $output = "";
- # Process a line at a time.
- foreach (split(/\n/,$filedata)) {
- $_ .= "\n"; # Put back the return.
- # If this line is less than the third line past the \item command,
- # and the line isn't blank and doesn't start with whitespace
- # add three spaces to the start of the line. Keep track of the number
- # of lines changed.
- if ($linecnt < 3 and !/^\\item/) {
- if (/^[^\n\s]/) {
- $output .= " " . $_;
- $indentcnt++;
- } else {
- $output .= $_;
- }
- $linecnt++;
- } else {
- $linecnt = 3;
- $output .= $_;
- }
- /^\\item / and $linecnt = 1;
- }
-
-
- # This is an item line. We need to process it too. If inside a \begin{description} environment, convert
- # \item {\bf xxx} to \item [xxx] or \item [{xxx}] (if xxx contains '[' or ']'.
- $itemcnt = 0;
- $filedata = $output;
- $output = "";
- my ($before,$descrip,$this,$between);
-
- # Find any \begin{description} environment
- while ($filedata =~ /(\\begin[\s\n]*\{[\s\n]*description[\s\n]*\})(.*?)(\\end[\s\n]*\{[\s\n]*description[\s\n]*\})/s) {
- $output .= $` . $1;
- $filedata = $3 . $';
- $descrip = $2;
-
- # Search for \item {\bf xxx}
- while ($descrip =~ /\\item[\s\n]*\{[\s\n]*\\bf[\s\n]*/s) {
- $descrip = $';
- $output .= $`;
- ($between,$descrip) = find_matching_brace($descrip);
- if (!$descrip) {
- $linecnt = $output =~ tr/\n/\n/;
- print STDERR "Missing matching curly brace at line $linecnt in $file\n" if (!$descrip);
- }
-
- # Now do the replacement.
- $between = '{' . $between . '}' if ($between =~ /\[|\]/);
- $output .= "\\item \[$between\]";
- $itemcnt++;
- }
- $output .= $descrip;
- }
- $output .= $filedata;
-
- # If any hyphens or \item commnads were converted, save the file.
- if ($indentcnt or $itemcnt) {
- open OF,">$file" or die "Cannot open output file $file";
- print OF $output;
- close OF;
- print "$indentcnt indent", ($indentcnt == 1) ? "" : "s"," added in $file\n";
- print "$itemcnt item", ($itemcnt == 1) ? "" : "s"," Changed in $file\n";
- }
-
- $cnt += $indentcnt + $itemcnt;
- }
- return $cnt;
-}
-
-sub find_matching_brace {
- # Finds text up to the next matching brace. Assumes that the input text doesn't contain
- # the opening brace, but we want to find text up to a matching closing one.
- # Returns the text between the matching braces, followed by the rest of the text following
- # (which does not include the matching brace).
- #
- my $str = shift;
- my ($this,$temp);
- my $cnt = 1;
-
- while ($cnt) {
- # Ignore verbatim constructs involving curly braces, or if the character preceding
- # the curly brace is a backslash.
- if ($str =~ /\\verb\*?\{.*?\{|\\verb\*?\}.*?\}|\{|\}/s) {
- $this .= $`;
- $str = $';
- $temp = $&;
-
- if ((substr($this,-1,1) eq '\\') or
- $temp =~ /^\\verb/) {
- $this .= $temp;
- next;
- }
-
- $cnt += ($temp eq '{') ? 1 : -1;
- # If this isn't the matching curly brace ($cnt > 0), include the brace.
- $this .= $temp if ($cnt);
- } else {
- # No matching curly brace found.
- return ($this . $str,'');
- }
- }
- return ($this,$str);
-}
-
-sub check_arguments {
- # Checks command-line arguments for ones starting with -- puts them into
- # a hash called %args and removes them from @ARGV.
- my $args = shift;
- my $i;
-
- for ($i = 0; $i < $#ARGV; $i++) {
- $ARGV[$i] =~ /^\-+/ or next;
- $ARGV[$i] =~ s/^\-+//;
- $args{$ARGV[$i]} = "";
- delete ($ARGV[$i]);
-
- }
-}
-
-##################################################################
-# MAIN ####
-##################################################################
-
-my @includes;
-my $cnt;
-
-check_arguments(\%args);
-die "No Files given to Check\n" if ($#ARGV < 0);
-
-# Examine the file pointed to by the first argument to get a list of
-# includes to test.
-@includes = get_includes(@ARGV);
-
-$cnt = convert_files(@includes);
-print "No lines changed\n" unless $cnt;
+++ /dev/null
-# This module does multiple indices, supporting the style of the LaTex 'index'
-# package.
-
-# Version Information:
-# 16-Feb-2005 -- Original Creation. Karl E. Cunningham
-# 14-Mar-2005 -- Clarified and Consolodated some of the code.
-# Changed to smoothly handle single and multiple indices.
-
-# Two LaTeX index formats are supported...
-# --- SINGLE INDEX ---
-# \usepackage{makeidx}
-# \makeindex
-# \index{entry1}
-# \index{entry2}
-# \index{entry3}
-# ...
-# \printindex
-#
-# --- MULTIPLE INDICES ---
-#
-# \usepackage{makeidx}
-# \usepackage{index}
-# \makeindex -- latex2html doesn't care but LaTeX does.
-# \newindex{ref1}{ext1}{ext2}{title1}
-# \newindex{ref2}{ext1}{ext2}{title2}
-# \newindex{ref3}{ext1}{ext2}{title3}
-# \index[ref1]{entry1}
-# \index[ref1]{entry2}
-# \index[ref3]{entry3}
-# \index[ref2]{entry4}
-# \index{entry5}
-# \index[ref3]{entry6}
-# ...
-# \printindex[ref1]
-# \printindex[ref2]
-# \printindex[ref3]
-# \printindex
-# ___________________
-#
-# For the multiple-index style, each index is identified by the ref argument to \newindex, \index,
-# and \printindex. A default index is allowed, which is indicated by omitting the optional
-# argument. The default index does not require a \newindex command. As \index commands
-# are encountered, their entries are stored according
-# to the ref argument. When the \printindex command is encountered, the stored index
-# entries for that argument are retrieved and printed. The title for each index is taken
-# from the last argument in the \newindex command.
-# While processing \index and \printindex commands, if no argument is given the index entries
-# are built into a default index. The title of the default index is simply "Index".
-# This makes the difference between single- and multiple-index processing trivial.
-#
-# Another method can be used by omitting the \printindex command and just using \include to
-# pull in index files created by the makeindex program. These files will start with
-# \begin{theindex}. This command is used to determine where to print the index. Using this
-# approach, the indices will be output in the same order as the newindex commands were
-# originally found (see below). Using a combination of \printindex and \include{indexfile} has not
-# been tested and may produce undesireable results.
-#
-# The index data are stored in a hash for later sorting and output. As \printindex
-# commands are handled, the order in which they were found in the tex filea is saved,
-# associated with the ref argument to \printindex.
-#
-# We use the original %index hash to store the index data into. We append a \002 followed by the
-# name of the index to isolate the entries in different indices from each other. This is necessary
-# so that different indices can have entries with the same name. For the default index, the \002 is
-# appended without the name.
-#
-# Since the index order in the output cannot be determined if the \include{indexfile}
-# command is used, the order will be assumed from the order in which the \newindex
-# commands were originally seen in the TeX files. This order is saved as well as the
-# order determined from any printindex{ref} commands. If \printindex commnads are used
-# to specify the index output, that order will be used. If the \include{idxfile} command
-# is used, the order of the original newindex commands will be used. In this case the
-# default index will be printed last since it doesn't have a corresponding \newindex
-# command and its order cannot be determined. Mixing \printindex and \include{idxfile}
-# commands in the same file is likely to produce less than satisfactory results.
-#
-#
-# The hash containing index data is named %indices. It contains the following data:
-#{
-# 'title' => {
-# $ref1 => $indextitle ,
-# $ref2 => $indextitle ,
-# ...
-# },
-# 'newcmdorder' => [ ref1, ref2, ..., * ], # asterisk indicates the position of the default index.
-# 'printindorder' => [ ref1, ref2, ..., * ], # asterisk indicates the position of the default index.
-#}
-
-
-# Globals to handle multiple indices.
-my %indices;
-
-# This tells the system to use up to 7 words in index entries.
-$WORDS_IN_INDEX = 10;
-
-# KEC 2-18-05
-# Handles the \newindex command. This is called if the \newindex command is
-# encountered in the LaTex source. Gets the index ref and title from the arguments.
-# Saves the index ref and title.
-# Note that we are called once to handle multiple \newindex commands that are
-# newline-separated.
-sub do_cmd_newindex {
- my $data = shift;
- # The data is sent to us as fields delimited by their ID #'s. We extract the
- # fields.
- foreach my $line (split("\n",$data)) {
- my @fields = split (/(?:\<\#\d+?\#\>)+/,$line);
-
- # The index name and title are the second and fourth fields in the data.
- if ($line =~ /^</ or $line =~ /^\\newindex/) {
- my ($indexref,$indextitle) = ($fields[1],$fields[4]);
- $indices{'title'}{$indexref} = $indextitle;
- push (@{$indices{'newcmdorder'}},$indexref);
- }
- }
-}
-
-
-# KEC -- Copied from makeidx.perl and modified to do multiple indices.
-# Processes an \index entry from the LaTex file.
-# Gets the optional argument from the index command, which is the name of the index
-# into which to place the entry.
-# Drops the brackets from the index_name
-# Puts the index entry into the html stream
-# Creates the tokenized index entry (which also saves the index entry info
-sub do_real_index {
- local($_) = @_;
- local($pat,$idx_entry,$index_name);
- # catches opt-arg from \index commands for index.sty
- $index_name = &get_next_optional_argument;
- $index_name = "" unless defined $index_name;
- # Drop leading and trailing brackets from the index name.
- $index_name =~ s/^\[|\]$//g;
-
- $idx_entry = &missing_braces unless (
- (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$pat=$1;$idx_entry=$2;''/e)
- ||(s/$next_pair_rx/$pat=$1;$idx_entry=$2;''/e));
-
- if ($index_name and defined $idx_entry and
- !defined $indices{'title'}{$index_name}) {
- print STDERR "\nInvalid Index Name: \\index \[$index_name\]\{$idx_entry\}\n";
- }
-
- $idx_entry = &named_index_entry($pat, $idx_entry,$index_name);
- $idx_entry.$_;
-}
-
-# Creates and saves an index entry in the index hashes.
-# Modified to do multiple indices.
-# Creates an index_key that allows index entries to have the same characteristics but be in
-# different indices. This index_key is the regular key with the index name appended.
-# Save the index order for the entry in the %index_order hash.
-sub named_index_entry {
- local($br_id, $str, $index_name) = @_;
- my ($index_key);
- # escape the quoting etc characters
- # ! -> \001
- # @ -> \002
- # | -> \003
- $* = 1; $str =~ s/\n\s*/ /g; $* = 0; # remove any newlines
- # protect \001 occurring with images
- $str =~ s/\001/\016/g; # 0x1 to 0xF
- $str =~ s/\\\\/\011/g; # Double backslash -> 0xB
- $str =~ s/\\;SPMquot;/\012/g; # \;SPMquot; -> 0xC
- $str =~ s/;SPMquot;!/\013/g; # ;SPMquot; -> 0xD
- $str =~ s/!/\001/g; # Exclamation point -> 0x1
- $str =~ s/\013/!/g; # 0xD -> Exclaimation point
- $str =~ s/;SPMquot;@/\015/g; # ;SPMquot;@ to 0xF
- $str =~ s/@/\002/g; # At sign -> 0x2
- $str =~ s/\015/@/g; # 0xF to At sign
- $str =~ s/;SPMquot;\|/\017/g; # ;SMPquot;| to 0x11
- $str =~ s/\|/\003/g; # Vertical line to 0x3
- $str =~ s/\017/|/g; # 0x11 to vertical line
- $str =~ s/;SPMquot;(.)/\1/g; # ;SPMquot; -> whatever the next character is
- $str =~ s/\012/;SPMquot;/g; # 0x12 to ;SPMquot;
- $str =~ s/\011/\\\\/g; # 0x11 to double backslash
- local($key_part, $pageref) = split("\003", $str, 2);
-
- # For any keys of the form: blablabla!blablabla, which want to be split at the
- # exclamation point, replace the ! with a comma and a space. We don't do it
- # that way for this index.
- $key_part =~ s/\001/, /g;
- local(@keys) = split("\001", $key_part);
- # If TITLE is not yet available use $before.
- $TITLE = $saved_title if (($saved_title)&&(!($TITLE)||($TITLE eq $default_title)));
- $TITLE = $before unless $TITLE;
- # Save the reference
- local($words) = '';
- if ($SHOW_SECTION_NUMBERS) { $words = &make_idxnum; }
- elsif ($SHORT_INDEX) { $words = &make_shortidxname; }
- else { $words = &make_idxname; }
- local($super_key) = '';
- local($sort_key, $printable_key, $cur_key);
- foreach $key (@keys) {
- $key =~ s/\016/\001/g; # revert protected \001s
- ($sort_key, $printable_key) = split("\002", $key);
- #
- # RRM: 16 May 1996
- # any \label in the printable-key will have already
- # created a label where the \index occurred.
- # This has to be removed, so that the desired label
- # will be found on the Index page instead.
- #
- if ($printable_key =~ /tex2html_anchor_mark/ ) {
- $printable_key =~ s/><tex2html_anchor_mark><\/A><A//g;
- local($tmpA,$tmpB) = split("NAME=\"", $printable_key);
- ($tmpA,$tmpB) = split("\"", $tmpB);
- $ref_files{$tmpA}='';
- $index_labels{$tmpA} = 1;
- }
- #
- # resolve and clean-up the hyperlink index-entries
- # so they can be saved in an index.pl file
- #
- if ($printable_key =~ /$cross_ref_mark/ ) {
- local($label,$id,$ref_label);
- # $printable_key =~ s/$cross_ref_mark#(\w+)#(\w+)>$cross_ref_mark/
- $printable_key =~ s/$cross_ref_mark#([^#]+)#([^>]+)>$cross_ref_mark/
- do { ($label,$id) = ($1,$2);
- $ref_label = $external_labels{$label} unless
- ($ref_label = $ref_files{$label});
- '"' . "$ref_label#$label" . '">' .
- &get_ref_mark($label,$id)}
- /geo;
- }
- $printable_key =~ s/<\#[^\#>]*\#>//go;
- #RRM
- # recognise \char combinations, for a \backslash
- #
- $printable_key =~ s/\&\#;\'134/\\/g; # restore \\s
- $printable_key =~ s/\&\#;\`<BR> /\\/g; # ditto
- $printable_key =~ s/\&\#;*SPMquot;92/\\/g; # ditto
- #
- # $sort_key .= "@$printable_key" if !($printable_key); # RRM
- $sort_key .= "@$printable_key" if !($sort_key); # RRM
- $sort_key =~ tr/A-Z/a-z/;
- if ($super_key) {
- $cur_key = $super_key . "\001" . $sort_key;
- $sub_index{$super_key} .= $cur_key . "\004";
- } else {
- $cur_key = $sort_key;
- }
-
- # Append the $index_name to the current key with a \002 delimiter. This will
- # allow the same index entry to appear in more than one index.
- $index_key = $cur_key . "\002$index_name";
-
- $index{$index_key} .= "";
-
- #
- # RRM, 15 June 1996
- # if there is no printable key, but one is known from
- # a previous index-entry, then use it.
- #
- if (!($printable_key) && ($printable_key{$index_key}))
- { $printable_key = $printable_key{$index_key}; }
-# if (!($printable_key) && ($printable_key{$cur_key}))
-# { $printable_key = $printable_key{$cur_key}; }
- #
- # do not overwrite the printable_key if it contains an anchor
- #
- if (!($printable_key{$index_key} =~ /tex2html_anchor_mark/ ))
- { $printable_key{$index_key} = $printable_key || $key; }
-# if (!($printable_key{$cur_key} =~ /tex2html_anchor_mark/ ))
-# { $printable_key{$cur_key} = $printable_key || $key; }
-
- $super_key = $cur_key;
- }
- #
- # RRM
- # page-ranges, from |( and |) and |see
- #
- if ($pageref) {
- if ($pageref eq "\(" ) {
- $pageref = '';
- $next .= " from ";
- } elsif ($pageref eq "\)" ) {
- $pageref = '';
- local($next) = $index{$index_key};
-# local($next) = $index{$cur_key};
- # $next =~ s/[\|] *$//;
- $next =~ s/(\n )?\| $//;
- $index{$index_key} = "$next to ";
-# $index{$cur_key} = "$next to ";
- }
- }
-
- if ($pageref) {
- $pageref =~ s/\s*$//g; # remove trailing spaces
- if (!$pageref) { $pageref = ' ' }
- $pageref =~ s/see/<i>see <\/i> /g;
- #
- # RRM: 27 Dec 1996
- # check if $pageref corresponds to a style command.
- # If so, apply it to the $words.
- #
- local($tmp) = "do_cmd_$pageref";
- if (defined &$tmp) {
- $words = &$tmp("<#0#>$words<#0#>");
- $words =~ s/<\#[^\#]*\#>//go;
- $pageref = '';
- }
- }
- #
- # RRM: 25 May 1996
- # any \label in the pageref section will have already
- # created a label where the \index occurred.
- # This has to be removed, so that the desired label
- # will be found on the Index page instead.
- #
- if ($pageref) {
- if ($pageref =~ /tex2html_anchor_mark/ ) {
- $pageref =~ s/><tex2html_anchor_mark><\/A><A//g;
- local($tmpA,$tmpB) = split("NAME=\"", $pageref);
- ($tmpA,$tmpB) = split("\"", $tmpB);
- $ref_files{$tmpA}='';
- $index_labels{$tmpA} = 1;
- }
- #
- # resolve and clean-up any hyperlinks in the page-ref,
- # so they can be saved in an index.pl file
- #
- if ($pageref =~ /$cross_ref_mark/ ) {
- local($label,$id,$ref_label);
- # $pageref =~ s/$cross_ref_mark#(\w+)#(\w+)>$cross_ref_mark/
- $pageref =~ s/$cross_ref_mark#([^#]+)#([^>]+)>$cross_ref_mark/
- do { ($label,$id) = ($1,$2);
- $ref_files{$label} = ''; # ???? RRM
- if ($index_labels{$label}) { $ref_label = ''; }
- else { $ref_label = $external_labels{$label}
- unless ($ref_label = $ref_files{$label});
- }
- '"' . "$ref_label#$label" . '">' . &get_ref_mark($label,$id)}/geo;
- }
- $pageref =~ s/<\#[^\#>]*\#>//go;
-
- if ($pageref eq ' ') { $index{$index_key}='@'; }
- else { $index{$index_key} .= $pageref . "\n | "; }
- } else {
- local($thisref) = &make_named_href('',"$CURRENT_FILE#$br_id",$words);
- $thisref =~ s/\n//g;
- $index{$index_key} .= $thisref."\n | ";
- }
- #print "\nREF: $sort_key : $index_key :$index{$index_key}";
-
- #join('',"<A NAME=$br_id>$anchor_invisible_mark<\/A>",$_);
-
- "<A NAME=\"$br_id\">$anchor_invisible_mark<\/A>";
-}
-
-
-# KEC. -- Copied from makeidx.perl, then modified to do multiple indices.
-# Feeds the index entries to the output. This is called for each index to be built.
-#
-# Generates a list of lookup keys for index entries, from both %printable_keys
-# and %index keys.
-# Sorts the keys according to index-sorting rules.
-# Removes keys with a 0x01 token. (duplicates?)
-# Builds a string to go to the index file.
-# Adds the index entries to the string if they belong in this index.
-# Keeps track of which index is being worked on, so only the proper entries
-# are included.
-# Places the index just built in to the output at the proper place.
-{ my $index_number = 0;
-sub add_real_idx {
- print "\nDoing the index ... Index Number $index_number\n";
- local($key, @keys, $next, $index, $old_key, $old_html);
- my ($idx_ref,$keyref);
- # RRM, 15.6.96: index constructed from %printable_key, not %index
- @keys = keys %printable_key;
-
- while (/$idx_mark/) {
- # Get the index reference from what follows the $idx_mark and
- # remove it from the string.
- s/$idxmark\002(.*?)\002/$idxmark/;
- $idx_ref = $1;
- $index = '';
- # include non- makeidx index-entries
- foreach $key (keys %index) {
- next if $printable_key{$key};
- $old_key = $key;
- if ($key =~ s/###(.*)$//) {
- next if $printable_key{$key};
- push (@keys, $key);
- $printable_key{$key} = $key;
- if ($index{$old_key} =~ /HREF="([^"]*)"/i) {
- $old_html = $1;
- $old_html =~ /$dd?([^#\Q$dd\E]*)#/;
- $old_html = $1;
- } else { $old_html = '' }
- $index{$key} = $index{$old_key} . $old_html."</A>\n | ";
- };
- }
- @keys = sort makeidx_keysort @keys;
- @keys = grep(!/\001/, @keys);
- my $cnt = 0;
- foreach $key (@keys) {
- my ($keyref) = $key =~ /.*\002(.*)/;
- next unless ($idx_ref eq $keyref); # KEC.
- $index .= &add_idx_key($key);
- $cnt++;
- }
- print "$cnt Index Entries Added\n";
- $index = '<DD>'.$index unless ($index =~ /^\s*<D(D|T)>/);
- $index_number++; # KEC.
- if ($SHORT_INDEX) {
- print "(compact version with Legend)";
- local($num) = ( $index =~ s/\<D/<D/g );
- if ($num > 50 ) {
- s/$idx_mark/$preindex<HR><DL>\n$index\n<\/DL>$preindex/o;
- } else {
- s/$idx_mark/$preindex<HR><DL>\n$index\n<\/DL>/o;
- }
- } else {
- s/$idx_mark/<DL COMPACT>\n$index\n<\/DL>/o; }
- }
-}
-}
-
-# KEC. Copied from latex2html.pl and modified to support multiple indices.
-# The bibliography and the index should be treated as separate sections
-# in their own HTML files. The \bibliography{} command acts as a sectioning command
-# that has the desired effect. But when the bibliography is constructed
-# manually using the thebibliography environment, or when using the
-# theindex environment it is not possible to use the normal sectioning
-# mechanism. This subroutine inserts a \bibliography{} or a dummy
-# \textohtmlindex command just before the appropriate environments
-# to force sectioning.
-sub add_bbl_and_idx_dummy_commands {
- local($id) = $global{'max_id'};
-
- s/([\\]begin\s*$O\d+$C\s*thebibliography)/$bbl_cnt++; $1/eg;
- ## if ($bbl_cnt == 1) {
- s/([\\]begin\s*$O\d+$C\s*thebibliography)/$id++; "\\bibliography$O$id$C$O$id$C $1"/geo;
- #}
- $global{'max_id'} = $id;
- # KEC. Modified to global substitution to place multiple index tokens.
- s/[\\]begin\s*($O\d+$C)\s*theindex/\\textohtmlindex$1/go;
- # KEC. Modified to pick up the optional argument to \printindex
- s/[\\]printindex\s*(\[.*?\])?/
- do { (defined $1) ? "\\textohtmlindex $1" : "\\textohtmlindex []"; } /ego;
- &lib_add_bbl_and_idx_dummy_commands() if defined(&lib_add_bbl_and_idx_dummy_commands);
-}
-
-# KEC. Copied from latex2html.pl and modified to support multiple indices.
-# For each textohtmlindex mark found, determine the index titles and headers.
-# We place the index ref in the header so the proper index can be generated later.
-# For the default index, the index ref is blank.
-#
-# One problem is that this routine is called twice.. Once for processing the
-# command as originally seen, and once for processing the command when
-# doing the name for the index file. We can detect that by looking at the
-# id numbers (or ref) surrounding the \theindex command, and not incrementing
-# index_number unless a new id (or ref) is seen. This has the side effect of
-# having to unconventionally start the index_number at -1. But it works.
-#
-# Gets the title from the list of indices.
-# If this is the first index, save the title in $first_idx_file. This is what's referenced
-# in the navigation buttons.
-# Increment the index_number for next time.
-# If the indexname command is defined or a newcommand defined for indexname, do it.
-# Save the index TITLE in the toc
-# Save the first_idx_file into the idxfile. This goes into the nav buttons.
-# Build index_labels if needed.
-# Create the index headings and put them in the output stream.
-
-{ my $index_number = 0; # Will be incremented before use.
- my $first_idx_file; # Static
- my $no_increment = 0;
-
-sub do_cmd_textohtmlindex {
- local($_) = @_;
- my ($idxref,$idxnum,$index_name);
-
- # We get called from make_name with the first argument = "\001noincrement". This is a sign
- # to not increment $index_number the next time we are called. We get called twice, once
- # my make_name and once by process_command. Unfortunately, make_name calls us just to set the name
- # but doesn't use the result so we get called a second time by process_command. This works fine
- # except for cases where there are multiple indices except if they aren't named, which is the case
- # when the index is inserted by an include command in latex. In these cases we are only able to use
- # the index number to decide which index to draw from, and we don't know how to increment that index
- # number if we get called a variable number of times for the same index, as is the case between
- # making html (one output file) and web (multiple output files) output formats.
- if (/\001noincrement/) {
- $no_increment = 1;
- return;
- }
-
- # Remove (but save) the index reference
- s/^\s*\[(.*?)\]/{$idxref = $1; "";}/e;
-
- # If we have an $idxref, the index name was specified. In this case, we have all the
- # information we need to carry on. Otherwise, we need to get the idxref
- # from the $index_number and set the name to "Index".
- if ($idxref) {
- $index_name = $indices{'title'}{$idxref};
- } else {
- if (defined ($idxref = $indices{'newcmdorder'}->[$index_number])) {
- $index_name = $indices{'title'}{$idxref};
- } else {
- $idxref = '';
- $index_name = "Index";
- }
- }
-
- $idx_title = "Index"; # The name displayed in the nav bar text.
-
- # Only set $idxfile if we are at the first index. This will point the
- # navigation panel to the first index file rather than the last.
- $first_idx_file = $CURRENT_FILE if ($index_number == 0);
- $idxfile = $first_idx_file; # Pointer for the Index button in the nav bar.
- $toc_sec_title = $index_name; # Index link text in the toc.
- $TITLE = $toc_sec_title; # Title for this index, from which its filename is built.
- if (%index_labels) { &make_index_labels(); }
- if (($SHORT_INDEX) && (%index_segment)) { &make_preindex(); }
- else { $preindex = ''; }
- local $idx_head = $section_headings{'textohtmlindex'};
- local($heading) = join(''
- , &make_section_heading($TITLE, $idx_head)
- , $idx_mark, "\002", $idxref, "\002" );
- local($pre,$post) = &minimize_open_tags($heading);
- $index_number++ unless ($no_increment);
- $no_increment = 0;
- join('',"<BR>\n" , $pre, $_);
-}
-}
-
-# Returns an index key, given the key passed as the first argument.
-# Not modified for multiple indices.
-sub add_idx_key {
- local($key) = @_;
- local($index, $next);
- if (($index{$key} eq '@' )&&(!($index_printed{$key}))) {
- if ($SHORT_INDEX) { $index .= "<DD><BR>\n<DT>".&print_key."\n<DD>"; }
- else { $index .= "<DT><DD><BR>\n<DT>".&print_key."\n<DD>"; }
- } elsif (($index{$key})&&(!($index_printed{$key}))) {
- if ($SHORT_INDEX) {
- $next = "<DD>".&print_key."\n : ". &print_idx_links;
- } else {
- $next = "<DT>".&print_key."\n<DD>". &print_idx_links;
- }
- $index .= $next."\n";
- $index_printed{$key} = 1;
- }
-
- if ($sub_index{$key}) {
- local($subkey, @subkeys, $subnext, $subindex);
- @subkeys = sort(split("\004", $sub_index{$key}));
- if ($SHORT_INDEX) {
- $index .= "<DD>".&print_key unless $index_printed{$key};
- $index .= "<DL>\n";
- } else {
- $index .= "<DT>".&print_key."\n<DD>" unless $index_printed{$key};
- $index .= "<DL COMPACT>\n";
- }
- foreach $subkey (@subkeys) {
- $index .= &add_sub_idx_key($subkey) unless ($index_printed{$subkey});
- }
- $index .= "</DL>\n";
- }
- return $index;
-}
-
-1; # Must be present as the last line.
+++ /dev/null
-# This file serves as a place to put initialization code and constants to
-# affect the behavior of latex2html for generating the bacula manuals.
-
-# $LINKPOINT specifies what filename to use to link to when creating
-# index.html. Not that this is a hard link.
-$LINKPOINT='"$OVERALL_TITLE"';
-
-
-# The following must be the last line of this file.
-1;
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Installing and Configuring MySQL}
-\label{MySqlChapter}
-\index[general]{MySQL!Installing and Configuring }
-\index[general]{Installing and Configuring MySQL }
-
-\section{Installing and Configuring MySQL -- Phase I}
-\index[general]{Installing and Configuring MySQL -- Phase I }
-\index[general]{Phase I!Installing and Configuring MySQL -- }
-
-If you use the ./configure \verb:--:with-mysql=mysql-directory statement for
-configuring {\bf Bacula}, you will need MySQL version 4.1 or later installed
-in the {\bf mysql-directory}. If you are using one of the new modes such as
-ANSI/ISO compatibility, you may experience problems.
-
-If MySQL is installed in the standard system location, you need only enter
-{\bf \verb:--:with-mysql} since the configure program will search all the
-standard locations. If you install MySQL in your home directory or some
-other non-standard directory, you will need to provide the full path to it.
-
-Installing and Configuring MySQL is not difficult but can be confusing the
-first time. As a consequence, below, we list the steps that we used to install
-it on our machines. Please note that our configuration leaves MySQL without
-any user passwords. This may be an undesirable situation if you have other
-users on your system.
-
-The notes below describe how to build MySQL from the source tar files. If
-you have a pre-installed MySQL, you can return to complete the installation
-of Bacula, then come back to Phase II of the MySQL installation. If you
-wish to install MySQL from rpms, you will probably need to install
-the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-mysql-<version>.rpm
-mysql-server-<version>.rpm
-mysql-devel-<version>.rpm
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-The names of the packages may vary from distribution to
-distribution. It is important to have the devel package loaded as
-it contains the libraries and header files necessary to build
-Bacula. There may be additional packages that are required to
-install the above, for example, zlib and openssl.
-
-Once these packages are installed, you will be able to build Bacula (using
-the files installed with the mysql package, then run MySQL using the
-files installed with mysql-server. If you have installed MySQL by rpms,
-please skip Phase I below, and return to complete the installation of
-Bacula, then come back to Phase II of the MySQL installation when indicated
-to do so.
-
-Beginning with Bacula version 1.31, the thread safe version of the
-MySQL client library is used, and hence you should add the {\bf
-\verb:--:enable-thread-safe-client} option to the {\bf
-./configure} as shown below:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Download MySQL source code from
- \elink{www.mysql.com/downloads}{http://www.mysql.com/downloads}
-
-\item Detar it with something like:
-
- {\bf tar xvfz mysql-filename}
-
-Note, the above command requires GNU tar. If you do not have GNU tar, a
-command such as:
-
-{\bf zcat mysql-filename | tar xvf - }
-
-will probably accomplish the same thing.
-
-\item cd {\bf mysql-source-directory}
-
- where you replace {\bf mysql-source-directory} with the directory name where
- you put the MySQL source code.
-
-\item ./configure \verb:--:enable-thread-safe-client \verb:--:prefix=mysql-directory
-
- where you replace {\bf mysql-directory} with the directory name where you
- want to install mysql. Normally for system wide use this is /usr/local/mysql.
- In my case, I use \~{}kern/mysql.
-
-\item make
-
- This takes a bit of time.
-
-\item make install
-
- This will put all the necessary binaries, libraries and support files into
- the {\bf mysql-directory} that you specified above.
-
-\item ./scripts/mysql\_install\_db
-
- This will create the necessary MySQL databases for controlling user access.
-Note, this script can also be found in the {\bf bin} directory in the
-installation directory
-
-\end{enumerate}
-
-The MySQL client library {\bf mysqlclient} requires the gzip compression
-library {\bf libz.a} or {\bf libz.so}. If you are using rpm packages, these
-libraries are in the {\bf libz-devel} package. On Debian systems, you will
-need to load the {\bf zlib1g-dev} package. If you are not using rpms or debs,
-you will need to find the appropriate package for your system.
-
-At this point, you should return to completing the installation of {\bf
-Bacula}. Later after Bacula is installed, come back to this chapter to
-complete the installation. Please note, the installation files used in the
-second phase of the MySQL installation are created during the Bacula
-Installation.
-
-\label{mysql_phase2}
-\section{Installing and Configuring MySQL -- Phase II}
-\index[general]{Installing and Configuring MySQL -- Phase II }
-\index[general]{Phase II!Installing and Configuring MySQL -- }
-
-At this point, you should have built and installed MySQL, or already have a
-running MySQL, and you should have configured, built and installed {\bf
-Bacula}. If not, please complete these items before proceeding.
-
-Please note that the {\bf ./configure} used to build {\bf Bacula} will need to
-include {\bf \verb:--:with-mysql=mysql-directory}, where {\bf mysql-directory} is the
-directory name that you specified on the ./configure command for configuring
-MySQL. This is needed so that Bacula can find the necessary include headers
-and library files for interfacing to MySQL.
-
-{\bf Bacula} will install scripts for manipulating the database (create,
-delete, make tables etc) into the main installation directory. These files
-will be of the form *\_bacula\_* (e.g. create\_bacula\_database). These files
-are also available in the \lt{}bacula-src\gt{}/src/cats directory after
-running ./configure. If you inspect create\_bacula\_database, you will see
-that it calls create\_mysql\_database. The *\_bacula\_* files are provided for
-convenience. It doesn't matter what database you have chosen;
-create\_bacula\_database will always create your database.
-
-Now you will create the Bacula MySQL database and the tables that Bacula uses.
-
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Start {\bf mysql}. You might want to use the {\bf startmysql} script
- provided in the Bacula release.
-
-\item cd \lt{}install-directory\gt{}
- This directory contains the Bacula catalog interface routines.
-
-\item ./grant\_mysql\_privileges
- This script creates unrestricted access rights for the user {\bf bacula}.
- You may want to modify it to suit your situation. Please
- note that none of the userids, including root, are password protected.
- If you need more security, please assign a password to the root user
- and to bacula. The program {\bf mysqladmin} can be used for this.
-
-\item ./create\_mysql\_database
- This script creates the MySQL {\bf bacula} database. The databases you
- create as well as the access databases will be located in
- \lt{}install-dir\gt{}/var/ in a subdirectory with the name of the
- database, where \lt{}install-dir\gt{} is the directory name that you
- specified on the {\bf \verb:--:prefix} option. This can be important to
- know if you want to make a special backup of the Bacula database or to
- check its size.
-
-\item ./make\_mysql\_tables
- This script creates the MySQL tables used by {\bf Bacula}.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-Each of the three scripts (grant\_mysql\_privileges, create\_mysql\_database
-and make\_mysql\_tables) allows the addition of a command line argument. This
-can be useful for specifying the user and or password. For example, you might
-need to add {\bf -u root} to the command line to have sufficient privilege to
-create the Bacula tables.
-
-To take a closer look at the access privileges that you have setup with the
-above, you can do:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-mysql-directory/bin/mysql -u root mysql
-select * from user;
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{Re-initializing the Catalog Database}
-\index[general]{Database!Re-initializing the Catalog }
-\index[general]{Re-initializing the Catalog Database }
-
-After you have done some initial testing with {\bf Bacula}, you will probably
-want to re-initialize the catalog database and throw away all the test Jobs
-that you ran. To do so, you can do the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- cd <install-directory>
- ./drop_mysql_tables
- ./make_mysql_tables
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Please note that all information in the database will be lost and you will be
-starting from scratch. If you have written on any Volumes, you must write an
-end of file mark on the volume so that Bacula can reuse it. Do so with:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- (stop Bacula or unmount the drive)
- mt -f /dev/nst0 rewind
- mt -f /dev/nst0 weof
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Where you should replace {\bf /dev/nst0} with the appropriate tape drive
-device name for your machine.
-
-\section{Linking Bacula with MySQL}
-\index[general]{Linking Bacula with MySQL }
-\index[general]{MySQL!Linking Bacula with }
-\index[general]{Upgrading}
-
-After configuring Bacula with
-
-./configure \verb:--:enable-thread-safe-client \verb:--:prefix=\lt{}mysql-directory\gt{}
-where \lt{}mysql-directory\gt{} is in my case {\bf /home/kern/mysql}, you may
-have to configure the loader so that it can find the MySQL shared libraries.
-If you have previously followed this procedure and later add the {\bf
-\verb:--:enable-thread-safe-client} options, you will need to rerun the {\bf
-ldconfig} program shown below. If you put MySQL in a standard place such as
-{\bf /usr/lib} or {\bf /usr/local/lib} this will not be necessary, but in my
-case it is. The description that follows is Linux specific. For other
-operating systems, please consult your manuals on how to do the same thing:
-
-First edit: {\bf /etc/ld.so.conf} and add a new line to the end of the file
-with the name of the mysql-directory. In my case, it is:
-
-/home/kern/mysql/lib/mysql then rebuild the loader's cache with:
-
-/sbin/ldconfig If you upgrade to a new version of {\bf MySQL}, the shared
-library names will probably change, and you must re-run the {\bf
-/sbin/ldconfig} command so that the runtime loader can find them.
-
-Alternatively, your system my have a loader environment variable that can be
-set. For example, on a Solaris system where I do not have root permission, I
-use:
-
-LD\_LIBRARY\_PATH=/home/kern/mysql/lib/mysql
-
-Finally, if you have encryption enabled in MySQL, you may need to add {\bf
--lssl -lcrypto} to the link. In that case, you can either export the
-appropriate LDFLAGS definition, or alternatively, you can include them
-directly on the ./configure line as in:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-LDFLAGS="-lssl -lcyrpto" \
- ./configure \
- <your-options>
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{Installing MySQL from RPMs}
-\index[general]{MySQL!Installing from RPMs}
-\index[general]{Installing MySQL from RPMs}
-If you are installing MySQL from RPMs, you will need to install
-both the MySQL binaries and the client libraries. The client
-libraries are usually found in a devel package, so you must
-install:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- mysql
- mysql-devel
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-This will be the same with most other package managers too.
-
-\section{Upgrading MySQL}
-\index[general]{Upgrading MySQL }
-\index[general]{Upgrading!MySQL }
-\index[general]{Upgrading}
-If you upgrade MySQL, you must reconfigure, rebuild, and re-install
-Bacula otherwise you are likely to get bizarre failures. If you
-install from rpms and you upgrade MySQL, you must also rebuild Bacula.
-You can do so by rebuilding from the source rpm. To do so, you may need
-to modify the bacula.spec file to account for the new MySQL version.
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Installing and Configuring PostgreSQL}
-\label{PostgreSqlChapter}
-\index[general]{PostgreSQL!Installing and Configuring }
-\index[general]{Installing and Configuring PostgreSQL }
-\index[general]{Upgrading}
-
-If you are considering using PostreSQL, you should be aware
-of their philosophy of upgrades, which could be
-destabilizing for a production shop. Basically at every major version
-upgrade, you are required to dump your database in an ASCII format,
-do the upgrade, and then reload your database (or databases). This is
-because they frequently update the "data format" from version to
-version, and they supply no tools to automatically do the conversion.
-If you forget to do the ASCII dump, your database may become totally
-useless because none of the new tools can access it due to the format
-change, and the PostgreSQL server will not be able to start.
-
-If you are building PostgreSQL from source, please be sure to add
-the {\bf \verb:--:enable-thread-safety} option when doing the ./configure
-for PostgreSQL.
-
-\section{Installing PostgreSQL}
-\index[general]{PostgreSQL!Installing }
-
-If you use the {\bf ./configure \verb:--:with-postgresql=PostgreSQL-Directory}
-statement for configuring {\bf Bacula}, you will need PostgreSQL version 7.4
-or later installed. NOTE! PostgreSQL versions earlier than 7.4 do not work
-with Bacula. If PostgreSQL is installed in the standard system location, you
-need only enter {\bf \verb:--:with-postgresql} since the configure program will
-search all the standard locations. If you install PostgreSQL in your home
-directory or some other non-standard directory, you will need to provide the
-full path with the {\bf \verb:--:with-postgresql} option.
-
-Installing and configuring PostgreSQL is not difficult but can be confusing
-the first time. If you prefer, you may want to use a package provided by your
-chosen operating system. Binary packages are available on most PostgreSQL
-mirrors.
-
-If you prefer to install from source, we recommend following the instructions
-found in the
-\elink{PostgreSQL documentation}{http://www.postgresql.org/docs/}.
-
-If you are using FreeBSD,
-\elink{this FreeBSD Diary article}{http://www.freebsddiary.org/postgresql.php}
-will be useful. Even if you are not using FreeBSD, the article will contain
-useful configuration and setup information.
-
-If you configure the Batch Insert code in Bacula (attribute inserts are
-10 times faster), you {\bf must} be using a PostgreSQL that was built with
-the {\bf \verb:--:enable-thread-safety} option, otherwise you will get
-data corruption. Most major Linux distros have thread safety turned on, but
-it is better to check. One way is to see if the PostgreSQL library that
-Bacula will be linked against references pthreads. This can be done
-with a command such as:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- nm /usr/lib/libpq.a | grep pthread_mutex_lock
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The above command should print a line that looks like:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- U pthread_mutex_lock
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-if does, then everything is OK. If it prints nothing, do not enable batch
-inserts when building Bacula.
-
-After installing PostgreSQL, you should return to completing the installation
-of {\bf Bacula}. Later, after Bacula is installed, come back to this chapter
-to complete the installation. Please note, the installation files used in the
-second phase of the PostgreSQL installation are created during the Bacula
-Installation. You must still come back to complete the second phase of the
-PostgreSQL installation even if you installed binaries (e.g. rpm, deb,
-...).
-
-
-\label{PostgreSQL_configure}
-\section{Configuring PostgreSQL}
-\index[general]{PostgreSQL!Configuring PostgreSQL -- }
-
-At this point, you should have built and installed PostgreSQL, or already have
-a running PostgreSQL, and you should have configured, built and installed {\bf
-Bacula}. If not, please complete these items before proceeding.
-
-Please note that the {\bf ./configure} used to build {\bf Bacula} will need to
-include {\bf \verb:--:with-postgresql=PostgreSQL-directory}, where {\bf
-PostgreSQL-directory} is the directory name that you specified on the
-./configure command for configuring PostgreSQL (if you didn't specify a
-directory or PostgreSQL is installed in a default location, you do not need to
-specify the directory). This is needed so that Bacula can find the necessary
-include headers and library files for interfacing to PostgreSQL.
-
-{\bf Bacula} will install scripts for manipulating the database (create,
-delete, make tables etc) into the main installation directory. These files
-will be of the form *\_bacula\_* (e.g. create\_bacula\_database). These files
-are also available in the \lt{}bacula-src\gt{}/src/cats directory after
-running ./configure. If you inspect create\_bacula\_database, you will see
-that it calls create\_postgresql\_database. The *\_bacula\_* files are
-provided for convenience. It doesn't matter what database you have chosen;
-create\_bacula\_database will always create your database.
-
-Now you will create the Bacula PostgreSQL database and the tables that Bacula
-uses. These instructions assume that you already have PostgreSQL running. You
-will need to perform these steps as a user that is able to create new
-databases. This can be the PostgreSQL user (on most systems, this is the pgsql
-user).
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item cd \lt{}install-directory\gt{}
-
- This directory contains the Bacula catalog interface routines.
-
-\item ./create\_bacula\_database
-
- This script creates the PostgreSQL {\bf bacula} database.
- Before running this command, you should carefully think about
- what encoding sequence you want for the text fields (paths, files, ...).
- Ideally, the encoding should be set to UTF8. However, many Unix systems
- have filenames that are not encoded in UTF8, either because you have
- not set UTF8 as your default character set or because you have imported
- files from elsewhere (e.g. MacOS X). For this reason, Bacula uses
- SQL\_ASCII as the default encoding. If you want to change this,
- please modify the script before running it, but be forewarned that
- Bacula backups will fail if PostgreSQL finds any non-UTF8 sequences.
-
- If running the script fails, it is probably because the database is
- owned by a user other than yourself. On many systems, the database
- owner is {\bf pgsql} and on others such as Red Hat and Fedora it is {\bf
- postgres}. You can find out which it is by examining your /etc/passwd
- file. To create a new user under either your name or with say the name
- {\bf bacula}, you can do the following:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- su
- (enter root password)
- su pgsql (or postgres)
- createuser kern (or perhaps bacula)
- Shall the new user be allowed to create databases? (y/n) y
- Shall the new user be allowed to create more new users? (y/n) (choose
- what you want)
- exit
-\end{verbatim}
-
- At this point, you should be able to execute the
- ./create\_bacula\_database command.
-
-\item ./make\_bacula\_tables
-
- This script creates the PostgreSQL tables used by {\bf Bacula}.
-\item ./grant\_bacula\_privileges
-
- This script creates the database user {\bf bacula} with restricted access
-rights. You may want to modify it to suit your situation. Please note that
-this database is not password protected.
-
-\end{enumerate}
-
-Each of the three scripts (create\_bacula\_database, make\_bacula\_tables, and
-grant\_bacula\_privileges) allows the addition of a command line argument.
-This can be useful for specifying the user name. For example, you might need
-to add {\bf -h hostname} to the command line to specify a remote database
-server.
-
-To take a closer look at the access privileges that you have setup with the
-above, you can do:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-PostgreSQL-directory/bin/psql --command \\dp bacula
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Also, I had an authorization problem with the password. In the end,
-I had to modify my {\bf pg\_hba.conf} file (in /var/lib/pgsql/data on my machine)
-from:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- local all all ident sameuser
-to
- local all all trust
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-This solved the problem for me, but it is not always a good thing
-to do from a security standpoint. However, it allowed me to run
-my regression scripts without having a password.
-
-A more secure way to perform database authentication is with md5
-password hashes. Begin by editing the {\bf pg\_hba.conf} file, and
-just prior the the existing ``local'' and ``host'' lines, add the line:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- local bacula bacula md5
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-and restart the Postgres database server (frequently, this can be done
-using "/etc/init.d/postgresql restart" or "service postgresql restart") to
-put this new authentication rule into effect.
-
-Next, become the Postgres administrator, postgres, either by logging
-on as the postgres user, or by using su to become root and then using
-su - postgres to become postgres. Add a password to the bacula
-database for the bacula user using:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- \$ psql bacula
- bacula=# alter user bacula with password 'secret';
- ALTER USER
- bacula=# \\q
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-You'll have to add this password to two locations in the
-bacula-dir.conf file: once to the Catalog resource and once to the
-RunBeforeJob entry in the BackupCatalog Job resource. With the
-password in place, these two lines should look something like:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- dbname = bacula; user = bacula; password = "secret"
- ... and ...
- # WARNING!!! Passing the password via the command line is insecure.
- # see comments in make_catalog_backup for details.
- RunBeforeJob = "/etc/make_catalog_backup bacula bacula secret"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Naturally, you should choose your own significantly more random
-password, and ensure that the bacula-dir.conf file containing this
-password is readable only by the root.
-
-Even with the files containing the database password properly
-restricted, there is still a security problem with this approach: on
-some platforms, the environment variable that is used to supply the
-password to Postgres is available to all users of the
-local system. To eliminate this problem, the Postgres team have
-deprecated the use of the environment variable password-passing
-mechanism and recommend the use of a .pgpass file instead. To use
-this mechanism, create a file named .pgpass containing the single
-line:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- localhost:5432:bacula:bacula:secret
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-This file should be copied into the home directory of all accounts
-that will need to gain access to the database: typically, root,
-bacula, and any users who will make use of any of the console
-programs. The files must then have the owner and group set to match
-the user (so root:root for the copy in ~root, and so on), and the mode
-set to 600, limiting access to the owner of the file.
-
-\section{Re-initializing the Catalog Database}
-\index[general]{Database!Re-initializing the Catalog }
-\index[general]{Re-initializing the Catalog Database }
-
-After you have done some initial testing with {\bf Bacula}, you will probably
-want to re-initialize the catalog database and throw away all the test Jobs
-that you ran. To do so, you can do the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- cd <install-directory>
- ./drop_bacula_tables
- ./make_bacula_tables
- ./grant_bacula_privileges
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Please note that all information in the database will be lost and you will be
-starting from scratch. If you have written on any Volumes, you must write an
-end of file mark on the volume so that Bacula can reuse it. Do so with:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- (stop Bacula or unmount the drive)
- mt -f /dev/nst0 rewind
- mt -f /dev/nst0 weof
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Where you should replace {\bf /dev/nst0} with the appropriate tape drive
-device name for your machine.
-
-\section{Installing PostgreSQL from RPMs}
-\index[general]{PostgreSQL!Installing from RPMs}
-\index[general]{Installing PostgreSQL from RPMs}
-If you are installing PostgreSQL from RPMs, you will need to install
-both the PostgreSQL binaries and the client libraries. The client
-libraries are usually found in a devel package, so you must
-install:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- postgresql
- postgresql-devel
- postgresql-server
- postgresql-libs
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-These will be similar with most other package managers too. After
-installing from rpms, you will still need to run the scripts that set up
-the database and create the tables as described above.
-
-
-\section{Converting from MySQL to PostgreSQL}
-\index[general]{PostgreSQL!Converting from MySQL to }
-\index[general]{Converting from MySQL to PostgreSQL }
-
-The conversion procedure presented here was worked out by Norm Dressler
-\lt{}ndressler at dinmar dot com\gt{}
-
-This process was tested using the following software versions:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Linux Mandrake 10/Kernel 2.4.22-10 SMP
-\item Mysql Ver 12.21 Distrib 4.0.15, for mandrake-linux-gnu (i586)
-\item PostgreSQL 7.3.4
-\item Bacula 1.34.5
- \end{itemize}
-
-WARNING: Always as a precaution, take a complete backup of your databases
-before proceeding with this process!
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Shutdown bacula (cd /etc/bacula;./bacula stop)
-\item Run the following command to dump your Mysql database:
-
- \footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- mysqldump -f -t -n >bacula-backup.dmp
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\item Make a backup of your /etc/bacula directory (but leave the original in
- place).
-\item Go to your Bacula source directory and rebuild it to include PostgreSQL
- support rather then Mysql support. Check the config.log file for your
- original configure command and replace enable-mysql with enable-postgresql.
-\item Recompile Bacula with a make and if everything compiles completely,
- perform a make install.
-\item Shutdown Mysql.
-\item Start PostgreSQL on your system.
-\item Create a bacula user in Postgres with the createuser command. Depending on
- your Postgres install, you may have to SU to the user who has privileges to
- create a user.
-\item Verify your pg\_hba.conf file contains sufficient permissions to allow
- bacula to access the server. Mine has the following since it's on a secure
- network:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-local all all trust
-
-host all all 127.0.0.1 255.255.255.255 trust
-
-NOTE: you should restart your postgres server if you
- made changes
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\item Change into the /etc/bacula directory and prepare the database and
- tables with the following commands:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-./create_postgresql_database
-
-./make_postgresql_tables
-
-./grant_postgresql_privileges
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\item Verify you have access to the database:
-
- \footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-
-psql -Ubacula bacula
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-You should not get any errors.
-\item Load your database from the Mysql database dump with:
-
- \footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-psql -Ubacula bacula <bacula-backup.dmp>
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\item Resequence your tables with the following commands:
-
- \footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-psql -Ubacula bacula
-
-SELECT SETVAL('basefiles_baseid_seq', (SELECT
-MAX(baseid) FROM basefiles));
-SELECT SETVAL('client_clientid_seq', (SELECT
-MAX(clientid) FROM client));
-SELECT SETVAL('file_fileid_seq', (SELECT MAX(fileid)
-FROM file));
-SELECT SETVAL('filename_filenameid_seq', (SELECT
-MAX(filenameid) FROM filename));
-
-SELECT SETVAL('fileset_filesetid_seq', (SELECT
-MAX(filesetid) FROM fileset));
-
-SELECT SETVAL('job_jobid_seq', (SELECT MAX(jobid) FROM job));
-SELECT SETVAL('jobmedia_jobmediaid_seq', (SELECT
-MAX(jobmediaid) FROM jobmedia));
-SELECT SETVAL('media_mediaid_seq', (SELECT MAX(mediaid) FROM media));
-SELECT SETVAL('path_pathid_seq', (SELECT MAX(pathid) FROM path));
-
-SELECT SETVAL('pool_poolid_seq', (SELECT MAX(poolid) FROM pool));
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\item At this point, start up Bacula, verify your volume library and perform
- a test backup to make sure everything is working properly.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\section{Upgrading PostgreSQL}
-\index[general]{Upgrading PostgreSQL }
-\index[general]{Upgrading!PostgreSQL }
-\index[general]{Upgrading}
-If you upgrade PostgreSQL, you must reconfigure, rebuild, and re-install
-Bacula otherwise you are likely to get bizarre failures. If you
-to modify the bacula.spec file to account for the new PostgreSQL version.
-You can do so by rebuilding from the source rpm. To do so, you may need
-install from rpms and you upgrade PostgreSQL, you must also rebuild Bacula.
-
-\section{Tuning PostgreSQL}
-\index[general]{Tuning}
-
-If you despool attributes for many jobs at the same time, you can tune the
-sequence object for the \texttt{FileId} field.
-\begin{verbatim}
-psql -Ubacula bacula
-
-ALTER SEQUENCE file_fileid_seq CACHE 1000;
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\section{Credits}
-\index[general]{Credits }
-Many thanks to Dan Langille for writing the PostgreSQL driver. This will
-surely become the most popular database that Bacula supports.
+++ /dev/null
-/*
- * html2latex
- */
-
-available {
- sun4_sunos.4
- sun4_solaris.2
- rs_aix.3
- rs_aix.4
- sgi_irix
-}
-
-description {
- From Jeffrey Schaefer, Geometry Center. Translates HTML document to LaTeX
-}
-
-install {
- bin/html2latex /afs/rpi.edu/dept/acs/rpinfo/filters/GChtml2latex/html2latex
- bin/html2latex.tag /afs/rpi.edu/dept/acs/rpinfo/filters/GChtml2latex/html2latex.tag
- bin/html2latex-local.tag /afs/rpi.edu/dept/acs/rpinfo/filters/GChtml2latex/html2latex-local.tag
- bin/webtex2latex.tag /afs/rpi.edu/dept/acs/rpinfo/filters/GChtml2latex/webtex2latex.tag
- man/man1/html2latex.1 /afs/rpi.edu/dept/acs/rpinfo/filters/GChtml2latex/html2latex.1
-}
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Installing and Configuring SQLite}
-\label{SqlLiteChapter}
-\index[general]{Installing and Configuring SQLite }
-\index[general]{SQLite!Installing and Configuring }
-
-Please note that SQLite both versions 2 and 3 are not network enabled,
-which means that they must be linked into the Director rather than accessed
-by the network as MySQL and PostgreSQL are. This has two consequences:
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item SQLite cannot be used in the {\bf bweb} web GUI package.
-\item If you use SQLite, and your Storage daemon is not on the same
-machine as your Director, you will need to transfer your database
-to the Storage daemon's machine before you can use any of the SD tools
-such as {\bf bscan}, ...
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\section{Installing and Configuring SQLite -- Phase I}
-\index[general]{Phase I!Installing and Configuring SQLite -- }
-\index[general]{Installing and Configuring SQLite -- Phase I }
-
-If you use the {\bf ./configure \verb:--:with-sqlite} statement for configuring {\bf
-Bacula}, you will need SQLite version 2.8.16 or later installed. Our standard
-location (for the moment) for SQLite is in the dependency package {\bf
-depkgs/sqlite-2.8.16}. Please note that the version will be updated as new
-versions are available and tested.
-
-Installing and Configuring is quite easy.
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Download the Bacula dependency packages
-\item Detar it with something like:
-
- {\bf tar xvfz depkgs.tar.gz}
-
- Note, the above command requires GNU tar. If you do not have GNU tar, a
- command such as:
-
- {\bf zcat depkgs.tar.gz | tar xvf -}
-
- will probably accomplish the same thing.
-
-\item {\bf cd depkgs}
-
-\item {\bf make sqlite}
-
-\end{enumerate}
-
-
-Please note that the {\bf ./configure} used to build {\bf Bacula} will need to
-include {\bf \verb:--:with-sqlite} or {\bf \verb:--:with-sqlite3} depending
-one which version of SQLite you are using. You should not use the {\bf
-\verb:--:enable-batch-insert} configuration parameter for Bacula if you
-are using SQLite version 2 as it is probably not thread safe. If you
-are using SQLite version 3, you may use the {\bf \verb:--:enable-batch-insert}
-configuration option with Bacula, but when building SQLite3 you MUST
-configure it with {\bf \verb:--:enable-threadsafe} and
-{\bf \verb:--:enable-cross-thread-connections}.
-
-By default, SQLite3 is now run with {\bf PRAGMA synchronous=OFF} this
-increases the speed by more than 30 time, but it also increases the
-possibility of a corrupted database if your server crashes (power failure
-or kernel bug). If you want more security, you can change the PRAGMA
-that is used in the file src/version.h.
-
-
-At this point, you should return to completing the installation of {\bf
-Bacula}.
-
-
-\section{Installing and Configuring SQLite -- Phase II}
-\label{phase2}
-\index[general]{Phase II!Installing and Configuring SQLite -- }
-\index[general]{Installing and Configuring SQLite -- Phase II }
-
-This phase is done {\bf after} you have run the {\bf ./configure} command to
-configure {\bf Bacula}.
-
-{\bf Bacula} will install scripts for manipulating the database (create,
-delete, make tables etc) into the main installation directory. These files
-will be of the form *\_bacula\_* (e.g. create\_bacula\_database). These files
-are also available in the \lt{}bacula-src\gt{}/src/cats directory after
-running ./configure. If you inspect create\_bacula\_database, you will see
-that it calls create\_sqlite\_database. The *\_bacula\_* files are provided
-for convenience. It doesn't matter what database you have chosen;
-create\_bacula\_database will always create your database.
-
-At this point, you can create the SQLite database and tables:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item cd \lt{}install-directory\gt{}
-
- This directory contains the Bacula catalog interface routines.
-
-\item ./make\_sqlite\_tables
-
- This script creates the SQLite database as well as the tables used by {\bf
- Bacula}. This script will be automatically setup by the {\bf ./configure}
- program to create a database named {\bf bacula.db} in {\bf Bacula's} working
- directory.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\section{Linking Bacula with SQLite}
-\index[general]{SQLite!Linking Bacula with }
-\index[general]{Linking Bacula with SQLite }
-
-If you have followed the above steps, this will all happen automatically and
-the SQLite libraries will be linked into {\bf Bacula}.
-
-\section{Testing SQLite}
-\index[general]{SQLite!Testing }
-\index[general]{Testing SQLite }
-
-We have much less "production" experience using SQLite than using MySQL.
-SQLite has performed flawlessly for us in all our testing. However,
-several users have reported corrupted databases while using SQLite. For
-that reason, we do not recommend it for production use.
-
-If Bacula crashes with the following type of error when it is started:
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Using default Catalog name=MyCatalog DB=bacula
-Could not open database "bacula".
-sqlite.c:151 Unable to open Database=/var/lib/bacula/bacula.db.
-ERR=malformed database schema - unable to open a temporary database file
-for storing temporary tables
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-this is most likely caused by the fact that some versions of
-SQLite attempt to create a temporary file in the current directory.
-If that fails, because Bacula does not have write permission on
-the current directory, then you may get this errr. The solution is
-to start Bacula in a current directory where it has write permission.
-
-
-\section{Re-initializing the Catalog Database}
-\index[general]{Database!Re-initializing the Catalog }
-\index[general]{Re-initializing the Catalog Database }
-
-After you have done some initial testing with {\bf Bacula}, you will probably
-want to re-initialize the catalog database and throw away all the test Jobs
-that you ran. To do so, you can do the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- cd <install-directory>
- ./drop_sqlite_tables
- ./make_sqlite_tables
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Please note that all information in the database will be lost and you will be
-starting from scratch. If you have written on any Volumes, you must write an
-end of file mark on the volume so that Bacula can reuse it. Do so with:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- (stop Bacula or unmount the drive)
- mt -f /dev/nst0 rewind
- mt -f /dev/nst0 weof
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Where you should replace {\bf /dev/nst0} with the appropriate tape drive
-device name for your machine.
+++ /dev/null
-#!/usr/bin/perl -w
-#
-use strict;
-
-# Used to change the names of the image files generated by latex2html from imgxx.png
-# to meaningful names. Provision is made to go either from or to the meaningful names.
-# The meaningful names are obtained from a file called imagename_translations, which
-# is generated by extensions to latex2html in the make_image_file subroutine in
-# bacula.perl.
-
-# Opens the file imagename_translations and reads the contents into a hash.
-# The hash is creaed with the imgxx.png files as the key if processing TO
-# meaningful filenames, and with the meaningful filenames as the key if
-# processing FROM meaningful filenames.
-# Then opens the html file(s) indicated in the command-line arguments and
-# changes all image references according to the translations described in the
-# above file. Finally, it renames the image files.
-#
-# Original creation: 3-27-05 by Karl Cunningham.
-# Modified 5-21-05 to go FROM and TO meaningful filenames.
-#
-my $TRANSFILE = "imagename_translations";
-my $path;
-
-# Loads the contents of $TRANSFILE file into the hash referenced in the first
-# argument. The hash is loaded to translate old to new if $direction is 0,
-# otherwise it is loaded to translate new to old. In this context, the
-# 'old' filename is the meaningful name, and the 'new' filename is the
-# imgxx.png filename. It is assumed that the old image is the one that
-# latex2html has used as the source to create the imgxx.png filename.
-# The filename extension is taken from the file
-sub read_transfile {
- my ($trans,$direction) = @_;
-
- if (!open IN,"<$path$TRANSFILE") {
- print "WARNING: Cannot open image translation file $path$TRANSFILE for reading\n";
- print " Image filename translation aborted\n\n";
- exit 0;
- }
-
- while (<IN>) {
- chomp;
- my ($new,$old) = split(/\001/);
-
- # Old filenames will usually have a leading ./ which we don't need.
- $old =~ s/^\.\///;
-
- # The filename extension of the old filename must be made to match
- # the new filename because it indicates the encoding format of the image.
- my ($ext) = $new =~ /(\.[^\.]*)$/;
- $old =~ s/\.[^\.]*$/$ext/;
- if ($direction == 0) {
- $trans->{$new} = $old;
- } else {
- $trans->{$old} = $new;
- }
- }
- close IN;
-}
-
-# Translates the image names in the file given as the first argument, according to
-# the translations in the hash that is given as the second argument.
-# The file contents are read in entirely into a string, the string is processed, and
-# the file contents are then written. No particular care is taken to ensure that the
-# file is not lost if a system failure occurs at an inopportune time. It is assumed
-# that the html files being processed here can be recreated on demand.
-#
-# Links to other files are added to the %filelist for processing. That way,
-# all linked files will be processed (assuming they are local).
-sub translate_html {
- my ($filename,$trans,$filelist) = @_;
- my ($contents,$out,$this,$img,$dest);
- my $cnt = 0;
-
- # If the filename is an external link ignore it. And drop any file:// from
- # the filename.
- $filename =~ /^(http|ftp|mailto)\:/ and return 0;
- $filename =~ s/^file\:\/\///;
- # Load the contents of the html file.
- if (!open IF,"<$path$filename") {
- print "WARNING: Cannot open $path$filename for reading\n";
- print " Image Filename Translation aborted\n\n";
- exit 0;
- }
-
- while (<IF>) {
- $contents .= $_;
- }
- close IF;
-
- # Now do the translation...
- # First, search for an image filename.
- while ($contents =~ /\<\s*IMG[^\>]*SRC=\"/si) {
- $contents = $';
- $out .= $` . $&;
-
- # The next thing is an image name. Get it and translate it.
- $contents =~ /^(.*?)\"/s;
- $contents = $';
- $this = $&;
- $img = $1;
- # If the image is in our list of ones to be translated, do it
- # and feed the result to the output.
- $cnt += $this =~ s/$img/$trans->{$img}/ if (defined($trans->{$img}));
- $out .= $this;
- }
- $out .= $contents;
-
- # Now send the translated text to the html file, overwriting what's there.
- open OF,">$path$filename" or die "Cannot open $path$filename for writing\n";
- print OF $out;
- close OF;
-
- # Now look for any links to other files and add them to the list of files to do.
- while ($out =~ /\<\s*A[^\>]*HREF=\"(.*?)\"/si) {
- $out = $';
- $dest = $1;
- # Drop an # and anything after it.
- $dest =~ s/\#.*//;
- $filelist->{$dest} = '' if $dest;
- }
- return $cnt;
-}
-
-# REnames the image files spefified in the %translate hash.
-sub rename_images {
- my $translate = shift;
- my ($response);
-
- foreach (keys(%$translate)) {
- if (! $translate->{$_}) {
- print " WARNING: No destination Filename for $_\n";
- } else {
- $response = `mv -f $path$_ $path$translate->{$_} 2>&1`;
- $response and print "ERROR from system $response\n";
- }
- }
-}
-
-#################################################
-############# MAIN #############################
-################################################
-
-# %filelist starts out with keys from the @ARGV list. As files are processed,
-# any links to other files are added to the %filelist. A hash of processed
-# files is kept so we don't do any twice.
-
-# The first argument must be either --to_meaningful_names or --from_meaningful_names
-
-my (%translate,$search_regex,%filelist,%completed,$thisfile);
-my ($cnt,$direction);
-
-my $arg0 = shift(@ARGV);
-$arg0 =~ /^(--to_meaningful_names|--from_meaningful_names)$/ or
- die "ERROR: First argument must be either \'--to_meaningful_names\' or \'--from_meaningful_names\'\n";
-
-$direction = ($arg0 eq '--to_meaningful_names') ? 0 : 1;
-
-(@ARGV) or die "ERROR: Filename(s) to process must be given as arguments\n";
-
-# Use the first argument to get the path to the file of translations.
-my $tmp = $ARGV[0];
-($path) = $tmp =~ /(.*\/)/;
-$path = '' unless $path;
-
-read_transfile(\%translate,$direction);
-
-foreach (@ARGV) {
- # Strip the path from the filename, and use it later on.
- if (s/(.*\/)//) {
- $path = $1;
- } else {
- $path = '';
- }
- $filelist{$_} = '';
-
- while ($thisfile = (keys(%filelist))[0]) {
- $cnt += translate_html($thisfile,\%translate,\%filelist) if (!exists($completed{$thisfile}));
- delete($filelist{$thisfile});
- $completed{$thisfile} = '';
- }
- print "translate_images.pl: $cnt image filenames translated ",($direction)?"from":"to"," meaningful names\n";
-}
-
-rename_images(\%translate);
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=concepts
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Concepts_Overview_Gu.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @./update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.ddx -o ${DOC}.dnd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.fdx -o ${DOC}.fnd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.sdx -o ${DOC}.snd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.cdx -o ${DOC}.cnd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm ${DOC}.dvi
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps ${DOC}/
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps ${IMAGES}/*.png ${DOC}/
- @rm -f ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/next.eps ${DOC}/next.png ${DOC}/prev.eps ${DOC}/prev.png ${DOC}/up.eps ${DOC}/up.png
- @rm -rf ${DOC}/*.html
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Concepts and Overview Guide" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl -white ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-TODO
-
-maybe spell out "config" to "configuration" as appropriate
-
-Use American versus British spelling
-
-not critical, but for later consider cleaning out some use of
-"there" and rewrite to not be so passive.
-
-make sure use of \elink shows URL in printed book
-
-get rid of many references of "Red Hat" -- too platform specific?
-
-remove references to names, like "Dan Langille shared ..."
-just put their names in credits for book
-
-don't refer to very old software by specific version such as
-"Red Hat 7" or FreeBSD 4.9 because is too old to put in book. It may be
-relevant, but may be confusing. Maybe just remove the version number
-if applicable.
-
-maybe fine, but discuss point-of-view: don't use personal "I" or
-possessive "my" unless that is consistent style for book.
-
-replace "32 bit" and "64 bit" with "32-bit" and "64-bit" respectively.
-It seems like more popular style standard
-
-be consistent with "Note" and "NOTE". maybe use tex header for this
-
-get rid of redundant or noisy exclamation marks
-
-style for "ctl-alt-del" and "ctl-d"? and be consisten with formatting
-
-be consistent for case for ext3, ext2, EXT3, or EXT2.
-
-fix spelling of "inspite" in source and in docs (maybe use "regardless
-in one place where I already changed to "in spite"
-
-be consistent with software names, like postgres, postgresql, PostreSQL
-and others
-
-instead of using whitehouse for examples, use example.org (as that is defined
-for that usage); also check other hostnames and maybe IPs and networks
-
-use section numbers and cross reference by section number or page number
-no underlining in book (this is not the web :)
-
-some big gaps between paragraphs or between section headers and paragraphs
--- due to tex -- adjust as necessary to look nice
-
-don't include the GPL and LGPL in book. This will save 19 (A4) pages.
-For 6x9 book this will save 30 pages. (Keep GFDL though.)
-
-many index items are too long
-
-appendices not listed as appendix
-
-some how consolidate indexes into one? on 6x9, the indexes are over 30 pages
-
-don't refer to some website without including URL also
-(such as "this FreeBSD Diary article")
-
-get rid of (R) trademark symbols -- only use on first use; for example
-don't put on the RPM Packaging FAQ
-
-split up very long paragraphs, such as "As mentioned above, you will need ..."
-(on my page 783).
-
-use smaller font or split up long lines (especially from
-console output which is wider than printed page)
-
-don't assume all BSD is "FreeBSD"
-
-don't assume all "kernel" is Linux. If it is Linux, be clear.
-
-
+++ /dev/null
-
-\chapter{ANSI and IBM Tape Labels}
-\label{AnsiLabelsChapter}
-\index[general]{ANSI and IBM Tape Labels}
-\index[general]{Labels!Tape}
-
-Bacula supports ANSI or IBM tape labels as long as you
-enable it. In fact, with the proper configuration, you can
-force Bacula to require ANSI or IBM labels.
-
-Bacula can create an ANSI or IBM label, but if Check Labels is
-enabled (see below), Bacula will look for an existing label, and
-if it is found, it will keep the label. Consequently, you
-can label the tapes with programs other than Bacula, and Bacula
-will recognize and support them.
-
-Even though Bacula will recognize and write ANSI and IBM labels,
-it always writes its own tape labels as well.
-
-When using ANSI or IBM tape labeling, you must restrict your Volume
-names to a maximum of six characters.
-
-If you have labeled your Volumes outside of Bacula, then the
-ANSI/IBM label will be recognized by Bacula only if you have created
-the HDR1 label with {\bf BACULA.DATA} in the Filename field (starting
-with character 5). If Bacula writes the labels, it will use
-this information to recognize the tape as a Bacula tape. This allows
-ANSI/IBM labeled tapes to be used at sites with multiple machines
-and multiple backup programs.
-
-
-\section{Director Pool Directive}
-
-\begin{description}
-\item [ Label Type = ANSI | IBM | Bacula]
- This directive is implemented in the Director Pool resource and in the SD Device
- resource. If it is specified in the SD Device resource, it will take
- precedence over the value passed from the Director to the SD. The default
- is Label Type = Bacula.
-\end{description}
-
-\section{Storage Daemon Device Directives}
-
-\begin{description}
-\item [ Label Type = ANSI | IBM | Bacula]
- This directive is implemented in the Director Pool resource and in the SD Device
- resource. If it is specified in the the SD Device resource, it will take
- precedence over the value passed from the Director to the SD.
-
-\item [Check Labels = yes | no]
- This directive is implemented in the the SD Device resource. If you intend
- to read ANSI or IBM labels, this *must* be set. Even if the volume is
- not ANSI labeled, you can set this to yes, and Bacula will check the
- label type. Without this directive set to yes, Bacula will assume that
- labels are of Bacula type and will not check for ANSI or IBM labels.
- In other words, if there is a possibility of Bacula encountering an
- ANSI/IBM label, you must set this to yes.
-\end{description}
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-\chapter{Autochanger Resource}
-\index[sd]{Autochanger Resource}
-\index[sd]{Resource!Autochanger}
-
-The Autochanger resource supports single or multiple drive
-autochangers by grouping one or more Device resources
-into one unit called an autochanger in Bacula (often referred to
-as a "tape library" by autochanger manufacturers).
-
-If you have an Autochanger, and you want it to function correctly,
-you {\bf must} have an Autochanger resource in your Storage
-conf file, and your Director's Storage directives that want to
-use an Autochanger {\bf must} refer to the Autochanger resource name.
-In previous versions of Bacula, the Director's Storage directives
-referred directly to Device resources that were autochangers.
-In version 1.38.0 and later, referring directly to Device resources
-will not work for Autochangers.
-
-\begin{description}
-\item [Name = \lt{}Autochanger-Name\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Name}
- Specifies the Name of the Autochanger. This name is used in the
- Director's Storage definition to refer to the autochanger. This
- directive is required.
-
-\item [Device = \lt{}Device-name1, device-name2, ...\gt{}]
- Specifies the names of the Device resource or resources that correspond
- to the autochanger drive. If you have a multiple drive autochanger, you
- must specify multiple Device names, each one referring to a separate
- Device resource that contains a Drive Index specification that
- corresponds to the drive number base zero. You may specify multiple
- device names on a single line separated by commas, and/or you may
- specify multiple Device directives. This directive is required.
-
-\item [Changer Device = {\it name-string}]
- \index[sd]{Changer Device}
- The specified {\bf name-string} gives the system file name of the autochanger
- device name. If specified in this resource, the Changer Device name
- is not needed in the Device resource. If it is specified in the Device
- resource (see above), it will take precedence over one specified in
- the Autochanger resource.
-
-\item [Changer Command = {\it name-string}]
- \index[sd]{Changer Command }
- The {\bf name-string} specifies an external program to be called that will
- automatically change volumes as required by {\bf Bacula}. Most frequently,
- you will specify the Bacula supplied {\bf mtx-changer} script as follows.
- If it is specified here, it need not be specified in the Device
- resource. If it is also specified in the Device resource, it will take
- precedence over the one specified in the Autochanger resource.
-
-\end{description}
-
-The following is an example of a valid Autochanger resource definition:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Autochanger {
- Name = "DDS-4-changer"
- Device = DDS-4-1, DDS-4-2, DDS-4-3
- Changer Device = /dev/sg0
- Changer Command = "/etc/bacula/mtx-changer %c %o %S %a %d"
-}
-Device {
- Name = "DDS-4-1"
- Drive Index = 0
- Autochanger = yes
- ...
-}
-Device {
- Name = "DDS-4-2"
- Drive Index = 1
- Autochanger = yes
- ...
-Device {
- Name = "DDS-4-3"
- Drive Index = 2
- Autochanger = yes
- Autoselect = no
- ...
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Please note that it is important to include the {\bf Autochanger = yes} directive
-in each Device definition that belongs to an Autochanger. A device definition
-should not belong to more than one Autochanger resource. Also, your Device
-directive in the Storage resource of the Director's conf file should have
-the Autochanger's resource name rather than a name of one of the Devices.
-
-If you have a drive that physically belongs to an Autochanger but you don't want
-to have it automatically used when Bacula references the Autochanger for backups,
-for example, you want to reserve it for restores, you can add the directive:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Autoselect = no
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-to the Device resource for that drive. In that case, Bacula will not automatically
-select that drive when accessing the Autochanger. You can, still use the drive
-by referencing it by the Device name directly rather than the Autochanger name. An example
-of such a definition is shown above for the Device DDS-4-3, which will not be
-selected when the name DDS-4-changer is used in a Storage definition, but will
-be used if DDS-4-3 is used.
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Autochanger Support}
-\label{AutochangersChapter}
-\index[general]{Support!Autochanger }
-\index[general]{Autochanger Support }
-
-Bacula provides autochanger support for reading and writing tapes. In
-order to work with an autochanger, Bacula requires a number of things, each of
-which is explained in more detail after this list:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item A script that actually controls the autochanger according to commands
- sent by Bacula. We furnish such a script that works with {\bf mtx} found in
- the {\bf depkgs} distribution.
-
-\item That each Volume (tape) to be used must be defined in the Catalog and
- have a Slot number assigned to it so that Bacula knows where the Volume is
- in the autochanger. This is generally done with the {\bf label} command, but
- can also done after the tape is labeled using the {\bf update slots}
- command. See below for more details. You must pre-label the tapes manually
- before using them.
-
-\item Modifications to your Storage daemon's Device configuration resource to
- identify that the device is a changer, as well as a few other parameters.
-
-\item You should also modify your Storage resource definition in the
- Director's configuration file so that you are automatically prompted for the
- Slot when labeling a Volume.
-
-\item You need to ensure that your Storage daemon (if not running as root)
- has access permissions to both the tape drive and the control device.
-
-\item You need to have {\bf Autochanger = yes} in your Storage resource
- in your bacula-dir.conf file so that you will be prompted for the
- slot number when you label Volumes.
-\end{itemize}
-
-In version 1.37 and later, there is a new \ilink{Autochanger
-resource}{AutochangerRes} that permits you to group Device resources thus
-creating a multi-drive autochanger. If you have an autochanger,
-you {\bf must} use this new resource.
-
-Bacula uses its own {\bf mtx-changer} script to interface with a program
-that actually does the tape changing. Thus in principle, {\bf mtx-changer}
-can be adapted to function with any autochanger program, or you can
-call any other script or program. The current
-version of {\bf mtx-changer} works with the {\bf mtx} program. However,
-FreeBSD users have provided a script in the {\bf examples/autochangers}
-directory that allows Bacula to use the {\bf chio} program.
-
-Bacula also supports autochangers with barcode
-readers. This support includes two Console commands: {\bf label barcodes}
-and {\bf update slots}. For more details on these commands, see the "Barcode
-Support" section below.
-
-Current Bacula autochanger support does not include cleaning, stackers, or
-silos. Stackers and silos are not supported because Bacula expects to
-be able to access the Slots randomly.
-However, if you are very careful to setup Bacula to access the Volumes
-in the autochanger sequentially, you may be able to make Bacula
-work with stackers (gravity feed and such).
-
-Support for multi-drive
-autochangers requires the \ilink{Autochanger resource}{AutochangerRes}
-introduced in version 1.37. This resource is also recommended for single
-drive autochangers.
-
-In principle, if {\bf mtx} will operate your changer correctly, then it is
-just a question of adapting the {\bf mtx-changer} script (or selecting one
-already adapted) for proper interfacing. You can find a list of autochangers
-supported by {\bf mtx} at the following link:
-\elink{http://mtx.opensource-sw.net/compatibility.php}
-{http://mtx.opensource-sw.net/compatibility.php}.
-The home page for the {\bf mtx} project can be found at:
-\elink{http://mtx.opensource-sw.net/}{http://mtx.opensource-sw.net/}.
-
-Note, we have feedback from some users that there are certain
-incompatibilities between the Linux kernel and mtx. For example between
-kernel 2.6.18-8.1.8.el5 of CentOS and RedHat and version 1.3.10 and 1.3.11
-of mtx. This was fixed by upgrading to a version 2.6.22 kernel.
-
-In addition, apparently certain versions of mtx, for example, version
-1.3.11 limit the number of slots to a maximum of 64. The solution was to
-use version 1.3.10.
-
-If you are having troubles, please use the {\bf auto} command in the {\bf
-btape} program to test the functioning of your autochanger with Bacula. When
-Bacula is running, please remember that for many distributions (e.g. FreeBSD,
-Debian, ...) the Storage daemon runs as {\bf bacula.tape} rather than {\bf
-root.root}, so you will need to ensure that the Storage daemon has sufficient
-permissions to access the autochanger.
-
-Some users have reported that the the Storage daemon blocks under certain
-circumstances in trying to mount a volume on a drive that has a different
-volume loaded. As best we can determine, this is simply a matter of
-waiting a bit. The drive was previously in use writing a Volume, and
-sometimes the drive will remain BLOCKED for a good deal of time (up to 7
-minutes on a slow drive) waiting for the cassette to rewind and to unload
-before the drive can be used with a different Volume.
-
-\label{SCSI devices}
-\section{Knowing What SCSI Devices You Have}
-\index[general]{Have!Knowing What SCSI Devices You }
-\index[general]{Knowing What SCSI Devices You Have }
-\index[general]{SCSI devices}
-\index[general]{devices!SCSI}
-
-Under Linux, you can
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-cat /proc/scsi/scsi
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-to see what SCSI devices you have available. You can also:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-cat /proc/scsi/sg/device_hdr /proc/scsi/sg/devices
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-to find out how to specify their control address ({\bf /dev/sg0} for the
-first, {\bf /dev/sg1} for the second, ...) on the {\bf Changer Device = }
-Bacula directive.
-
-You can also use the excellent {\bf lsscsi} tool.
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-$ lsscsi -g
- [1:0:2:0] tape SEAGATE ULTRIUM06242-XXX 1619 /dev/st0 /dev/sg9
- [1:0:14:0] mediumx STK L180 0315 /dev/sch0 /dev/sg10
- [2:0:3:0] tape HP Ultrium 3-SCSI G24S /dev/st1 /dev/sg11
- [3:0:0:0] enclosu HP A6255A HP04 - /dev/sg3
- [3:0:1:0] disk HP 36.4G ST336753FC HP00 /dev/sdd /dev/sg4
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-For more detailed information on what SCSI devices you have please see
-the \ilink{Linux SCSI Tricks}{SCSITricks} section of the Tape Testing
-chapter of this manual.
-
-Under FreeBSD, you can use:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-camcontrol devlist
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-To list the SCSI devices as well as the {\bf /dev/passn} that you will use on
-the Bacula {\bf Changer Device = } directive.
-
-Please check that your Storage daemon has permission to access this
-device.
-
-The following tip for FreeBSD users comes from Danny Butroyd:
-on reboot Bacula will NOT have permission to
-control the device /dev/pass0 (assuming this is your changer device).
-To get around this just edit the /etc/devfs.conf file and add the
-following to the bottom:
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-own pass0 root:bacula
-perm pass0 0666
-own nsa0.0 root:bacula
-perm nsa0.0 0666
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-This gives the bacula group permission to write to the nsa0.0 device
-too just to be on the safe side. To bring these changes into effect
-just run:-
-
-/etc/rc.d/devfs restart
-
-Basically this will stop you having to manually change permissions on these
-devices to make Bacula work when operating the AutoChanger after a reboot.
-
-\label{scripts}
-\section{Example Scripts}
-\index[general]{Scripts!Example }
-\index[general]{Example Scripts }
-
-Please read the sections below so that you understand how autochangers work
-with Bacula. Although we supply a default {\bf mtx-changer} script, your
-autochanger may require some additional changes. If you want to see examples
-of configuration files and scripts, please look in the {\bf
-\lt{}bacula-src\gt{}/examples/devices} directory where you will find an
-example {\bf HP-autoloader.conf} Bacula Device resource, and several {\bf
-mtx-changer} scripts that have been modified to work with different
-autochangers.
-
-\label{Slots}
-
-\section{Slots}
-\index[general]{Slots }
-
-To properly address autochangers, Bacula must know which Volume is in each
-{\bf slot} of the autochanger. Slots are where the changer cartridges reside
-when not loaded into the drive. Bacula numbers these slots from one to the
-number of cartridges contained in the autochanger.
-
-Bacula will not automatically use a Volume in your autochanger unless it is
-labeled and the slot number is stored in the catalog and the Volume is marked
-as InChanger. This is because it must know where each volume is (slot) to
-be able to load the volume.
-For each Volume in your
-changer, you will, using the Console program, assign a slot. This information
-is kept in {\bf Bacula's} catalog database along with the other data for the
-volume. If no slot is given, or the slot is set to zero, Bacula will not
-attempt to use the autochanger even if all the necessary configuration records
-are present. When doing a {\bf mount} command on an autochanger, you must
-specify which slot you want mounted. If the drive is loaded with a tape
-from another slot, it will unload it and load the correct tape, but
-normally, no tape will be loaded because an {\bf unmount} command causes
-Bacula to unload the tape in the drive.
-
-
-You can check if the Slot number and InChanger flag are set by doing a:
-\begin{verbatim}
-list Volumes
-\end{verbatim}
-
-in the Console program.
-
-\label{mult}
-\section{Multiple Devices}
-\index[general]{Devices!Multiple}
-\index[general]{Multiple Devices}
-
-Some autochangers have more than one read/write device (drive). The
-new \ilink{Autochanger resource}{AutochangerRes} introduced in version
-1.37 permits you to group Device resources, where each device
-represents a drive. The Director may still reference the Devices (drives)
-directly, but doing so, bypasses the proper functioning of the
-drives together. Instead, the Director (in the Storage resource)
-should reference the Autochanger resource name. Doing so permits
-the Storage daemon to ensure that only one drive uses the mtx-changer
-script at a time, and also that two drives don't reference the
-same Volume.
-
-Multi-drive requires the use of the {\bf
-Drive Index} directive in the Device resource of the Storage daemon's
-configuration file. Drive numbers or the Device Index are numbered beginning
-at zero, which is the default. To use the second Drive in an autochanger, you
-need to define a second Device resource and set the Drive Index to 1 for
-that device. In general, the second device will have the same {\bf Changer
-Device} (control channel) as the first drive, but a different {\bf Archive
-Device}.
-
-As a default, Bacula jobs will prefer to write to a Volume that is
-already mounted. If you have a multiple drive autochanger and you want
-Bacula to write to more than one Volume in the same Pool at the same
-time, you will need to set \ilink{Prefer Mounted Volumes} {PreferMountedVolumes}
-in the Directors Job resource to {\bf no}. This will cause
-the Storage daemon to maximize the use of drives.
-
-
-\label{ConfigRecords}
-\section{Device Configuration Records}
-\index[general]{Records!Device Configuration }
-\index[general]{Device Configuration Records }
-
-Configuration of autochangers within Bacula is done in the Device resource of
-the Storage daemon. Four records: {\bf Autochanger}, {\bf Changer Device},
-{\bf Changer Command}, and {\bf Maximum Changer Wait} control how Bacula uses
-the autochanger.
-
-These four records, permitted in {\bf Device} resources, are described in
-detail below. Note, however, that the {\bf Changer Device} and the
-{\bf Changer Command} directives are not needed in the Device resource
-if they are present in the {\bf Autochanger} resource.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Autochanger = {\it Yes|No} ]
- \index[sd]{Autochanger }
- The {\bf Autochanger} record specifies that the current device is or is not
-an autochanger. The default is {\bf no}.
-
-\item [Changer Device = \lt{}device-name\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Changer Device }
- In addition to the Archive Device name, you must specify a {\bf Changer
-Device} name. This is because most autochangers are controlled through a
-different device than is used for reading and writing the cartridges. For
-example, on Linux, one normally uses the generic SCSI interface for
-controlling the autochanger, but the standard SCSI interface for reading and
-writing the tapes. On Linux, for the {\bf Archive Device = /dev/nst0}, you
-would typically have {\bf Changer Device = /dev/sg0}. Note, some of the more
-advanced autochangers will locate the changer device on {\bf /dev/sg1}. Such
-devices typically have several drives and a large number of tapes.
-
-On FreeBSD systems, the changer device will typically be on {\bf /dev/pass0}
-through {\bf /dev/passn}.
-
-On Solaris, the changer device will typically be some file under {\bf
-/dev/rdsk}.
-
-Please ensure that your Storage daemon has permission to access this
-device.
-
-\item [Changer Command = \lt{}command\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Changer Command }
- This record is used to specify the external program to call and what
-arguments to pass to it. The command is assumed to be a standard program or
-shell script that can be executed by the operating system. This command is
-invoked each time that Bacula wishes to manipulate the autochanger. The
-following substitutions are made in the {\bf command} before it is sent to
-the operating system for execution:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- %% = %
- %a = archive device name
- %c = changer device name
- %d = changer drive index base 0
- %f = Client's name
- %j = Job name
- %o = command (loaded, load, or unload)
- %s = Slot base 0
- %S = Slot base 1
- %v = Volume name
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-An actual example for using {\bf mtx} with the {\bf mtx-changer} script (part
-of the Bacula distribution) is:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Changer Command = "/etc/bacula/mtx-changer %c %o %S %a %d"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Where you will need to adapt the {\bf /etc/bacula} to be the actual path on
-your system where the mtx-changer script resides. Details of the three
-commands currently used by Bacula (loaded, load, unload) as well as the
-output expected by Bacula are give in the {\bf Bacula Autochanger Interface}
-section below.
-
-\item [Maximum Changer Wait = \lt{}time\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Maximum Changer Wait }
- This record is used to define the maximum amount of time that Bacula
- will wait for an autoloader to respond to a command (e.g. load). The
- default is set to 120 seconds. If you have a slow autoloader you may
- want to set it longer.
-
-If the autoloader program fails to respond in this time, it will be killed
-and Bacula will request operator intervention.
-
-\item [Drive Index = \lt{}number\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Drive Index }
- This record allows you to tell Bacula to use the second or subsequent
- drive in an autochanger with multiple drives. Since the drives are
- numbered from zero, the second drive is defined by
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Device Index = 1
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-To use the second drive, you need a second Device resource definition in the
-Bacula configuration file. See the Multiple Drive section above in this
-chapter for more information.
-\end{description}
-
-In addition, for proper functioning of the Autochanger, you must
-define an Autochanger resource.
-\input{autochangerres}
-
-\label{example}
-\section{An Example Configuration File}
-\index[general]{Example Configuration File }
-\index[general]{File!Example Configuration }
-
-The following two resources implement an autochanger:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Autochanger {
- Name = "Autochanger"
- Device = DDS-4
- Changer Device = /dev/sg0
- Changer Command = "/etc/bacula/mtx-changer %c %o %S %a %d"
-}
-
-Device {
- Name = DDS-4
- Media Type = DDS-4
- Archive Device = /dev/nst0 # Normal archive device
- Autochanger = yes
- LabelMedia = no;
- AutomaticMount = yes;
- AlwaysOpen = yes;
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-where you will adapt the {\bf Archive Device}, the {\bf Changer Device}, and
-the path to the {\bf Changer Command} to correspond to the values used on your
-system.
-
-\section{A Multi-drive Example Configuration File}
-\index[general]{Multi-drive Example Configuration File }
-
-The following resources implement a multi-drive autochanger:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Autochanger {
- Name = "Autochanger"
- Device = Drive-1, Drive-2
- Changer Device = /dev/sg0
- Changer Command = "/etc/bacula/mtx-changer %c %o %S %a %d"
-}
-
-Device {
- Name = Drive-1
- Drive Index = 0
- Media Type = DDS-4
- Archive Device = /dev/nst0 # Normal archive device
- Autochanger = yes
- LabelMedia = no;
- AutomaticMount = yes;
- AlwaysOpen = yes;
-}
-
-Device {
- Name = Drive-2
- Drive Index = 1
- Media Type = DDS-4
- Archive Device = /dev/nst1 # Normal archive device
- Autochanger = yes
- LabelMedia = no;
- AutomaticMount = yes;
- AlwaysOpen = yes;
-}
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-where you will adapt the {\bf Archive Device}, the {\bf Changer Device}, and
-the path to the {\bf Changer Command} to correspond to the values used on your
-system.
-
-\label{SpecifyingSlots}
-\section{Specifying Slots When Labeling}
-\index[general]{Specifying Slots When Labeling }
-\index[general]{Labeling!Specifying Slots When }
-
-If you add an {\bf Autochanger = yes} record to the Storage resource in your
-Director's configuration file, the Bacula Console will automatically prompt
-you for the slot number when the Volume is in the changer when
-you {\bf add} or {\bf label} tapes for that Storage device. If your
-{\bf mtx-changer} script is properly installed, Bacula will automatically
-load the correct tape during the label command.
-
-You must also set
-{\bf Autochanger = yes} in the Storage daemon's Device resource
-as we have described above in
-order for the autochanger to be used. Please see the
-\ilink{Storage Resource}{Autochanger1} in the Director's chapter
-and the
-\ilink{Device Resource}{Autochanger} in the Storage daemon
-chapter for more details on these records.
-
-Thus all stages of dealing with tapes can be totally automated. It is also
-possible to set or change the Slot using the {\bf update} command in the
-Console and selecting {\bf Volume Parameters} to update.
-
-Even though all the above configuration statements are specified and correct,
-Bacula will attempt to access the autochanger only if a {\bf slot} is non-zero
-in the catalog Volume record (with the Volume name).
-
-If your autochanger has barcode labels, you can label all the Volumes in
-your autochanger one after another by using the {\bf label barcodes} command.
-For each tape in the changer containing a barcode, Bacula will mount the tape
-and then label it with the same name as the barcode. An appropriate Media
-record will also be created in the catalog. Any barcode that begins with the
-same characters as specified on the "CleaningPrefix=xxx" command, will be
-treated as a cleaning tape, and will not be labeled. For example with:
-
-Please note that Volumes must be pre-labeled to be automatically used in
-the autochanger during a backup. If you do not have a barcode reader, this
-is done manually (or via a script).
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Pool {
- Name ...
- Cleaning Prefix = "CLN"
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Any slot containing a barcode of CLNxxxx will be treated as a cleaning tape
-and will not be mounted.
-
-\section{Changing Cartridges}
-\index[general]{Changing Cartridges }
-If you wish to insert or remove cartridges in your autochanger or
-you manually run the {\bf mtx} program, you must first tell Bacula
-to release the autochanger by doing:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-unmount
-(change cartridges and/or run mtx)
-mount
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If you do not do the unmount before making such a change, Bacula
-will become completely confused about what is in the autochanger
-and may stop function because it expects to have exclusive use
-of the autochanger while it has the drive mounted.
-
-
-\label{Magazines}
-\section{Dealing with Multiple Magazines}
-\index[general]{Dealing with Multiple Magazines }
-\index[general]{Magazines!Dealing with Multiple }
-
-If you have several magazines or if you insert or remove cartridges from a
-magazine, you should notify Bacula of this. By doing so, Bacula will as
-a preference, use Volumes that it knows to be in the autochanger before
-accessing Volumes that are not in the autochanger. This prevents unneeded
-operator intervention.
-
-If your autochanger has barcodes (machine readable tape labels), the task of
-informing Bacula is simple. Every time, you change a magazine, or add or
-remove a cartridge from the magazine, simply do
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-unmount
-(remove magazine)
-(insert new magazine)
-update slots
-mount
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-in the Console program. This will cause Bacula to request the autochanger to
-return the current Volume names in the magazine. This will be done without
-actually accessing or reading the Volumes because the barcode reader does this
-during inventory when the autochanger is first turned on. Bacula will ensure
-that any Volumes that are currently marked as being in the magazine are marked
-as no longer in the magazine, and the new list of Volumes will be marked as
-being in the magazine. In addition, the Slot numbers of the Volumes will be
-corrected in Bacula's catalog if they are incorrect (added or moved).
-
-If you do not have a barcode reader on your autochanger, you have several
-alternatives.
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item You can manually set the Slot and InChanger flag using the {\bf update
- volume} command in the Console (quite painful).
-
-\item You can issue a
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-update slots scan
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- command that will cause Bacula to read the label on each of the cartridges in
- the magazine in turn and update the information (Slot, InChanger flag) in the
- catalog. This is quite effective but does take time to load each cartridge
- into the drive in turn and read the Volume label.
-
-\item You can modify the mtx-changer script so that it simulates an
- autochanger with barcodes. See below for more details.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\label{simulating}
-\section{Simulating Barcodes in your Autochanger}
-\index[general]{Autochanger!Simulating Barcodes in your }
-\index[general]{Simulating Barcodes in your Autochanger }
-
-You can simulate barcodes in your autochanger by making the {\bf mtx-changer}
-script return the same information that an autochanger with barcodes would do.
-This is done by commenting out the one and only line in the {\bf list)} case,
-which is:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- ${MTX} -f $ctl status | grep " *Storage Element [0-9]*:.*Full" | awk "{print \$3 \$4}" | sed "s/Full *\(:VolumeTag=\)*//"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-at approximately line 99 by putting a \# in column one of that line, or by
-simply deleting it. Then in its place add a new line that prints the contents
-of a file. For example:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-cat /etc/bacula/changer.volumes
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Be sure to include a full path to the file, which can have any name. The
-contents of the file must be of the following format:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-1:Volume1
-2:Volume2
-3:Volume3
-...
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Where the 1, 2, 3 are the slot numbers and Volume1, Volume2, ... are the
-Volume names in those slots. You can have multiple files that represent the
-Volumes in different magazines, and when you change magazines, simply copy the
-contents of the correct file into your {\bf /etc/bacula/changer.volumes} file.
-There is no need to stop and start Bacula when you change magazines, simply
-put the correct data in the file, then run the {\bf update slots} command, and
-your autochanger will appear to Bacula to be an autochanger with barcodes.
-\label{updateslots}
-
-\section{The Full Form of the Update Slots Command}
-\index[general]{Full Form of the Update Slots Command }
-\index[general]{Command!Full Form of the Update Slots }
-
-If you change only one cartridge in the magazine, you may not want to scan all
-Volumes, so the {\bf update slots} command (as well as the {\bf update slots
-scan} command) has the additional form:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-update slots=n1,n2,n3-n4, ...
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-where the keyword {\bf scan} can be appended or not. The n1,n2, ... represent
-Slot numbers to be updated and the form n3-n4 represents a range of Slot
-numbers to be updated (e.g. 4-7 will update Slots 4,5,6, and 7).
-
-This form is particularly useful if you want to do a scan (time expensive) and
-restrict the update to one or two slots.
-
-For example, the command:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-update slots=1,6 scan
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-will cause Bacula to load the Volume in Slot 1, read its Volume label and
-update the Catalog. It will do the same for the Volume in Slot 6. The command:
-
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-update slots=1-3,6
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-will read the barcoded Volume names for slots 1,2,3 and 6 and make the
-appropriate updates in the Catalog. If you don't have a barcode reader or have
-not modified the mtx-changer script as described above, the above command will
-not find any Volume names so will do nothing.
-\label{FreeBSD}
-
-\section{FreeBSD Issues}
-\index[general]{Issues!FreeBSD }
-\index[general]{FreeBSD Issues }
-
-If you are having problems on FreeBSD when Bacula tries to select a tape, and
-the message is {\bf Device not configured}, this is because FreeBSD has made
-the tape device {\bf /dev/nsa1} disappear when there is no tape mounted in the
-autochanger slot. As a consequence, Bacula is unable to open the device. The
-solution to the problem is to make sure that some tape is loaded into the tape
-drive before starting Bacula. This problem is corrected in Bacula versions
-1.32f-5 and later.
-
-Please see the
-\ilink{ Tape Testing}{FreeBSDTapes} chapter of this manual for
-{\bf important} information concerning your tape drive before doing the
-autochanger testing.
-\label{AutochangerTesting}
-
-\section{Testing Autochanger and Adapting mtx-changer script}
-\index[general]{Testing the Autochanger }
-\index[general]{Adapting Your mtx-changer script}
-
-
-Before attempting to use the autochanger with Bacula, it is preferable to
-"hand-test" that the changer works. To do so, we suggest you do the
-following commands (assuming that the {\bf mtx-changer} script is installed in
-{\bf /etc/bacula/mtx-changer}):
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Make sure Bacula is not running.]
-
-\item [/etc/bacula/mtx-changer \ /dev/sg0 \ list \ 0 \ /dev/nst0 \ 0]
-\index[sd]{mtx-changer list}
-
-This command should print:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- 1:
- 2:
- 3:
- ...
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-or one number per line for each slot that is occupied in your changer, and
-the number should be terminated by a colon ({\bf :}). If your changer has
-barcodes, the barcode will follow the colon. If an error message is printed,
-you must resolve the problem (e.g. try a different SCSI control device name
-if {\bf /dev/sg0} is incorrect). For example, on FreeBSD systems, the
-autochanger SCSI control device is generally {\bf /dev/pass2}.
-
-\item [/etc/bacula/mtx-changer \ /dev/sg0 \ slots ]
-\index[sd]{mtx-changer slots}
-
-This command should return the number of slots in your autochanger.
-
-\item [/etc/bacula/mtx-changer \ /dev/sg0 \ unload \ 1 \ /dev/nst0 \ 0 ]
-\index[sd]{mtx-changer unload}
-
- If a tape is loaded from slot 1, this should cause it to be unloaded.
-
-\item [/etc/bacula/mtx-changer \ /dev/sg0 \ load \ 3 \ /dev/nst0 \ 0 ]
-\index[sd]{mtx-changer load}
-
-Assuming you have a tape in slot 3, it will be loaded into drive (0).
-
-
-\item [/etc/bacula/mtx-changer \ /dev/sg0 \ loaded \ 0 \ /dev/nst0 \ 0]
-\index[sd]{mtx-changer loaded}
-
-It should print "3"
-Note, we have used an "illegal" slot number 0. In this case, it is simply
-ignored because the slot number is not used. However, it must be specified
-because the drive parameter at the end of the command is needed to select
-the correct drive.
-
-\item [/etc/bacula/mtx-changer \ /dev/sg0 \ unload \ 3 /dev/nst0 \ 0]
-
-will unload the tape into slot 3.
-
-\end{description}
-
-Once all the above commands work correctly, assuming that you have the right
-{\bf Changer Command} in your configuration, Bacula should be able to operate
-the changer. The only remaining area of problems will be if your autoloader
-needs some time to get the tape loaded after issuing the command. After the
-{\bf mtx-changer} script returns, Bacula will immediately rewind and read the
-tape. If Bacula gets rewind I/O errors after a tape change, you will probably
-need to insert a {\bf sleep 20} after the {\bf mtx} command, but be careful to
-exit the script with a zero status by adding {\bf exit 0} after any additional
-commands you add to the script. This is because Bacula checks the return
-status of the script, which should be zero if all went well.
-
-You can test whether or not you need a {\bf sleep} by putting the following
-commands into a file and running it as a script:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#!/bin/sh
-/etc/bacula/mtx-changer /dev/sg0 unload 1 /dev/nst0 0
-/etc/bacula/mtx-changer /dev/sg0 load 3 /dev/nst0 0
-mt -f /dev/st0 rewind
-mt -f /dev/st0 weof
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If the above script runs, you probably have no timing problems. If it does not
-run, start by putting a {\bf sleep 30} or possibly a {\bf sleep 60} in the
-script just after the mtx-changer load command. If that works, then you should
-move the sleep into the actual {\bf mtx-changer} script so that it will be
-effective when Bacula runs.
-
-A second problem that comes up with a small number of autochangers is that
-they need to have the cartridge ejected before it can be removed. If this is
-the case, the {\bf load 3} will never succeed regardless of how long you wait.
-If this seems to be your problem, you can insert an eject just after the
-unload so that the script looks like:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#!/bin/sh
-/etc/bacula/mtx-changer /dev/sg0 unload 1 /dev/nst0 0
-mt -f /dev/st0 offline
-/etc/bacula/mtx-changer /dev/sg0 load 3 /dev/nst0 0
-mt -f /dev/st0 rewind
-mt -f /dev/st0 weof
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Obviously, if you need the {\bf offline} command, you should move it into the
-mtx-changer script ensuring that you save the status of the {\bf mtx} command
-or always force an {\bf exit 0} from the script, because Bacula checks the
-return status of the script.
-
-As noted earlier, there are several scripts in {\bf
-\lt{}bacula-source\gt{}/examples/devices} that implement the above features,
-so they may be a help to you in getting your script to work.
-
-If Bacula complains "Rewind error on /dev/nst0. ERR=Input/output error." you
-most likely need more sleep time in your {\bf mtx-changer} before returning to
-Bacula after a load command has been completed.
-
-\label{using}
-
-\section{Using the Autochanger}
-\index[general]{Using the Autochanger }
-\index[general]{Autochanger!Using the }
-
-Let's assume that you have properly defined the necessary Storage daemon
-Device records, and you have added the {\bf Autochanger = yes} record to the
-Storage resource in your Director's configuration file.
-
-Now you fill your autochanger with say six blank tapes.
-
-What do you do to make Bacula access those tapes?
-
-One strategy is to prelabel each of the tapes. Do so by starting Bacula, then
-with the Console program, enter the {\bf label} command:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-./bconsole
-Connecting to Director rufus:8101
-1000 OK: rufus-dir Version: 1.26 (4 October 2002)
-*label
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-it will then print something like:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Using default Catalog name=BackupDB DB=bacula
-The defined Storage resources are:
- 1: Autochanger
- 2: File
-Select Storage resource (1-2): 1
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-I select the autochanger (1), and it prints:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Enter new Volume name: TestVolume1
-Enter slot (0 for none): 1
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-where I entered {\bf TestVolume1} for the tape name, and slot {\bf 1} for the
-slot. It then asks:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Defined Pools:
- 1: Default
- 2: File
-Select the Pool (1-2): 1
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-I select the Default pool. This will be automatically done if you only have a
-single pool, then Bacula will proceed to unload any loaded volume, load the
-volume in slot 1 and label it. In this example, nothing was in the drive, so
-it printed:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Connecting to Storage daemon Autochanger at localhost:9103 ...
-Sending label command ...
-3903 Issuing autochanger "load slot 1" command.
-3000 OK label. Volume=TestVolume1 Device=/dev/nst0
-Media record for Volume=TestVolume1 successfully created.
-Requesting mount Autochanger ...
-3001 Device /dev/nst0 is mounted with Volume TestVolume1
-You have messages.
-*
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-You may then proceed to label the other volumes. The messages will change
-slightly because Bacula will unload the volume (just labeled TestVolume1)
-before loading the next volume to be labeled.
-
-Once all your Volumes are labeled, Bacula will automatically load them as they
-are needed.
-
-To "see" how you have labeled your Volumes, simply enter the {\bf list
-volumes} command from the Console program, which should print something like
-the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-*{\bf list volumes}
-Using default Catalog name=BackupDB DB=bacula
-Defined Pools:
- 1: Default
- 2: File
-Select the Pool (1-2): 1
-+-------+----------+--------+---------+-------+--------+----------+-------+------+
-| MedId | VolName | MedTyp | VolStat | Bites | LstWrt | VolReten | Recyc | Slot |
-+-------+----------+--------+---------+-------+--------+----------+-------+------+
-| 1 | TestVol1 | DDS-4 | Append | 0 | 0 | 30672000 | 0 | 1 |
-| 2 | TestVol2 | DDS-4 | Append | 0 | 0 | 30672000 | 0 | 2 |
-| 3 | TestVol3 | DDS-4 | Append | 0 | 0 | 30672000 | 0 | 3 |
-| ... |
-+-------+----------+--------+---------+-------+--------+----------+-------+------+
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\label{Barcodes}
-
-\section{Barcode Support}
-\index[general]{Support!Barcode }
-\index[general]{Barcode Support }
-
-Bacula provides barcode support with two Console commands, {\bf label
-barcodes} and {\bf update slots}.
-
-The {\bf label barcodes} will cause Bacula to read the barcodes of all the
-cassettes that are currently installed in the magazine (cassette holder) using
-the {\bf mtx-changer} {\bf list} command. Each cassette is mounted in turn and
-labeled with the same Volume name as the barcode.
-
-The {\bf update slots} command will first obtain the list of cassettes and
-their barcodes from {\bf mtx-changer}. Then it will find each volume in turn
-in the catalog database corresponding to the barcodes and set its Slot to
-correspond to the value just read. If the Volume is not in the catalog, then
-nothing will be done. This command is useful for synchronizing Bacula with the
-current magazine in case you have changed magazines or in case you have moved
-cassettes from one slot to another. If the autochanger is empty, nothing will
-be done.
-
-The {\bf Cleaning Prefix} statement can be used in the Pool resource to define
-a Volume name prefix, which if it matches that of the Volume (barcode) will
-cause that Volume to be marked with a VolStatus of {\bf Cleaning}. This will
-prevent Bacula from attempting to write on the Volume.
-
-\section{Use bconsole to display Autochanger content}
-
-The {\bf status slots storage=xxx} command displays autochanger content.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Slot | Volume Name | Status | Type | Pool | Loaded |
-------+-----------------+----------+-------------------+----------------+---------|
- 1 | 00001 | Append | DiskChangerMedia | Default | 0 |
- 2 | 00002 | Append | DiskChangerMedia | Default | 0 |
- 3*| 00003 | Append | DiskChangerMedia | Scratch | 0 |
- 4 | | | | | 0 |
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If you see a {\bf *} near the slot number, you have to run {\bf update slots}
-command to synchronize autochanger content with your catalog.
-
-\label{interface}
-
-\section{Bacula Autochanger Interface}
-\index[general]{Interface!Bacula Autochanger }
-\index[general]{Bacula Autochanger Interface }
-
-Bacula calls the autochanger script that you specify on the {\bf Changer
-Command} statement. Normally this script will be the {\bf mtx-changer} script
-that we provide, but it can in fact be any program. The only requirement
-for the script is that it must understand the commands that
-Bacula uses, which are {\bf loaded}, {\bf load}, {\bf
-unload}, {\bf list}, and {\bf slots}. In addition,
-each of those commands must return the information in the precise format as
-specified below:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-- Currently the changer commands used are:
- loaded -- returns number of the slot that is loaded, base 1,
- in the drive or 0 if the drive is empty.
- load -- loads a specified slot (note, some autochangers
- require a 30 second pause after this command) into
- the drive.
- unload -- unloads the device (returns cassette to its slot).
- list -- returns one line for each cassette in the autochanger
- in the format <slot>:<barcode>. Where
- the {\bf slot} is the non-zero integer representing
- the slot number, and {\bf barcode} is the barcode
- associated with the cassette if it exists and if you
- autoloader supports barcodes. Otherwise the barcode
- field is blank.
- slots -- returns total number of slots in the autochanger.
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Bacula checks the exit status of the program called, and if it is zero, the
-data is accepted. If the exit status is non-zero, Bacula will print an
-error message and request the tape be manually mounted on the drive.
+++ /dev/null
-\indexentry {Bimagemgr }{2}
-\indexentry {bimagemgr!Installation }{2}
-\indexentry {bimagemgr Installation }{2}
-\indexentry {bimagemgr!Usage }{4}
-\indexentry {bimagemgr Usage }{4}
-\indexentry {GNU Free Documentation License}{7}
-\indexentry {License!GNU Free Documentation}{7}
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{The Bootstrap File}
-\label{BootstrapChapter}
-\index[general]{File!Bootstrap }
-\index[general]{Bootstrap File }
-
-The information in this chapter is provided so that you may either create your
-own bootstrap files, or so that you can edit a bootstrap file produced by {\bf
-Bacula}. However, normally the bootstrap file will be automatically created
-for you during the
-\ilink{restore\_command}{_ConsoleChapter} command in the Console program, or
-by using a
-\ilink{ Write Bootstrap}{writebootstrap} record in your Backup
-Jobs, and thus you will never need to know the details of this file.
-
-The {\bf bootstrap} file contains ASCII information that permits precise
-specification of what files should be restored, what volume they are on,
-and where they are on the volume. It is a relatively compact
-form of specifying the information, is human readable, and can be edited with
-any text editor.
-
-\section{Bootstrap File Format}
-\index[general]{Format!Bootstrap}
-\index[general]{Bootstrap File Format }
-
-The general format of a {\bf bootstrap} file is:
-
-{\bf \lt{}keyword\gt{}= \lt{}value\gt{}}
-
-Where each {\bf keyword} and the {\bf value} specify which files to restore.
-More precisely the {\bf keyword} and their {\bf values} serve to limit which
-files will be restored and thus act as a filter. The absence of a keyword
-means that all records will be accepted.
-
-Blank lines and lines beginning with a pound sign (\#) in the bootstrap file
-are ignored.
-
-There are keywords which permit filtering by Volume, Client, Job, FileIndex,
-Session Id, Session Time, ...
-
-The more keywords that are specified, the more selective the specification of
-which files to restore will be. In fact, each keyword is {\bf AND}ed with
-other keywords that may be present.
-
-For example,
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Volume = Test-001
-VolSessionId = 1
-VolSessionTime = 108927638
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-directs the Storage daemon (or the {\bf bextract} program) to restore only
-those files on Volume Test-001 {\bf AND} having VolumeSessionId equal to one
-{\bf AND} having VolumeSession time equal to 108927638.
-
-The full set of permitted keywords presented in the order in which they are
-matched against the Volume records are:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Volume]
- \index[general]{Volume }
- The value field specifies what Volume the following commands apply to.
- Each Volume specification becomes the current Volume, to which all the
- following commands apply until a new current Volume (if any) is
- specified. If the Volume name contains spaces, it should be enclosed in
- quotes. At lease one Volume specification is required.
-
-\item [Count]
- \index[general]{Count}
- The value is the total number of files that will be restored for this Volume.
- This allows the Storage daemon to know when to stop reading the Volume.
- This value is optional.
-
-\item [VolFile]
- \index[general]{VolFile}
- The value is a file number, a list of file numbers, or a range of file
- numbers to match on the current Volume. The file number represents the
- physical file on the Volume where the data is stored. For a tape
- volume, this record is used to position to the correct starting file,
- and once the tape is past the last specified file, reading will stop.
-
-\item [VolBlock]
- \index[general]{VolBlock}
- The value is a block number, a list of block numbers, or a range of
- block numbers to match on the current Volume. The block number
- represents the physical block within the file on the Volume where the
- data is stored.
-
-
-\item [VolSessionTime]
- \index[general]{VolSessionTime }
- The value specifies a Volume Session Time to be matched from the current
- volume.
-
-\item [VolSessionId]
- \index[general]{VolSessionId }
- The value specifies a VolSessionId, a list of volume session ids, or a
- range of volume session ids to be matched from the current Volume. Each
- VolSessionId and VolSessionTime pair corresponds to a unique Job that is
- backed up on the Volume.
-
-\item [JobId]
- \index[general]{JobId }
- The value specifies a JobId, list of JobIds, or range of JobIds to be
- selected from the current Volume. Note, the JobId may not be unique if you
- have multiple Directors, or if you have reinitialized your database. The
- JobId filter works only if you do not run multiple simultaneous jobs.
- This value is optional and not used by Bacula to restore files.
-
-\item [Job]
- \index[general]{Job }
- The value specifies a Job name or list of Job names to be matched on the
- current Volume. The Job corresponds to a unique VolSessionId and
- VolSessionTime pair. However, the Job is perhaps a bit more readable by
- humans. Standard regular expressions (wildcards) may be used to match Job
- names. The Job filter works only if you do not run multiple simultaneous
- jobs.
- This value is optional and not used by Bacula to restore files.
-
-\item [Client]
- \index[general]{Client }
- The value specifies a Client name or list of Clients to will be matched on
- the current Volume. Standard regular expressions (wildcards) may be used to
- match Client names. The Client filter works only if you do not run multiple
- simultaneous jobs.
- This value is optional and not used by Bacula to restore files.
-
-\item [FileIndex]
- \index[general]{FileIndex}
- The value specifies a FileIndex, list of FileIndexes, or range of FileIndexes
- to be selected from the current Volume. Each file (data) stored on a Volume
- within a Session has a unique FileIndex. For each Session, the first file
- written is assigned FileIndex equal to one and incremented for each file
- backed up.
-
- This for a given Volume, the triple VolSessionId, VolSessionTime, and
- FileIndex uniquely identifies a file stored on the Volume. Multiple copies of
- the same file may be stored on the same Volume, but for each file, the triple
- VolSessionId, VolSessionTime, and FileIndex will be unique. This triple is
- stored in the Catalog database for each file.
-
- To restore a particular file, this value (or a range of FileIndexes) is
- required.
-
-\item [FileRegex]
- \index[general]{FileRegex}
- The value is a regular expression. When specified, only matching
- filenames will be restored.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- FileRegex=^/etc/passwd(.old)?
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\item [Slot]
- \index[general]{Slot }
- The value specifies the autochanger slot. There may be only a single {\bf
- Slot} specification for each Volume.
-
-\item [Stream]
- \index[general]{Stream }
- The value specifies a Stream, a list of Streams, or a range of Streams to be
- selected from the current Volume. Unless you really know what you are doing
- (the internals of {\bf Bacula}), you should avoid this specification.
- This value is optional and not used by Bacula to restore files.
-
-\item [*JobType]
- \index[general]{*JobType }
- Not yet implemented.
-
-\item [*JobLevel]
- \index[general]{*JobLevel }
- Not yet implemented.
-\end{description}
-
-The {\bf Volume} record is a bit special in that it must be the first record.
-The other keyword records may appear in any order and any number following a
-Volume record.
-
-Multiple Volume records may be specified in the same bootstrap file, but each
-one starts a new set of filter criteria for the Volume.
-
-In processing the bootstrap file within the current Volume, each filter
-specified by a keyword is {\bf AND}ed with the next. Thus,
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Volume = Test-01
-Client = "My machine"
-FileIndex = 1
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-will match records on Volume {\bf Test-01} {\bf AND} Client records for {\bf
-My machine} {\bf AND} FileIndex equal to {\bf one}.
-
-Multiple occurrences of the same record are {\bf OR}ed together. Thus,
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Volume = Test-01
-Client = "My machine"
-Client = "Backup machine"
-FileIndex = 1
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-will match records on Volume {\bf Test-01} {\bf AND} (Client records for {\bf
-My machine} {\bf OR} {\bf Backup machine}) {\bf AND} FileIndex equal to {\bf
-one}.
-
-For integer values, you may supply a range or a list, and for all other values
-except Volumes, you may specify a list. A list is equivalent to multiple
-records of the same keyword. For example,
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Volume = Test-01
-Client = "My machine", "Backup machine"
-FileIndex = 1-20, 35
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-will match records on Volume {\bf Test-01} {\bf AND} {\bf (}Client records for
-{\bf My machine} {\bf OR} {\bf Backup machine}{\bf )} {\bf AND} {\bf
-(}FileIndex 1 {\bf OR} 2 {\bf OR} 3 ... {\bf OR} 20 {\bf OR} 35{\bf )}.
-
-As previously mentioned above, there may be multiple Volume records in the
-same bootstrap file. Each new Volume definition begins a new set of filter
-conditions that apply to that Volume and will be {\bf OR}ed with any other
-Volume definitions.
-
-As an example, suppose we query for the current set of tapes to restore all
-files on Client {\bf Rufus} using the {\bf query} command in the console
-program:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Using default Catalog name=MySQL DB=bacula
-*query
-Available queries:
- 1: List Job totals:
- 2: List where a file is saved:
- 3: List where the most recent copies of a file are saved:
- 4: List total files/bytes by Job:
- 5: List total files/bytes by Volume:
- 6: List last 10 Full Backups for a Client:
- 7: List Volumes used by selected JobId:
- 8: List Volumes to Restore All Files:
-Choose a query (1-8): 8
-Enter Client Name: Rufus
-+-------+------------------+------------+-----------+----------+------------+
-| JobId | StartTime | VolumeName | StartFile | VolSesId | VolSesTime |
-+-------+------------------+------------+-----------+----------+------------+
-| 154 | 2002-05-30 12:08 | test-02 | 0 | 1 | 1022753312 |
-| 202 | 2002-06-15 10:16 | test-02 | 0 | 2 | 1024128917 |
-| 203 | 2002-06-15 11:12 | test-02 | 3 | 1 | 1024132350 |
-| 204 | 2002-06-18 08:11 | test-02 | 4 | 1 | 1024380678 |
-+-------+------------------+------------+-----------+----------+------------+
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The output shows us that there are four Jobs that must be restored. The first
-one is a Full backup, and the following three are all Incremental backups.
-
-The following bootstrap file will restore those files:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Volume=test-02
-VolSessionId=1
-VolSessionTime=1022753312
-Volume=test-02
-VolSessionId=2
-VolSessionTime=1024128917
-Volume=test-02
-VolSessionId=1
-VolSessionTime=1024132350
-Volume=test-02
-VolSessionId=1
-VolSessionTime=1024380678
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-As a final example, assume that the initial Full save spanned two Volumes. The
-output from {\bf query} might look like:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-+-------+------------------+------------+-----------+----------+------------+
-| JobId | StartTime | VolumeName | StartFile | VolSesId | VolSesTime |
-+-------+------------------+------------+-----------+----------+------------+
-| 242 | 2002-06-25 16:50 | File0003 | 0 | 1 | 1025016612 |
-| 242 | 2002-06-25 16:50 | File0004 | 0 | 1 | 1025016612 |
-| 243 | 2002-06-25 16:52 | File0005 | 0 | 2 | 1025016612 |
-| 246 | 2002-06-25 19:19 | File0006 | 0 | 2 | 1025025494 |
-+-------+------------------+------------+-----------+----------+------------+
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-and the following bootstrap file would restore those files:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Volume=File0003
-VolSessionId=1
-VolSessionTime=1025016612
-Volume=File0004
-VolSessionId=1
-VolSessionTime=1025016612
-Volume=File0005
-VolSessionId=2
-VolSessionTime=1025016612
-Volume=File0006
-VolSessionId=2
-VolSessionTime=1025025494
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{Automatic Generation of Bootstrap Files}
-\index[general]{Files!Automatic Generation of Bootstrap }
-\index[general]{Automatic Generation of Bootstrap Files }
-
-One thing that is probably worth knowing: the bootstrap files that are
-generated automatically at the end of the job are not as optimized as those
-generated by the restore command. This is because during Incremental and
-Differential jobs, the records pertaining to the files written for the
-Job are appended to the end of the bootstrap file.
-As consequence, all the files saved to an Incremental or Differential job will be
-restored first by the Full save, then by any Incremental or Differential
-saves.
-
-When the bootstrap file is generated for the restore command, only one copy
-(the most recent) of each file is restored.
-
-So if you have spare cycles on your machine, you could optimize the bootstrap
-files by doing the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- ./bconsole
- restore client=xxx select all
- done
- no
- quit
- Backup bootstrap file.
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The above will not work if you have multiple FileSets because that will be an
-extra prompt. However, the {\bf restore client=xxx select all} builds the
-in-memory tree, selecting everything and creates the bootstrap file.
-
-The {\bf no} answers the {\bf Do you want to run this (yes/mod/no)} question.
-
-\label{bscanBootstrap}
-\section{Bootstrap for bscan}
-\index[general]{bscan}
-\index[general]{bscan!bootstrap}
-\index[general]{bscan bootstrap}
-If you have a very large number of Volumes to scan with {\bf bscan},
-you may exceed the command line limit (511 characters). I that case,
-you can create a simple bootstrap file that consists of only the
-volume names. An example might be:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Volume="Vol001"
-Volume="Vol002"
-Volume="Vol003"
-Volume="Vol004"
-Volume="Vol005"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-
-\section{A Final Bootstrap Example}
-\index[general]{Bootstrap Example}
-\index[general]{Example!Bootstrap}
-
-If you want to extract or copy a single Job, you can do it by selecting by
-JobId (code not tested) or better yet, if you know the VolSessionTime and the
-VolSessionId (printed on Job report and in Catalog), specifying this is by far
-the best. Using the VolSessionTime and VolSessionId is the way Bacula does
-restores. A bsr file might look like the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Volume="Vol001"
-VolSessionId=10
-VolSessionTime=1080847820
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If you know how many files are backed up (on the job report), you can
-enormously speed up the selection by adding (let's assume there are 157
-files):
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileIndex=1-157
-Count=157
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Finally, if you know the File number where the Job starts, you can also cause
-bcopy to forward space to the right file without reading every record:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-VolFile=20
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-There is nothing magic or complicated about a BSR file. Parsing it and
-properly applying it within Bacula *is* magic, but you don't need to worry
-about that.
-
-If you want to see a *real* bsr file, simply fire up the {\bf restore} command
-in the console program, select something, then answer no when it prompts to
-run the job. Then look at the file {\bf restore.bsr} in your working
-directory.
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\section{Bacula Bugs}
-\label{BugsChapter}
-\index[general]{Bacula Bugs }
-\index[general]{Bugs!Bacula }
-
-Well fortunately there are not too many bugs, but thanks to Dan Langille, we
-have a
-\elink{bugs database}{http://bugs.bacula.org} where bugs are reported.
-Generally, when a bug is fixed, a patch for the currently released version will
-be attached to the bug report.
-
-The directory {\bf patches} in the current SVN always contains a list of
-the patches that have been created for the previously released version
-of Bacula. In addition, the file {\bf patches-version-number} in the
-{\bf patches} directory contains a summary of each of the patches.
-
-A "raw" list of the current task list and known issues can be found in {\bf
-kernstodo} in the main Bacula source directory.
+++ /dev/null
-#!/usr/bin/perl -w
-# Finds potential problems in tex files, and issues warnings to the console
-# about what it finds. Takes a list of files as its only arguments,
-# and does checks on all the files listed. The assumption is that these are
-# valid (or close to valid) LaTeX files. It follows \include statements
-# recursively to pick up any included tex files.
-#
-#
-#
-# Currently the following checks are made:
-#
-# -- Multiple hyphens not inside a verbatim environment (or \verb). These
-# should be placed inside a \verb{} contruct so they will not be converted
-# to single hyphen by latex and latex2html.
-
-
-# Original creation 3-8-05 by Karl Cunningham karlc -at- keckec -dot- com
-#
-#
-
-use strict;
-
-# The following builds the test string to identify and change multiple
-# hyphens in the tex files. Several constructs are identified but only
-# multiple hyphens are changed; the others are fed to the output
-# unchanged.
-my $b = '\\\\begin\\*?\\s*\\{\\s*'; # \begin{
-my $e = '\\\\end\\*?\\s*\\{\\s*'; # \end{
-my $c = '\\s*\\}'; # closing curly brace
-
-# This captures entire verbatim environments. These are passed to the output
-# file unchanged.
-my $verbatimenv = $b . "verbatim" . $c . ".*?" . $e . "verbatim" . $c;
-
-# This captures \verb{..{ constructs. They are passed to the output unchanged.
-my $verb = '\\\\verb\\*?(.).*?\\1';
-
-# This captures multiple hyphens with a leading and trailing space. These are not changed.
-my $hyphsp = '\\s\\-{2,}\\s';
-
-# This identifies other multiple hyphens.
-my $hyphens = '\\-{2,}';
-
-# This identifies \hyperpage{..} commands, which should be ignored.
-my $hyperpage = '\\\\hyperpage\\*?\\{.*?\\}';
-
-# This builds the actual test string from the above strings.
-#my $teststr = "$verbatimenv|$verb|$tocentry|$hyphens";
-my $teststr = "$verbatimenv|$verb|$hyphsp|$hyperpage|$hyphens";
-
-
-sub get_includes {
- # Get a list of include files from the top-level tex file. The first
- # argument is a pointer to the list of files found. The rest of the
- # arguments is a list of filenames to check for includes.
- my $files = shift;
- my ($fileline,$includefile,$includes);
-
- while (my $filename = shift) {
- # Get a list of all the html files in the directory.
- open my $if,"<$filename" or die "Cannot open input file $filename\n";
- $fileline = 0;
- $includes = 0;
- while (<$if>) {
- chomp;
- $fileline++;
- # If a file is found in an include, process it.
- if (($includefile) = /\\include\s*\{(.*?)\}/) {
- $includes++;
- # Append .tex to the filename
- $includefile .= '.tex';
-
- # If the include file has already been processed, issue a warning
- # and don't do it again.
- my $found = 0;
- foreach (@$files) {
- if ($_ eq $includefile) {
- $found = 1;
- last;
- }
- }
- if ($found) {
- print "$includefile found at line $fileline in $filename was previously included\n";
- } else {
- # The file has not been previously found. Save it and
- # recursively process it.
- push (@$files,$includefile);
- get_includes($files,$includefile);
- }
- }
- }
- close IF;
- }
-}
-
-
-sub check_hyphens {
- my (@files) = @_;
- my ($filedata,$this,$linecnt,$before);
-
- # Build the test string to check for the various environments.
- # We only do the conversion if the multiple hyphens are outside of a
- # verbatim environment (either \begin{verbatim}...\end{verbatim} or
- # \verb{--}). Capture those environments and pass them to the output
- # unchanged.
-
- foreach my $file (@files) {
- # Open the file and load the whole thing into $filedata. A bit wasteful but
- # easier to deal with, and we don't have a problem with speed here.
- $filedata = "";
- open IF,"<$file" or die "Cannot open input file $file";
- while (<IF>) {
- $filedata .= $_;
- }
- close IF;
-
- # Set up to process the file data.
- $linecnt = 1;
-
- # Go through the file data from beginning to end. For each match, save what
- # came before it and what matched. $filedata now becomes only what came
- # after the match.
- # Chech the match to see if it starts with a multiple-hyphen. If so
- # warn the user. Keep track of line numbers so they can be output
- # with the warning message.
- while ($filedata =~ /$teststr/os) {
- $this = $&;
- $before = $`;
- $filedata = $';
- $linecnt += $before =~ tr/\n/\n/;
-
- # Check if the multiple hyphen is present outside of one of the
- # acceptable constructs.
- if ($this =~ /^\-+/) {
- print "Possible unwanted multiple hyphen found in line ",
- "$linecnt of file $file\n";
- }
- $linecnt += $this =~ tr/\n/\n/;
- }
- }
-}
-##################################################################
-# MAIN ####
-##################################################################
-
-my (@includes,$cnt);
-
-# Examine the file pointed to by the first argument to get a list of
-# includes to test.
-get_includes(\@includes,@ARGV);
-
-check_hyphens(@includes);
+++ /dev/null
-[General]
-img_extIsRegExp=false
-img_extensions=.eps .jpg .jpeg .png .pdf .ps .fig .gif
-kileprversion=2
-kileversion=2.0
-lastDocument=version.tex
-masterDocument=
-name=Concepts
-pkg_extIsRegExp=false
-pkg_extensions=.cls .sty
-src_extIsRegExp=false
-src_extensions=.tex .ltx .latex .dtx .ins
-
-[Tools]
-MakeIndex=
-QuickBuild=
-
-[item:ansi-labels.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=LaTeX
-line=1
-open=false
-order=2
-
-[item:autochangerres.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:autochangers.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:bootstrap.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:bugs.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:concepts.kilepr]
-archive=true
-column=134217831
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:concepts.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=LaTeX
-line=9
-open=false
-order=1
-
-[item:dataencryption.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:disk.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:dvd.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:fdl.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:general.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:gpl.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:lesser.tex]
-archive=true
-column=7864421
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:license.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:migration.tex]
-archive=true
-column=2147483647
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:newfeatures.tex]
-archive=true
-column=30
-encoding=UTF-8
-highlight=LaTeX
-line=341
-open=true
-order=0
-
-[item:pools.tex]
-archive=true
-column=2147483647
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:projects.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:python.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:recycling.tex]
-archive=true
-column=116
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:requirements.tex]
-archive=true
-column=7864421
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:rescue.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:restore.tex]
-archive=true
-column=148292584
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:spooling.tex]
-archive=true
-column=121
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:state.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:strategies.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:stunnel.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:supportedchangers.tex]
-archive=true
-column=147888641
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:supporteddrives.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:supportedoses.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:thanks.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:tls.tex]
-archive=true
-column=25
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:tutorial.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:vars.tex]
-archive=true
-column=147634280
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:verify.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:version.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=LaTeX
-line=0
-open=true
-order=1
-
-[item:win32.tex]
-archive=true
-column=7864421
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-%% The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-%% to be entered as printable characters:
-%%
-%% # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-%%
-
-\documentclass[10pt,a4paper]{book}
-
-\topmargin -0.5in
-\oddsidemargin 0.0in
-\evensidemargin 0.0in
-\textheight 10in
-\textwidth 6.5in
-
-
-\usepackage{html}
-\usepackage{float}
-\usepackage{graphicx}
-\usepackage{bacula}
-\usepackage{longtable}
-\usepackage{makeidx}
-\usepackage{index}
-\usepackage{setspace}
-\usepackage{hyperref}
-% \usepackage[linkcolor=black,colorlinks=true]{hyperref}
-\usepackage{url}
-
-\makeindex
-\newindex{dir}{ddx}{dnd}{Director Index}
-\newindex{fd}{fdx}{fnd}{File Daemon Index}
-\newindex{sd}{sdx}{snd}{Storage Daemon Index}
-\newindex{console}{cdx}{cnd}{Console Index}
-\newindex{general}{idx}{ind}{General Index}
-
-\sloppy
-
-\begin{document}
-\sloppy
-
-\include{coverpage}
-
-\clearpage
-\pagenumbering{roman}
-\tableofcontents
-\clearpage
-
-\pagestyle{myheadings}
-\markboth{Bacula Version \version}{Bacula Version \version}
-\pagenumbering{arabic}
-\include{general}
-\include{newfeatures}
-\include{state}
-\include{requirements}
-\include{supportedoses}
-\include{supporteddrives}
-\include{tutorial}
-\include{restore}
-\include{recycling}
-\include{disk}
-\include{pools}
-\include{migration}
-\include{strategies}
-\include{autochangers}
-\include{supportedchangers}
-\include{spooling}
-\include{statistics}
-\include{ansi-labels}
-\include{win32}
-\include{rescue}
-\include{tls}
-\include{dataencryption}
-\include{verify}
-\include{bootstrap}
-\include{license}
-\include{fdl}
-\include{gpl}
-\include{lesser}
-\include{projects}
-\include{thanks}
-\include{bugs}
-
-% pull in the index
-\clearpage
-\printindex[general]
-\printindex[dir]
-\printindex[fd]
-\printindex[sd]
-\printindex[console]
-
-\end{document}
+++ /dev/null
-\newfont{\bighead}{cmr17 at 36pt}
-\parskip 10pt
-\parindent 0pt
-
-\title{\includegraphics{\idir bacula-logo.eps} \\ \bigskip
- \Huge{Bacula}$^{\normalsize \textregistered}$ \Huge{Concepts and Overview Guide}
- \begin{center}
- \large{It comes in the night and sucks
- the essence from your computers. }
- \end{center}
-}
-
-
-\author{Kern Sibbald}
-\date{\vspace{1.0in}\today \\
- This manual documents Bacula version \fullversion \\
- \vspace{0.2in}
- Copyright {\copyright} 1999-2009, Free Software Foundation Europe
- e.V. \\
- Bacula {\textregistered} is a registered trademark of Kern Sibbald.\\
- \vspace{0.2in}
- Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the
- GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 published by the Free Software Foundation;
- with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
- A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
-}
-
-\maketitle
+++ /dev/null
-
-\chapter{Data Encryption}
-\label{DataEncryption}
-\index[general]{Data Encryption}
-\index[general]{Encryption!Data}
-\index[general]{Data Encryption}
-
-Bacula permits file data encryption and signing within the File Daemon (or
-Client) prior to sending data to the Storage Daemon. Upon restoration,
-file signatures are validated and any mismatches are reported. At no time
-does the Director or the Storage Daemon have access to unencrypted file
-contents.
-
-
-It is very important to specify what this implementation does NOT
-do:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item There is one important restore problem to be aware of, namely, it's
- possible for the director to restore new keys or a Bacula configuration
- file to the client, and thus force later backups to be made with a
- compromised key and/or with no encryption at all. You can avoid this by
- not changing the location of the keys in your Bacula File daemon
- configuration file, and not changing your File daemon keys. If you do
- change either one, you must ensure that no restore is done that restores
- the old configuration or the old keys. In general, the worst effect of
- this will be that you can no longer connect the File daemon.
-
-\item The implementation does not encrypt file metadata such as file path
- names, permissions, and ownership. Extended attributes are also currently
- not encrypted. However, Mac OS X resource forks are encrypted.
-\end{itemize}
-
-Encryption and signing are implemented using RSA private keys coupled with
-self-signed x509 public certificates. This is also sometimes known as PKI
-or Public Key Infrastructure.
-
-Each File Daemon should be given its own unique private/public key pair.
-In addition to this key pair, any number of "Master Keys" may be specified
--- these are key pairs that may be used to decrypt any backups should the
-File Daemon key be lost. Only the Master Key's public certificate should
-be made available to the File Daemon. Under no circumstances should the
-Master Private Key be shared or stored on the Client machine.
-
-The Master Keys should be backed up to a secure location, such as a CD
-placed in a in a fire-proof safe or bank safety deposit box. The Master
-Keys should never be kept on the same machine as the Storage Daemon or
-Director if you are worried about an unauthorized party compromising either
-machine and accessing your encrypted backups.
-
-While less critical than the Master Keys, File Daemon Keys are also a prime
-candidate for off-site backups; burn the key pair to a CD and send the CD
-home with the owner of the machine.
-
-NOTE!!! If you lose your encryption keys, backups will be unrecoverable.
-{\bf ALWAYS} store a copy of your master keys in a secure, off-site location.
-
-The basic algorithm used for each backup session (Job) is:
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item The File daemon generates a session key.
-\item The FD encrypts that session key via PKE for all recipients (the file
-daemon, any master keys).
-\item The FD uses that session key to perform symmetric encryption on the data.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-
-\section{Building Bacula with Encryption Support}
-\index[general]{Building Bacula with Encryption Support}
-
-The configuration option for enabling OpenSSL encryption support has not changed
-since Bacula 1.38. To build Bacula with encryption support, you will need
-the OpenSSL libraries and headers installed. When configuring Bacula, use:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- ./configure --with-openssl ...
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\section{Encryption Technical Details}
-\index[general]{Encryption Technical Details}
-
-The implementation uses 128bit AES-CBC, with RSA encrypted symmetric
-session keys. The RSA key is user supplied.
-If you are running OpenSSL 0.9.8 or later, the signed file hash uses
-SHA-256 -- otherwise, SHA-1 is used.
-
-End-user configuration settings for the algorithms are not currently
-exposed -- only the algorithms listed above are used. However, the
-data written to Volume supports arbitrary symmetric, asymmetric, and
-digest algorithms for future extensibility, and the back-end
-implementation currently supports:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-Symmetric Encryption:
- - 128, 192, and 256-bit AES-CBC
- - Blowfish-CBC
-
-Asymmetric Encryption (used to encrypt symmetric session keys):
- - RSA
-
-Digest Algorithms:
- - MD5
- - SHA1
- - SHA256
- - SHA512
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The various algorithms are exposed via an entirely re-usable,
-OpenSSL-agnostic API (ie, it is possible to drop in a new encryption
-backend). The Volume format is DER-encoded ASN.1, modeled after the
-Cryptographic Message Syntax from RFC 3852. Unfortunately, using CMS
-directly was not possible, as at the time of coding a free software
-streaming DER decoder/encoder was not available.
-
-
-\section{Decrypting with a Master Key}
-\index[general]{Decrypting with a Master Key}
-
-It is preferable to retain a secure, non-encrypted copy of the
-client's own encryption keypair. However, should you lose the
-client's keypair, recovery with the master keypair is possible.
-
-You must:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Concatenate the master private and public key into a single
- keypair file, ie:
- cat master.key master.cert \gt master.keypair
-
-\item Set the PKI Keypair statement in your bacula configuration file:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- PKI Keypair = master.keypair
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\item Start the restore. The master keypair will be used to decrypt
- the file data.
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-
-\section{Generating Private/Public Encryption Keys}
-\index[general]{Generating Private/Public Encryption Keypairs}
-
-Generate a Master Key Pair with:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- openssl genrsa -out master.key 2048
- openssl req -new -key master.key -x509 -out master.cert
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Generate a File Daemon Key Pair for each FD:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- openssl genrsa -out fd-example.key 2048
- openssl req -new -key fd-example.key -x509 -out fd-example.cert
- cat fd-example.key fd-example.cert >fd-example.pem
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Note, there seems to be a lot of confusion around the file extensions given
-to these keys. For example, a .pem file can contain all the following:
-private keys (RSA and DSA), public keys (RSA and DSA) and (x509) certificates.
-It is the default format for OpenSSL. It stores data Base64 encoded DER format,
-surrounded by ASCII headers, so is suitable for text mode transfers between
-systems. A .pem file may contain any number of keys either public or
-private. We use it in cases where there is both a public and a private
-key.
-
-Typically, above we have used the .cert extension to refer to X509
-certificate encoding that contains only a single public key.
-
-
-\section{Example Data Encryption Configuration}
-\index[general]{Example!File Daemon Configuration File}
-\index[general]{Example!Data Encryption Configuration File}
-\index[general]{Example Data Encryption Configuration}
-
-{\bf bacula-fd.conf}
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileDaemon {
- Name = example-fd
- FDport = 9102 # where we listen for the director
- WorkingDirectory = /var/bacula/working
- Pid Directory = /var/run
- Maximum Concurrent Jobs = 20
-
- PKI Signatures = Yes # Enable Data Signing
- PKI Encryption = Yes # Enable Data Encryption
- PKI Keypair = "/etc/bacula/fd-example.pem" # Public and Private Keys
- PKI Master Key = "/etc/bacula/master.cert" # ONLY the Public Key
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Basic Volume Management}
-\label{DiskChapter}
-\index[general]{Basic Volume Management}
-\index[general]{Management!Basic Volume}
-\index[general]{Disk Volumes}
-
-This chapter presents most all the features needed to do Volume management.
-Most of the concepts apply equally well to both tape and disk Volumes.
-However, the chapter was originally written to explain backing up to disk, so
-you will see it is slanted in that direction, but all the directives
-presented here apply equally well whether your volume is disk or tape.
-
-If you have a lot of hard disk storage or you absolutely must have your
-backups run within a small time window, you may want to direct Bacula to
-backup to disk Volumes rather than tape Volumes. This chapter is intended to
-give you some of the options that are available to you so that you can manage
-either disk or tape volumes.
-
-\label{Concepts}
-\section{Key Concepts and Resource Records}
-\index[general]{Key Concepts and Resource Records }
-\index[general]{Records!Key Concepts and Resource }
-
-Getting Bacula to write to disk rather than tape in the simplest case is
-rather easy. In the Storage daemon's configuration file, you simply define an
-{\bf Archive Device} to be a directory. For example, if you want your disk
-backups to go into the directory {\bf /home/bacula/backups}, you could use the
-following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Device {
- Name = FileBackup
- Media Type = File
- Archive Device = /home/bacula/backups
- Random Access = Yes;
- AutomaticMount = yes;
- RemovableMedia = no;
- AlwaysOpen = no;
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Assuming you have the appropriate {\bf Storage} resource in your Director's
-configuration file that references the above Device resource,
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Storage {
- Name = FileStorage
- Address = ...
- Password = ...
- Device = FileBackup
- Media Type = File
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Bacula will then write the archive to the file {\bf
-/home/bacula/backups/\lt{}volume-name\gt{}} where \lt{}volume-name\gt{} is the
-volume name of a Volume defined in the Pool. For example, if you have labeled
-a Volume named {\bf Vol001}, Bacula will write to the file {\bf
-/home/bacula/backups/Vol001}. Although you can later move the archive file to
-another directory, you should not rename it or it will become unreadable by
-Bacula. This is because each archive has the filename as part of the internal
-label, and the internal label must agree with the system filename before
-Bacula will use it.
-
-Although this is quite simple, there are a number of problems. The first is
-that unless you specify otherwise, Bacula will always write to the same volume
-until you run out of disk space. This problem is addressed below.
-
-In addition, if you want to use concurrent jobs that write to several
-different volumes at the same time, you will need to understand a number
-of other details. An example of such a configuration is given
-at the end of this chapter under \ilink{Concurrent Disk
-Jobs}{ConcurrentDiskJobs}.
-
-\subsection{Pool Options to Limit the Volume Usage}
-\index[general]{Usage!Pool Options to Limit the Volume }
-\index[general]{Pool Options to Limit the Volume Usage }
-
-Some of the options you have, all of which are specified in the Pool record,
-are:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item To write each Volume only once (i.e. one Job per Volume or file in this
- case), use:
-
-{\bf UseVolumeOnce = yes}.
-
-\item To write nnn Jobs to each Volume, use:
-
- {\bf Maximum Volume Jobs = nnn}.
-
-\item To limit the maximum size of each Volume, use:
-
- {\bf Maximum Volume Bytes = mmmm}.
-
- Note, if you use disk volumes, with all versions up to and including
- 1.39.28, you should probably limit the Volume size to some reasonable
- value such as say 5GB. This is because during a restore, Bacula is
- currently unable to seek to the proper place in a disk volume to restore
- a file, which means that it must read all records up to where the
- restore begins. If your Volumes are 50GB, reading half or more of the
- volume could take quite a bit of time. Also, if you ever have a partial
- hard disk failure, you are more likely to be able to recover more data
- if they are in smaller Volumes.
-
-\item To limit the use time (i.e. write the Volume for a maximum of five days),
- use:
-
-{\bf Volume Use Duration = ttt}.
-\end{itemize}
-
-Note that although you probably would not want to limit the number of bytes on
-a tape as you would on a disk Volume, the other options can be very useful in
-limiting the time Bacula will use a particular Volume (be it tape or disk).
-For example, the above directives can allow you to ensure that you rotate
-through a set of daily Volumes if you wish.
-
-As mentioned above, each of those directives is specified in the Pool or
-Pools that you use for your Volumes. In the case of {\bf Maximum Volume Job},
-{\bf Maximum Volume Bytes}, and {\bf Volume Use Duration}, you can actually
-specify the desired value on a Volume by Volume basis. The value specified in
-the Pool record becomes the default when labeling new Volumes. Once a Volume
-has been created, it gets its own copy of the Pool defaults, and subsequently
-changing the Pool will have no effect on existing Volumes. You can either
-manually change the Volume values, or refresh them from the Pool defaults using
-the {\bf update volume} command in the Console. As an example
-of the use of one of the above, suppose your Pool resource contains:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Pool {
- Name = File
- Pool Type = Backup
- Volume Use Duration = 23h
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-then if you run a backup once a day (every 24 hours), Bacula will use a new
-Volume for each backup, because each Volume it writes can only be used for 23 hours
-after the first write. Note, setting the use duration to 23 hours is not a very
-good solution for tapes unless you have someone on-site during the weekends,
-because Bacula will want a new Volume and no one will be present to mount it,
-so no weekend backups will be done until Monday morning.
-
-\label{AutomaticLabeling}
-\subsection{Automatic Volume Labeling}
-\index[general]{Automatic Volume Labeling }
-\index[general]{Labeling!Automatic Volume }
-
-Use of the above records brings up another problem -- that of labeling your
-Volumes. For automated disk backup, you can either manually label each of your
-Volumes, or you can have Bacula automatically label new Volumes when they are
-needed. While, the automatic Volume labeling in version 1.30 and prior is a
-bit simplistic, but it does allow for automation, the features added in
-version 1.31 permit automatic creation of a wide variety of labels including
-information from environment variables and special Bacula Counter variables.
-In version 1.37 and later, it is probably much better to use Python scripting
-and the NewVolume event since generating Volume labels in a Python script is
-much easier than trying to figure out Counter variables. See the
-\ilink{Python Scripting}{PythonChapter} chapter of this manual for more
-details.
-
-Please note that automatic Volume labeling can also be used with tapes, but
-it is not nearly so practical since the tapes must be pre-mounted. This
-requires some user interaction. Automatic labeling from templates does NOT
-work with autochangers since Bacula will not access unknown slots. There
-are several methods of labeling all volumes in an autochanger magazine.
-For more information on this, please see the \ilink{
-Autochanger}{AutochangersChapter} chapter of this manual.
-
-Automatic Volume labeling is enabled by making a change to both the Pool
-resource (Director) and to the Device resource (Storage daemon) shown above.
-In the case of the Pool resource, you must provide Bacula with a label format
-that it will use to create new names. In the simplest form, the label format
-is simply the Volume name, to which Bacula will append a four digit number.
-This number starts at 0001 and is incremented for each Volume the catalog
-contains. Thus if you modify your Pool resource to be:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Pool {
- Name = File
- Pool Type = Backup
- Volume Use Duration = 23h
- LabelFormat = "Vol"
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Bacula will create Volume names Vol0001, Vol0002, and so on when new Volumes
-are needed. Much more complex and elaborate labels can be created using
-variable expansion defined in the
-\ilink{Variable Expansion}{VarsChapter} chapter of this manual.
-
-The second change that is necessary to make automatic labeling work is to give
-the Storage daemon permission to automatically label Volumes. Do so by adding
-{\bf LabelMedia = yes} to the Device resource as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Device {
- Name = File
- Media Type = File
- Archive Device = /home/bacula/backups
- Random Access = Yes;
- AutomaticMount = yes;
- RemovableMedia = no;
- AlwaysOpen = no;
- LabelMedia = yes
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-You can find more details of the {\bf Label Format} Pool record in
-\ilink{Label Format}{Label} description of the Pool resource
-records.
-
-\label{Recycling1}
-\subsection{Restricting the Number of Volumes and Recycling}
-\index[general]{Recycling!Restricting the Number of Volumes and Recycling}
-\index[general]{Restricting the Number of Volumes and Recycling}
-
-Automatic labeling discussed above brings up the problem of Volume management.
-With the above scheme, a new Volume will be created every day. If you have not
-specified Retention periods, your Catalog will continue to fill keeping track
-of all the files Bacula has backed up, and this procedure will create one new
-archive file (Volume) every day.
-
-The tools Bacula gives you to help automatically manage these problems are the
-following:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Catalog file record retention periods, the
- \ilink{File Retention = ttt}{FileRetention} record in the Client
- resource.
-\item Catalog job record retention periods, the
- \ilink{Job Retention = ttt}{JobRetention} record in the Client
- resource.
-\item The
- \ilink{ AutoPrune = yes}{AutoPrune} record in the Client resource
- to permit application of the above two retention periods.
-\item The
- \ilink{ Volume Retention = ttt}{VolRetention} record in the Pool
- resource.
-\item The
- \ilink{ AutoPrune = yes}{PoolAutoPrune} record in the Pool
- resource to permit application of the Volume retention period.
-\item The
- \ilink{ Recycle = yes}{PoolRecycle} record in the Pool resource
- to permit automatic recycling of Volumes whose Volume retention period has
- expired.
-\item The
- \ilink{ Recycle Oldest Volume = yes}{RecycleOldest} record in the
- Pool resource tells Bacula to Prune the oldest volume in the Pool, and if all
- files were pruned to recycle this volume and use it.
-\item The
- \ilink{ Recycle Current Volume = yes}{RecycleCurrent} record in
- the Pool resource tells Bacula to Prune the currently mounted volume in the
- Pool, and if all files were pruned to recycle this volume and use it.
-\item The
- \ilink{ Purge Oldest Volume = yes}{PurgeOldest} record in the
- Pool resource permits a forced recycling of the oldest Volume when a new one
- is needed. {\bf N.B. This record ignores retention periods! We highly
- recommend not to use this record, but instead use Recycle Oldest Volume}
-\item The
- \ilink{ Maximum Volumes = nnn}{MaxVolumes} record in the Pool
- resource to limit the number of Volumes that can be created.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-The first three records (File Retention, Job Retention, and AutoPrune)
-determine the amount of time that Job and File records will remain in your
-Catalog, and they are discussed in detail in the
-\ilink{Automatic Volume Recycling}{RecyclingChapter} chapter of
-this manual.
-
-Volume Retention, AutoPrune, and Recycle determine how long Bacula will keep
-your Volumes before reusing them, and they are also discussed in detail in the
-\ilink{Automatic Volume Recycling}{RecyclingChapter} chapter of
-this manual.
-
-The Maximum Volumes record can also be used in conjunction with the Volume
-Retention period to limit the total number of archive Volumes (files) that
-Bacula will create. By setting an appropriate Volume Retention period, a
-Volume will be purged just before it is needed and thus Bacula can cycle
-through a fixed set of Volumes. Cycling through a fixed set of Volumes can
-also be done by setting {\bf Recycle Oldest Volume = yes} or {\bf Recycle
-Current Volume = yes}. In this case, when Bacula needs a new Volume, it will
-prune the specified volume.
-
-\label{ConcurrentDiskJobs}
-\section{Concurrent Disk Jobs}
-\index[general]{Concurrent Disk Jobs}
-Above, we discussed how you could have a single device named {\bf
-FileBackup} that writes to volumes in {\bf /home/bacula/backups}.
-You can, in fact, run multiple concurrent jobs using the
-Storage definition given with this example, and all the jobs will
-simultaneously write into the Volume that is being written.
-
-Now suppose you want to use multiple Pools, which means multiple
-Volumes, or suppose you want each client to have its own Volume
-and perhaps its own directory such as {\bf /home/bacula/client1}
-and {\bf /home/bacula/client2} ... With the single Storage and Device
-definition above, neither of these two is possible. Why? Because
-Bacula disk storage follows the same rules as tape devices. Only
-one Volume can be mounted on any Device at any time. If you want
-to simultaneously write multiple Volumes, you will need multiple
-Device resources in your bacula-sd.conf file, and thus multiple
-Storage resources in your bacula-dir.conf.
-
-OK, so now you should understand that you need multiple Device definitions
-in the case of different directories or different Pools, but you also
-need to know that the catalog data that Bacula keeps contains only
-the Media Type and not the specific storage device. This permits a tape
-for example to be re-read on any compatible tape drive. The compatibility
-being determined by the Media Type. The same applies to disk storage.
-Since a volume that is written by a Device in say directory {\bf
-/home/bacula/backups} cannot be read by a Device with an Archive Device
-definition of {\bf /home/bacula/client1}, you will not be able to
-restore all your files if you give both those devices
-{\bf Media Type = File}. During the restore, Bacula will simply choose
-the first available device, which may not be the correct one. If this
-is confusing, just remember that the Directory has only the Media Type
-and the Volume name. It does not know the {\bf Archive Device} (or the
-full path) that is specified in the Storage daemon. Thus you must
-explicitly tie your Volumes to the correct Device by using the Media Type.
-
-The example shown below shows a case where there are two clients, each
-using its own Pool and storing their Volumes in different directories.
-
-
-\label{Example2}
-\section{An Example}
-\index[general]{Example }
-
-The following example is not very practical, but can be used to demonstrate
-the proof of concept in a relatively short period of time. The example
-consists of a two clients that are backed up to a set of 12 archive files
-(Volumes) for each client into different directories on the Storage
-machine. Each Volume is used (written) only once, and there are four Full
-saves done every hour (so the whole thing cycles around after three hours).
-
-What is key here is that each physical device on the Storage daemon
-has a different Media Type. This allows the Director to choose the
-correct device for restores ...
-
-The Director's configuration file is as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Director {
- Name = my-dir
- QueryFile = "~/bacula/bin/query.sql"
- PidDirectory = "~/bacula/working"
- WorkingDirectory = "~/bacula/working"
- Password = dir_password
-}
-Schedule {
- Name = "FourPerHour"
- Run = Level=Full hourly at 0:05
- Run = Level=Full hourly at 0:20
- Run = Level=Full hourly at 0:35
- Run = Level=Full hourly at 0:50
-}
-Job {
- Name = "RecycleExample"
- Type = Backup
- Level = Full
- Client = Rufus
- FileSet= "Example FileSet"
- Messages = Standard
- Storage = FileStorage
- Pool = Recycle
- Schedule = FourPerHour
-}
-
-Job {
- Name = "RecycleExample2"
- Type = Backup
- Level = Full
- Client = Roxie
- FileSet= "Example FileSet"
- Messages = Standard
- Storage = FileStorage1
- Pool = Recycle1
- Schedule = FourPerHour
-}
-
-FileSet {
- Name = "Example FileSet"
- Include {
- Options {
- compression=GZIP
- signature=SHA1
- }
- File = /home/kern/bacula/bin
- }
-}
-
-Client {
- Name = Rufus
- Address = rufus
- Catalog = BackupDB
- Password = client_password
-}
-
-Client {
- Name = Roxie
- Address = roxie
- Catalog = BackupDB
- Password = client1_password
-}
-
-Storage {
- Name = FileStorage
- Address = rufus
- Password = local_storage_password
- Device = RecycleDir
- Media Type = File
-}
-
-Storage {
- Name = FileStorage1
- Address = rufus
- Password = local_storage_password
- Device = RecycleDir1
- Media Type = File1
-}
-
-Catalog {
- Name = BackupDB
- dbname = bacula; user = bacula; password = ""
-}
-Messages {
- Name = Standard
- ...
-}
-Pool {
- Name = Recycle
- Use Volume Once = yes
- Pool Type = Backup
- LabelFormat = "Recycle-"
- AutoPrune = yes
- VolumeRetention = 2h
- Maximum Volumes = 12
- Recycle = yes
-}
-
-Pool {
- Name = Recycle1
- Use Volume Once = yes
- Pool Type = Backup
- LabelFormat = "Recycle1-"
- AutoPrune = yes
- VolumeRetention = 2h
- Maximum Volumes = 12
- Recycle = yes
-}
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-and the Storage daemon's configuration file is:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Storage {
- Name = my-sd
- WorkingDirectory = "~/bacula/working"
- Pid Directory = "~/bacula/working"
- MaximumConcurrentJobs = 10
-}
-Director {
- Name = my-dir
- Password = local_storage_password
-}
-Device {
- Name = RecycleDir
- Media Type = File
- Archive Device = /home/bacula/backups
- LabelMedia = yes;
- Random Access = Yes;
- AutomaticMount = yes;
- RemovableMedia = no;
- AlwaysOpen = no;
-}
-
-Device {
- Name = RecycleDir1
- Media Type = File1
- Archive Device = /home/bacula/backups1
- LabelMedia = yes;
- Random Access = Yes;
- AutomaticMount = yes;
- RemovableMedia = no;
- AlwaysOpen = no;
-}
-
-Messages {
- Name = Standard
- director = my-dir = all
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-With a little bit of work, you can change the above example into a weekly or
-monthly cycle (take care about the amount of archive disk space used).
-
-\label{MultipleDisks}
-\section{Backing up to Multiple Disks}
-\index[general]{Disks!Backing up to Multiple }
-\index[general]{Backing up to Multiple Disks }
-
-Bacula can, of course, use multiple disks, but in general, each disk must be a
-separate Device specification in the Storage daemon's conf file, and you must
-then select what clients to backup to each disk. You will also want to
-give each Device specification a different Media Type so that during
-a restore, Bacula will be able to find the appropriate drive.
-
-The situation is a bit more complicated if you want to treat two different
-physical disk drives (or partitions) logically as a single drive, which
-Bacula does not directly support. However, it is possible to back up your
-data to multiple disks as if they were a single drive by linking the
-Volumes from the first disk to the second disk.
-
-For example, assume that you have two disks named {\bf /disk1} and {\bf
-/disk2}. If you then create a standard Storage daemon Device resource for
-backing up to the first disk, it will look like the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Device {
- Name = client1
- Media Type = File
- Archive Device = /disk1
- LabelMedia = yes;
- Random Access = Yes;
- AutomaticMount = yes;
- RemovableMedia = no;
- AlwaysOpen = no;
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Since there is no way to get the above Device resource to reference both {\bf
-/disk1} and {\bf /disk2} we do it by pre-creating Volumes on /disk2 with the
-following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-ln -s /disk2/Disk2-vol001 /disk1/Disk2-vol001
-ln -s /disk2/Disk2-vol002 /disk1/Disk2-vol002
-ln -s /disk2/Disk2-vol003 /disk1/Disk2-vol003
-...
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-At this point, you can label the Volumes as Volume {\bf Disk2-vol001}, {\bf
-Disk2-vol002}, ... and Bacula will use them as if they were on /disk1 but
-actually write the data to /disk2. The only minor inconvenience with this
-method is that you must explicitly name the disks and cannot use automatic
-labeling unless you arrange to have the labels exactly match the links you
-have created.
-
-An important thing to know is that Bacula treats disks like tape drives
-as much as it can. This means that you can only have a single Volume
-mounted at one time on a disk as defined in your Device resource in
-the Storage daemon's conf file. You can have multiple concurrent
-jobs running that all write to the one Volume that is being used, but
-if you want to have multiple concurrent jobs that are writing to
-separate disks drives (or partitions), you will need to define
-separate Device resources for each one, exactly as you would do for
-two different tape drives. There is one fundamental difference, however.
-The Volumes that you create on the two drives cannot be easily exchanged
-as they can for a tape drive, because they are physically resident (already
-mounted in a sense) on the particular drive. As a consequence, you will
-probably want to give them different Media Types so that Bacula can
-distinguish what Device resource to use during a restore.
-An example would be the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Device {
- Name = Disk1
- Media Type = File1
- Archive Device = /disk1
- LabelMedia = yes;
- Random Access = Yes;
- AutomaticMount = yes;
- RemovableMedia = no;
- AlwaysOpen = no;
-}
-
-Device {
- Name = Disk2
- Media Type = File2
- Archive Device = /disk2
- LabelMedia = yes;
- Random Access = Yes;
- AutomaticMount = yes;
- RemovableMedia = no;
- AlwaysOpen = no;
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-With the above device definitions, you can run two concurrent
-jobs each writing at the same time, one to {\bf /disk1} and the
-other to {\bf /disk2}. The fact that you have given them different
-Media Types will allow Bacula to quickly choose the correct
-Storage resource in the Director when doing a restore.
-
-\label{MultipleClients}
-\section{Considerations for Multiple Clients}
-\index[general]{Clients!Considerations for Multiple }
-\index[general]{Multiple Clients}
-
-If we take the above example and add a second Client, here are a few
-considerations:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Although the second client can write to the same set of Volumes, you
- will probably want to write to a different set.
-\item You can write to a different set of Volumes by defining a second Pool,
- which has a different name and a different {\bf LabelFormat}.
-\item If you wish the Volumes for the second client to go into a different
- directory (perhaps even on a different filesystem to spread the load), you
- would do so by defining a second Device resource in the Storage daemon. The
-{\bf Name} must be different, and the {\bf Archive Device} could be
-different. To ensure that Volumes are never mixed from one pool to another,
-you might also define a different MediaType (e.g. {\bf File1}).
-\end{itemize}
-
-In this example, we have two clients, each with a different Pool and a
-different number of archive files retained. They also write to different
-directories with different Volume labeling.
-
-The Director's configuration file is as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Director {
- Name = my-dir
- QueryFile = "~/bacula/bin/query.sql"
- PidDirectory = "~/bacula/working"
- WorkingDirectory = "~/bacula/working"
- Password = dir_password
-}
-# Basic weekly schedule
-Schedule {
- Name = "WeeklySchedule"
- Run = Level=Full fri at 1:30
- Run = Level=Incremental sat-thu at 1:30
-}
-FileSet {
- Name = "Example FileSet"
- Include {
- Options {
- compression=GZIP
- signature=SHA1
- }
- File = /home/kern/bacula/bin
- }
-}
-Job {
- Name = "Backup-client1"
- Type = Backup
- Level = Full
- Client = client1
- FileSet= "Example FileSet"
- Messages = Standard
- Storage = File1
- Pool = client1
- Schedule = "WeeklySchedule"
-}
-Job {
- Name = "Backup-client2"
- Type = Backup
- Level = Full
- Client = client2
- FileSet= "Example FileSet"
- Messages = Standard
- Storage = File2
- Pool = client2
- Schedule = "WeeklySchedule"
-}
-Client {
- Name = client1
- Address = client1
- Catalog = BackupDB
- Password = client1_password
- File Retention = 7d
-}
-Client {
- Name = client2
- Address = client2
- Catalog = BackupDB
- Password = client2_password
-}
-# Two Storage definitions with different Media Types
-# permits different directories
-Storage {
- Name = File1
- Address = rufus
- Password = local_storage_password
- Device = client1
- Media Type = File1
-}
-Storage {
- Name = File2
- Address = rufus
- Password = local_storage_password
- Device = client2
- Media Type = File2
-}
-Catalog {
- Name = BackupDB
- dbname = bacula; user = bacula; password = ""
-}
-Messages {
- Name = Standard
- ...
-}
-# Two pools permits different cycling periods and Volume names
-# Cycle through 15 Volumes (two weeks)
-Pool {
- Name = client1
- Use Volume Once = yes
- Pool Type = Backup
- LabelFormat = "Client1-"
- AutoPrune = yes
- VolumeRetention = 13d
- Maximum Volumes = 15
- Recycle = yes
-}
-# Cycle through 8 Volumes (1 week)
-Pool {
- Name = client2
- Use Volume Once = yes
- Pool Type = Backup
- LabelFormat = "Client2-"
- AutoPrune = yes
- VolumeRetention = 6d
- Maximum Volumes = 8
- Recycle = yes
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-and the Storage daemon's configuration file is:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Storage {
- Name = my-sd
- WorkingDirectory = "~/bacula/working"
- Pid Directory = "~/bacula/working"
- MaximumConcurrentJobs = 10
-}
-Director {
- Name = my-dir
- Password = local_storage_password
-}
-# Archive directory for Client1
-Device {
- Name = client1
- Media Type = File1
- Archive Device = /home/bacula/client1
- LabelMedia = yes;
- Random Access = Yes;
- AutomaticMount = yes;
- RemovableMedia = no;
- AlwaysOpen = no;
-}
-# Archive directory for Client2
-Device {
- Name = client2
- Media Type = File2
- Archive Device = /home/bacula/client2
- LabelMedia = yes;
- Random Access = Yes;
- AutomaticMount = yes;
- RemovableMedia = no;
- AlwaysOpen = no;
-}
-Messages {
- Name = Standard
- director = my-dir = all
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
+++ /dev/null
-#
-# Avoid that @VERSION@ and @DATE@ are changed by configure
-# This file is sourced by update_version
-#
-echo "s%@VERSION@%${VERSION}%g" >${out}
-echo "s%@DATE@%${DATE}%g" >>${out}
+++ /dev/null
-% TODO: maybe get rid of centering
-
-\chapter{GNU Free Documentation License}
-\index[general]{GNU Free Documentation License}
-\index[general]{License!GNU Free Documentation}
-
-\label{label_fdl}
-
- \begin{center}
-
- Version 1.2, November 2002
-
-
- Copyright \copyright 2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
- \bigskip
-
- 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
-
- \bigskip
-
- Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
- of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
-\end{center}
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\bf\large Preamble}
-\end{center}
-
-The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
-functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
-assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
-with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.
-Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way
-to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible
-for modifications made by others.
-
-This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
-works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It
-complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
-license designed for free software.
-
-We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free
-software, because free software needs free documentation: a free
-program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the
-software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals;
-it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or
-whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License
-principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS}
-\end{center}
-
-This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that
-contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be
-distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a
-world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that
-work under the conditions stated herein. The \textbf{"Document"}, below,
-refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a
-licensee, and is addressed as \textbf{"you"}. You accept the license if you
-copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission
-under copyright law.
-
-A \textbf{"Modified Version"} of the Document means any work containing the
-Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
-modifications and/or translated into another language.
-
-A \textbf{"Secondary Section"} is a named appendix or a front-matter section of
-the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
-publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject
-(or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly
-within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a
-textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any
-mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical
-connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal,
-commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding
-them.
-
-The \textbf{"Invariant Sections"} are certain Secondary Sections whose titles
-are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice
-that says that the Document is released under this License. If a
-section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not
-allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero
-Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant
-Sections then there are none.
-
-The \textbf{"Cover Texts"} are certain short passages of text that are listed,
-as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that
-the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may
-be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
-
-A \textbf{"Transparent"} copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
-represented in a format whose specification is available to the
-general public, that is suitable for revising the document
-straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of
-pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available
-drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or
-for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input
-to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file
-format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart
-or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent.
-An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount
-of text. A copy that is not "Transparent" is called \textbf{"Opaque"}.
-
-Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
-ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML
-or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple
-HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of
-transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats
-include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by
-proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or
-processing tools are not generally available, and the
-machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
-processors for output purposes only.
-
-The \textbf{"Title Page"} means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
-plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material
-this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in
-formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title Page" means
-the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title,
-preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
-
-A section \textbf{"Entitled XYZ"} means a named subunit of the Document whose
-title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following
-text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a
-specific section name mentioned below, such as \textbf{"Acknowledgements"},
-\textbf{"Dedications"}, \textbf{"Endorsements"}, or \textbf{"History"}.)
-To \textbf{"Preserve the Title"}
-of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a
-section "Entitled XYZ" according to this definition.
-
-The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which
-states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty
-Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this
-License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
-implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has
-no effect on the meaning of this License.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 2. VERBATIM COPYING}
-\end{center}
-
-You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
-commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
-copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies
-to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other
-conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use
-technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further
-copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept
-compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough
-number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
-
-You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and
-you may publicly display copies.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY}
-\end{center}
-
-
-If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have
-printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the
-Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the
-copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover
-Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on
-the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify
-you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present
-the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and
-visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition.
-Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve
-the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated
-as verbatim copying in other respects.
-
-If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
-legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
-reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent
-pages.
-
-If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering
-more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent
-copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy
-a computer-network location from which the general network-using
-public has access to download using public-standard network protocols
-a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material.
-If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps,
-when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure
-that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
-location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an
-Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that
-edition to the public.
-
-It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the
-Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give
-them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 4. MODIFICATIONS}
-\end{center}
-
-You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under
-the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
-the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
-Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
-and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy
-of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item[A.]
- Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct
- from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions
- (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section
- of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version
- if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
-
-\item[B.]
- List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities
- responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified
- Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the
- Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five),
- unless they release you from this requirement.
-
-\item[C.]
- State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
- Modified Version, as the publisher.
-
-\item[D.]
- Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
-
-\item[E.]
- Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
- adjacent to the other copyright notices.
-
-\item[F.]
- Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice
- giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the
- terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
-
-\item[G.]
- Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections
- and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
-
-\item[H.]
- Include an unaltered copy of this License.
-
-\item[I.]
- Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title, and add
- to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
- publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If
- there is no section Entitled "History" in the Document, create one
- stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
- given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
- Version as stated in the previous sentence.
-
-\item[J.]
- Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
- public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
- the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
- it was based on. These may be placed in the "History" section.
- You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
- least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
- publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
-
-\item[K.]
- For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
- Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all
- the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
- and/or dedications given therein.
-
-\item[L.]
- Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
- unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers
- or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
-
-\item[M.]
- Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section
- may not be included in the Modified Version.
-
-\item[N.]
- Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled "Endorsements"
- or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
-
-\item[O.]
- Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
-\end{itemize}
-
-If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
-appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material
-copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all
-of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the
-list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice.
-These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
-
-You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
-nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
-parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
-been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a
-standard.
-
-You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a
-passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list
-of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of
-Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
-through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already
-includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or
-by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of,
-you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit
-permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
-
-The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License
-give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or
-imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS}
-\end{center}
-
-
-You may combine the Document with other documents released under this
-License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified
-versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the
-Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
-list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its
-license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
-
-The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
-multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
-copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but
-different contents, make the title of each such section unique by
-adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
-author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number.
-Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of
-Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
-
-In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled "History"
-in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled
-"History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled "Acknowledgements",
-and any sections Entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections
-Entitled "Endorsements".
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS}
-\end{center}
-
-You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents
-released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this
-License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in
-the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for
-verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
-
-You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute
-it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this
-License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all
-other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS}
-\end{center}
-
-
-A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate
-and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or
-distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the copyright
-resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights
-of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit.
-When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not
-apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves
-derivative works of the Document.
-
-If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
-copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of
-the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on
-covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
-electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form.
-Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole
-aggregate.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 8. TRANSLATION}
-\end{center}
-
-
-Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
-distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4.
-Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
-permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
-translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
-original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
-translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
-Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include
-the original English version of this License and the original versions
-of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between
-the translation and the original version of this License or a notice
-or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
-
-If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
-"Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to Preserve
-its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual
-title.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 9. TERMINATION}
-\end{center}
-
-
-You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except
-as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to
-copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will
-automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,
-parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
-License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
-parties remain in full compliance.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE}
-\end{center}
-
-
-The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions
-of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new
-versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
-differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See
-http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
-
-Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number.
-If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this
-License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of
-following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or
-of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
-Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version
-number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not
-as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.
-
-
-\begin{center}
-{\Large\bf ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents}
-% TODO: this is too long for table of contents
-\end{center}
-
-To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
-the License in the document and put the following copyright and
-license notices just after the title page:
-
-\bigskip
-\begin{quote}
- Copyright \copyright YEAR YOUR NAME.
- Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
- under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
- or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
- with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
- A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
- Free Documentation License".
-\end{quote}
-\bigskip
-
-If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts,
-replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
-
-\bigskip
-\begin{quote}
- with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
- Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
-\end{quote}
-\bigskip
-
-If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
-combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
-situation.
-
-If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
-recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
-free software license, such as the GNU General Public License,
-to permit their use in free software.
-
-%---------------------------------------------------------------------
+++ /dev/null
-#!/usr/bin/perl -w
-# Fixes various things within tex files.
-
-use strict;
-
-my %args;
-
-
-sub get_includes {
- # Get a list of include files from the top-level tex file.
- my (@list,$file);
-
- foreach my $filename (@_) {
- $filename or next;
- # Start with the top-level latex file so it gets checked too.
- push (@list,$filename);
-
- # Get a list of all the html files in the directory.
- open IF,"<$filename" or die "Cannot open input file $filename";
- while (<IF>) {
- chomp;
- push @list,"$1.tex" if (/\\include\{(.*?)\}/);
- }
-
- close IF;
- }
- return @list;
-}
-
-sub convert_files {
- my (@files) = @_;
- my ($linecnt,$filedata,$output,$itemcnt,$indentcnt,$cnt);
-
- $cnt = 0;
- foreach my $file (@files) {
- # Open the file and load the whole thing into $filedata. A bit wasteful but
- # easier to deal with, and we don't have a problem with speed here.
- $filedata = "";
- open IF,"<$file" or die "Cannot open input file $file";
- while (<IF>) {
- $filedata .= $_;
- }
- close IF;
-
- # We look for a line that starts with \item, and indent the two next lines (if not blank)
- # by three spaces.
- my $linecnt = 3;
- $indentcnt = 0;
- $output = "";
- # Process a line at a time.
- foreach (split(/\n/,$filedata)) {
- $_ .= "\n"; # Put back the return.
- # If this line is less than the third line past the \item command,
- # and the line isn't blank and doesn't start with whitespace
- # add three spaces to the start of the line. Keep track of the number
- # of lines changed.
- if ($linecnt < 3 and !/^\\item/) {
- if (/^[^\n\s]/) {
- $output .= " " . $_;
- $indentcnt++;
- } else {
- $output .= $_;
- }
- $linecnt++;
- } else {
- $linecnt = 3;
- $output .= $_;
- }
- /^\\item / and $linecnt = 1;
- }
-
-
- # This is an item line. We need to process it too. If inside a \begin{description} environment, convert
- # \item {\bf xxx} to \item [xxx] or \item [{xxx}] (if xxx contains '[' or ']'.
- $itemcnt = 0;
- $filedata = $output;
- $output = "";
- my ($before,$descrip,$this,$between);
-
- # Find any \begin{description} environment
- while ($filedata =~ /(\\begin[\s\n]*\{[\s\n]*description[\s\n]*\})(.*?)(\\end[\s\n]*\{[\s\n]*description[\s\n]*\})/s) {
- $output .= $` . $1;
- $filedata = $3 . $';
- $descrip = $2;
-
- # Search for \item {\bf xxx}
- while ($descrip =~ /\\item[\s\n]*\{[\s\n]*\\bf[\s\n]*/s) {
- $descrip = $';
- $output .= $`;
- ($between,$descrip) = find_matching_brace($descrip);
- if (!$descrip) {
- $linecnt = $output =~ tr/\n/\n/;
- print STDERR "Missing matching curly brace at line $linecnt in $file\n" if (!$descrip);
- }
-
- # Now do the replacement.
- $between = '{' . $between . '}' if ($between =~ /\[|\]/);
- $output .= "\\item \[$between\]";
- $itemcnt++;
- }
- $output .= $descrip;
- }
- $output .= $filedata;
-
- # If any hyphens or \item commnads were converted, save the file.
- if ($indentcnt or $itemcnt) {
- open OF,">$file" or die "Cannot open output file $file";
- print OF $output;
- close OF;
- print "$indentcnt indent", ($indentcnt == 1) ? "" : "s"," added in $file\n";
- print "$itemcnt item", ($itemcnt == 1) ? "" : "s"," Changed in $file\n";
- }
-
- $cnt += $indentcnt + $itemcnt;
- }
- return $cnt;
-}
-
-sub find_matching_brace {
- # Finds text up to the next matching brace. Assumes that the input text doesn't contain
- # the opening brace, but we want to find text up to a matching closing one.
- # Returns the text between the matching braces, followed by the rest of the text following
- # (which does not include the matching brace).
- #
- my $str = shift;
- my ($this,$temp);
- my $cnt = 1;
-
- while ($cnt) {
- # Ignore verbatim constructs involving curly braces, or if the character preceding
- # the curly brace is a backslash.
- if ($str =~ /\\verb\*?\{.*?\{|\\verb\*?\}.*?\}|\{|\}/s) {
- $this .= $`;
- $str = $';
- $temp = $&;
-
- if ((substr($this,-1,1) eq '\\') or
- $temp =~ /^\\verb/) {
- $this .= $temp;
- next;
- }
-
- $cnt += ($temp eq '{') ? 1 : -1;
- # If this isn't the matching curly brace ($cnt > 0), include the brace.
- $this .= $temp if ($cnt);
- } else {
- # No matching curly brace found.
- return ($this . $str,'');
- }
- }
- return ($this,$str);
-}
-
-sub check_arguments {
- # Checks command-line arguments for ones starting with -- puts them into
- # a hash called %args and removes them from @ARGV.
- my $args = shift;
- my $i;
-
- for ($i = 0; $i < $#ARGV; $i++) {
- $ARGV[$i] =~ /^\-+/ or next;
- $ARGV[$i] =~ s/^\-+//;
- $args{$ARGV[$i]} = "";
- delete ($ARGV[$i]);
-
- }
-}
-
-##################################################################
-# MAIN ####
-##################################################################
-
-my @includes;
-my $cnt;
-
-check_arguments(\%args);
-die "No Files given to Check\n" if ($#ARGV < 0);
-
-# Examine the file pointed to by the first argument to get a list of
-# includes to test.
-@includes = get_includes(@ARGV);
-
-$cnt = convert_files(@includes);
-print "No lines changed\n" unless $cnt;
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{What is Bacula?}
-\label{GeneralChapter}
-\index[general]{Bacula!What is }
-\index[general]{What is Bacula? }
-
-Bacula is a set of computer programs that permits the system
-administrator to manage backup, recovery, and verification of computer data
-across a network of computers of different kinds. Bacula can also run entirely
-upon a single computer and can backup to various types of media, including tape
-and disk.
-
-In technical terms, it is a
-network Client/Server based backup program. Bacula is relatively easy to use
-and efficient, while offering many advanced storage management features that
-make it easy to find and recover lost or damaged files. Due to its modular
-design, Bacula is scalable from small single computer systems to systems
-consisting of hundreds of computers located over a large network.
-
-\section{Who Needs Bacula?}
-\index[general]{Who Needs Bacula? }
-\index[general]{Bacula!Who Needs }
-
-If you are currently using a program such as tar, dump, or
-bru to backup your computer data, and you would like a network solution, more
-flexibility, or catalog services, Bacula will most likely provide the
-additional features you want. However, if you are new to Unix systems or do
-not have offsetting experience with a sophisticated backup package, the Bacula project does not
-recommend using Bacula as it is much more difficult to setup and use than
-tar or dump.
-
-If you want Bacula to behave like the above mentioned simple
-programs and write over any tape that you put in the drive, then you will find
-working with Bacula difficult. Bacula is designed to protect your data
-following the rules you specify, and this means reusing a tape only
-as the last resort. It is possible to "force" Bacula to write
-over any tape in the drive, but it is easier and more efficient to use a
-simpler program for that kind of operation.
-
-If you would like a backup program that can write
-to multiple volumes (i.e. is not limited by your tape drive capacity), Bacula
-can most likely fill your needs. In addition, quite a number of Bacula users
-report that Bacula is simpler to setup and use than other equivalent programs.
-
-If you are currently using a sophisticated commercial package such as Legato
-Networker. ARCserveIT, Arkeia, or PerfectBackup+, you may be interested in
-Bacula, which provides many of the same features and is free software
-available under the GNU Version 2 software license.
-
-\section{Bacula Components or Services}
-\index[general]{Bacula Components or Services }
-\index[general]{Services!Bacula Components or }
-
-Bacula is made up of the following five major components or services:
-Director, Console, File, Storage, and Monitor services.
-
-
-\addcontentsline{lof}{figure}{Bacula Applications}
-\includegraphics{\idir bacula-applications.eps}
-(thanks to Aristedes Maniatis for this graphic and the one below)
-% TODO: move the thanks to Credits section in preface
-
-\subsection*{Bacula Director}
- \label{DirDef}
- The Bacula Director service is the program that supervises
- all the backup, restore, verify and archive operations. The system
- administrator uses the Bacula Director to schedule backups and to
- recover files. For more details see the Director Services Daemon Design
- Document in the Bacula Developer's Guide. The Director runs as a daemon
- (or service) in the background.
-% TODO: tell reader where this Developer's Guide is at?
- \label{UADef}
-
-\subsection*{Bacula Console}
-
- The Bacula Console service is the program that allows the
- administrator or user to communicate with the Bacula Director
- Currently, the Bacula Console is available in three versions:
- text-based console interface, GNOME-based interface, and a
- wxWidgets graphical interface.
- The first and simplest is to run the Console program in a shell window
- (i.e. TTY interface). Most system administrators will find this
- completely adequate. The second version is a GNOME GUI interface that
- is far from complete, but quite functional as it has most the
- capabilities of the shell Console. The third version is a wxWidgets GUI
- with an interactive file restore. It also has most of the capabilities
- of the shell console, allows command completion with tabulation, and
- gives you instant help about the command you are typing. For more
- details see the \ilink{Bacula Console Design Document}{TheConsoleChapter}.
-
-\subsection*{Bacula File}
- \label{FDDef}
- The Bacula File service (also known as the Client program) is the software
- program that is installed on the machine to be backed up.
- It is specific to the
- operating system on which it runs and is responsible for providing the
- file attributes and data when requested by the Director. The File
- services are also responsible for the file system dependent part of
- restoring the file attributes and data during a recovery operation. For
- more details see the File Services Daemon Design Document in the Bacula
- Developer's Guide. This program runs as a daemon on the machine to be
- backed up.
- In addition to Unix/Linux File daemons, there is a Windows File daemon
- (normally distributed in binary format). The Windows File daemon runs
- on current Windows versions (NT, 2000, XP, 2003, and possibly Me and
- 98).
-% TODO: maybe do not list Windows here as that is listed elsewhere
-% TODO: remove "possibly"?
-% TODO: mention Vista?
-
-\subsection*{Bacula Storage}
- \label{SDDef}
- The Bacula Storage services consist of the software programs that
- perform the storage and recovery of the file attributes and data to the
- physical backup media or volumes. In other words, the Storage daemon is
- responsible for reading and writing your tapes (or other storage media,
- e.g. files). For more details see the Storage Services Daemon Design
- Document in the Bacula Developer's Guide. The Storage services runs as
- a daemon on the machine that has the backup device (usually a tape
- drive).
-% TODO: may switch e.g. to "for example" or "such as" as appropriate
-% TODO: is "usually" correct? Maybe "such as" instead?
-
-\subsection*{Catalog}
- \label{DBDefinition}
- The Catalog services are comprised of the software programs
- responsible for maintaining the file indexes and volume databases for
- all files backed up. The Catalog services permit the system
- administrator or user to quickly locate and restore any desired file.
- The Catalog services sets Bacula apart from simple backup programs like
- tar and bru, because the catalog maintains a record of all Volumes used,
- all Jobs run, and all Files saved, permitting efficient restoration and
- Volume management. Bacula currently supports three different databases,
- MySQL, PostgreSQL, and SQLite, one of which must be chosen when building
- Bacula.
-
- The three SQL databases currently supported (MySQL, PostgreSQL or
- SQLite) provide quite a number of features, including rapid indexing,
- arbitrary queries, and security. Although the Bacula project plans to support other
- major SQL databases, the current Bacula implementation interfaces only
- to MySQL, PostgreSQL and SQLite. For the technical and porting details
- see the Catalog Services Design Document in the developer's documented.
-
- The packages for MySQL and PostgreSQL are available for several operating
- systems.
- Alternatively, installing from the
- source is quite easy, see the \ilink{ Installing and Configuring
- MySQL}{MySqlChapter} chapter of this document for the details. For
- more information on MySQL, please see:
- \elink{www.mysql.com}{http://www.mysql.com}. Or see the \ilink{
- Installing and Configuring PostgreSQL}{PostgreSqlChapter} chapter of this
- document for the details. For more information on PostgreSQL, please
- see: \elink{www.postgresql.org}{http://www.postgresql.org}.
-
- Configuring and building SQLite is even easier. For the details of
- configuring SQLite, please see the \ilink{ Installing and Configuring
- SQLite}{SqlLiteChapter} chapter of this document.
-
-\subsection*{Bacula Monitor}
- \label{MonDef}
- A Bacula Monitor service is the program that allows the
- administrator or user to watch current status of Bacula Directors,
- Bacula File Daemons and Bacula Storage Daemons.
- Currently, only a GTK+ version is available, which works with GNOME,
- KDE, or any window manager that supports the FreeDesktop.org system tray
- standard.
-
- To perform a successful save or restore, the following four daemons must be
- configured and running: the Director daemon, the File daemon, the Storage
- daemon, and the Catalog service (MySQL, PostgreSQL or SQLite).
-
-\section{Bacula Configuration}
-\index[general]{Configuration!Bacula }
-\index[general]{Bacula Configuration }
-
-In order for Bacula to understand your system, what clients you want backed
-up and how, you must create a number of configuration files containing
-resources (or objects). The following presents an overall picture of this:
-
-\addcontentsline{lof}{figure}{Bacula Objects}
-\includegraphics{\idir bacula-objects.eps}
-
-\section{Conventions Used in this Document}
-\index[general]{Conventions Used in this Document }
-\index[general]{Document!Conventions Used in this }
-
-Bacula is in a state of evolution, and as a consequence, this manual
-will not always agree with the code. If an item in this manual is preceded by
-an asterisk (*), it indicates that the particular feature is not implemented.
-If it is preceded by a plus sign (+), it indicates that the feature may be
-partially implemented.
-% TODO: search for plus sign and asterisk and "IMPLEMENTED" and fix for printed book
-
-If you are reading this manual as supplied in a released version of the
-software, the above paragraph holds true. If you are reading the online
-version of the manual,
-\elink{ www.bacula.org}{http://www.bacula.org}, please bear in
-mind that this version describes the current version in development (in the
-CVS) that may contain features not in the released version. Just the same, it
-generally lags behind the code a bit.
-% TODO: is this still true? there are separate websites
-
-\section{Quick Start}
-\index[general]{Quick Start }
-\index[general]{Start!Quick }
-
-To get Bacula up and running quickly, the author recommends
-that you first scan the
-Terminology section below, then quickly review the next chapter entitled
-\ilink{The Current State of Bacula}{StateChapter}, then the
-\ilink{Getting Started with Bacula}{QuickStartChapter}, which will
-give you a quick overview of getting Bacula running. After which, you should
-proceed to the chapter on
-\ilink{Installing Bacula}{InstallChapter}, then
-\ilink{How to Configure Bacula}{ConfigureChapter}, and finally the
-chapter on
-\ilink{ Running Bacula}{TutorialChapter}.
-
-\section{Terminology}
-\index[general]{Terminology }
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Administrator]
- \index[fd]{Administrator }
- The person or persons responsible for administrating the Bacula system.
-
-\item [Backup]
- \index[fd]{Backup }
- The term Backup refers to a Bacula Job that saves files.
-
-\item [Bootstrap File]
- \index[fd]{Bootstrap File }
- The bootstrap file is an ASCII file containing a compact form of
- commands that allow Bacula or the stand-alone file extraction utility
- (bextract) to restore the contents of one or more Volumes, for
- example, the current state of a system just backed up. With a bootstrap
- file, Bacula can restore your system without a Catalog. You can create
- a bootstrap file from a Catalog to extract any file or files you wish.
-
-\item [Catalog]
- \index[fd]{Catalog }
- The Catalog is used to store summary information about the Jobs,
- Clients, and Files that were backed up and on what Volume or Volumes.
- The information saved in the Catalog permits the administrator or user
- to determine what jobs were run, their status as well as the important
- characteristics of each file that was backed up, and most importantly,
- it permits you to choose what files to restore.
- The Catalog is an
- online resource, but does not contain the data for the files backed up.
- Most of the information stored in the catalog is also stored on the
- backup volumes (i.e. tapes). Of course, the tapes will also have a
- copy of the file data in addition to the File Attributes (see below).
-
- The catalog feature is one part of Bacula that distinguishes it from
- simple backup and archive programs such as dump and tar.
-
-\item [Client]
- \index[fd]{Client }
- In Bacula's terminology, the word Client refers to the machine being
- backed up, and it is synonymous with the File services or File daemon,
- and quite often, it is referred to it as the FD. A Client is defined in a
- configuration file resource.
-
-\item [Console]
- \index[fd]{Console }
- The program that interfaces to the Director allowing the user or system
- administrator to control Bacula.
-
-\item [Daemon]
- \index[fd]{Daemon }
- Unix terminology for a program that is always present in the background to
- carry out a designated task. On Windows systems, as well as some Unix
- systems, daemons are called Services.
-
-\item [Directive]
- \index[fd]{Directive }
- The term directive is used to refer to a statement or a record within a
- Resource in a configuration file that defines one specific setting. For
- example, the {\bf Name} directive defines the name of the Resource.
-
-\item [Director]
- \index[fd]{Director }
- The main Bacula server daemon that schedules and directs all Bacula
- operations. Occasionally, the project refers to the Director as DIR.
-
-\item [Differential]
- \index[fd]{Differential }
- A backup that includes all files changed since the last Full save started.
- Note, other backup programs may define this differently.
-
-\item [File Attributes]
- \index[fd]{File Attributes }
- The File Attributes are all the information necessary about a file to
- identify it and all its properties such as size, creation date, modification
- date, permissions, etc. Normally, the attributes are handled entirely by
- Bacula so that the user never needs to be concerned about them. The
- attributes do not include the file's data.
-
-\item [File Daemon]
- \index[fd]{File Daemon }
- The daemon running on the client computer to be backed up. This is also
- referred to as the File services, and sometimes as the Client services or the
- FD.
-
-\label{FileSetDef}
-\item [FileSet]
-\index[fd]{a name }
- A FileSet is a Resource contained in a configuration file that defines
- the files to be backed up. It consists of a list of included files or
- directories, a list of excluded files, and how the file is to be stored
- (compression, encryption, signatures). For more details, see the
- \ilink{FileSet Resource definition}{FileSetResource} in the Director
- chapter of this document.
-
-\item [Incremental]
- \index[fd]{Incremental }
- A backup that includes all files changed since the last Full, Differential,
- or Incremental backup started. It is normally specified on the {\bf Level}
- directive within the Job resource definition, or in a Schedule resource.
-
-\label{JobDef}
-\item [Job]
-\index[fd]{a name }
- A Bacula Job is a configuration resource that defines the work that
- Bacula must perform to backup or restore a particular Client. It
- consists of the {\bf Type} (backup, restore, verify, etc), the {\bf
- Level} (full, incremental,...), the {\bf FileSet}, and {\bf Storage} the
- files are to be backed up (Storage device, Media Pool). For more
- details, see the \ilink{Job Resource definition}{JobResource} in the
- Director chapter of this document.
-% TODO: clean up "..." for book
-
-\item [Monitor]
- \index[fd]{Monitor }
- The program that interfaces to all the daemons allowing the user or
- system administrator to monitor Bacula status.
-
-\item [Resource]
- \index[fd]{Resource }
- A resource is a part of a configuration file that defines a specific
- unit of information that is available to Bacula. It consists of several
- directives (individual configuration statements). For example, the {\bf
- Job} resource defines all the properties of a specific Job: name,
- schedule, Volume pool, backup type, backup level, ...
-% TODO: clean up "..." for book
-
-\item [Restore]
- \index[fd]{Restore }
- A restore is a configuration resource that describes the operation of
- recovering a file from backup media. It is the inverse of a save,
- except that in most cases, a restore will normally have a small set of
- files to restore, while normally a Save backs up all the files on the
- system. Of course, after a disk crash, Bacula can be called upon to do
- a full Restore of all files that were on the system.
-% TODO: Why? Why say "Of course"??
-
-% TODO: define "Save"
-% TODO: define "Full"
-
-\item [Schedule]
- \index[fd]{Schedule }
- A Schedule is a configuration resource that defines when the Bacula Job
- will be scheduled for execution. To use the Schedule, the Job resource
- will refer to the name of the Schedule. For more details, see the
- \ilink{Schedule Resource definition}{ScheduleResource} in the Director
- chapter of this document.
-
-\item [Service]
- \index[fd]{Service }
- This is a program that remains permanently in memory awaiting
- instructions. In Unix environments, services are also known as
- {\bf daemons}.
-
-\item [Storage Coordinates]
- \index[fd]{Storage Coordinates }
- The information returned from the Storage Services that uniquely locates
- a file on a backup medium. It consists of two parts: one part pertains
- to each file saved, and the other part pertains to the whole Job.
- Normally, this information is saved in the Catalog so that the user
- doesn't need specific knowledge of the Storage Coordinates. The Storage
- Coordinates include the File Attributes (see above) plus the unique
- location of the information on the backup Volume.
-
-\item [Storage Daemon]
- \index[fd]{Storage Daemon }
- The Storage daemon, sometimes referred to as the SD, is the code that
- writes the attributes and data to a storage Volume (usually a tape or
- disk).
-
-\item [Session]
- \index[sd]{Session }
- Normally refers to the internal conversation between the File daemon and
- the Storage daemon. The File daemon opens a {\bf session} with the
- Storage daemon to save a FileSet or to restore it. A session has a
- one-to-one correspondence to a Bacula Job (see above).
-
-\item [Verify]
- \index[sd]{Verify }
- A verify is a job that compares the current file attributes to the
- attributes that have previously been stored in the Bacula Catalog. This
- feature can be used for detecting changes to critical system files
- similar to what a file integrity checker like Tripwire does.
- One of the major advantages of
- using Bacula to do this is that on the machine you want protected such
- as a server, you can run just the File daemon, and the Director, Storage
- daemon, and Catalog reside on a different machine. As a consequence, if
- your server is ever compromised, it is unlikely that your verification
- database will be tampered with.
-
- Verify can also be used to check that the most recent Job data written
- to a Volume agrees with what is stored in the Catalog (i.e. it compares
- the file attributes), *or it can check the Volume contents against the
- original files on disk.
-
-\item [*Archive]
- \index[fd]{*Archive }
- An Archive operation is done after a Save, and it consists of removing the
- Volumes on which data is saved from active use. These Volumes are marked as
- Archived, and may no longer be used to save files. All the files contained
- on an Archived Volume are removed from the Catalog. NOT YET IMPLEMENTED.
-
-\item [Retention Period]
- \index[fd]{Retention Period }
- There are various kinds of retention periods that Bacula recognizes.
- The most important are the {\bf File} Retention Period, {\bf Job}
- Retention Period, and the {\bf Volume} Retention Period. Each of these
- retention periods applies to the time that specific records will be kept
- in the Catalog database. This should not be confused with the time that
- the data saved to a Volume is valid.
-
- The File Retention Period determines the time that File records are kept
- in the catalog database. This period is important for two reasons: the
- first is that as long as File records remain in the database, you
- can "browse" the database with a console program and restore any
- individual file. Once the File records are removed or pruned from the
- database, the individual files of a backup job can no longer be
- "browsed". The second reason for carefully choosing the File Retention
- Period is because the volume of
- the database File records use the most storage space in the
- database. As a consequence, you must ensure that regular "pruning" of
- the database file records is done to keep your database from growing
- too large. (See the Console {\bf prune}
- command for more details on this subject).
-
- The Job Retention Period is the length of time that Job records will be
- kept in the database. Note, all the File records are tied to the Job
- that saved those files. The File records can be purged leaving the Job
- records. In this case, information will be available about the jobs
- that ran, but not the details of the files that were backed up.
- Normally, when a Job record is purged, all its File records will also be
- purged.
-
- The Volume Retention Period is the minimum of time that a Volume will be
- kept before it is reused. Bacula will normally never overwrite a Volume
- that contains the only backup copy of a file. Under ideal conditions,
- the Catalog would retain entries for all files backed up for all current
- Volumes. Once a Volume is overwritten, the files that were backed up on
- that Volume are automatically removed from the Catalog. However, if
- there is a very large pool of Volumes or a Volume is never overwritten,
- the Catalog database may become enormous. To keep the Catalog to a
- manageable size, the backup information should be removed from the
- Catalog after the defined File Retention Period. Bacula provides the
- mechanisms for the catalog to be automatically pruned according to the
- retention periods defined.
-
-\item [Scan]
- \index[sd]{Scan }
- A Scan operation causes the contents of a Volume or a series of Volumes
- to be scanned. These Volumes with the information on which files they
- contain are restored to the Bacula Catalog. Once the information is
- restored to the Catalog, the files contained on those Volumes may be
- easily restored. This function is particularly useful if certain
- Volumes or Jobs have exceeded their retention period and have been
- pruned or purged from the Catalog. Scanning data from Volumes into the
- Catalog is done by using the {\bf bscan} program. See the \ilink{ bscan
- section}{bscan} of the Bacula Utilities Chapter of this manual for more
- details.
-
-\item [Volume]
- \index[sd]{Volume }
- A Volume is an archive unit, normally a tape or a named disk file where
- Bacula stores the data from one or more backup jobs. All Bacula Volumes
- have a software label written to the Volume by Bacula so that it
- identifies what Volume it is really reading. (Normally there should be
- no confusion with disk files, but with tapes, it is easy to mount the
- wrong one.)
-\end{description}
-
-\section{What Bacula is Not}
-\index[general]{What Bacula is Not}
-
-Bacula is a backup, restore and verification program and is not a
-complete disaster recovery system in itself, but it can be a key part of one
-if you plan carefully and follow the instructions included in the
-\ilink{ Disaster Recovery}{RescueChapter} Chapter of this manual.
-
-With proper planning, as mentioned in the Disaster Recovery chapter,
-Bacula can be a central component of your disaster recovery system. For
-example, if you have created an emergency boot disk, and/or a Bacula Rescue disk to
-save the current partitioning information of your hard disk, and maintain a
-complete Bacula backup, it is possible to completely recover your system from
-"bare metal" that is starting from an empty disk.
-
-If you have used the {\bf WriteBootstrap} record in your job or some other
-means to save a valid bootstrap file, you will be able to use it to extract
-the necessary files (without using the catalog or manually searching for the
-files to restore).
-
-\section{Interactions Between the Bacula Services}
-\index[general]{Interactions Between the Bacula Services}
-\index[general]{Services!Interactions Between the Bacula}
-
-The following block diagram shows the typical interactions between the Bacula
-Services for a backup job. Each block represents in general a separate process
-(normally a daemon). In general, the Director oversees the flow of
-information. It also maintains the Catalog.
-
-\addcontentsline{lof}{figure}{Interactions between Bacula Services}
-\includegraphics{\idir flow.eps}
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\section*{GNU General Public License}
-\label{GplChapter}
-\index[general]{GNU General Public License }
-\index[general]{License!GNU General Public }
-
-\elink{image of a Philosophical
-GNU}{http://www.gnu.org/graphics/philosophicalgnu.html}
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item
- \elink{What to do if you see a possible GPL
- violation}{http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl-violation.html}
-\item
- \elink{Translations of the
- GPL}{http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/copyleft.html\#translations}
-\end{itemize}
-
-
-\section{Table of Contents}
-\index[general]{Table of Contents }
-\index[general]{Contents!Table of }
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item
- \label{TOC1}
- \ilink{GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE}{SEC1}
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item
- \label{TOC2}
- \ilink{Preamble}{SEC2}
-\item
- \label{TOC3}
- \ilink{TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
-MODIFICATION}{SEC3}
-\item
- \label{TOC4}
- \ilink{How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs}{SEC4}
-\end{itemize}
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-
-\section{GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE}
-\label{SEC1}
-\index[general]{GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE }
-\index[general]{LICENSE!GNU GENERAL PUBLIC }
-
-Version 2, June 1991
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
-Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
-of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{Preamble}
-\label{SEC2}
-\index[general]{Preamble }
-
-The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share
-and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to
-guarantee your freedom to share and change free software\verb:--:to make sure the
-software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to
-most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose
-authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is
-covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it
-to your programs, too.
-
-When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our
-General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
-distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish),
-that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change
-the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you
-can do these things.
-
-To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to
-deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These
-restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute
-copies of the software, or if you modify it.
-
-For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for
-a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must
-make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must
-show them these terms so they know their rights.
-
-We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2)
-offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute
-and/or modify the software.
-
-Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that
-everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the
-software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to
-know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced
-by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
-
-Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We
-wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will
-individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary.
-To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for
-everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
-
-The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification
-follow.
-
-\section{TERMS AND CONDITIONS}
-\label{SEC3}
-\index[general]{CONDITIONS!TERMS AND }
-\index[general]{TERMS AND CONDITIONS }
-
-TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
-
-{\bf 0.} This License applies to any program or other work which contains a
-notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the
-terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any
-such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the
-Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work
-containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
-modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter,
-translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each
-licensee is addressed as "you".
-
-Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered
-by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is
-not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its
-contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been
-made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program
-does.
-
-{\bf 1.} You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source
-code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
-appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and
-disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License
-and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the
-Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
-
-You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may
-at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
-
-{\bf 2.} You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of
-it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such
-modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you
-also meet all of these conditions:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item {\bf a)} You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
- stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
-
-\item {\bf b)} You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that
- in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part
- thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under
- the terms of this License.
-
-\item {\bf c)} If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
- when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in
- the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an
- appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else,
- saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the
- program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of
- this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not
- normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not
- required to print an announcement.)
-\end{itemize}
-
-These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable
-sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably
-considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License,
-and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
-separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole
-which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on
-the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
-entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
-
-Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your
-rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the
-right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on
-the Program.
-
-In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with
-the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or
-distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this
-License.
-
-{\bf 3.} You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under
-Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and
-2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item {\bf a)} Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
- source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
- above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
-
-\item {\bf b)} Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
- years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of
- physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of
- the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections
- 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
-
-\item {\bf c)} Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
- to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only
- for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object
- code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b
- above.)
-\end{itemize}
-
-The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making
-modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all
-the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
-definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and
-installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source
-code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in
-either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and
-so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that
-component itself accompanies the executable.
-
-If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to
-copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the
-source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code,
-even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the
-object code.
-
-{\bf 4.} You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
-except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to
-copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
-automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who
-have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have
-their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
-
-{\bf 5.} You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
-signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute
-the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if
-you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
-Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of
-this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
-distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
-
-{\bf 6.} Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
-Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original
-licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and
-conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients'
-exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing
-compliance by third parties to this License.
-
-{\bf 7.} If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
-infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
-conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise)
-that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from
-the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy
-simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
-obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all.
-For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution
-of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through
-you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
-refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
-
-If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
-particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and
-the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
-
-It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or
-other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this
-section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software
-distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many
-people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software
-distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
-system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to
-distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that
-choice.
-
-This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a
-consequence of the rest of this License.
-
-{\bf 8.} If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
-certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original
-copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit
-geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that
-distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In
-such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body
-of this License.
-
-{\bf 9.} The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
-of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be
-similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address
-new problems or concerns.
-
-Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
-specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later
-version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
-that version or of any later version published by the Free Software
-Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License,
-you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
-
-{\bf 10.} If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
-programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to
-ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
-Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make
-exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of
-preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
-promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
-
-{\bf NO WARRANTY}
-
-{\bf 11.} BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
-FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
-OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE
-THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR
-IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
-MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
-THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM
-PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
-CORRECTION.
-
-{\bf 12.} IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
-WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
-REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
-INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
-OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
-LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
-THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
-EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGES.
-
-END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
-
-\section{How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs}
-\label{SEC4}
-\index[general]{Programs!How to Apply These Terms to Your New }
-\index[general]{How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs }
-
-If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible
-use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software
-which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
-
-To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach
-them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion
-of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a
-pointer to where the full notice is found.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-{\em one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.}
-Copyright (C) {\em yyyy} {\em name of author}
-This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
-modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
-as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
-of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-GNU General Public License for more details.
-You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
-Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
-02110-1301 USA
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
-
-If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it
-starts in an interactive mode:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) {\em year} {\em name of author}
-Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
-type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
-to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
-for details.
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The hypothetical commands {\tt `show w'} and {\tt `show c'} should show the
-appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you
-use may be called something other than {\tt `show w'} and {\tt `show c'}; they
-could even be mouse-clicks or menu items\verb:--:whatever suits your program.
-
-You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
-school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
-necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
-interest in the program `Gnomovision'
-(which makes passes at compilers) written
-by James Hacker.
-{\em signature of Ty Coon}, 1 April 1989
-Ty Coon, President of Vice
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
-proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
-consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
-library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public
-License instead of this License.
-Return to
-\elink{GNU's home page}{http://www.gnu.org/home.html}.
-
-FSF \& GNU inquiries \& questions to
-\elink{gnu@gnu.org}{mailto:gnu@gnu.org}. Other
-\elink{ways to contact}{http://www.gnu.org/home.html\#ContactInfo} the FSF.
-
-Comments on these web pages to
-\elink{webmasters@www.gnu.org}{mailto:webmasters@www.gnu.org}, send other
-questions to
-\elink{gnu@gnu.org}{mailto:gnu@gnu.org}.
-
-Copyright notice above.
-Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor,
-Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
-
-Updated: 3 Jan 2000 rms
+++ /dev/null
-# This module does multiple indices, supporting the style of the LaTex 'index'
-# package.
-
-# Version Information:
-# 16-Feb-2005 -- Original Creation. Karl E. Cunningham
-# 14-Mar-2005 -- Clarified and Consolodated some of the code.
-# Changed to smoothly handle single and multiple indices.
-
-# Two LaTeX index formats are supported...
-# --- SINGLE INDEX ---
-# \usepackage{makeidx}
-# \makeindex
-# \index{entry1}
-# \index{entry2}
-# \index{entry3}
-# ...
-# \printindex
-#
-# --- MULTIPLE INDICES ---
-#
-# \usepackage{makeidx}
-# \usepackage{index}
-# \makeindex -- latex2html doesn't care but LaTeX does.
-# \newindex{ref1}{ext1}{ext2}{title1}
-# \newindex{ref2}{ext1}{ext2}{title2}
-# \newindex{ref3}{ext1}{ext2}{title3}
-# \index[ref1]{entry1}
-# \index[ref1]{entry2}
-# \index[ref3]{entry3}
-# \index[ref2]{entry4}
-# \index{entry5}
-# \index[ref3]{entry6}
-# ...
-# \printindex[ref1]
-# \printindex[ref2]
-# \printindex[ref3]
-# \printindex
-# ___________________
-#
-# For the multiple-index style, each index is identified by the ref argument to \newindex, \index,
-# and \printindex. A default index is allowed, which is indicated by omitting the optional
-# argument. The default index does not require a \newindex command. As \index commands
-# are encountered, their entries are stored according
-# to the ref argument. When the \printindex command is encountered, the stored index
-# entries for that argument are retrieved and printed. The title for each index is taken
-# from the last argument in the \newindex command.
-# While processing \index and \printindex commands, if no argument is given the index entries
-# are built into a default index. The title of the default index is simply "Index".
-# This makes the difference between single- and multiple-index processing trivial.
-#
-# Another method can be used by omitting the \printindex command and just using \include to
-# pull in index files created by the makeindex program. These files will start with
-# \begin{theindex}. This command is used to determine where to print the index. Using this
-# approach, the indices will be output in the same order as the newindex commands were
-# originally found (see below). Using a combination of \printindex and \include{indexfile} has not
-# been tested and may produce undesireable results.
-#
-# The index data are stored in a hash for later sorting and output. As \printindex
-# commands are handled, the order in which they were found in the tex filea is saved,
-# associated with the ref argument to \printindex.
-#
-# We use the original %index hash to store the index data into. We append a \002 followed by the
-# name of the index to isolate the entries in different indices from each other. This is necessary
-# so that different indices can have entries with the same name. For the default index, the \002 is
-# appended without the name.
-#
-# Since the index order in the output cannot be determined if the \include{indexfile}
-# command is used, the order will be assumed from the order in which the \newindex
-# commands were originally seen in the TeX files. This order is saved as well as the
-# order determined from any printindex{ref} commands. If \printindex commnads are used
-# to specify the index output, that order will be used. If the \include{idxfile} command
-# is used, the order of the original newindex commands will be used. In this case the
-# default index will be printed last since it doesn't have a corresponding \newindex
-# command and its order cannot be determined. Mixing \printindex and \include{idxfile}
-# commands in the same file is likely to produce less than satisfactory results.
-#
-#
-# The hash containing index data is named %indices. It contains the following data:
-#{
-# 'title' => {
-# $ref1 => $indextitle ,
-# $ref2 => $indextitle ,
-# ...
-# },
-# 'newcmdorder' => [ ref1, ref2, ..., * ], # asterisk indicates the position of the default index.
-# 'printindorder' => [ ref1, ref2, ..., * ], # asterisk indicates the position of the default index.
-#}
-
-
-# Globals to handle multiple indices.
-my %indices;
-
-# This tells the system to use up to 7 words in index entries.
-$WORDS_IN_INDEX = 10;
-
-# KEC 2-18-05
-# Handles the \newindex command. This is called if the \newindex command is
-# encountered in the LaTex source. Gets the index ref and title from the arguments.
-# Saves the index ref and title.
-# Note that we are called once to handle multiple \newindex commands that are
-# newline-separated.
-sub do_cmd_newindex {
- my $data = shift;
- # The data is sent to us as fields delimited by their ID #'s. We extract the
- # fields.
- foreach my $line (split("\n",$data)) {
- my @fields = split (/(?:\<\#\d+?\#\>)+/,$line);
-
- # The index name and title are the second and fourth fields in the data.
- if ($line =~ /^</ or $line =~ /^\\newindex/) {
- my ($indexref,$indextitle) = ($fields[1],$fields[4]);
- $indices{'title'}{$indexref} = $indextitle;
- push (@{$indices{'newcmdorder'}},$indexref);
- }
- }
-}
-
-
-# KEC -- Copied from makeidx.perl and modified to do multiple indices.
-# Processes an \index entry from the LaTex file.
-# Gets the optional argument from the index command, which is the name of the index
-# into which to place the entry.
-# Drops the brackets from the index_name
-# Puts the index entry into the html stream
-# Creates the tokenized index entry (which also saves the index entry info
-sub do_real_index {
- local($_) = @_;
- local($pat,$idx_entry,$index_name);
- # catches opt-arg from \index commands for index.sty
- $index_name = &get_next_optional_argument;
- $index_name = "" unless defined $index_name;
- # Drop leading and trailing brackets from the index name.
- $index_name =~ s/^\[|\]$//g;
-
- $idx_entry = &missing_braces unless (
- (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$pat=$1;$idx_entry=$2;''/e)
- ||(s/$next_pair_rx/$pat=$1;$idx_entry=$2;''/e));
-
- if ($index_name and defined $idx_entry and
- !defined $indices{'title'}{$index_name}) {
- print STDERR "\nInvalid Index Name: \\index \[$index_name\]\{$idx_entry\}\n";
- }
-
- $idx_entry = &named_index_entry($pat, $idx_entry,$index_name);
- $idx_entry.$_;
-}
-
-# Creates and saves an index entry in the index hashes.
-# Modified to do multiple indices.
-# Creates an index_key that allows index entries to have the same characteristics but be in
-# different indices. This index_key is the regular key with the index name appended.
-# Save the index order for the entry in the %index_order hash.
-sub named_index_entry {
- local($br_id, $str, $index_name) = @_;
- my ($index_key);
- # escape the quoting etc characters
- # ! -> \001
- # @ -> \002
- # | -> \003
- $* = 1; $str =~ s/\n\s*/ /g; $* = 0; # remove any newlines
- # protect \001 occurring with images
- $str =~ s/\001/\016/g; # 0x1 to 0xF
- $str =~ s/\\\\/\011/g; # Double backslash -> 0xB
- $str =~ s/\\;SPMquot;/\012/g; # \;SPMquot; -> 0xC
- $str =~ s/;SPMquot;!/\013/g; # ;SPMquot; -> 0xD
- $str =~ s/!/\001/g; # Exclamation point -> 0x1
- $str =~ s/\013/!/g; # 0xD -> Exclaimation point
- $str =~ s/;SPMquot;@/\015/g; # ;SPMquot;@ to 0xF
- $str =~ s/@/\002/g; # At sign -> 0x2
- $str =~ s/\015/@/g; # 0xF to At sign
- $str =~ s/;SPMquot;\|/\017/g; # ;SMPquot;| to 0x11
- $str =~ s/\|/\003/g; # Vertical line to 0x3
- $str =~ s/\017/|/g; # 0x11 to vertical line
- $str =~ s/;SPMquot;(.)/\1/g; # ;SPMquot; -> whatever the next character is
- $str =~ s/\012/;SPMquot;/g; # 0x12 to ;SPMquot;
- $str =~ s/\011/\\\\/g; # 0x11 to double backslash
- local($key_part, $pageref) = split("\003", $str, 2);
-
- # For any keys of the form: blablabla!blablabla, which want to be split at the
- # exclamation point, replace the ! with a comma and a space. We don't do it
- # that way for this index.
- $key_part =~ s/\001/, /g;
- local(@keys) = split("\001", $key_part);
- # If TITLE is not yet available use $before.
- $TITLE = $saved_title if (($saved_title)&&(!($TITLE)||($TITLE eq $default_title)));
- $TITLE = $before unless $TITLE;
- # Save the reference
- local($words) = '';
- if ($SHOW_SECTION_NUMBERS) { $words = &make_idxnum; }
- elsif ($SHORT_INDEX) { $words = &make_shortidxname; }
- else { $words = &make_idxname; }
- local($super_key) = '';
- local($sort_key, $printable_key, $cur_key);
- foreach $key (@keys) {
- $key =~ s/\016/\001/g; # revert protected \001s
- ($sort_key, $printable_key) = split("\002", $key);
- #
- # RRM: 16 May 1996
- # any \label in the printable-key will have already
- # created a label where the \index occurred.
- # This has to be removed, so that the desired label
- # will be found on the Index page instead.
- #
- if ($printable_key =~ /tex2html_anchor_mark/ ) {
- $printable_key =~ s/><tex2html_anchor_mark><\/A><A//g;
- local($tmpA,$tmpB) = split("NAME=\"", $printable_key);
- ($tmpA,$tmpB) = split("\"", $tmpB);
- $ref_files{$tmpA}='';
- $index_labels{$tmpA} = 1;
- }
- #
- # resolve and clean-up the hyperlink index-entries
- # so they can be saved in an index.pl file
- #
- if ($printable_key =~ /$cross_ref_mark/ ) {
- local($label,$id,$ref_label);
- # $printable_key =~ s/$cross_ref_mark#(\w+)#(\w+)>$cross_ref_mark/
- $printable_key =~ s/$cross_ref_mark#([^#]+)#([^>]+)>$cross_ref_mark/
- do { ($label,$id) = ($1,$2);
- $ref_label = $external_labels{$label} unless
- ($ref_label = $ref_files{$label});
- '"' . "$ref_label#$label" . '">' .
- &get_ref_mark($label,$id)}
- /geo;
- }
- $printable_key =~ s/<\#[^\#>]*\#>//go;
- #RRM
- # recognise \char combinations, for a \backslash
- #
- $printable_key =~ s/\&\#;\'134/\\/g; # restore \\s
- $printable_key =~ s/\&\#;\`<BR> /\\/g; # ditto
- $printable_key =~ s/\&\#;*SPMquot;92/\\/g; # ditto
- #
- # $sort_key .= "@$printable_key" if !($printable_key); # RRM
- $sort_key .= "@$printable_key" if !($sort_key); # RRM
- $sort_key =~ tr/A-Z/a-z/;
- if ($super_key) {
- $cur_key = $super_key . "\001" . $sort_key;
- $sub_index{$super_key} .= $cur_key . "\004";
- } else {
- $cur_key = $sort_key;
- }
-
- # Append the $index_name to the current key with a \002 delimiter. This will
- # allow the same index entry to appear in more than one index.
- $index_key = $cur_key . "\002$index_name";
-
- $index{$index_key} .= "";
-
- #
- # RRM, 15 June 1996
- # if there is no printable key, but one is known from
- # a previous index-entry, then use it.
- #
- if (!($printable_key) && ($printable_key{$index_key}))
- { $printable_key = $printable_key{$index_key}; }
-# if (!($printable_key) && ($printable_key{$cur_key}))
-# { $printable_key = $printable_key{$cur_key}; }
- #
- # do not overwrite the printable_key if it contains an anchor
- #
- if (!($printable_key{$index_key} =~ /tex2html_anchor_mark/ ))
- { $printable_key{$index_key} = $printable_key || $key; }
-# if (!($printable_key{$cur_key} =~ /tex2html_anchor_mark/ ))
-# { $printable_key{$cur_key} = $printable_key || $key; }
-
- $super_key = $cur_key;
- }
- #
- # RRM
- # page-ranges, from |( and |) and |see
- #
- if ($pageref) {
- if ($pageref eq "\(" ) {
- $pageref = '';
- $next .= " from ";
- } elsif ($pageref eq "\)" ) {
- $pageref = '';
- local($next) = $index{$index_key};
-# local($next) = $index{$cur_key};
- # $next =~ s/[\|] *$//;
- $next =~ s/(\n )?\| $//;
- $index{$index_key} = "$next to ";
-# $index{$cur_key} = "$next to ";
- }
- }
-
- if ($pageref) {
- $pageref =~ s/\s*$//g; # remove trailing spaces
- if (!$pageref) { $pageref = ' ' }
- $pageref =~ s/see/<i>see <\/i> /g;
- #
- # RRM: 27 Dec 1996
- # check if $pageref corresponds to a style command.
- # If so, apply it to the $words.
- #
- local($tmp) = "do_cmd_$pageref";
- if (defined &$tmp) {
- $words = &$tmp("<#0#>$words<#0#>");
- $words =~ s/<\#[^\#]*\#>//go;
- $pageref = '';
- }
- }
- #
- # RRM: 25 May 1996
- # any \label in the pageref section will have already
- # created a label where the \index occurred.
- # This has to be removed, so that the desired label
- # will be found on the Index page instead.
- #
- if ($pageref) {
- if ($pageref =~ /tex2html_anchor_mark/ ) {
- $pageref =~ s/><tex2html_anchor_mark><\/A><A//g;
- local($tmpA,$tmpB) = split("NAME=\"", $pageref);
- ($tmpA,$tmpB) = split("\"", $tmpB);
- $ref_files{$tmpA}='';
- $index_labels{$tmpA} = 1;
- }
- #
- # resolve and clean-up any hyperlinks in the page-ref,
- # so they can be saved in an index.pl file
- #
- if ($pageref =~ /$cross_ref_mark/ ) {
- local($label,$id,$ref_label);
- # $pageref =~ s/$cross_ref_mark#(\w+)#(\w+)>$cross_ref_mark/
- $pageref =~ s/$cross_ref_mark#([^#]+)#([^>]+)>$cross_ref_mark/
- do { ($label,$id) = ($1,$2);
- $ref_files{$label} = ''; # ???? RRM
- if ($index_labels{$label}) { $ref_label = ''; }
- else { $ref_label = $external_labels{$label}
- unless ($ref_label = $ref_files{$label});
- }
- '"' . "$ref_label#$label" . '">' . &get_ref_mark($label,$id)}/geo;
- }
- $pageref =~ s/<\#[^\#>]*\#>//go;
-
- if ($pageref eq ' ') { $index{$index_key}='@'; }
- else { $index{$index_key} .= $pageref . "\n | "; }
- } else {
- local($thisref) = &make_named_href('',"$CURRENT_FILE#$br_id",$words);
- $thisref =~ s/\n//g;
- $index{$index_key} .= $thisref."\n | ";
- }
- #print "\nREF: $sort_key : $index_key :$index{$index_key}";
-
- #join('',"<A NAME=$br_id>$anchor_invisible_mark<\/A>",$_);
-
- "<A NAME=\"$br_id\">$anchor_invisible_mark<\/A>";
-}
-
-
-# KEC. -- Copied from makeidx.perl, then modified to do multiple indices.
-# Feeds the index entries to the output. This is called for each index to be built.
-#
-# Generates a list of lookup keys for index entries, from both %printable_keys
-# and %index keys.
-# Sorts the keys according to index-sorting rules.
-# Removes keys with a 0x01 token. (duplicates?)
-# Builds a string to go to the index file.
-# Adds the index entries to the string if they belong in this index.
-# Keeps track of which index is being worked on, so only the proper entries
-# are included.
-# Places the index just built in to the output at the proper place.
-{ my $index_number = 0;
-sub add_real_idx {
- print "\nDoing the index ... Index Number $index_number\n";
- local($key, @keys, $next, $index, $old_key, $old_html);
- my ($idx_ref,$keyref);
- # RRM, 15.6.96: index constructed from %printable_key, not %index
- @keys = keys %printable_key;
-
- while (/$idx_mark/) {
- # Get the index reference from what follows the $idx_mark and
- # remove it from the string.
- s/$idxmark\002(.*?)\002/$idxmark/;
- $idx_ref = $1;
- $index = '';
- # include non- makeidx index-entries
- foreach $key (keys %index) {
- next if $printable_key{$key};
- $old_key = $key;
- if ($key =~ s/###(.*)$//) {
- next if $printable_key{$key};
- push (@keys, $key);
- $printable_key{$key} = $key;
- if ($index{$old_key} =~ /HREF="([^"]*)"/i) {
- $old_html = $1;
- $old_html =~ /$dd?([^#\Q$dd\E]*)#/;
- $old_html = $1;
- } else { $old_html = '' }
- $index{$key} = $index{$old_key} . $old_html."</A>\n | ";
- };
- }
- @keys = sort makeidx_keysort @keys;
- @keys = grep(!/\001/, @keys);
- my $cnt = 0;
- foreach $key (@keys) {
- my ($keyref) = $key =~ /.*\002(.*)/;
- next unless ($idx_ref eq $keyref); # KEC.
- $index .= &add_idx_key($key);
- $cnt++;
- }
- print "$cnt Index Entries Added\n";
- $index = '<DD>'.$index unless ($index =~ /^\s*<D(D|T)>/);
- $index_number++; # KEC.
- if ($SHORT_INDEX) {
- print "(compact version with Legend)";
- local($num) = ( $index =~ s/\<D/<D/g );
- if ($num > 50 ) {
- s/$idx_mark/$preindex<HR><DL>\n$index\n<\/DL>$preindex/o;
- } else {
- s/$idx_mark/$preindex<HR><DL>\n$index\n<\/DL>/o;
- }
- } else {
- s/$idx_mark/<DL COMPACT>\n$index\n<\/DL>/o; }
- }
-}
-}
-
-# KEC. Copied from latex2html.pl and modified to support multiple indices.
-# The bibliography and the index should be treated as separate sections
-# in their own HTML files. The \bibliography{} command acts as a sectioning command
-# that has the desired effect. But when the bibliography is constructed
-# manually using the thebibliography environment, or when using the
-# theindex environment it is not possible to use the normal sectioning
-# mechanism. This subroutine inserts a \bibliography{} or a dummy
-# \textohtmlindex command just before the appropriate environments
-# to force sectioning.
-sub add_bbl_and_idx_dummy_commands {
- local($id) = $global{'max_id'};
-
- s/([\\]begin\s*$O\d+$C\s*thebibliography)/$bbl_cnt++; $1/eg;
- ## if ($bbl_cnt == 1) {
- s/([\\]begin\s*$O\d+$C\s*thebibliography)/$id++; "\\bibliography$O$id$C$O$id$C $1"/geo;
- #}
- $global{'max_id'} = $id;
- # KEC. Modified to global substitution to place multiple index tokens.
- s/[\\]begin\s*($O\d+$C)\s*theindex/\\textohtmlindex$1/go;
- # KEC. Modified to pick up the optional argument to \printindex
- s/[\\]printindex\s*(\[.*?\])?/
- do { (defined $1) ? "\\textohtmlindex $1" : "\\textohtmlindex []"; } /ego;
- &lib_add_bbl_and_idx_dummy_commands() if defined(&lib_add_bbl_and_idx_dummy_commands);
-}
-
-# KEC. Copied from latex2html.pl and modified to support multiple indices.
-# For each textohtmlindex mark found, determine the index titles and headers.
-# We place the index ref in the header so the proper index can be generated later.
-# For the default index, the index ref is blank.
-#
-# One problem is that this routine is called twice.. Once for processing the
-# command as originally seen, and once for processing the command when
-# doing the name for the index file. We can detect that by looking at the
-# id numbers (or ref) surrounding the \theindex command, and not incrementing
-# index_number unless a new id (or ref) is seen. This has the side effect of
-# having to unconventionally start the index_number at -1. But it works.
-#
-# Gets the title from the list of indices.
-# If this is the first index, save the title in $first_idx_file. This is what's referenced
-# in the navigation buttons.
-# Increment the index_number for next time.
-# If the indexname command is defined or a newcommand defined for indexname, do it.
-# Save the index TITLE in the toc
-# Save the first_idx_file into the idxfile. This goes into the nav buttons.
-# Build index_labels if needed.
-# Create the index headings and put them in the output stream.
-
-{ my $index_number = 0; # Will be incremented before use.
- my $first_idx_file; # Static
- my $no_increment = 0;
-
-sub do_cmd_textohtmlindex {
- local($_) = @_;
- my ($idxref,$idxnum,$index_name);
-
- # We get called from make_name with the first argument = "\001noincrement". This is a sign
- # to not increment $index_number the next time we are called. We get called twice, once
- # my make_name and once by process_command. Unfortunately, make_name calls us just to set the name
- # but doesn't use the result so we get called a second time by process_command. This works fine
- # except for cases where there are multiple indices except if they aren't named, which is the case
- # when the index is inserted by an include command in latex. In these cases we are only able to use
- # the index number to decide which index to draw from, and we don't know how to increment that index
- # number if we get called a variable number of times for the same index, as is the case between
- # making html (one output file) and web (multiple output files) output formats.
- if (/\001noincrement/) {
- $no_increment = 1;
- return;
- }
-
- # Remove (but save) the index reference
- s/^\s*\[(.*?)\]/{$idxref = $1; "";}/e;
-
- # If we have an $idxref, the index name was specified. In this case, we have all the
- # information we need to carry on. Otherwise, we need to get the idxref
- # from the $index_number and set the name to "Index".
- if ($idxref) {
- $index_name = $indices{'title'}{$idxref};
- } else {
- if (defined ($idxref = $indices{'newcmdorder'}->[$index_number])) {
- $index_name = $indices{'title'}{$idxref};
- } else {
- $idxref = '';
- $index_name = "Index";
- }
- }
-
- $idx_title = "Index"; # The name displayed in the nav bar text.
-
- # Only set $idxfile if we are at the first index. This will point the
- # navigation panel to the first index file rather than the last.
- $first_idx_file = $CURRENT_FILE if ($index_number == 0);
- $idxfile = $first_idx_file; # Pointer for the Index button in the nav bar.
- $toc_sec_title = $index_name; # Index link text in the toc.
- $TITLE = $toc_sec_title; # Title for this index, from which its filename is built.
- if (%index_labels) { &make_index_labels(); }
- if (($SHORT_INDEX) && (%index_segment)) { &make_preindex(); }
- else { $preindex = ''; }
- local $idx_head = $section_headings{'textohtmlindex'};
- local($heading) = join(''
- , &make_section_heading($TITLE, $idx_head)
- , $idx_mark, "\002", $idxref, "\002" );
- local($pre,$post) = &minimize_open_tags($heading);
- $index_number++ unless ($no_increment);
- $no_increment = 0;
- join('',"<BR>\n" , $pre, $_);
-}
-}
-
-# Returns an index key, given the key passed as the first argument.
-# Not modified for multiple indices.
-sub add_idx_key {
- local($key) = @_;
- local($index, $next);
- if (($index{$key} eq '@' )&&(!($index_printed{$key}))) {
- if ($SHORT_INDEX) { $index .= "<DD><BR>\n<DT>".&print_key."\n<DD>"; }
- else { $index .= "<DT><DD><BR>\n<DT>".&print_key."\n<DD>"; }
- } elsif (($index{$key})&&(!($index_printed{$key}))) {
- if ($SHORT_INDEX) {
- $next = "<DD>".&print_key."\n : ". &print_idx_links;
- } else {
- $next = "<DT>".&print_key."\n<DD>". &print_idx_links;
- }
- $index .= $next."\n";
- $index_printed{$key} = 1;
- }
-
- if ($sub_index{$key}) {
- local($subkey, @subkeys, $subnext, $subindex);
- @subkeys = sort(split("\004", $sub_index{$key}));
- if ($SHORT_INDEX) {
- $index .= "<DD>".&print_key unless $index_printed{$key};
- $index .= "<DL>\n";
- } else {
- $index .= "<DT>".&print_key."\n<DD>" unless $index_printed{$key};
- $index .= "<DL COMPACT>\n";
- }
- foreach $subkey (@subkeys) {
- $index .= &add_sub_idx_key($subkey) unless ($index_printed{$subkey});
- }
- $index .= "</DL>\n";
- }
- return $index;
-}
-
-1; # Must be present as the last line.
+++ /dev/null
-# This file serves as a place to put initialization code and constants to
-# affect the behavior of latex2html for generating the bacula manuals.
-
-# $LINKPOINT specifies what filename to use to link to when creating
-# index.html. Not that this is a hard link.
-$LINKPOINT='"$OVERALL_TITLE"';
-
-
-# The following must be the last line of this file.
-1;
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\section*{GNU Lesser General Public License}
-\label{LesserChapter}
-\index[general]{GNU Lesser General Public License }
-\index[general]{License!GNU Lesser General Public }
-
-\elink{image of a Philosophical GNU}
-{\url{http://www.gnu.org/graphics/philosophicalgnu.html}} [
-\elink{English}{\url{http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/lesser.html}} |
-\elink{Japanese}{\url{http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/lesser.ja.html}} ]
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item
- \elink{Why you shouldn't use the Lesser GPL for your next
- library}{\url{http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html}}
-\item
- \elink{What to do if you see a possible LGPL
- violation}{\url{http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl-violation.html}}
-\item
- \elink{Translations of the LGPL}
-{\url{http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/copyleft.html\#translationsLGPL}}
-\item The GNU Lesser General Public License as a
- \elink{text file}{\url{http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/lesser.txt}}
-\item The GNU Lesser General Public License as a
- \elink{Texinfo}{\url{http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/lesser.texi}} file
- \end{itemize}
-
-
-This GNU Lesser General Public License counts as the successor of the GNU
-Library General Public License. For an explanation of why this change was
-necessary, read the
-\elink{Why you shouldn't use the Lesser GPL for your next
-library}{\url{http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html}} article.
-
-\section{Table of Contents}
-\index[general]{Table of Contents }
-\index[general]{Contents!Table of }
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item
- \label{TOC12}
- \ilink{GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE}{SEC12}
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item
- \label{TOC23}
- \ilink{Preamble}{SEC23}
-\item
- \label{TOC34}
- \ilink{TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
-MODIFICATION}{SEC34}
-\item
- \label{TOC45}
- \ilink{How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries}{SEC45}
-\end{itemize}
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-
-\section{GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE}
-\label{SEC12}
-\index[general]{LICENSE!GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC }
-\index[general]{GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE }
-
-Version 2.1, February 1999
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
-Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
-of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
-[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts
- as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence
- the version number 2.1.]
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{Preamble}
-\label{SEC23}
-\index[general]{Preamble }
-
-The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share
-and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to
-guarantee your freedom to share and change free software\verb:--:to make sure the
-software is free for all its users.
-
-This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially
-designated software packages\verb:--:typically libraries\verb:--:of the Free Software
-Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we
-suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary
-General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case,
-based on the explanations below.
-
-When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price.
-Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the
-freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if
-you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you
-can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that
-you are informed that you can do these things.
-
-To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors
-to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These
-restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute
-copies of the library or if you modify it.
-
-For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a
-fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must
-make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link
-other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the
-recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes
-to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they
-know their rights.
-
-We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library,
-and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy,
-distribute and/or modify the library.
-
-To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no
-warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone
-else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the
-original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be
-affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
-
-Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free
-program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the
-users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent
-holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of
-the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this
-license.
-
-Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU
-General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License,
-applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the
-ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in
-order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
-
-When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared
-library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a
-derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License
-therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its
-criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax
-criteria for linking other code with the library.
-
-We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does
-Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License.
-It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over
-competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the
-ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser
-license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
-
-For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the
-widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto
-standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the
-library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as
-widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by
-limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General
-Public License.
-
-In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs
-enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For
-example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many
-more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the
-GNU/Linux operating system.
-
-Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users'
-freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the
-Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a
-modified version of the Library.
-
-The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification
-follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the
-library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code
-derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library
-in order to run.
-
-\section{TERMS AND CONDITIONS}
-\label{SEC34}
-\index[general]{CONDITIONS!TERMS AND }
-\index[general]{TERMS AND CONDITIONS }
-
-TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
-
-{\bf 0.} This License Agreement applies to any software library or other
-program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other
-authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser
-General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is
-addressed as "you".
-
-A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so
-as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of
-those functions and data) to form executables.
-
-The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has
-been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means
-either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say,
-a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
-modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language.
-(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term
-"modification".)
-
-"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making
-modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source
-code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition
-files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
-library.
-
-Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered
-by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program
-using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered
-only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of
-the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends
-on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
-
-{\bf 1.} You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete
-source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously
-and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and
-disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License
-and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License
-along with the Library.
-
-You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may
-at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
-
-{\bf 2.} You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of
-it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such
-modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you
-also meet all of these conditions:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item {\bf a)} The modified work must itself be a software library.
-\item {\bf b)} You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices
- stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
-\item {\bf c)} You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
- charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
-\item {\bf d)} If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or
- a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the
- facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then
-you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application
-does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and
-performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
-
-(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose
-that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore,
-Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used
-by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the
-square root function must still compute square roots.)
-
-These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable
-sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably
-considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License,
-and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
-separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole
-which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be
-on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to
-the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
-it.
-
-Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your
-rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the
-right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on
-the Library.
-
-In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with
-the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or
-distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this
-License.
-\end{itemize}
-
-{\bf 3.} You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
-License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this,
-you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer
-to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this
-License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public
-License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.)
-Do not make any other change in these notices.
-
-Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so
-the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and
-derivative works made from that copy.
-
-This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library
-into a program that is not a library.
-
-{\bf 4.} You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative
-of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
-Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete
-corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under
-the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
-interchange.
-
-If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a
-designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from
-the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even
-though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the
-object code.
-
-{\bf 5.} A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library,
-but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it,
-is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not
-a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of
-this License.
-
-However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an
-executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions
-of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable
-is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution
-of such executables.
-
-When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is
-part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of
-the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is
-especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if
-the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not
-precisely defined by law.
-
-If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts
-and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less
-in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of
-whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object
-code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
-
-Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the
-object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables
-containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked
-directly with the Library itself.
-
-{\bf 6.} As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a
-"work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing
-portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice,
-provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own
-use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
-
-You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is
-used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You
-must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays
-copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among
-them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License.
-Also, you must do one of these things:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item {\bf a)} Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
- machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were
- used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above);
-and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete
-machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source
-code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a
-modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that
-the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will
-not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified
-definitions.)
-\item {\bf b)} Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the
- Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the
- library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying
-library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a
-modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the
-modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was
-made with.
-\item {\bf c)} Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least
- three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a,
- above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.
-\item {\bf d)} If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy
- from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified
- materials from the same place.
-\item {\bf e)} Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
- materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
- \end{itemize}
-
-For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library"
-must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the
-executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be
-distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either
-source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on)
-of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
-itself accompanies the executable.
-
-It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of
-other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating
-system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library
-together in an executable that you distribute.
-
-{\bf 7.} You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library
-side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not
-covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that
-the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other
-library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two
-things:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item {\bf a)} Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
- based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must
- be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
-\item {\bf b)} Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
- that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find
- the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
-\end{itemize}
-
-{\bf 8.} You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the
-Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise
-to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and
-will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties
-who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have
-their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
-
-{\bf 9.} You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
-signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute
-the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if
-you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
-Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of
-this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
-distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
-
-{\bf 10.} Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
-Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original
-licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these
-terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the
-recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for
-enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
-
-{\bf 11.} If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
-infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
-conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise)
-that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from
-the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy
-simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
-obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all.
-For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution
-of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through
-you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
-refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
-
-If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
-particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and
-the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
-
-It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or
-other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this
-section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software
-distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many
-people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software
-distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
-system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to
-distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that
-choice.
-
-This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a
-consequence of the rest of this License.
-
-{\bf 12.} If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
-certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original
-copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit
-geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that
-distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In
-such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body
-of this License.
-
-{\bf 13.} The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
-of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
-be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
-address new problems or concerns.
-
-Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library
-specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later
-version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
-that version or of any later version published by the Free Software
-Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may
-choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
-
-{\bf 14.} If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
-programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to
-the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the
-Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
-make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of
-preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
-promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
-
-{\bf NO WARRANTY}
-
-{\bf 15.} BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
-FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
-OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE
-THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR
-IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
-MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
-THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY
-PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
-CORRECTION.
-
-{\bf 16.} IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
-WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
-REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
-INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
-OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
-LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
-THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE),
-EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGES.
-
-END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
-
-\section{How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries}
-\label{SEC45}
-\index[general]{Libraries!How to Apply These Terms to Your New }
-\index[general]{How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries }
-
-
-If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible
-use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can
-redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under
-these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public
-License).
-
-To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is
-safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
-convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
-"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-{\it one line to give the library's name and an idea of what it does.}
-Copyright (C) {\it year} {\it name of author}
-This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
-modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
-License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
-version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
-Lesser General Public License for more details.
-You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
-License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software
-Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301
-USA
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
-
-You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
-school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if
-necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in
-the library "Frob" (a library for tweaking knobs) written
-by James Random Hacker.
-{\it signature of Ty Coon}, 1 April 1990
-Ty Coon, President of Vice
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-That's all there is to it!
-Return to
-\elink{GNU's home page}{\url{http://www.gnu.org/home.html}}.
-
-FSF \& GNU inquiries \& questions to
-\elink{gnu@gnu.org}{mailto:gnu@gnu.org}. Other
-\elink{ways to contact}{\url{http://www.gnu.org/home.html\#ContactInfo}} the FSF.
-
-Comments on these web pages to
-\elink{webmasters@www.gnu.org}{mailto:webmasters@www.gnu.org}, send other
-questions to
-\elink{gnu@gnu.org}{mailto:gnu@gnu.org}.
-
-Copyright notice above.
-Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor,
-Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
-USA
-
-Updated: 27 Nov 2000 paulv
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Bacula Copyright, Trademark, and Licenses}
-\label{LicenseChapter}
-\index[general]{Licenses!Bacula Copyright Trademark}
-\index[general]{Bacula Copyright, Trademark, and Licenses}
-
-There are a number of different licenses that are used in Bacula.
-If you have a printed copy of this manual, the details of each of
-the licenses referred to in this chapter can be found in the
-online version of the manual at
-\elink{http://www.bacula.org}{\url{http://www.bacula.org}}.
-
-\section{FDL}
-\index[general]{FDL }
-
-The GNU Free Documentation License (FDL) is used for this manual,
-which is a free and open license. This means that you may freely
-reproduce it and even make changes to it. However, rather than
-distribute your own version of this manual, we would much prefer
-if you would send any corrections or changes to the Bacula project.
-
-The most recent version of the manual can always be found online
-at \elink{http://www.bacula.org}{\url{http://www.bacula.org}}.
-
-\section{GPL}
-\index[general]{GPL }
-
-The vast bulk of the source code is released under the
-\ilink{GNU General Public License version 2.}{GplChapter}.
-
-Most of this code is copyrighted: Copyright \copyright 2000-2009
-Free Software Foundation Europe e.V.
-
-Portions may be copyrighted by other people. These files are released
-under different licenses which are compatible with the Bacula GPLv2 license.
-
-\section{LGPL}
-\index[general]{LGPL }
-
-Some of the Bacula library source code is released under the
-\ilink{GNU Lesser General Public License.}{LesserChapter} This
-permits third parties to use these parts of our code in their proprietary
-programs to interface to Bacula.
-
-\section{Public Domain}
-\index[general]{Domain!Public }
-\index[general]{Public Domain }
-
-Some of the Bacula code, or code that Bacula references, has been released
-to the public domain. E.g. md5.c, SQLite.
-
-\section{Trademark}
-\index[general]{Trademark }
-
-Bacula\raisebox{.6ex}{\textsuperscript{\textregistered}} is a registered
-trademark of Kern Sibbald.
-
-We have trademarked the Bacula name to ensure that any program using the
-name Bacula will be exactly compatible with the program that we have
-released. The use of the name Bacula is restricted to software systems
-that agree exactly with the program presented here. If you have made
-modifications to the Bacula source code that alter in any significant
-way the way the program functions, you may not distribute it using the
-Bacula name.
-
-\section{Fiduciary License Agreement}
-\index[general]{Fiduciary License Agreement }
-Developers who have contributed significant changes to the Bacula code
-should have signed a Fiduciary License Agreement (FLA), which
-guarantees them the right to use the code they have developed, and also
-ensures that the Free Software Foundation Europe (and thus the Bacula
-project) has the rights to the code. This Fiduciary License Agreement
-is found on the Bacula web site at:
-
-\elink{http://www.bacula.org/en/FLA-bacula.en.pdf}{\url{http://www.bacula.org/en/FLA-bacula.en.pdf}}
-
-and if you are submitting code, you should fill it out then sent to:
-
-\begin{quote}
- Kern Sibbald \\
- Cotes-de-Montmoiret 9 \\
- 1012 Lausanne \\
- Switzerland \\
-\end{quote}
-
-When you send in such a
-complete document, please notify me: kern at sibbald dot com.
-
-
-\section{Disclaimer}
-\index[general]{Disclaimer }
-
-NO WARRANTY
-
-BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
-PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
-STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
-PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
-INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
-FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
-PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,
-YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
-
-IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
-COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
-PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
-GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE
-OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR
-DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR
-A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH
-HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+++ /dev/null
-
-\chapter{Migration and Copy}
-\label{MigrationChapter}
-\index[general]{Migration}
-\index[general]{Copy}
-
-The term Migration, as used in the context of Bacula, means moving data from
-one Volume to another. In particular it refers to a Job (similar to a backup
-job) that reads data that was previously backed up to a Volume and writes
-it to another Volume. As part of this process, the File catalog records
-associated with the first backup job are purged. In other words, Migration
-moves Bacula Job data from one Volume to another by reading the Job data
-from the Volume it is stored on, writing it to a different Volume in a
-different Pool, and then purging the database records for the first Job.
-
-The Copy process is essentially identical to the Migration feature with the
-exception that the Job that is copied is left unchanged. This essentially
-creates two identical copies of the same backup. However, the copy is treated
-as a copy rather than a backup job, and hence is not directly available for
-restore. If bacula founds a copy when a job record is purged (deleted) from the
-catalog, it will promote the copy as \textsl{real} backup and will make it
-available for automatic restore.
-
-The Copy and the Migration jobs run without using the File daemon by copying
-the data from the old backup Volume to a different Volume in a different Pool.
-
-The section process for which Job or Jobs are migrated
-can be based on quite a number of different criteria such as:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item a single previous Job
-\item a Volume
-\item a Client
-\item a regular expression matching a Job, Volume, or Client name
-\item the time a Job has been on a Volume
-\item high and low water marks (usage or occupation) of a Pool
-\item Volume size
-\end{itemize}
-
-The details of these selection criteria will be defined below.
-
-To run a Migration job, you must first define a Job resource very similar
-to a Backup Job but with {\bf Type = Migrate} instead of {\bf Type =
-Backup}. One of the key points to remember is that the Pool that is
-specified for the migration job is the only pool from which jobs will
-be migrated, with one exception noted below. In addition, the Pool to
-which the selected Job or Jobs will be migrated is defined by the {\bf
-Next Pool = ...} in the Pool resource specified for the Migration Job.
-
-Bacula permits Pools to contain Volumes with different Media Types.
-However, when doing migration, this is a very undesirable condition. For
-migration to work properly, you should use Pools containing only Volumes of
-the same Media Type for all migration jobs.
-
-The migration job normally is either manually started or starts
-from a Schedule much like a backup job. It searches
-for a previous backup Job or Jobs that match the parameters you have
-specified in the migration Job resource, primarily a {\bf Selection Type}
-(detailed a bit later). Then for
-each previous backup JobId found, the Migration Job will run a new Job which
-copies the old Job data from the previous Volume to a new Volume in
-the Migration Pool. It is possible that no prior Jobs are found for
-migration, in which case, the Migration job will simply terminate having
-done nothing, but normally at a minimum, three jobs are involved during a
-migration:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The currently running Migration control Job. This is only
- a control job for starting the migration child jobs.
-\item The previous Backup Job (already run). The File records
- for this Job are purged if the Migration job successfully
- terminates. The original data remains on the Volume until
- it is recycled and rewritten.
-\item A new Migration Backup Job that moves the data from the
- previous Backup job to the new Volume. If you subsequently
- do a restore, the data will be read from this Job.
-\end{itemize}
-
-If the Migration control job finds a number of JobIds to migrate (e.g.
-it is asked to migrate one or more Volumes), it will start one new
-migration backup job for each JobId found on the specified Volumes.
-Please note that Migration doesn't scale too well since Migrations are
-done on a Job by Job basis. This if you select a very large volume or
-a number of volumes for migration, you may have a large number of
-Jobs that start. Because each job must read the same Volume, they will
-run consecutively (not simultaneously).
-
-\section{Migration and Copy Job Resource Directives}
-
-The following directives can appear in a Director's Job resource, and they
-are used to define a Migration job.
-
-\begin{description}
-\item [Pool = \lt{}Pool-name\gt{}] The Pool specified in the Migration
- control Job is not a new directive for the Job resource, but it is
- particularly important because it determines what Pool will be examined
- for finding JobIds to migrate. The exception to this is when {\bf
- Selection Type = SQLQuery}, and although a Pool directive must still be
- specified, no Pool is used, unless you specifically include it in the
- SQL query. Note, in any case, the Pool resource defined by the Pool
- directove must contain a {\bf Next Pool = ...} directive to define the
- Pool to which the data will be migrated.
-
-\item [Type = Migrate]
- {\bf Migrate} is a new type that defines the job that is run as being a
- Migration Job. A Migration Job is a sort of control job and does not have
- any Files associated with it, and in that sense they are more or less like
- an Admin job. Migration jobs simply check to see if there is anything to
- Migrate then possibly start and control new Backup jobs to migrate the data
- from the specified Pool to another Pool. Note, any original JobId that
- is migrated will be marked as having been migrated, and the original
- JobId can nolonger be used for restores; all restores will be done from
- the new migrated Job.
-
-
-\item [Type = Copy]
- {\bf Copy} is a new type that defines the job that is run as being a
- Copy Job. A Copy Job is a sort of control job and does not have
- any Files associated with it, and in that sense they are more or less like
- an Admin job. Copy jobs simply check to see if there is anything to
- Copy then possibly start and control new Backup jobs to copy the data
- from the specified Pool to another Pool. Note that when a copy is
- made, the original JobIds are left unchanged. The new copies can not
- be used for restoration unless you specifically choose them by JobId.
- If you subsequently delete a JobId that has a copy, the copy will be
- automatically upgraded to a Backup rather than a Copy, and it will
- subsequently be used for restoration.
-
-\item [Selection Type = \lt{}Selection-type-keyword\gt{}]
- The \lt{}Selection-type-keyword\gt{} determines how the migration job
- will go about selecting what JobIds to migrate. In most cases, it is
- used in conjunction with a {\bf Selection Pattern} to give you fine
- control over exactly what JobIds are selected. The possible values
- for \lt{}Selection-type-keyword\gt{} are:
- \begin{description}
- \item [SmallestVolume] This selection keyword selects the volume with the
- fewest bytes from the Pool to be migrated. The Pool to be migrated
- is the Pool defined in the Migration Job resource. The migration
- control job will then start and run one migration backup job for
- each of the Jobs found on this Volume. The Selection Pattern, if
- specified, is not used.
-
- \item [OldestVolume] This selection keyword selects the volume with the
- oldest last write time in the Pool to be migrated. The Pool to be
- migrated is the Pool defined in the Migration Job resource. The
- migration control job will then start and run one migration backup
- job for each of the Jobs found on this Volume. The Selection
- Pattern, if specified, is not used.
-
- \item [Client] The Client selection type, first selects all the Clients
- that have been backed up in the Pool specified by the Migration
- Job resource, then it applies the {\bf Selection Pattern} (defined
- below) as a regular expression to the list of Client names, giving
- a filtered Client name list. All jobs that were backed up for those
- filtered (regexed) Clients will be migrated.
- The migration control job will then start and run one migration
- backup job for each of the JobIds found for those filtered Clients.
-
- \item [Volume] The Volume selection type, first selects all the Volumes
- that have been backed up in the Pool specified by the Migration
- Job resource, then it applies the {\bf Selection Pattern} (defined
- below) as a regular expression to the list of Volume names, giving
- a filtered Volume list. All JobIds that were backed up for those
- filtered (regexed) Volumes will be migrated.
- The migration control job will then start and run one migration
- backup job for each of the JobIds found on those filtered Volumes.
-
- \item [Job] The Job selection type, first selects all the Jobs (as
- defined on the {\bf Name} directive in a Job resource)
- that have been backed up in the Pool specified by the Migration
- Job resource, then it applies the {\bf Selection Pattern} (defined
- below) as a regular expression to the list of Job names, giving
- a filtered Job name list. All JobIds that were run for those
- filtered (regexed) Job names will be migrated. Note, for a given
- Job named, they can be many jobs (JobIds) that ran.
- The migration control job will then start and run one migration
- backup job for each of the Jobs found.
-
- \item [SQLQuery] The SQLQuery selection type, used the {\bf Selection
- Pattern} as an SQL query to obtain the JobIds to be migrated.
- The Selection Pattern must be a valid SELECT SQL statement for your
- SQL engine, and it must return the JobId as the first field
- of the SELECT.
-
- \item [PoolOccupancy] This selection type will cause the Migration job
- to compute the total size of the specified pool for all Media Types
- combined. If it exceeds the {\bf Migration High Bytes} defined in
- the Pool, the Migration job will migrate all JobIds beginning with
- the oldest Volume in the pool (determined by Last Write time) until
- the Pool bytes drop below the {\bf Migration Low Bytes} defined in the
- Pool. This calculation should be consider rather approximative because
- it is made once by the Migration job before migration is begun, and
- thus does not take into account additional data written into the Pool
- during the migration. In addition, the calculation of the total Pool
- byte size is based on the Volume bytes saved in the Volume (Media)
-database
- entries. The bytes calculate for Migration is based on the value stored
- in the Job records of the Jobs to be migrated. These do not include the
- Storage daemon overhead as is in the total Pool size. As a consequence,
- normally, the migration will migrate more bytes than strictly necessary.
-
- \item [PoolTime] The PoolTime selection type will cause the Migration job to
- look at the time each JobId has been in the Pool since the job ended.
- All Jobs in the Pool longer than the time specified on {\bf Migration Time}
- directive in the Pool resource will be migrated.
-
- \item [PoolUncopiedJobs] This selection which copies all jobs from a pool
- to an other pool which were not copied before is available only for copy Jobs.
-
- \end{description}
-
-\item [Selection Pattern = \lt{}Quoted-string\gt{}]
- The Selection Patterns permitted for each Selection-type-keyword are
- described above.
-
- For the OldestVolume and SmallestVolume, this
- Selection pattern is not used (ignored).
-
- For the Client, Volume, and Job
- keywords, this pattern must be a valid regular expression that will filter
- the appropriate item names found in the Pool.
-
- For the SQLQuery keyword, this pattern must be a valid SELECT SQL statement
- that returns JobIds.
-
-\end{description}
-
-\section{Migration Pool Resource Directives}
-
-The following directives can appear in a Director's Pool resource, and they
-are used to define a Migration job.
-
-\begin{description}
-\item [Migration Time = \lt{}time-specification\gt{}]
- If a PoolTime migration is done, the time specified here in seconds (time
- modifiers are permitted -- e.g. hours, ...) will be used. If the
- previous Backup Job or Jobs selected have been in the Pool longer than
- the specified PoolTime, then they will be migrated.
-
-\item [Migration High Bytes = \lt{}byte-specification\gt{}]
- This directive specifies the number of bytes in the Pool which will
- trigger a migration if a {\bf PoolOccupancy} migration selection
- type has been specified. The fact that the Pool
- usage goes above this level does not automatically trigger a migration
- job. However, if a migration job runs and has the PoolOccupancy selection
- type set, the Migration High Bytes will be applied. Bacula does not
- currently restrict a pool to have only a single Media Type, so you
- must keep in mind that if you mix Media Types in a Pool, the results
- may not be what you want, as the Pool count of all bytes will be
- for all Media Types combined.
-
-\item [Migration Low Bytes = \lt{}byte-specification\gt{}]
- This directive specifies the number of bytes in the Pool which will
- stop a migration if a {\bf PoolOccupancy} migration selection
- type has been specified and triggered by more than Migration High
- Bytes being in the pool. In other words, once a migration job
- is started with {\bf PoolOccupancy} migration selection and it
- determines that there are more than Migration High Bytes, the
- migration job will continue to run jobs until the number of
- bytes in the Pool drop to or below Migration Low Bytes.
-
-\item [Next Pool = \lt{}pool-specification\gt{}]
- The Next Pool directive specifies the pool to which Jobs will be
- migrated. This directive is required to define the Pool into which
- the data will be migrated. Without this directive, the migration job
- will terminate in error.
-
-\item [Storage = \lt{}storage-specification\gt{}]
- The Storage directive specifies what Storage resource will be used
- for all Jobs that use this Pool. It takes precedence over any other
- Storage specifications that may have been given such as in the
- Schedule Run directive, or in the Job resource. We highly recommend
- that you define the Storage resource to be used in the Pool rather
- than elsewhere (job, schedule run, ...).
-\end{description}
-
-\section{Important Migration Considerations}
-\index[general]{Important Migration Considerations}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Each Pool into which you migrate Jobs or Volumes {\bf must}
- contain Volumes of only one Media Type.
-
-\item Migration takes place on a JobId by JobId basis. That is
- each JobId is migrated in its entirety and independently
- of other JobIds. Once the Job is migrated, it will be
- on the new medium in the new Pool, but for the most part,
- aside from having a new JobId, it will appear with all the
- same characteristics of the original job (start, end time, ...).
- The column RealEndTime in the catalog Job table will contain the
- time and date that the Migration terminated, and by comparing
- it with the EndTime column you can tell whether or not the
- job was migrated. The original job is purged of its File
- records, and its Type field is changed from "B" to "M" to
- indicate that the job was migrated.
-
-\item Jobs on Volumes will be Migration only if the Volume is
- marked, Full, Used, or Error. Volumes that are still
- marked Append will not be considered for migration. This
- prevents Bacula from attempting to read the Volume at
- the same time it is writing it. It also reduces other deadlock
- situations, as well as avoids the problem that you migrate a
- Volume and later find new files appended to that Volume.
-
-\item As noted above, for the Migration High Bytes, the calculation
- of the bytes to migrate is somewhat approximate.
-
-\item If you keep Volumes of different Media Types in the same Pool,
- it is not clear how well migration will work. We recommend only
- one Media Type per pool.
-
-\item It is possible to get into a resource deadlock where Bacula does
- not find enough drives to simultaneously read and write all the
- Volumes needed to do Migrations. For the moment, you must take
- care as all the resource deadlock algorithms are not yet implemented.
-
-\item Migration is done only when you run a Migration job. If you set a
- Migration High Bytes and that number of bytes is exceeded in the Pool
- no migration job will automatically start. You must schedule the
- migration jobs, and they must run for any migration to take place.
-
-\item If you migrate a number of Volumes, a very large number of Migration
- jobs may start.
-
-\item Figuring out what jobs will actually be migrated can be a bit complicated
- due to the flexibility provided by the regex patterns and the number of
- different options. Turning on a debug level of 100 or more will provide
- a limited amount of debug information about the migration selection
- process.
-
-\item Bacula currently does only minimal Storage conflict resolution, so you
- must take care to ensure that you don't try to read and write to the
- same device or Bacula may block waiting to reserve a drive that it
- will never find. In general, ensure that all your migration
- pools contain only one Media Type, and that you always
- migrate to pools with different Media Types.
-
-\item The {\bf Next Pool = ...} directive must be defined in the Pool
- referenced in the Migration Job to define the Pool into which the
- data will be migrated.
-
-\item Pay particular attention to the fact that data is migrated on a Job
- by Job basis, and for any particular Volume, only one Job can read
- that Volume at a time (no simultaneous read), so migration jobs that
- all reference the same Volume will run sequentially. This can be a
- potential bottle neck and does not scale very well to large numbers
- of jobs.
-
-\item Only migration of Selection Types of Job and Volume have
- been carefully tested. All the other migration methods (time,
- occupancy, smallest, oldest, ...) need additional testing.
-
-\item Migration is only implemented for a single Storage daemon. You
- cannot read on one Storage daemon and write on another.
-\end{itemize}
-
-
-\section{Example Migration Jobs}
-\index[general]{Example Migration Jobs}
-
-When you specify a Migration Job, you must specify all the standard
-directives as for a Job. However, certain such as the Level, Client, and
-FileSet, though they must be defined, are ignored by the Migration job
-because the values from the original job used instead.
-
-As an example, suppose you have the following Job that
-you run every night. To note: there is no Storage directive in the
-Job resource; there is a Storage directive in each of the Pool
-resources; the Pool to be migrated (File) contains a Next Pool
-directive that defines the output Pool (where the data is written
-by the migration job).
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-# Define the backup Job
-Job {
- Name = "NightlySave"
- Type = Backup
- Level = Incremental # default
- Client=rufus-fd
- FileSet="Full Set"
- Schedule = "WeeklyCycle"
- Messages = Standard
- Pool = Default
-}
-
-# Default pool definition
-Pool {
- Name = Default
- Pool Type = Backup
- AutoPrune = yes
- Recycle = yes
- Next Pool = Tape
- Storage = File
- LabelFormat = "File"
-}
-
-# Tape pool definition
-Pool {
- Name = Tape
- Pool Type = Backup
- AutoPrune = yes
- Recycle = yes
- Storage = DLTDrive
-}
-
-# Definition of File storage device
-Storage {
- Name = File
- Address = rufus
- Password = "ccV3lVTsQRsdIUGyab0N4sMDavui2hOBkmpBU0aQKOr9"
- Device = "File" # same as Device in Storage daemon
- Media Type = File # same as MediaType in Storage daemon
-}
-
-# Definition of DLT tape storage device
-Storage {
- Name = DLTDrive
- Address = rufus
- Password = "ccV3lVTsQRsdIUGyab0N4sMDavui2hOBkmpBU0aQKOr9"
- Device = "HP DLT 80" # same as Device in Storage daemon
- Media Type = DLT8000 # same as MediaType in Storage daemon
-}
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Where we have included only the essential information -- i.e. the
-Director, FileSet, Catalog, Client, Schedule, and Messages resources are
-omitted.
-
-As you can see, by running the NightlySave Job, the data will be backed up
-to File storage using the Default pool to specify the Storage as File.
-
-Now, if we add the following Job resource to this conf file.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Job {
- Name = "migrate-volume"
- Type = Migrate
- Level = Full
- Client = rufus-fd
- FileSet = "Full Set"
- Messages = Standard
- Pool = Default
- Maximum Concurrent Jobs = 4
- Selection Type = Volume
- Selection Pattern = "File"
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-and then run the job named {\bf migrate-volume}, all volumes in the Pool
-named Default (as specified in the migrate-volume Job that match the
-regular expression pattern {\bf File} will be migrated to tape storage
-DLTDrive because the {\bf Next Pool} in the Default Pool specifies that
-Migrations should go to the pool named {\bf Tape}, which uses
-Storage {\bf DLTDrive}.
-
-If instead, we use a Job resource as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Job {
- Name = "migrate"
- Type = Migrate
- Level = Full
- Client = rufus-fd
- FileSet="Full Set"
- Messages = Standard
- Pool = Default
- Maximum Concurrent Jobs = 4
- Selection Type = Job
- Selection Pattern = ".*Save"
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-All jobs ending with the name Save will be migrated from the File Default to
-the Tape Pool, or from File storage to Tape storage.
+++ /dev/null
-#!/bin/sh
-#
-# Bacula interface to mtx autoloader
-#
-# Created OCT/31/03 by Alexander Kuehn, derived from Ludwig Jaffe's script
-#
-# Works with the HP C1537A L708 DDS3
-#
-#set -x
-# these are the labels of the tapes in each virtual slot, not the slots!
-labels="PSE-0001 PSE-0002 PSE-0003 PSE-0004 PSE-0005 PSE-0006 PSE-0007 PSE-0008 PSE-0009 PSE-0010 PSE-0011 PSE-0012"
-
-# who to send a mail to?
-recipient=root@localhost
-logfile=/var/log/mtx.log
-
-# Delay in seconds how often to check whether a new tape has been inserted
-TAPEDELAY=10 # the default is every 10 seconds
-echo `date` ":" $@ >>$logfile
-
-# change this if mt is not in the path (use different quotes!)
-mt=`which mt`
-grep=`which grep`
-#
-# how to run the console application?
-console="/usr/local/sbin/console -c /usr/local/etc/console.conf"
-
-command="$1"
-
-#TAPEDRIVE0 holds the device/name of your 1st and only drive (Bacula supports only 1 drive currently)
-#Read TAPEDRIVE from command line parameters
-if [ -z "$2" ] ; then
- TAPEDRIVE0=/dev/nsa0
-else
- TAPEDRIVE0=$2
-fi
-
-#Read slot from command line parameters
-if [ -z "$3" ] ; then
- slot=`expr 1`
-else
- slot=`expr $3`
-fi
-
-if [ -z "$command" ] ; then
- echo ""
- echo "The mtx-changer script for Bacula"
- echo "---------------------------------"
- echo ""
- echo "usage: mtx-changer <command> <devicename of tapedrive> [slot]"
- echo " mtx-changer"
- echo ""
- echo "Valid commands:"
- echo ""
- echo "unload Unloads a tape into the slot"
- echo " from where it was loaded."
- echo "load <slot> Loads a tape from the slot <slot>"
- echo "list Lists full storage slots"
- echo "loaded Gives slot from where the tape was loaded."
- echo " 0 means the tape drive is empty."
- echo "slots Gives Number of avialable slots."
- echo "volumes List avialable slots and the label of the."
- echo " tape in it (slot:volume)"
- echo "Example:"
- echo " mtx-changer load /dev/nst0 1 loads a tape from slot1"
- echo " mtx-changer %a %o %S "
- echo ""
- exit 0
-fi
-
-
-case "$command" in
- unload)
- # At first do mt -f /dev/st0 offline to unload the tape
- #
- # Check if you want to fool me
- echo "unmount"|$console >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- echo "mtx-changer: Checking if drive is loaded before we unload. Request unload" >>$logfile
- if $mt -f $TAPEDRIVE0 status >/dev/null 2>/dev/null ; then # mt says status ok
- echo "mtx-changer: Doing mt -f $TAPEDRIVE0 rewoffl to rewind and unload the tape!" >>$logfile
- $mt -f $TAPEDRIVE0 rewoffl
- else
- echo "mtx-changer: *** Don't fool me! *** The Drive $TAPEDRIVE0 is empty." >>$logfile
- fi
- exit 0
- ;;
-
- load)
- #Let's check if drive is loaded before we load it
- echo "mtx-changer: Checking if drive is loaded before we load. I Request loaded" >>$logfile
- LOADEDVOL=`echo "status Storage"|$console|$grep $TAPEDRIVE0|grep ^Device|grep -v "not open."|grep -v "ERR="|grep -v "no Bacula volume is mounted"|sed -e s/^.*Volume\ //|cut -d\" -f2`
-# if [ -z "$LOADEDVOL" ] ; then # this is wrong, becaus Bacula would try to use the tape if we mount it!
-# LOADEDVOL=`echo "mount"|$console|$grep $TAPEDRIVE0|grep Device|grep -v "not open."|grep -v "ERR="|sed -e s/^.*Volume\ //|cut -d\" -f2`
-# if [ -z "$LOADEDVOL" ] ; then
-# echo "mtx-changer: The Drive $TAPEDRIVE0 is empty." >>$logfile
-# else # restore state?
-# if [ $LOADEDVOL = $3 ] ; then # requested Volume mounted -> exit
-# echo "mtx-changer: *** Don't fool me! *** Tape $LOADEDVOL is already in drive $TAPEDRIVE0!" >>$logfile
-# exit
-# else # oops, wrong volume
-# echo "unmount"|$console >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
-# fi
-# fi
-# fi
- if [ -z "$LOADEDVOL" ] ; then
- echo "unmount"|$console >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- LOADEDVOL=0
- else
- #Check if you want to fool me
- if [ $LOADEDVOL = $3 ] ; then
- echo "mtx-changer: *** Don't fool me! *** Tape $LOADEDVOL is already in drive $TAPEDRIVE0!" >>$logfile
- exit
- fi
- echo "mtx-changer: The Drive $TAPEDRIVE0 is loaded with the tape $LOADEDVOL" >>$logfile
- echo "mtx-changer: Unmounting..." >>$logfile
- echo "unmount"|$console >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- fi
- echo "mtx-changer: Unloading..." >>$logfile
- echo "mtx-changer: Doing mt -f $TAPEDRIVE0 rewoffl to rewind and unload the tape!" >>$logfile
- mt -f $TAPEDRIVE0 rewoffl 2>/dev/null
- #Now we can load the drive as desired
- echo "mtx-changer: Doing mtx -f $1 $2 $3" >>$logfile
- # extract label for the mail
- count=`expr 1`
- for label in $labels ; do
- if [ $slot -eq $count ] ; then volume=$label ; fi
- count=`expr $count + 1`
- done
-
- mail -s "Bacula needs volume $volume." $recipient <<END_OF_DATA
-Please insert volume $volume from slot $slot into $TAPEDRIVE0 .
-Kind regards,
-Bacula.
-END_OF_DATA
- sleep 15
- $mt status >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- while [ $? -ne 0 ] ; do
- sleep $TAPEDELAY
- $mt status >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- done
- mail -s "Bacula says thank you." $recipient <<END_OF_DATA
-Thank you for inserting the new tape! (I requested volume $volume from slot $slot.)
-Kind regards,
-Bacula.
-END_OF_DATA
- echo "Successfully loaded a tape into drive $TAPEDRIVE0 (requested $volume from slot $slot)." >>$logfile
- echo "Loading finished." ; >>$logfile
- echo "$slot"
- exit 0
- ;;
-
- list)
- echo "mtx-changer: Requested list" >>$logfile
- LOADEDVOL=`echo "status Storage"|$console|$grep $TAPEDRIVE0|grep ^Device|grep -v "not open."|grep -v "ERR="|grep -v "no Bacula volume is mounted"|sed -e s/^.*Volume\ //|cut -d\" -f2`
- if [ -z $LOADEDVOL ] ; then # try mounting
- LOADEDVOL=`echo "mount"|$console|$grep $TAPEDRIVE0|grep Device|grep -v "not open."|grep -v "ERR="|sed -e s/^.*Volume\ //|cut -d\" -f2`
- if [ -z $LOADEDVOL ] ; then # no luck
- LOADEDVOL="_no_tape"
- else # restore state
- echo "unmount"|$console >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- fi
- fi
- count=`expr 1`
- for label in $labels ; do
- if [ "$label" != "$LOADEDVOL" ] ; then
- printf "$count "
- fi
- count=`expr $count + 1`
- done
- printf "\n"
- ;;
-
- loaded)
- echo "mtx-changer: Request loaded, dev $TAPEDRIVE0" >>$logfile
- LOADEDVOL=`echo "status Storage"|$console|$grep $TAPEDRIVE0|grep ^Device|grep -v "not open."|grep -v "ERR="|grep -v "no Bacula volume is mounted"|sed -e s/^.*Volume\ //|cut -d\" -f2`
- if [ -z $LOADEDVOL ] ; then
- LOADEDVOL=`echo "mount"|$console|$grep $TAPEDRIVE0|grep Device|grep -v "not open."|grep -v "ERR="|grep -v "no Bacula volume is mounted"|sed -e s/^.*Volume\ //|cut -d\" -f2`
- if [ -z "$LOADEDVOL" ] ; then # no luck
- echo "$TAPEDRIVE0 not mounted!" >>$logfile
- else # restore state
- echo "unmount"|$console >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- fi
- fi
- if [ -z "$LOADEDVOL" ] ; then
- LOADEDVOL="_no_tape" >>$logfile
- echo "0"
- else
- count=`expr 1`
- for label in $labels ; do
- if [ $LOADEDVOL = $label ] ; then echo $count ; fi
- count=`expr $count + 1`
- done
- fi
- exit 0
- ;;
-
- slots)
- echo "mtx-changer: Request slots" >>$logfile
- count=`expr 0`
- for label in $labels ; do
- count=`expr $count + 1`
- done
- echo $count
- ;;
-
- volumes)
- echo "mtx-changer: Request volumes" >>$logfile
- count=`expr 1`
- for label in $labels ; do
- printf "$count:$label "
- count=`expr $count + 1`
- done
- printf "\n"
- ;;
-esac
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-
-%%
-
-\chapter{New Features in 3.1.4 (Development Version}
-\label{NewFeaturesChapter}
-
-This chapter presents the new features that are currently under development
-in the 3.1.x versions to be released as Bacula version 3.2.0 sometime in
-late 2009 or early 2010.
-
-\section{Truncate volume after purge}
-\label{sec:actiononpurge}
-
-The Pool directive \textbf{ActionOnPurge=Truncate} instructs Bacula to truncate
-the volume when it is purged. It is useful to prevent disk based volumes from
-consuming too much space.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-Pool {
- Name = Default
- Action On Purge = Truncate
- ...
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\section{Maximum Concurrent Jobs for Devices}
-\label{sec:maximumconcurrentjobdevice}
-
-{\bf Maximum Concurrent Jobs} is a new Device directive in the Storage
-Daemon configuration permits setting the maximum number of Jobs that can
-run concurrently on a specified Device. Using this directive, it is
-possible to have different Jobs using multiple drives, because when the
-Maximum Concurrent Jobs limit is reached, the Storage Daemon will start new
-Jobs on any other available compatible drive. This facilitates writing to
-multiple drives with multiple Jobs that all use the same Pool.
-
-\section{Restore from Multiple Storage Daemons}
-\index[general]{Restore}
-
-Previously, you were able to restore from multiple devices in a single Storage
-Daemon. Now, Bacula is able to restore from multiple Storage Daemons. For
-example, if your full backup runs on a Storage Daemon with an autochanger, and
-your incremental jobs use another Storage Daemon with lots of disks, Bacula
-will switch automatically from one Storage Daemon to an other within the same
-Restore job.
-
-You must upgrade your File Daemon to version 3.1.3 or greater to use this feature.
-
-This project was funded by Bacula Systems with the help of Equiinet.
-
-\section{File Deduplication using Base Jobs}
-A base job is sort of like a Full save except that you will want the FileSet to
-contain only files that are unlikely to change in the future (i.e. a snapshot
-of most of your system after installing it). After the base job has been run,
-when you are doing a Full save, you specify one or more Base jobs to be used.
-All files that have been backed up in the Base job/jobs but not modified will
-then be excluded from the backup. During a restore, the Base jobs will be
-automatically pulled in where necessary.
-
-This is something none of the competition does, as far as we know (except
-perhaps BackupPC, which is a Perl program that saves to disk only). It is big
-win for the user, it makes Bacula stand out as offering a unique optimization
-that immediately saves time and money. Basically, imagine that you have 100
-nearly identical Windows or Linux machine containing the OS and user files.
-Now for the OS part, a Base job will be backed up once, and rather than making
-100 copies of the OS, there will be only one. If one or more of the systems
-have some files updated, no problem, they will be automatically restored.
-
-A new Job directive \texttt{Base=Jobx, Joby...} permits to specify the list of
-files that will be used during Full backup as base.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-Job {
- Name = BackupLinux
- Level= Base
- ...
-}
-
-Job {
- Name = BackupZog4
- Base = BackupZog4, BackupLinux
- Accurate = yes
- ...
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-In this example, the job \texttt{BackupZog4} will use the most recent version
-of all files contained in \texttt{BackupZog4} and \texttt{BackupLinux}
-jobs. Base jobs should have run with \texttt{level=Base} to be used.
-
-By default, Bacula will compare permissions bits, user and group fields,
-modification time, size and the checksum of the file to choose between the
-current backup and the BaseJob file list. You can change this behavior with the
-\texttt{BaseJob} FileSet option. This option works like the \texttt{verify=}
-one, that is described in the \ilink{FileSet}{FileSetResource} chapter.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = Full
- Include = {
- Options {
- BaseJob = pmugcs5
- Accurate = mcs5
- Verify = pin5
- }
- File = /
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-This project was funded by Bacula Systems.
-
-
-\section{Accurate Fileset Options}
-\label{sec:accuratefileset}
-
-In previous versions, the accurate code used the file creation and
-modification times to determine if a file was modified or not. Now you can specify
-which attributes to use (time, size, checksum, permission, owner, group,
-\dots), similar to the Verify options.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = Full
- Include = {
- Options {
- Accurate = mcs5
- Verify = pin5
- }
- File = /
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\begin{description}
-\item {\bf i}
- compare the inodes
-
-\item {\bf p}
- compare the permission bits
-
-\item {\bf n}
- compare the number of links
-
-\item {\bf u}
- compare the user id
-
-\item {\bf g}
- compare the group id
-
-\item {\bf s}
- compare the size
-
-\item {\bf a}
- compare the access time
-
-\item {\bf m}
- compare the modification time (st\_mtime)
-
-\item {\bf c}
- compare the change time (st\_ctime)
-
-\item {\bf d}
- report file size decreases
-
-\item {\bf 5}
- compare the MD5 signature
-
-\item {\bf 1}
- compare the SHA1 signature
-\end{description}
-
-\textbf{Important note:} If you decide to use checksum in Accurate jobs,
-the File Daemon will have to read all files even if they normally would not
-be saved. This increases the I/O load, but also the accuracy of the
-deduplication. By default, Bacula will check modification/creation time
-and size.
-
-\section{Tab-completion for Bconsole}
-\label{sec:tabcompletion}
-
-If you build \texttt{bconsole} with readline support, you will be able to use
-the new auto-completion mode. This mode supports all commands, gives help
-inside command, and lists resources when required.
-
-\section{Bvfs API}
-\label{sec:bvfs}
-
-To help developers of restore GUI interfaces, we have added new \textsl{dot
- commands} that permit browsing the catalog in a very simple way.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item \texttt{.bvfs\_update [jobid=x,y,z]} This command is required to update the
- Bvfs cache in the catalog. You need to run it before any access to the Bvfs
- layer.
-
-\item \texttt{.bvfs\_lsdirs jobid=x,y,z path=/path | pathid=101} This command
- will list all directories in the specified \texttt{path} or
- \texttt{pathid}. Using \texttt{pathid} avoids problems with character
- encoding of path/filenames.
-
-\item \texttt{.bvfs\_lsfiles jobid=x,y,z path=/path | pathid=101} This command
- will list all files in the specified \texttt{path} or \texttt{pathid}. Using
- \texttt{pathid} avoids problems with character encoding.
-\end{itemize}
-
-You can use \texttt{limit=xxx} and \texttt{offset=yyy} to limit the amount of
-data that will be displayed.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-* .bvfs_update jobid=1,2
-* .bvfs_update
-* .bvfs_lsdir path=/ jobid=1,2
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\section{Testing your Tape Drive}
-\label{sec:btapespeed}
-
-To determine the best configuration of your tape drive, you can run the new
-\texttt{speed} command available in the \texttt{btape} program.
-
-This command can have the following arguments:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item[\texttt{file\_size=n}] Specify the Maximum File Size for this test
- (between 1 and 5GB). This counter is in GB.
-\item[\texttt{nb\_file=n}] Specify the number of file to be written. The amount
- of data should be greater than your memory ($file\_size*nb\_file$).
-\item[\texttt{skip\_zero}] This flag permits to skip tests with constant
- data.
-\item[\texttt{skip\_random}] This flag permits to skip tests with random
- data.
-\item[\texttt{skip\_raw}] This flag permits to skip tests with raw access.
-\item[\texttt{skip\_block}] This flag permits to skip tests with Bacula block
- access.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-*speed file_size=3 skip_raw
-btape.c:1078 Test with zero data and bacula block structure.
-btape.c:956 Begin writing 3 files of 3.221 GB with blocks of 129024 bytes.
-++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
-btape.c:604 Wrote 1 EOF to "Drive-0" (/dev/nst0)
-btape.c:406 Volume bytes=3.221 GB. Write rate = 44.128 MB/s
-...
-btape.c:383 Total Volume bytes=9.664 GB. Total Write rate = 43.531 MB/s
-
-btape.c:1090 Test with random data, should give the minimum throughput.
-btape.c:956 Begin writing 3 files of 3.221 GB with blocks of 129024 bytes.
-+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
-btape.c:604 Wrote 1 EOF to "Drive-0" (/dev/nst0)
-btape.c:406 Volume bytes=3.221 GB. Write rate = 7.271 MB/s
-+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
-...
-btape.c:383 Total Volume bytes=9.664 GB. Total Write rate = 7.365 MB/s
-
-\end{verbatim}
-
-When using compression, the random test will give your the minimum throughput
-of your drive . The test using constant string will give you the maximum speed
-of your hardware chain. (cpu, memory, scsi card, cable, drive, tape).
-
-You can change the block size in the Storage Daemon configuration file.
-
-\section{New {\bf Block Checksum} Device Directive}
-You may now turn off the Block Checksum (CRC32) code
-that Bacula uses when writing blocks to a Volume. This is
-done by adding:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-Block Checksum = no
-\end{verbatim}
-
-doing so can reduce the Storage daemon CPU usage slightly. It
-will also permit Bacula to read a Volume that has corrupted data.
-
-The default is {\bf yes} -- i.e. the checksum is computed on write
-and checked on read.
-
-We do not recommend to turn this off particularly on older tape
-drives or for disk Volumes where doing so may allow corrupted data
-to go undetected.
-
-\section{New Bat Features}
-
-\subsection{Media List View}
-
-By clicking on ``Media'', you can see the list of all your volumes. You will be
-able to filter by Pool, Media Type, Location,\dots And sort the result directly
-in the table. The old ``Media'' view is now known as ``Pool''.
-\begin{figure}[htbp]
- \centering
- \includegraphics[width=13cm]{\idir bat-mediaview.eps}
- \label{fig:mediaview}
-\end{figure}
-
-
-\subsection{Media Information View}
-
-By double-clicking on a volume (on the Media list, in the Autochanger content
-or in the Job information panel), you can access a detailed overview of your
-Volume. (cf \ref{fig:mediainfo}.)
-\begin{figure}[htbp]
- \centering
- \includegraphics[width=13cm]{\idir bat11.eps}
- \caption{Media information}
- \label{fig:mediainfo}
-\end{figure}
-
-\subsection{Job Information View}
-
-By double-clicking on a Job record (on the Job run list or in the Media
-information panel), you can access a detailed overview of your Job. (cf
-\ref{fig:jobinfo}.)
-\begin{figure}[htbp]
- \centering
- \includegraphics[width=13cm]{\idir bat12.eps}
- \caption{Job information}
- \label{fig:jobinfo}
-\end{figure}
-
-\subsection{Autochanger Content View}
-
-By double-clicking on a Storage record (on the Storage list panel), you can
-access a detailed overview of your Autochanger. (cf \ref{fig:jobinfo}.)
-\begin{figure}[htbp]
- \centering
- \includegraphics[width=13cm]{\idir bat13.eps}
- \caption{Autochanger content}
- \label{fig:achcontent}
-\end{figure}
-
-\section{Console Timeout Option}
-You can now use the -u option of bconsole to set a timeout for each command.
-
-\chapter{New Features in Released Version 3.0.2}
-
-This chapter presents the new features added to the
-Released Bacula Version 3.0.2.
-
-\section{Full Restore from a Given JobId}
-\index[general]{Restore menu}
-
-This feature allows selecting a single JobId and having Bacula
-automatically select all the other jobs that comprise a full backup up to
-and including the selected date (through JobId).
-
-Assume we start with the following jobs:
-\begin{verbatim}
-+-------+--------------+---------------------+-------+----------+------------+
-| jobid | client | starttime | level | jobfiles | jobbytes |
-+-------+--------------+---------------------+-------+----------+------------
-| 6 | localhost-fd | 2009-07-15 11:45:49 | I | 2 | 0 |
-| 5 | localhost-fd | 2009-07-15 11:45:45 | I | 15 | 44143 |
-| 3 | localhost-fd | 2009-07-15 11:45:38 | I | 1 | 10 |
-| 1 | localhost-fd | 2009-07-15 11:45:30 | F | 1527 | 44143073 |
-+-------+--------------+---------------------+-------+----------+------------+
-\end{verbatim}
-
-Below is an example of this new feature (which is number 12 in the
-menu).
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-* restore
-To select the JobIds, you have the following choices:
- 1: List last 20 Jobs run
- 2: List Jobs where a given File is saved
-...
- 12: Select full restore to a specified Job date
- 13: Cancel
-
-Select item: (1-13): 12
-Enter JobId to get the state to restore: 5
-Selecting jobs to build the Full state at 2009-07-15 11:45:45
-You have selected the following JobIds: 1,3,5
-
-Building directory tree for JobId(s) 1,3,5 ... +++++++++++++++++++
-1,444 files inserted into the tree.
-\end{verbatim}
-
-This project was funded by Bacula Systems.
-
-\section{Source Address}
-\index[general]{Source Address}
-
-A feature has been added which allows the administrator to specify the address
-from which the Director and File daemons will establish connections. This
-may be used to simplify system configuration overhead when working in complex
-networks utilizing multi-homing and policy-routing.
-
-To accomplish this, two new configuration directives have been implemented:
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileDaemon {
- FDSourceAddress=10.0.1.20 # Always initiate connections from this address
-}
-
-Director {
- DirSourceAddress=10.0.1.10 # Always initiate connections from this address
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-Simply adding specific host routes on the OS
-would have an undesirable side-effect: any
-application trying to contact the destination host would be forced to use the
-more specific route possibly diverting management traffic onto a backup VLAN.
-Instead of adding host routes for each client connected to a multi-homed backup
-server (for example where there are management and backup VLANs), one can
-use the new directives to specify a specific source address at the application
-level.
-
-Additionally, this allows the simplification and abstraction of firewall rules
-when dealing with a Hot-Standby director or storage daemon configuration. The
-Hot-standby pair may share a CARP address, which connections must be sourced
-from, while system services listen and act from the unique interface addresses.
-
-This project was funded by Collaborative Fusion, Inc.
-
-\section{Show volume availability when doing restore}
-
-When doing a restore the selection dialog ends by displaying this
-screen:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- The job will require the following
- Volume(s) Storage(s) SD Device(s)
- ===========================================================================
- *000741L3 LTO-4 LTO3
- *000866L3 LTO-4 LTO3
- *000765L3 LTO-4 LTO3
- *000764L3 LTO-4 LTO3
- *000756L3 LTO-4 LTO3
- *001759L3 LTO-4 LTO3
- *001763L3 LTO-4 LTO3
- 001762L3 LTO-4 LTO3
- 001767L3 LTO-4 LTO3
-
-Volumes marked with ``*'' are online (in the autochanger).
-\end{verbatim}
-
-This should help speed up large restores by minimizing the time spent
-waiting for the operator to discover that he must change tapes in the library.
-
-This project was funded by Bacula Systems.
-
-\section{Accurate estimate command}
-
-The \texttt{estimate} command can now use the accurate code to detect changes
-and give a better estimation.
-
-You can set the accurate behavior on the command line by using
-\texttt{accurate=yes\vb{}no} or use the Job setting as default value.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-* estimate listing accurate=yes level=incremental job=BackupJob
-\end{verbatim}
-
-This project was funded by Bacula Systems.
-
-\chapter{New Features in 3.0.0}
-\label{NewFeaturesChapter}
-\index[general]{New Features}
-
-This chapter presents the new features added to the development 2.5.x
-versions to be released as Bacula version 3.0.0 sometime in April 2009.
-
-\section{Accurate Backup}
-\index[general]{Accurate Backup}
-
-As with most other backup programs, by default Bacula decides what files to
-backup for Incremental and Differental backup by comparing the change
-(st\_ctime) and modification (st\_mtime) times of the file to the time the last
-backup completed. If one of those two times is later than the last backup
-time, then the file will be backed up. This does not, however, permit tracking
-what files have been deleted and will miss any file with an old time that may
-have been restored to or moved onto the client filesystem.
-
-\subsection{Accurate = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}}
-If the {\bf Accurate = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}} directive is enabled (default no) in
-the Job resource, the job will be run as an Accurate Job. For a {\bf Full}
-backup, there is no difference, but for {\bf Differential} and {\bf
- Incremental} backups, the Director will send a list of all previous files
-backed up, and the File daemon will use that list to determine if any new files
-have been added or or moved and if any files have been deleted. This allows
-Bacula to make an accurate backup of your system to that point in time so that
-if you do a restore, it will restore your system exactly.
-
-One note of caution
-about using Accurate backup is that it requires more resources (CPU and memory)
-on both the Director and the Client machines to create the list of previous
-files backed up, to send that list to the File daemon, for the File daemon to
-keep the list (possibly very big) in memory, and for the File daemon to do
-comparisons between every file in the FileSet and the list. In particular,
-if your client has lots of files (more than a few million), you will need
-lots of memory on the client machine.
-
-Accurate must not be enabled when backing up with a plugin that is not
-specially designed to work with Accurate. If you enable it, your restores
-will probably not work correctly.
-
-This project was funded by Bacula Systems.
-
-
-
-\section{Copy Jobs}
-\index[general]{Copy Jobs}
-
-A new {\bf Copy} job type 'C' has been implemented. It is similar to the
-existing Migration feature with the exception that the Job that is copied is
-left unchanged. This essentially creates two identical copies of the same
-backup. However, the copy is treated as a copy rather than a backup job, and
-hence is not directly available for restore. The {\bf restore} command lists
-copy jobs and allows selection of copies by using \texttt{jobid=}
-option. If the keyword {\bf copies} is present on the command line, Bacula will
-display the list of all copies for selected jobs.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-* restore copies
-[...]
-These JobIds have copies as follows:
-+-------+------------------------------------+-----------+------------------+
-| JobId | Job | CopyJobId | MediaType |
-+-------+------------------------------------+-----------+------------------+
-| 2 | CopyJobSave.2009-02-17_16.31.00.11 | 7 | DiskChangerMedia |
-+-------+------------------------------------+-----------+------------------+
-+-------+-------+----------+----------+---------------------+------------------+
-| JobId | Level | JobFiles | JobBytes | StartTime | VolumeName |
-+-------+-------+----------+----------+---------------------+------------------+
-| 19 | F | 6274 | 76565018 | 2009-02-17 16:30:45 | ChangerVolume002 |
-| 2 | I | 1 | 5 | 2009-02-17 16:30:51 | FileVolume001 |
-+-------+-------+----------+----------+---------------------+------------------+
-You have selected the following JobIds: 19,2
-
-Building directory tree for JobId(s) 19,2 ... ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
-5,611 files inserted into the tree.
-...
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-The Copy Job runs without using the File daemon by copying the data from the
-old backup Volume to a different Volume in a different Pool. See the Migration
-documentation for additional details. For copy Jobs there is a new selection
-directive named {\bf PoolUncopiedJobs} which selects all Jobs that were
-not already copied to another Pool.
-
-As with Migration, the Client, Volume, Job, or SQL query, are
-other possible ways of selecting the Jobs to be copied. Selection
-types like SmallestVolume, OldestVolume, PoolOccupancy and PoolTime also
-work, but are probably more suited for Migration Jobs.
-
-If Bacula finds a Copy of a job record that is purged (deleted) from the catalog,
-it will promote the Copy to a \textsl{real} backup job and will make it available for
-automatic restore. If more than one Copy is available, it will promote the copy
-with the smallest JobId.
-
-A nice solution which can be built with the new Copy feature is often
-called disk-to-disk-to-tape backup (DTDTT). A sample config could
-look something like the one below:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-Pool {
- Name = FullBackupsVirtualPool
- Pool Type = Backup
- Purge Oldest Volume = Yes
- Storage = vtl
- NextPool = FullBackupsTapePool
-}
-
-Pool {
- Name = FullBackupsTapePool
- Pool Type = Backup
- Recycle = Yes
- AutoPrune = Yes
- Volume Retention = 365 days
- Storage = superloader
-}
-
-#
-# Fake fileset for copy jobs
-#
-Fileset {
- Name = None
- Include {
- Options {
- signature = MD5
- }
- }
-}
-
-#
-# Fake client for copy jobs
-#
-Client {
- Name = None
- Address = localhost
- Password = "NoNe"
- Catalog = MyCatalog
-}
-
-#
-# Default template for a CopyDiskToTape Job
-#
-JobDefs {
- Name = CopyDiskToTape
- Type = Copy
- Messages = StandardCopy
- Client = None
- FileSet = None
- Selection Type = PoolUncopiedJobs
- Maximum Concurrent Jobs = 10
- SpoolData = No
- Allow Duplicate Jobs = Yes
- Allow Higher Duplicates = No
- Cancel Queued Duplicates = No
- Cancel Running Duplicates = No
- Priority = 13
-}
-
-Schedule {
- Name = DaySchedule7:00
- Run = Level=Full daily at 7:00
-}
-
-Job {
- Name = CopyDiskToTapeFullBackups
- Enabled = Yes
- Schedule = DaySchedule7:00
- Pool = FullBackupsVirtualPool
- JobDefs = CopyDiskToTape
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The example above had 2 pool which are copied using the PoolUncopiedJobs
-selection criteria. Normal Full backups go to the Virtual pool and are copied
-to the Tape pool the next morning.
-
-The command \texttt{list copies [jobid=x,y,z]} lists copies for a given
-\textbf{jobid}.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-*list copies
-+-------+------------------------------------+-----------+------------------+
-| JobId | Job | CopyJobId | MediaType |
-+-------+------------------------------------+-----------+------------------+
-| 9 | CopyJobSave.2008-12-20_22.26.49.05 | 11 | DiskChangerMedia |
-+-------+------------------------------------+-----------+------------------+
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\section{ACL Updates}
-\index[general]{ACL Updates}
-The whole ACL code had been overhauled and in this version each platforms has
-different streams for each type of acl available on such an platform. As ACLs
-between platforms tend to be not that portable (most implement POSIX acls but
-some use an other draft or a completely different format) we currently only
-allow certain platform specific ACL streams to be decoded and restored on the
-same platform that they were created on. The old code allowed to restore ACL
-cross platform but the comments already mention that not being to wise. For
-backward compatability the new code will accept the two old ACL streams and
-handle those with the platform specific handler. But for all new backups it
-will save the ACLs using the new streams.
-
-Currently the following platforms support ACLs:
-
-\begin{itemize}
- \item {\bf AIX}
- \item {\bf Darwin/OSX}
- \item {\bf FreeBSD}
- \item {\bf HPUX}
- \item {\bf IRIX}
- \item {\bf Linux}
- \item {\bf Tru64}
- \item {\bf Solaris}
-\end{itemize}
-
-Currently we support the following ACL types (these ACL streams use a reserved
-part of the stream numbers):
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item {\bf STREAM\_ACL\_AIX\_TEXT} 1000 AIX specific string representation from
- acl\_get
- \item {\bf STREAM\_ACL\_DARWIN\_ACCESS\_ACL} 1001 Darwin (OSX) specific acl\_t
- string representation from acl\_to\_text (POSIX acl)
- \item {\bf STREAM\_ACL\_FREEBSD\_DEFAULT\_ACL} 1002 FreeBSD specific acl\_t
- string representation from acl\_to\_text (POSIX acl) for default acls.
- \item {\bf STREAM\_ACL\_FREEBSD\_ACCESS\_ACL} 1003 FreeBSD specific acl\_t
- string representation from acl\_to\_text (POSIX acl) for access acls.
- \item {\bf STREAM\_ACL\_HPUX\_ACL\_ENTRY} 1004 HPUX specific acl\_entry
- string representation from acltostr (POSIX acl)
- \item {\bf STREAM\_ACL\_IRIX\_DEFAULT\_ACL} 1005 IRIX specific acl\_t string
- representation from acl\_to\_text (POSIX acl) for default acls.
- \item {\bf STREAM\_ACL\_IRIX\_ACCESS\_ACL} 1006 IRIX specific acl\_t string
- representation from acl\_to\_text (POSIX acl) for access acls.
- \item {\bf STREAM\_ACL\_LINUX\_DEFAULT\_ACL} 1007 Linux specific acl\_t
- string representation from acl\_to\_text (POSIX acl) for default acls.
- \item {\bf STREAM\_ACL\_LINUX\_ACCESS\_ACL} 1008 Linux specific acl\_t string
- representation from acl\_to\_text (POSIX acl) for access acls.
- \item {\bf STREAM\_ACL\_TRU64\_DEFAULT\_ACL} 1009 Tru64 specific acl\_t
- string representation from acl\_to\_text (POSIX acl) for default acls.
- \item {\bf STREAM\_ACL\_TRU64\_DEFAULT\_DIR\_ACL} 1010 Tru64 specific acl\_t
- string representation from acl\_to\_text (POSIX acl) for default acls.
- \item {\bf STREAM\_ACL\_TRU64\_ACCESS\_ACL} 1011 Tru64 specific acl\_t string
- representation from acl\_to\_text (POSIX acl) for access acls.
- \item {\bf STREAM\_ACL\_SOLARIS\_ACLENT} 1012 Solaris specific aclent\_t
- string representation from acltotext or acl\_totext (POSIX acl)
- \item {\bf STREAM\_ACL\_SOLARIS\_ACE} 1013 Solaris specific ace\_t string
- representation from from acl\_totext (NFSv4 or ZFS acl)
-\end{itemize}
-
-In future versions we might support conversion functions from one type of acl
-into an other for types that are either the same or easily convertable. For now
-the streams are seperate and restoring them on a platform that doesn't
-recognize them will give you a warning.
-
-\section{Extended Attributes}
-\index[general]{Extended Attributes}
-Something that was on the project list for some time is now implemented for
-platforms that support a similar kind of interface. Its the support for backup
-and restore of so called extended attributes. As extended attributes are so
-platform specific these attributes are saved in seperate streams for each
-platform. Restores of the extended attributes can only be performed on the
-same platform the backup was done. There is support for all types of extended
-attributes, but restoring from one type of filesystem onto an other type of
-filesystem on the same platform may lead to supprises. As extended attributes
-can contain any type of data they are stored as a series of so called
-value-pairs. This data must be seen as mostly binary and is stored as such.
-As security labels from selinux are also extended attributes this option also
-stores those labels and no specific code is enabled for handling selinux
-security labels.
-
-Currently the following platforms support extended attributes:
-\begin{itemize}
- \item {\bf Darwin/OSX}
- \item {\bf FreeBSD}
- \item {\bf Linux}
- \item {\bf NetBSD}
-\end{itemize}
-
-On linux acls are also extended attributes, as such when you enable ACLs on a
-Linux platform it will NOT save the same data twice e.g. it will save the ACLs
-and not the same exteneded attribute.
-
-To enable the backup of extended attributes please add the following to your
-fileset definition.
-\begin{verbatim}
- FileSet {
- Name = "MyFileSet"
- Include {
- Options {
- signature = MD5
- xattrsupport = yes
- }
- File = ...
- }
- }
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\section{Shared objects}
-\index[general]{Shared objects}
-A default build of Bacula will now create the libraries as shared objects
-(.so) rather than static libraries as was previously the case.
-The shared libraries are built using {\bf libtool} so it should be quite
-portable.
-
-An important advantage of using shared objects is that on a machine with the
-Directory, File daemon, the Storage daemon, and a console, you will have only
-one copy of the code in memory rather than four copies. Also the total size of
-the binary release is smaller since the library code appears only once rather
-than once for every program that uses it; this results in significant reduction
-in the size of the binaries particularly for the utility tools.
-
-In order for the system loader to find the shared objects when loading the
-Bacula binaries, the Bacula shared objects must either be in a shared object
-directory known to the loader (typically /usr/lib) or they must be in the
-directory that may be specified on the {\bf ./configure} line using the {\bf
- {-}{-}libdir} option as:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- ./configure --libdir=/full-path/dir
-\end{verbatim}
-
-the default is /usr/lib. If {-}{-}libdir is specified, there should be
-no need to modify your loader configuration provided that
-the shared objects are installed in that directory (Bacula
-does this with the make install command). The shared objects
-that Bacula references are:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-libbaccfg.so
-libbacfind.so
-libbacpy.so
-libbac.so
-\end{verbatim}
-
-These files are symbolically linked to the real shared object file,
-which has a version number to permit running multiple versions of
-the libraries if desired (not normally the case).
-
-If you have problems with libtool or you wish to use the old
-way of building static libraries, or you want to build a static
-version of Bacula you may disable
-libtool on the configure command line with:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- ./configure --disable-libtool
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-\section{Building Static versions of Bacula}
-\index[general]{Static linking}
-In order to build static versions of Bacula, in addition
-to configuration options that were needed you now must
-also add --disable-libtool. Example
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- ./configure --enable-static-client-only --disable-libtool
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-\section{Virtual Backup (Vbackup)}
-\index[general]{Virtual Backup}
-\index[general]{Vbackup}
-
-Bacula's virtual backup feature is often called Synthetic Backup or
-Consolidation in other backup products. It permits you to consolidate the
-previous Full backup plus the most recent Differential backup and any
-subsequent Incremental backups into a new Full backup. This new Full
-backup will then be considered as the most recent Full for any future
-Incremental or Differential backups. The VirtualFull backup is
-accomplished without contacting the client by reading the previous backup
-data and writing it to a volume in a different pool.
-
-In some respects the Vbackup feature works similar to a Migration job, in
-that Bacula normally reads the data from the pool specified in the
-Job resource, and writes it to the {\bf Next Pool} specified in the
-Job resource. Note, this means that usually the output from the Virtual
-Backup is written into a different pool from where your prior backups
-are saved. Doing it this way guarantees that you will not get a deadlock
-situation attempting to read and write to the same volume in the Storage
-daemon. If you then want to do subsequent backups, you may need to
-move the Virtual Full Volume back to your normal backup pool.
-Alternatively, you can set your {\bf Next Pool} to point to the current
-pool. This will cause Bacula to read and write to Volumes in the
-current pool. In general, this will work, because Bacula will
-not allow reading and writing on the same Volume. In any case, once
-a VirtualFull has been created, and a restore is done involving the
-most current Full, it will read the Volume or Volumes by the VirtualFull
-regardless of in which Pool the Volume is found.
-
-The Vbackup is enabled on a Job by Job in the Job resource by specifying
-a level of {\bf VirtualFull}.
-
-A typical Job resource definition might look like the following:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-Job {
- Name = "MyBackup"
- Type = Backup
- Client=localhost-fd
- FileSet = "Full Set"
- Storage = File
- Messages = Standard
- Pool = Default
- SpoolData = yes
-}
-
-# Default pool definition
-Pool {
- Name = Default
- Pool Type = Backup
- Recycle = yes # Automatically recycle Volumes
- AutoPrune = yes # Prune expired volumes
- Volume Retention = 365d # one year
- NextPool = Full
- Storage = File
-}
-
-Pool {
- Name = Full
- Pool Type = Backup
- Recycle = yes # Automatically recycle Volumes
- AutoPrune = yes # Prune expired volumes
- Volume Retention = 365d # one year
- Storage = DiskChanger
-}
-
-# Definition of file storage device
-Storage {
- Name = File
- Address = localhost
- Password = "xxx"
- Device = FileStorage
- Media Type = File
- Maximum Concurrent Jobs = 5
-}
-
-# Definition of DDS Virtual tape disk storage device
-Storage {
- Name = DiskChanger
- Address = localhost # N.B. Use a fully qualified name here
- Password = "yyy"
- Device = DiskChanger
- Media Type = DiskChangerMedia
- Maximum Concurrent Jobs = 4
- Autochanger = yes
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-Then in bconsole or via a Run schedule, you would run the job as:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-run job=MyBackup level=Full
-run job=MyBackup level=Incremental
-run job=MyBackup level=Differential
-run job=MyBackup level=Incremental
-run job=MyBackup level=Incremental
-\end{verbatim}
-
-So providing there were changes between each of those jobs, you would end up
-with a Full backup, a Differential, which includes the first Incremental
-backup, then two Incremental backups. All the above jobs would be written to
-the {\bf Default} pool.
-
-To consolidate those backups into a new Full backup, you would run the
-following:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-run job=MyBackup level=VirtualFull
-\end{verbatim}
-
-And it would produce a new Full backup without using the client, and the output
-would be written to the {\bf Full} Pool which uses the Diskchanger Storage.
-
-If the Virtual Full is run, and there are no prior Jobs, the Virtual Full will
-fail with an error.
-
-Note, the Start and End time of the Virtual Full backup is set to the
-values for the last job included in the Virtual Full (in the above example,
-it is an Increment). This is so that if another incremental is done, which
-will be based on the Virtual Full, it will backup all files from the
-last Job included in the Virtual Full rather than from the time the Virtual
-Full was actually run.
-
-
-
-\section{Catalog Format}
-\index[general]{Catalog Format}
-Bacula 3.0 comes with some changes to the catalog format. The upgrade
-operation will convert the FileId field of the File table from 32 bits (max 4
-billion table entries) to 64 bits (very large number of items). The
-conversion process can take a bit of time and will likely DOUBLE THE SIZE of
-your catalog during the conversion. Also you won't be able to run jobs during
-this conversion period. For example, a 3 million file catalog will take 2
-minutes to upgrade on a normal machine. Please don't forget to make a valid
-backup of your database before executing the upgrade script. See the
-ReleaseNotes for additional details.
-
-\section{64 bit Windows Client}
-\index[general]{Win64 Client}
-Unfortunately, Microsoft's implementation of Volume Shadown Copy (VSS) on
-their 64 bit OS versions is not compatible with a 32 bit Bacula Client.
-As a consequence, we are also releasing a 64 bit version of the Bacula
-Windows Client (win64bacula-3.0.0.exe) that does work with VSS.
-These binaries should only be installed on 64 bit Windows operating systems.
-What is important is not your hardware but whether or not you have
-a 64 bit version of the Windows OS.
-
-Compared to the Win32 Bacula Client, the 64 bit release contains a few differences:
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Before installing the Win64 Bacula Client, you must totally
- deinstall any prior 2.4.x Client installation using the
- Bacula deinstallation (see the menu item). You may want
- to save your .conf files first.
-\item Only the Client (File daemon) is ported to Win64, the Director
- and the Storage daemon are not in the 64 bit Windows installer.
-\item bwx-console is not yet ported.
-\item bconsole is ported but it has not been tested.
-\item The documentation is not included in the installer.
-\item Due to Vista security restrictions imposed on a default installation
- of Vista, before upgrading the Client, you must manually stop
- any prior version of Bacula from running, otherwise the install
- will fail.
-\item Due to Vista security restrictions imposed on a default installation
- of Vista, attempting to edit the conf files via the menu items
- will fail. You must directly edit the files with appropriate
- permissions. Generally double clicking on the appropriate .conf
- file will work providing you have sufficient permissions.
-\item All Bacula files are now installed in
- {\bf C:/Program Files/Bacula} except the main menu items,
- which are installed as before. This vastly simplifies the installation.
-\item If you are running on a foreign language version of Windows, most
- likely {\bf C:/Program Files} does not exist, so you should use the
- Custom installation and enter an appropriate location to install
- the files.
-\item The 3.0.0 Win32 Client continues to install files in the locations used
- by prior versions. For the next version we will convert it to use
- the same installation conventions as the Win64 version.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-This project was funded by Bacula Systems.
-
-
-\section{Duplicate Job Control}
-\index[general]{Duplicate Jobs}
-The new version of Bacula provides four new directives that
-give additional control over what Bacula does if duplicate jobs
-are started. A duplicate job in the sense we use it here means
-a second or subsequent job with the same name starts. This
-happens most frequently when the first job runs longer than expected because no
-tapes are available.
-
-The four directives each take as an argument a {\bf yes} or {\bf no} value and
-are specified in the Job resource.
-
-They are:
-
-\subsection{Allow Duplicate Jobs = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}}
-\index[general]{Allow Duplicate Jobs}
- If this directive is enabled duplicate jobs will be run. If
- the directive is set to {\bf no} (default) then only one job of a given name
- may run at one time, and the action that Bacula takes to ensure only
- one job runs is determined by the other directives (see below).
-
- If {\bf Allow Duplicate Jobs} is set to {\bf no} and two jobs
- are present and none of the three directives given below permit
- cancelling a job, then the current job (the second one started)
- will be cancelled.
-
-
-\subsection{Allow Higher Duplicates = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}}
-\index[general]{Allow Higher Duplicates}
- If this directive is set to {\bf yes} (default) the job with a higher
- priority (lower priority number) will be permitted to run, and
- the current job will be cancelled. If the
- priorities of the two jobs are the same, the outcome is determined by
- other directives (see below).
-
-\subsection{Cancel Queued Duplicates = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}}
-\index[general]{Cancel Queued Duplicates}
- If {\bf Allow Duplicate Jobs} is set to {\bf no} and
- if this directive is set to {\bf yes} any job that is
- already queued to run but not yet running will be canceled.
- The default is {\bf no}.
-
-\subsection{Cancel Running Duplicates = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}}
-\index[general]{Cancel Running Duplicates}
- If {\bf Allow Duplicate Jobs} is set to {\bf no} and
- if this directive is set to {\bf yes} any job that is already running
- will be canceled. The default is {\bf no}.
-
-
-\section{TLS Authentication}
-\index[general]{TLS Authentication}
-In Bacula version 2.5.x and later, in addition to the normal Bacula
-CRAM-MD5 authentication that is used to authenticate each Bacula
-connection, you can specify that you want TLS Authentication as well,
-which will provide more secure authentication.
-
-This new feature uses Bacula's existing TLS code (normally used for
-communications encryption) to do authentication. To use it, you must
-specify all the TLS directives normally used to enable communications
-encryption (TLS Enable, TLS Verify Peer, TLS Certificate, ...) and
-a new directive:
-
-\subsection{TLS Authenticate = yes}
-\begin{verbatim}
-TLS Authenticate = yes
-\end{verbatim}
-
-in the main daemon configuration resource (Director for the Director,
-Client for the File daemon, and Storage for the Storage daemon).
-
-When {\bf TLS Authenticate} is enabled, after doing the CRAM-MD5
-authentication, Bacula will also do TLS authentication, then TLS
-encryption will be turned off, and the rest of the communication between
-the two Bacula daemons will be done without encryption.
-
-If you want to encrypt communications data, use the normal TLS directives
-but do not turn on {\bf TLS Authenticate}.
-
-\section{bextract non-portable Win32 data}
-\index[general]{bextract handles Win32 non-portable data}
-{\bf bextract} has been enhanced to be able to restore
-non-portable Win32 data to any OS. Previous versions were
-unable to restore non-portable Win32 data to machines that
-did not have the Win32 BackupRead and BackupWrite API calls.
-
-\section{State File updated at Job Termination}
-\index[general]{State File}
-In previous versions of Bacula, the state file, which provides a
-summary of previous jobs run in the {\bf status} command output was
-updated only when Bacula terminated, thus if the daemon crashed, the
-state file might not contain all the run data. This version of
-the Bacula daemons updates the state file on each job termination.
-
-\section{MaxFullInterval = \lt{}time-interval\gt{}}
-\index[general]{MaxFullInterval}
-The new Job resource directive {\bf Max Full Interval = \lt{}time-interval\gt{}}
-can be used to specify the maximum time interval between {\bf Full} backup
-jobs. When a job starts, if the time since the last Full backup is
-greater than the specified interval, and the job would normally be an
-{\bf Incremental} or {\bf Differential}, it will be automatically
-upgraded to a {\bf Full} backup.
-
-\section{MaxDiffInterval = \lt{}time-interval\gt{}}
-\index[general]{MaxDiffInterval}
-The new Job resource directive {\bf Max Diff Interval = \lt{}time-interval\gt{}}
-can be used to specify the maximum time interval between {\bf Differential} backup
-jobs. When a job starts, if the time since the last Differential backup is
-greater than the specified interval, and the job would normally be an
-{\bf Incremental}, it will be automatically
-upgraded to a {\bf Differential} backup.
-
-\section{Honor No Dump Flag = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}}
-\index[general]{MaxDiffInterval}
-On FreeBSD systems, each file has a {\bf no dump flag} that can be set
-by the user, and when it is set it is an indication to backup programs
-to not backup that particular file. This version of Bacula contains a
-new Options directive within a FileSet resource, which instructs Bacula to
-obey this flag. The new directive is:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- Honor No Dump Flag = yes\vb{}no
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The default value is {\bf no}.
-
-
-\section{Exclude Dir Containing = \lt{}filename-string\gt{}}
-\index[general]{IgnoreDir}
-The {\bf ExcludeDirContaining = \lt{}filename\gt{}} is a new directive that
-can be added to the Include section of the FileSet resource. If the specified
-filename ({\bf filename-string}) is found on the Client in any directory to be
-backed up, the whole directory will be ignored (not backed up). For example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- # List of files to be backed up
- FileSet {
- Name = "MyFileSet"
- Include {
- Options {
- signature = MD5
- }
- File = /home
- Exclude Dir Containing = .excludeme
- }
- }
-\end{verbatim}
-
-But in /home, there may be hundreds of directories of users and some
-people want to indicate that they don't want to have certain
-directories backed up. For example, with the above FileSet, if
-the user or sysadmin creates a file named {\bf .excludeme} in
-specific directories, such as
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- /home/user/www/cache/.excludeme
- /home/user/temp/.excludeme
-\end{verbatim}
-
-then Bacula will not backup the two directories named:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- /home/user/www/cache
- /home/user/temp
-\end{verbatim}
-
-NOTE: subdirectories will not be backed up. That is, the directive
-applies to the two directories in question and any children (be they
-files, directories, etc).
-
-
-\section{Bacula Plugins}
-\index[general]{Plugin}
-Support for shared object plugins has been implemented in the Linux, Unix
-and Win32 File daemons. The API will be documented separately in
-the Developer's Guide or in a new document. For the moment, there is
-a single plugin named {\bf bpipe} that allows an external program to
-get control to backup and restore a file.
-
-Plugins are also planned (partially implemented) in the Director and the
-Storage daemon.
-
-\subsection{Plugin Directory}
-\index[general]{Plugin Directory}
-Each daemon (DIR, FD, SD) has a new {\bf Plugin Directory} directive that may
-be added to the daemon definition resource. The directory takes a quoted
-string argument, which is the name of the directory in which the daemon can
-find the Bacula plugins. If this directive is not specified, Bacula will not
-load any plugins. Since each plugin has a distinctive name, all the daemons
-can share the same plugin directory.
-
-\subsection{Plugin Options}
-\index[general]{Plugin Options}
-The {\bf Plugin Options} directive takes a quoted string
-arguement (after the equal sign) and may be specified in the
-Job resource. The options specified will be passed to all plugins
-when they are run. This each plugin must know what it is looking
-for. The value defined in the Job resource can be modified
-by the user when he runs a Job via the {\bf bconsole} command line
-prompts.
-
-Note: this directive may be specified, and there is code to modify
-the string in the run command, but the plugin options are not yet passed to
-the plugin (i.e. not fully implemented).
-
-\subsection{Plugin Options ACL}
-\index[general]{Plugin Options ACL}
-The {\bf Plugin Options ACL} directive may be specified in the
-Director's Console resource. It functions as all the other ACL commands
-do by permitting users running restricted consoles to specify a
-{\bf Plugin Options} that overrides the one specified in the Job
-definition. Without this directive restricted consoles may not modify
-the Plugin Options.
-
-\subsection{Plugin = \lt{}plugin-command-string\gt{}}
-\index[general]{Plugin}
-The {\bf Plugin} directive is specified in the Include section of
-a FileSet resource where you put your {\bf File = xxx} directives.
-For example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- FileSet {
- Name = "MyFileSet"
- Include {
- Options {
- signature = MD5
- }
- File = /home
- Plugin = "bpipe:..."
- }
- }
-\end{verbatim}
-
-In the above example, when the File daemon is processing the directives
-in the Include section, it will first backup all the files in {\bf /home}
-then it will load the plugin named {\bf bpipe} (actually bpipe-dir.so) from
-the Plugin Directory. The syntax and semantics of the Plugin directive
-require the first part of the string up to the colon (:) to be the name
-of the plugin. Everything after the first colon is ignored by the File daemon but
-is passed to the plugin. Thus the plugin writer may define the meaning of the
-rest of the string as he wishes.
-
-Please see the next section for information about the {\bf bpipe} Bacula
-plugin.
-
-\section{The bpipe Plugin}
-\index[general]{The bpipe Plugin}
-The {\bf bpipe} plugin is provided in the directory src/plugins/fd/bpipe-fd.c of
-the Bacula source distribution. When the plugin is compiled and linking into
-the resulting dynamic shared object (DSO), it will have the name {\bf bpipe-fd.so}.
-
-The purpose of the plugin is to provide an interface to any system program for
-backup and restore. As specified above the {\bf bpipe} plugin is specified in
-the Include section of your Job's FileSet resource. The full syntax of the
-plugin directive as interpreted by the {\bf bpipe} plugin (each plugin is free
-to specify the sytax as it wishes) is:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- Plugin = "<field1>:<field2>:<field3>:<field4>"
-\end{verbatim}
-
-where
-\begin{description}
-\item {\bf field1} is the name of the plugin with the trailing {\bf -fd.so}
-stripped off, so in this case, we would put {\bf bpipe} in this field.
-
-\item {\bf field2} specifies the namespace, which for {\bf bpipe} is the
-pseudo path and filename under which the backup will be saved. This pseudo
-path and filename will be seen by the user in the restore file tree.
-For example, if the value is {\bf /MYSQL/regress.sql}, the data
-backed up by the plugin will be put under that "pseudo" path and filename.
-You must be careful to choose a naming convention that is unique to avoid
-a conflict with a path and filename that actually exists on your system.
-
-\item {\bf field3} for the {\bf bpipe} plugin
-specifies the "reader" program that is called by the plugin during
-backup to read the data. {\bf bpipe} will call this program by doing a
-{\bf popen} on it.
-
-\item {\bf field4} for the {\bf bpipe} plugin
-specifies the "writer" program that is called by the plugin during
-restore to write the data back to the filesystem.
-\end{description}
-
-Putting it all together, the full plugin directive line might look
-like the following:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-Plugin = "bpipe:/MYSQL/regress.sql:mysqldump -f
- --opt --databases bacula:mysql"
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The directive has been split into two lines, but within the {\bf bacula-dir.conf} file
-would be written on a single line.
-
-This causes the File daemon to call the {\bf bpipe} plugin, which will write
-its data into the "pseudo" file {\bf /MYSQL/regress.sql} by calling the
-program {\bf mysqldump -f --opt --database bacula} to read the data during
-backup. The mysqldump command outputs all the data for the database named
-{\bf bacula}, which will be read by the plugin and stored in the backup.
-During restore, the data that was backed up will be sent to the program
-specified in the last field, which in this case is {\bf mysql}. When
-{\bf mysql} is called, it will read the data sent to it by the plugn
-then write it back to the same database from which it came ({\bf bacula}
-in this case).
-
-The {\bf bpipe} plugin is a generic pipe program, that simply transmits
-the data from a specified program to Bacula for backup, and then from Bacula to
-a specified program for restore.
-
-By using different command lines to {\bf bpipe},
-you can backup any kind of data (ASCII or binary) depending
-on the program called.
-
-\section{Microsoft Exchange Server 2003/2007 Plugin}
-\index[general]{Microsoft Exchange Server 2003/2007 Plugin}
-\subsection{Background}
-The Exchange plugin was made possible by a funded development project
-between Equiinet Ltd -- www.equiinet.com (many thanks) and Bacula Systems.
-The code for the plugin was written by James Harper, and the Bacula core
-code by Kern Sibbald. All the code for this funded development has become
-part of the Bacula project. Thanks to everyone who made it happen.
-
-\subsection{Concepts}
-Although it is possible to backup Exchange using Bacula VSS the Exchange
-plugin adds a good deal of functionality, because while Bacula VSS
-completes a full backup (snapshot) of Exchange, it does
-not support Incremental or Differential backups, restoring is more
-complicated, and a single database restore is not possible.
-
-Microsoft Exchange organises its storage into Storage Groups with
-Databases inside them. A default installation of Exchange will have a
-single Storage Group called 'First Storage Group', with two Databases
-inside it, "Mailbox Store (SERVER NAME)" and
-"Public Folder Store (SERVER NAME)",
-which hold user email and public folders respectively.
-
-In the default configuration, Exchange logs everything that happens to
-log files, such that if you have a backup, and all the log files since,
-you can restore to the present time. Each Storage Group has its own set
-of log files and operates independently of any other Storage Groups. At
-the Storage Group level, the logging can be turned off by enabling a
-function called "Enable circular logging". At this time the Exchange
-plugin will not function if this option is enabled.
-
-The plugin allows backing up of entire storage groups, and the restoring
-of entire storage groups or individual databases. Backing up and
-restoring at the individual mailbox or email item is not supported but
-can be simulated by use of the "Recovery" Storage Group (see below).
-
-\subsection{Installing}
-The Exchange plugin requires a DLL that is shipped with Microsoft
-Exchanger Server called {\bf esebcli2.dll}. Assuming Exchange is installed
-correctly the Exchange plugin should find this automatically and run
-without any additional installation.
-
-If the DLL can not be found automatically it will need to be copied into
-the Bacula installation
-directory (eg C:\verb+\+Program Files\verb+\+Bacula\verb+\+bin). The Exchange API DLL is
-named esebcli2.dll and is found in C:\verb+\+Program Files\verb+\+Exchsrvr\verb+\+bin on a
-default Exchange installation.
-
-\subsection{Backup up}
-To back up an Exchange server the Fileset definition must contain at
-least {\bf Plugin = "exchange:/@EXCHANGE/Microsoft Information Store"} for
-the backup to work correctly. The 'exchange:' bit tells Bacula to look
-for the exchange plugin, the '@EXCHANGE' bit makes sure all the backed
-up files are prefixed with something that isn't going to share a name
-with something outside the plugin, and the 'Microsoft Information Store'
-bit is required also. It is also possible to add the name of a storage
-group to the "Plugin =" line, eg \\
-{\bf Plugin = "exchange:/@EXCHANGE/Microsoft Information Store/First Storage Group"} \\
-if you want only a single storage group backed up.
-
-Additionally, you can suffix the 'Plugin =' directive with
-":notrunconfull" which will tell the plugin not to truncate the Exchange
-database at the end of a full backup.
-
-An Incremental or Differential backup will backup only the database logs
-for each Storage Group by inspecting the "modified date" on each
-physical log file. Because of the way the Exchange API works, the last
-logfile backed up on each backup will always be backed up by the next
-Incremental or Differential backup too. This adds 5MB to each
-Incremental or Differential backup size but otherwise does not cause any
-problems.
-
-By default, a normal VSS fileset containing all the drive letters will
-also back up the Exchange databases using VSS. This will interfere with
-the plugin and Exchange's shared ideas of when the last full backup was
-done, and may also truncate log files incorrectly. It is important,
-therefore, that the Exchange database files be excluded from the backup,
-although the folders the files are in should be included, or they will
-have to be recreated manually if a baremetal restore is done.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Include {
- File = C:/Program Files/Exchsrvr/mdbdata
- Plugin = "exchange:..."
- }
- Exclude {
- File = C:/Program Files/Exchsrvr/mdbdata/E00.chk
- File = C:/Program Files/Exchsrvr/mdbdata/E00.log
- File = C:/Program Files/Exchsrvr/mdbdata/E000000F.log
- File = C:/Program Files/Exchsrvr/mdbdata/E0000010.log
- File = C:/Program Files/Exchsrvr/mdbdata/E0000011.log
- File = C:/Program Files/Exchsrvr/mdbdata/E00tmp.log
- File = C:/Program Files/Exchsrvr/mdbdata/priv1.edb
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The advantage of excluding the above files is that you can significantly
-reduce the size of your backup since all the important Exchange files
-will be properly saved by the Plugin.
-
-
-\subsection{Restoring}
-The restore operation is much the same as a normal Bacula restore, with
-the following provisos:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The {\bf Where} restore option must not be specified
-\item Each Database directory must be marked as a whole. You cannot just
- select (say) the .edb file and not the others.
-\item If a Storage Group is restored, the directory of the Storage Group
- must be marked too.
-\item It is possible to restore only a subset of the available log files,
- but they {\bf must} be contiguous. Exchange will fail to restore correctly
- if a log file is missing from the sequence of log files
-\item Each database to be restored must be dismounted and marked as "Can be
- overwritten by restore"
-\item If an entire Storage Group is to be restored (eg all databases and
- logs in the Storage Group), then it is best to manually delete the
- database files from the server (eg C:\verb+\+Program Files\verb+\+Exchsrvr\verb+\+mdbdata\verb+\+*)
- as Exchange can get confused by stray log files lying around.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\subsection{Restoring to the Recovery Storage Group}
-The concept of the Recovery Storage Group is well documented by
-Microsoft
-\elink{http://support.microsoft.com/kb/824126}{http://support.microsoft.com/kb/824126},
-but to briefly summarize...
-
-Microsoft Exchange allows the creation of an additional Storage Group
-called the Recovery Storage Group, which is used to restore an older
-copy of a database (e.g. before a mailbox was deleted) into without
-messing with the current live data. This is required as the Standard and
-Small Business Server versions of Exchange can not ordinarily have more
-than one Storage Group.
-
-To create the Recovery Storage Group, drill down to the Server in Exchange
-System Manager, right click, and select
-{\bf "New -> Recovery Storage Group..."}. Accept or change the file
-locations and click OK. On the Recovery Storage Group, right click and
-select {\bf "Add Database to Recover..."} and select the database you will
-be restoring.
-
-Restore only the single database nominated as the database in the
-Recovery Storage Group. Exchange will redirect the restore to the
-Recovery Storage Group automatically.
-Then run the restore.
-
-\subsection{Restoring on Microsoft Server 2007}
-Apparently the {\bf Exmerge} program no longer exists in Microsoft Server
-2007, and henc you use a new proceedure for recovering a single mail box.
-This procedure is ducomented by Microsoft at:
-\elink{http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa997694.aspx}{http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa997694.aspx},
-and involves using the {\bf Restore-Mailbox} and {\bf
-Get-MailboxStatistics} shell commands.
-
-\subsection{Caveats}
-This plugin is still being developed, so you should consider it
-currently in BETA test, and thus use in a production environment
-should be done only after very careful testing.
-
-When doing a full backup, the Exchange database logs are truncated by
-Exchange as soon as the plugin has completed the backup. If the data
-never makes it to the backup medium (eg because of spooling) then the
-logs will still be truncated, but they will also not have been backed
-up. A solution to this is being worked on. You will have to schedule a
-new Full backup to ensure that your next backups will be usable.
-
-The "Enable Circular Logging" option cannot be enabled or the plugin
-will fail.
-
-Exchange insists that a successful Full backup must have taken place if
-an Incremental or Differential backup is desired, and the plugin will
-fail if this is not the case. If a restore is done, Exchange will
-require that a Full backup be done before an Incremental or Differential
-backup is done.
-
-The plugin will most likely not work well if another backup application
-(eg NTBACKUP) is backing up the Exchange database, especially if the
-other backup application is truncating the log files.
-
-The Exchange plugin has not been tested with the {\bf Accurate} option, so
-we recommend either carefully testing or that you avoid this option for
-the current time.
-
-The Exchange plugin is not called during processing the bconsole {\bf
-estimate} command, and so anything that would be backed up by the plugin
-will not be added to the estimate total that is displayed.
-
-
-\section{libdbi Framework}
-\index[general]{libdbi Framework}
-As a general guideline, Bacula has support for a few catalog database drivers
-(MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite)
-coded natively by the Bacula team. With the libdbi implementation, which is a
-Bacula driver that uses libdbi to access the catalog, we have an open field to
-use many different kinds database engines following the needs of users.
-
-The according to libdbi (http://libdbi.sourceforge.net/) project: libdbi
-implements a database-independent abstraction layer in C, similar to the
-DBI/DBD layer in Perl. Writing one generic set of code, programmers can
-leverage the power of multiple databases and multiple simultaneous database
-connections by using this framework.
-
-Currently the libdbi driver in Bacula project only supports the same drivers
-natively coded in Bacula. However the libdbi project has support for many
-others database engines. You can view the list at
-http://libdbi-drivers.sourceforge.net/. In the future all those drivers can be
-supported by Bacula, however, they must be tested properly by the Bacula team.
-
-Some of benefits of using libdbi are:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The possibility to use proprietary databases engines in which your
- proprietary licenses prevent the Bacula team from developing the driver.
- \item The possibility to use the drivers written for the libdbi project.
- \item The possibility to use other database engines without recompiling Bacula
- to use them. Just change one line in bacula-dir.conf
- \item Abstract Database access, this is, unique point to code and profiling
- catalog database access.
- \end{itemize}
-
- The following drivers have been tested:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item PostgreSQL, with and without batch insert
- \item Mysql, with and without batch insert
- \item SQLite
- \item SQLite3
- \end{itemize}
-
- In the future, we will test and approve to use others databases engines
- (proprietary or not) like DB2, Oracle, Microsoft SQL.
-
- To compile Bacula to support libdbi we need to configure the code with the
- --with-dbi and --with-dbi-driver=[database] ./configure options, where
- [database] is the database engine to be used with Bacula (of course we can
- change the driver in file bacula-dir.conf, see below). We must configure the
- access port of the database engine with the option --with-db-port, because the
- libdbi framework doesn't know the default access port of each database.
-
-The next phase is checking (or configuring) the bacula-dir.conf, example:
-\begin{verbatim}
-Catalog {
- Name = MyCatalog
- dbdriver = dbi:mysql; dbaddress = 127.0.0.1; dbport = 3306
- dbname = regress; user = regress; password = ""
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The parameter {\bf dbdriver} indicates that we will use the driver dbi with a
-mysql database. Currently the drivers supported by Bacula are: postgresql,
-mysql, sqlite, sqlite3; these are the names that may be added to string "dbi:".
-
-The following limitations apply when Bacula is set to use the libdbi framework:
- - Not tested on the Win32 platform
- - A little performance is lost if comparing with native database driver.
- The reason is bound with the database driver provided by libdbi and the
- simple fact that one more layer of code was added.
-
-It is important to remember, when compiling Bacula with libdbi, the
-following packages are needed:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item libdbi version 1.0.0, http://libdbi.sourceforge.net/
- \item libdbi-drivers 1.0.0, http://libdbi-drivers.sourceforge.net/
- \end{itemize}
-
- You can download them and compile them on your system or install the packages
- from your OS distribution.
-
-\section{Console Command Additions and Enhancements}
-\index[general]{Console Additions}
-
-\subsection{Display Autochanger Content}
-\index[general]{StatusSlots}
-
-The {\bf status slots storage=\lt{}storage-name\gt{}} command displays
-autochanger content.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Slot | Volume Name | Status | Media Type | Pool |
-------+---------------+----------+-------------------+------------|
- 1 | 00001 | Append | DiskChangerMedia | Default |
- 2 | 00002 | Append | DiskChangerMedia | Default |
- 3*| 00003 | Append | DiskChangerMedia | Scratch |
- 4 | | | | |
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If you an asterisk ({\bf *}) appears after the slot number, you must run an
-{\bf update slots} command to synchronize autochanger content with your
-catalog.
-
-\subsection{list joblog job=xxx or jobid=nnn}
-\index[general]{list joblog}
-A new list command has been added that allows you to list the contents
-of the Job Log stored in the catalog for either a Job Name (fully qualified)
-or for a particular JobId. The {\bf llist} command will include a line with
-the time and date of the entry.
-
-Note for the catalog to have Job Log entries, you must have a directive
-such as:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- catalog = all
-\end{verbatim}
-
-In your Director's {\bf Messages} resource.
-
-\subsection{Use separator for multiple commands}
-\index[general]{Command Separator}
- When using bconsole with readline, you can set the command separator with
- \textbf{@separator} command to one
- of those characters to write commands who require multiple input in one line.
-\begin{verbatim}
- !$%&'()*+,-/:;<>?[]^`{|}~
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\subsection{Deleting Volumes}
-The delete volume bconsole command has been modified to
-require an asterisk (*) in front of a MediaId otherwise the
-value you enter is a taken to be a Volume name. This is so that
-users may delete numeric Volume names. The previous Bacula versions
-assumed that all input that started with a number was a MediaId.
-
-This new behavior is indicated in the prompt if you read it
-carefully.
-
-\section{Bare Metal Recovery}
-The old bare metal recovery project is essentially dead. One
-of the main features of it was that it would build a recovery
-CD based on the kernel on your system. The problem was that
-every distribution has a different boot procedure and different
-scripts, and worse yet, the boot procedures and scripts change
-from one distribution to another. This meant that maintaining
-(keeping up with the changes) the rescue CD was too much work.
-
-To replace it, a new bare metal recovery USB boot stick has been developed
-by Bacula Systems. This technology involves remastering a Ubuntu LiveCD to
-boot from a USB key.
-
-Advantages:
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Recovery can be done from within graphical environment.
-\item Recovery can be done in a shell.
-\item Ubuntu boots on a large number of Linux systems.
-\item The process of updating the system and adding new
- packages is not too difficult.
-\item The USB key can easily be upgraded to newer Ubuntu versions.
-\item The USB key has writable partitions for modifications to
- the OS and for modification to your home directory.
-\item You can add new files/directories to the USB key very easily.
-\item You can save the environment from multiple machines on
- one USB key.
-\item Bacula Systems is funding its ongoing development.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-The disadvantages are:
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item The USB key is usable but currently under development.
-\item Not everyone may be familiar with Ubuntu (no worse
- than using Knoppix)
-\item Some older OSes cannot be booted from USB. This can
- be resolved by first booting a Ubuntu LiveCD then plugging
- in the USB key.
-\item Currently the documentation is sketchy and not yet added
- to the main manual. See below ...
-\end{enumerate}
-
-The documentation and the code can be found in the {\bf rescue} package
-in the directory {\bf linux/usb}.
-
-\section{Miscellaneous}
-\index[general]{Misc New Features}
-
-\subsection{Allow Mixed Priority = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}}
-\index[general]{Allow Mixed Priority}
- This directive is only implemented in version 2.5 and later. When
- set to {\bf yes} (default {\bf no}), this job may run even if lower
- priority jobs are already running. This means a high priority job
- will not have to wait for other jobs to finish before starting.
- The scheduler will only mix priorities when all running jobs have
- this set to true.
-
- Note that only higher priority jobs will start early. Suppose the
- director will allow two concurrent jobs, and that two jobs with
- priority 10 are running, with two more in the queue. If a job with
- priority 5 is added to the queue, it will be run as soon as one of
- the running jobs finishes. However, new priority 10 jobs will not
- be run until the priority 5 job has finished.
-
-\subsection{Bootstrap File Directive -- FileRegex}
-\index[general]{Bootstrap File Directive}
- {\bf FileRegex} is a new command that can be added to the bootstrap
- (.bsr) file. The value is a regular expression. When specified, only
- matching filenames will be restored.
-
- During a restore, if all File records are pruned from the catalog
- for a Job, normally Bacula can restore only all files saved. That
- is there is no way using the catalog to select individual files.
- With this new feature, Bacula will ask if you want to specify a Regex
- expression for extracting only a part of the full backup.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- Building directory tree for JobId(s) 1,3 ...
- There were no files inserted into the tree, so file selection
- is not possible.Most likely your retention policy pruned the files
-
- Do you want to restore all the files? (yes\vb{}no): no
-
- Regexp matching files to restore? (empty to abort): /tmp/regress/(bin|tests)/
- Bootstrap records written to /tmp/regress/working/zog4-dir.restore.1.bsr
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\subsection{Bootstrap File Optimization Changes}
-In order to permit proper seeking on disk files, we have extended the bootstrap
-file format to include a {\bf VolStartAddr} and {\bf VolEndAddr} records. Each
-takes a 64 bit unsigned integer range (i.e. nnn-mmm) which defines the start
-address range and end address range respectively. These two directives replace
-the {\bf VolStartFile}, {\bf VolEndFile}, {\bf VolStartBlock} and {\bf
- VolEndBlock} directives. Bootstrap files containing the old directives will
-still work, but will not properly take advantage of proper disk seeking, and
-may read completely to the end of a disk volume during a restore. With the new
-format (automatically generated by the new Director), restores will seek
-properly and stop reading the volume when all the files have been restored.
-
-\subsection{Solaris ZFS/NFSv4 ACLs}
-This is an upgrade of the previous Solaris ACL backup code
-to the new library format, which will backup both the old
-POSIX(UFS) ACLs as well as the ZFS ACLs.
-
-The new code can also restore POSIX(UFS) ACLs to a ZFS filesystem
-(it will translate the POSIX(UFS)) ACL into a ZFS/NFSv4 one) it can also
-be used to transfer from UFS to ZFS filesystems.
-
-
-\subsection{Virtual Tape Emulation}
-\index[general]{Virtual Tape Emulation}
-We now have a Virtual Tape emulator that allows us to run though 99.9\% of
-the tape code but actually reading and writing to a disk file. Used with the
-\textbf{disk-changer} script, you can now emulate an autochanger with 10 drives
-and 700 slots. This feature is most useful in testing. It is enabled
-by using {\bf Device Type = vtape} in the Storage daemon's Device
-directive. This feature is only implemented on Linux machines and should not be
-used for production.
-
-\subsection{Bat Enhancements}
-\index[general]{Bat Enhancements}
-Bat (the Bacula Administration Tool) GUI program has been significantly
-enhanced and stabilized. In particular, there are new table based status
-commands; it can now be easily localized using Qt4 Linguist.
-
-The Bat communications protocol has been significantly enhanced to improve
-GUI handling. Note, you {\bf must} use a the bat that is distributed with
-the Director you are using otherwise the communications protocol will not
-work.
-
-\subsection{RunScript Enhancements}
-\index[general]{RunScript Enhancements}
-The {\bf RunScript} resource has been enhanced to permit multiple
-commands per RunScript. Simply specify multiple {\bf Command} directives
-in your RunScript.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-Job {
- Name = aJob
- RunScript {
- Command = "/bin/echo test"
- Command = "/bin/echo an other test"
- Command = "/bin/echo 3 commands in the same runscript"
- RunsWhen = Before
- }
- ...
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-A new Client RunScript {\bf RunsWhen} keyword of {\bf AfterVSS} has been
-implemented, which runs the command after the Volume Shadow Copy has been made.
-
-Console commands can be specified within a RunScript by using:
-{\bf Console = \lt{}command\gt{}}, however, this command has not been
-carefully tested and debugged and is known to easily crash the Director.
-We would appreciate feedback. Due to the recursive nature of this command, we
-may remove it before the final release.
-
-\subsection{Status Enhancements}
-\index[general]{Status Enhancements}
-The bconsole {\bf status dir} output has been enhanced to indicate
-Storage daemon job spooling and despooling activity.
-
-\subsection{Connect Timeout}
-\index[general]{Connect Timeout}
-The default connect timeout to the File
-daemon has been set to 3 minutes. Previously it was 30 minutes.
-
-\subsection{ftruncate for NFS Volumes}
-\index[general]{ftruncate for NFS Volumes}
-If you write to a Volume mounted by NFS (say on a local file server),
-in previous Bacula versions, when the Volume was recycled, it was not
-properly truncated because NFS does not implement ftruncate (file
-truncate). This is now corrected in the new version because we have
-written code (actually a kind user) that deletes and recreates the Volume,
-thus accomplishing the same thing as a truncate.
-
-\subsection{Support for Ubuntu}
-The new version of Bacula now recognizes the Ubuntu (and Kubuntu)
-version of Linux, and thus now provides correct autostart routines.
-Since Ubuntu officially supports Bacula, you can also obtain any
-recent release of Bacula from the Ubuntu repositories.
-
-\subsection{Recycle Pool = \lt{}pool-name\gt{}}
-\index[general]{Recycle Pool}
-The new \textbf{RecyclePool} directive defines to which pool the Volume will
-be placed (moved) when it is recycled. Without this directive, a Volume will
-remain in the same pool when it is recycled. With this directive, it can be
-moved automatically to any existing pool during a recycle. This directive is
-probably most useful when defined in the Scratch pool, so that volumes will
-be recycled back into the Scratch pool.
-
-\subsection{FD Version}
-\index[general]{FD Version}
-The File daemon to Director protocol now includes a version
-number, which although there is no visible change for users,
-will help us in future versions automatically determine
-if a File daemon is not compatible.
-
-\subsection{Max Run Sched Time = \lt{}time-period-in-seconds\gt{}}
-\index[general]{Max Run Sched Time}
-The time specifies the maximum allowed time that a job may run, counted from
-when the job was scheduled. This can be useful to prevent jobs from running
-during working hours. We can see it like \texttt{Max Start Delay + Max Run
- Time}.
-
-\subsection{Max Wait Time = \lt{}time-period-in-seconds\gt{}}
-\index[general]{Max Wait Time}
-Previous \textbf{MaxWaitTime} directives aren't working as expected, instead
-of checking the maximum allowed time that a job may block for a resource,
-those directives worked like \textbf{MaxRunTime}. Some users are reporting to
-use \textbf{Incr/Diff/Full Max Wait Time} to control the maximum run time of
-their job depending on the level. Now, they have to use
-\textbf{Incr/Diff/Full Max Run Time}. \textbf{Incr/Diff/Full Max Wait Time}
-directives are now deprecated.
-
-\subsection{Incremental|Differential Max Wait Time = \lt{}time-period-in-seconds\gt{}}
-\index[general]{Incremental Max Wait Time}
-\index[general]{Differential Max Wait Time}
-
-These directives have been deprecated in favor of
-\texttt{Incremental|Differential Max Run Time}.
-
-\subsection{Max Run Time directives}
-\index[general]{Max Run Time directives}
-Using \textbf{Full/Diff/Incr Max Run Time}, it's now possible to specify the
-maximum allowed time that a job can run depending on the level.
-
-\addcontentsline{lof}{figure}{Job time control directives}
-\includegraphics{\idir different_time.eps}
-
-\subsection{Statistics Enhancements}
-\index[general]{Statistics Enhancements}
-If you (or probably your boss) want to have statistics on your backups to
-provide some \textit{Service Level Agreement} indicators, you could use a few
-SQL queries on the Job table to report how many:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item jobs have run
-\item jobs have been successful
-\item files have been backed up
-\item ...
-\end{itemize}
-
-However, these statistics are accurate only if your job retention is greater
-than your statistics period. Ie, if jobs are purged from the catalog, you won't
-be able to use them.
-
-Now, you can use the \textbf{update stats [days=num]} console command to fill
-the JobHistory table with new Job records. If you want to be sure to take in
-account only \textbf{good jobs}, ie if one of your important job has failed but
-you have fixed the problem and restarted it on time, you probably want to
-delete the first \textit{bad} job record and keep only the successful one. For
-that simply let your staff do the job, and update JobHistory table after two or
-three days depending on your organization using the \textbf{[days=num]} option.
-
-These statistics records aren't used for restoring, but mainly for
-capacity planning, billings, etc.
-
-The Bweb interface provides a statistics module that can use this feature. You
-can also use tools like Talend or extract information by yourself.
-
-The \textbf{Statistics Retention = \lt{}time\gt{}} director directive defines
-the length of time that Bacula will keep statistics job records in the Catalog
-database after the Job End time. (In \texttt{JobHistory} table) When this time
-period expires, and if user runs \texttt{prune stats} command, Bacula will
-prune (remove) Job records that are older than the specified period.
-
-You can use the following Job resource in your nightly \textbf{BackupCatalog}
-job to maintain statistics.
-\begin{verbatim}
-Job {
- Name = BackupCatalog
- ...
- RunScript {
- Console = "update stats days=3"
- Console = "prune stats yes"
- RunsWhen = After
- RunsOnClient = no
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\subsection{ScratchPool = \lt{}pool-resource-name\gt{}}
-\index[general]{ScratchPool}
-This directive permits to specify a specific \textsl{Scratch} pool for the
-current pool. This is useful when using multiple storage sharing the same
-mediatype or when you want to dedicate volumes to a particular set of pool.
-
-\subsection{Enhanced Attribute Despooling}
-\index[general]{Attribute Despooling}
-If the storage daemon and the Director are on the same machine, the spool file
-that contains attributes is read directly by the Director instead of being
-transmitted across the network. That should reduce load and speedup insertion.
-
-\subsection{SpoolSize = \lt{}size-specification-in-bytes\gt{}}
-\index[general]{SpoolSize}
-A new Job directive permits to specify the spool size per job. This is used
-in advanced job tunning. {\bf SpoolSize={\it bytes}}
-
-\subsection{MaxConsoleConnections = \lt{}number\gt{}}
-\index[general]{MaxConsoleConnections}
-A new director directive permits to specify the maximum number of Console
-Connections that could run concurrently. The default is set to 20, but you may
-set it to a larger number.
-
-\subsection{VerId = \lt{}string\gt{}}
-\index[general]{VerId}
-A new director directive permits to specify a personnal identifier that will be
-displayed in the \texttt{version} command.
-
-\subsection{dbcheck enhancements}
-\index[general]{dbcheck enhancements}
-If you are using Mysql, dbcheck will now ask you if you want to create
-temporary indexes to speed up orphaned Path and Filename elimination.
-
-A new \texttt{-B} option allows you to print catalog information in a simple
-text based format. This is useful to backup it in a secure way.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- $ dbcheck -B
- catalog=MyCatalog
- db_type=SQLite
- db_name=regress
- db_driver=
- db_user=regress
- db_password=
- db_address=
- db_port=0
- db_socket=
-\end{verbatim} %$
-
-You can now specify the database connection port in the command line.
-
-\subsection{{-}{-}docdir configure option}
-\index[general]{{-}{-}docdir configure option}
-You can use {-}{-}docdir= on the ./configure command to
-specify the directory where you want Bacula to install the
-LICENSE, ReleaseNotes, ChangeLog, ... files. The default is
-{\bf /usr/share/doc/bacula}.
-
-\subsection{{-}{-}htmldir configure option}
-\index[general]{{-}{-}htmldir configure option}
-You can use {-}{-}htmldir= on the ./configure command to
-specify the directory where you want Bacula to install the bat html help
-files. The default is {\bf /usr/share/doc/bacula/html}
-
-\subsection{{-}{-}with-plugindir configure option}
-\index[general]{{-}{-}plugindir configure option}
-You can use {-}{-}plugindir= on the ./configure command to
-specify the directory where you want Bacula to install
-the plugins (currently only bpipe-fd). The default is
-/usr/lib.
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Automated Disk Backup}
-\label{PoolsChapter}
-\index[general]{Volumes!Using Pools to Manage}
-\index[general]{Disk!Automated Backup}
-\index[general]{Using Pools to Manage Volumes}
-\index[general]{Automated Disk Backup}
-
-If you manage five or ten machines and have a nice tape backup, you don't need
-Pools, and you may wonder what they are good for. In this chapter, you will
-see that Pools can help you optimize disk storage space. The same techniques
-can be applied to a shop that has multiple tape drives, or that wants to mount
-various different Volumes to meet their needs.
-
-The rest of this chapter will give an example involving backup to disk
-Volumes, but most of the information applies equally well to tape Volumes.
-
-\label{TheProblem}
-\section{The Problem}
-\index[general]{Problem}
-
-A site that I administer (a charitable organization) had a tape DDS-3 tape
-drive that was failing. The exact reason for the failure is still unknown.
-Worse yet, their full backup size is about 15GB whereas the capacity of their
-broken DDS-3 was at best 8GB (rated 6/12). A new DDS-4 tape drive and the
-necessary cassettes was more expensive than their budget could handle.
-
-\label{TheSolution}
-\section{The Solution}
-\index[general]{Solution}
-
-They want to maintain six months of backup data, and be able to access the old
-files on a daily basis for a week, a weekly basis for a month, then monthly
-for six months. In addition, offsite capability was not needed (well perhaps
-it really is, but it was never used). Their daily changes amount to about
-300MB on the average, or about 2GB per week.
-
-As a consequence, the total volume of data they need to keep to meet their
-needs is about 100GB (15GB x 6 + 2GB x 5 + 0.3 x 7) = 102.1GB.
-
-The chosen solution was to buy a 120GB hard disk for next to nothing -- far
-less than 1/10th the price of a tape drive and the cassettes to handle the
-same amount of data, and to have Bacula write to disk files.
-
-The rest of this chapter will explain how to setup Bacula so that it would
-automatically manage a set of disk files with the minimum sysadmin
-intervention. The system has been running since 22 January 2004 until today
-(23 June 2007) with no intervention, with the exception of adding
-a second 120GB hard disk after a year because their needs grew
-over that time to more than the 120GB (168GB to be exact). The only other
-intervention I have made is a periodic (about once a year) Bacula upgrade.
-
-\label{OverallDesign}
-\section{Overall Design}
-\index[general]{Overall Design}
-\index[general]{Design!Overall}
-
-Getting Bacula to write to disk rather than tape in the simplest case is
-rather easy, and is documented in the previous chapter. In addition, all the
-directives discussed here are explained in that chapter. We'll leave it to you
-to look at the details there. If you haven't read it and are not familiar with
-Pools, you probably should at least read it once quickly for the ideas before
-continuing here.
-
-One needs to consider about what happens if we have only a single large Bacula
-Volume defined on our hard disk. Everything works fine until the Volume fills,
-then Bacula will ask you to mount a new Volume. This same problem applies to
-the use of tape Volumes if your tape fills. Being a hard disk and the only one
-you have, this will be a bit of a problem. It should be obvious that it is
-better to use a number of smaller Volumes and arrange for Bacula to
-automatically recycle them so that the disk storage space can be reused. The
-other problem with a single Volume, is that until version 2.0.0,
-Bacula did not seek within a disk Volume, so restoring a single file can take
-more time than one would expect.
-
-As mentioned, the solution is to have multiple Volumes, or files on the disk.
-To do so, we need to limit the use and thus the size of a single Volume, by
-time, by number of jobs, or by size. Any of these would work, but we chose to
-limit the use of a single Volume by putting a single job in each Volume with
-the exception of Volumes containing Incremental backup where there will be 6
-jobs (a week's worth of data) per volume. The details of this will be
-discussed shortly. This is a single client backup, so if you have multiple
-clients you will need to multiply those numbers by the number of clients,
-or use a different system for switching volumes, such as limiting the
-volume size.
-
-The next problem to resolve is recycling of Volumes. As you noted from above,
-the requirements are to be able to restore monthly for 6 months, weekly for a
-month, and daily for a week. So to simplify things, why not do a Full save
-once a month, a Differential save once a week, and Incremental saves daily.
-Now since each of these different kinds of saves needs to remain valid for
-differing periods, the simplest way to do this (and possibly the only) is to
-have a separate Pool for each backup type.
-
-The decision was to use three Pools: one for Full saves, one for Differential
-saves, and one for Incremental saves, and each would have a different number
-of volumes and a different Retention period to accomplish the requirements.
-
-\label{FullPool}
-\subsection{Full Pool}
-\index[general]{Pool!Full}
-\index[general]{Full Pool}
-
-Putting a single Full backup on each Volume, will require six Full save
-Volumes, and a retention period of six months. The Pool needed to do that is:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Pool {
- Name = Full-Pool
- Pool Type = Backup
- Recycle = yes
- AutoPrune = yes
- Volume Retention = 6 months
- Maximum Volume Jobs = 1
- Label Format = Full-
- Maximum Volumes = 9
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Since these are disk Volumes, no space is lost by having separate Volumes for
-each backup (done once a month in this case). The items to note are the
-retention period of six months (i.e. they are recycled after six months), that
-there is one job per volume (Maximum Volume Jobs = 1), the volumes will be
-labeled Full-0001, ... Full-0006 automatically. One could have labeled these
-manually from the start, but why not use the features of Bacula.
-
-Six months after the first volume is used, it will be subject to pruning
-and thus recycling, so with a maximum of 9 volumes, there should always be
-3 volumes available (note, they may all be marked used, but they will be
-marked purged and recycled as needed).
-
-If you have two clients, you would want to set {\bf Maximum Volume Jobs} to
-2 instead of one, or set a limit on the size of the Volumes, and possibly
-increase the maximum number of Volumes.
-
-
-\label{DiffPool}
-\subsection{Differential Pool}
-\index[general]{Pool!Differential}
-\index[general]{Differential Pool}
-
-For the Differential backup Pool, we choose a retention period of a bit longer
-than a month and ensure that there is at least one Volume for each of the
-maximum of five weeks in a month. So the following works:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Pool {
- Name = Diff-Pool
- Pool Type = Backup
- Recycle = yes
- AutoPrune = yes
- Volume Retention = 40 days
- Maximum Volume Jobs = 1
- Label Format = Diff-
- Maximum Volumes = 10
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-As you can see, the Differential Pool can grow to a maximum of 9 volumes,
-and the Volumes are retained 40 days and thereafter they can be recycled. Finally
-there is one job per volume. This, of course, could be tightened up a lot, but
-the expense here is a few GB which is not too serious.
-
-If a new volume is used every week, after 40 days, one will have used 7
-volumes, and there should then always be 3 volumes that can be purged and
-recycled.
-
-See the discussion above concering the Full pool for how to handle multiple
-clients.
-
-\label{IncPool}
-\subsection{Incremental Pool}
-\index[general]{Incremental Pool}
-\index[general]{Pool!Incremental}
-
-Finally, here is the resource for the Incremental Pool:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Pool {
- Name = Inc-Pool
- Pool Type = Backup
- Recycle = yes
- AutoPrune = yes
- Volume Retention = 20 days
- Maximum Volume Jobs = 6
- Label Format = Inc-
- Maximum Volumes = 7
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-We keep the data for 20 days rather than just a week as the needs require. To
-reduce the proliferation of volume names, we keep a week's worth of data (6
-incremental backups) in each Volume. In practice, the retention period should
-be set to just a bit more than a week and keep only two or three volumes
-instead of five. Again, the lost is very little and as the system reaches the
-full steady state, we can adjust these values so that the total disk usage
-doesn't exceed the disk capacity.
-
-If you have two clients, the simplest thing to do is to increase the
-maximum volume jobs from 6 to 12. As mentioned above, it is also possible
-limit the size of the volumes. However, in that case, you will need to
-have a better idea of the volume or add sufficient volumes to the pool so
-that you will be assured that in the next cycle (after 20 days) there is
-at least one volume that is pruned and can be recycled.
-
-
-\label{Example}
-\section{The Actual Conf Files}
-\index[general]{Files!Actual Conf}
-\index[general]{Actual Conf Files}
-
-The following example shows you the actual files used, with only a few minor
-modifications to simplify things.
-
-The Director's configuration file is as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Director { # define myself
- Name = bacula-dir
- DIRport = 9101
- QueryFile = "/home/bacula/bin/query.sql"
- WorkingDirectory = "/home/bacula/working"
- PidDirectory = "/home/bacula/working"
- Maximum Concurrent Jobs = 1
- Password = " *** CHANGE ME ***"
- Messages = Standard
-}
-# By default, this job will back up to disk in /tmp
-Job {
- Name = client
- Type = Backup
- Client = client-fd
- FileSet = "Full Set"
- Schedule = "WeeklyCycle"
- Storage = File
- Messages = Standard
- Pool = Default
- Full Backup Pool = Full-Pool
- Incremental Backup Pool = Inc-Pool
- Differential Backup Pool = Diff-Pool
- Write Bootstrap = "/home/bacula/working/client.bsr"
- Priority = 10
-}
-
-# Backup the catalog database (after the nightly save)
-Job {
- Name = "BackupCatalog"
- Type = Backup
- Client = client-fd
- FileSet="Catalog"
- Schedule = "WeeklyCycleAfterBackup"
- Storage = File
- Messages = Standard
- Pool = Default
- # This creates an ASCII copy of the catalog
- # WARNING!!! Passing the password via the command line is insecure.
- # see comments in make_catalog_backup for details.
- RunBeforeJob = "/home/bacula/bin/make_catalog_backup bacula bacula"
- # This deletes the copy of the catalog
- RunAfterJob = "/home/bacula/bin/delete_catalog_backup"
- Write Bootstrap = "/home/bacula/working/BackupCatalog.bsr"
- Priority = 11 # run after main backup
-}
-
-# Standard Restore template, to be changed by Console program
-Job {
- Name = "RestoreFiles"
- Type = Restore
- Client = havana-fd
- FileSet="Full Set"
- Storage = File
- Messages = Standard
- Pool = Default
- Where = /tmp/bacula-restores
-}
-
-
-
-# List of files to be backed up
-FileSet {
- Name = "Full Set"
- Include = { Options { signature=SHA1; compression=GZIP9 }
- File = /
- File = /usr
- File = /home
- File = /boot
- File = /var
- File = /opt
- }
- Exclude = {
- File = /proc
- File = /tmp
- File = /.journal
- File = /.fsck
- ...
- }
-}
-Schedule {
- Name = "WeeklyCycle"
- Run = Level=Full 1st sun at 2:05
- Run = Level=Differential 2nd-5th sun at 2:05
- Run = Level=Incremental mon-sat at 2:05
-}
-
-# This schedule does the catalog. It starts after the WeeklyCycle
-Schedule {
- Name = "WeeklyCycleAfterBackup"
- Run = Level=Full sun-sat at 2:10
-}
-
-# This is the backup of the catalog
-FileSet {
- Name = "Catalog"
- Include { Options { signature=MD5 }
- File = /home/bacula/working/bacula.sql
- }
-}
-
-Client {
- Name = client-fd
- Address = client
- FDPort = 9102
- Catalog = MyCatalog
- Password = " *** CHANGE ME ***"
- AutoPrune = yes # Prune expired Jobs/Files
- Job Retention = 6 months
- File Retention = 60 days
-}
-
-Storage {
- Name = File
- Address = localhost
- SDPort = 9103
- Password = " *** CHANGE ME ***"
- Device = FileStorage
- Media Type = File
-}
-
-Catalog {
- Name = MyCatalog
- dbname = bacula; user = bacula; password = ""
-}
-
-Pool {
- Name = Full-Pool
- Pool Type = Backup
- Recycle = yes # automatically recycle Volumes
- AutoPrune = yes # Prune expired volumes
- Volume Retention = 6 months
- Maximum Volume Jobs = 1
- Label Format = Full-
- Maximum Volumes = 9
-}
-
-Pool {
- Name = Inc-Pool
- Pool Type = Backup
- Recycle = yes # automatically recycle Volumes
- AutoPrune = yes # Prune expired volumes
- Volume Retention = 20 days
- Maximum Volume Jobs = 6
- Label Format = Inc-
- Maximum Volumes = 7
-}
-
-Pool {
- Name = Diff-Pool
- Pool Type = Backup
- Recycle = yes
- AutoPrune = yes
- Volume Retention = 40 days
- Maximum Volume Jobs = 1
- Label Format = Diff-
- Maximum Volumes = 10
-}
-
-Messages {
- Name = Standard
- mailcommand = "bsmtp -h mail.domain.com -f \"\(Bacula\) %r\"
- -s \"Bacula: %t %e of %c %l\" %r"
- operatorcommand = "bsmtp -h mail.domain.com -f \"\(Bacula\) %r\"
- -s \"Bacula: Intervention needed for %j\" %r"
- mail = root@domain.com = all, !skipped
- operator = root@domain.com = mount
- console = all, !skipped, !saved
- append = "/home/bacula/bin/log" = all, !skipped
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-and the Storage daemon's configuration file is:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Storage { # definition of myself
- Name = bacula-sd
- SDPort = 9103 # Director's port
- WorkingDirectory = "/home/bacula/working"
- Pid Directory = "/home/bacula/working"
-}
-Director {
- Name = bacula-dir
- Password = " *** CHANGE ME ***"
-}
-Device {
- Name = FileStorage
- Media Type = File
- Archive Device = /files/bacula
- LabelMedia = yes; # lets Bacula label unlabeled media
- Random Access = Yes;
- AutomaticMount = yes; # when device opened, read it
- RemovableMedia = no;
- AlwaysOpen = no;
-}
-Messages {
- Name = Standard
- director = bacula-dir = all
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Automatic Volume Recycling}
-\label{RecyclingChapter}
-\index[general]{Recycling!Automatic Volume }
-\index[general]{Automatic Volume Recycling }
-
-By default, once Bacula starts writing a Volume, it can append to the
-volume, but it will not overwrite the existing data thus destroying it.
-However when Bacula {\bf recycles} a Volume, the Volume becomes available
-for being reused, and Bacula can at some later time overwrite the previous
-contents of that Volume. Thus all previous data will be lost. If the
-Volume is a tape, the tape will be rewritten from the beginning. If the
-Volume is a disk file, the file will be truncated before being rewritten.
-
-You may not want Bacula to automatically recycle (reuse) tapes. This would
-require a large number of tapes though, and in such a case, it is possible
-to manually recycle tapes. For more on manual recycling, see the section
-entitled \ilink{ Manually Recycling Volumes}{manualrecycling} below in this
-chapter.
-
-Most people prefer to have a Pool of tapes that are used for daily backups and
-recycled once a week, another Pool of tapes that are used for Full backups
-once a week and recycled monthly, and finally a Pool of tapes that are used
-once a month and recycled after a year or two. With a scheme like this, the
-number of tapes in your pool or pools remains constant.
-
-By properly defining your Volume Pools with appropriate Retention periods,
-Bacula can manage the recycling (such as defined above) automatically.
-
-Automatic recycling of Volumes is controlled by four records in the {\bf
-Pool} resource definition in the Director's configuration file. These four
-records are:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item AutoPrune = yes
-\item VolumeRetention = \lt{}time\gt{}
-\item Recycle = yes
-\item RecyclePool = \lt{}APool\gt{} (\textit{This require bacula 2.1.4 or greater})
-\end{itemize}
-
-The above three directives are all you need assuming that you fill
-each of your Volumes then wait the Volume Retention period before
-reusing them. If you want Bacula to stop using a Volume and recycle
-it before it is full, you will need to use one or more additional
-directives such as:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Use Volume Once = yes
-\item Volume Use Duration = ttt
-\item Maximum Volume Jobs = nnn
-\item Maximum Volume Bytes = mmm
-\end{itemize}
-Please see below and
-the \ilink{Basic Volume Management}{DiskChapter} chapter
-of this manual for more complete examples.
-
-Automatic recycling of Volumes is performed by Bacula only when it wants a
-new Volume and no appendable Volumes are available in the Pool. It will then
-search the Pool for any Volumes with the {\bf Recycle} flag set and the
-Volume Status is {\bf Purged}. At that point, it will choose the oldest
-purged volume and recycle it.
-
-If there are no volumes with Status {\bf Purged}, then
-the recycling occurs in two steps:
-The first is that the Catalog for a Volume must be pruned of all Jobs (i.e.
-Purged). Files contained on that Volume, and the second step is the actual
-recycling of the Volume. Only Volumes marked {\bf Full} or {\bf Used} will
-be considerd for pruning. The Volume will be purged if the VolumeRetention
-period has expired. When a Volume is marked as Purged, it means that no
-Catalog records reference that Volume, and the Volume can be recycled.
-Until recycling actually occurs, the Volume data remains intact. If no
-Volumes can be found for recycling for any of the reasons stated above,
-Bacula will request operator intervention (i.e. it will ask you to label a
-new volume).
-
-A key point mentioned above, that can be a source of frustration, is that Bacula
-will only recycle purged Volumes if there is no other appendable Volume
-available, otherwise, it will always write to an appendable Volume before
-recycling even if there are Volume marked as Purged. This preserves your data
-as long as possible. So, if you wish to "force" Bacula to use a purged
-Volume, you must first ensure that no other Volume in the Pool is marked {\bf
-Append}. If necessary, you can manually set a volume to {\bf Full}. The reason
-for this is that Bacula wants to preserve the data on your old tapes (even
-though purged from the catalog) as long as absolutely possible before
-overwriting it. There are also a number of directives such as
-{\bf Volume Use Duration} that will automatically mark a volume as {\bf
-Used} and thus no longer appendable.
-
-\label{AutoPruning}
-\section{Automatic Pruning}
-\index[general]{Automatic Pruning}
-\index[general]{Pruning!Automatic}
-
-As Bacula writes files to tape, it keeps a list of files, jobs, and volumes
-in a database called the catalog. Among other things, the database helps
-Bacula to decide which files to back up in an incremental or differential
-backup, and helps you locate files on past backups when you want to restore
-something. However, the catalog will grow larger and larger as time goes
-on, and eventually it can become unacceptably large.
-
-Bacula's process for removing entries from the catalog is called Pruning.
-The default is Automatic Pruning, which means that once an entry reaches a
-certain age (e.g. 30 days old) it is removed from the catalog. Once a job
-has been pruned, you can still restore it from the backup tape, but one
-additional step is required: scanning the volume with bscan. The
-alternative to Automatic Pruning is Manual Pruning, in which you explicitly
-tell Bacula to erase the catalog entries for a volume. You'd usually do
-this when you want to reuse a Bacula volume, because there's no point in
-keeping a list of files that USED TO BE on a tape. Or, if the catalog is
-starting to get too big, you could prune the oldest jobs to save space.
-Manual pruning is done with the \ilink{ prune command}{ManualPruning} in
-the console. (thanks to Bryce Denney for the above explanation).
-
-\section{Pruning Directives}
-\index[general]{Pruning Directives }
-\index[general]{Directives!Pruning }
-
-There are three pruning durations. All apply to catalog database records and
-not to the actual data in a Volume. The pruning (or retention) durations are
-for: Volumes (Media records), Jobs (Job records), and Files (File records).
-The durations inter-depend a bit because if Bacula prunes a Volume, it
-automatically removes all the Job records, and all the File records. Also when
-a Job record is pruned, all the File records for that Job are also pruned
-(deleted) from the catalog.
-
-Having the File records in the database means that you can examine all the
-files backed up for a particular Job. They take the most space in the catalog
-(probably 90-95\% of the total). When the File records are pruned, the Job
-records can remain, and you can still examine what Jobs ran, but not the
-details of the Files backed up. In addition, without the File records, you
-cannot use the Console restore command to restore the files.
-
-When a Job record is pruned, the Volume (Media record) for that Job can still
-remain in the database, and if you do a "list volumes", you will see the
-volume information, but the Job records (and its File records) will no longer
-be available.
-
-In each case, pruning removes information about where older files are, but it
-also prevents the catalog from growing to be too large. You choose the
-retention periods in function of how many files you are backing up and the
-time periods you want to keep those records online, and the size of the
-database. You can always re-insert the records (with 98\% of the original data)
-by using "bscan" to scan in a whole Volume or any part of the volume that
-you want.
-
-By setting {\bf AutoPrune} to {\bf yes} you will permit {\bf Bacula} to
-automatically prune all Volumes in the Pool when a Job needs another Volume.
-Volume pruning means removing records from the catalog. It does not shrink the
-size of the Volume or affect the Volume data until the Volume gets
-overwritten. When a Job requests another volume and there are no Volumes with
-Volume Status {\bf Append} available, Bacula will begin volume pruning. This
-means that all Jobs that are older than the {\bf VolumeRetention} period will
-be pruned from every Volume that has Volume Status {\bf Full} or {\bf Used}
-and has Recycle set to {\bf yes}. Pruning consists of deleting the
-corresponding Job, File, and JobMedia records from the catalog database. No
-change to the physical data on the Volume occurs during the pruning process.
-When all files are pruned from a Volume (i.e. no records in the catalog), the
-Volume will be marked as {\bf Purged} implying that no Jobs remain on the
-volume. The Pool records that control the pruning are described below.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [AutoPrune = \lt{}yes|no\gt{}]
- \index[console]{AutoPrune }
- If AutoPrune is set to {\bf yes} (default), Bacula
- will automatically apply the Volume retention period when running a Job and
- it needs a new Volume but no appendable volumes are available. At that point,
- Bacula will prune all Volumes that can be pruned (i.e. AutoPrune set) in an
- attempt to find a usable volume. If during the autoprune, all files are
- pruned from the Volume, it will be marked with VolStatus {\bf Purged}. The
- default is {\bf yes}. Note, that although the File and Job records may be
- pruned from the catalog, a Volume will be marked Purged (and hence
- ready for recycling) if the Volume status is Append, Full, Used, or Error.
- If the Volume has another status, such as Archive, Read-Only, Disabled,
- Busy, or Cleaning, the Volume status will not be changed to Purged.
-
-\item [Volume Retention = \lt{}time-period-specification\gt{}]
- \index[console]{Volume Retention}
- The Volume Retention record defines the length of time that Bacula will
- guarantee that the Volume is not reused counting from the time the last
- job stored on the Volume terminated. A key point is that this time
- period is not even considered as long at the Volume remains appendable.
- The Volume Retention period count down begins only when the Append
- status has been changed to some othe status (Full, Used, Purged, ...).
-
- When this time period expires, and if {\bf AutoPrune} is set to {\bf
- yes}, and a new Volume is needed, but no appendable Volume is available,
- Bacula will prune (remove) Job records that are older than the specified
- Volume Retention period.
-
- The Volume Retention period takes precedence over any Job Retention
- period you have specified in the Client resource. It should also be
- noted, that the Volume Retention period is obtained by reading the
- Catalog Database Media record rather than the Pool resource record.
- This means that if you change the VolumeRetention in the Pool resource
- record, you must ensure that the corresponding change is made in the
- catalog by using the {\bf update pool} command. Doing so will insure
- that any new Volumes will be created with the changed Volume Retention
- period. Any existing Volumes will have their own copy of the Volume
- Retention period that can only be changed on a Volume by Volume basis
- using the {\bf update volume} command.
-
- When all file catalog entries are removed from the volume, its VolStatus is
- set to {\bf Purged}. The files remain physically on the Volume until the
- volume is overwritten.
-
- Retention periods are specified in seconds, minutes, hours, days, weeks,
- months, quarters, or years on the record. See the
- \ilink{Configuration chapter}{Time} of this manual for
- additional details of time specification.
-
-The default is 1 year.
-% TODO: if that is the format, should it be in quotes? decide on a style
-
-\item [Recycle = \lt{}yes|no\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Recycle }
- This statement tells Bacula whether or not the particular Volume can be
- recycled (i.e. rewritten). If Recycle is set to {\bf no} (the
- default), then even if Bacula prunes all the Jobs on the volume and it
- is marked {\bf Purged}, it will not consider the tape for recycling. If
- Recycle is set to {\bf yes} and all Jobs have been pruned, the volume
- status will be set to {\bf Purged} and the volume may then be reused
- when another volume is needed. If the volume is reused, it is relabeled
- with the same Volume Name, however all previous data will be lost.
- \end{description}
-
- It is also possible to "force" pruning of all Volumes in the Pool
- associated with a Job by adding {\bf Prune Files = yes} to the Job resource.
-
-\label{Recycling}
-\label{RecyclingAlgorithm}
-\section{Recycling Algorithm}
-\index[general]{Algorithm!Recycling }
-\index[general]{Recycling Algorithm }
-
-After all Volumes of a Pool have been pruned (as mentioned above, this happens
-when a Job needs a new Volume and no appendable Volumes are available), Bacula
-will look for the oldest Volume that is Purged (all Jobs and Files expired),
-and if the {\bf Recycle} flag is on (Recycle=yes) for that Volume, Bacula will
-relabel it and write new data on it.
-
-As mentioned above, there are two key points for getting a Volume
-to be recycled. First, the Volume must no longer be marked Append (there
-are a number of directives to automatically make this change), and second
-since the last write on the Volume, one or more of the Retention periods
-must have expired so that there are no more catalog backup job records
-that reference that Volume. Once both those conditions are satisfied,
-the volume can be marked Purged and hence recycled.
-
-The full algorithm that Bacula uses when it needs a new Volume is:
-\index[general]{New Volume Algorithm}
-\index[general]{Algorithm!New Volume}
-
-The algorithm described below assumes that AutoPrune is enabled,
-that Recycling is turned on, and that you have defined
-appropriate Retention periods, or used the defaults for all these
-items.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item If the request is for an Autochanger device, look only
- for Volumes in the Autochanger (i.e. with InChanger set and that have
- the correct Storage device).
-\item Search the Pool for a Volume with VolStatus=Append (if there is more
- than one, the Volume with the oldest date last written is chosen. If
- two have the same date then the one with the lowest MediaId is chosen).
-\item Search the Pool for a Volume with VolStatus=Recycle and the InChanger
- flag is set true (if there is more than one, the Volume with the oldest
- date last written is chosen. If two have the same date then the one
- with the lowest MediaId is chosen).
-\item Try recycling any purged Volumes.
-\item Prune volumes applying Volume retention period (Volumes with VolStatus
- Full, Used, or Append are pruned). Note, even if all the File and Job
- records are pruned from a Volume, the Volume will not be marked Purged
- until the Volume retention period expires.
-\item Search the Pool for a Volume with VolStatus=Purged
-\item If a Pool named "Scratch" exists, search for a Volume and if found
- move it to the current Pool for the Job and use it. Note, when
- the Scratch Volume is moved into the current Pool, the basic
- Pool defaults are applied as if it is a newly labeled Volume
- (equivalent to an {\bf update volume from pool} command).
-\item If we were looking for Volumes in the Autochanger, go back to
- step 2 above, but this time, look for any Volume whether or not
- it is in the Autochanger.
-\item Attempt to create a new Volume if automatic labeling enabled
- If Python is enabled, a Python NewVolume event is generated before
- the Label Format directve is used. If the maximum number of Volumes
- specified for the pool is reached, a new Volume will not be created.
-\item Prune the oldest Volume if RecycleOldestVolume=yes (the Volume with the
- oldest LastWritten date and VolStatus equal to Full, Recycle, Purged, Used,
- or Append is chosen). This record ensures that all retention periods are
- properly respected.
-\item Purge the oldest Volume if PurgeOldestVolume=yes (the Volume with the
- oldest LastWritten date and VolStatus equal to Full, Recycle, Purged, Used,
- or Append is chosen). We strongly recommend against the use of {\bf
- PurgeOldestVolume} as it can quite easily lead to loss of current backup
- data.
-\item Give up and ask operator.
-\end{itemize}
-
-The above occurs when Bacula has finished writing a Volume or when no Volume
-is present in the drive.
-
-On the other hand, if you have inserted a different Volume after the last job,
-and Bacula recognizes the Volume as valid, it will request authorization from
-the Director to use this Volume. In this case, if you have set {\bf Recycle
-Current Volume = yes} and the Volume is marked as Used or Full, Bacula will
-prune the volume and if all jobs were removed during the pruning (respecting
-the retention periods), the Volume will be recycled and used.
-
-The recycling algorithm in this case is:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item If the VolStatus is {\bf Append} or {\bf Recycle}
- is set, the volume will be used.
-\item If {\bf Recycle Current Volume} is set and the volume is marked {\bf
- Full} or {\bf Used}, Bacula will prune the volume (applying the retention
- period). If all Jobs are pruned from the volume, it will be recycled.
-\end{itemize}
-
-This permits users to manually change the Volume every day and load tapes in
-an order different from what is in the catalog, and if the volume does not
-contain a current copy of your backup data, it will be used.
-
-A few points from Alan Brown to keep in mind:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item If a pool doesn't have maximum volumes defined then Bacula will prefer to
- demand new volumes over forcibly purging older volumes.
-
-\item If volumes become free through pruning and the Volume retention period has
- expired, then they get marked as "purged" and are immediately available for
- recycling - these will be used in preference to creating new volumes.
-
-\item If the Job, File, and Volume retention periods are different, then
- it's common to see a tape with no files or jobs listed in the database,
- but which is still not marked as "purged".
-\end{enumerate}
-
-
-\section{Recycle Status}
-\index[general]{Status!Recycle }
-\index[general]{Recycle Status }
-
-Each Volume inherits the Recycle status (yes or no) from the Pool resource
-record when the Media record is created (normally when the Volume is labeled).
-This Recycle status is stored in the Media record of the Catalog. Using
-the Console program, you may subsequently change the Recycle status for each
-Volume. For example in the following output from {\bf list volumes}:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-+----------+-------+--------+---------+------------+--------+-----+
-| VolumeNa | Media | VolSta | VolByte | LastWritte | VolRet | Rec |
-+----------+-------+--------+---------+------------+--------+-----+
-| File0001 | File | Full | 4190055 | 2002-05-25 | 14400 | 1 |
-| File0002 | File | Full | 1896460 | 2002-05-26 | 14400 | 1 |
-| File0003 | File | Full | 1896460 | 2002-05-26 | 14400 | 1 |
-| File0004 | File | Full | 1896460 | 2002-05-26 | 14400 | 1 |
-| File0005 | File | Full | 1896460 | 2002-05-26 | 14400 | 1 |
-| File0006 | File | Full | 1896460 | 2002-05-26 | 14400 | 1 |
-| File0007 | File | Purged | 1896466 | 2002-05-26 | 14400 | 1 |
-+----------+-------+--------+---------+------------+--------+-----+
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-all the volumes are marked as recyclable, and the last Volume, {\bf File0007}
-has been purged, so it may be immediately recycled. The other volumes are all
-marked recyclable and when their Volume Retention period (14400 seconds or four
-hours) expires, they will be eligible for pruning, and possibly recycling.
-Even though Volume {\bf File0007} has been purged, all the data on the Volume
-is still recoverable. A purged Volume simply means that there are no entries
-in the Catalog. Even if the Volume Status is changed to {\bf Recycle}, the
-data on the Volume will be recoverable. The data is lost only when the Volume
-is re-labeled and re-written.
-
-To modify Volume {\bf File0001} so that it cannot be recycled, you use the
-{\bf update volume pool=File} command in the console program, or simply {\bf
-update} and Bacula will prompt you for the information.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-+----------+------+-------+---------+-------------+-------+-----+
-| VolumeNa | Media| VolSta| VolByte | LastWritten | VolRet| Rec |
-+----------+------+-------+---------+-------------+-------+-----+
-| File0001 | File | Full | 4190055 | 2002-05-25 | 14400 | 0 |
-| File0002 | File | Full | 1897236 | 2002-05-26 | 14400 | 1 |
-| File0003 | File | Full | 1896460 | 2002-05-26 | 14400 | 1 |
-| File0004 | File | Full | 1896460 | 2002-05-26 | 14400 | 1 |
-| File0005 | File | Full | 1896460 | 2002-05-26 | 14400 | 1 |
-| File0006 | File | Full | 1896460 | 2002-05-26 | 14400 | 1 |
-| File0007 | File | Purged| 1896466 | 2002-05-26 | 14400 | 1 |
-+----------+------+-------+---------+-------------+-------+-----+
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-In this case, {\bf File0001} will never be automatically recycled. The same
-effect can be achieved by setting the Volume Status to Read-Only.
-
-As you have noted, the Volume Status (VolStatus) column in the
-catalog database contains the current status of the Volume, which
-is normally maintained automatically by Bacula. To give you an
-idea of some of the values it can take during the life cycle of
-a Volume, here is a picture created by Arno Lehmann:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-A typical volume life cycle is like this:
-
- because job count or size limit exceeded
- Append ----------------------------------------> Used
- ^ |
- | First Job writes to Retention time passed |
- | the volume and recycling takes |
- | place |
- | v
- Recycled <-------------------------------------- Purged
- Volume is selected for reuse
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-
-\section{Making Bacula Use a Single Tape}
-\label{singletape}
-\index[general]{Tape!Making Bacula Use a Single}
-\index[general]{Making Bacula Use a Single Tape}
-
-Most people will want Bacula to fill a tape and when it is full, a new tape
-will be mounted, and so on. However, as an extreme example, it is possible for
-Bacula to write on a single tape, and every night to rewrite it. To get this
-to work, you must do two things: first, set the VolumeRetention to less than
-your save period (one day), and the second item is to make Bacula mark the
-tape as full after using it once. This is done using {\bf UseVolumeOnce =
-yes}. If this latter record is not used and the tape is not full after the
-first time it is written, Bacula will simply append to the tape and eventually
-request another volume. Using the tape only once, forces the tape to be marked
-{\bf Full} after each use, and the next time {\bf Bacula} runs, it will
-recycle the tape.
-
-An example Pool resource that does this is:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Pool {
- Name = DDS-4
- Use Volume Once = yes
- Pool Type = Backup
- AutoPrune = yes
- VolumeRetention = 12h # expire after 12 hours
- Recycle = yes
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{Daily, Weekly, Monthly Tape Usage Example}
-\label{usageexample}
-\index[general]{Daily, Weekly, Monthly Tape Usage Example }
-\index[general]{Example!Daily Weekly Monthly Tape Usage }
-
-This example is meant to show you how one could define a fixed set of volumes
-that Bacula will rotate through on a regular schedule. There are an infinite
-number of such schemes, all of which have various advantages and
-disadvantages.
-
-We start with the following assumptions:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item A single tape has more than enough capacity to do a full save.
-\item There are ten tapes that are used on a daily basis for incremental
- backups. They are prelabeled Daily1 ... Daily10.
-\item There are four tapes that are used on a weekly basis for full backups.
- They are labeled Week1 ... Week4.
-\item There are 12 tapes that are used on a monthly basis for full backups.
- They are numbered Month1 ... Month12
-\item A full backup is done every Saturday evening (tape inserted Friday
- evening before leaving work).
-\item No backups are done over the weekend (this is easy to change).
-\item The first Friday of each month, a Monthly tape is used for the Full
- backup.
-\item Incremental backups are done Monday - Friday (actually Tue-Fri
- mornings).
-% TODO: why this "actually"? does this need to be explained?
- \end{itemize}
-
-We start the system by doing a Full save to one of the weekly volumes or one
-of the monthly volumes. The next morning, we remove the tape and insert a
-Daily tape. Friday evening, we remove the Daily tape and insert the next tape
-in the Weekly series. Monday, we remove the Weekly tape and re-insert the
-Daily tape. On the first Friday of the next month, we insert the next Monthly
-tape in the series rather than a Weekly tape, then continue. When a Daily tape
-finally fills up, {\bf Bacula} will request the next one in the series, and
-the next day when you notice the email message, you will mount it and {\bf
-Bacula} will finish the unfinished incremental backup.
-
-What does this give? Well, at any point, you will have the last complete
-Full save plus several Incremental saves. For any given file you want to
-recover (or your whole system), you will have a copy of that file every day
-for at least the last 14 days. For older versions, you will have at least three
-and probably four Friday full saves of that file, and going back further, you
-will have a copy of that file made on the beginning of the month for at least
-a year.
-
-So you have copies of any file (or your whole system) for at least a year, but
-as you go back in time, the time between copies increases from daily to weekly
-to monthly.
-
-What would the Bacula configuration look like to implement such a scheme?
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Schedule {
- Name = "NightlySave"
- Run = Level=Full Pool=Monthly 1st sat at 03:05
- Run = Level=Full Pool=Weekly 2nd-5th sat at 03:05
- Run = Level=Incremental Pool=Daily tue-fri at 03:05
-}
-Job {
- Name = "NightlySave"
- Type = Backup
- Level = Full
- Client = LocalMachine
- FileSet = "File Set"
- Messages = Standard
- Storage = DDS-4
- Pool = Daily
- Schedule = "NightlySave"
-}
-# Definition of file storage device
-Storage {
- Name = DDS-4
- Address = localhost
- SDPort = 9103
- Password = XXXXXXXXXXXXX
- Device = FileStorage
- Media Type = 8mm
-}
-FileSet {
- Name = "File Set"
- Include = signature=MD5 {
- fffffffffffffffff
- }
- Exclude = { *.o }
-}
-Pool {
- Name = Daily
- Pool Type = Backup
- AutoPrune = yes
- VolumeRetention = 10d # recycle in 10 days
- Maximum Volumes = 10
- Recycle = yes
-}
-Pool {
- Name = Weekly
- Use Volume Once = yes
- Pool Type = Backup
- AutoPrune = yes
- VolumeRetention = 30d # recycle in 30 days (default)
- Recycle = yes
-}
-Pool {
- Name = Monthly
- Use Volume Once = yes
- Pool Type = Backup
- AutoPrune = yes
- VolumeRetention = 365d # recycle in 1 year
- Recycle = yes
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{ Automatic Pruning and Recycling Example}
-\label{PruningExample}
-\index[general]{Automatic Pruning and Recycling Example }
-\index[general]{Example!Automatic Pruning and Recycling }
-
-Perhaps the best way to understand the various resource records that come into
-play during automatic pruning and recycling is to run a Job that goes through
-the whole cycle. If you add the following resources to your Director's
-configuration file:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Schedule {
- Name = "30 minute cycle"
- Run = Level=Full Pool=File Messages=Standard Storage=File
- hourly at 0:05
- Run = Level=Full Pool=File Messages=Standard Storage=File
- hourly at 0:35
-}
-Job {
- Name = "Filetest"
- Type = Backup
- Level = Full
- Client=XXXXXXXXXX
- FileSet="Test Files"
- Messages = Standard
- Storage = File
- Pool = File
- Schedule = "30 minute cycle"
-}
-# Definition of file storage device
-Storage {
- Name = File
- Address = XXXXXXXXXXX
- SDPort = 9103
- Password = XXXXXXXXXXXXX
- Device = FileStorage
- Media Type = File
-}
-FileSet {
- Name = "Test Files"
- Include = signature=MD5 {
- fffffffffffffffff
- }
- Exclude = { *.o }
-}
-Pool {
- Name = File
- Use Volume Once = yes
- Pool Type = Backup
- LabelFormat = "File"
- AutoPrune = yes
- VolumeRetention = 4h
- Maximum Volumes = 12
- Recycle = yes
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Where you will need to replace the {\bf ffffffffff}'s by the appropriate files
-to be saved for your configuration. For the FileSet Include, choose a
-directory that has one or two megabytes maximum since there will probably be
-approximately eight copies of the directory that {\bf Bacula} will cycle through.
-
-In addition, you will need to add the following to your Storage daemon's
-configuration file:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Device {
- Name = FileStorage
- Media Type = File
- Archive Device = /tmp
- LabelMedia = yes;
- Random Access = Yes;
- AutomaticMount = yes;
- RemovableMedia = no;
- AlwaysOpen = no;
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-With the above resources, Bacula will start a Job every half hour that saves a
-copy of the directory you chose to /tmp/File0001 ... /tmp/File0012. After 4
-hours, Bacula will start recycling the backup Volumes (/tmp/File0001 ...). You
-should see this happening in the output produced. Bacula will automatically
-create the Volumes (Files) the first time it uses them.
-
-To turn it off, either delete all the resources you've added, or simply
-comment out the {\bf Schedule} record in the {\bf Job} resource.
-
-\section{Manually Recycling Volumes}
-\label{manualrecycling}
-\index[general]{Volumes!Manually Recycling }
-\index[general]{Manually Recycling Volumes }
-
-Although automatic recycling of Volumes is implemented in version 1.20 and
-later (see the
-\ilink{Automatic Recycling of Volumes}{RecyclingChapter} chapter of
-this manual), you may want to manually force reuse (recycling) of a Volume.
-
-Assuming that you want to keep the Volume name, but you simply want to write
-new data on the tape, the steps to take are:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Use the {\bf update volume} command in the Console to ensure that the
- {\bf Recycle} field is set to {\bf 1}
-\item Use the {\bf purge jobs volume} command in the Console to mark the
- Volume as {\bf Purged}. Check by using {\bf list volumes}.
-\end{itemize}
-
-Once the Volume is marked Purged, it will be recycled the next time a Volume
-is needed.
-
-If you wish to reuse the tape by giving it a new name, follow the following
-steps:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Use the {\bf purge jobs volume} command in the Console to mark the
- Volume as {\bf Purged}. Check by using {\bf list volumes}.
-\item In Bacula version 1.30 or greater, use the Console {\bf relabel}
- command to relabel the Volume.
-\end{itemize}
-
-Please note that the relabel command applies only to tape Volumes.
-
-For Bacula versions prior to 1.30 or to manually relabel the Volume, use the
-instructions below:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Use the {\bf delete volume} command in the Console to delete the Volume
- from the Catalog.
-\item If a different tape is mounted, use the {\bf unmount} command,
- remove the tape, and insert the tape to be renamed.
-\item Write an EOF mark in the tape using the following commands:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- mt -f /dev/nst0 rewind
- mt -f /dev/nst0 weof
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-where you replace {\bf /dev/nst0} with the appropriate device name on your
-system.
-\item Use the {\bf label} command to write a new label to the tape and to
- enter it in the catalog.
-\end{itemize}
-
-Please be aware that the {\bf delete} command can be dangerous. Once it is
-done, to recover the File records, you must either restore your database as it
-was before the {\bf delete} command, or use the {\bf bscan} utility program to
-scan the tape and recreate the database entries.
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{System Requirements}
-\label{SysReqs}
-\index[general]{System Requirements }
-\index[general]{Requirements!System }
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item {\bf Bacula} has been compiled and run on OpenSuSE Linux, FreeBSD, and
- Solaris systems.
-\item It requires GNU C++ version 2.95 or higher to compile. You can try with
- other compilers and older versions, but you are on your own. We have
- successfully compiled and used Bacula using GNU C++ version 4.1.3.
- Note, in general GNU C++ is a separate package (e.g. RPM) from GNU C, so you
- need them both loaded. On Red Hat systems, the C++ compiler is part of the
- {\bf gcc-c++} rpm package.
-\item There are certain third party packages that Bacula may need. Except for
- MySQL and PostgreSQL, they can all be found in the {\bf depkgs} and {\bf
- depkgs1} releases. However, most current Linux and FreeBSD systems
- provide these as system packages.
-\item The minimum versions for each of the databases supported by Bacula
- are:
-
- \begin{itemize}
- \item MySQL 4.1
- \item PostgreSQL 7.4
- \item SQLite 2.8.16 or SQLite 3
- \end{itemize}
-
-\item If you want to build the Win32 binaries, please see the
- README.mingw32 file in the src/win32 directory. We cross-compile the
- Win32 release on Linux. We provide documentation on building the Win32
- version, but due to the complexity, you are pretty much on your own
- if you want to build it yourself.
-\item {\bf Bacula} requires a good implementation of pthreads to work. This
- is not the case on some of the BSD systems.
-\item The source code has been written with portability in mind and is mostly
- POSIX compatible. Thus porting to any POSIX compatible operating system
- should be relatively easy.
-\item The GNOME Console program is developed and tested under GNOME 2.x.
- GNOME 1.4 is no longer supported.
-\item The wxWidgets Console program is developed and tested with the latest
- stable ANSI or Unicode version of
- \elink{wxWidgets}{\url{http://www.wxwidgets.org/}} (2.6.1). It works fine with the
- Windows and GTK+-2.x version of wxWidgets, and should also work on other
- platforms supported by wxWidgets.
-\item The Tray Monitor program is developed for GTK+-2.x. It needs GNOME less
- or equal to 2.2, KDE greater or equal to 3.1 or any window manager supporting
- the
- \elink{ FreeDesktop system tray
- standard}{\url{http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/systemtray-spec}}.
-\item If you want to enable command line editing and history, you will need
- to have /usr/include/termcap.h and either the termcap or the ncurses library
- loaded (libtermcap-devel or ncurses-devel).
-\item If you want to use DVD as backup medium, you will need to download the
- \elink{dvd+rw-tools 5.21.4.10.8}{\url{http://fy.chalmers.se/~appro/linux/DVD+RW/}},
- apply the patch that is in the {\bf patches} directory of the main
- source tree
- to make these tools compatible with Bacula, then compile and install them.
- There is also a patch for dvd+rw-tools version 6.1, and we hope that the
- patch is integrated into a later version.
- Do not use the dvd+rw-tools provided by your distribution, unless you
- are sure it contains the patch. dvd+rw-tools without the patch will not
- work with Bacula. DVD media is not recommended for serious or important
- backups because of its low reliability.
-\end{itemize}
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Disaster Recovery Using Bacula}
-\label{RescueChapter}
-\index[general]{Disaster Recovery Using Bacula}
-\index[general]{Bacula!Disaster Recovery Using}
-\index[general]{Recovery!Disaster Recovery}
-\index[general]{Rescue!Disaster Recovery}
-
-\section{General}
-\index[general]{General}
-
-When disaster strikes, you must have a plan, and you must have prepared in
-advance otherwise the work of recovering your system and your files will be
-considerably greater. For example, if you have not previously saved the
-partitioning information for your hard disk, how can you properly rebuild
-it if the disk must be replaced?
-
-Unfortunately, many of the steps one must take before and immediately after
-a disaster are very operating system dependent. As a consequence, this
-chapter will discuss in detail disaster recovery (also called Bare Metal
-Recovery) for {\bf Linux} and {\bf Solaris}. For Solaris, the procedures
-are still quite manual. For FreeBSD the same procedures may be used but
-they are not yet developed. For Win32, a number of Bacula users have
-reported success using BartPE.
-
-
-\label{considerations1}
-\section{Important Considerations}
-\index[general]{Important Considerations}
-\index[general]{Considerations!Important}
-
-Here are a few important considerations concerning disaster recovery that
-you should take into account before a disaster strikes.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item If the building which houses your computers burns down or is otherwise
- destroyed, do you have off-site backup data?
-\item Disaster recovery is much easier if you have several machines. If you
- have a single machine, how will you handle unforeseen events if your only
- machine is down?
-\item Do you want to protect your whole system and use Bacula to recover
- everything? or do you want to try to restore your system from the original
- installation disks and apply any other updates and only restore user files?
-\end{itemize}
-
-\label{steps1}
-\section{Steps to Take Before Disaster Strikes}
-\index[general]{Steps to Take Before Disaster Strikes}
-\index[general]{Strikes!Steps to Take Before Disaster}
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Create a rescue or CDROM for each of your Linux systems. Generally,
- they are offered by each distribution, and there are many good
- rescue disks on the Web (Knoppix, sysrescuecd, PLD Linux rescue CD,
- tomsrtbt, RIP ...
-
-\item Create a bacula-hostname directory on
- each machine and save it somewhere -- possibly on a USB key.
-\item Ensure that you always have a valid bootstrap file for your backup and
- that it is saved to an alternate machine. This will permit you to
- easily do a full restore of your system.
-\item If possible copy your catalog nightly to an alternate machine. If you
- have a valid bootstrap file, this is not necessary, but can be very useful if
- you do not want to reload everything. .
-\item Ensure that you always have a valid bootstrap file for your catalog
- backup that is saved to an alternate machine. This will permit you to restore
- your catalog more easily if needed.
-\item Test using the Rescue CDROM before you are forced to use it in
- an emergency situation.
-\item Make a copy of your Bacula .conf files, particularly your
- bacula-dir.conf, and your bacula-sd.conf files, because if your server
- goes down, these files will be needed to get it back up and running,
- and they can be difficult to rebuild from memory.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\label{rescueCDROM}
-\section{Bare Metal Recovery on Linux with a Rescue CD}
-\index[general]{Bare Metal Recovery on Linux with a Rescue CD}
-\index[general]{CDROM!Bare Metal Recovery on Linux with a Rescue}
-
-As an alternative to creating a Rescue CD, please see the
-section below entitled \ilink{Bare Metal Recovery using a LiveCD}{LiveCD}.
-
-Bacula previously had a Rescue CD. Unfortunately, this CD did not work
-on every Linux Distro, and in addition, Linux is evolving with different
-boot methods, more and more complex hardware configurations (LVM, RAID,
-WiFi, USB, ...). As a consequence, the Bacula Rescue CD as it was
-originally envisioned no longer exists.
-
-However there are many other good rescue disks available.
-A so called "Bare Metal" recovery is one where you start with an empty hard
-disk and you restore your machine. There are also cases where you may lose a
-file or a directory and want it restored. Please see the previous chapter for
-more details for those cases.
-
-Bare Metal Recovery assumes that you have the following items for your system:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item A Rescue CDROM containing a copy of your OS.
-\item Perhaps a copy of your
- hard disk information, as well as a statically linked version of the
- Bacula File daemon.
-\item A full Bacula backup of your system possibly including Incremental or
- Differential backups since the last Full backup
-\item A second system running the Bacula Director, the Catalog, and the
- Storage daemon. (this is not an absolute requirement, but how to get
- around it is not yet documented here)
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{Requirements}
-\index[general]{Requirements}
-
-
-\label{restore_client}
-\section{Restoring a Client System}
-\index[general]{Restoring a Client System}
-\index[general]{System!Restoring a Client}
-
-Now, let's assume that your hard disk has just died and that you have replaced
-it with an new identical drive. In addition, we assume that you have:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item A recent Bacula backup (Full plus Incrementals)
-\item A Rescue CDROM.
-\item Your Bacula Director, Catalog, and Storage daemon running on another
- machine on your local network.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-This is a relatively simple case, and later in this chapter, as time permits,
-we will discuss how you might recover from a situation where the machine that
-crashes is your main Bacula server (i.e. has the Director, the Catalog, and
-the Storage daemon).
-
-You will take the following steps to get your system back up and running:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Boot with your Rescue CDROM.
-\item Start the Network (local network)
-\item Re-partition your hard disk(s) as it was before
-\item Re-format your partitions
-\item Restore the Bacula File daemon (static version)
-\item Perform a Bacula restore of all your files
-\item Re-install your boot loader
-\item Reboot
-\end{enumerate}
-
-Now for the details ...
-
-\section{Boot with your Rescue CDROM}
-\index[general]{CDROM!Boot with your Rescue}
-\index[general]{Boot with your Rescue CDROM}
-
-Each rescue disk boots somewhat differently. Please see the
-instructions that go with your CDROM.
-
-
-\paragraph*{Start the Network:}
-
-\normalsize
-
-You can test it by pinging another machine, or pinging your broken machine
-machine from another machine. Do not proceed until your network is up.
-
-\paragraph*{Partition Your Hard Disk(s):}
-
-\paragraph*{Format Your Hard Disk(s):}
-
-\paragraph*{Mount the Newly Formatted Disks:}
-
-
-\paragraph*{Somehow get the static File daemon loaded on your system}
-Put the static file daemon and its conf file in /tmp.
-
-\paragraph*{Restore and Start the File Daemon:}
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-chroot /mnt/disk /tmp/bacula-fd -c /tmp/bacula-fd.conf
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The above command starts the Bacula File daemon with the proper root disk
-location (i.e. {\bf /mnt/disk/tmp}. If Bacula does not start, correct the
-problem and start it. You can check if it is running by entering:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-ps fax
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-You can kill Bacula by entering:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-kill -TERM <pid>
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-where {\bf pid} is the first number printed in front of the first occurrence
-of {\bf bacula-fd} in the {\bf ps fax} command.
-
-Now, you should be able to use another computer with Bacula installed to check
-the status by entering:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-status client=xxxx
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-into the Console program, where xxxx is the name of the client you are
-restoring.
-
-One common problem is that your {\bf bacula-dir.conf} may contain machine
-addresses that are not properly resolved on the stripped down system to be
-restored because it is not running DNS. This is particularly true for the
-address in the Storage resource of the Director, which may be very well
-resolved on the Director's machine, but not on the machine being restored and
-running the File daemon. In that case, be prepared to edit {\bf
-bacula-dir.conf} to replace the name of the Storage daemon's domain name with
-its IP address.
-
-\paragraph*{Restore Your Files:}
-
-On the computer that is running the Director, you now run a {\bf restore}
-command and select the files to be restored (normally everything), but before
-starting the restore, there is one final change you must make using the {\bf
-mod} option. You must change the {\bf Where} directory to be the root by using
-the {\bf mod} option just before running the job and selecting {\bf Where}.
-Set it to:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-/
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-then run the restore.
-
-You might be tempted to avoid using {\bf chroot} and running Bacula directly
-and then using a {\bf Where} to specify a destination of {\bf /mnt/disk}. This
-is possible, however, the current version of Bacula always restores files to
-the new location, and thus any soft links that have been specified with
-absolute paths will end up with {\bf /mnt/disk} prefixed to them. In general
-this is not fatal to getting your system running, but be aware that you will
-have to fix these links if you do not use {\bf chroot}.
-
-\paragraph*{Final Step:}
-
-
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-/sbin/grub-install --root-directory=/mnt/disk /dev/hda
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Note, in this case, you omit the chroot command, and you must
-replace /dev/hda with your boot device. If you don't know what your
-boot device is, run the ./run\_grub script once and it will tell
-you.
-
-Finally, I've even run into a case where grub-install was unable to
-rewrite the boot block. In my case, it produced the following error
-message:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-/dev/hdx does not have any corresponding BIOS drive.
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The solution is to insure that all your disks are properly mounted on
-/mnt/disk, then do the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-chroot /mnt/disk
-mount /dev/pts
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Then edit the file {\bf /boot/grub/grub.conf} and uncomment the line
-that reads:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#boot=/dev/hda
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-So that it reads:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-boot=/dev/hda
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Note, the /dev/hda may be /dev/sda or possibly some other drive depending
-on your configuration, but in any case, it is the same as the one that
-you previously tried with {\bf grub-install}.
-
-Then, enter the following commands:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-grub --batch --device-map=/boot/grub/device.map \
- --config-file=/boot/grub/grub.conf --no-floppy
-root (hd0,0)
-setup (hd0)
-quit
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If the {\bf grub} call worked, you will get a prompt of {\bf grub\gt{}}
-before the {\bf root}, {\bf setup}, and {\bf quit} commands, and after
-entering the {\bf setup} command, it should indicate that it successfully
-wrote the MBR (master boot record).
-
-
-\paragraph*{Reboot:}
-
-First unmount all your hard disks, otherwise they will not be cleanly
-shutdown, then reboot your machine by entering {\bf exit} until you get to the
-main prompt then enter {\bf Ctrl-d}. Once back to the main CDROM prompt, you
-will need to turn the power off, then back on to your machine to get it to
-reboot.
-
-If everything went well, you should now be back up and running. If not,
-re-insert the emergency boot CDROM, boot, and figure out what is wrong.
-
-\label{restore_server}
-\section{Restoring a Server}
-\index[general]{Restoring a Server}
-\index[general]{Server!Restoring a}
-
-Above, we considered how to recover a client machine where a valid Bacula
-server was running on another machine. However, what happens if your server
-goes down and you no longer have a running Director, Catalog, or Storage
-daemon? There are several solutions:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Bring up static versions of your Director, Catalog, and Storage daemon
- on the damaged machine.
-
-\item Move your server to another machine.
-
-\item Use a Hot Spare Server on another Machine.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-The first option, is very difficult because it requires you to have created a
-static version of the Director and the Storage daemon as well as the Catalog.
-If the Catalog uses MySQL or PostgreSQL, this may or may not be possible. In
-addition, to loading all these programs on a bare system (quite possible), you
-will need to make sure you have a valid driver for your tape drive.
-
-The second suggestion is probably a much simpler solution, and one I have done
-myself. To do so, you might want to consider the following steps:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item If you are using MySQL or PostgreSQL, configure, build and install it
- from source (or use rpms) on your new system.
-\item Load the Bacula source code onto your new system, configure, install
- it, and create the Bacula database.
-\item Ideally, you will have a copy of all the Bacula conf files that
- were being used on your server. If not, you will at a minimum need
- create a bacula-dir.conf that has the same Client resource that
- was used to backup your system.
-\item If you have a valid saved Bootstrap file as created for your damaged
- machine with WriteBootstrap, use it to restore the files to the damaged
- machine, where you have loaded a static Bacula File daemon using the
- Rescue disk). This is done by using the restore command and at
- the yes/mod/no prompt, selecting {\bf mod} then specifying the path to
- the bootstrap file.
-\item If you have the Bootstrap file, you should now be back up and running,
- if you do not have a Bootstrap file, continue with the suggestions below.
-\item Using {\bf bscan} scan the last set of backup tapes into your MySQL,
- PostgreSQL or SQLite database.
-\item Start Bacula, and using the Console {\bf restore} command, restore the
- last valid copy of the Bacula database and the Bacula configuration
- files.
-\item Move the database to the correct location.
-\item Start the database, and restart Bacula. Then use the Console {\bf
- restore} command, restore all the files on the damaged machine, where you
- have loaded a Bacula File daemon using the Rescue disk.
-\end{itemize}
-
-For additional details of restoring your database, please see the
-\ilink{Restoring When Things Go Wrong}{database_restore} section
-of the Console Restore Command chapter of this manual.
-
-
-\label{problems2}
-\section{Linux Problems or Bugs}
-\index[general]{Bugs!Linux Problems or}
-\index[general]{Linux Problems or Bugs}
-
-Since every flavor and every release of Linux is different, there are likely
-to be some small difficulties with the scripts, so please be prepared to edit
-them in a minimal environment. A rudimentary knowledge of {\bf vi} is very
-useful. Also, these scripts do not do everything. You will need to reformat
-Windows partitions by hand, for example.
-
-Getting the boot loader back can be a problem if you are using {\bf grub}
-because it is so complicated. If all else fails, reboot your system from your
-floppy but using the restored disk image, then proceed to a reinstallation of
-grub (looking at the run-grub script can help). By contrast, lilo is a piece
-of cake.
-
-\label{LiveCD}
-\section{Bare Metal Recovery using a LiveCD}
-\index[general]{Bare Metal Recovery using a LiveCD}
-\index[general]{Recovery!Bare Metal Recovery using a LiveCD}
-\index[general]{Rescue!Bare Metal Recovery using a LiveCD}
-\index[general]{LiveCD!Bare Metal Recovery using a LiveCD}
-
-As an alternative to the old now defunct Bacula Rescue CDROM, you can use any
-system rescue or LiveCD to recover your system. The big problem
-with most rescue or LiveCDs is that they are not designed to
-capture the current state of your system, so when you boot them on
-a damaged system, you might be somewhat lost -- e.g. how many of
-you remember your exact hard disk partitioning.
-
-This lack can be easily corrected by running the part of the
-Bacula Rescue code that creates a directory containing a
-static-bacula-fd, a snapshot of your current system disk
-configuration, and scripts that help restoring it.
-
-Before a disaster strikes:
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Run only the {\bf make bacula} part of the
- Bacula Rescue procedure to create the static Bacula
- File daemon, and system disk snapshot.
-\item Save the directory generated (more details below)
- preferrably on a CDROM or alternatively to some other
- system.
-\item Possibly run {\bf make bacula} every night as
- part of your backup process to ensure that you have
- a current snapshot of your system.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-Then when disaster strikes, do the following:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Boot with your system rescue disk or LiveCD
- (e.g. Knoppix).
-\item Start the Network (local network).
-\item Copy the Bacula recovery directory to the
- damaged system using ftp, scp, wget or if your
- boot disk permits it reading it directly from a
- CDROM.
-\item Continue as documented above.
-\item Re-partition your hard disk(s) as it was before,
- if necessary.
-\item Re-format your partitions, if necessary.
-\item Restore the Bacula File daemon (static version).
-\item Perform a Bacula restore of all your files.
-\item Re-install your boot loader.
-\item Reboot.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-In order to create the Bacula recovery directory, you need
-a copy of the Bacula Rescue code as described above, and
-you must first configure that directory.
-
-Once the configuration is done, you can do the following
-to create the Bacula recovery directory:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-cd <bacula-rescue-source>/linux/cdrom
-su (become root)
-make bacula
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The directory you want to save will be created in
-the current directory with the name {\bf bacula}. You
-need only save that directory either as a directory or
-possibly as a compressed tar file. If you run this procedure
-on multiple machines, you will probably want to rename this directory
-to something like {\bf bacula-hostname}.
-
-
-
-\label{FreeBSD1}
-\section{FreeBSD Bare Metal Recovery}
-\index[general]{Recovery!FreeBSD Bare Metal}
-\index[general]{Rescue!FreeBSD Bare Metal}
-\index[general]{FreeBSD Bare Metal Recovery}
-
-The same basic techniques described above also apply to FreeBSD. Although we
-don't yet have a fully automated procedure, Alex Torres Molina has provided us
-with the following instructions with a few additions from Jesse Guardiani and
-Dan Langille:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Boot with the FreeBSD installation disk
-\item Go to Custom, Partition and create your slices and go to Label and
- create the partitions that you want. Apply changes.
-\item Go to Fixit to start an emergency console.
-\item Create devs ad0 .. .. if they don't exist under /mnt2/dev (in my situation)
- with MAKEDEV. The device or devices you create depend on what hard drives you
- have. ad0 is your first ATA drive. da0 would by your first SCSI drive. Under
-OS version 5 and greater, your device files are most likely automatically
-created for you.
-\item mkdir /mnt/disk
- this is the root of the new disk
-\item mount /mnt2/dev/ad0s1a /mnt/disk
- mount /mnt2/dev/ad0s1c /mnt/disk/var
- mount /mnt2/dev/ad0s1d /mnt/disk/usr
-.....
-The same hard drive issues as above apply here too. Note, under OS version 5
-or higher, your disk devices may be in /dev not /mnt2/dev.
-\item Network configuration (ifconfig xl0 ip/mask + route add default
- ip-gateway)
-\item mkdir /mnt/disk/tmp
-\item cd /mnt/disk/tmp
-\item Copy bacula-fd and bacula-fd.conf to this path
-\item If you need to, use sftp to copy files, after which you must do this:
- ln -s /mnt2/usr/bin /usr/bin
-\item chmod u+x bacula-fd
-\item Modify bacula-fd.conf to fit this machine
-\item Copy /bin/sh to /mnt/disk, necessary for chroot
-\item Don't forget to put your bacula-dir's IP address and domain name in
- /mnt/disk/etc/hosts if it's not on a public net. Otherwise the FD on the
- machine you are restoring to won't be able to contact the SD and DIR on the
-remote machine.
-\item mkdir -p /mnt/disk/var/db/bacula
-\item chroot /mnt/disk /tmp/bacula-fd -c /tmp/bacula-fd.conf
- to start bacula-fd
-\item Now you can go to bacula-dir and restore the job with the entire
- contents of the broken server.
-\item You must create /proc
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\label{solaris}
-\section{Solaris Bare Metal Recovery}
-\index[general]{Solaris Bare Metal Recovery}
-\index[general]{Recovery!Solaris Bare Metal}
-
-The same basic techniques described above apply to Solaris:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item the same restrictions as those given for Linux apply
-\item you will need to create a Rescue disk
- \end{itemize}
-
-However, during the recovery phase, the boot and disk preparation procedures
-are different:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item there is no need to create an emergency boot disk since it is an
- integrated part of the Solaris boot.
-\item you must partition and format your hard disk by hand following manual
- procedures as described in W. Curtis Preston's book "Unix Backup \&
- Recovery"
-\end{itemize}
-
-Once the disk is partitioned, formatted and mounted, you can continue with
-bringing up the network and reloading Bacula.
-
-\section{Preparing Solaris Before a Disaster}
-\index[general]{Preparing Solaris Before a Disaster}
-\index[general]{Disaster!Preparing Solaris Before a}
-
-As mentioned above, before a disaster strikes, you should prepare the
-information needed in the case of problems. To do so, in the {\bf
-rescue/solaris} subdirectory enter:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-su
-./getdiskinfo
-./make_rescue_disk
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The {\bf getdiskinfo} script will, as in the case of Linux described above,
-create a subdirectory {\bf diskinfo} containing the output from several system
-utilities. In addition, it will contain the output from the {\bf SysAudit}
-program as described in Curtis Preston's book. This file {\bf
-diskinfo/sysaudit.bsi} will contain the disk partitioning information that
-will allow you to manually follow the procedures in the "Unix Backup \&
-Recovery" book to repartition and format your hard disk. In addition, the
-{\bf getdiskinfo} script will create a {\bf start\_network} script.
-
-Once you have your disks repartitioned and formatted, do the following:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Start Your Network with the {\bf start\_network} script
-\item Restore the Bacula File daemon as documented above
-\item Perform a Bacula restore of all your files using the same commands as
- described above for Linux
-\item Re-install your boot loader using the instructions outlined in the
- "Unix Backup \& Recovery" book using installboot
-\end{itemize}
-
-\label{genbugs}
-
-\section{Bugs and Other Considerations}
-\index[general]{Considerations!Bugs and Other}
-\index[general]{Bugs and Other Considerations}
-
-\paragraph*{Directory Modification and Access Times are Modified on pre-1.30
-Baculas :}
-
-When a pre-1.30 version of Bacula restores a directory, it first must create
-the directory, then it populates the directory with its files and
-subdirectories. The act of creating the files and subdirectories updates both
-the modification and access times associated with the directory itself. As a
-consequence, all modification and access times of all directories will be
-updated to the time of the restore.
-
-This has been corrected in Bacula version 1.30 and later. The directory
-modification and access times are reset to the value saved in the backup after
-all the files and subdirectories have been restored. This has been tested and
-verified on normal restore operations, but not verified during a bare metal
-recovery.
-
-\paragraph*{Strange Bootstrap Files:}
-
-If any of you look closely at the bootstrap file that is produced and used for
-the restore (I sure do), you will probably notice that the FileIndex item does
-not include all the files saved to the tape. This is because in some instances
-there are duplicates (especially in the case of an Incremental save), and in
-such circumstances, {\bf Bacula} restores only the last of multiple copies of
-a file or directory.
-
-\label{Win3233}
-\section{Disaster Recovery of Win32 Systems}
-\index[general]{Systems!Disaster Recovery of Win32}
-\index[general]{Disaster Recovery of Win32 Systems}
-
-Due to open system files, and registry problems, Bacula cannot save and
-restore a complete Win2K/XP/NT environment.
-
-A suggestion by Damian Coutts using Microsoft's NTBackup utility in
-conjunction with Bacula should permit a Full bare metal restore of Win2K/XP
-(and possibly NT systems). His suggestion is to do an NTBackup of the critical
-system state prior to running a Bacula backup with the following command:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-ntbackup backup systemstate /F c:\systemstate.bkf
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The {\bf backup} is the command, the {\bf systemstate} says to backup only the
-system state and not all the user files, and the {\bf /F
-c:\textbackslash{}systemstate.bkf} specifies where to write the state file.
-this file must then be saved and restored by Bacula. This command
-can be put in a Client Run Before Job directive so that it is automatically
-run during each backup, and thus saved to a Bacula Volume.
-
-To restore the system state, you first reload a base operating system, then
-you would use Bacula to restore all the users files and to recover the {\bf
-c:\textbackslash{}systemstate.bkf} file, and finally, run {\bf NTBackup} and
-{\bf catalogue} the system statefile, and then select it for restore. The
-documentation says you can't run a command line restore of the systemstate.
-
-This procedure has been confirmed to work by Ludovic Strappazon -- many
-thanks!
-
-A new tool is provided in the form of a bacula plugin for the BartPE rescue
-CD. BartPE is a self-contained WindowsXP boot CD which you can make using the
-PeBuilder tools available at
-\elink{http://www.nu2.nu/pebuilder/}{\url{http://www.nu2.nu/pebuilder/}} and a valid
-Windows XP SP1 CDROM. The plugin is provided as a zip archive. Unzip the file
-and copy the bacula directory into the plugin directory of your BartPE
-installation. Edit the configuration files to suit your installation and build
-your CD according to the instructions at Bart's site. This will permit you to
-boot from the cd, configure and start networking, start the bacula file client
-and access your director with the console program. The programs menu on the
-booted CD contains entries to install the file client service, start the file
-client service, and start the WX-Console. You can also open a command line
-window and CD Programs\textbackslash{}Bacula and run the command line console
-bconsole.
-
-\section{Ownership and Permissions on Win32 Systems}
-\index[general]{Systems!Resetting Directory and File Ownership and Permissions
-on Win32}
-\index[general]{Resetting Directory and File Ownership and Permissions on
-Win32 Systems}
-% TODO: should this be in the win32 chapter?
-
-Bacula versions after 1.31 should properly restore ownership and permissions
-on all WinNT/XP/2K systems. If you do experience problems, generally in
-restores to alternate directories because higher level directories were not
-backed up by Bacula, you can correct any problems with the {\bf SetACL}
-available under the GPL license at:
-\elink{http://sourceforge.net/projects/setacl/}{\url{http://sourceforge.net/project%
-s/setacl/}}.
-
-\section{Alternate Disaster Recovery Suggestion for Win32 Systems}
-\index[general]{Systems!Alternate Disaster Recovery Suggestion for Win32}
-\index[general]{Alternate Disaster Recovery Suggestion for Win32 Systems}
-% TODO: should this be in the win32 chapter??
-
-Ludovic Strappazon has suggested an interesting way to backup and restore
-complete Win32 partitions. Simply boot your Win32 system with a Linux Rescue
-disk as described above for Linux, install a statically linked Bacula, and
-backup any of the raw partitions you want. Then to restore the system, you
-simply restore the raw partition or partitions. Here is the email that Ludovic
-recently sent on that subject:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-I've just finished testing my brand new cd LFS/Bacula
-with a raw Bacula backup and restore of my portable.
-I can't resist sending you the results: look at the rates !!!
-hunt-dir: Start Backup JobId 100, Job=HuntBackup.2003-04-17_12.58.26
-hunt-dir: Bacula 1.30 (14Apr03): 17-Apr-2003 13:14
-JobId: 100
-Job: HuntBackup.2003-04-17_12.58.26
-FileSet: RawPartition
-Backup Level: Full
-Client: sauvegarde-fd
-Start time: 17-Apr-2003 12:58
-End time: 17-Apr-2003 13:14
-Files Written: 1
-Bytes Written: 10,058,586,272
-Rate: 10734.9 KB/s
-Software Compression: None
-Volume names(s): 000103
-Volume Session Id: 2
-Volume Session Time: 1050576790
-Last Volume Bytes: 10,080,883,520
-FD termination status: OK
-SD termination status: OK
-Termination: Backup OK
-hunt-dir: Begin pruning Jobs.
-hunt-dir: No Jobs found to prune.
-hunt-dir: Begin pruning Files.
-hunt-dir: No Files found to prune.
-hunt-dir: End auto prune.
-hunt-dir: Start Restore Job RestoreFilesHunt.2003-04-17_13.21.44
-hunt-sd: Forward spacing to file 1.
-hunt-dir: Bacula 1.30 (14Apr03): 17-Apr-2003 13:54
-JobId: 101
-Job: RestoreFilesHunt.2003-04-17_13.21.44
-Client: sauvegarde-fd
-Start time: 17-Apr-2003 13:21
-End time: 17-Apr-2003 13:54
-Files Restored: 1
-Bytes Restored: 10,056,130,560
-Rate: 5073.7 KB/s
-FD termination status: OK
-Termination: Restore OK
-hunt-dir: Begin pruning Jobs.
-hunt-dir: No Jobs found to prune.
-hunt-dir: Begin pruning Files.
-hunt-dir: No Files found to prune.
-hunt-dir: End auto prune.
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\label{running}
-
-\section{Restoring to a Running System}
-\index[general]{System!Restoring to a Running}
-\index[general]{Restoring to a Running System}
-
-If for some reason you want to do a Full restore to a system that has a
-working kernel (not recommended), you will need to take care not to
-overwrite the following files:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-/etc/grub.conf
-/etc/X11/Conf
-/etc/fstab
-/etc/mtab
-/lib/modules
-/usr/modules
-/usr/X11R6
-/etc/modules.conf
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\label{Resources}
-
-\section{Additional Resources}
-\index[general]{Additional Resources}
-\index[general]{Resources!Additional}
-
-Many thanks to Charles Curley who wrote
-\elink{Linux Complete Backup and Recovery HOWTO}
-{\url{http://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/Linux-Complete-Backup-and-Recovery-HOWTO/index.html%
-}} for the
-\elink{The Linux Documentation Project}{\url{http://www.tldp.org/}}. This is an
-excellent document on how to do Bare Metal Recovery on Linux systems, and it
-was this document that made me realize that Bacula could do the same thing.
-
-You can find quite a few additional resources, both commercial and free at
-\elink{Storage Mountain}{\url{http://www.backupcentral.com}}, formerly known as
-Backup Central.
-
-And finally, the O'Reilly book, "Unix Backup \& Recovery" by W. Curtis
-Preston covers virtually every backup and recovery topic including bare metal
-recovery for a large range of Unix systems.
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-\chapter{The Restore Command}
-\label{RestoreChapter}
-\index[general]{Command!Console Restore}
-\index[general]{Console Restore Command}
-
-\section{General}
-\index[general]{General }
-
-Below, we will discuss restoring files with the Console {\bf restore} command,
-which is the recommended way of doing restoring files. It is not possible
-to restore files by automatically starting a job as you do with Backup,
-Verify, ... jobs. However, in addition to the console restore command,
-there is a standalone program named {\bf bextract}, which also permits
-restoring files. For more information on this program, please see the
-\ilink{Bacula Utility Programs}{bextract} chapter of this manual. We
-don't particularly recommend the {\bf bextract} program because it
-lacks many of the features of the normal Bacula restore, such as the
-ability to restore Win32 files to Unix systems, and the ability to
-restore access control lists (ACL). As a consequence, we recommend,
-wherever possible to use Bacula itself for restores as described below.
-
-You may also want to look at the {\bf bls} program in the same chapter,
-which allows you to list the contents of your Volumes. Finally, if you
-have an old Volume that is no longer in the catalog, you can restore the
-catalog entries using the program named {\bf bscan}, documented in the same
-\ilink{Bacula Utility Programs}{bscan} chapter.
-
-In general, to restore a file or a set of files, you must run a {\bf restore}
-job. That is a job with {\bf Type = Restore}. As a consequence, you will need
-a predefined {\bf restore} job in your {\bf bacula-dir.conf} (Director's
-config) file. The exact parameters (Client, FileSet, ...) that you define are
-not important as you can either modify them manually before running the job or
-if you use the {\bf restore} command, explained below, Bacula will
-automatically set them for you. In fact, you can no longer simply run a restore
-job. You must use the restore command.
-
-Since Bacula is a network backup program, you must be aware that when you
-restore files, it is up to you to ensure that you or Bacula have selected the
-correct Client and the correct hard disk location for restoring those files.
-{\bf Bacula} will quite willingly backup client A, and restore it by sending
-the files to a different directory on client B. Normally, you will want to
-avoid this, but assuming the operating systems are not too different in their
-file structures, this should work perfectly well, if so desired.
-By default, Bacula will restore data to the same Client that was backed
-up, and those data will be restored not to the original places but to
-{\bf /tmp/bacula-restores}. You may modify any of these defaults when the
-restore command prompts you to run the job by selecting the {\bf mod}
-option.
-
-\label{Example1}
-\section{The Restore Command}
-\index[general]{Command!Restore}
-\index[general]{Restore Command}
-
-Since Bacula maintains a catalog of your files and on which Volumes (disk or
-tape), they are stored, it can do most of the bookkeeping work, allowing you
-simply to specify what kind of restore you want (current, before a particular
-date), and what files to restore. Bacula will then do the rest.
-
-This is accomplished using the {\bf restore} command in the Console. First you
-select the kind of restore you want, then the JobIds are selected,
-the File records for those Jobs are placed in an internal Bacula directory
-tree, and the restore enters a file selection mode that allows you to
-interactively walk up and down the file tree selecting individual files to be
-restored. This mode is somewhat similar to the standard Unix {\bf restore}
-program's interactive file selection mode.
-
-If a Job's file records have been pruned from the catalog, the {\bf restore}
-command will be unable to find any files to restore. Bacula will ask if you
-want to restore all of them or if you want to use a regular expression to
-restore only a selection while reading media. See \ilink{FileRegex
- option}{FileRegex} and below for more details on this.
-
-Within the Console program, after entering the {\bf restore} command, you are
-presented with the following selection prompt:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-First you select one or more JobIds that contain files
-to be restored. You will be presented several methods
-of specifying the JobIds. Then you will be allowed to
-select which files from those JobIds are to be restored.
-To select the JobIds, you have the following choices:
- 1: List last 20 Jobs run
- 2: List Jobs where a given File is saved
- 3: Enter list of comma separated JobIds to select
- 4: Enter SQL list command
- 5: Select the most recent backup for a client
- 6: Select backup for a client before a specified time
- 7: Enter a list of files to restore
- 8: Enter a list of files to restore before a specified time
- 9: Find the JobIds of the most recent backup for a client
- 10: Find the JobIds for a backup for a client before a specified time
- 11: Enter a list of directories to restore for found JobIds
- 12: Cancel
-Select item: (1-12):
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-There are a lot of options, and as a point of reference, most people will
-want to slect item 5 (the most recent backup for a client). The details
-of the above options are:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Item 1 will list the last 20 jobs run. If you find the Job you want,
- you can then select item 3 and enter its JobId(s).
-
-\item Item 2 will list all the Jobs where a specified file is saved. If you
- find the Job you want, you can then select item 3 and enter the JobId.
-
-\item Item 3 allows you the enter a list of comma separated JobIds whose
- files will be put into the directory tree. You may then select which
- files from those JobIds to restore. Normally, you would use this option
- if you have a particular version of a file that you want to restore and
- you know its JobId. The most common options (5 and 6) will not select
- a job that did not terminate normally, so if you know a file is
- backed up by a Job that failed (possibly because of a system crash), you
- can access it through this option by specifying the JobId.
-
-\item Item 4 allows you to enter any arbitrary SQL command. This is
- probably the most primitive way of finding the desired JobIds, but at
- the same time, the most flexible. Once you have found the JobId(s), you
- can select item 3 and enter them.
-
-\item Item 5 will automatically select the most recent Full backup and all
- subsequent incremental and differential backups for a specified Client.
- These are the Jobs and Files which, if reloaded, will restore your
- system to the most current saved state. It automatically enters the
- JobIds found into the directory tree in an optimal way such that only
- the most recent copy of any particular file found in the set of Jobs
- will be restored. This is probably the most convenient of all the above
- options to use if you wish to restore a selected Client to its most
- recent state.
-
- There are two important things to note. First, this automatic selection
- will never select a job that failed (terminated with an error status).
- If you have such a job and want to recover one or more files from it,
- you will need to explicitly enter the JobId in item 3, then choose the
- files to restore.
-
- If some of the Jobs that are needed to do the restore have had their
- File records pruned, the restore will be incomplete. Bacula currently
- does not correctly detect this condition. You can however, check for
- this by looking carefully at the list of Jobs that Bacula selects and
- prints. If you find Jobs with the JobFiles column set to zero, when
- files should have been backed up, then you should expect problems.
-
- If all the File records have been pruned, Bacula will realize that there
- are no file records in any of the JobIds chosen and will inform you. It
- will then propose doing a full restore (non-selective) of those JobIds.
- This is possible because Bacula still knows where the beginning of the
- Job data is on the Volumes, even if it does not know where particular
- files are located or what their names are.
-
-\item Item 6 allows you to specify a date and time, after which Bacula will
- automatically select the most recent Full backup and all subsequent
- incremental and differential backups that started before the specified date
- and time.
-
-\item Item 7 allows you to specify one or more filenames (complete path
- required) to be restored. Each filename is entered one at a time or if you
- prefix a filename with the less-than symbol (\lt{}) Bacula will read that
- file and assume it is a list of filenames to be restored. If you
- prefix the filename with a question mark (?), then the filename will
- be interpreted as an SQL table name, and Bacula will include the rows
- of that table in the list to be restored. The table must contain the
- JobId in the first column and the FileIndex in the second column.
- This table feature is intended for external programs that want to build
- their own list of files to be restored.
- The filename entry mode is terminated by entering a blank line.
-
-\item Item 8 allows you to specify a date and time before entering the
- filenames. See Item 7 above for more details.
-
-\item Item 9 allows you find the JobIds of the most recent backup for
- a client. This is much like option 5 (it uses the same code), but
- those JobIds are retained internally as if you had entered them
- manually. You may then select item 11 (see below) to restore one
- or more directories.
-
-\item Item 10 is the same as item 9, except that it allows you to enter
- a before date (as with item 6). These JobIds will then be retained
- internally.
-
-\index[general]{Restore Directories}
-\item Item 11 allows you to enter a list of JobIds from which you can
- select directories to be restored. The list of JobIds can have been
- previously created by using either item 9 or 10 on the menu. You
- may then enter a full path to a directory name or a filename preceded
- by a less than sign (\lt{}). The filename should contain a list
- of directories to be restored. All files in those directories will
- be restored, but if the directory contains subdirectories, nothing
- will be restored in the subdirectory unless you explicitly enter its
- name.
-
-\item Item 12 allows you to cancel the restore command.
-\end{itemize}
-
-As an example, suppose that we select item 5 (restore to most recent state).
-If you have not specified a client=xxx on the command line, it
-it will then ask for the desired Client, which on my system, will print all
-the Clients found in the database as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Defined clients:
- 1: Rufus
- 2: Matou
- 3: Polymatou
- 4: Minimatou
- 5: Minou
- 6: MatouVerify
- 7: PmatouVerify
- 8: RufusVerify
- 9: Watchdog
-Select Client (File daemon) resource (1-9):
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-You will probably have far fewer Clients than this example, and if you have
-only one Client, it will be automatically selected. In this case, I enter
-{\bf Rufus} to select the Client. Then Bacula needs to know what FileSet is
-to be restored, so it prompts with:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-The defined FileSet resources are:
- 1: Full Set
- 2: Other Files
-Select FileSet resource (1-2):
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If you have only one FileSet defined for the Client, it will be selected
-automatically. I choose item 1, which is my full backup. Normally, you
-will only have a single FileSet for each Job, and if your machines are
-similar (all Linux) you may only have one FileSet for all your Clients.
-
-At this point, {\bf Bacula} has all the information it needs to find the most
-recent set of backups. It will then query the database, which may take a bit
-of time, and it will come up with something like the following. Note, some of
-the columns are truncated here for presentation:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-+-------+------+----------+-------------+-------------+------+-------+------------+
-| JobId | Levl | JobFiles | StartTime | VolumeName | File | SesId |VolSesTime |
-+-------+------+----------+-------------+-------------+------+-------+------------+
-| 1,792 | F | 128,374 | 08-03 01:58 | DLT-19Jul02 | 67 | 18 | 1028042998 |
-| 1,792 | F | 128,374 | 08-03 01:58 | DLT-04Aug02 | 0 | 18 | 1028042998 |
-| 1,797 | I | 254 | 08-04 13:53 | DLT-04Aug02 | 5 | 23 | 1028042998 |
-| 1,798 | I | 15 | 08-05 01:05 | DLT-04Aug02 | 6 | 24 | 1028042998 |
-+-------+------+----------+-------------+-------------+------+-------+------------+
-You have selected the following JobId: 1792,1792,1797
-Building directory tree for JobId 1792 ...
-Building directory tree for JobId 1797 ...
-Building directory tree for JobId 1798 ...
-cwd is: /
-$
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Depending on the number of {\bf JobFiles} for each JobId, the {\bf Building
-directory tree ..."} can take a bit of time. If you notice ath all the
-JobFiles are zero, your Files have probably been pruned and you will not be
-able to select any individual files -- it will be restore everything or
-nothing.
-
-In our example, Bacula found four Jobs that comprise the most recent backup of
-the specified Client and FileSet. Two of the Jobs have the same JobId because
-that Job wrote on two different Volumes. The third Job was an incremental
-backup to the previous Full backup, and it only saved 254 Files compared to
-128,374 for the Full backup. The fourth Job was also an incremental backup
-that saved 15 files.
-
-Next Bacula entered those Jobs into the directory tree, with no files marked
-to be restored as a default, tells you how many files are in the tree, and
-tells you that the current working directory ({\bf cwd}) is /. Finally, Bacula
-prompts with the dollar sign (\$) to indicate that you may enter commands to
-move around the directory tree and to select files.
-
-If you want all the files to automatically be marked when the directory
-tree is built, you could have entered the command {\bf restore all}, or
-at the \$ prompt, you can simply enter {\bf mark *}.
-
-Instead of choosing item 5 on the first menu (Select the most recent backup
-for a client), if we had chosen item 3 (Enter list of JobIds to select) and we
-had entered the JobIds {\bf 1792,1797,1798} we would have arrived at the same
-point.
-
-One point to note, if you are manually entering JobIds, is that you must enter
-them in the order they were run (generally in increasing JobId order). If you
-enter them out of order and the same file was saved in two or more of the
-Jobs, you may end up with an old version of that file (i.e. not the most
-recent).
-
-Directly entering the JobIds can also permit you to recover data from
-a Job that wrote files to tape but that terminated with an error status.
-
-While in file selection mode, you can enter {\bf help} or a question mark (?)
-to produce a summary of the available commands:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Command Description
- ======= ===========
- cd change current directory
- count count marked files in and below the cd
- dir long list current directory, wildcards allowed
- done leave file selection mode
- estimate estimate restore size
- exit same as done command
- find find files, wildcards allowed
- help print help
- ls list current directory, wildcards allowed
- lsmark list the marked files in and below the cd
- mark mark dir/file to be restored recursively in dirs
- markdir mark directory name to be restored (no files)
- pwd print current working directory
- unmark unmark dir/file to be restored recursively in dir
- unmarkdir unmark directory name only no recursion
- quit quit and do not do restore
- ? print help
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-As a default no files have been selected for restore (unless you
-added {\bf all} to the command line. If you want to restore
-everything, at this point, you should enter {\bf mark *}, and then {\bf done}
-and {\bf Bacula} will write the bootstrap records to a file and request your
-approval to start a restore job.
-
-If you do not enter the above mentioned {\bf mark *} command, you will start
-with an empty slate. Now you can simply start looking at the tree and {\bf
-mark} particular files or directories you want restored. It is easy to make
-a mistake in specifying a file to mark or unmark, and Bacula's error handling
-is not perfect, so please check your work by using the {\bf ls} or {\bf dir}
-commands to see what files are actually selected. Any selected file has its
-name preceded by an asterisk.
-
-To check what is marked or not marked, enter the {\bf count} command, which
-displays:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-128401 total files. 128401 marked to be restored.
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Each of the above commands will be described in more detail in the next
-section. We continue with the above example, having accepted to restore all
-files as Bacula set by default. On entering the {\bf done} command, Bacula
-prints:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Bootstrap records written to /home/kern/bacula/working/restore.bsr
-The job will require the following
- Volume(s) Storage(s) SD Device(s)
-===========================================================================
-
- DLT-19Jul02 Tape DLT8000
- DLT-04Aug02 Tape DLT8000
-
-128401 files selected to restore.
-Run Restore job
-JobName: kernsrestore
-Bootstrap: /home/kern/bacula/working/restore.bsr
-Where: /tmp/bacula-restores
-Replace: always
-FileSet: Other Files
-Client: Rufus
-Storage: Tape
-When: 2006-12-11 18:20:33
-Catalog: MyCatalog
-Priority: 10
-OK to run? (yes/mod/no):
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Please examine each of the items very carefully to make sure that they are
-correct. In particular, look at {\bf Where}, which tells you where in the
-directory structure the files will be restored, and {\bf Client}, which
-tells you which client will receive the files. Note that by default the
-Client which will receive the files is the Client that was backed up.
-These items will not always be completed with the correct values depending
-on which of the restore options you chose. You can change any of these
-default items by entering {\bf mod} and responding to the prompts.
-
-The above assumes that you have defined a {\bf Restore} Job resource in your
-Director's configuration file. Normally, you will only need one Restore Job
-resource definition because by its nature, restoring is a manual operation,
-and using the Console interface, you will be able to modify the Restore Job to
-do what you want.
-
-An example Restore Job resource definition is given below.
-
-Returning to the above example, you should verify that the Client name is
-correct before running the Job. However, you may want to modify some of the
-parameters of the restore job. For example, in addition to checking the Client
-it is wise to check that the Storage device chosen by Bacula is indeed
-correct. Although the {\bf FileSet} is shown, it will be ignored in restore.
-The restore will choose the files to be restored either by reading the {\bf
-Bootstrap} file, or if not specified, it will restore all files associated
-with the specified backup {\bf JobId} (i.e. the JobId of the Job that
-originally backed up the files).
-
-Finally before running the job, please note that the default location for
-restoring files is {\bf not} their original locations, but rather the directory
-{\bf /tmp/bacula-restores}. You can change this default by modifying your {\bf
-bacula-dir.conf} file, or you can modify it using the {\bf mod} option. If you
-want to restore the files to their original location, you must have {\bf
-Where} set to nothing or to the root, i.e. {\bf /}.
-
-If you now enter {\bf yes}, Bacula will run the restore Job. The Storage
-daemon will first request Volume {\bf DLT-19Jul02} and after the appropriate
-files have been restored from that volume, it will request Volume {\bf
-DLT-04Aug02}.
-
-\subsection{Restore a pruned job using a pattern}
- During a restore, if all File records are pruned from the catalog
- for a Job, normally Bacula can restore only all files saved. That
- is there is no way using the catalog to select individual files.
- With this new feature, Bacula will ask if you want to specify a Regex
- expression for extracting only a part of the full backup.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- Building directory tree for JobId(s) 1,3 ...
- There were no files inserted into the tree, so file selection
- is not possible.Most likely your retention policy pruned the files
-
- Do you want to restore all the files? (yes|no): no
-
- Regexp matching files to restore? (empty to abort): /tmp/regress/(bin|tests)/
- Bootstrap records written to /tmp/regress/working/zog4-dir.restore.1.bsr
-\end{verbatim}
-
- See also \ilink{FileRegex bsr option}{FileRegex} for more information.
-
-\section{Selecting Files by Filename}
-\index[general]{Selecting Files by Filename }
-\index[general]{Filename!Selecting Files by }
-
-If you have a small number of files to restore, and you know the filenames,
-you can either put the list of filenames in a file to be read by Bacula, or
-you can enter the names one at a time. The filenames must include the full
-path and filename. No wild cards are used.
-
-To enter the files, after the {\bf restore}, you select item number 7 from the
-prompt list:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-To select the JobIds, you have the following choices:
- 1: List last 20 Jobs run
- 2: List Jobs where a given File is saved
- 3: Enter list of comma separated JobIds to select
- 4: Enter SQL list command
- 5: Select the most recent backup for a client
- 6: Select backup for a client before a specified time
- 7: Enter a list of files to restore
- 8: Enter a list of files to restore before a specified time
- 9: Find the JobIds of the most recent backup for a client
- 10: Find the JobIds for a backup for a client before a specified time
- 11: Enter a list of directories to restore for found JobIds
- 12: Cancel
-Select item: (1-12):
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-which then prompts you for the client name:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Defined Clients:
- 1: Timmy
- 2: Tibs
- 3: Rufus
-Select the Client (1-3): 3
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Of course, your client list will be different, and if you have only one
-client, it will be automatically selected. And finally, Bacula requests you to
-enter a filename:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Enter filename:
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-At this point, you can enter the full path and filename
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Enter filename: /home/kern/bacula/k/Makefile.in
-Enter filename:
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-as you can see, it took the filename. If Bacula cannot find a copy of the
-file, it prints the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Enter filename: junk filename
-No database record found for: junk filename
-Enter filename:
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If you want Bacula to read the filenames from a file, you simply precede the
-filename with a less-than symbol (\lt{}). When you have entered all the
-filenames, you enter a blank line, and Bacula will write the bootstrap file,
-tells you what tapes will be used, and proposes a Restore job to be run:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Enter filename:
-Automatically selected Storage: DDS-4
-Bootstrap records written to /home/kern/bacula/working/restore.bsr
-The restore job will require the following Volumes:
-
- test1
-1 file selected to restore.
-Run Restore job
-JobName: kernsrestore
-Bootstrap: /home/kern/bacula/working/restore.bsr
-Where: /tmp/bacula-restores
-Replace: always
-FileSet: Other Files
-Client: Rufus
-Storage: DDS-4
-When: 2003-09-11 10:20:53
-Priority: 10
-OK to run? (yes/mod/no):
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-It is possible to automate the selection by file by putting your list of files
-in say {\bf /tmp/file-list}, then using the following command:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-restore client=Rufus file=</tmp/file-list
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If in modifying the parameters for the Run Restore job, you find that Bacula
-asks you to enter a Job number, this is because you have not yet specified
-either a Job number or a Bootstrap file. Simply entering zero will allow you
-to continue and to select another option to be modified.
-
-\label{Replace}
-
-\section{Replace Options}
-
-When restoring, you have the option to specify a Replace option. This
-directive determines the action to be taken when restoring a file or
-directory that already exists. This directive can be set by selecting
-the {\bf mod} option. You will be given a list of parameters to choose
-from. Full details on this option can be found in the Job Resource section
-of the Director documentation.
-
-\label{CommandArguments}
-
-\section{Command Line Arguments}
-\index[general]{Arguments!Command Line }
-\index[general]{Command Line Arguments }
-
-If all the above sounds complicated, you will probably agree that it really
-isn't after trying it a few times. It is possible to do everything that was
-shown above, with the exception of selecting the FileSet, by using command
-line arguments with a single command by entering:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-restore client=Rufus select current all done yes
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The {\bf client=Rufus} specification will automatically select Rufus as the
-client, the {\bf current} tells Bacula that you want to restore the system to
-the most current state possible, and the {\bf yes} suppresses the final {\bf
-yes/mod/no} prompt and simply runs the restore.
-
-The full list of possible command line arguments are:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item {\bf all} -- select all Files to be restored.
-\item {\bf select} -- use the tree selection method.
-\item {\bf done} -- do not prompt the user in tree mode.
-\item {\bf current} -- automatically select the most current set of backups
- for the specified client.
-\item {\bf client=xxxx} -- initially specifies the client from which the
- backup was made and the client to which the restore will be make. See also
- "restoreclient" keyword.
-\item {\bf restoreclient=xxxx} -- if the keyword is specified, then the
- restore is written to that client.
-\item {\bf jobid=nnn} -- specify a JobId or comma separated list of JobIds to
- be restored.
-\item {\bf before=YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS} -- specify a date and time to which
- the system should be restored. Only Jobs started before the specified
- date/time will be selected, and as is the case for {\bf current} Bacula will
- automatically find the most recent prior Full save and all Differential and
- Incremental saves run before the date you specify. Note, this command is not
- too user friendly in that you must specify the date/time exactly as shown.
-\item {\bf file=filename} -- specify a filename to be restored. You must
- specify the full path and filename. Prefixing the entry with a less-than
- sign
- (\lt{}) will cause Bacula to assume that the filename is on your system and
- contains a list of files to be restored. Bacula will thus read the list from
- that file. Multiple file=xxx specifications may be specified on the command
- line.
-\item {\bf jobid=nnn} -- specify a JobId to be restored.
-\item {\bf pool=pool-name} -- specify a Pool name to be used for selection of
- Volumes when specifying options 5 and 6 (restore current system, and restore
- current system before given date). This permits you to have several Pools,
- possibly one offsite, and to select the Pool to be used for restoring.
-\item {\bf where=/tmp/bacula-restore} -- restore files in {\bf where} directory.
-\item {\bf yes} -- automatically run the restore without prompting for
- modifications (most useful in batch scripts).
-\item {\bf strip\_prefix=/prod} -- remove a part of the filename when restoring.
-\item {\bf add\_prefix=/test} -- add a prefix to all files when restoring (like
- where) (can't be used with {\bf where=}).
-\item {\bf add\_suffix=.old} -- add a suffix to all your files.
-\item {\bf regexwhere=!a.pdf!a.bkp.pdf!} -- do complex filename manipulation
- like with sed unix command. Will overwrite other filename manipulation.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\label{restorefilerelocation}
-\section{Using File Relocation}
-\index[general]{Using File Relocation}
-\label{filerelocation}
-
-\subsection{Introduction}
-
-The \textbf{where=} option is simple, but not very powerful. With file
-relocation, Bacula can restore a file to the same directory, but with a
-different name, or in an other directory without recreating the full path.
-
-You can also do filename and path manipulations, implemented in Bacula
-2.1.8 or later, such as adding a suffix to all your files, renaming files
-or directories, etc. Theses options will overwrite {\bf where=} option.
-
-
-For example, many users use OS snapshot features so that file
-\texttt{/home/eric/mbox} will be backed up from the directory
-\texttt{/.snap/home/eric/mbox}, which can complicate restores. If you use
-\textbf{where=/tmp}, the file will be restored to
-\texttt{/tmp/.snap/home/eric/mbox} and you will have to move the file to
-\texttt{/home/eric/mbox.bkp} by hand.
-
-However, case, you could use the
-\textbf{strip\_prefix=/.snap} and \textbf{add\_suffix=.bkp} options and
-Bacula will restore the file to its original location -- that is
-\texttt{/home/eric/mbox}.
-
-To use this feature, there are command line options as described in
-the \ilink{restore section}{restorefilerelocation} of this manual;
-you can modify your restore job before running it; or you can
-add options to your restore job in as described in
-\ilink{bacula-dir.conf}{confaddprefix}.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-Parameters to modify:
- 1: Level
- 2: Storage
- ...
- 10: File Relocation
- ...
-Select parameter to modify (1-12):
-
-
-This will replace your current Where value
- 1: Strip prefix
- 2: Add prefix
- 3: Add file suffix
- 4: Enter a regexp
- 5: Test filename manipulation
- 6: Use this ?
-Select parameter to modify (1-6):
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-\subsection{RegexWhere Format}
-
-The format is very close to that used by sed or Perl (\texttt{s/replace this/by
- that/}) operator. A valid regexwhere expression has three fields :
-\begin{itemize}
-\item a search expression (with optionnal submatch)
-\item a replacement expression (with optionnal back references \$1 to \$9)
-\item a set of search options (only case-insensitive ``i'' at this time)
-\end{itemize}
-
-Each field is delimited by a separator specified by the user as the first
-character of the expression. The separator can be one of the following:
-\begin{verbatim}
-<separator-keyword> = / ! ; % : , ~ # = &
-\end{verbatim}
-
-You can use several expressions separated by a commas.
-
-\subsection*{Examples}
-
-\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|l|}
-\hline
-Orignal filename & New filename & RegexWhere & Comments \\
-\hline
-\hline
-\texttt{c:/system.ini} & \texttt{c:/system.old.ini} & \texttt{/.ini\$/.old.ini/} & \$ matches end of name\\
-\hline
-\texttt{/prod/u01/pdata/} & \texttt{/rect/u01/rdata} & \texttt{/prod/rect/,/pdata/rdata/} & uses two regexp\\
-\hline
-\texttt{/prod/u01/pdata/} & \texttt{/rect/u01/rdata} & \texttt{!/prod/!/rect/!,/pdata/rdata/} & use \texttt{!} as separator\\
-\hline
-\texttt{C:/WINNT} & \texttt{d:/WINNT} & \texttt{/c:/d:/i} & case insensitive pattern match \\
-\hline
-
-\end{tabular}
-
-%\subsubsection{Using group}
-%
-%Like with Perl or Sed, you can make submatch with \texttt{()},
-%
-%\subsubsection*{Examples}
-
-
-%\subsubsection{Options}
-%
-% i Do case-insensitive pattern matching.
-
-\section{Restoring Directory Attributes}
-\index[general]{Attributes!Restoring Directory }
-\index[general]{Restoring Directory Attributes }
-
-Depending how you do the restore, you may or may not get the directory entries
-back to their original state. Here are a few of the problems you can
-encounter, and for same machine restores, how to avoid them.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item You backed up on one machine and are restoring to another that is
- either a different OS or doesn't have the same users/groups defined. Bacula
- does the best it can in these situations. Note, Bacula has saved the
- user/groups in numeric form, which means on a different machine, they
- may map to different user/group names.
-
-\item You are restoring into a directory that is already created and has
- file creation restrictions. Bacula tries to reset everything but
- without walking up the full chain of directories and modifying them all
- during the restore, which Bacula does and will not do, getting
- permissions back correctly in this situation depends to a large extent
- on your OS.
-
-\item You are doing a recursive restore of a directory tree. In this case
- Bacula will restore a file before restoring the file's parent directory
- entry. In the process of restoring the file Bacula will create the
- parent directory with open permissions and ownership of the file being
- restored. Then when Bacula tries to restore the parent directory Bacula
- sees that it already exists (Similar to the previous situation). If you
- had set the Restore job's "Replace" property to "never" then Bacula will
- not change the directory's permissions and ownerships to match what it
- backed up, you should also notice that the actual number of files
- restored is less then the expected number. If you had set the Restore
- job's "Replace" property to "always" then Bacula will change the
- Directory's ownership and permissions to match what it backed up, also
- the actual number of files restored should be equal to the expected
- number.
-
-\item You selected one or more files in a directory, but did not select the
- directory entry to be restored. In that case, if the directory is not
- on disk Bacula simply creates the directory with some default attributes
- which may not be the same as the original. If you do not select a
- directory and all its contents to be restored, you can still select
- items within the directory to be restored by individually marking those
- files, but in that case, you should individually use the "markdir"
- command to select all higher level directory entries (one at a time) to
- be restored if you want the directory entries properly restored.
-
-\item The {\bf bextract} program does not restore access control lists
- (ACLs), nor will it restore non-portable Win32 data (default) to Unix
- machines.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\label{Windows}
-\section{Restoring on Windows}
-\index[general]{Restoring on Windows }
-\index[general]{Windows!Restoring on }
-
-If you are restoring on WinNT/2K/XP systems, Bacula will restore the files
-with the original ownerships and permissions as would be expected. This is
-also true if you are restoring those files to an alternate directory (using
-the Where option in restore). However, if the alternate directory does not
-already exist, the Bacula File daemon (Client) will try to create it. In
-some cases, it may not create the directories, and if it does since the
-File daemon runs under the SYSTEM account, the directory will be created
-with SYSTEM ownership and permissions. In this case, you may have problems
-accessing the newly restored files.
-
-To avoid this problem, you should create any alternate directory before
-doing the restore. Bacula will not change the ownership and permissions of
-the directory if it is already created as long as it is not one of the
-directories being restored (i.e. written to tape).
-
-The default restore location is {\bf /tmp/bacula-restores/} and if you are
-restoring from drive {\bf E:}, the default will be
-{\bf /tmp/bacula-restores/e/}, so you should ensure that this directory
-exists before doing the restore, or use the {\bf mod} option to
-select a different {\bf where} directory that does exist.
-
-Some users have experienced problems restoring files that participate in
-the Active Directory. They also report that changing the userid under which
-Bacula (bacula-fd.exe) runs, from SYSTEM to a Domain Admin userid, resolves
-the problem.
-
-
-\section{Restoring Files Can Be Slow}
-\index[general]{Slow!Restoring Files Can Be }
-\index[general]{Restoring Files Can Be Slow }
-
-Restoring files is generally {\bf much} slower than backing them up for several
-reasons. The first is that during a backup the tape is normally already
-positioned and Bacula only needs to write. On the other hand, because restoring
-files is done so rarely, Bacula keeps only the start file and block on the
-tape for the whole job rather than on a file by file basis which would use
-quite a lot of space in the catalog.
-
-Bacula will forward space to the correct file mark on the tape for the Job,
-then forward space to the correct block, and finally sequentially read each
-record until it gets to the correct one(s) for the file or files you want to
-restore. Once the desired files are restored, Bacula will stop reading the
-tape.
-
-Finally, instead of just reading a file for backup, during the restore, Bacula
-must create the file, and the operating system must allocate disk space for
-the file as Bacula is restoring it.
-
-For all the above reasons the restore process is generally much slower than
-backing up (sometimes it takes three times as long).
-
-\section{Problems Restoring Files}
-\index[general]{Files!Problems Restoring }
-\index[general]{Problems Restoring Files }
-
-The most frequent problems users have restoring files are error messages such
-as:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-04-Jan 00:33 z217-sd: RestoreFiles.2005-01-04_00.31.04 Error:
-block.c:868 Volume data error at 20:0! Short block of 512 bytes on
-device /dev/tape discarded.
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-or
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-04-Jan 00:33 z217-sd: RestoreFiles.2005-01-04_00.31.04 Error:
-block.c:264 Volume data error at 20:0! Wanted ID: "BB02", got ".".
-Buffer discarded.
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Both these kinds of messages indicate that you were probably running your tape
-drive in fixed block mode rather than variable block mode. Fixed block mode
-will work with any program that reads tapes sequentially such as tar, but
-Bacula repositions the tape on a block basis when restoring files because this
-will speed up the restore by orders of magnitude when only a few files are being
-restored. There are several ways that you can attempt to recover from this
-unfortunate situation.
-
-Try the following things, each separately, and reset your Device resource to
-what it is now after each individual test:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Set "Block Positioning = no" in your Device resource and try the
- restore. This is a new directive and untested.
-
-\item Set "Minimum Block Size = 512" and "Maximum Block Size = 512" and
- try the restore. If you are able to determine the block size your drive
- was previously using, you should try that size if 512 does not work.
- This is a really horrible solution, and it is not at all recommended
- to continue backing up your data without correcting this condition.
- Please see the Tape Testing chapter for more on this.
-
-\item Try editing the restore.bsr file at the Run xxx yes/mod/no prompt
- before starting the restore job and remove all the VolBlock statements.
- These are what causes Bacula to reposition the tape, and where problems
- occur if you have a fixed block size set for your drive. The VolFile
- commands also cause repositioning, but this will work regardless of the
- block size.
-
-\item Use bextract to extract the files you want -- it reads the Volume
- sequentially if you use the include list feature, or if you use a .bsr
- file, but remove all the VolBlock statements after the .bsr file is
- created (at the Run yes/mod/no) prompt but before you start the restore.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\section{Restore Errors}
-\index[general]{Errors!Restore}
-\index[general]{Restore Errors}
-
-There are a number of reasons why there may be restore errors or
-warning messages. Some of the more common ones are:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [file count mismatch]
- This can occur for the following reasons:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item You requested Bacula not to overwrite existing or newer
- files.
- \item A Bacula miscount of files/directories. This is an
- on-going problem due to the complications of directories,
- soft/hard link, and such. Simply check that all the files you
- wanted were actually restored.
- \end{itemize}
-
-\item [file size error]
- When Bacula restores files, it checks that the size of the
- restored file is the same as the file status data it saved
- when starting the backup of the file. If the sizes do not
- agree, Bacula will print an error message. This size mismatch
- most often occurs because the file was being written as Bacula
- backed up the file. In this case, the size that Bacula
- restored will be greater than the status size. This often
- happens with log files.
-
- If the restored size is smaller, then you should be concerned
- about a possible tape error and check the Bacula output as
- well as your system logs.
-\end{description}
-
-
-
-\section{Example Restore Job Resource}
-\index[general]{Example Restore Job Resource }
-\index[general]{Resource!Example Restore Job }
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Job {
- Name = "RestoreFiles"
- Type = Restore
- Client = Any-client
- FileSet = "Any-FileSet"
- Storage = Any-storage
- Where = /tmp/bacula-restores
- Messages = Standard
- Pool = Default
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If {\bf Where} is not specified, the default location for restoring files will
-be their original locations.
-\label{Selection}
-
-\section{File Selection Commands}
-\index[general]{Commands!File Selection }
-\index[general]{File Selection Commands }
-
-After you have selected the Jobs to be restored and Bacula has created the
-in-memory directory tree, you will enter file selection mode as indicated by
-the dollar sign ({\bf \$}) prompt. While in this mode, you may use the
-commands listed above. The basic idea is to move up and down the in memory
-directory structure with the {\bf cd} command much as you normally do on the
-system. Once you are in a directory, you may select the files that you want
-restored. As a default no files are marked to be restored. If you wish to
-start with all files, simply enter: {\bf cd /} and {\bf mark *}. Otherwise
-proceed to select the files you wish to restore by marking them with the {\bf
-mark} command. The available commands are:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [cd]
- The {\bf cd} command changes the current directory to the argument
- specified.
- It operates much like the Unix {\bf cd} command. Wildcard specifications are
- not permitted.
-
- Note, on Windows systems, the various drives (c:, d:, ...) are treated like
- a
- directory within the file tree while in the file selection mode. As a
- consequence, you must do a {\bf cd c:} or possibly in some cases a {\bf cd
- C:} (note upper case) to get down to the first directory.
-
-\item [dir]
- \index[dir]{dir }
- The {\bf dir} command is similar to the {\bf ls} command, except that it
- prints it in long format (all details). This command can be a bit slower
- than
- the {\bf ls} command because it must access the catalog database for the
- detailed information for each file.
-
-\item [estimate]
- \index[dir]{estimate }
- The {\bf estimate} command prints a summary of the total files in the tree,
- how many are marked to be restored, and an estimate of the number of bytes
- to
- be restored. This can be useful if you are short on disk space on the
- machine
- where the files will be restored.
-
-\item [find]
- \index[dir]{find}
- The {\bf find} command accepts one or more arguments and displays all files
- in the tree that match that argument. The argument may have wildcards. It is
- somewhat similar to the Unix command {\bf find / -name arg}.
-
-\item [ls]
- The {\bf ls} command produces a listing of all the files contained in the
- current directory much like the Unix {\bf ls} command. You may specify an
- argument containing wildcards, in which case only those files will be
- listed.
-
- Any file that is marked to be restored will have its name preceded by an
- asterisk ({\bf *}). Directory names will be terminated with a forward slash
- ({\bf /}) to distinguish them from filenames.
-
-\item [lsmark]
- \index[fd]{lsmark}
- The {\bf lsmark} command is the same as the {\bf ls} except that it will
- print only those files marked for extraction. The other distinction is that
- it will recursively descend into any directory selected.
-
-\item [mark]
- \index[dir]{mark}
- The {\bf mark} command allows you to mark files to be restored. It takes a
- single argument which is the filename or directory name in the current
- directory to be marked for extraction. The argument may be a wildcard
- specification, in which case all files that match in the current directory
- are marked to be restored. If the argument matches a directory rather than a
- file, then the directory and all the files contained in that directory
- (recursively) are marked to be restored. Any marked file will have its name
- preceded with an asterisk ({\bf *}) in the output produced by the {\bf ls}
-or
- {\bf dir} commands. Note, supplying a full path on the mark command does not
- work as expected to select a file or directory in the current directory.
- Also, the {\bf mark} command works on the current and lower directories but
- does not touch higher level directories.
-
- After executing the {\bf mark} command, it will print a brief summary:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- No files marked.
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- If no files were marked, or:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- nn files marked.
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- if some files are marked.
-
-\item [unmark]
- \index[dir]{unmark }
- The {\bf unmark} is identical to the {\bf mark} command, except that it
- unmarks the specified file or files so that they will not be restored. Note:
- the {\bf unmark} command works from the current directory, so it does not
- unmark any files at a higher level. First do a {\bf cd /} before the {\bf
- unmark *} command if you want to unmark everything.
-
-\item [pwd]
- \index[dir]{pwd }
- The {\bf pwd} command prints the current working directory. It accepts no
- arguments.
-
-\item [count]
- \index[dir]{count }
- The {\bf count} command prints the total files in the directory tree and the
- number of files marked to be restored.
-
-\item [done]
- \index[dir]{done }
- This command terminates file selection mode.
-
-\item [exit]
- \index[fd]{exit }
- This command terminates file selection mode (the same as done).
-
-\item [quit]
- \index[fd]{quit }
- This command terminates the file selection and does not run the restore
-job.
-
-
-\item [help]
- \index[fd]{help }
- This command prints a summary of the commands available.
-
-\item [?]
- This command is the same as the {\bf help} command.
-\end{description}
-
-\label{database_restore}
-\section{Restoring When Things Go Wrong}
-\index[general]{Restoring When Things Go Wrong }
-\index[general]{Restoring Your Database}
-\index[general]{Database!Restoring}
-
-This and the following sections will try to present a few of the kinds of
-problems that can come up making restoring more difficult. We will try to
-provide a few ideas how to get out of these problem situations.
-In addition to what is presented here, there is more specific information
-on restoring a \ilink{Client}{restore_client} and your
-\ilink{Server}{restore_server} in the \ilink{Disaster Recovery Using
-Bacula}{RescueChapter} chapter of this manual.
-
-\begin{description}
-\item[Problem]
- My database is broken.
-\item[Solution]
- For SQLite, use the vacuum command to try to fix the database. For either
- MySQL or PostgreSQL, see the vendor's documentation. They have specific tools
- that check and repair databases, see the \ilink{database
- repair}{DatabaseRepair} sections of this manual for links to vendor
- information.
-
- Assuming the above does not resolve the problem, you will need to restore
- or rebuild your catalog. Note, if it is a matter of some
- inconsistencies in the Bacula tables rather than a broken database, then
- running \ilink{dbcheck}{dbcheck} might help, but you will need to ensure
- that your database indexes are properly setup. Please see
- the \ilink{Database Performance Issues}{DatabasePerformance} sections
- of this manual for more details.
-
-\item[Problem]
- How do I restore my catalog?
-\item[Solution with a Catalog backup]
- If you have backed up your database nightly (as you should) and you
- have made a bootstrap file, you can immediately load back your
- database (or the ASCII SQL output). Make a copy of your current
- database, then re-initialize it, by running the following scripts:
-\begin{verbatim}
- ./drop_bacula_tables
- ./make_bacula_tables
-\end{verbatim}
- After re-initializing the database, you should be able to run
- Bacula. If you now try to use the restore command, it will not
- work because the database will be empty. However, you can manually
- run a restore job and specify your bootstrap file. You do so
- by entering the {bf run} command in the console and selecting the
- restore job. If you are using the default bacula-dir.conf, this
- Job will be named {\bf RestoreFiles}. Most likely it will prompt
- you with something such as:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Run Restore job
-JobName: RestoreFiles
-Bootstrap: /home/kern/bacula/working/restore.bsr
-Where: /tmp/bacula-restores
-Replace: always
-FileSet: Full Set
-Client: rufus-fd
-Storage: File
-When: 2005-07-10 17:33:40
-Catalog: MyCatalog
-Priority: 10
-OK to run? (yes/mod/no):
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- A number of the items will be different in your case. What you want to
- do is: to use the mod option to change the Bootstrap to point to your
- saved bootstrap file; and to make sure all the other items such as
- Client, Storage, Catalog, and Where are correct. The FileSet is not
- used when you specify a bootstrap file. Once you have set all the
- correct values, run the Job and it will restore the backup of your
- database, which is most likely an ASCII dump.
-
- You will then need to follow the instructions for your
- database type to recreate the database from the ASCII backup file.
- See the \ilink {Catalog Maintenance}{CatMaintenanceChapter} chapter of
- this manual for examples of the command needed to restore a
- database from an ASCII dump (they are shown in the Compacting Your
- XXX Database sections).
-
- Also, please note that after you restore your database from an ASCII
- backup, you do NOT want to do a {\bf make\_bacula\_tables} command, or
- you will probably erase your newly restored database tables.
-
-
-\item[Solution with a Job listing]
- If you did save your database but did not make a bootstrap file, then
- recovering the database is more difficult. You will probably need to
- use bextract to extract the backup copy. First you should locate the
- listing of the job report from the last catalog backup. It has
- important information that will allow you to quickly find your database
- file. For example, in the job report for the CatalogBackup shown below,
- the critical items are the Volume name(s), the Volume Session Id and the
- Volume Session Time. If you know those, you can easily restore your
- Catalog.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-22-Apr 10:22 HeadMan: Start Backup JobId 7510,
-Job=CatalogBackup.2005-04-22_01.10.0
-22-Apr 10:23 HeadMan: Bacula 1.37.14 (21Apr05): 22-Apr-2005 10:23:06
- JobId: 7510
- Job: CatalogBackup.2005-04-22_01.10.00
- Backup Level: Full
- Client: Polymatou
- FileSet: "CatalogFile" 2003-04-10 01:24:01
- Pool: "Default"
- Storage: "DLTDrive"
- Start time: 22-Apr-2005 10:21:00
- End time: 22-Apr-2005 10:23:06
- FD Files Written: 1
- SD Files Written: 1
- FD Bytes Written: 210,739,395
- SD Bytes Written: 210,739,521
- Rate: 1672.5 KB/s
- Software Compression: None
- Volume name(s): DLT-22Apr05
- Volume Session Id: 11
- Volume Session Time: 1114075126
- Last Volume Bytes: 1,428,240,465
- Non-fatal FD errors: 0
- SD Errors: 0
- FD termination status: OK
- SD termination status: OK
- Termination: Backup OK
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- From the above information, you can manually create a bootstrap file,
- and then follow the instructions given above for restoring your database.
- A reconstructed bootstrap file for the above backup Job would look
- like the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Volume="DLT-22Apr05"
-VolSessionId=11
-VolSessionTime=1114075126
-FileIndex=1-1
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- Where we have inserted the Volume name, Volume Session Id, and Volume
- Session Time that correspond to the values in the job report. We've also
- used a FileIndex of one, which will always be the case providing that
- there was only one file backed up in the job.
-
- The disadvantage of this bootstrap file compared to what is created when
- you ask for one to be written, is that there is no File and Block
- specified, so the restore code must search all data in the Volume to find
- the requested file. A fully specified bootstrap file would have the File
- and Blocks specified as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Volume="DLT-22Apr05"
-VolSessionId=11
-VolSessionTime=1114075126
-VolFile=118-118
-VolBlock=0-4053
-FileIndex=1-1
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- Once you have restored the ASCII dump of the database,
- you will then to follow the instructions for your
- database type to recreate the database from the ASCII backup file.
- See the \ilink {Catalog Maintenance}{CatMaintenanceChapter} chapter of
- this manual for examples of the command needed to restore a
- database from an ASCII dump (they are shown in the Compacting Your
- XXX Database sections).
-
- Also, please note that after you restore your database from an ASCII
- backup, you do NOT want to do a {\bf make\_bacula\_tables} command, or
- you will probably erase your newly restored database tables.
-
-\item [Solution without a Job Listing]
- If you do not have a job listing, then it is a bit more difficult.
- Either you use the \ilink{bscan}{bscan} program to scan the contents
- of your tape into a database, which can be very time consuming
- depending on the size of the tape, or you can use the \ilink{bls}{bls}
- program to list everything on the tape, and reconstruct a bootstrap
- file from the bls listing for the file or files you want following
- the instructions given above.
-
- There is a specific example of how to use {\bf bls} below.
-
-\item [Problem]
- I try to restore the last known good full backup by specifying
- item 3 on the restore menu then the JobId to restore. Bacula
- then reports:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- 1 Job 0 Files
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
- and restores nothing.
-
-\item[Solution]
- Most likely the File records were pruned from the database either due
- to the File Retention period expiring or by explicitly purging the
- Job. By using the "llist jobid=nn" command, you can obtain all the
- important information about the job:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-llist jobid=120
- JobId: 120
- Job: save.2005-12-05_18.27.33
- Job.Name: save
- PurgedFiles: 0
- Type: B
- Level: F
- Job.ClientId: 1
- Client.Name: Rufus
- JobStatus: T
- SchedTime: 2005-12-05 18:27:32
- StartTime: 2005-12-05 18:27:35
- EndTime: 2005-12-05 18:27:37
- JobTDate: 1133803657
- VolSessionId: 1
- VolSessionTime: 1133803624
- JobFiles: 236
- JobErrors: 0
- JobMissingFiles: 0
- Job.PoolId: 4
- Pool.Name: Full
- Job.FileSetId: 1
- FileSet.FileSet: BackupSet
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- Then you can find the Volume(s) used by doing:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-sql
-select VolumeName from JobMedia,Media where JobId=1 and JobMedia.MediaId=Media.MediaId;
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- Finally, you can create a bootstrap file as described in the previous
- problem above using this information.
-
- If you are using Bacula version 1.38.0 or greater, when you select
- item 3 from the menu and enter the JobId, it will ask you if
- you would like to restore all the files in the job, and it will
- collect the above information and write the bootstrap file for
- you.
-
-\item [Problem]
- You don't have a bootstrap file, and you don't have the Job report for
- the backup of your database, but you did backup the database, and you
- know the Volume to which it was backed up.
-
-\item [Solution]
- Either bscan the tape (see below for bscanning), or better use {\bf bls}
- to find where it is on the tape, then use {\bf bextract} to
- restore the database. For example,
-
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-./bls -j -V DLT-22Apr05 /dev/nst0
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
- Might produce the following output:
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-bls: butil.c:258 Using device: "/dev/nst0" for reading.
-21-Jul 18:34 bls: Ready to read from volume "DLT-22Apr05" on device "DLTDrive"
-(/dev/nst0).
-Volume Record: File:blk=0:0 SessId=11 SessTime=1114075126 JobId=0 DataLen=164
-...
-Begin Job Session Record: File:blk=118:0 SessId=11 SessTime=1114075126
-JobId=7510
- Job=CatalogBackup.2005-04-22_01.10.0 Date=22-Apr-2005 10:21:00 Level=F Type=B
-End Job Session Record: File:blk=118:4053 SessId=11 SessTime=1114075126
-JobId=7510
- Date=22-Apr-2005 10:23:06 Level=F Type=B Files=1 Bytes=210,739,395 Errors=0
-Status=T
-...
-21-Jul 18:34 bls: End of Volume at file 201 on device "DLTDrive" (/dev/nst0),
-Volume "DLT-22Apr05"
-21-Jul 18:34 bls: End of all volumes.
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
- Of course, there will be many more records printed, but we have indicated
- the essential lines of output. From the information on the Begin Job and End
- Job Session Records, you can reconstruct a bootstrap file such as the one
- shown above.
-
-\item[Problem]
- How can I find where a file is stored.
-\item[Solution]
- Normally, it is not necessary, you just use the {\bf restore} command to
- restore the most recently saved version (menu option 5), or a version
- saved before a given date (menu option 8). If you know the JobId of the
- job in which it was saved, you can use menu option 3 to enter that JobId.
-
- If you would like to know the JobId where a file was saved, select
- restore menu option 2.
-
- You can also use the {\bf query} command to find information such as:
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-*query
-Available queries:
- 1: List up to 20 places where a File is saved regardless of the
-directory
- 2: List where the most recent copies of a file are saved
- 3: List last 20 Full Backups for a Client
- 4: List all backups for a Client after a specified time
- 5: List all backups for a Client
- 6: List Volume Attributes for a selected Volume
- 7: List Volumes used by selected JobId
- 8: List Volumes to Restore All Files
- 9: List Pool Attributes for a selected Pool
- 10: List total files/bytes by Job
- 11: List total files/bytes by Volume
- 12: List Files for a selected JobId
- 13: List Jobs stored on a selected MediaId
- 14: List Jobs stored for a given Volume name
- 15: List Volumes Bacula thinks are in changer
- 16: List Volumes likely to need replacement from age or errors
-Choose a query (1-16):
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\item[Problem]
- I didn't backup my database. What do I do now?
-\item[Solution]
- This is probably the worst of all cases, and you will probably have
- to re-create your database from scratch and then bscan in all your
- Volumes, which is a very long, painful, and inexact process.
-
-There are basically three steps to take:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Ensure that your SQL server is running (MySQL or PostgreSQL)
- and that the Bacula database (normally bacula) exists. See the
- \ilink{Installation}{CreateDatabase} chapter of the manual.
-\item Ensure that the Bacula databases are created. This is also
- described at the above link.
-\item Start and stop the Bacula Director using the propriate
- bacula-dir.conf file so that it can create the Client and
- Storage records which are not stored on the Volumes. Without these
- records, scanning is unable to connect the Job records to the proper
- client.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-When the above is complete, you can begin bscanning your Volumes. Please
-see the \ilink{bscan}{bscan} section of the Volume Utility Tools of this
-chapter for more details.
-
-\end{description}
+++ /dev/null
-/*
- * html2latex
- */
-
-available {
- sun4_sunos.4
- sun4_solaris.2
- rs_aix.3
- rs_aix.4
- sgi_irix
-}
-
-description {
- From Jeffrey Schaefer, Geometry Center. Translates HTML document to LaTeX
-}
-
-install {
- bin/html2latex /afs/rpi.edu/dept/acs/rpinfo/filters/GChtml2latex/html2latex
- bin/html2latex.tag /afs/rpi.edu/dept/acs/rpinfo/filters/GChtml2latex/html2latex.tag
- bin/html2latex-local.tag /afs/rpi.edu/dept/acs/rpinfo/filters/GChtml2latex/html2latex-local.tag
- bin/webtex2latex.tag /afs/rpi.edu/dept/acs/rpinfo/filters/GChtml2latex/webtex2latex.tag
- man/man1/html2latex.1 /afs/rpi.edu/dept/acs/rpinfo/filters/GChtml2latex/html2latex.1
-}
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Data Spooling}
-\label{SpoolingChapter}
-\index[general]{Data Spooling }
-\index[general]{Spooling!Data }
-
-Bacula allows you to specify that you want the Storage daemon to initially
-write your data to disk and then subsequently to tape. This serves several
-important purposes.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item It takes a long time for data to come in from the File daemon during
- an Incremental backup. If it is directly written to tape, the tape will
- start and stop or shoe-shine as it is often called causing tape wear.
- By first writing the data to disk, then writing it to tape, the tape can
- be kept in continual motion.
-\item While the spooled data is being written to the tape, the despooling
- process has exclusive use of the tape. This means that you can spool
- multiple simultaneous jobs to disk, then have them very efficiently
- despooled one at a time without having the data blocks from several jobs
- intermingled, thus substantially improving the time needed to restore
- files. While despooling, all jobs spooling continue running.
-\item Writing to a tape can be slow. By first spooling your data to disk,
- you can often reduce the time the File daemon is running on a system,
- thus reducing downtime, and/or interference with users. Of course, if
- your spool device is not large enough to hold all the data from your
- File daemon, you may actually slow down the overall backup.
-\end{itemize}
-
-Data spooling is exactly that "spooling". It is not a way to first write a
-"backup" to a disk file and then to a tape. When the backup has only been
-spooled to disk, it is not complete yet and cannot be restored until it is
-written to tape.
-
-Bacula version 1.39.x and later supports writing a backup
-to disk then later {\bf Migrating} or moving it to a tape (or any
-other medium). For
-details on this, please see the \ilink{Migration}{MigrationChapter} chapter
-of this manual for more details.
-
-The remainder of this chapter explains the various directives that you can use
-in the spooling process.
-
-\label{directives}
-\section{Data Spooling Directives}
-\index[general]{Directives!Data Spooling }
-\index[general]{Data Spooling Directives }
-
-The following directives can be used to control data spooling.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item To turn data spooling on/off at the Job level in the Job resource in
- the Director's conf file (default {\bf no}).
-
-{\bf SpoolData = yes\vb{}no}
-
-\item To override the Job specification in a Schedule Run directive in the
- Director's conf file.
-
-{\bf SpoolData = yes\vb{}no}
-
-\item To override the Job specification in a bconsole session using the \texttt{run}
- command. Please note that this does {\bf not } refer to a configuration
- statement, but to an argument for the run command.
-
-{\bf SpoolData=yes\vb{}no}
-
-\item To limit the the maximum spool file size for a particular job in the Job
- resource
-
-{\bf Spool Size = size}
- Where size is a the maximum spool size for this job specified in bytes.
-
-\item To limit the maximum total size of the spooled data for a particular
- device. Specified in the Device resource of the Storage daemon's conf file
- (default unlimited).
-
-{\bf Maximum Spool Size = size}
- Where size is a the maximum spool size for all jobs specified in bytes.
-
-\item To limit the maximum total size of the spooled data for a particular
- device for a single job. Specified in the Device Resource of the Storage
- daemon's conf file (default unlimited).
-
-{\bf Maximum Job Spool Size = size}
- Where size is the maximum spool file size for a single job specified in
- bytes.
-
-\item To specify the spool directory for a particular device. Specified in
- the Device Resource of the Storage daemon's conf file (default, the working
- directory).
-
-{\bf Spool Directory = directory}
-\end{itemize}
-
-\label{warning}
-
-% TODO: fix this section name
-\section{!!! MAJOR WARNING !!!}
-\index[general]{WARNING! MAJOR }
-\index[general]{ MAJOR WARNING }
-
-Please be very careful to exclude the spool directory from any backup,
-otherwise, your job will write enormous amounts of data to the Volume, and
-most probably terminate in error. This is because in attempting to backup the
-spool file, the backup data will be written a second time to the spool file,
-and so on ad infinitum.
-
-Another advice is to always specify the maximum spool size so that your disk
-doesn't completely fill up. In principle, data spooling will properly detect a
-full disk, and despool data allowing the job to continue. However, attribute
-spooling is not so kind to the user. If the disk on which attributes are being
-spooled fills, the job will be canceled. In addition, if your working
-directory is on the same partition as the spool directory, then Bacula jobs
-will fail possibly in bizarre ways when the spool fills.
-
-\label{points}
-\section{Other Points}
-\index[general]{Points!Other }
-\index[general]{Other Points }
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item When data spooling is enabled, Bacula automatically turns on attribute
- spooling. In other words, it also spools the catalog entries to disk. This is
- done so that in case the job fails, there will be no catalog entries
- pointing to non-existent tape backups.
-\item Attribute despooling occurs near the end of a job. The Storage daemon
- accumulates file attributes during the backup and sends them to the
- Director at the end of the job. The Director then inserts the file
- attributes into the catalog. During this insertion, the tape drive may
- be inactive. When the file attribute insertion is completed, the job
- terminates.
-\item Attribute spool files are always placed in the working directory of
- the Storage daemon.
-\item When Bacula begins despooling data spooled to disk, it takes exclusive
- use of the tape. This has the major advantage that in running multiple
- simultaneous jobs at the same time, the blocks of several jobs will not be
- intermingled.
-\item It probably does not make a lot of sense to enable data spooling if you
- are writing to disk files.
-\item It is probably best to provide as large a spool file as possible to
- avoid repeatedly spooling/despooling. Also, while a job is despooling to
- tape, the File daemon must wait (i.e. spooling stops for the job while it is
- despooling).
-\item If you are running multiple simultaneous jobs, Bacula will continue
- spooling other jobs while one is despooling to tape, provided there is
- sufficient spool file space.
-\end{itemize}
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{The Current State of Bacula}
-\label{StateChapter}
-\index[general]{Current State of Bacula }
-
-In other words, what is and what is not currently implemented and functional.
-
-\section{What is Implemented}
-\index[general]{Implemented!What}
-\index[general]{What is Implemented}
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Job Control
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Network backup/restore with centralized Director.
- \item Internal scheduler for automatic
- \ilink{Job}{JobDef} execution.
- \item Scheduling of multiple Jobs at the same time.
- \item You may run one Job at a time or multiple simultaneous Jobs
- (sometimes called multiplexing).
- \item Job sequencing using priorities.
- \item \ilink{Console}{UADef} interface to the Director allowing complete
- control. A shell, Qt4 GUI, GNOME GUI and wxWidgets GUI versions of
- the Console program are available. Note, the Qt4 GUI program called
- the Bacula Administration tool or bat, offers many additional
- features over the shell program.
- \end{itemize}
-
-\item Security
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Verification of files previously cataloged, permitting a Tripwire like
- capability (system break-in detection).
- \item CRAM-MD5 password authentication between each component (daemon).
- \item Configurable
- \ilink{TLS (SSL) communications encryption}{CommEncryption} between each
- component.
- \item Configurable
- \ilink{Data (on Volume) encryption}{DataEncryption}
- on a Client by Client basis.
- \item Computation of MD5 or SHA1 signatures of the file data if requested.
- \end{itemize}
-
-
-\item Restore Features
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Restore of one or more files selected interactively either for the
- current backup or a backup prior to a specified time and date.
- \item Restore of a complete system starting from bare metal. This is mostly
- automated for Linux systems and partially automated for Solaris. See
- \ilink{Disaster Recovery Using Bacula}{RescueChapter}. This is also
- reported to work on Win2K/XP systems.
- \item Listing and Restoration of files using stand-alone {\bf bls} and {\bf
- bextract} tool programs. Among other things, this permits extraction of files
- when Bacula and/or the catalog are not available. Note, the recommended way
- to restore files is using the restore command in the Console. These programs
- are designed for use as a last resort.
- \item Ability to restore the catalog database rapidly by using bootstrap
- files (previously saved).
- \item Ability to recreate the catalog database by scanning backup Volumes
- using the {\bf bscan} program.
- \end{itemize}
-
-\item SQL Catalog
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Catalog database facility for remembering Volumes, Pools, Jobs, and
- Files backed up.
- \item Support for MySQL, PostgreSQL, and SQLite Catalog databases.
- \item User extensible queries to the MySQL, PostgreSQL and SQLite databases.
- \end{itemize}
-
-\item Advanced Volume and Pool Management
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Labeled Volumes, preventing accidental overwriting (at least by
- Bacula).
- \item Any number of Jobs and Clients can be backed up to a single Volume.
- That is, you can backup and restore Linux, Unix, Sun, and Windows machines to
- the same Volume.
- \item Multi-volume saves. When a Volume is full, {\bf Bacula} automatically
- requests the next Volume and continues the backup.
- \item
- \ilink{Pool and Volume}{PoolResource} library management
- providing Volume flexibility (e.g. monthly, weekly, daily Volume sets, Volume
- sets segregated by Client, ...).
- \item Machine independent Volume data format. Linux, Solaris, and Windows
- clients can all be backed up to the same Volume if desired.
- \item The Volume data format is upwards compatible so that old Volumes
- can always be read.
- \item A flexible
- \ilink{message}{MessagesChapter} handler including routing
- of messages from any daemon back to the Director and automatic email
- reporting.
- \item Data spooling to disk during backup with subsequent write to tape from
- the spooled disk files. This prevents tape "shoe shine" during
- Incremental/Differential backups.
- \end{itemize}
-
-\item Advanced Support for most Storage Devices
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Autochanger support using a simple shell interface that can interface
- to virtually any autoloader program. A script for {\bf mtx} is provided.
- \item Support for autochanger barcodes -- automatic tape labeling from
- barcodes.
- \item Automatic support for multiple autochanger magazines either using
- barcodes or by reading the tapes.
- \item Support for multiple drive autochangers.
- \item Raw device backup/restore. Restore must be to the same device.
- \item All Volume blocks (approximately 64K bytes) contain a data checksum.
- \item Migration support -- move data from one Pool to another or
- one Volume to another.
- \item Supports writing to DVD.
- \end{itemize}
-
-\item Multi-Operating System Support
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Programmed to handle arbitrarily long filenames and messages.
- \item GZIP compression on a file by file basis done by the Client program if
- requested before network transit.
- \item Saves and restores POSIX ACLs on most OSes if enabled.
- \item Access control lists for Consoles that permit restricting user access
- to only their data.
- \item Support for save/restore of files larger than 2GB.
- \item Support for 64 bit machines, e.g. amd64, Sparc.
- \item Support ANSI and IBM tape labels.
- \item Support for Unicode filenames (e.g. Chinese) on Win32 machines on
- version 1.37.28 and greater.
- \item Consistent backup of open files on Win32 systems (WinXP, Win2003,
- and Vista)
- but not Win2000, using Volume Shadow Copy (VSS).
- \item Support for path/filename lengths of up to 64K on Win32 machines
- (unlimited on Unix/Linux machines).
- \end{itemize}
-
-\item Miscellaneous
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Multi-threaded implementation.
- \item A comprehensive and extensible
- \ilink{configuration file}{DirectorChapter} for each daemon.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{Advantages Over Other Backup Programs}
-\index[general]{Advantages of Bacula Over Other Backup Programs }
-\index[general]{Programs!Advantages of Bacula Over Other Backup }
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Since there is a client for each machine, you can backup
- and restore clients of any type ensuring that all attributes
- of files are properly saved and restored.
-\item It is also possible to backup clients without any client
- software by using NFS or Samba. However, if possible, we
- recommend running a Client File daemon on each machine to be
- backed up.
-\item Bacula handles multi-volume backups.
-\item A full comprehensive SQL standard database of all files backed up. This
- permits online viewing of files saved on any particular Volume.
-\item Automatic pruning of the database (removal of old records) thus
- simplifying database administration.
-\item Any SQL database engine can be used making Bacula very flexible.
- Drivers currently exist for MySQL, PostgreSQL, and SQLite.
-\item The modular but integrated design makes Bacula very scalable.
-\item Since Bacula uses client file servers, any database or
- other application can be properly shutdown by Bacula using the
- native tools of the system, backed up, then restarted (all
- within a Bacula Job).
-\item Bacula has a built-in Job scheduler.
-\item The Volume format is documented and there are simple C programs to
- read/write it.
-\item Bacula uses well defined (IANA registered) TCP/IP ports -- no rpcs, no
- shared memory.
-\item Bacula installation and configuration is relatively simple compared to
- other comparable products.
-\item According to one user Bacula is as fast as the big major commercial
- applications.
-\item According to another user Bacula is four times as fast as another
- commercial application, probably because that application stores its catalog
- information in a large number of individual files rather than an SQL database
- as Bacula does.
-\item Aside from several GUI administrative interfaces, Bacula has a
- comprehensive shell administrative interface, which allows the
- administrator to use tools such as ssh to administrate any part of
- Bacula from anywhere (even from home).
-\item Bacula has a Rescue CD for Linux systems with the following features:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item You build it on your own system from scratch with one simple command:
- make -- well, then make burn.
- \item It uses your kernel
- \item It captures your current disk parameters and builds scripts that allow
- you to automatically repartition a disk and format it to put it back to what
- you had before.
- \item It has a script that will restart your networking (with the right IP
- address)
- \item It has a script to automatically mount your hard disks.
- \item It has a full Bacula FD statically linked
- \item You can easily add additional data/programs, ... to the disk.
- \end{itemize}
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{Current Implementation Restrictions}
-\index[general]{Current Implementation Restrictions }
-\index[general]{Restrictions!Current Implementation }
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Bacula's Differential and Incremental \textsl{normal} backups are based
- on time stamps. Consequently, if you move files into an existing directory
- or move a whole directory into the backup fileset after a Full backup, those
- files will probably not be backed up by an Incremental save because they will
- have old dates. You must run backups in Accurate mode or explicitly update
- the date/time stamp on all moved files. % TODO: remove it ?
-\item File System Modules (configurable routines for
- saving/restoring special files) are not yet implemented. However,
- this feature is easily implemented using RunScripts.
-\item Bacula cannot restore two different jobs in the same
- restore if those jobs were run simultaneously, unless you had
- data spooling turned on and the spool file held the full
- contents of both jobs. In other terms, Bacula cannot restore
- two jobs in the same restore if the jobs' data blocks were
- intermixed on the backup medium. This poses no restrictions
- for normal backup jobs even if they are run simultaneously.
-\item Bacula can generally restore any backup made from a client
- to any other client. However, if the architecture is significantly
- different (i.e. 32 bit architecture to 64 bit or Win32 to Unix),
- some restrictions may apply (e.g. Solaris door files do not exist
- on other Unix/Linux machines; there are reports that Zlib compression
- written with 64 bit machines does not always read correctly on a 32 bit
- machine).
-\item In older version of Bacula ($<=$ 3.x), if you have over 4 billion file
- entries stored in your database, the database FileId is likely to overflow.
-\item In non \textsl{Accurate} mode, files deleted after a Full save will be
- included in a restoration. This is typical for most similar backup programs.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{Design Limitations or Restrictions}
-\index[general]{Restrictions!Design Limitations or }
-\index[general]{Design Limitations or Restrictions }
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Names (resource names, Volume names, and such) defined in Bacula
- configuration files are limited to a fixed number of
- characters. Currently the limit is defined as 127 characters. Note,
- this does not apply to filenames, which may be arbitrarily long.
-\item Command line input to some of the stand alone tools -- e.g. btape,
- bconsole is restricted to several hundred characters maximum.
-\end{itemize}
+++ /dev/null
-\chapter{Using Bacula catalog to grab information}
-\label{UseBaculaCatalogToExtractInformationChapter}
-\index[general]{Statistics}
-
-Bacula catalog contains lot of information about your IT infrastructure, how
-many files, their size, the number of video or music files etc. Using Bacula
-catalog during the day to get them permit to save resources on your servers.
-
-In this chapter, you will find tips and information to measure bacula
-efficiency and report statistics.
-
-\section{Job statistics}
-If you (or probably your boss) want to have statistics on your backups to
-provide some \textit{Service Level Agreement} indicators, you could use a few
-SQL queries on the Job table to report how many:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item jobs have run
-\item jobs have been successful
-\item files have been backed up
-\item ...
-\end{itemize}
-
-However, these statistics are accurate only if your job retention is greater
-than your statistics period. Ie, if jobs are purged from the catalog, you won't
-be able to use them.
-
-Now, you can use the \textbf{update stats [days=num]} console command to fill
-the JobHistory table with new Job records. If you want to be sure to take in
-account only \textbf{good jobs}, ie if one of your important job has failed but
-you have fixed the problem and restarted it on time, you probably want to
-delete the first \textit{bad} job record and keep only the successful one. For
-that simply let your staff do the job, and update JobHistory table after two or
-three days depending on your organization using the \textbf{[days=num]} option.
-
-These statistics records aren't used for restoring, but mainly for
-capacity planning, billings, etc.
-
-The Bweb interface provides a statistics module that can use this feature. You
-can also use tools like Talend or extract information by yourself.
-
-The \textbf{Statistics Retention = \lt{}time\gt{}} director directive defines
-the length of time that Bacula will keep statistics job records in the Catalog
-database after the Job End time. (In \texttt{JobHistory} table) When this time
-period expires, and if user runs \texttt{prune stats} command, Bacula will
-prune (remove) Job records that are older than the specified period.
-
-You can use the following Job resource in your nightly \textbf{BackupCatalog}
-job to maintain statistics.
-\begin{verbatim}
-Job {
- Name = BackupCatalog
- ...
- RunScript {
- Console = "update stats days=3"
- Console = "prune stats yes"
- RunsWhen = After
- RunsOnClient = no
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Backup Strategies}
-\label{StrategiesChapter}
-\index[general]{Strategies!Backup }
-\index[general]{Backup Strategies }
-
-Although Recycling and Backing Up to Disk Volume have been discussed in
-previous chapters, this chapter is meant to give you an overall view of
-possible backup strategies and to explain their advantages and disadvantages.
-\label{Simple}
-
-\section{Simple One Tape Backup}
-\index[general]{Backup!Simple One Tape }
-\index[general]{Simple One Tape Backup }
-
-Probably the simplest strategy is to back everything up to a single tape and
-insert a new (or recycled) tape when it fills and Bacula requests a new one.
-
-\subsection{Advantages}
-\index[general]{Advantages }
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The operator intervenes only when a tape change is needed. (once a
- month at my site).
-\item There is little chance of operator error because the tape is not
- changed daily.
-\item A minimum number of tapes will be needed for a full restore. Typically
- the best case will be one tape and worst two.
-\item You can easily arrange for the Full backup to occur a different night
- of the month for each system, thus load balancing and shortening the backup
- time.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\subsection{Disadvantages}
-\index[general]{Disadvantages }
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item If your site burns down, you will lose your current backups, and in my
- case about a month of data.
-\item After a tape fills and you have put in a blank tape, the backup will
- continue, and this will generally happen during working hours.
- \end{itemize}
-
-\subsection{Practical Details}
-\index[general]{Details!Practical }
-\index[general]{Practical Details }
-
-This system is very simple. When the tape fills and Bacula requests a new
-tape, you {\bf unmount} the tape from the Console program, insert a new tape
-and {\bf label} it. In most cases after the label, Bacula will automatically
-mount the tape and resume the backup. Otherwise, you simply {\bf mount} the
-tape.
-
-Using this strategy, one typically does a Full backup once a week followed by
-daily Incremental backups. To minimize the amount of data written to the tape,
-one can do a Full backup once a month on the first Sunday of the
-month, a Differential backup on the 2nd-5th Sunday of the month, and
-incremental backups the rest of the week.
-\label{Manual}
-
-\section{Manually Changing Tapes}
-\index[general]{Tapes!Manually Changing }
-\index[general]{Manually Changing Tapes }
-
-If you use the strategy presented above, Bacula will ask you to change the
-tape, and you will {\bf unmount} it and then remount it when you have inserted
-the new tape.
-
-If you do not wish to interact with Bacula to change each tape, there are
-several ways to get Bacula to release the tape:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item In your Storage daemon's Device resource, set
- {\bf AlwaysOpen = no}
- In this case, Bacula will release the tape after every job. If you run
- several jobs, the tape will be rewound and repositioned to the end at the
- beginning of every job. This is not very efficient, but does let you change
- the tape whenever you want.
-\item Use a {\bf RunAfterJob} statement to run a script after your last job.
- This could also be an {\bf Admin} job that runs after all your backup jobs.
- The script could be something like:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- #!/bin/sh
- /full-path/bconsole -c /full-path/bconsole.conf <<END_OF_DATA
- release storage=your-storage-name
- END_OF_DATA
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-In this example, you would have {\bf AlwaysOpen=yes}, but the {\bf release}
-command would tell Bacula to rewind the tape and on the next job assume the
-tape has changed. This strategy may not work on some systems, or on
-autochangers because Bacula will still keep the drive open.
-\item The final strategy is similar to the previous case except that you
- would use the unmount command to force Bacula to release the drive. Then you
- would eject the tape, and remount it as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- #!/bin/sh
- /full-path/bconsole -c /full-path/bconsole.conf <\<END_OF_DATA
- unmount storage=your-storage-name
- END_OF_DATA
- # the following is a shell command
- mt eject
- /full-path/bconsole -c /full-path/bconsole.conf <<END_OF_DATA
- mount storage=your-storage-name
- END_OF_DATA
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-\label{Daily}
-
-\section{Daily Tape Rotation}
-\index[general]{Rotation!Daily Tape }
-\index[general]{Daily Tape Rotation }
-
-This scheme is quite different from the one mentioned above in that a Full
-backup is done to a different tape every day of the week. Generally, the
-backup will cycle continuously through five or six tapes each week. Variations are
-to use a different tape each Friday, and possibly at the beginning of the
-month. Thus if backups are done Monday through Friday only, you need only five
-tapes, and by having two Friday tapes, you need a total of six tapes. Many sites
-run this way, or using modifications of it based on two week cycles or longer.
-
-
-\subsection{Advantages}
-\index[general]{Advantages }
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item All the data is stored on a single tape, so recoveries are simple and
- faster.
-\item Assuming the previous day's tape is taken offsite each day, a maximum
- of one days data will be lost if the site burns down.
- \end{itemize}
-
-\subsection{Disadvantages}
-\index[general]{Disadvantages }
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The tape must be changed every day requiring a lot of operator
- intervention.
-\item More errors will occur because of human mistakes.
-\item If the wrong tape is inadvertently mounted, the Backup for that day
- will not occur exposing the system to data loss.
-\item There is much more movement of the tape each day (rewinds) leading to
- shorter tape drive life time.
-\item Initial setup of Bacula to run in this mode is more complicated than
- the Single tape system described above.
-\item Depending on the number of systems you have and their data capacity, it
- may not be possible to do a Full backup every night for time reasons or
- reasons of tape capacity.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\subsection{Practical Details}
-\index[general]{Details!Practical }
-\index[general]{Practical Details }
-
-The simplest way to "force" Bacula to use a different tape each day is to
-define a different Pool for each day of the the week a backup is done. In
-addition, you will need to specify appropriate Job and File retention periods
-so that Bacula will relabel and overwrite the tape each week rather than
-appending to it. Nic Bellamy has supplied an actual working model of this
-which we include here.
-
-What is important is to create a different Pool for each day of the week, and
-on the {\bf run} statement in the Schedule, to specify which Pool is to be
-used. He has one Schedule that accomplishes this, and a second Schedule that
-does the same thing for the Catalog backup run each day after the main backup
-(Priorities were not available when this script was written). In addition, he
-uses a {\bf Max Start Delay} of 22 hours so that if the wrong tape is
-premounted by the operator, the job will be automatically canceled, and the
-backup cycle will re-synchronize the next day. He has named his Friday Pool
-{\bf WeeklyPool} because in that Pool, he wishes to have several tapes to be
-able to restore to a time older than one week.
-
-And finally, in his Storage daemon's Device resource, he has {\bf Automatic
-Mount = yes} and {\bf Always Open = No}. This is necessary for the tape
-ejection to work in his {\bf end\_of\_backup.sh} script below.
-
-For example, his bacula-dir.conf file looks like the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-
-# /etc/bacula/bacula-dir.conf
-#
-# Bacula Director Configuration file
-#
-Director {
- Name = ServerName
- DIRport = 9101
- QueryFile = "/etc/bacula/query.sql"
- WorkingDirectory = "/var/lib/bacula"
- PidDirectory = "/var/run"
- SubSysDirectory = "/var/lock/subsys"
- Maximum Concurrent Jobs = 1
- Password = "console-pass"
- Messages = Standard
-}
-#
-# Define the main nightly save backup job
-#
-Job {
- Name = "NightlySave"
- Type = Backup
- Client = ServerName
- FileSet = "Full Set"
- Schedule = "WeeklyCycle"
- Storage = Tape
- Messages = Standard
- Pool = Default
- Write Bootstrap = "/var/lib/bacula/NightlySave.bsr"
- Max Start Delay = 22h
-}
-# Backup the catalog database (after the nightly save)
-Job {
- Name = "BackupCatalog"
- Type = Backup
- Client = ServerName
- FileSet = "Catalog"
- Schedule = "WeeklyCycleAfterBackup"
- Storage = Tape
- Messages = Standard
- Pool = Default
- # This creates an ASCII copy of the catalog
- # WARNING!!! Passing the password via the command line is insecure.
- # see comments in make_catalog_backup for details.
- RunBeforeJob = "/usr/lib/bacula/make_catalog_backup -u bacula"
- # This deletes the copy of the catalog, and ejects the tape
- RunAfterJob = "/etc/bacula/end_of_backup.sh"
- Write Bootstrap = "/var/lib/bacula/BackupCatalog.bsr"
- Max Start Delay = 22h
-}
-# Standard Restore template, changed by Console program
-Job {
- Name = "RestoreFiles"
- Type = Restore
- Client = ServerName
- FileSet = "Full Set"
- Storage = Tape
- Messages = Standard
- Pool = Default
- Where = /tmp/bacula-restores
-}
-# List of files to be backed up
-FileSet {
- Name = "Full Set"
- Include = signature=MD5 {
- /
- /data
- }
- Exclude = { /proc /tmp /.journal }
-}
-#
-# When to do the backups
-#
-Schedule {
- Name = "WeeklyCycle"
- Run = Level=Full Pool=MondayPool Monday at 8:00pm
- Run = Level=Full Pool=TuesdayPool Tuesday at 8:00pm
- Run = Level=Full Pool=WednesdayPool Wednesday at 8:00pm
- Run = Level=Full Pool=ThursdayPool Thursday at 8:00pm
- Run = Level=Full Pool=WeeklyPool Friday at 8:00pm
-}
-# This does the catalog. It starts after the WeeklyCycle
-Schedule {
- Name = "WeeklyCycleAfterBackup"
- Run = Level=Full Pool=MondayPool Monday at 8:15pm
- Run = Level=Full Pool=TuesdayPool Tuesday at 8:15pm
- Run = Level=Full Pool=WednesdayPool Wednesday at 8:15pm
- Run = Level=Full Pool=ThursdayPool Thursday at 8:15pm
- Run = Level=Full Pool=WeeklyPool Friday at 8:15pm
-}
-# This is the backup of the catalog
-FileSet {
- Name = "Catalog"
- Include = signature=MD5 {
- /var/lib/bacula/bacula.sql
- }
-}
-# Client (File Services) to backup
-Client {
- Name = ServerName
- Address = dionysus
- FDPort = 9102
- Catalog = MyCatalog
- Password = "client-pass"
- File Retention = 30d
- Job Retention = 30d
- AutoPrune = yes
-}
-# Definition of file storage device
-Storage {
- Name = Tape
- Address = dionysus
- SDPort = 9103
- Password = "storage-pass"
- Device = Tandberg
- Media Type = MLR1
-}
-# Generic catalog service
-Catalog {
- Name = MyCatalog
- dbname = bacula; user = bacula; password = ""
-}
-# Reasonable message delivery -- send almost all to email address
-# and to the console
-Messages {
- Name = Standard
- mailcommand = "/usr/sbin/bsmtp -h localhost -f \"\(Bacula\) %r\"
- -s \"Bacula: %t %e of %c %l\" %r"
- operatorcommand = "/usr/sbin/bsmtp -h localhost -f \"\(Bacula\) %r\"
- -s \"Bacula: Intervention needed for %j\" %r"
- mail = root@localhost = all, !skipped
- operator = root@localhost = mount
- console = all, !skipped, !saved
- append = "/var/lib/bacula/log" = all, !skipped
-}
-
-# Pool definitions
-#
-# Default Pool for jobs, but will hold no actual volumes
-Pool {
- Name = Default
- Pool Type = Backup
-}
-Pool {
- Name = MondayPool
- Pool Type = Backup
- Recycle = yes
- AutoPrune = yes
- Volume Retention = 6d
- Maximum Volume Jobs = 2
-}
-Pool {
- Name = TuesdayPool
- Pool Type = Backup
- Recycle = yes
- AutoPrune = yes
- Volume Retention = 6d
- Maximum Volume Jobs = 2
-}
-Pool {
- Name = WednesdayPool
- Pool Type = Backup
- Recycle = yes
- AutoPrune = yes
- Volume Retention = 6d
- Maximum Volume Jobs = 2
-}
-Pool {
- Name = ThursdayPool
- Pool Type = Backup
- Recycle = yes
- AutoPrune = yes
- Volume Retention = 6d
- Maximum Volume Jobs = 2
-}
-Pool {
- Name = WeeklyPool
- Pool Type = Backup
- Recycle = yes
- AutoPrune = yes
- Volume Retention = 12d
- Maximum Volume Jobs = 2
-}
-# EOF
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Note, the mailcommand and operatorcommand should be on a single line each.
-They were split to preserve the proper page width. In order to get Bacula to
-release the tape after the nightly backup, he uses a {\bf RunAfterJob} script
-that deletes the ASCII copy of the database back and then rewinds and ejects
-the tape. The following is a copy of {\bf end\_of\_backup.sh}
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#! /bin/sh
-/usr/lib/bacula/delete_catalog_backup
-mt rewind
-mt eject
-exit 0
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Finally, if you list his Volumes, you get something like the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-*list media
-Using default Catalog name=MyCatalog DB=bacula
-Pool: WeeklyPool
-+-----+-----------+-------+--------+-----------+-----------------+-------+------+
-| MeId| VolumeName| MedTyp| VolStat| VolBytes | LastWritten | VolRet| Recyc|
-+-----+-----------+-------+--------+-----------+-----------------+-------+------+
-| 5 | Friday_1 | MLR1 | Used | 2157171998| 2003-07-11 20:20| 103680| 1 |
-| 6 | Friday_2 | MLR1 | Append | 0 | 0 | 103680| 1 |
-+-----+-----------+-------+--------+-----------+-----------------+-------+------+
-Pool: MondayPool
-+-----+-----------+-------+--------+-----------+-----------------+-------+------+
-| MeId| VolumeName| MedTyp| VolStat| VolBytes | LastWritten | VolRet| Recyc|
-+-----+-----------+-------+--------+-----------+-----------------+-------+------+
-| 2 | Monday | MLR1 | Used | 2260942092| 2003-07-14 20:20| 518400| 1 |
-+-----+-----------+-------+--------+-----------+-----------------+-------+------+
-Pool: TuesdayPool
-+-----+-----------+-------+--------+-----------+-----------------+-------+------+
-| MeId| VolumeName| MedTyp| VolStat| VolBytes | LastWritten | VolRet| Recyc|
-+-----+-----------+-------+--------+-----------+-----------------+-------+------+
-| 3 | Tuesday | MLR1 | Used | 2268180300| 2003-07-15 20:20| 518400| 1 |
-+-----+-----------+-------+--------+-----------+-----------------+-------+------+
-Pool: WednesdayPool
-+-----+-----------+-------+--------+-----------+-----------------+-------+------+
-| MeId| VolumeName| MedTyp| VolStat| VolBytes | LastWritten | VolRet| Recyc|
-+-----+-----------+-------+--------+-----------+-----------------+-------+------+
-| 4 | Wednesday | MLR1 | Used | 2138871127| 2003-07-09 20:2 | 518400| 1 |
-+-----+-----------+-------+--------+-----------+-----------------+-------+------+
-Pool: ThursdayPool
-+-----+-----------+-------+--------+-----------+-----------------+-------+------+
-| MeId| VolumeName| MedTyp| VolStat| VolBytes | LastWritten | VolRet| Recyc|
-+-----+-----------+-------+--------+-----------+-----------------+-------+------+
-| 1 | Thursday | MLR1 | Used | 2146276461| 2003-07-10 20:50| 518400| 1 |
-+-----+-----------+-------+--------+-----------+-----------------+-------+------+
-Pool: Default
-No results to list.
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Note, I have truncated a number of the columns so that the information fits on
-the width of a page.
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Supported Autochangers}
-\label{Models}
-\index[general]{Supported Autochanger Models}
-\index[general]{Autochangers!Supported}
-
-I hesitate to call these "supported" autochangers because the only
-autochangers that I have in my possession and am able to test are the HP
-SureStore DAT40X6 and the Overland PowerLoader LTO-2. All the other
-autochangers have been reported to work by Bacula users. Note, in the
-Capacity/Slot column below, I quote the Compressed capacity per tape (or
-Slot).
-
-Since on most systems (other than FreeBSD), Bacula uses {\bf mtx}
-through the {\bf mtx-changer} script, in principle, if {\bf mtx}
-will operate your changer correctly, then it is just a question
-of adapting the {\bf mtx-changer} script (or selecting one
-already adapted) for proper interfacing. You can find a list of
-autochangers supported by {\bf mtx} at the following link:
-\elink{http://mtx.opensource-sw.net/compatibility.php}
-{\url{http://mtx.opensource-sw.net/compatibility.php}}.
-The home page for the {\bf mtx} project can be found at:
-\elink{http://mtx.opensource-sw.net/}{\url{http://mtx.opensource-sw.net/}}.
-
-
-\addcontentsline{lot}{table}{Autochangers Known to Work with Bacula}
-\begin{longtable}{|p{0.6in}|p{0.8in}|p{1.9in}|p{0.8in}|p{0.5in}|p{0.75in}|}
- \hline
-\multicolumn{1}{|c| }{\bf OS } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{\bf Man. } &
-\multicolumn{1}{c| }{\bf Media } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{\bf Model } &
-\multicolumn{1}{c| }{\bf Slots } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{\bf Cap/Slot } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {Adic } & {DDS-3} & {Adic 1200G } & {12} & {-} \\
- \hline {Linux } & {Adic } & {DLT} & {FastStore 4000 } & {7} & {20GB} \\
- \hline {Linux } & {Adic } & {LTO-1/2, SDLT 320 } & {Adic Scalar 24 } & {24} & {100GB } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {Adic } & {LTO-2 } & {Adic FastStor 2, Sun Storedge L8 } & {8} & {200GB } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {BDT } & {AIT } & {BDT ThinStor } & {?} & {200GB } \\
- \hline {- } & {CA-VM } & {?? } & {Tape } & {??} & {?? } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {Dell} & {DLT VI,LTO-2,LTO3} & {PowerVault 122T/132T/136T } & {-} & {100GB } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {Dell} & {LTO-2} & {PowerVault 124T } & {-} & {200GB } \\
- \hline {- } & {DFSMS } & {?? } & {VM RMM} & {-} & {?? } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {Exabyte } & {VXA2 } & {VXA PacketLoader 1x10 2U } & {10} & {80/160GB } \\
- \hline {- } & {Exabyte } & {LTO } & {Magnum 1x7 LTO Tape Auotloader } & {7} & {200/400GB } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {Exabyte } & {AIT-2 } & {215A } & {15 (2 drives)} & {50GB } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {HP } & {DDS-4 } & {SureStore DAT-40X6 } & {6 } & {40GB } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {HP } & {Ultrium-2/LTO } & {MSL 6000/ 60030/ 5052 } & {28 } & {200/400GB } \\
- \hline {- } & {HP } & {DLT } & {A4853 DLT } & {30} & {40/70GB } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {HP (Compaq) } & {DLT VI } & {Compaq TL-895 } & {96+4 import export} & {35/70GB } \\
- \hline {z/VM } & {IBM } & {?? } & {IBM Tape Manager } & {-} & {?? } \\
- \hline {z/VM } & {IBM } & {?? } & {native tape } & {-} & {?? } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {IBM } & {LTO } & {IBM 3581 Ultrium Tape Loader } & {7} & {200/400GB } \\
- \hline {FreeBSD 5.4} & {IBM } & {DLT} & {IBM 3502-R14 -- rebranded ATL L-500} & {14} & {35/70GB } \\
- \hline {Linux} & {IBM } & {???} & {IBM TotalStorage 3582L23} & {??} & {?? } \\
- \hline {Debian} & {Overland } & {LTO } & {Overland LoaderXpress LTO/DLT8000 } & {10-19} & {40-100GB } \\
- \hline {Fedora} & {Overland } & {LTO } & {Overland PowerLoader LTO-2 } & {10-19} & {200/400GB } \\
- \hline {FreeBSD 5.4-Stable} & {Overland} & {LTO-2} & {Overland Powerloader tape} & {17} & {100GB } \\
- \hline {- } & {Overland} & {LTO } & {Overland Neo2000 LTO } & {26-30} & {100GB } \\
- \hline {Linux} & {Quantum } & {DLT-S4} & {Superloader 3} & {16} & {800/1600GB } \\
- \hline {Linux} & {Quantum } & {LTO-2} & {Superloader 3} & {16} & {200/400GB } \\
- \hline {Linux} & {Quantum } & {LTO-3 } & {PX502 } & {??} & {?? } \\
- \hline {FreeBSD 4.9 } & {QUALSTAR TLS-4210 (Qualstar) } & {AIT1: 36GB, AIT2: 50GB all
-uncomp } & {QUALSTAR TLS-4210 } & {12} & {AIT1: 36GB, AIT2: 50GB all uncomp }\\
- \hline {Linux } & {Skydata } & {DLT } & {ATL-L200 } & {8} & {40/80 } \\
- \hline {- } & {Sony } & {DDS-4 } & {TSL-11000 } & {8} & {40GB } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {Sony } & {AIT-2} & {LIB-304(SDX-500C) } & {?} & {200GB } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {Sony } & {AIT-3} & {LIB-D81) } & {?} & {200GB } \\
- \hline {FreeBSD 4.9-STABLE } & {Sony } & {AIT-1 } & {TSL-SA300C } & {4} & {45/70GB }\\
- \hline {- } & {Storagetek } & {DLT } & {Timberwolf DLT } & {6} & {40/70 } \\
- \hline {- } & {Storagetek } & {?? } & {ACSLS } & {??} & {?? } \\
- \hline {Solaris } & {Sun } & {4mm DLT } & {Sun Desktop Archive Python 29279 } & {4} & {20GB } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {Tandberg } & {DLT VI } & {VS 640 } & {8?} & {35/70GB } \\
- \hline {Linux 2.6.x } & {Tandberg Data } & {SLR100 } & {SLR100 Autoloader } & {8} & {50/100GB }\\
-\hline
-
-\end{longtable}
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Supported Tape Drives}
-\label{SupportedDrives}
-\index[general]{Drives!Supported Tape }
-\index[general]{Supported Tape Drives }
-
-Bacula uses standard operating system calls (read, write, ioctl) to
-interface to tape drives. As a consequence, it relies on having a
-correctly written OS tape driver. Bacula is known to work perfectly well
-with SCSI tape drivers on FreeBSD, Linux, Solaris, and Windows machines,
-and it may work on other *nix machines, but we have not tested it.
-Recently there are many new drives that use IDE, ATAPI, or
-SATA interfaces rather than SCSI. On Linux the OnStream drive, which uses
-the OSST driver is one such
-example, and it is known to work with Bacula. In addition a number of such
-tape drives (i.e. OS drivers) seem to work on Windows systems. However,
-non-SCSI tape drives (other than the OnStream) that use ide-scis, ide-tape,
-or other non-scsi drivers do not function correctly with Bacula (or any
-other demanding tape application) as of today (April 2007). If you
-have purchased a non-SCSI tape drive for use with Bacula on Linux, there
-is a good chance that it will not work. We are working with the kernel
-developers to rectify this situation, but it will not be resolved in the
-near future.
-
-Even if your drive is on the list below, please check the
-\ilink{Tape Testing Chapter}{btape1} of this manual for
-procedures that you can use to verify if your tape drive will work with
-Bacula. If your drive is in fixed block mode, it may appear to work with
-Bacula until you attempt to do a restore and Bacula wants to position the
-tape. You can be sure only by following the procedures suggested above and
-testing.
-
-It is very difficult to supply a list of supported tape drives, or drives that
-are known to work with Bacula because of limited feedback (so if you use
-Bacula on a different drive, please let us know). Based on user feedback, the
-following drives are known to work with Bacula. A dash in a column means
-unknown:
-
-\addcontentsline{lot}{table}{Supported Tape Drives}
-\begin{longtable}{|p{2.0in}|l|l|p{2.5in}|l|}
- \hline
-\multicolumn{1}{|c| }{\bf OS } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{\bf Man. } &
-\multicolumn{1}{c| }{\bf Media } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{\bf Model } &
-\multicolumn{1}{c| }{\bf Capacity } \\
- \hline {- } & {ADIC } & {DLT } & {Adic Scalar 100 DLT } & {100GB } \\
- \hline {- } & {ADIC } & {DLT } & {Adic Fastor 22 DLT } & {- } \\
- \hline {FreeBSD 5.4-RELEASE-p1 amd64 } & {Certance} & {LTO } & {AdicCertance CL400 LTO Ultrium 2 } & {200GB } \\
- \hline {- } & {- } & {DDS } & {Compaq DDS 2,3,4 } & {- } \\
- \hline {SuSE 8.1 Pro} & {Compaq} & {AIT } & {Compaq AIT 35 LVD } & {35/70GB } \\
- \hline {- } & {Exabyte } & {- } & {Exabyte drives less than 10 years old } & {- } \\
- \hline {- } & {Exabyte } & {- } & {Exabyte VXA drives } & {- } \\
- \hline {- } & {HP } & {Travan 4 } & {Colorado T4000S } & {- } \\
- \hline {- } & {HP } & {DLT } & {HP DLT drives } & {- } \\
- \hline {- } & {HP } & {LTO } & {HP LTO Ultrium drives } & {- } \\
- \hline {- } & {IBM} & {??} & {3480, 3480XL, 3490, 3490E, 3580 and 3590 drives} & {- } \\
- \hline {FreeBSD 4.10 RELEASE } & {HP } & {DAT } & {HP StorageWorks DAT72i } & {- } \\
- \hline {- } & {Overland } & {LTO } & {LoaderXpress LTO } & {- } \\
- \hline {- } & {Overland } & {- } & {Neo2000 } & {- } \\
- \hline {- } & {OnStream } & {- } & {OnStream drives (see below) } & {- } \\
- \hline {FreeBSD 4.11-Release} & {Quantum } & {SDLT } & {SDLT320 } & {160/320GB } \\
- \hline {- } & {Quantum } & {DLT } & {DLT-8000 } & {40/80GB } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {Seagate } & {DDS-4 } & {Scorpio 40 } & {20/40GB } \\
- \hline {FreeBSD 4.9 STABLE } & {Seagate } & {DDS-4 } & {STA2401LW } & {20/40GB } \\
- \hline {FreeBSD 5.2.1 pthreads patched RELEASE } & {Seagate } & {AIT-1 } & {STA1701W} & {35/70GB } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {Sony } & {DDS-2,3,4 } & {- } & {4-40GB } \\
- \hline {Linux } & {Tandberg } & {- } & {Tandbert MLR3 } & {- } \\
- \hline {FreeBSD } & {Tandberg } & {- } & {Tandberg SLR6 } & {- } \\
- \hline {Solaris } & {Tandberg } & {- } & {Tandberg SLR75 } & {- } \\
- \hline
-
-\end{longtable}
-
-There is a list of \ilink{supported autochangers}{Models} in the Supported
-Autochangers chapter of this document, where you will find other tape drives
-that work with Bacula.
-
-\section{Unsupported Tape Drives}
-\label{UnSupportedDrives}
-\index[general]{Unsupported Tape Drives }
-\index[general]{Drives!Unsupported Tape }
-
-Previously OnStream IDE-SCSI tape drives did not work with Bacula. As of
-Bacula version 1.33 and the osst kernel driver version 0.9.14 or later, they
-now work. Please see the testing chapter as you must set a fixed block size.
-
-QIC tapes are known to have a number of particularities (fixed block size, and
-one EOF rather than two to terminate the tape). As a consequence, you will
-need to take a lot of care in configuring them to make them work correctly
-with Bacula.
-
-\section{FreeBSD Users Be Aware!!!}
-\index[general]{FreeBSD Users Be Aware }
-\index[general]{Aware!FreeBSD Users Be }
-
-Unless you have patched the pthreads library on FreeBSD 4.11 systems, you will
-lose data when Bacula spans tapes. This is because the unpatched pthreads
-library fails to return a warning status to Bacula that the end of the tape is
-near. This problem is fixed in FreeBSD systems released after 4.11. Please see the
-\ilink{Tape Testing Chapter}{FreeBSDTapes} of this manual for
-{\bf important} information on how to configure your tape drive for
-compatibility with Bacula.
-
-\section{Supported Autochangers}
-\index[general]{Autochangers!Supported }
-\index[general]{Supported Autochangers }
-
-For information on supported autochangers, please see the
-\ilink{Autochangers Known to Work with Bacula}{Models}
-section of the Supported Autochangers chapter of this manual.
-
-\section{Tape Specifications}
-\index[general]{Specifications!Tape}
-\index[general]{Tape Specifications}
-If you want to know what tape drive to buy that will work with Bacula,
-we really cannot tell you. However, we can say that if you are going
-to buy a drive, you should try to avoid DDS drives. The technology is
-rather old and DDS tape drives need frequent cleaning. DLT drives are
-generally much better (newer technology) and do not need frequent
-cleaning.
-
-Below, you will find a table of DLT and LTO tape specifications that will
-give you some idea of the capacity and speed of modern tapes. The
-capacities that are listed are the native tape capacity without compression.
-All modern drives have hardware compression, and manufacturers often list
-compressed capacity using a compression ration of 2:1. The actual compression
-ratio will depend mostly on the data you have to backup, but I find that
-1.5:1 is a much more reasonable number (i.e. multiply the value shown in
-the table by 1.5 to get a rough average of what you will probably see).
-The transfer rates are rounded to the nearest GB/hr. All values are provided
-by various manufacturers.
-
-The Media Type is what is designated by the manufacturers and you are not
-required to use (but you may) the same name in your Bacula conf resources.
-
-
-\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c}
-Media Type & Drive Type & Media Capacity & Transfer Rate \\ \hline
-DDS-1 & DAT & 2 GB & ?? GB/hr \\ \hline
-DDS-2 & DAT & 4 GB & ?? GB/hr \\ \hline
-DDS-3 & DAT & 12 GB & 5.4 GB/hr \\ \hline
-Travan 40 & Travan & 20 GB & ?? GB/hr \\ \hline
-DDS-4 & DAT & 20 GB & 11 GB/hr \\ \hline
-VXA-1 & Exabyte & 33 GB & 11 GB/hr \\ \hline
-DAT-72 & DAT & 36 GB & 13 GB/hr \\ \hline
-DLT IV & DLT8000 & 40 GB & 22 GB/hr \\ \hline
-VXA-2 & Exabyte & 80 GB & 22 GB/hr \\ \hline
-Half-high Ultrium 1 & LTO 1 & 100 GB & 27 GB/hr \\ \hline
-Ultrium 1 & LTO 1 & 100 GB & 54 GB/hr \\ \hline
-Super DLT 1 & SDLT 220 & 110 GB & 40 GB/hr \\ \hline
-VXA-3 & Exabyte & 160 GB & 43 GB/hr \\ \hline
-Super DLT I & SDLT 320 & 160 GB & 58 GB/hr \\ \hline
-Ultrium 2 & LTO 2 & 200 GB & 108 GB/hr \\ \hline
-Super DLT II & SDLT 600 & 300 GB & 127 GB/hr \\ \hline
-VXA-4 & Exabyte & 320 GB & 86 GB/hr \\ \hline
-Ultrium 3 & LTO 3 & 400 GB & 216 GB/hr \\ \hline
-\end{tabular}
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Supported Operating Systems}
-\label{SupportedOSes}
-\index[general]{Systems!Supported Operating }
-\index[general]{Supported Operating Systems }
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item[X] Fully supported
-\item[$\star$] The are reported to work in many cases. However they are NOT
- supported by the bacula's project.
-\end{itemize}
-
-
-\begin{tabular}[h]{|l|l|c|c|c|}
- \hline
- Operating Systems & Version & Client \small{Daemon} & Director \small{Daemon} & Storage \small{Daemon} \\
- \hline
- \hline
- GNU/Linux
- & All & X & X & X \\
- \hline
- FreeBSD & $\geq$ 5.0 & X & X & X
- \\
- \hline
- Solaris & $\geq$ 8 & X & X & X \\
- \hline
- OpenSolaris & ~ & X & X & X \\
- \hline
- \hline
- MS Windows 32bit& Win98/Me & X & ~ & ~ \\
- \hline
- ~ & WinNT/2K & X & $\star$ & $\star$ \\
- \hline
- ~ & XP & X & $\star$ & $\star$ \\
- ~ & 2008/Vista & X & $\star$ & $\star$ \\
- MS Windows 64bit& 2008/Vista & X & ~ & ~ \\
- \hline
- \hline
- MacOS X/Darwin & ~ & X & ~ & ~ \\
- \hline
- OpenBSD & ~ & X & $\star$ & ~ \\
- \hline
- NetBSD & ~ & X & $\star$ & ~ \\
- \hline
- Irix & ~ & $\star$ & ~ & ~ \\
- \hline
- True64 & ~ & $\star$ & ~ & ~ \\
- \hline
- AIX & $\geq$ 4.3 & $\star$ & ~ & ~ \\
- \hline
- BSDI & ~ & $\star$ & ~ & ~ \\
- \hline
- HPUX & ~ & $\star$ & ~ & ~ \\
- \hline
-\end{tabular}
-
-\section*{Important notes}
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item By GNU/Linux, we mean 32/64bit Gentoo, Red Hat, Fedora, Mandriva,
- Debian, OpenSuSE, Ubuntu, Kubuntu, \dots
-
-\item For FreeBSD older than version 5.0,
- please see some {\bf important} considerations in the
- \ilink{ Tape Modes on FreeBSD}{FreeBSDTapes} section of the
- Tape Testing chapter of this manual.
-
-\item MS Windows Director and Storage daemon are available
- in the binary Client installer
-
-\item For MacOSX see \elink{http://fink.sourceforge.net/ for obtaining the packages}{http://fink.sourceforge.net/}
-\end{itemize}
-
-See the Porting chapter of the Bacula Developer's Guide for information on
-porting to other systems.
-
-If you have a older Red Hat Linux system running the 2.4.x kernel and you have
-the directory {\bf /lib/tls} installed on your system (normally by default),
-bacula will {\bf NOT} run. This is the new pthreads library and it is
-defective. You must remove this directory prior to running Bacula, or you can
-simply change the name to {\bf /lib/tls-broken}) then you must reboot your
-machine (one of the few times Linux must be rebooted). If you are not able to
-remove/rename /lib/tls, an alternative is to set the environment variable
-"LD\_ASSUME\_KERNEL=2.4.19" prior to executing Bacula. For this option, you do
-not need to reboot, and all programs other than Bacula will continue to use
-/lib/tls.
-The above mentioned {\bf /lib/tls} problem does not occur with Linux 2.6 kernels.
-
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Thanks}
-\label{ThanksChapter}
-\index[general]{Thanks }
-I thank everyone who has helped this project. Unfortunately, I cannot
-thank everyone (bad memory). However, the AUTHORS file in the main source
-code directory should include the names of all persons who have contributed
-to the Bacula project. Just the same, I would like to include thanks below
-to special contributors as well as to the major contributors to the current
-release.
-
-Thanks to Richard Stallman for starting the Free Software movement and for
-bringing us gcc and all the other GNU tools as well as the GPL license.
-
-Thanks to Linus Torvalds for bringing us Linux.
-
-Thanks to all the Free Software programmers. Without being able to peek at
-your code, and in some cases, take parts of it, this project would have been
-much more difficult.
-
-Thanks to John Walker for suggesting this project, giving it a name,
-contributing software he has written, and for his programming efforts on
-Bacula as well as having acted as a constant sounding board and source of
-ideas.
-
-Thanks to the apcupsd project where I started my Free Software efforts, and
-from which I was able to borrow some ideas and code that I had written.
-
-Special thanks to D. Scott Barninger for writing the bacula RPM spec file,
-building all the RPM files and loading them onto Source Forge. This has been a
-tremendous help.
-
-Many thanks to Karl Cunningham for converting the manual from html format to
-LaTeX. It was a major effort flawlessly done that will benefit the Bacula
-users for many years to come. Thanks Karl.
-
-Thanks to Dan Langille for the {\bf incredible} amount of testing he did on
-FreeBSD. His perseverance is truly remarkable. Thanks also for the many
-contributions he has made to improve Bacula (pthreads patch for FreeBSD,
-improved start/stop script and addition of Bacula userid and group, stunnel,
-...), his continuing support of Bacula users. He also wrote the PostgreSQL
-driver for Bacula and has been a big help in correcting the SQL.
-
-Thanks to multiple other Bacula Packagers who make and release packages for
-different platforms for Bacula.
-
-Thanks to Christopher Hull for developing the native Win32 Bacula emulation
-code and for contributing it to the Bacula project.
-
-Thanks to Robert Nelson for bringing our Win32 implementation up to par
-with all the same features that exist in the Unix/Linux versions. In
-addition, he has ported the Director and Storage daemon to Win32!
-
-Thanks to Thorsten Engel for his excellent knowledge of Win32 systems, and
-for making the Win32 File daemon Unicode compatible, as well as making
-the Win32 File daemon interface to Microsoft's Volume Shadow Copy (VSS).
-These two are big pluses for Bacula!
-
-Thanks to Landon Fuller for writing both the communications and the
-data encryption code for Bacula.
-
-Thanks to Arno Lehmann for his excellent and infatigable help and advice
-to users.
-
-Thanks to all the Bacula users, especially those of you who have contributed
-ideas, bug reports, patches, and new features.
-
-Bacula can be enabled with data encryption and/or communications
-encryption. If this is the case, you will be including OpenSSL code that
-that contains cryptographic software written by Eric Young
-(eay@cryptsoft.com) and also software written by Tim Hudson
-(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
-
-The Bat (Bacula Administration Tool) graphs are based in part on the work
-of the Qwt project (http://qwt.sf.net).
-
-The original variable expansion code used in the LabelFormat comes from the
-Open Source Software Project (www.ossp.org). It has been adapted and extended
-for use in Bacula. This code is now deprecated.
-
-There have been numerous people over the years who have contributed ideas,
-code, and help to the Bacula project. The file AUTHORS in the main source
-release file contains a list of contributors. For all those who I have
-left out, please send me a reminder, and in any case, thanks for your
-contribution.
-
-Thanks to the Free Software Foundation Europe e.V. for assuming the
-responsibilities of protecting the Bacula copyright.
-
-% TODO: remove this from the book?
-\section*{Copyrights and Trademarks}
-\index[general]{Trademarks!Copyrights and }
-\index[general]{Copyrights and Trademarks }
-
-Certain words and/or products are Copyrighted or Trademarked such as Windows
-(by Microsoft). Since they are numerous, and we are not necessarily aware of
-the details of each, we don't try to list them here. However, we acknowledge
-all such Copyrights and Trademarks, and if any copyright or trademark holder
-wishes a specific acknowledgment, notify us, and we will be happy to add it
-where appropriate.
+++ /dev/null
-
-\chapter{Bacula TLS -- Communications Encryption}
-\label{CommEncryption}
-\index[general]{TLS -- Communications Encryption}
-\index[general]{Communications Encryption}
-\index[general]{Encryption!Communications}
-\index[general]{Encryption!Transport}
-\index[general]{Transport Encryption}
-\index[general]{TLS}
-
-Bacula TLS (Transport Layer Security) is built-in network
-encryption code to provide secure network transport similar to
-that offered by {\bf stunnel} or {\bf ssh}. The data written to
-Volumes by the Storage daemon is not encrypted by this code.
-For data encryption, please see the \ilink{Data Encryption
-Chapter}{DataEncryption} of this manual.
-
-The Bacula encryption implementations were written by Landon Fuller.
-
-Supported features of this code include:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Client/Server TLS Requirement Negotiation
-\item TLSv1 Connections with Server and Client Certificate
-Validation
-\item Forward Secrecy Support via Diffie-Hellman Ephemeral Keying
-\end{itemize}
-
-This document will refer to both "server" and "client" contexts. These
-terms refer to the accepting and initiating peer, respectively.
-
-Diffie-Hellman anonymous ciphers are not supported by this code. The
-use of DH anonymous ciphers increases the code complexity and places
-explicit trust upon the two-way CRAM-MD5 implementation. CRAM-MD5 is
-subject to known plaintext attacks, and it should be considered
-considerably less secure than PKI certificate-based authentication.
-
-Appropriate autoconf macros have been added to detect and use OpenSSL
-if enabled on the {\bf ./configure} line with {\bf \verb?--?with-openssl}
-
-\section{TLS Configuration Directives}
-Additional configuration directives have been added to all the daemons
-(Director, File daemon, and Storage daemon) as well as the various
-different Console programs.
-These new directives are defined as follows:
-
-\begin{description}
-\item [TLS Enable = \lt{}yes|no\gt{}]
-Enable TLS support. If TLS is not enabled, none of the other TLS directives
-have any effect. In other words, even if you set {\bf TLS Require = yes}
-you need to have TLS enabled or TLS will not be used.
-
-\item [TLS Require = \lt{}yes|no\gt{}]
-Require TLS connections. This directive is ignored unless {\bf TLS Enable}
-is set to {\bf yes}. If TLS is not required, and TLS is enabled, then
-Bacula will connect with other daemons either with or without TLS depending
-on what the other daemon requests. If TLS is enabled and TLS is required,
-then Bacula will refuse any connection that does not use TLS.
-
-\item [TLS Certificate = \lt{}Filename\gt{}]
-The full path and filename of a PEM encoded TLS certificate. It can be
-used as either a client or server certificate. PEM stands for Privacy
-Enhanced Mail, but in this context refers to how the certificates are
-encoded. It is used because PEM files are base64 encoded and hence ASCII
-text based rather than binary. They may also contain encrypted
-information.
-
-\item [TLS Key = \lt{}Filename\gt{}]
-The full path and filename of a PEM encoded TLS private key. It must
-correspond to the TLS certificate.
-
-\item [TLS Verify Peer = \lt{}yes|no\gt{}]
-Verify peer certificate. Instructs server to request and verify the
-client's x509 certificate. Any client certificate signed by a known-CA
-will be accepted unless the TLS Allowed CN configuration directive is used,
-in which case the client certificate must correspond to the Allowed
-Common Name specified. This directive is valid only for a server
-and not in a client context.
-
-\item [TLS Allowed CN = \lt{}string list\gt{}]
-Common name attribute of allowed peer certificates. If this directive is
-specified, all server certificates will be verified against this list. This
-can be used to ensure that only the CA-approved Director may connect.
-This directive may be specified more than once.
-
-\item [TLS CA Certificate File = \lt{}Filename\gt{}]
-The full path and filename specifying a
-PEM encoded TLS CA certificate(s). Multiple certificates are
-permitted in the file. One of \emph{TLS CA Certificate File} or \emph{TLS
-CA Certificate Dir} are required in a server context if \emph{TLS
-Verify Peer} (see above) is also specified, and are always required in a client
-context.
-
-\item [TLS CA Certificate Dir = \lt{}Directory\gt{}]
-Full path to TLS CA certificate directory. In the current implementation,
-certificates must be stored PEM encoded with OpenSSL-compatible hashes,
-which is the subject name's hash and an extension of {bf .0}.
-One of \emph{TLS CA Certificate File} or \emph{TLS CA Certificate Dir} are
-required in a server context if \emph{TLS Verify Peer} is also specified,
-and are always required in a client context.
-
-\item [TLS DH File = \lt{}Directory\gt{}]
-Path to PEM encoded Diffie-Hellman parameter file. If this directive is
-specified, DH key exchange will be used for the ephemeral keying, allowing
-for forward secrecy of communications. DH key exchange adds an additional
-level of security because the key used for encryption/decryption by the
-server and the client is computed on each end and thus is never passed over
-the network if Diffie-Hellman key exchange is used. Even if DH key
-exchange is not used, the encryption/decryption key is always passed
-encrypted. This directive is only valid within a server context.
-
-To generate the parameter file, you
-may use openssl:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- openssl dhparam -out dh1024.pem -5 1024
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\end{description}
-
-\section{Creating a Self-signed Certificate}
-\index[general]{Creating a Self-signed Certificate }
-\index[general]{Certificate!Creating a Self-signed }
-
-You may create a self-signed certificate for use with the Bacula TLS that
-will permit you to make it function, but will not allow certificate
-validation. The .pem file containing both the certificate and the key
-valid for ten years can be made with the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- openssl req -new -x509 -nodes -out bacula.pem -keyout bacula.pem -days 3650
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The above script will ask you a number of questions. You may simply answer
-each of them by entering a return, or if you wish you may enter your own data.
-
-Note, however, that self-signed certificates will only work for the
-outgoing end of connections. For example, in the case of the Director
-making a connection to a File Daemon, the File Daemon may be configured to
-allow self-signed certificates, but the certificate used by the
-Director must be signed by a certificate that is explicitly trusted on the
-File Daemon end.
-
-This is necessary to prevent ``man in the middle'' attacks from tools such
-as \elink{ettercap}{http://ettercap.sourceforge.net/}. Essentially, if the
-Director does not verify that it is talking to a trusted remote endpoint,
-it can be tricked into talking to a malicious 3rd party who is relaying and
-capturing all traffic by presenting its own certificates to the Director
-and File Daemons. The only way to prevent this is by using trusted
-certificates, so that the man in the middle is incapable of spoofing the
-connection using his own.
-
-To get a trusted certificate (CA or Certificate Authority signed
-certificate), you will either need to purchase certificates signed by a
-commercial CA or find a friend that has setup his own CA or become a CA
-yourself, and thus you can sign all your own certificates. The book
-OpenSSL by John Viega, Matt Mesier \& Pravir Chandra from O'Reilly explains
-how to do it, or you can read the documentation provided in the Open-source
-PKI Book project at Source Forge: \elink{
-http://ospkibook.sourceforge.net/docs/OSPKI-2.4.7/OSPKI-html/ospki-book.htm}
-{http://ospkibook.sourceforge.net/docs/OSPKI-2.4.7/OSPKI-html/ospki-book.htm}.
-Note, this link may change.
-
-The program TinyCA has a very nice Graphical User Interface
-that allows you to easily setup and maintain your own CA.
-TinyCA can be found at
-\elink{http://tinyca.sm-zone.net/}{http://tinyca.sm-zone.net/}.
-
-
-\section{Getting a CA Signed Certificate}
-\index[general]{Certificate!Getting a CA Signed }
-\index[general]{Getting a CA Signed Certificate }
-
-The process of getting a certificate that is signed by a CA is quite a bit
-more complicated. You can purchase one from quite a number of PKI vendors, but
-that is not at all necessary for use with Bacula. To get a CA signed
-certificate, you will either need to find a friend that has setup his own CA
-or to become a CA yourself, and thus you can sign all your own certificates.
-The book OpenSSL by John Viega, Matt Mesier \& Pravir Chandra from O'Reilly
-explains how to do it, or you can read the documentation provided in the
-Open-source PKI Book project at Source Forge:
-\elink{
-http://ospkibook.sourceforge.net/docs/OSPKI-2.4.7/OSPKI-html/ospki-book.htm}
-{http://ospkibook.sourceforge.net/docs/OSPKI-2.4.7/OSPKI-html/ospki-book.htm}.
-Note, this link may change.
-
-\section{Example TLS Configuration Files}
-\index[general]{Example!TLS Configuration Files}
-\index[general]{TLS Configuration Files}
-
-Landon has supplied us with the TLS portions of his configuration
-files, which should help you setting up your own. Note, this example
-shows the directives necessary for a Director to Storage daemon session.
-The technique is the same between the Director and the Client and
-for bconsole to the Director.
-
-{\bf bacula-dir.conf}
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Director { # define myself
- Name = backup1-dir
- ...
- TLS Enable = yes
- TLS Require = yes
- TLS Verify Peer = yes
- TLS Allowed CN = "bacula@backup1.example.com"
- TLS Allowed CN = "administrator@example.com"
- TLS CA Certificate File = /usr/local/etc/ssl/ca.pem
- # This is a server certificate, used for incoming
- # console connections.
- TLS Certificate = /usr/local/etc/ssl/backup1/cert.pem
- TLS Key = /usr/local/etc/ssl/backup1/key.pem
- }
-
- Storage {
- Name = File
- Address = backup1.example.com
- ...
- TLS Require = yes
- TLS CA Certificate File = /usr/local/etc/ssl/ca.pem
- # This is a client certificate, used by the director to
- # connect to the storage daemon
- TLS Certificate = /usr/local/etc/ssl/bacula@backup1/cert.pem
- TLS Key = /usr/local/etc/ssl/bacula@backup1/key.pem
- }
-
- Client {
- Name = backup1-fd
- Address = server1.example.com
- ...
-
- TLS Enable = yes
- TLS Require = yes
- TLS CA Certificate File = /usr/local/etc/ssl/ca.pem
- }
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-{\bf bacula-fd.conf}
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Director {
- Name = backup1-dir
- ...
- TLS Enable = yes
- TLS Require = yes
- TLS Verify Peer = yes
- # Allow only the Director to connect
- TLS Allowed CN = "bacula@backup1.example.com"
- TLS CA Certificate File = /usr/local/etc/ssl/ca.pem
- # This is a server certificate. It is used by connecting
- # directors to verify the authenticity of this file daemon
- TLS Certificate = /usr/local/etc/ssl/server1/cert.pem
- TLS Key = /usr/local/etc/ssl/server1/key.pem
- }
-
- FileDaemon {
- Name = backup1-fd
- ...
- # you need these TLS entries so the SD and FD can
- # communicate
- TLS Enable = yes
- TLS Require = yes
-
- TLS CA Certificate File = /usr/local/etc/ssl/ca.pem
- TLS Certificate = /usr/local/etc/ssl/server1/cert.pem
- TLS Key = /usr/local/etc/ssl/server1/key.pem
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-{\bf bacula-sd.conf}
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Storage { # definition of myself
- Name = backup1-sd
- ...
- # These TLS configuration options are used for incoming
- # file daemon connections. Director TLS settings are handled
- # below.
- TLS Enable = yes
- TLS Require = yes
- # Peer certificate is not required/requested -- peer validity
- # is verified by the storage connection cookie provided to the
- # File Daemon by the director.
- TLS Verify Peer = no
- TLS CA Certificate File = /usr/local/etc/ssl/ca.pem
- # This is a server certificate. It is used by connecting
- # file daemons to verify the authenticity of this storage daemon
- TLS Certificate = /usr/local/etc/ssl/backup1/cert.pem
- TLS Key = /usr/local/etc/ssl/backup1/key.pem
- }
-
- #
- # List Directors who are permitted to contact Storage daemon
- #
- Director {
- Name = backup1-dir
- ...
- TLS Enable = yes
- TLS Require = yes
- # Require the connecting director to provide a certificate
- # with the matching CN.
- TLS Verify Peer = yes
- TLS Allowed CN = "bacula@backup1.example.com"
- TLS CA Certificate File = /usr/local/etc/ssl/ca.pem
- # This is a server certificate. It is used by the connecting
- # director to verify the authenticity of this storage daemon
- TLS Certificate = /usr/local/etc/ssl/backup1/cert.pem
- TLS Key = /usr/local/etc/ssl/backup1/key.pem
- }
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
+++ /dev/null
-#!/usr/bin/perl -w
-#
-use strict;
-
-# Used to change the names of the image files generated by latex2html from imgxx.png
-# to meaningful names. Provision is made to go either from or to the meaningful names.
-# The meaningful names are obtained from a file called imagename_translations, which
-# is generated by extensions to latex2html in the make_image_file subroutine in
-# bacula.perl.
-
-# Opens the file imagename_translations and reads the contents into a hash.
-# The hash is creaed with the imgxx.png files as the key if processing TO
-# meaningful filenames, and with the meaningful filenames as the key if
-# processing FROM meaningful filenames.
-# Then opens the html file(s) indicated in the command-line arguments and
-# changes all image references according to the translations described in the
-# above file. Finally, it renames the image files.
-#
-# Original creation: 3-27-05 by Karl Cunningham.
-# Modified 5-21-05 to go FROM and TO meaningful filenames.
-#
-my $TRANSFILE = "imagename_translations";
-my $path;
-
-# Loads the contents of $TRANSFILE file into the hash referenced in the first
-# argument. The hash is loaded to translate old to new if $direction is 0,
-# otherwise it is loaded to translate new to old. In this context, the
-# 'old' filename is the meaningful name, and the 'new' filename is the
-# imgxx.png filename. It is assumed that the old image is the one that
-# latex2html has used as the source to create the imgxx.png filename.
-# The filename extension is taken from the file
-sub read_transfile {
- my ($trans,$direction) = @_;
-
- if (!open IN,"<$path$TRANSFILE") {
- print "WARNING: Cannot open image translation file $path$TRANSFILE for reading\n";
- print " Image filename translation aborted\n\n";
- exit 0;
- }
-
- while (<IN>) {
- chomp;
- my ($new,$old) = split(/\001/);
-
- # Old filenames will usually have a leading ./ which we don't need.
- $old =~ s/^\.\///;
-
- # The filename extension of the old filename must be made to match
- # the new filename because it indicates the encoding format of the image.
- my ($ext) = $new =~ /(\.[^\.]*)$/;
- $old =~ s/\.[^\.]*$/$ext/;
- if ($direction == 0) {
- $trans->{$new} = $old;
- } else {
- $trans->{$old} = $new;
- }
- }
- close IN;
-}
-
-# Translates the image names in the file given as the first argument, according to
-# the translations in the hash that is given as the second argument.
-# The file contents are read in entirely into a string, the string is processed, and
-# the file contents are then written. No particular care is taken to ensure that the
-# file is not lost if a system failure occurs at an inopportune time. It is assumed
-# that the html files being processed here can be recreated on demand.
-#
-# Links to other files are added to the %filelist for processing. That way,
-# all linked files will be processed (assuming they are local).
-sub translate_html {
- my ($filename,$trans,$filelist) = @_;
- my ($contents,$out,$this,$img,$dest);
- my $cnt = 0;
-
- # If the filename is an external link ignore it. And drop any file:// from
- # the filename.
- $filename =~ /^(http|ftp|mailto)\:/ and return 0;
- $filename =~ s/^file\:\/\///;
- # Load the contents of the html file.
- if (!open IF,"<$path$filename") {
- print "WARNING: Cannot open $path$filename for reading\n";
- print " Image Filename Translation aborted\n\n";
- exit 0;
- }
-
- while (<IF>) {
- $contents .= $_;
- }
- close IF;
-
- # Now do the translation...
- # First, search for an image filename.
- while ($contents =~ /\<\s*IMG[^\>]*SRC=\"/si) {
- $contents = $';
- $out .= $` . $&;
-
- # The next thing is an image name. Get it and translate it.
- $contents =~ /^(.*?)\"/s;
- $contents = $';
- $this = $&;
- $img = $1;
- # If the image is in our list of ones to be translated, do it
- # and feed the result to the output.
- $cnt += $this =~ s/$img/$trans->{$img}/ if (defined($trans->{$img}));
- $out .= $this;
- }
- $out .= $contents;
-
- # Now send the translated text to the html file, overwriting what's there.
- open OF,">$path$filename" or die "Cannot open $path$filename for writing\n";
- print OF $out;
- close OF;
-
- # Now look for any links to other files and add them to the list of files to do.
- while ($out =~ /\<\s*A[^\>]*HREF=\"(.*?)\"/si) {
- $out = $';
- $dest = $1;
- # Drop an # and anything after it.
- $dest =~ s/\#.*//;
- $filelist->{$dest} = '' if $dest;
- }
- return $cnt;
-}
-
-# REnames the image files spefified in the %translate hash.
-sub rename_images {
- my $translate = shift;
- my ($response);
-
- foreach (keys(%$translate)) {
- if (! $translate->{$_}) {
- print " WARNING: No destination Filename for $_\n";
- } else {
- $response = `mv -f $path$_ $path$translate->{$_} 2>&1`;
- $response and print "ERROR from system $response\n";
- }
- }
-}
-
-#################################################
-############# MAIN #############################
-################################################
-
-# %filelist starts out with keys from the @ARGV list. As files are processed,
-# any links to other files are added to the %filelist. A hash of processed
-# files is kept so we don't do any twice.
-
-# The first argument must be either --to_meaningful_names or --from_meaningful_names
-
-my (%translate,$search_regex,%filelist,%completed,$thisfile);
-my ($cnt,$direction);
-
-my $arg0 = shift(@ARGV);
-$arg0 =~ /^(--to_meaningful_names|--from_meaningful_names)$/ or
- die "ERROR: First argument must be either \'--to_meaningful_names\' or \'--from_meaningful_names\'\n";
-
-$direction = ($arg0 eq '--to_meaningful_names') ? 0 : 1;
-
-(@ARGV) or die "ERROR: Filename(s) to process must be given as arguments\n";
-
-# Use the first argument to get the path to the file of translations.
-my $tmp = $ARGV[0];
-($path) = $tmp =~ /(.*\/)/;
-$path = '' unless $path;
-
-read_transfile(\%translate,$direction);
-
-foreach (@ARGV) {
- # Strip the path from the filename, and use it later on.
- if (s/(.*\/)//) {
- $path = $1;
- } else {
- $path = '';
- }
- $filelist{$_} = '';
-
- while ($thisfile = (keys(%filelist))[0]) {
- $cnt += translate_html($thisfile,\%translate,\%filelist) if (!exists($completed{$thisfile}));
- delete($filelist{$thisfile});
- $completed{$thisfile} = '';
- }
- print "translate_images.pl: $cnt image filenames translated ",($direction)?"from":"to"," meaningful names\n";
-}
-
-rename_images(\%translate);
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{A Brief Tutorial}
-\label{TutorialChapter}
-\index[general]{Brief Tutorial }
-\index[general]{Tutorial!Brief }
-
-This chapter will guide you through running Bacula. To do so, we assume you
-have installed Bacula, possibly in a single file as shown in the previous
-chapter, in which case, you can run Bacula as non-root for these tests.
-However, we assume that you have not changed the .conf files. If you have
-modified the .conf files, please go back and uninstall Bacula, then reinstall
-it, but do not make any changes. The examples in this chapter use the default
-configuration files, and will write the volumes to disk in your {\bf /tmp}
-directory, in addition, the data backed up will be the source directory where
-you built Bacula. As a consequence, you can run all the Bacula daemons for
-these tests as non-root. Please note, in production, your File daemon(s) must
-run as root. See the Security chapter for more information on this subject.
-
-% TODO: use crossreferences above
-% TODO: add a section here
-
-The general flow of running Bacula is:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item cd \lt{}install-directory\gt{}
-\item Start the Database (if using MySQL or PostgreSQL)
-\item Start the Daemons with {\bf ./bacula start}
-\item Start the Console program to interact with the Director
-\item Run a job
-\item When the Volume fills, unmount the Volume, if it is a tape, label a new
- one, and continue running. In this chapter, we will write only to disk files
- so you won't need to worry about tapes for the moment.
-\item Test recovering some files from the Volume just written to ensure the
- backup is good and that you know how to recover. Better test before disaster
- strikes
-\item Add a second client.
- \end{enumerate}
-
-Each of these steps is described in more detail below.
-
-\section{Before Running Bacula}
-\index[general]{Bacula!Before Running }
-\index[general]{Before Running Bacula }
-
-% TODO: some of this content is already covered once or twice critical
-% TODO: or quickstart. Consolidate!
-
-Before running Bacula for the first time in production, we recommend that you
-run the {\bf test} command in the {\bf btape} program as described in the
-\ilink{Utility Program Chapter}{btape} of this manual. This will
-help ensure that Bacula functions correctly with your tape drive. If you have
-a modern HP, Sony, or Quantum DDS or DLT tape drive running on Linux or
-Solaris, you can probably skip this test as Bacula is well tested with these
-drives and systems. For all other cases, you are {\bf strongly} encouraged to
-run the test before continuing. {\bf btape} also has a {\bf fill} command that
-attempts to duplicate what Bacula does when filling a tape and writing on the
-next tape. You should consider trying this command as well, but be forewarned,
-it can take hours (about four hours on my drive) to fill a large capacity tape.
-
-\section{Starting the Database}
-\label{StartDB}
-\index[general]{Starting the Database }
-\index[general]{Database!Starting the }
-
-If you are using MySQL or PostgreSQL as the Bacula database, you should start
-it before you attempt to run a job to avoid getting error messages from Bacula
-when it starts. The scripts {\bf startmysql} and {\bf stopmysql} are what I
-(Kern) use to start and stop my local MySQL. Note, if you are using SQLite,
-you will not want to use {\bf startmysql} or {\bf stopmysql}. If you are
-running this in production, you will probably want to find some way to
-automatically start MySQL or PostgreSQL after each system reboot.
-
-If you are using SQLite (i.e. you specified the {\bf \verb:--:with-sqlite=xxx} option
-on the {\bf ./configure} command, you need do nothing. SQLite is automatically
-started by {\bf Bacula}.
-
-\section{Starting the Daemons}
-\label{StartDaemon}
-\index[general]{Starting the Daemons }
-\index[general]{Daemons!Starting the }
-
-Assuming you have built from source or have installed the rpms,
-to start the three daemons, from your installation directory, simply enter:
-
-./bacula start
-
-The {\bf bacula} script starts the Storage daemon, the File daemon, and the
-Director daemon, which all normally run as daemons in the background. If you
-are using the autostart feature of Bacula, your daemons will either be
-automatically started on reboot, or you can control them individually with the
-files {\bf bacula-dir}, {\bf bacula-fd}, and {\bf bacula-sd}, which are
-usually located in {\bf /etc/init.d}, though the actual location is system
-dependent.
-Some distributions may do this differently.
-
-Note, on Windows, currently only the File daemon is ported, and it must be
-started differently. Please see the
-\ilink{Windows Version of Bacula}{Win32Chapter} Chapter of this
-manual.
-
-The rpm packages configure the daemons to run as user=root and group=bacula.
-The rpm installation also creates the group bacula if it does not exist on the
-system. Any users that you add to the group bacula will have access to files
-created by the daemons. To disable or alter this behavior edit the daemon
-startup scripts:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item /etc/bacula/bacula
-\item /etc/init.d/bacula-dir
-\item /etc/init.d/bacula-sd
-\item /etc/init.d/bacula-fd
- \end{itemize}
-
-and then restart as noted above.
-
-The
-\ilink{installation chapter}{InstallChapter} of this manual
-explains how you can install scripts that will automatically restart the
-daemons when the system starts.
-
-\section{Using the Director to Query and Start Jobs}
-\index[general]{Jobs!Querying or Starting Jobs}
-\index[general]{Querying or starting Jobs}
-% TODO: section name is too long; maybe use "Using the Console Program" ??
-
-To communicate with the director and to query the state of Bacula or run jobs,
-from the top level directory, simply enter:
-
-./bconsole
-
-Alternatively to running the command line console, if you have
-Qt4 installed and used the {\bf \verb:--:enable-bat} on the configure command,
-you may use the Bacula Administration Tool ({\bf bat}):
-
-./bat
-
-Which has a graphical interface, and many more features than bconsole.
-
-Two other possibilities are to run the GNOME console
-{\bf bgnome-console} or the wxWidgets program {\bf bwx-console}.
-
-For simplicity, here we will describe only the {\bf ./bconsole} program. Most
-of what is described here applies equally well to {\bf ./bat},
-{\bf ./bgnome-console}, and to {\bf bwx-console}.
-
-The {\bf ./bconsole} runs the Bacula Console program, which connects to the
-Director daemon. Since Bacula is a network program, you can run the Console
-program anywhere on your network. Most frequently, however, one runs it on the
-same machine as the Director. Normally, the Console program will print
-something similar to the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-[kern@polymatou bin]$ ./bconsole
-Connecting to Director lpmatou:9101
-1000 OK: HeadMan Version: 2.1.8 (14 May 2007)
-*
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-the asterisk is the console command prompt.
-
-Type {\bf help} to see a list of available commands:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-*help
- Command Description
- ======= ===========
- add add media to a pool
- autodisplay autodisplay [on|off] -- console messages
- automount automount [on|off] -- after label
- cancel cancel [<jobid=nnn> | <job=name>] -- cancel a job
- create create DB Pool from resource
- delete delete [pool=<pool-name> | media volume=<volume-name>]
- disable disable <job=name> -- disable a job
- enable enable <job=name> -- enable a job
- estimate performs FileSet estimate, listing gives full listing
- exit exit = quit
- gui gui [on|off] -- non-interactive gui mode
- help print this command
- list list [pools | jobs | jobtotals | media <pool=pool-name> |
-files <jobid=nn>]; from catalog
- label label a tape
- llist full or long list like list command
- memory print current memory usage
- messages messages
- mount mount <storage-name>
- prune prune expired records from catalog
- purge purge records from catalog
- python python control commands
- quit quit
- query query catalog
- restore restore files
- relabel relabel a tape
- release release <storage-name>
- reload reload conf file
- run run <job-name>
- status status [[slots] storage | dir | client]=<name>
- setdebug sets debug level
- setip sets new client address -- if authorized
- show show (resource records) [jobs | pools | ... | all]
- sqlquery use SQL to query catalog
- time print current time
- trace turn on/off trace to file
- unmount unmount <storage-name>
- umount umount <storage-name> for old-time Unix guys
- update update Volume, Pool or slots
- use use catalog xxx
- var does variable expansion
- version print Director version
- wait wait until no jobs are running [<jobname=name> | <jobid=nnn> | <ujobid=complete_name>]
-*
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Details of the console program's commands are explained in the
-\ilink{Console Chapter}{TheConsoleChapter} of this manual.
-
-\section{Running a Job}
-\label{Running}
-\index[general]{Job!Running a }
-\index[general]{Running a Job }
-
-At this point, we assume you have done the following:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Configured Bacula with {\bf ./configure \verb:--:your-options}
-\item Built Bacula using {\bf make}
-\item Installed Bacula using {\bf make install}
-\item Have created your database with, for example, {\bf
- ./create\_sqlite\_database}
-\item Have created the Bacula database tables with, {\bf
- ./make\_bacula\_tables}
-\item Have possibly edited your {\bf bacula-dir.conf} file to personalize it
- a bit. BE CAREFUL! if you change the Director's name or password, you will
- need to make similar modifications in the other .conf files. For the moment
- it is probably better to make no changes.
-\item You have started Bacula with {\bf ./bacula start}
-\item You have invoked the Console program with {\bf ./bconsole}
-\end{itemize}
-
-Furthermore, we assume for the moment you are using the default configuration
-files.
-
-At this point, enter the following command:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-show filesets
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-and you should get something similar to:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet: name=Full Set
- O M
- N
- I /home/kern/bacula/regress/build
- N
- E /proc
- E /tmp
- E /.journal
- E /.fsck
- N
-FileSet: name=Catalog
- O M
- N
- I /home/kern/bacula/regress/working/bacula.sql
- N
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-This is a pre-defined {\bf FileSet} that will backup the Bacula source
-directory. The actual directory names printed should correspond to your system
-configuration. For testing purposes, we have chosen a directory of moderate
-size (about 40 Megabytes) and complexity without being too big. The FileSet
-{\bf Catalog} is used for backing up Bacula's catalog and is not of interest
-to us for the moment. The {\bf I} entries are the files or directories that
-will be included in the backup and the {\bf E} are those that will be
-excluded, and the {\bf O} entries are the options specified for
-the FileSet. You can change what is backed up by editing {\bf bacula-dir.conf}
-and changing the {\bf File =} line in the {\bf FileSet} resource.
-
-Now is the time to run your first backup job. We are going to backup your
-Bacula source directory to a File Volume in your {\bf /tmp} directory just to
-show you how easy it is. Now enter:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-status dir
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-and you should get the following output:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-rufus-dir Version: 1.30 (28 April 2003)
-Daemon started 28-Apr-2003 14:03, 0 Jobs run.
-Console connected at 28-Apr-2003 14:03
-No jobs are running.
-Level Type Scheduled Name
-=================================================================
-Incremental Backup 29-Apr-2003 01:05 Client1
-Full Backup 29-Apr-2003 01:10 BackupCatalog
-====
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-where the times and the Director's name will be different according to your
-setup. This shows that an Incremental job is scheduled to run for the Job {\bf
-Client1} at 1:05am and that at 1:10, a {\bf BackupCatalog} is scheduled to
-run. Note, you should probably change the name {\bf Client1} to be the name of
-your machine, if not, when you add additional clients, it will be very
-confusing. For my real machine, I use {\bf Rufus} rather than {\bf Client1} as
-in this example.
-
-Now enter:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-status client
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-and you should get something like:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-The defined Client resources are:
- 1: rufus-fd
-Item 1 selected automatically.
-Connecting to Client rufus-fd at rufus:8102
-rufus-fd Version: 1.30 (28 April 2003)
-Daemon started 28-Apr-2003 14:03, 0 Jobs run.
-Director connected at: 28-Apr-2003 14:14
-No jobs running.
-====
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-In this case, the client is named {\bf rufus-fd} your name will be different,
-but the line beginning with {\bf rufus-fd Version ...} is printed by your File
-daemon, so we are now sure it is up and running.
-
-Finally do the same for your Storage daemon with:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-status storage
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-and you should get:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-The defined Storage resources are:
- 1: File
-Item 1 selected automatically.
-Connecting to Storage daemon File at rufus:8103
-rufus-sd Version: 1.30 (28 April 2003)
-Daemon started 28-Apr-2003 14:03, 0 Jobs run.
-Device /tmp is not open.
-No jobs running.
-====
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-You will notice that the default Storage daemon device is named {\bf File} and
-that it will use device {\bf /tmp}, which is not currently open.
-
-Now, let's actually run a job with:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-run
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-you should get the following output:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Using default Catalog name=MyCatalog DB=bacula
-A job name must be specified.
-The defined Job resources are:
- 1: Client1
- 2: BackupCatalog
- 3: RestoreFiles
-Select Job resource (1-3):
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Here, Bacula has listed the three different Jobs that you can run, and you
-should choose number {\bf 1} and type enter, at which point you will get:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Run Backup job
-JobName: Client1
-FileSet: Full Set
-Level: Incremental
-Client: rufus-fd
-Storage: File
-Pool: Default
-When: 2003-04-28 14:18:57
-OK to run? (yes/mod/no):
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-At this point, take some time to look carefully at what is printed and
-understand it. It is asking you if it is OK to run a job named {\bf Client1}
-with FileSet {\bf Full Set} (we listed above) as an Incremental job on your
-Client (your client name will be different), and to use Storage {\bf File} and
-Pool {\bf Default}, and finally, it wants to run it now (the current time
-should be displayed by your console).
-
-Here we have the choice to run ({\bf yes}), to modify one or more of the above
-parameters ({\bf mod}), or to not run the job ({\bf no}). Please enter {\bf
-yes}, at which point you should immediately get the command prompt (an
-asterisk). If you wait a few seconds, then enter the command {\bf messages}
-you will get back something like:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-28-Apr-2003 14:22 rufus-dir: Last FULL backup time not found. Doing
- FULL backup.
-28-Apr-2003 14:22 rufus-dir: Start Backup JobId 1,
- Job=Client1.2003-04-28_14.22.33
-28-Apr-2003 14:22 rufus-sd: Job Client1.2003-04-28_14.22.33 waiting.
- Cannot find any appendable volumes.
-Please use the "label" command to create a new Volume for:
- Storage: FileStorage
- Media type: File
- Pool: Default
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The first message, indicates that no previous Full backup was done, so Bacula
-is upgrading our Incremental job to a Full backup (this is normal). The second
-message indicates that the job started with JobId 1., and the third message
-tells us that Bacula cannot find any Volumes in the Pool for writing the
-output. This is normal because we have not yet created (labeled) any Volumes.
-Bacula indicates to you all the details of the volume it needs.
-
-At this point, the job is BLOCKED waiting for a Volume. You can check this if
-you want by doing a {\bf status dir}. In order to continue, we must create a
-Volume that Bacula can write on. We do so with:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-label
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-and Bacula will print:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-The defined Storage resources are:
- 1: File
-Item 1 selected automatically.
-Enter new Volume name:
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-at which point, you should enter some name beginning with a letter and
-containing only letters and numbers (period, hyphen, and underscore) are also
-permitted. For example, enter {\bf TestVolume001}, and you should get back:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Defined Pools:
- 1: Default
-Item 1 selected automatically.
-Connecting to Storage daemon File at rufus:8103 ...
-Sending label command for Volume "TestVolume001" Slot 0 ...
-3000 OK label. Volume=TestVolume001 Device=/tmp
-Catalog record for Volume "TestVolume002", Slot 0 successfully created.
-Requesting mount FileStorage ...
-3001 OK mount. Device=/tmp
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Finally, enter {\bf messages} and you should get something like:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-28-Apr-2003 14:30 rufus-sd: Wrote label to prelabeled Volume
- "TestVolume001" on device /tmp
-28-Apr-2003 14:30 rufus-dir: Bacula 1.30 (28Apr03): 28-Apr-2003 14:30
-JobId: 1
-Job: Client1.2003-04-28_14.22.33
-FileSet: Full Set
-Backup Level: Full
-Client: rufus-fd
-Start time: 28-Apr-2003 14:22
-End time: 28-Apr-2003 14:30
-Files Written: 1,444
-Bytes Written: 38,988,877
-Rate: 81.2 KB/s
-Software Compression: None
-Volume names(s): TestVolume001
-Volume Session Id: 1
-Volume Session Time: 1051531381
-Last Volume Bytes: 39,072,359
-FD termination status: OK
-SD termination status: OK
-Termination: Backup OK
-28-Apr-2003 14:30 rufus-dir: Begin pruning Jobs.
-28-Apr-2003 14:30 rufus-dir: No Jobs found to prune.
-28-Apr-2003 14:30 rufus-dir: Begin pruning Files.
-28-Apr-2003 14:30 rufus-dir: No Files found to prune.
-28-Apr-2003 14:30 rufus-dir: End auto prune.
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If you don't see the output immediately, you can keep entering {\bf messages}
-until the job terminates, or you can enter, {\bf autodisplay on} and your
-messages will automatically be displayed as soon as they are ready.
-
-If you do an {\bf ls -l} of your {\bf /tmp} directory, you will see that you
-have the following item:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
--rw-r----- 1 kern kern 39072153 Apr 28 14:30 TestVolume001
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-This is the file Volume that you just wrote and it contains all the data of
-the job just run. If you run additional jobs, they will be appended to this
-Volume unless you specify otherwise.
-
-You might ask yourself if you have to label all the Volumes that Bacula is
-going to use. The answer for disk Volumes, like the one we used, is no. It is
-possible to have Bacula automatically label volumes. For tape Volumes, you
-will most likely have to label each of the Volumes you want to use.
-
-If you would like to stop here, you can simply enter {\bf quit} in the Console
-program, and you can stop Bacula with {\bf ./bacula stop}. To clean up, simply
-delete the file {\bf /tmp/TestVolume001}, and you should also re-initialize
-your database using:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-./drop_bacula_tables
-./make_bacula_tables
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Please note that this will erase all information about the previous jobs that
-have run, and that you might want to do it now while testing but that normally
-you will not want to re-initialize your database.
-
-If you would like to try restoring the files that you just backed up, read the
-following section.
-\label{restoring}
-
-\section{Restoring Your Files}
-\index[general]{Files!Restoring Your }
-\index[general]{Restoring Your Files }
-
-If you have run the default configuration and the save of the Bacula source
-code as demonstrated above, you can restore the backed up files in the Console
-program by entering:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-restore all
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-where you will get:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-First you select one or more JobIds that contain files
-to be restored. You will be presented several methods
-of specifying the JobIds. Then you will be allowed to
-select which files from those JobIds are to be restored.
-
-To select the JobIds, you have the following choices:
- 1: List last 20 Jobs run
- 2: List Jobs where a given File is saved
- 3: Enter list of comma separated JobIds to select
- 4: Enter SQL list command
- 5: Select the most recent backup for a client
- 6: Select backup for a client before a specified time
- 7: Enter a list of files to restore
- 8: Enter a list of files to restore before a specified time
- 9: Find the JobIds of the most recent backup for a client
- 10: Find the JobIds for a backup for a client before a specified time
- 11: Enter a list of directories to restore for found JobIds
- 12: Cancel
-Select item: (1-12):
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-As you can see, there are a number of options, but for the current
-demonstration, please enter {\bf 5} to do a restore of the last backup you
-did, and you will get the following output:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Defined Clients:
- 1: rufus-fd
-Item 1 selected automatically.
-The defined FileSet resources are:
- 1: 1 Full Set 2003-04-28 14:22:33
-Item 1 selected automatically.
-+-------+-------+----------+---------------------+---------------+
-| JobId | Level | JobFiles | StartTime | VolumeName |
-+-------+-------+----------+---------------------+---------------+
-| 1 | F | 1444 | 2003-04-28 14:22:33 | TestVolume002 |
-+-------+-------+----------+---------------------+---------------+
-You have selected the following JobId: 1
-Building directory tree for JobId 1 ...
-1 Job inserted into the tree and marked for extraction.
-The defined Storage resources are:
- 1: File
-Item 1 selected automatically.
-You are now entering file selection mode where you add and
-remove files to be restored. All files are initially added.
-Enter "done" to leave this mode.
-cwd is: /
-$
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-where I have truncated the listing on the right side to make it more readable.
-As you can see by starting at the top of the listing, Bacula knows what client
-you have, and since there was only one, it selected it automatically, likewise
-for the FileSet. Then Bacula produced a listing containing all the jobs that
-form the current backup, in this case, there is only one, and the Storage
-daemon was also automatically chosen. Bacula then took all the files that were
-in Job number 1 and entered them into a {\bf directory tree} (a sort of in
-memory representation of your filesystem). At this point, you can use the {\bf
-cd} and {\bf ls} ro {\bf dir} commands to walk up and down the directory tree
-and view what files will be restored. For example, if I enter {\bf cd
-/home/kern/bacula/bacula-1.30} and then enter {\bf dir} I will get a listing
-of all the files in the Bacula source directory. On your system, the path will
-be somewhat different. For more information on this, please refer to the
-\ilink{Restore Command Chapter}{RestoreChapter} of this manual for
-more details.
-
-To exit this mode, simply enter:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-done
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-and you will get the following output:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Bootstrap records written to
- /home/kern/bacula/testbin/working/restore.bsr
-The restore job will require the following Volumes:
-
- TestVolume001
-1444 files selected to restore.
-Run Restore job
-JobName: RestoreFiles
-Bootstrap: /home/kern/bacula/testbin/working/restore.bsr
-Where: /tmp/bacula-restores
-Replace: always
-FileSet: Full Set
-Backup Client: rufus-fd
-Restore Client: rufus-fd
-Storage: File
-JobId: *None*
-When: 2005-04-28 14:53:54
-OK to run? (yes/mod/no):
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If you answer {\bf yes} your files will be restored to {\bf
-/tmp/bacula-restores}. If you want to restore the files to their original
-locations, you must use the {\bf mod} option and explicitly set {\bf Where:}
-to nothing (or to /). We recommend you go ahead and answer {\bf yes} and after
-a brief moment, enter {\bf messages}, at which point you should get a listing
-of all the files that were restored as well as a summary of the job that looks
-similar to this:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-28-Apr-2005 14:56 rufus-dir: Bacula 2.1.8 (08May07): 08-May-2007 14:56:06
-Build OS: i686-pc-linux-gnu suse 10.2
-JobId: 2
-Job: RestoreFiles.2007-05-08_14.56.06
-Restore Client: rufus-fd
-Start time: 08-May-2007 14:56
-End time: 08-May-2007 14:56
-Files Restored: 1,444
-Bytes Restored: 38,816,381
-Rate: 9704.1 KB/s
-FD Errors: 0
-FD termination status: OK
-SD termination status: OK
-Termination: Restore OK
-08-May-2007 14:56 rufus-dir: Begin pruning Jobs.
-08-May-2007 14:56 rufus-dir: No Jobs found to prune.
-08-May-2007 14:56 rufus-dir: Begin pruning Files.
-08-May-2007 14:56 rufus-dir: No Files found to prune.
-08-May-2007 14:56 rufus-dir: End auto prune.
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-After exiting the Console program, you can examine the files in {\bf
-/tmp/bacula-restores}, which will contain a small directory tree with all the
-files. Be sure to clean up at the end with:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-rm -rf /tmp/bacula-restore
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{Quitting the Console Program}
-\index[general]{Program!Quitting the Console }
-\index[general]{Quitting the Console Program }
-
-Simply enter the command {\bf quit}.
-\label{SecondClient}
-
-\section{Adding a Second Client}
-\index[general]{Client!Adding a Second }
-\index[general]{Adding a Second Client }
-
-If you have gotten the example shown above to work on your system, you may be
-ready to add a second Client (File daemon). That is you have a second machine
-that you would like backed up. The only part you need installed on the other
-machine is the binary {\bf bacula-fd} (or {\bf bacula-fd.exe} for Windows) and
-its configuration file {\bf bacula-fd.conf}. You can start with the same {\bf
-bacula-fd.conf} file that you are currently using and make one minor
-modification to it to create the conf file for your second client. Change the
-File daemon name from whatever was configured, {\bf rufus-fd} in the example
-above, but your system will have a different name. The best is to change it to
-the name of your second machine. For example:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-...
-#
-# "Global" File daemon configuration specifications
-#
-FileDaemon { # this is me
- Name = rufus-fd
- FDport = 9102 # where we listen for the director
- WorkingDirectory = /home/kern/bacula/working
- Pid Directory = /var/run
-}
-...
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-would become:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-...
-#
-# "Global" File daemon configuration specifications
-#
-FileDaemon { # this is me
- Name = matou-fd
- FDport = 9102 # where we listen for the director
- WorkingDirectory = /home/kern/bacula/working
- Pid Directory = /var/run
-}
-...
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-where I show just a portion of the file and have changed {\bf rufus-fd} to
-{\bf matou-fd}. The names you use are your choice. For the moment, I recommend
-you change nothing else. Later, you will want to change the password.
-
-Now you should install that change on your second machine. Then you need to
-make some additions to your Director's configuration file to define the new
-File daemon or Client. Starting from our original example which should be
-installed on your system, you should add the following lines (essentially
-copies of the existing data but with the names changed) to your Director's
-configuration file {\bf bacula-dir.conf}.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#
-# Define the main nightly save backup job
-# By default, this job will back up to disk in /tmp
-Job {
- Name = "Matou"
- Type = Backup
- Client = matou-fd
- FileSet = "Full Set"
- Schedule = "WeeklyCycle"
- Storage = File
- Messages = Standard
- Pool = Default
- Write Bootstrap = "/home/kern/bacula/working/matou.bsr"
-}
-# Client (File Services) to backup
-Client {
- Name = matou-fd
- Address = matou
- FDPort = 9102
- Catalog = MyCatalog
- Password = "xxxxx" # password for
- File Retention = 30d # 30 days
- Job Retention = 180d # six months
- AutoPrune = yes # Prune expired Jobs/Files
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Then make sure that the Address parameter in the Storage resource is set to
-the fully qualified domain name and not to something like "localhost". The
-address specified is sent to the File daemon (client) and it must be a fully
-qualified domain name. If you pass something like "localhost" it will not
-resolve correctly and will result in a time out when the File daemon fails to
-connect to the Storage daemon.
-
-That is all that is necessary. I copied the existing resource to create a
-second Job (Matou) to backup the second client (matou-fd). It has the name
-{\bf Matou}, the Client is named {\bf matou-fd}, and the bootstrap file name
-is changed, but everything else is the same. This means that Matou will be
-backed up on the same schedule using the same set of tapes. You may want to
-change that later, but for now, let's keep it simple.
-
-The second change was to add a new Client resource that defines {\bf matou-fd}
-and has the correct address {\bf matou}, but in real life, you may need a
-fully qualified domain name or an IP address. I also kept the password the
-same (shown as xxxxx for the example).
-
-At this point, if you stop Bacula and restart it, and start the Client on the
-other machine, everything will be ready, and the prompts that you saw above
-will now include the second machine.
-
-To make this a real production installation, you will possibly want to use
-different Pool, or a different schedule. It is up to you to customize. In any
-case, you should change the password in both the Director's file and the
-Client's file for additional security.
-
-For some important tips on changing names and passwords, and a diagram of what
-names and passwords must match, please see
-\ilink{Authorization Errors}{AuthorizationErrors} in the FAQ chapter
-of this manual.
-
-\section{When The Tape Fills}
-\label{FullTape}
-\index[general]{Fills!When The Tape }
-\index[general]{When The Tape Fills }
-
-If you have scheduled your job, typically nightly, there will come a time when
-the tape fills up and {\bf Bacula} cannot continue. In this case, Bacula will
-send you a message similar to the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-rufus-sd: block.c:337 === Write error errno=28: ERR=No space left
- on device
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-This indicates that Bacula got a write error because the tape is full. Bacula
-will then search the Pool specified for your Job looking for an appendable
-volume. In the best of all cases, you will have properly set your Retention
-Periods and you will have all your tapes marked to be Recycled, and {\bf
-Bacula} will automatically recycle the tapes in your pool requesting and
-overwriting old Volumes. For more information on recycling, please see the
-\ilink{Recycling chapter}{RecyclingChapter} of this manual. If you
-find that your Volumes were not properly recycled (usually because of a
-configuration error), please see the
-\ilink{Manually Recycling Volumes}{manualrecycling} section of
-the Recycling chapter.
-
-If like me, you have a very large set of Volumes and you label them with the
-date the Volume was first writing, or you have not set up your Retention
-periods, Bacula will not find a tape in the pool, and it will send you a
-message similar to the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-rufus-sd: Job kernsave.2002-09-19.10:50:48 waiting. Cannot find any
- appendable volumes.
-Please use the "label" command to create a new Volume for:
- Storage: SDT-10000
- Media type: DDS-4
- Pool: Default
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Until you create a new Volume, this message will be repeated an hour later,
-then two hours later, and so on doubling the interval each time up to a
-maximum interval of one day.
-
-The obvious question at this point is: What do I do now?
-
-The answer is simple: first, using the Console program, close the tape drive
-using the {\bf unmount} command. If you only have a single drive, it will be
-automatically selected, otherwise, make sure you release the one specified on
-the message (in this case {\bf STD-10000}).
-
-Next, you remove the tape from the drive and insert a new blank tape. Note, on
-some older tape drives, you may need to write an end of file mark ({\bf mt \
--f \ /dev/nst0 \ weof}) to prevent the drive from running away when Bacula
-attempts to read the label.
-
-Finally, you use the {\bf label} command in the Console to write a label to
-the new Volume. The {\bf label} command will contact the Storage daemon to
-write the software label, if it is successful, it will add the new Volume to
-the Pool, then issue a {\bf mount} command to the Storage daemon. See the
-previous sections of this chapter for more details on labeling tapes.
-
-The result is that Bacula will continue the previous Job writing the backup to
-the new Volume.
-
-If you have a Pool of volumes and Bacula is cycling through them, instead of
-the above message "Cannot find any appendable volumes.", Bacula may ask you
-to mount a specific volume. In that case, you should attempt to do just that.
-If you do not have the volume any more (for any of a number of reasons), you
-can simply mount another volume from the same Pool, providing it is
-appendable, and Bacula will use it. You can use the {\bf list volumes} command
-in the console program to determine which volumes are appendable and which are
-not.
-
-If like me, you have your Volume retention periods set correctly, but you have
-no more free Volumes, you can relabel and reuse a Volume as follows:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Do a {\bf list volumes} in the Console and select the oldest Volume for
- relabeling.
-\item If you have setup your Retention periods correctly, the Volume should
- have VolStatus {\bf Purged}.
-\item If the VolStatus is not set to Purged, you will need to purge the
- database of Jobs that are written on that Volume. Do so by using the command
- {\bf purge jobs volume} in the Console. If you have multiple Pools, you will
-be prompted for the Pool then enter the VolumeName (or MediaId) when
-requested.
-\item Then simply use the {\bf relabel} command to relabel the Volume.
- \end{itemize}
-
-To manually relabel the Volume use the following additional steps:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item To delete the Volume from the catalog use the {\bf delete volume}
- command in the Console and select the VolumeName (or MediaId) to be deleted.
-
-\item Use the {\bf unmount} command in the Console to unmount the old tape.
-\item Physically relabel the old Volume that you deleted so that it can be
- reused.
-\item Insert the old Volume in the tape drive.
-\item From a command line do: {\bf mt \ -f \ /dev/st0 \ rewind} and {\bf mt \
- -f \ /dev/st0 \ weof}, where you need to use the proper tape drive name for
- your system in place of {\bf /dev/st0}.
-\item Use the {\bf label} command in the Console to write a new Bacula label
- on your tape.
-\item Use the {\bf mount} command in the Console if it is not automatically
- done, so that Bacula starts using your newly labeled tape.
- \end{itemize}
-
-\section{Other Useful Console Commands}
-\index[general]{Commands!Other Useful Console }
-\index[general]{Other Useful Console Commands }
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [status dir]
- \index[console]{status dir }
- Print a status of all running jobs and jobs scheduled in the next 24 hours.
-
-\item [status]
- \index[console]{status }
- The console program will prompt you to select a daemon type, then will
-request the daemon's status.
-
-\item [status jobid=nn]
- \index[console]{status jobid }
- Print a status of JobId nn if it is running. The Storage daemon is contacted
-and requested to print a current status of the job as well.
-
-\item [list pools]
- \index[console]{list pools }
- List the pools defined in the Catalog (normally only Default is used).
-
-\item [list media]
- \index[console]{list media }
- Lists all the media defined in the Catalog.
-
-\item [list jobs]
- \index[console]{list jobs }
- Lists all jobs in the Catalog that have run.
-
-\item [list jobid=nn]
- \index[console]{list jobid }
- Lists JobId nn from the Catalog.
-
-\item [list jobtotals]
- \index[console]{list jobtotals }
- Lists totals for all jobs in the Catalog.
-
-\item [list files jobid=nn]
- \index[console]{list files jobid }
- List the files that were saved for JobId nn.
-
-\item [list jobmedia]
- \index[console]{list jobmedia }
- List the media information for each Job run.
-
-\item [messages]
- \index[console]{messages }
- Prints any messages that have been directed to the console.
-
-\item [unmount storage=storage-name]
- \index[console]{unmount storage }
- Unmounts the drive associated with the storage device with the name {\bf
-storage-name} if the drive is not currently being used. This command is used
-if you wish Bacula to free the drive so that you can use it to label a tape.
-
-
-\item [mount storage=storage-name]
- \index[sd]{mount storage }
- Causes the drive associated with the storage device to be mounted again. When
-Bacula reaches the end of a volume and requests you to mount a new volume,
-you must issue this command after you have placed the new volume in the
-drive. In effect, it is the signal needed by Bacula to know to start reading
-or writing the new volume.
-
-\item [quit]
- \index[sd]{quit }
- Exit or quit the console program.
-\end{description}
-
-Most of the commands given above, with the exception of {\bf list}, will
-prompt you for the necessary arguments if you simply enter the command name.
-
-\section{Debug Daemon Output}
-\index[general]{Debug Daemon Output }
-\index[general]{Output!Debug Daemon }
-
-If you want debug output from the daemons as they are running, start the
-daemons from the install directory as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-./bacula start -d100
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-This can be particularly helpful if your daemons do not start correctly,
-because direct daemon output to the console is normally directed to the
-NULL device, but with the debug level greater than zero, the output
-will be sent to the starting terminal.
-
-To stop the three daemons, enter the following from the install directory:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-./bacula stop
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The execution of {\bf bacula stop} may complain about pids not found. This is
-OK, especially if one of the daemons has died, which is very rare.
-
-To do a full system save, each File daemon must be running as root so that it
-will have permission to access all the files. None of the other daemons
-require root privileges. However, the Storage daemon must be able to open the
-tape drives. On many systems, only root can access the tape drives. Either run
-the Storage daemon as root, or change the permissions on the tape devices to
-permit non-root access. MySQL and PostgreSQL can be installed and run with any
-userid; root privilege is not necessary.
-
-\section{Patience When Starting Daemons or Mounting Blank Tapes}
-
-When you start the Bacula daemons, the Storage daemon attempts to open all
-defined storage devices and verify the currently mounted Volume (if
-configured). Until all the storage devices are verified, the Storage daemon
-will not accept connections from the Console program. If a tape was previously
-used, it will be rewound, and on some devices this can take several minutes.
-As a consequence, you may need to have a bit of patience when first contacting
-the Storage daemon after starting the daemons. If you can see your tape drive,
-once the lights stop flashing, the drive will be ready to be used.
-
-The same considerations apply if you have just mounted a blank tape in a drive
-such as an HP DLT. It can take a minute or two before the drive properly
-recognizes that the tape is blank. If you attempt to {\bf mount} the tape with
-the Console program during this recognition period, it is quite possible that
-you will hang your SCSI driver (at least on my Red Hat Linux system). As a
-consequence, you are again urged to have patience when inserting blank tapes.
-Let the device settle down before attempting to access it.
-
-\section{Difficulties Connecting from the FD to the SD}
-\index[general]{Difficulties Connecting from the FD to the SD}
-\index[general]{SD!Difficulties Connecting from the FD to the SD}
-
-If you are having difficulties getting one or more of your File daemons to
-connect to the Storage daemon, it is most likely because you have not used a
-fully qualified domain name on the {\bf Address} directive in the
-Director's Storage resource. That is the resolver on the File daemon's machine
-(not on the Director's) must be able to resolve the name you supply into an IP
-address. An example of an address that is guaranteed not to work: {\bf
-localhost}. An example that may work: {\bf megalon}. An example that is more
-likely to work: {\bf magalon.mydomain.com}. On Win32 if you don't have a good
-resolver (often true on older Win98 systems), you might try using an IP
-address in place of a name.
-
-If your address is correct, then make sure that no other program is using the
-port 9103 on the Storage daemon's machine. The Bacula port numbers are
-authorized by IANA, and should not be used by other programs, but apparently
-some HP printers do use these port numbers. A {\bf netstat -a} on the Storage
-daemon's machine can determine who is using the 9103 port (used for FD to SD
-communications in Bacula).
-
-\section{Daemon Command Line Options}
-\index[general]{Daemon Command Line Options }
-\index[general]{Options!Daemon Command Line }
-
-Each of the three daemons (Director, File, Storage) accepts a small set of
-options on the command line. In general, each of the daemons as well as the
-Console program accepts the following options:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [-c \lt{}file\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{-c \lt{}file\gt{} }
- Define the file to use as a configuration file. The default is the daemon
- name followed by {\bf .conf} i.e. {\bf bacula-dir.conf} for the Director,
- {\bf bacula-fd.conf} for the File daemon, and {\bf bacula-sd} for the Storage
- daemon.
-
-\item [-d nn]
- \index[sd]{-d nn }
- Set the debug level to {\bf nn}. Higher levels of debug cause more
- information to be displayed on STDOUT concerning what the daemon is doing.
-
-\item [-f]
- Run the daemon in the foreground. This option is needed to run the daemon
- under the debugger.
-
-\item [-g <group>]
- Run the daemon under this group. This must be a group name, not a GID.
-
-\item [-s]
- Do not trap signals. This option is needed to run the daemon under the
- debugger.
-
-\item [-t]
- Read the configuration file and print any error messages, then immediately
- exit. Useful for syntax testing of new configuration files.
-
-\item [-u <user>]
- Run the daemon as this user. This must be a user name, not a UID.
-
-\item [-v]
- Be more verbose or more complete in printing error and informational
- messages. Recommended.
-
-\item [-?]
- Print the version and list of options.
-
-\end{description}
-
-
-\section{Creating a Pool}
-\label{Pool}
-\index[general]{Pool!Creating a }
-\index[general]{Creating a Pool }
-
-Creating the Pool is automatically done when {\bf Bacula} starts, so if you
-understand Pools, you can skip to the next section.
-
-When you run a job, one of the things that Bacula must know is what Volumes to
-use to backup the FileSet. Instead of specifying a Volume (tape) directly, you
-specify which Pool of Volumes you want Bacula to consult when it wants a tape
-for writing backups. Bacula will select the first available Volume from the
-Pool that is appropriate for the Storage device you have specified for the Job
-being run. When a volume has filled up with data, {\bf Bacula} will change its
-VolStatus from {\bf Append} to {\bf Full}, and then {\bf Bacula} will use the
-next volume and so on. If no appendable Volume exists in the Pool, the
-Director will attempt to recycle an old Volume, if there are still no
-appendable Volumes available, {\bf Bacula} will send a message requesting the
-operator to create an appropriate Volume.
-
-{\bf Bacula} keeps track of the Pool name, the volumes contained in the Pool,
-and a number of attributes of each of those Volumes.
-
-When Bacula starts, it ensures that all Pool resource definitions have been
-recorded in the catalog. You can verify this by entering:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-list pools
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-to the console program, which should print something like the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-*list pools
-Using default Catalog name=MySQL DB=bacula
-+--------+---------+---------+---------+----------+-------------+
-| PoolId | Name | NumVols | MaxVols | PoolType | LabelFormat |
-+--------+---------+---------+---------+----------+-------------+
-| 1 | Default | 3 | 0 | Backup | * |
-| 2 | File | 12 | 12 | Backup | File |
-+--------+---------+---------+---------+----------+-------------+
-*
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If you attempt to create the same Pool name a second time, {\bf Bacula} will
-print:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Error: Pool Default already exists.
-Once created, you may use the {\bf update} command to
-modify many of the values in the Pool record.
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\label{Labeling}
-
-\section{Labeling Your Volumes}
-\index[general]{Volumes!Labeling Your }
-\index[general]{Labeling Your Volumes }
-
-Bacula requires that each Volume contains a software label. There are several
-strategies for labeling volumes. The one I use is to label them as they are
-needed by {\bf Bacula} using the console program. That is when Bacula needs a
-new Volume, and it does not find one in the catalog, it will send me an email
-message requesting that I add Volumes to the Pool. I then use the {\bf label}
-command in the Console program to label a new Volume and to define it in the
-Pool database, after which Bacula will begin writing on the new Volume.
-Alternatively, I can use the Console {\bf relabel} command to relabel a Volume
-that is no longer used providing it has VolStatus {\bf Purged}.
-
-Another strategy is to label a set of volumes at the start, then use them as
-{\bf Bacula} requests them. This is most often done if you are cycling through
-a set of tapes, for example using an autochanger. For more details on
-recycling, please see the
-\ilink{Automatic Volume Recycling}{RecyclingChapter} chapter of
-this manual.
-
-If you run a Bacula job, and you have no labeled tapes in the Pool, Bacula
-will inform you, and you can create them "on-the-fly" so to speak. In my
-case, I label my tapes with the date, for example: {\bf DLT-18April02}. See
-below for the details of using the {\bf label} command.
-
-\section{Labeling Volumes with the Console Program}
-\index[general]{Labeling Volumes with the Console Program }
-\index[general]{Program!Labeling Volumes with the Console }
-
-Labeling volumes is normally done by using the console program.
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item ./bconsole
-\item label
- \end{enumerate}
-
-If Bacula complains that you cannot label the tape because it is already
-labeled, simply {\bf unmount} the tape using the {\bf unmount} command in the
-console, then physically mount a blank tape and re-issue the {\bf label}
-command.
-
-Since the physical storage media is different for each device, the {\bf label}
-command will provide you with a list of the defined Storage resources such as
-the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-The defined Storage resources are:
- 1: File
- 2: 8mmDrive
- 3: DLTDrive
- 4: SDT-10000
-Select Storage resource (1-4):
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-At this point, you should have a blank tape in the drive corresponding to the
-Storage resource that you select.
-
-It will then ask you for the Volume name.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Enter new Volume name:
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If Bacula complains:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Media record for Volume xxxx already exists.
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-It means that the volume name {\bf xxxx} that you entered already exists in
-the Media database. You can list all the defined Media (Volumes) with the {\bf
-list media} command. Note, the LastWritten column has been truncated for
-proper printing.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-+---------------+---------+--------+----------------+-----/~/-+------------+-----+
-| VolumeName | MediaTyp| VolStat| VolBytes | LastWri | VolReten | Recy|
-+---------------+---------+--------+----------------+---------+------------+-----+
-| DLTVol0002 | DLT8000 | Purged | 56,128,042,217 | 2001-10 | 31,536,000 | 0 |
-| DLT-07Oct2001 | DLT8000 | Full | 56,172,030,586 | 2001-11 | 31,536,000 | 0 |
-| DLT-08Nov2001 | DLT8000 | Full | 55,691,684,216 | 2001-12 | 31,536,000 | 0 |
-| DLT-01Dec2001 | DLT8000 | Full | 55,162,215,866 | 2001-12 | 31,536,000 | 0 |
-| DLT-28Dec2001 | DLT8000 | Full | 57,888,007,042 | 2002-01 | 31,536,000 | 0 |
-| DLT-20Jan2002 | DLT8000 | Full | 57,003,507,308 | 2002-02 | 31,536,000 | 0 |
-| DLT-16Feb2002 | DLT8000 | Full | 55,772,630,824 | 2002-03 | 31,536,000 | 0 |
-| DLT-12Mar2002 | DLT8000 | Full | 50,666,320,453 | 1970-01 | 31,536,000 | 0 |
-| DLT-27Mar2002 | DLT8000 | Full | 57,592,952,309 | 2002-04 | 31,536,000 | 0 |
-| DLT-15Apr2002 | DLT8000 | Full | 57,190,864,185 | 2002-05 | 31,536,000 | 0 |
-| DLT-04May2002 | DLT8000 | Full | 60,486,677,724 | 2002-05 | 31,536,000 | 0 |
-| DLT-26May02 | DLT8000 | Append | 1,336,699,620 | 2002-05 | 31,536,000 | 1 |
-+---------------+---------+--------+----------------+-----/~/-+------------+-----+
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Once Bacula has verified that the volume does not already exist, it will
-prompt you for the name of the Pool in which the Volume (tape) is to be
-created. If there is only one Pool (Default), it will be automatically
-selected.
-
-If the tape is successfully labeled, a Volume record will also be created in
-the Pool. That is the Volume name and all its other attributes will appear
-when you list the Pool. In addition, that Volume will be available for backup
-if the MediaType matches what is requested by the Storage daemon.
-
-When you labeled the tape, you answered very few questions about it --
-principally the Volume name, and perhaps the Slot. However, a Volume record in
-the catalog database (internally known as a Media record) contains quite a few
-attributes. Most of these attributes will be filled in from the default values
-that were defined in the Pool (i.e. the Pool holds most of the default
-attributes used when creating a Volume).
-
-It is also possible to add media to the pool without physically labeling the
-Volumes. This can be done with the {\bf add} command. For more information,
-please see the
-\ilink{Console Chapter}{TheConsoleChapter} of this manual.
+++ /dev/null
-#!/bin/sh
-
-ftp -i ftp.sectoor.de <<END_OF_DATA
-cd www/htdocs/dev-manual
-lcd /home/kern/bacula/docs/manual/bacula
-mput *
-cd ..
-lcd ..
-put dev-bacula.pdf dev-bacula.pdf
-quit
-END_OF_DATA
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-% TODO: this chapter name is confusing ... maybe rename to
-% TODO: "File Integrity Checking with Bacula"?
-\chapter{Using Bacula to Improve Computer Security}
-\label{VerifyChapter}
-\index[general]{Security!Using Bacula to Improve Computer }
-\index[general]{Using Bacula to Improve Computer Security }
-
-% TODO: only those two digest algorithms?
-% TODO: can it use multiple at a time? (record and use both SHA1 and MD5?)
-Since Bacula maintains a catalog of files, their attributes, and either SHA1
-or MD5 signatures, it can be an ideal tool for improving computer security.
-This is done by making a snapshot of your system files with a {\bf Verify} Job
-and then checking the current state of your system against the snapshot, on a
-regular basis (e.g. nightly).
-
-The first step is to set up a {\bf Verify} Job and to run it with:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Level = InitCatalog
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The {\bf InitCatalog} level tells {\bf Bacula} simply to get the information on
-the specified files and to put it into the catalog. That is your database is
-initialized and no comparison is done. The {\bf InitCatalog} is normally run
-one time manually.
-
-Thereafter, you will run a Verify Job on a daily (or whatever) basis with:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Level = Catalog
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The {\bf Level = Catalog} level tells Bacula to compare the current state of
-the files on the Client to the last {\bf InitCatalog} that is stored in the
-catalog and to report any differences. See the example below for the format of
-the output.
-
-You decide what files you want to form your "snapshot" by specifying them in
-a {\bf FileSet} resource, and normally, they will be system files that do not
-change, or that only certain features change.
-
-Then you decide what attributes of each file you want compared by specifying
-comparison options on the {\bf Include} statements that you use in the {\bf
-FileSet} resource of your {\bf Catalog} Jobs.
-
-\section{The Details}
-\index[general]{Details }
-
-In the discussion that follows, we will make reference to the Verify
-Configuration Example that is included below in the {\bf A Verify
-Configuration Example} section. You might want to look it over now to get an
-idea of what it does.
-
-The main elements consist of adding a schedule, which will normally be run
-daily, or perhaps more often. This is provided by the {\bf VerifyCycle}
-Schedule, which runs at 5:05 in the morning every day.
-
-Then you must define a Job, much as is done below. We recommend that the Job
-name contain the name of your machine as well as the word {\bf Verify} or {\bf
-Check}. In our example, we named it {\bf MatouVerify}. This will permit you to
-easily identify your job when running it from the Console.
-
-You will notice that most records of the Job are quite standard, but that the
-{\bf FileSet} resource contains {\bf verify=pins1} option in addition to the
-standard {\bf signature=SHA1} option. If you don't want SHA1 signature
-comparison, and we cannot imagine why not, you can drop the {\bf
-signature=SHA1} and none will be computed nor stored in the catalog. Or
-alternatively, you can use {\bf verify=pins5} and {\bf signature=MD5}, which
-will use the MD5 hash algorithm. The MD5 hash computes faster than SHA1, but
-is cryptographically less secure.
-
-The {\bf verify=pins1} is ignored during the {\bf InitCatalog} Job, but is
-used during the subsequent {\bf Catalog} Jobs to specify what attributes of
-the files should be compared to those found in the catalog. {\bf pins1} is a
-reasonable set to begin with, but you may want to look at the details of these
-and other options. They can be found in the
-\ilink{FileSet Resource}{FileSetResource} section of this manual.
-Briefly, however, the {\bf p} of the {\bf pins1} tells Verify to compare the
-permissions bits, the {\bf i} is to compare inodes, the {\bf n} causes
-comparison of the number of links, the {\bf s} compares the file size, and the
-{\bf 1} compares the SHA1 checksums (this requires the {\bf signature=SHA1}
-option to have been set also).
-
-You must also specify the {\bf Client} and the {\bf Catalog} resources for
-your Verify job, but you probably already have them created for your client
-and do not need to recreate them, they are included in the example below for
-completeness.
-
-As mentioned above, you will need to have a {\bf FileSet} resource for the
-Verify job, which will have the additional {\bf verify=pins1} option. You will
-want to take some care in defining the list of files to be included in your
-{\bf FileSet}. Basically, you will want to include all system (or other) files
-that should not change on your system. If you select files, such as log files
-or mail files, which are constantly changing, your automatic Verify job will
-be constantly finding differences. The objective in forming the FileSet is to
-choose all unchanging important system files. Then if any of those files has
-changed, you will be notified, and you can determine if it changed because you
-loaded a new package, or because someone has broken into your computer and
-modified your files. The example below shows a list of files that I use on my
-Red Hat 7.3 system. Since I didn't spend a lot of time working on it, it
-probably is missing a few important files (if you find one, please send it to
-me). On the other hand, as long as I don't load any new packages, none of
-these files change during normal operation of the system.
-
-\section{Running the Verify}
-\index[general]{Running the Verify }
-\index[general]{Verify!Running the }
-
-The first thing you will want to do is to run an {\bf InitCatalog} level
-Verify Job. This will initialize the catalog to contain the file information
-that will later be used as a basis for comparisons with the actual file
-system, thus allowing you to detect any changes (and possible intrusions into
-your system).
-
-The easiest way to run the {\bf InitCatalog} is manually with the console
-program by simply entering {\bf run}. You will be presented with a list of
-Jobs that can be run, and you will choose the one that corresponds to your
-Verify Job, {\bf MatouVerify} in this example.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-The defined Job resources are:
- 1: MatouVerify
- 2: kernsrestore
- 3: Filetest
- 4: kernsave
-Select Job resource (1-4): 1
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Next, the console program will show you the basic parameters of the Job and
-ask you:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Run Verify job
-JobName: MatouVerify
-FileSet: Verify Set
-Level: Catalog
-Client: MatouVerify
-Storage: DLTDrive
-OK to run? (yes/mod/no): mod
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Here, you want to respond {\bf mod} to modify the parameters because the Level
-is by default set to {\bf Catalog} and we want to run an {\bf InitCatalog}
-Job. After responding {\bf mod}, the console will ask:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Parameters to modify:
- 1: Job
- 2: Level
- 3: FileSet
- 4: Client
- 5: Storage
-Select parameter to modify (1-5): 2
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-you should select number 2 to modify the {\bf Level}, and it will display:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Levels:
- 1: Initialize Catalog
- 2: Verify from Catalog
- 3: Verify Volume
- 4: Verify Volume Data
-Select level (1-4): 1
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Choose item 1, and you will see the final display:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Run Verify job
-JobName: MatouVerify
-FileSet: Verify Set
-Level: Initcatalog
-Client: MatouVerify
-Storage: DLTDrive
-OK to run? (yes/mod/no): yes
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-at which point you respond {\bf yes}, and the Job will begin.
-
-Thereafter the Job will automatically start according to the schedule you
-have defined. If you wish to immediately verify it, you can simply run a
-Verify {\bf Catalog} which will be the default. No differences should be
-found.
-
-\section{What To Do When Differences Are Found}
-\index[general]{What To Do When Differences Are Found }
-\index[general]{Found!What To Do When Differences Are }
-
-If you have setup your messages correctly, you should be notified if there are
-any differences and exactly what they are. For example, below is the email
-received after doing an update of OpenSSH:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-HeadMan: Start Verify JobId 83 Job=RufusVerify.2002-06-25.21:41:05
-HeadMan: Verifying against Init JobId 70 run 2002-06-21 18:58:51
-HeadMan: File: /etc/pam.d/sshd
-HeadMan: st_ino differ. Cat: 4674b File: 46765
-HeadMan: File: /etc/rc.d/init.d/sshd
-HeadMan: st_ino differ. Cat: 56230 File: 56231
-HeadMan: File: /etc/ssh/ssh_config
-HeadMan: st_ino differ. Cat: 81317 File: 8131b
-HeadMan: st_size differ. Cat: 1202 File: 1297
-HeadMan: SHA1 differs.
-HeadMan: File: /etc/ssh/sshd_config
-HeadMan: st_ino differ. Cat: 81398 File: 81325
-HeadMan: st_size differ. Cat: 1182 File: 1579
-HeadMan: SHA1 differs.
-HeadMan: File: /etc/ssh/ssh_config.rpmnew
-HeadMan: st_ino differ. Cat: 812dd File: 812b3
-HeadMan: st_size differ. Cat: 1167 File: 1114
-HeadMan: SHA1 differs.
-HeadMan: File: /etc/ssh/sshd_config.rpmnew
-HeadMan: st_ino differ. Cat: 81397 File: 812dd
-HeadMan: st_size differ. Cat: 2528 File: 2407
-HeadMan: SHA1 differs.
-HeadMan: File: /etc/ssh/moduli
-HeadMan: st_ino differ. Cat: 812b3 File: 812ab
-HeadMan: File: /usr/bin/scp
-HeadMan: st_ino differ. Cat: 5e07e File: 5e343
-HeadMan: st_size differ. Cat: 26728 File: 26952
-HeadMan: SHA1 differs.
-HeadMan: File: /usr/bin/ssh-keygen
-HeadMan: st_ino differ. Cat: 5df1d File: 5e07e
-HeadMan: st_size differ. Cat: 80488 File: 84648
-HeadMan: SHA1 differs.
-HeadMan: File: /usr/bin/sftp
-HeadMan: st_ino differ. Cat: 5e2e8 File: 5df1d
-HeadMan: st_size differ. Cat: 46952 File: 46984
-HeadMan: SHA1 differs.
-HeadMan: File: /usr/bin/slogin
-HeadMan: st_ino differ. Cat: 5e359 File: 5e2e8
-HeadMan: File: /usr/bin/ssh
-HeadMan: st_mode differ. Cat: 89ed File: 81ed
-HeadMan: st_ino differ. Cat: 5e35a File: 5e359
-HeadMan: st_size differ. Cat: 219932 File: 234440
-HeadMan: SHA1 differs.
-HeadMan: File: /usr/bin/ssh-add
-HeadMan: st_ino differ. Cat: 5e35b File: 5e35a
-HeadMan: st_size differ. Cat: 76328 File: 81448
-HeadMan: SHA1 differs.
-HeadMan: File: /usr/bin/ssh-agent
-HeadMan: st_ino differ. Cat: 5e35c File: 5e35b
-HeadMan: st_size differ. Cat: 43208 File: 47368
-HeadMan: SHA1 differs.
-HeadMan: File: /usr/bin/ssh-keyscan
-HeadMan: st_ino differ. Cat: 5e35d File: 5e96a
-HeadMan: st_size differ. Cat: 139272 File: 151560
-HeadMan: SHA1 differs.
-HeadMan: 25-Jun-2002 21:41
-JobId: 83
-Job: RufusVerify.2002-06-25.21:41:05
-FileSet: Verify Set
-Verify Level: Catalog
-Client: RufusVerify
-Start time: 25-Jun-2002 21:41
-End time: 25-Jun-2002 21:41
-Files Examined: 4,258
-Termination: Verify Differences
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-At this point, it was obvious that these files were modified during
-installation of the RPMs. If you want to be super safe, you should run a {\bf
-Verify Level=Catalog} immediately before installing new software to verify
-that there are no differences, then run a {\bf Verify Level=InitCatalog}
-immediately after the installation.
-
-To keep the above email from being sent every night when the Verify Job runs,
-we simply re-run the Verify Job setting the level to {\bf InitCatalog} (as we
-did above in the very beginning). This will re-establish the current state of
-the system as your new basis for future comparisons. Take care that you don't
-do an {\bf InitCatalog} after someone has placed a Trojan horse on your
-system!
-
-If you have included in your {\bf FileSet} a file that is changed by the
-normal operation of your system, you will get false matches, and you will need
-to modify the {\bf FileSet} to exclude that file (or not to Include it), and
-then re-run the {\bf InitCatalog}.
-
-The FileSet that is shown below is what I use on my Red Hat 7.3 system. With a
-bit more thought, you can probably add quite a number of additional files that
-should be monitored.
-
-\section{A Verify Configuration Example}
-\index[general]{Verify Configuration Example }
-\index[general]{Example!Verify Configuration }
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Schedule {
- Name = "VerifyCycle"
- Run = Level=Catalog sun-sat at 5:05
-}
-Job {
- Name = "MatouVerify"
- Type = Verify
- Level = Catalog # default level
- Client = MatouVerify
- FileSet = "Verify Set"
- Messages = Standard
- Storage = DLTDrive
- Pool = Default
- Schedule = "VerifyCycle"
-}
-#
-# The list of files in this FileSet should be carefully
-# chosen. This is a good starting point.
-#
-FileSet {
- Name = "Verify Set"
- Include {
- Options {
- verify=pins1
- signature=SHA1
- }
- File = /boot
- File = /bin
- File = /sbin
- File = /usr/bin
- File = /lib
- File = /root/.ssh
- File = /home/kern/.ssh
- File = /var/named
- File = /etc/sysconfig
- File = /etc/ssh
- File = /etc/security
- File = /etc/exports
- File = /etc/rc.d/init.d
- File = /etc/sendmail.cf
- File = /etc/sysctl.conf
- File = /etc/services
- File = /etc/xinetd.d
- File = /etc/hosts.allow
- File = /etc/hosts.deny
- File = /etc/hosts
- File = /etc/modules.conf
- File = /etc/named.conf
- File = /etc/pam.d
- File = /etc/resolv.conf
- }
- Exclude = { }
-P
-Client {
- Name = MatouVerify
- Address = lmatou
- Catalog = Bacula
- Password = ""
- File Retention = 80d # 80 days
- Job Retention = 1y # one year
- AutoPrune = yes # Prune expired Jobs/Files
-}
-Catalog {
- Name = Bacula
- dbname = verify; user = bacula; password = ""
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{The Windows Version of Bacula}
-\label{Win32Chapter}
-\index[general]{Windows Version of Bacula}
-
-At the current time only the File daemon or Client program has
-been thouroughly tested on Windows and is suitable for a
-production environment. As a consequence, when we
-speak of the Windows version of Bacula below, we are referring to
-the File daemon (client) only.
-
-As of Bacula version 1.39.20 or greater, the installer is capable
-of installing not just the Client program, but also the Director
-and the Storage daemon and all the other programs that were
-previously available only on Unix systems. These additional
-programs, notably the Director and Storage daemon, have been partially
-tested, are reported to have some bugs, and still need to be documented.
-They are not yet supported, and we cannot currently accept or fix
-bug reports on them. Consequently, please test them carefully before putting
-them into a critical production environment.
-
-The Windows version of the Bacula File daemon has been tested on Win98, WinMe,
-WinNT, WinXP, Win2000, and Windows 2003 systems. We have coded to support
-Win95, but no longer have a system for testing. The Windows version of
-Bacula is a native Win32 port, but there are very few source code changes
-to the Unix code, which means that the Windows version is for the most part
-running code that has long proved stable on Unix systems. When running, it
-is perfectly integrated with Windows and displays its icon in the system
-icon tray, and provides a system tray menu to obtain additional information
-on how Bacula is running (status and events dialog boxes). If so desired,
-it can also be stopped by using the system tray menu, though this should
-normally never be necessary.
-
-Once installed Bacula normally runs as a system service. This means that it is
-immediately started by the operating system when the system is booted, and
-runs in the background even if there is no user logged into the system.
-
-\section{Win32 Installation}
-\label{installation}
-\index[general]{Installation}
-\index[general]{Win32!Installation}
-
-Normally, you will install the Windows version of Bacula from the binaries.
-This install is standard Windows .exe that runs an install wizard using the
-NSIS Free Software installer, so if you have already installed Windows
-software, it should be very familiar to you.
-
-If you have a previous version Bacula (1.39.20 or lower)
-installed, you should stop the service, uninstall it, and remove
-the Bacula installation directory possibly saving your
-bacula-fd.conf, bconsole.conf, and bwx-console.conf files
-for use with the new version you will install. The Uninstall
-program is normally found in {\bf c:\textbackslash{}bacula\textbackslash{}Uninstall.exe}.
-We also recommend that you completely remove the directory
-{\bf c:\textbackslash{}bacula}, because the current installer
-uses a different directory structure (see below).
-
-Providing you do not already have Bacula installed,
-the new installer (1.39.22 and later) installs the binaries and dlls in
-c:\textbackslash{}Program Files\textbackslash{}Bacula\textbackslash{}bin
-and the configuration files
-in c:\textbackslash{}Documents and Settings\textbackslash{}All Users\textbackslash{}Application Data\textbackslash{}Bacula
-In addition, the {\bf Start\-\gt{}All Programs\-\gt{}Bacula} menu item
-will be created during the installation, and on that menu, you
-will find items for editing the configuration files, displaying
-the document, and starting bwx-console or bconsole.
-
-
-Finally, proceed with the installation.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item You must be logged in as Administrator to the local machine
-to do a correct installation, if not, please do so before continuing.
-Some users have attempted to install logged in as a domain administrator
-account and experienced permissions problems attempting to run
-Bacula, so we don't recommend that option.
-
-\item Simply double click on the {\bf winbacula-1.xx.0.exe} NSIS install
- icon. The actual name of the icon will vary from one release version to
- another.
-
-\includegraphics{\idir win32-nsis.eps} winbacula-1.xx.0.exe
-
-\item Once launched, the installer wizard will ask you if you want to install
- Bacula.
-
-\addcontentsline{lof}{figure}{Win32 Client Setup Wizard}
-\includegraphics{\idir win32-welcome.eps}
-
-\item Next you will be asked to select the installation type.
-
-\addcontentsline{lof}{figure}{Win32 Installation Type}
-\includegraphics{\idir win32-installation-type.eps}
-
-
-\item If you proceed, you will be asked to select the components to be
- installed. You may install the Bacula program (Bacula File Service) and or
- the documentation. Both will be installed in sub-directories of the install
- location that you choose later. The components dialog looks like the
- following:
-
-\addcontentsline{lof}{figure}{Win32 Component Selection Dialog}
-\includegraphics{\idir win32-pkg.eps}
-\index[general]{Upgrading}
-
-\item If you are installing for the first time, you will be asked to
- enter some very basic information about your configuration. If
- you are not sure what to enter, or have previously saved configuration
- files, you can put anything you want into the fields, then either
- replace the configuration files later with the ones saved, or edit
- the file.
-
- If you are upgrading an existing installation, the following will
- not be displayed.
-
-
-\addcontentsline{lof}{figure}{Win32 Configure}
-\includegraphics{\idir win32-config.eps}
-
-\item While the various files are being loaded, you will see the following
- dialog:
-
- \addcontentsline{lof}{figure}{Win32 Install Progress}
- \includegraphics{\idir win32-installing.eps}
-
-
-\item Finally, the finish dialog will appear:
-
- \addcontentsline{lof}{figure}{Win32 Client Setup Completed}
- \includegraphics{\idir win32-finish.eps}
-
-\
-\end{itemize}
-
-That should complete the installation process. When the Bacula File Server is
-ready to serve files, an icon \includegraphics{\idir idle.eps} representing a
-cassette (or tape) will appear in the system tray
-\includegraphics{\idir tray-icon.eps}; right click on it and a menu will appear.\\
-\includegraphics{\idir menu.eps}\\
-The {\bf Events} item is currently unimplemented, by selecting the {\bf
-Status} item, you can verify whether any jobs are running or not.
-
-When the Bacula File Server begins saving files, the color of the holes in the
-cassette icon will change from white to green \includegraphics{\idir running.eps},
-and if there is an error, the holes in the cassette icon will change to red
-\includegraphics{\idir error.eps}.
-
-If you are using remote desktop connections between your Windows boxes, be
-warned that that tray icon does not always appear. It will always be visible
-when you log into the console, but the remote desktop may not display it.
-
-\section{Post Win32 Installation}
-\index[general]{Post Win32 Installation}
-\index[general]{Win32!Post Installation}
-
-After installing Bacula and before running it, you should check the contents
-of the configuration files to ensure that they correspond to your
-installation. You can get to them by using:
-the {\bf Start\-\gt{}All Programs\-\gt{}Bacula} menu item.
-
-Finally, but pulling up the Task Manager (ctl-alt-del), verify that Bacula
-is running as a process (not an Application) with User Name SYSTEM. If this is
-not the case, you probably have not installed Bacula while running as
-Administrator, and hence it will be unlikely that Bacula can access
-all the system files.
-
-\section{Uninstalling Bacula on Win32}
-\index[general]{Win32!Uninstalling Bacula}
-\index[general]{Uninstalling Bacula on Win32}
-
-Once Bacula has been installed, it can be uninstalled using the standard
-Windows Add/Remove Programs dialog found on the Control panel.
-
-\section{Dealing with Win32 Problems}
-\label{problems}
-\index[general]{Win32!Dealing with Problems}
-\index[general]{Dealing with Win32 Problems}
-
-Sometimes Win32 machines the File daemon may have very slow
-backup transfer rates compared to other machines. To you might
-try setting the Maximum Network Buffer Size to 32,768 in both the
-File daemon and in the Storage daemon. The default size is larger,
-and apparently some Windows ethernet controllers do not deal with
-a larger network buffer size.
-
-Many Windows ethernet drivers have a tendency to either run slowly
-due to old broken firmware, or because they are running in half-duplex
-mode. Please check with the ethernet card manufacturer for the latest
-firmware and use whatever techniques are necessary to ensure that the
-card is running in duplex.
-
-If you are not using the portable option, and you have VSS
-(Volume Shadow Copy) enabled in the Director, and you experience
-problems with Bacula not being able to open files, it is most
-likely that you are running an antivirus program that blocks
-Bacula from doing certain operations. In this case, disable the
-antivirus program and try another backup. If it succeeds, either
-get a different (better) antivirus program or use something like
-RunClientJobBefore/After to turn off the antivirus program while
-the backup is running.
-
-If turning off anti-virus software does not resolve your VSS
-problems, you might have to turn on VSS debugging. The following
-link describes how to do this:
-\elink{http://support.microsoft.com/kb/887013/en-us}{\url{http://support.microsoft.com/kb/887013/en-us}}.
-
-In Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2003 the VSS Writer for Exchange
-is turned off by default. To turn it on, please see the following link:
-\elink{http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;EN-US;Q838183}{\url{
-http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;EN-US;Q838183}}
-
-
-The most likely source of problems is authentication when the Director
-attempts to connect to the File daemon that you installed. This can occur if
-the names and the passwords defined in the File daemon's configuration file
-{\bf bacula-fd.conf} file on
-the Windows machine do not match with the names and the passwords in the
-Director's configuration file {\bf bacula-dir.conf} located on your Unix/Linux
-server.
-
-More specifically, the password found in the {\bf Client} resource in the
-Director's configuration file must be the same as the password in the {\bf
-Director} resource of the File daemon's configuration file. In addition, the
-name of the {\bf Director} resource in the File daemon's configuration file
-must be the same as the name in the {\bf Director} resource of the Director's
-configuration file.
-
-It is a bit hard to explain in words, but if you understand that a Director
-normally has multiple Clients and a Client (or File daemon) may permit access
-by multiple Directors, you can see that the names and the passwords on both
-sides must match for proper authentication.
-
-One user had serious problems with the configuration file until he realized
-that the Unix end of line conventions were used and Bacula wanted them in
-Windows format. This has not been confirmed though, and Bacula version 2.0.0
-and above should now accept all end of line conventions (Win32,
-Unix, Mac).
-
-Running Unix like programs on Windows machines is a bit frustrating because
-the Windows command line shell (DOS Window) is rather primitive. As a
-consequence, it is not generally possible to see the debug information and
-certain error messages that Bacula prints. With a bit of work, however, it is
-possible. When everything else fails and you want to {\bf see} what is going
-on, try the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Start a DOS shell Window.
- c:\Program Files\bacula\bin\bacula-fd -t >out
- type out
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The precise path to bacula-fd depends on where it is installed. The
-example above is the default used in 1.39.22 and later.
-The {\bf -t} option will cause Bacula to read the configuration file, print
-any error messages and then exit. the {\bf \gt{}} redirects the output to the
-file named {\bf out}, which you can list with the {\bf type} command.
-
-If something is going wrong later, or you want to run {\bf Bacula} with a
-debug option, you might try starting it as:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- c:\Program Files\bacula\bin\bacula-fd -d 100 >out
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-In this case, Bacula will run until you explicitly stop it, which will give
-you a chance to connect to it from your Unix/Linux server. In later versions
-of Bacula (1.34 on, I think), when you start the File daemon in debug mode it
-can write the output to a trace file {\bf bacula.trace} in the current
-directory. To enable this, before running a job, use the console, and enter:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- trace on
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-then run the job, and once you have terminated the File daemon, you will find
-the debug output in the {\bf bacula.trace} file, which will probably be
-located in the same directory as bacula-fd.exe.
-
-In addition, you should look in the System Applications log on the Control
-Panel to find any Windows errors that Bacula got during the startup process.
-
-Finally, due to the above problems, when you turn on debugging, and specify
-trace=1 on a setdebug command in the Console, Bacula will write the debug
-information to the file {\bf bacula.trace} in the directory from which Bacula
-is executing.
-
-If you are having problems with ClientRunBeforeJob scripts randomly dying,
-it is possible that you have run into an Oracle bug. See bug number 622 in
-the bugs.bacula.org database. The following information has been
-provided by a user on this issue:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-The information in this document applies to:
- Oracle HTTP Server - Version: 9.0.4
- Microsoft Windows Server 2003
- Symptoms
- When starting an OC4J instance, the System Clock runs faster, about 7
-seconds per minute.
-
- Cause
-
- + This is caused by the Sun JVM bug 4500388, which states that "Calling
-Thread.sleep() with a small argument affects the system clock". Although
-this is reported as fixed in JDK 1.4.0_02, several reports contradict this
-(see the bug in
-http://bugs.sun.com/bugdatabase/view_bug.do?bug_id=4500388).
-
- + Also reported by Microsoft as "The system clock may run fast when you
-use the ACPI power management timer as a high-resolution counter on Windows
-2000-based computers" (See http://support.microsoft.com/?id=821893)
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-You may wish to start the daemon with debug mode on rather than doing it
-using bconsole. To do so, edit the following registry key:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\Bacula-dir
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-using regedit, then add -dnn after the /service option, where nn represents
-the debug level you want.
-
-\label{Compatibility}
-\section{Windows Compatibility Considerations}
-\index[general]{Windows Compatibility Considerations}
-\index[general]{Considerations!Windows Compatibility}
-
-If you are not using the VSS (Volume Shadow Copy) option described in the
-next section of this chapter, and if any applications are running during
-the backup and they have files opened exclusively, Bacula will not be able
-to backup those files, so be sure you close your applications (or tell your
-users to close their applications) before the backup. Fortunately, most
-Microsoft applications do not open files exclusively so that they can be
-backed up. However, you will need to experiment. In any case, if Bacula
-cannot open the file, it will print an error message, so you will always
-know which files were not backed up. For version 1.37.25 and greater, see
-the section below on Volume Shadow Copy Service that permits backing up any
-file.
-
-During backup, Bacula doesn't know about the system registry, so you will
-either need to write it out to an ASCII file using {\bf regedit~~/e} or use a
-program specifically designed to make a copy or backup the registry.
-
-In Bacula version 1.31 and later, we use Windows backup API calls by
-default. Typical of Windows, programming these special BackupRead and
-BackupWrite calls is a real nightmare of complications. The end result
-gives some distinct advantages and some disadvantages.
-
-First, the advantages are that on WinNT/2K/XP systems, the security and
-ownership information is now backed up. In addition, with the exception of
-files in exclusive use by another program, Bacula can now access all system
-files. This means that when you restore files, the security and ownership
-information will be restored on WinNT/2K/XP along with the data.
-
-The disadvantage of the Windows backup API calls is that it produces
-non-portable backups. That is files and their data that are backed up on
-WinNT using the native API calls (BackupRead/BackupWrite) cannot be
-restored on Win95/98/Me or Unix systems. In principle, a file backed up on
-WinNT can be restored on WinXP, but this remains to be seen in practice
-(not yet tested). Bacula should be able to read non-portable
-backups on any system and restore the data appropriately. However,
-on a system that does not have the BackupRead/BackupWrite calls (older
-Windows versions and all Unix/Linux machines), though the file data
-can be restored, the Windows security and access control data will not be restored.
-This means that a standard set of access permissions will be set for
-such restored files.
-
-
-As a default, Bacula backs up Windows systems using the Windows API calls.
-If you want to backup data on a WinNT/2K/XP system and restore it on a
-Unix/Win95/98/Me system, we have provided a special {\bf portable} option
-that backs up the data in a portable fashion by using portable API calls.
-See the \ilink{portable option}{portable} on the Include statement in a
-FileSet resource in the Director's configuration chapter for the details on
-setting this option. However, using the portable option means you may have
-permissions problems accessing files, and none of the security and
-ownership information will be backed up or restored. The file data can,
-however, be restored on any system.
-
-You should always be able to restore any file backed up on Unix or Win95/98/Me
-to any other system. On some systems, such as WinNT/2K/XP, you may have to
-reset the ownership of such restored files. Any file backed up on WinNT/2K/XP
-should in principle be able to be restored to a similar system (i.e.
-WinNT/2K/XP), however, I am unsure of the consequences if the owner
-information and accounts are not identical on both systems. Bacula will not
-let you restore files backed up on WinNT/2K/XP to any other system (i.e. Unix
-Win95/98/Me) if you have used the defaults.
-
-Finally, if you specify the {\bf portable=yes} option on the files you back
-up. Bacula will be able to restore them on any other system. However, any
-WinNT/2K/XP specific security and ownership information will be lost.
-
-The following matrix will give you an idea of what you can expect. Thanks to
-Marc Brueckner for doing the tests:
-
-\addcontentsline{lot}{table}{WinNT/2K/XP Restore Portability Status}
-\begin{longtable}{|l|l|p{2.8in}|}
- \hline
-\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{\bf Backup OS} & \multicolumn{1}{c|}{\bf Restore OS}
-& \multicolumn{1}{c|}{\bf Results } \\
- \hline {WinMe} & {WinMe} & {Works } \\
- \hline {WinMe} & {WinNT} & {Works (SYSTEM permissions) } \\
- \hline {WinMe} & {WinXP} & {Works (SYSTEM permissions) } \\
- \hline {WinMe} & {Linux} & {Works (SYSTEM permissions) } \\
- \hline {\ } & {\ } & {\ } \\
- \hline {WinXP} & {WinXP} & {Works } \\
- \hline {WinXP} & {WinNT} & {Works (all files OK, but got "The data is invalid"
-message) } \\
- \hline {WinXP} & {WinMe} & {Error: Win32 data stream not supported. } \\
- \hline {WinXP} & {WinMe} & {Works if {\bf Portable=yes} specified during backup.} \\
- \hline {WinXP} & {Linux} & {Error: Win32 data stream not supported. } \\
- \hline {WinXP} & {Linux} & {Works if {\bf Portable=yes} specified during backup.}\\
- \hline {\ } & {\ } & {\ } \\
- \hline {WinNT} & {WinNT} & {Works } \\
- \hline {WinNT} & {WinXP} & {Works } \\
- \hline {WinNT} & {WinMe} & {Error: Win32 data stream not supported. } \\
- \hline {WinNT} & {WinMe} & {Works if {\bf Portable=yes} specified during backup.}\\
- \hline {WinNT} & {Linux} & {Error: Win32 data stream not supported. } \\
- \hline {WinNT} & {Linux} & {Works if {\bf Portable=yes} specified during backup. }\\
- \hline {\ } & {\ } & {\ } \\
- \hline {Linux} & {Linux} & {Works } \\
- \hline {Linux} & {WinNT} & {Works (SYSTEM permissions) } \\
- \hline {Linux} & {WinMe} & {Works } \\
- \hline {Linux} & {WinXP} & {Works (SYSTEM permissions)}
-\\ \hline
-\end{longtable}
-
-Note: with Bacula versions 1.39.x and later, non-portable Windows data can
-be restore to any machine.
-
-
-\label{VSS}
-\section{Volume Shadow Copy Service}
-\index[general]{Volume Shadow Copy Service}
-\index[general]{VSS}
-In version 1.37.30 and greater, you can turn on Microsoft's Volume
-Shadow Copy Service (VSS).
-
-Microsoft added VSS to Windows XP and Windows 2003. From the perspective of
-a backup-solution for Windows, this is an extremely important step. VSS
-allows Bacula to backup open files and even to interact with applications like
-RDBMS to produce consistent file copies. VSS aware applications are called
-VSS Writers, they register with the OS so that when Bacula wants to do a
-Snapshot, the OS will notify the register Writer programs, which may then
-create a consistent state in their application, which will be backed up.
-Examples for these writers are "MSDE" (Microsoft database
-engine), "Event Log Writer", "Registry Writer" plus 3rd
-party-writers. If you have a non-vss aware application (e.g.
-SQL Anywhere or probably MySQL), a shadow copy is still generated
-and the open files can be backed up, but there is no guarantee
-that the file is consistent.
-
-Bacula produces a message from each of the registered writer programs
-when it is doing a VSS backup so you know which ones are correctly backed
-up.
-
-Bacula supports VSS on both Windows 2003 and Windows XP.
-Technically Bacula creates a shadow copy as soon as the backup process
-starts. It does then backup all files from the shadow copy and destroys the
-shadow copy after the backup process. Please have in mind, that VSS
-creates a snapshot and thus backs up the system at the state it had
-when starting the backup. It will disregard file changes which occur during
-the backup process.
-
-VSS can be turned on by placing an
-
-\index[dir]{Enable VSS}
-\index[general]{Enable VSS}
-\begin{verbatim}
-Enable VSS = yes
-\end{verbatim}
-
-in your FileSet resource.
-
-The VSS aware File daemon has the letters VSS on the signon line that
-it produces when contacted by the console. For example:
-\begin{verbatim}
-Tibs-fd Version: 1.37.32 (22 July 2005) VSS Windows XP MVS NT 5.1.2600
-\end{verbatim}
-the VSS is shown in the line above. This only means that the File daemon
-is capable of doing VSS not that VSS is turned on for a particular backup.
-There are two ways of telling if VSS is actually turned on during a backup.
-The first is to look at the status output for a job, e.g.:
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Running Jobs:
-JobId 1 Job NightlySave.2005-07-23_13.25.45 is running.
- VSS Backup Job started: 23-Jul-05 13:25
- Files=70,113 Bytes=3,987,180,650 Bytes/sec=3,244,247
- Files Examined=75,021
- Processing file: c:/Documents and Settings/kern/My Documents/My Pictures/Misc1/Sans titre - 39.pdd
- SDReadSeqNo=5 fd=352
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-Here, you see under Running Jobs that JobId 1 is "VSS Backup Job started ..."
-This means that VSS is enabled for that job. If VSS is not enabled, it will
-simply show "Backup Job started ..." without the letters VSS.
-
-The second way to know that the job was backed up with VSS is to look at the
-Job Report, which will look something like the following:
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-23-Jul 13:25 rufus-dir: Start Backup JobId 1, Job=NightlySave.2005-07-23_13.25.45
-23-Jul 13:26 rufus-sd: Wrote label to prelabeled Volume "TestVolume001" on device "DDS-4" (/dev/nst0)
-23-Jul 13:26 rufus-sd: Spooling data ...
-23-Jul 13:26 Tibs: Generate VSS snapshots. Driver="VSS WinXP", Drive(s)="C"
-23-Jul 13:26 Tibs: VSS Writer: "MSDEWriter", State: 1 (VSS_WS_STABLE)
-23-Jul 13:26 Tibs: VSS Writer: "Microsoft Writer (Bootable State)", State: 1 (VSS_WS_STABLE)
-23-Jul 13:26 Tibs: VSS Writer: "WMI Writer", State: 1 (VSS_WS_STABLE)
-23-Jul 13:26 Tibs: VSS Writer: "Microsoft Writer (Service State)", State: 1 (VSS_WS_STABLE)
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-In the above Job Report listing, you see that the VSS snapshot was generated for drive C (if
-other drives are backed up, they will be listed on the {\bf Drive(s)="C"} You also see the
-reports from each of the writer program. Here they all report VSS\_WS\_STABLE, which means
-that you will get a consistent snapshot of the data handled by that writer.
-
-\section{VSS Problems}
-\index[general]{Problems!VSS}
-\index[fd] {Problems!VSS}
-\index[general]{VSS Problems}
-\index[fd]{VSS Problems}
-
-If you are experiencing problems such as VSS hanging on MSDE, first try
-running {\bf vssadmin} to check for problems, then try running {\bf
-ntbackup} which also uses VSS to see if it has similar problems. If so, you
-know that the problem is in your Windows machine and not with Bacula.
-
-The FD hang problems were reported with {\bf MSDEwriter} when:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item a local firewall locked local access to the MSDE TCP port (MSDEwriter
-seems to use TCP/IP and not Named Pipes).
-\item msdtcs was installed to run under "localsystem": try running msdtcs
-under networking account (instead of local system) (com+ seems to work
-better with this configuration).
-\end{itemize}
-
-
-\section{Windows Firewalls}
-\index[general]{Firewalls!Windows}
-\index[general]{Windows Firewalls}
-
-If you turn on the firewalling feature on Windows (default in WinXP SP2), you
-are likely to find that the Bacula ports are blocked and you cannot
-communicate to the other daemons. This can be deactivated through the {\bf
-Security Notification} dialog, which is apparently somewhere in the {\bf
-Security Center}. I don't have this on my computer, so I cannot give the exact
-details.
-
-The command:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-netsh firewall set opmode disable
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-is purported to disable the firewall, but this command is not accepted on my
-WinXP Home machine.
-
-\section{Windows Port Usage}
-\index[general]{Windows Port Usage}
-\index[general]{Usage!Windows Port}
-
-If you want to see if the File daemon has properly opened the port and is
-listening, you can enter the following command in a shell window:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- netstat -an | findstr 910[123]
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-TopView is another program that has been recommend, but it is not a
-standard Win32 program, so you must find and download it from the Internet.
-
-\section{Windows Disaster Recovery}
-\index[general]{Recovery!Windows Disaster}
-\index[general]{Windows Disaster Recovery}
-
-We don't currently have a good solution for disaster recovery on Windows as we
-do on Linux. The main piece lacking is a Windows boot floppy or a Windows boot
-CD. Microsoft releases a Windows Pre-installation Environment ({\bf WinPE})
-that could possibly work, but we have not investigated it. This means that
-until someone figures out the correct procedure, you must restore the OS from
-the installation disks, then you can load a Bacula client and restore files.
-Please don't count on using {\bf bextract} to extract files from your backup
-tapes during a disaster recovery unless you have backed up those files using
-the {\bf portable} option. {\bf bextract} does not run on Windows, and the
-normal way Bacula saves files using the Windows API prevents the files from
-being restored on a Unix machine. Once you have an operational Windows OS
-loaded, you can run the File daemon and restore your user files.
-
-Please see
-\ilink{ Disaster Recovery of Win32 Systems}{Win3233} for the latest
-suggestion, which looks very promising.
-
-It looks like Bart PE Builder, which creates a Windows PE (Pre-installation
-Environment) Boot-CD, may be just what is needed to build a complete disaster
-recovery system for Win32. This distribution can be found at
-\elink{http://www.nu2.nu/pebuilder/}{\url{http://www.nu2.nu/pebuilder/}}.
-
-\section{Windows Restore Problems}
-\index[general]{Problems!Windows Restore}
-\index[general]{Windows Restore Problems}
-Please see the
-\ilink{Restore Chapter}{Windows} of this manual for problems
-that you might encounter doing a restore.
-
-section{Windows Backup Problems}
-\index[general]{Problems!Windows Backup}
-\index[general]{Windows Backup Problems}
-If during a Backup, you get the message:
-{\bf ERR=Access is denied} and you are using the portable option,
-you should try both adding both the non-portable (backup API) and
-the Volume Shadow Copy options to your Director's conf file.
-
-In the Options resource:
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-portable = no
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-In the FileSet resource:
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-enablevss = yes
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-In general, specifying these two options should allow you to backup
-any file on a Windows system. However, in some cases, if users
-have allowed to have full control of their folders, even system programs
-such a Bacula can be locked out. In this case, you must identify
-which folders or files are creating the problem and do the following:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Grant ownership of the file/folder to the Administrators group,
-with the option to replace the owner on all child objects.
-\item Grant full control permissions to the Administrators group,
-and change the user's group to only have Modify permission to
-the file/folder and all child objects.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-Thanks to Georger Araujo for the above information.
-
-\section{Windows Ownership and Permissions Problems}
-\index[general]{Problems!Windows Ownership and Permissions}
-\index[general]{Windows Ownership and Permissions Problems}
-
-If you restore files backed up from WinNT/XP/2K to an alternate directory,
-Bacula may need to create some higher level directories that were not saved
-(or restored). In this case, the File daemon will create them under the SYSTEM
-account because that is the account that Bacula runs under as a service. As of
-version 1.32f-3, Bacula creates these files with full access permission.
-However, there may be cases where you have problems accessing those files even
-if you run as administrator. In principle, Microsoft supplies you with the way
-to cease the ownership of those files and thus change the permissions.
-However, a much better solution to working with and changing Win32 permissions
-is the program {\bf SetACL}, which can be found at
-\elink{http://setacl.sourceforge.net/}{\url{http://setacl.sourceforge.net/}}.
-
-If you have not installed Bacula while running as Administrator
-and if Bacula is not running as a Process with the userid (User Name) SYSTEM,
-then it is very unlikely that it will have sufficient permission to
-access all your files.
-
-Some users have experienced problems restoring files that participate in
-the Active Directory. They also report that changing the userid under which
-Bacula (bacula-fd.exe) runs, from SYSTEM to a Domain Admin userid, resolves
-the problem.
-
-
-\section{Manually resetting the Permissions}
-\index[general]{Manually resetting the Permissions}
-\index[general]{Permissions!Manually resetting the}
-
-The following solution was provided by Dan Langille \lt{}dan at langille in
-the dot org domain\gt{}. The steps are performed using Windows 2000 Server but
-they should apply to most Win32 platforms. The procedure outlines how to deal
-with a problem which arises when a restore creates a top-level new directory.
-In this example, "top-level" means something like {\bf
-c:\textbackslash{}src}, not {\bf c:\textbackslash{}tmp\textbackslash{}src}
-where {\bf c:\textbackslash{}tmp} already exists. If a restore job specifies /
-as the {\bf Where:} value, this problem will arise.
-
-The problem appears as a directory which cannot be browsed with Windows
-Explorer. The symptoms include the following message when you try to click on
-that directory:
-
-\includegraphics{\idir access-is-denied.eps}
-
-If you encounter this message, the following steps will change the permissions
-to allow full access.
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item right click on the top level directory (in this example, {\bf c:/src})
- and select {\bf Properties}.
-\item click on the Security tab.
-\item If the following message appears, you can ignore it, and click on {\bf
- OK}.
-
-\includegraphics{\idir view-only.eps}
-
-You should see something like this:
-
-\includegraphics{\idir properties-security.eps}
-\item click on Advanced
-\item click on the Owner tab
-\item Change the owner to something other than the current owner (which is
- {\bf SYSTEM} in this example as shown below).
-
-\includegraphics{\idir properties-security-advanced-owner.eps}
-\item ensure the "Replace owner on subcontainers and objects" box is
- checked
-\item click on OK
-\item When the message "You do not have permission to read the contents of
- directory c:\textbackslash{}src\textbackslash{}basis. Do you wish to replace
- the directory permissions with permissions granting you Full Control?", click
-on Yes.
-
-\includegraphics{\idir confirm.eps}
-\item Click on OK to close the Properties tab
- \end{enumerate}
-
-With the above procedure, you should now have full control over your restored
-directory.
-
-In addition to the above methods of changing permissions, there is a Microsoft
-program named {\bf cacls} that can perform similar functions.
-
-\section{Backing Up the WinNT/XP/2K System State}
-\index[general]{State!Backing Up the WinNT/XP/2K System}
-\index[general]{Backing Up the WinNT/XP/2K System State}
-
-A suggestion by Damian Coutts using Microsoft's NTBackup utility in
-conjunction with Bacula should permit a full restore of any damaged system
-files on Win2K/XP. His suggestion is to do an NTBackup of the critical system
-state prior to running a Bacula backup with the following command:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-ntbackup backup systemstate /F c:\systemstate.bkf
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The {\bf backup} is the command, the {\bf systemstate} says to backup only the
-system state and not all the user files, and the {\bf /F
-c:\textbackslash{}systemstate.bkf} specifies where to write the state file.
-this file must then be saved and restored by Bacula.
-
-To restore the system state, you first reload a base operating system if the
-OS is damaged, otherwise, this is not necessary, then you would use Bacula to
-restore all the damaged or lost user's files and to recover the {\bf
-c:\textbackslash{}systemstate.bkf} file. Finally if there are any damaged or
-missing system files or registry problems, you run {\bf NTBackup} and {\bf
-catalogue} the system statefile, and then select it for restore. The
-documentation says you can't run a command line restore of the systemstate.
-
-To the best of my knowledge, this has not yet been tested. If you test it,
-please report your results to the Bacula email list.
-
-\section{Considerations for Filename Specifications}
-\index[general]{Windows!Considerations for Filename Specifications}
-
-Please see the
-\ilink{Director's Configuration chapter}{win32} of this manual
-for important considerations on how to specify Windows paths in Bacula FileSet
-Include and Exclude directives.
-
-\index[general]{Unicode}
-Bacula versions prior to 1.37.28 do not support Windows Unicode filenames.
-As of that version, both {\bf bconsole} and {\bf bwx-console} support Windows
-Unicode filenames. There may still be some problems with multiple byte
-characters (e.g. Chinese, ...) where it is a two byte character but the
-displayed character is not two characters wide.
-
-\index[general]{Win32 Path Length Restriction}
-Path/filenames longer than 260 characters (up to 32,000) are supported
-beginning with Bacula version 1.39.20. Older Bacula versions support
-only 260 character path/filenames.
-
-\section{Win32 Specific File daemon Command Line}
-\index[general]{Client!Win32 Specific File daemon Command Line Options}
-\index[general]{Win32 Specific File daemon Command Line Options}
-
-These options are not normally seen or used by the user, and are documented
-here only for information purposes. At the current time, to change the default
-options, you must either manually run {\bf Bacula} or you must manually edit
-the system registry and modify the appropriate entries.
-
-In order to avoid option clashes between the options necessary for {\bf
-Bacula} to run on Windows and the standard Bacula options, all Windows
-specific options are signaled with a forward slash character (/), while as
-usual, the standard Bacula options are signaled with a minus (-), or a minus
-minus (\verb:--:). All the standard Bacula options can be used on the Windows
-version. In addition, the following Windows only options are implemented:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [/service ]
- \index[fd]{/service}
- Start Bacula as a service
-
-\item [/run ]
- \index[fd]{/run}
- Run the Bacula application
-
-\item [/install ]
- \index[fd]{/install}
- Install Bacula as a service in the system registry
-
-\item [/remove ]
- \index[fd]{/remove}
- Uninstall Bacula from the system registry
-
-\item [/about ]
- \index[fd]{/about}
- Show the Bacula about dialogue box
-
-\item [/status ]
- \index[fd]{/status}
- Show the Bacula status dialogue box
-
-\item [/events ]
- \index[fd]{/events}
- Show the Bacula events dialogue box (not yet implemented)
-
-\item [/kill ]
- \index[fd]{/kill}
- Stop any running {\bf Bacula}
-
-\item [/help ]
- \index[fd]{/help}
- Show the Bacula help dialogue box
-\end{description}
-
-It is important to note that under normal circumstances the user should never
-need to use these options as they are normally handled by the system
-automatically once Bacula is installed. However, you may note these options in
-some of the .bat files that have been created for your use.
-
-\section{Shutting down Windows Systems}
-\index[general]{Shutting down Windows Systems}
-\index[general]{Systems!Shutting down Windows}
-
-Some users like to shutdown their Windows machines after a backup using a
-Client Run After Job directive. If you want to do something similar, you might
-take the shutdown program from the
-\elink{apcupsd project}{\url{http://www.apcupsd.com}} or one from the
-\elink{Sysinternals project}
-{\url{http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/sysinternals/bb897541.aspx}}.
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=install
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Installation_Configu.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @./update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.ddx -o ${DOC}.dnd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.fdx -o ${DOC}.fnd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.sdx -o ${DOC}.snd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.cdx -o ${DOC}.cnd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps ${DOC}/
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps ${IMAGES}/*.png ${DOC}/
- @rm -f ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/next.eps ${DOC}/next.png ${DOC}/prev.eps ${DOC}/prev.png ${DOC}/up.eps ${DOC}/up.png
- @rm -rf ${DOC}/*.html
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Installation and Configuration Guide" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-first_rule: bacula
-
-bacula: tex web html dvipdf
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- touch install.idx installi-general.tex
- -latex -interaction=batchmode install.tex
- makeindex install.idx >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- -latex -interaction=batchmode install.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making install pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf install.dvi install.pdf
- @rm -f *.eps *.old
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making install pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 install.dvi
- @rm -f *.eps *.old
-
-html:
- @echo "Making install html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names install.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- install >/dev/null
- ./translate_images.pl --to_meaningful_names install.html
- @rm -f *.eps *.gif *.jpg *.old
-
-web:
- @echo "Making install web"
- @mkdir -p install
- @rm -f install/*
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps ${IMAGES}/*.png install/
- @rm -f install/next.eps install/next.png install/prev.eps install/prev.png install/up.eps install/up.png
- @(if [ -f install/imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --to_meaningful_names install/Bacula_Users_Guide.html; \
- fi)
- @rm -rf install/*.html
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Developer's Guide" \
- -long_titles 4 -contents_in_nav -toc_stars -white \
- -notransparent install >/dev/null
- ./translate_images.pl --to_meaningful_names install/install_Guide.html
- @cp -f install/install_Guide.html install/index.html
- @rm -f *.eps *.gif *.jpg install/*.eps *.old
- @rm -f install/idle.png
- @rm -f install/win32-*.png install/wx-console*.png install/xp-*.png
- @rm -f install/*.pl install/*.log install/*.aux install/*.idx
- @rm -f install/*.out WARNINGS
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl install.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.pdf *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -rf install
- @rm -f images.tex installi-general.tex
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f install.html install.pdf
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-\chapter{Autochanger Resource}
-\index[sd]{Autochanger Resource}
-\index[sd]{Resource!Autochanger}
-
-The Autochanger resource supports single or multiple drive
-autochangers by grouping one or more Device resources
-into one unit called an autochanger in Bacula (often referred to
-as a "tape library" by autochanger manufacturers).
-
-If you have an Autochanger, and you want it to function correctly,
-you {\bf must} have an Autochanger resource in your Storage
-conf file, and your Director's Storage directives that want to
-use an Autochanger {\bf must} refer to the Autochanger resource name.
-In previous versions of Bacula, the Director's Storage directives
-referred directly to Device resources that were autochangers.
-In version 1.38.0 and later, referring directly to Device resources
-will not work for Autochangers.
-
-\begin{description}
-\item [Name = \lt{}Autochanger-Name\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Name}
- Specifies the Name of the Autochanger. This name is used in the
- Director's Storage definition to refer to the autochanger. This
- directive is required.
-
-\item [Device = \lt{}Device-name1, device-name2, ...\gt{}]
- Specifies the names of the Device resource or resources that correspond
- to the autochanger drive. If you have a multiple drive autochanger, you
- must specify multiple Device names, each one referring to a separate
- Device resource that contains a Drive Index specification that
- corresponds to the drive number base zero. You may specify multiple
- device names on a single line separated by commas, and/or you may
- specify multiple Device directives. This directive is required.
-
-\item [Changer Device = {\it name-string}]
- \index[sd]{Changer Device}
- The specified {\bf name-string} gives the system file name of the autochanger
- device name. If specified in this resource, the Changer Device name
- is not needed in the Device resource. If it is specified in the Device
- resource (see above), it will take precedence over one specified in
- the Autochanger resource.
-
-\item [Changer Command = {\it name-string}]
- \index[sd]{Changer Command }
- The {\bf name-string} specifies an external program to be called that will
- automatically change volumes as required by {\bf Bacula}. Most frequently,
- you will specify the Bacula supplied {\bf mtx-changer} script as follows.
- If it is specified here, it need not be specified in the Device
- resource. If it is also specified in the Device resource, it will take
- precedence over the one specified in the Autochanger resource.
-
-\end{description}
-
-The following is an example of a valid Autochanger resource definition:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Autochanger {
- Name = "DDS-4-changer"
- Device = DDS-4-1, DDS-4-2, DDS-4-3
- Changer Device = /dev/sg0
- Changer Command = "/etc/bacula/mtx-changer %c %o %S %a %d"
-}
-Device {
- Name = "DDS-4-1"
- Drive Index = 0
- Autochanger = yes
- ...
-}
-Device {
- Name = "DDS-4-2"
- Drive Index = 1
- Autochanger = yes
- ...
-Device {
- Name = "DDS-4-3"
- Drive Index = 2
- Autochanger = yes
- Autoselect = no
- ...
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Please note that it is important to include the {\bf Autochanger = yes} directive
-in each Device definition that belongs to an Autochanger. A device definition
-should not belong to more than one Autochanger resource. Also, your Device
-directive in the Storage resource of the Director's conf file should have
-the Autochanger's resource name rather than a name of one of the Devices.
-
-If you have a drive that physically belongs to an Autochanger but you don't want
-to have it automatically used when Bacula references the Autochanger for backups,
-for example, you want to reserve it for restores, you can add the directive:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Autoselect = no
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-to the Device resource for that drive. In that case, Bacula will not automatically
-select that drive when accessing the Autochanger. You can, still use the drive
-by referencing it by the Device name directly rather than the Autochanger name. An example
-of such a definition is shown above for the Device DDS-4-3, which will not be
-selected when the name DDS-4-changer is used in a Storage definition, but will
-be used if DDS-4-3 is used.
+++ /dev/null
-#!/usr/bin/perl -w
-# Finds potential problems in tex files, and issues warnings to the console
-# about what it finds. Takes a list of files as its only arguments,
-# and does checks on all the files listed. The assumption is that these are
-# valid (or close to valid) LaTeX files. It follows \include statements
-# recursively to pick up any included tex files.
-#
-#
-#
-# Currently the following checks are made:
-#
-# -- Multiple hyphens not inside a verbatim environment (or \verb). These
-# should be placed inside a \verb{} contruct so they will not be converted
-# to single hyphen by latex and latex2html.
-
-
-# Original creation 3-8-05 by Karl Cunningham karlc -at- keckec -dot- com
-#
-#
-
-use strict;
-
-# The following builds the test string to identify and change multiple
-# hyphens in the tex files. Several constructs are identified but only
-# multiple hyphens are changed; the others are fed to the output
-# unchanged.
-my $b = '\\\\begin\\*?\\s*\\{\\s*'; # \begin{
-my $e = '\\\\end\\*?\\s*\\{\\s*'; # \end{
-my $c = '\\s*\\}'; # closing curly brace
-
-# This captures entire verbatim environments. These are passed to the output
-# file unchanged.
-my $verbatimenv = $b . "verbatim" . $c . ".*?" . $e . "verbatim" . $c;
-
-# This captures \verb{..{ constructs. They are passed to the output unchanged.
-my $verb = '\\\\verb\\*?(.).*?\\1';
-
-# This captures multiple hyphens with a leading and trailing space. These are not changed.
-my $hyphsp = '\\s\\-{2,}\\s';
-
-# This identifies other multiple hyphens.
-my $hyphens = '\\-{2,}';
-
-# This identifies \hyperpage{..} commands, which should be ignored.
-my $hyperpage = '\\\\hyperpage\\*?\\{.*?\\}';
-
-# This builds the actual test string from the above strings.
-#my $teststr = "$verbatimenv|$verb|$tocentry|$hyphens";
-my $teststr = "$verbatimenv|$verb|$hyphsp|$hyperpage|$hyphens";
-
-
-sub get_includes {
- # Get a list of include files from the top-level tex file. The first
- # argument is a pointer to the list of files found. The rest of the
- # arguments is a list of filenames to check for includes.
- my $files = shift;
- my ($fileline,$includefile,$includes);
-
- while (my $filename = shift) {
- # Get a list of all the html files in the directory.
- open my $if,"<$filename" or die "Cannot open input file $filename\n";
- $fileline = 0;
- $includes = 0;
- while (<$if>) {
- chomp;
- $fileline++;
- # If a file is found in an include, process it.
- if (($includefile) = /\\include\s*\{(.*?)\}/) {
- $includes++;
- # Append .tex to the filename
- $includefile .= '.tex';
-
- # If the include file has already been processed, issue a warning
- # and don't do it again.
- my $found = 0;
- foreach (@$files) {
- if ($_ eq $includefile) {
- $found = 1;
- last;
- }
- }
- if ($found) {
- print "$includefile found at line $fileline in $filename was previously included\n";
- } else {
- # The file has not been previously found. Save it and
- # recursively process it.
- push (@$files,$includefile);
- get_includes($files,$includefile);
- }
- }
- }
- close IF;
- }
-}
-
-
-sub check_hyphens {
- my (@files) = @_;
- my ($filedata,$this,$linecnt,$before);
-
- # Build the test string to check for the various environments.
- # We only do the conversion if the multiple hyphens are outside of a
- # verbatim environment (either \begin{verbatim}...\end{verbatim} or
- # \verb{--}). Capture those environments and pass them to the output
- # unchanged.
-
- foreach my $file (@files) {
- # Open the file and load the whole thing into $filedata. A bit wasteful but
- # easier to deal with, and we don't have a problem with speed here.
- $filedata = "";
- open IF,"<$file" or die "Cannot open input file $file";
- while (<IF>) {
- $filedata .= $_;
- }
- close IF;
-
- # Set up to process the file data.
- $linecnt = 1;
-
- # Go through the file data from beginning to end. For each match, save what
- # came before it and what matched. $filedata now becomes only what came
- # after the match.
- # Chech the match to see if it starts with a multiple-hyphen. If so
- # warn the user. Keep track of line numbers so they can be output
- # with the warning message.
- while ($filedata =~ /$teststr/os) {
- $this = $&;
- $before = $`;
- $filedata = $';
- $linecnt += $before =~ tr/\n/\n/;
-
- # Check if the multiple hyphen is present outside of one of the
- # acceptable constructs.
- if ($this =~ /^\-+/) {
- print "Possible unwanted multiple hyphen found in line ",
- "$linecnt of file $file\n";
- }
- $linecnt += $this =~ tr/\n/\n/;
- }
- }
-}
-##################################################################
-# MAIN ####
-##################################################################
-
-my (@includes,$cnt);
-
-# Examine the file pointed to by the first argument to get a list of
-# includes to test.
-get_includes(\@includes,@ARGV);
-
-check_hyphens(@includes);
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Customizing the Configuration Files}
-\label{ConfigureChapter}
-\index[general]{Files!Customizing the Configuration }
-\index[general]{Customizing the Configuration Files }
-
-When each of the Bacula programs starts, it reads a configuration file
-specified on the command line or the default {\bf bacula-dir.conf}, {\bf
-bacula-fd.conf}, {\bf bacula-sd.conf}, or {\bf console.conf} for the Director
-daemon, the File daemon, the Storage daemon, and the Console program
-respectively.
-
-Each service (Director, Client, Storage, Console) has its own configuration
-file containing a set of Resource definitions. These resources are very
-similar from one service to another, but may contain different directives
-(records) depending on the service. For example, in the Director's resource
-file, the {\bf Director} resource defines the name of the Director, a number
-of global Director parameters and his password. In the File daemon
-configuration file, the {\bf Director} resource specifies which Directors are
-permitted to use the File daemon.
-
-Before running Bacula for the first time, you must customize the configuration
-files for each daemon. Default configuration files will have been created by
-the installation process, but you will need to modify them to correspond to
-your system. An overall view of the resources can be seen in the following:
-
-\addcontentsline{lof}{figure}{Bacula Objects}
-\includegraphics{\idir bacula-objects.eps}
-\label{ResFormat}
-
-\section{Character Sets}
-\index[general]{Character Sets}
-Bacula is designed to handle most character sets of the world,
-US ASCII, German, French, Chinese, ... However, it does this by
-encoding everything in UTF-8, and it expects all configuration files
-(including those read on Win32 machines) to be in UTF-8 format.
-UTF-8 is typically the default on Linux machines, but not on all
-Unix machines, nor on Windows, so you must take some care to ensure
-that your locale is set properly before starting Bacula.
-
-To ensure that Bacula configuration files can be correctly read including
-foreign characters the {bf LANG} environment variable
-must end in {\bf .UTF-8}. An full example is {\bf en\_US.UTF-8}. The
-exact syntax may vary a bit from OS to OS, and exactly how you define
-it will also vary. On most newer Win32 machines, you can use {\bf notepad}
-to edit the conf files, then choose output encoding UTF-8.
-
-Bacula assumes that all filenames are in UTF-8 format on Linux and
-Unix machines. On Win32 they are in Unicode (UTF-16), and will
-be automatically converted to UTF-8 format.
-
-\section{Resource Directive Format}
-\index[general]{Resource Directive Format }
-\index[general]{Format!Resource Directive }
-
-Although, you won't need to know the details of all the directives a basic
-knowledge of Bacula resource directives is essential. Each directive contained
-within the resource (within the braces) is composed of a keyword followed by
-an equal sign (=) followed by one or more values. The keywords must be one of
-the known Bacula resource record keywords, and it may be composed of upper or
-lower case characters and spaces.
-
-Each resource definition MUST contain a Name directive, and may optionally
-contain a Description directive. The Name directive is used to
-uniquely identify the resource. The Description directive is (will be) used
-during display of the Resource to provide easier human recognition. For
-example:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Director {
- Name = "MyDir"
- Description = "Main Bacula Director"
- WorkingDirectory = "$HOME/bacula/bin/working"
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Defines the Director resource with the name "MyDir" and a working directory
-\$HOME/bacula/bin/working. In general, if you want spaces in a name to the
-right of the first equal sign (=), you must enclose that name within double
-quotes. Otherwise quotes are not generally necessary because once defined,
-quoted strings and unquoted strings are all equal.
-
-\label{Comments}
-\subsection{Comments}
-\index[general]{Comments}
-
-When reading the configuration file, blank lines are ignored and everything
-after a hash sign (\#) until the end of the line is taken to be a comment. A
-semicolon (;) is a logical end of line, and anything after the semicolon is
-considered as the next statement. If a statement appears on a line by itself,
-a semicolon is not necessary to terminate it, so generally in the examples in
-this manual, you will not see many semicolons.
-\label{Case1}
-
-\subsection{Upper and Lower Case and Spaces}
-\index[general]{Spaces!Upper/Lower Case}
-\index[general]{Upper and Lower Case and Spaces}
-
-Case (upper/lower) and spaces are totally ignored in the resource directive
-keywords (the part before the equal sign).
-
-Within the keyword (i.e. before the equal sign), spaces are not significant.
-Thus the keywords: {\bf name}, {\bf Name}, and {\bf N a m e} are all
-identical.
-
-Spaces after the equal sign and before the first character of the value are
-ignored.
-
-In general, spaces within a value are significant (not ignored), and if the
-value is a name, you must enclose the name in double quotes for the spaces to
-be accepted. Names may contain up to 127 characters. Currently, a name may
-contain any ASCII character. Within a quoted string, any character following a
-backslash (\textbackslash{}) is taken as itself (handy for inserting
-backslashes and double quotes (")).
-
-Please note, however, that Bacula resource names as well as certain other
-names (e.g. Volume names) must contain only letters (including ISO accented
-letters), numbers, and a few special characters (space, underscore, ...).
-All other characters and punctuation are invalid.
-
-\label{Includes}
-\subsection{Including other Configuration Files}
-\index[general]{Including other Configuration Files }
-\index[general]{Files!Including other Configuration }
-\index[general]{Using @ to include other files}
-\index[general]{@{\bf filename}}
-
-If you wish to break your configuration file into smaller pieces, you can do
-so by including other files using the syntax @{\bf filename} where {\bf
-filename} is the full path and filename of another file. The @filename
-specification can be given anywhere a primitive token would appear.
-
-\label{DataTypes}
-\subsection{Recognized Primitive Data Types}
-\index[general]{Types!Recognized Primitive Data }
-\index[general]{Recognized Primitive Data Types }
-
-When parsing the resource directives, Bacula classifies the data according to
-the types listed below. The first time you read this, it may appear a bit
-overwhelming, but in reality, it is all pretty logical and straightforward.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [name]
- \index[fd]{name}
- A keyword or name consisting of alphanumeric characters, including the
-hyphen, underscore, and dollar characters. The first character of a {\bf
-name} must be a letter. A name has a maximum length currently set to 127
-bytes. Typically keywords appear on the left side of an equal (i.e. they are
-Bacula keywords -- i.e. Resource names or directive names). Keywords may not
-be quoted.
-
-\item [name-string]
- \index[fd]{name-string}
- A name-string is similar to a name, except that the name may be quoted and
-can thus contain additional characters including spaces. Name strings are
-limited to 127 characters in length. Name strings are typically used on the
-right side of an equal (i.e. they are values to be associated with a keyword).
-
-
-\item [string]
- \index[fd]{string}
- A quoted string containing virtually any character including spaces, or a
-non-quoted string. A string may be of any length. Strings are typically
-values that correspond to filenames, directories, or system command names. A
-backslash (\textbackslash{}) turns the next character into itself, so to
-include a double quote in a string, you precede the double quote with a
-backslash. Likewise to include a backslash.
-
-\item [directory]
- \index[dir]{directory}
- A directory is either a quoted or non-quoted string. A directory will be
-passed to your standard shell for expansion when it is scanned. Thus
-constructs such as {\bf \$HOME} are interpreted to be their correct values.
-
-\item [password]
- \index[dir]{password}
- This is a Bacula password and it is stored internally in MD5 hashed format.
-
-\item [integer]
- \index[dir]{integer}
- A 32 bit integer value. It may be positive or negative.
-
-\item [positive integer]
- \index[dir]{positive integer }
- A 32 bit positive integer value.
-
-\item [long integer]
- \index[dir]{long integer}
- A 64 bit integer value. Typically these are values such as bytes that can
-exceed 4 billion and thus require a 64 bit value.
-
-\item [yes\vb{}no]
- \index[dir]{yes or no }
- Either a {\bf yes} or a {\bf no}.
-
-\label{Size1}
-\item [size]
-\index[dir]{size}
-A size specified as bytes. Typically, this is a floating point scientific
-input format followed by an optional modifier. The floating point input is
-stored as a 64 bit integer value. If a modifier is present, it must
-immediately follow the value with no intervening spaces. The following
-modifiers are permitted:
-
-\begin{description}
-\item [k]
- 1,024 (kilobytes)
-
-\item [kb]
- 1,000 (kilobytes)
-
-\item [m]
- 1,048,576 (megabytes)
-
-\item [mb]
- 1,000,000 (megabytes)
-
-\item [g]
- 1,073,741,824 (gigabytes)
-
-\item [gb]
- 1,000,000,000 (gigabytes)
-\end{description}
-
-\label{Time}
-\item [time]
-\index[dir]{time}
-A time or duration specified in seconds. The time is stored internally as
-a 64 bit integer value, but it is specified in two parts: a number part and
-a modifier part. The number can be an integer or a floating point number.
-If it is entered in floating point notation, it will be rounded to the
-nearest integer. The modifier is mandatory and follows the number part,
-either with or without intervening spaces. The following modifiers are
-permitted:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [seconds]
- \index[dir]{seconds}
- seconds
-
-\item [minutes]
- \index[dir]{minutes}
- minutes (60 seconds)
-
-\item [hours]
- \index[dir]{hours }
- hours (3600 seconds)
-
-\item [days]
- \index[dir]{days}
- days (3600*24 seconds)
-
-\item [weeks]
- \index[dir]{weeks}
- weeks (3600*24*7 seconds)
-
-\item [months]
- \index[dir]{months }
- months (3600*24*30 seconds)
-
-\item [quarters]
- \index[dir]{quarters }
- quarters (3600*24*91 seconds)
-
-\item [years]
- \index[dir]{years }
- years (3600*24*365 seconds)
-\end{description}
-
-Any abbreviation of these modifiers is also permitted (i.e. {\bf seconds}
-may be specified as {\bf sec} or {\bf s}). A specification of {\bf m} will
-be taken as months.
-
-The specification of a time may have as many number/modifier parts as you
-wish. For example:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-1 week 2 days 3 hours 10 mins
-1 month 2 days 30 sec
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-are valid date specifications.
-
-\end{description}
-
-\label{ResTypes}
-\section{Resource Types}
-\index[general]{Types!Resource }
-\index[general]{Resource Types }
-
-The following table lists all current Bacula resource types. It shows what
-resources must be defined for each service (daemon). The default configuration
-files will already contain at least one example of each permitted resource, so
-you need not worry about creating all these kinds of resources from scratch.
-
-\addcontentsline{lot}{table}{Resource Types}
-\begin{longtable}{|l|l|l|l|l|}
- \hline
-\multicolumn{1}{|c| }{\bf Resource } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{\bf Director } &
-\multicolumn{1}{c| }{\bf Client } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{\bf Storage } &
-\multicolumn{1}{c| }{\bf Console } \\
- \hline
-{Autochanger } & {No } & {No } & {Yes } & {No } \\
-\hline
-{Catalog } & {Yes } & {No } & {No } & {No } \\
- \hline
-{Client } & {Yes } & {Yes } & {No } & {No } \\
- \hline
-{Console } & {Yes } & {No } & {No } & {Yes } \\
- \hline
-{Device } & {No } & {No } & {Yes } & {No } \\
- \hline
-{Director } & {Yes } & {Yes } & {Yes } & {Yes } \\
- \hline
-{FileSet } & {Yes } & {No } & {No } & {No } \\
- \hline
-{Job } & {Yes } & {No } & {No } & {No } \\
- \hline
-{JobDefs } & {Yes } & {No } & {No } & {No } \\
- \hline
-{Message } & {Yes } & {Yes } & {Yes } & {No } \\
- \hline
-{Pool } & {Yes } & {No } & {No } & {No } \\
- \hline
-{Schedule } & {Yes } & {No } & {No } & {No } \\
- \hline
-{Storage } & {Yes } & {No } & {Yes } & {No }
-\\ \hline
-
-\end{longtable}
-
-\section{Names, Passwords and Authorization}
-\label{Names}
-\index[general]{Authorization!Names Passwords and }
-\index[general]{Names, Passwords and Authorization }
-\index[general]{Passwords}
-
-In order for one daemon to contact another daemon, it must authorize itself
-with a password. In most cases, the password corresponds to a particular name,
-so both the name and the password must match to be authorized. Passwords are
-plain text, any text. They are not generated by any special process; just
-use random text.
-
-The default configuration files are automatically defined for correct
-authorization with random passwords. If you add to or modify these files, you
-will need to take care to keep them consistent.
-
-Here is sort of a picture of what names/passwords in which files/Resources
-must match up:
-
-\includegraphics{\idir Conf-Diagram.eps}
-
-In the left column, you will find the Director, Storage, and Client resources,
-with their names and passwords -- these are all in {\bf bacula-dir.conf}. In
-the right column are where the corresponding values should be found in the
-Console, Storage daemon (SD), and File daemon (FD) configuration files.
-
-Please note that the Address, {\bf fd-sd}, that appears in the Storage
-resource of the Director, preceded with and asterisk in the above example, is
-passed to the File daemon in symbolic form. The File daemon then resolves it
-to an IP address. For this reason, you must use either an IP address or a
-fully qualified name. A name such as {\bf localhost}, not being a fully
-qualified name, will resolve in the File daemon to the localhost of the File
-daemon, which is most likely not what is desired. The password used for the
-File daemon to authorize with the Storage daemon is a temporary password
-unique to each Job created by the daemons and is not specified in any .conf
-file.
-
-\section{Detailed Information for each Daemon}
-\index[general]{Detailed Information for each Daemon }
-\index[general]{Daemon!Detailed Information for each }
-
-The details of each Resource and the directives permitted therein are
-described in the following chapters.
-
-The following configuration files must be defined:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item
- \ilink{Console}{ConsoleConfChapter} -- to define the resources for
- the Console program (user interface to the Director). It defines which
-Directors are available so that you may interact with them.
-\item
- \ilink{Director}{DirectorChapter} -- to define the resources
- necessary for the Director. You define all the Clients and Storage daemons
-that you use in this configuration file.
-\item
- \ilink{Client}{FiledConfChapter} -- to define the resources for
- each client to be backed up. That is, you will have a separate Client
-resource file on each machine that runs a File daemon.
-\item
- \ilink{Storage}{StoredConfChapter} -- to define the resources to
- be used by each Storage daemon. Normally, you will have a single Storage
-daemon that controls your tape drive or tape drives. However, if you have
-tape drives on several machines, you will have at least one Storage daemon
-per machine.
-\end{itemize}
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Console Configuration}
-\label{ConsoleConfChapter}
-\index[general]{Configuration!Console}
-\index[general]{Console Configuration}
-
-\section{General}
-\index[general]{General}
-
-The Console configuration file is the simplest of all the configuration files,
-and in general, you should not need to change it except for the password. It
-simply contains the information necessary to contact the Director or
-Directors.
-
-For a general discussion of the syntax of configuration files and their
-resources including the data types recognized by {\bf Bacula}, please see
-the \ilink{Configuration}{ConfigureChapter} chapter of this manual.
-
-The following Console Resource definition must be defined:
-
-\section{The Director Resource}
-\label{DirectorResource3}
-\index[general]{Director Resource}
-\index[general]{Resource!Director}
-
-The Director resource defines the attributes of the Director running on the
-network. You may have multiple Director resource specifications in a single
-Console configuration file. If you have more than one, you will be prompted to
-choose one when you start the {\bf Console} program.
-
-\begin{description}
-\item [Director]
- \index[console]{Director}
- Start of the Director directives.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[console]{Name}
- The director name used to select among different Directors, otherwise, this
- name is not used.
-
-\item [DIRPort = \lt{}port-number\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{DIRPort}
- Specify the port to use to connect to the Director. This value will most
- likely already be set to the value you specified on the {\bf
- \verb:--:with-base-port} option of the {\bf ./configure} command. This port must be
- identical to the {\bf DIRport} specified in the {\bf Director} resource of
- the \ilink{Director's configuration}{DirectorChapter} file. The
- default is 9101 so this directive is not normally specified.
-
-\item [Address = \lt{}address\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Address}
- Where the address is a host name, a fully qualified domain name, or a network
- address used to connect to the Director.
-
-\item [Password = \lt{}password\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Password}
- Where the password is the password needed for the Director to accept the
- Console connection. This password must be identical to the {\bf Password}
- specified in the {\bf Director} resource of the
- \ilink{Director's configuration}{DirectorChapter} file. This
- directive is required.
-\end{description}
-
-An actual example might be:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Director {
- Name = HeadMan
- address = rufus.cats.com
- password = xyz1erploit
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{The ConsoleFont Resource}
-\index[general]{Resource!ConsoleFont}
-\index[general]{ConsoleFont Resource}
-
-The ConsoleFont resource is available only in the GNOME version of the
-console. It permits you to define the font that you want used to display in
-the main listing window.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [ConsoleFont]
- \index[console]{ConsoleFont}
- Start of the ConsoleFont directives.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[console]{Name}
- The name of the font.
-
-\item [Font = \lt{}Pango Font Name\gt{}]
- \index[console]{Font}
- The string value given here defines the desired font. It is specified in the
- Pango format. For example, the default specification is:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Font = "LucidaTypewriter 9"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\end{description}
-
-Thanks to Phil Stracchino for providing the code for this feature.
-
-An different example might be:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-ConsoleFont {
- Name = Default
- Font = "Monospace 10"
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{The Console Resource}
-\label{ConsoleResource}
-\index[general]{Console Resource}
-\index[general]{Resource!Console}
-
-As of Bacula version 1.33 and higher, there are three different kinds of
-consoles, which the administrator or user can use to interact with the
-Director. These three kinds of consoles comprise three different security
-levels.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The first console type is an {\bf anonymous} or {\bf default} console,
- which has full privileges. There is no console resource necessary for this
- type since the password is specified in the Director resource. This is the
- kind of console that was initially implemented in versions prior to 1.33 and
- remains valid. Typically you would use it only for administrators.
-
-\item The second type of console, and new to version 1.33 and higher is a
- "named" or "restricted" console defined within a Console resource in
- both the Director's configuration file and in the Console's
- configuration file. Both the names and the passwords in these two
- entries must match much as is the case for Client programs.
-
- This second type of console begins with absolutely no privileges except
- those explicitly specified in the Director's Console resource. Note,
- the definition of what these restricted consoles can do is determined
- by the Director's conf file.
-
- Thus you may define within the Director's conf file multiple Consoles
- with different names and passwords, sort of like multiple users, each
- with different privileges. As a default, these consoles can do
- absolutely nothing -- no commands what so ever. You give them
- privileges or rather access to commands and resources by specifying
- access control lists in the Director's Console resource. This gives the
- administrator fine grained control over what particular consoles (or
- users) can do.
-
-\item The third type of console is similar to the above mentioned
- restricted console in that it requires a Console resource definition in
- both the Director and the Console. In addition, if the console name,
- provided on the {\bf Name =} directive, is the same as a Client name,
- the user of that console is permitted to use the {\bf SetIP} command to
- change the Address directive in the Director's client resource to the IP
- address of the Console. This permits portables or other machines using
- DHCP (non-fixed IP addresses) to "notify" the Director of their current
- IP address.
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-The Console resource is optional and need not be specified. However, if it is
-specified, you can use ACLs (Access Control Lists) in the Director's
-configuration file to restrict the particular console (or user) to see only
-information pertaining to his jobs or client machine.
-
-You may specify as many Console resources in the console's conf file. If
-you do so, generally the first Console resource will be used. However, if
-you have multiple Director resources (i.e. you want to connect to different
-directors), you can bind one of your Console resources to a particular
-Director resource, and thus when you choose a particular Director, the
-appropriate Console configuration resource will be used. See the "Director"
-directive in the Console resource described below for more information.
-
-Note, the Console resource is optional, but can be useful for
-restricted consoles as noted above.
-
-\begin{description}
-\item [Console]
- \index[console]{Console}
- Start of the Console resource.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[console]{Name}
- The Console name used to allow a restricted console to change
- its IP address using the SetIP command. The SetIP command must
- also be defined in the Director's conf CommandACL list.
-
-
-\item [Password = \lt{}password\gt{}]
- \index[console]{Password}
- If this password is supplied, then the password specified in the
- Director resource of you Console conf will be ignored. See below
- for more details.
-
-\item [Director = \lt{}director-resource-name\gt{}]
- If this directive is specified, this Console resource will be
- used by bconsole when that particular director is selected
- when first starting bconsole. I.e. it binds a particular console
- resource with its name and password to a particular director.
-
-\item [Heartbeat Interval = \lt{}time-interval\gt{}]
- \index[console]{Heartbeat Interval}
- \index[console]{Directive!Heartbeat}
- This directive is optional and if specified will cause the Console to
- set a keepalive interval (heartbeat) in seconds on each of the sockets
- to communicate with the Director. It is implemented only on systems
- (Linux, ...) that provide the {\bf setsockopt} TCP\_KEEPIDLE function.
- The default value is zero, which means no change is made to the socket.
-
-\end{description}
-
-
-The following configuration files were supplied by Phil Stracchino. For
-example, if we define the following in the user's bconsole.conf file (or
-perhaps the bwx-console.conf file):
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Director {
- Name = MyDirector
- DIRport = 9101
- Address = myserver
- Password = "XXXXXXXXXXX" # no, really. this is not obfuscation.
-}
-
-
-Console {
- Name = restricted-user
- Password = "UntrustedUser"
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Where the Password in the Director section is deliberately incorrect, and the
-Console resource is given a name, in this case {\bf restricted-user}. Then
-in the Director's bacula-dir.conf file (not directly accessible by the user),
-we define:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Console {
- Name = restricted-user
- Password = "UntrustedUser"
- JobACL = "Restricted Client Save"
- ClientACL = restricted-client
- StorageACL = main-storage
- ScheduleACL = *all*
- PoolACL = *all*
- FileSetACL = "Restricted Client's FileSet"
- CatalogACL = DefaultCatalog
- CommandACL = run
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-the user logging into the Director from his Console will get logged in as {\bf
-restricted-user}, and he will only be able to see or access a Job with the
-name {\bf Restricted Client Save} a Client with the name {\bf
-restricted-client}, a Storage device {\bf main-storage}, any Schedule or Pool,
-a FileSet named {\bf Restricted Client's FileSet}, a Catalog named {\bf
-DefaultCatalog}, and the only command he can use in the Console is the {\bf
-run} command. In other words, this user is rather limited in what he can see
-and do with Bacula.
-
-The following is an example of a bconsole conf file that can access
-several Directors and has different Consoles depending on the director:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Director {
- Name = MyDirector
- DIRport = 9101
- Address = myserver
- Password = "XXXXXXXXXXX" # no, really. this is not obfuscation.
-}
-
-Director {
- Name = SecondDirector
- DIRport = 9101
- Address = secondserver
- Password = "XXXXXXXXXXX" # no, really. this is not obfuscation.
-}
-
-Console {
- Name = restricted-user
- Password = "UntrustedUser"
- Director = MyDirector
-}
-
-Console {
- Name = restricted-user
- Password = "A different UntrustedUser"
- Director = SecondDirector
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The second Director referenced at "secondserver" might look
-like the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Console {
- Name = restricted-user
- Password = "A different UntrustedUser"
- JobACL = "Restricted Client Save"
- ClientACL = restricted-client
- StorageACL = second-storage
- ScheduleACL = *all*
- PoolACL = *all*
- FileSetACL = "Restricted Client's FileSet"
- CatalogACL = RestrictedCatalog
- CommandACL = run, restore
- WhereACL = "/"
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-
-
-\section{Console Commands}
-\index[general]{Console Commands}
-\index[general]{Commands!Console}
-
-For more details on running the console and its commands, please see the
-\ilink{Bacula Console}{_ConsoleChapter} chapter of this manual.
-
-\section{Sample Console Configuration File}
-\label{SampleConfiguration2}
-\index[general]{File!Sample Console Configuration}
-\index[general]{Sample Console Configuration File}
-
-An example Console configuration file might be the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#
-# Bacula Console Configuration File
-#
-Director {
- Name = HeadMan
- address = "my_machine.my_domain.com"
- Password = Console_password
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Critical Items to Implement Before Production}
-\label{CriticalChapter}
-\index[general]{Production!Critical Items to Implement Before }
-\index[general]{Critical Items to Implement Before Production }
-
-We recommend you take your time before implementing a production a Bacula
-backup system since Bacula is a rather complex program, and if you make a
-mistake, you may suddenly find that you cannot restore your files in case
-of a disaster. This is especially true if you have not previously used a
-major backup product.
-
-If you follow the instructions in this chapter, you will have covered most of
-the major problems that can occur. It goes without saying that if you ever
-find that we have left out an important point, please inform us, so
-that we can document it to the benefit of everyone.
-
-\label{Critical}
-\section{Critical Items}
-\index[general]{Critical Items }
-\index[general]{Items!Critical }
-
-The following assumes that you have installed Bacula, you more or less
-understand it, you have at least worked through the tutorial or have
-equivalent experience, and that you have set up a basic production
-configuration. If you haven't done the above, please do so and then come back
-here. The following is a sort of checklist that points with perhaps a brief
-explanation of why you should do it. In most cases, you will find the
-details elsewhere in the manual. The order is more or less the order you
-would use in setting up a production system (if you already are in
-production, use the checklist anyway).
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Test your tape drive for compatibility with Bacula by using the test
- command in the \ilink{btape}{btape} program.
-\item Better than doing the above is to walk through the nine steps in the
- \ilink{Tape Testing}{TapeTestingChapter} chapter of the manual. It
- may take you a bit of time, but it will eliminate surprises.
-\item Test the end of tape handling of your tape drive by using the
- fill command in the \ilink{btape}{btape} program.
-\item If you are using a Linux 2.4 kernel, make sure that /lib/tls is disabled. Bacula
- does not work with this library. See the second point under
- \ilink{ Supported Operating Systems.}{SupportedOSes}
-\item Do at least one restore of files. If you backup multiple OS types
- (Linux, Solaris, HP, MacOS, FreeBSD, Win32, ...),
- restore files from each system type. The
- \ilink{Restoring Files}{RestoreChapter} chapter shows you how.
-\item Write a bootstrap file to a separate system for each backup job. The
- Write Bootstrap directive is described in the
- \ilink{Director Configuration}{writebootstrap} chapter of the
- manual, and more details are available in the
- \ilink{Bootstrap File}{BootstrapChapter} chapter. Also, the default
- bacula-dir.conf comes with a Write Bootstrap directive defined. This allows
- you to recover the state of your system as of the last backup.
-\item Backup your catalog. An example of this is found in the default
- bacula-dir.conf file. The backup script is installed by default and
- should handle any database, though you may want to make your own local
- modifications. See also \ilink{Backing Up Your Bacula Database -
- Security Considerations }{BackingUpBaculaSecurityConsiderations} for more
- information.
-\item Write a bootstrap file for the catalog. An example of this is found in
- the default bacula-dir.conf file. This will allow you to quickly restore your
- catalog in the event it is wiped out -- otherwise it is many excruciating
- hours of work.
-\item Make a copy of the bacula-dir.conf, bacula-sd.conf, and
- bacula-fd.conf files that you are using on your server. Put it in a safe
- place (on another machine) as these files can be difficult to
- reconstruct if your server dies.
-\item Make a Bacula Rescue CDROM! See the
- \ilink{Disaster Recovery Using a Bacula Rescue
- CDROM}{RescueChapter} chapter. It is trivial to make such a CDROM,
- and it can make system recovery in the event of a lost hard disk infinitely
- easier.
-\item Bacula assumes all filenames are in UTF-8 format. This is important
- when saving the filenames to the catalog. For Win32 machine, Bacula will
- automatically convert from Unicode to UTF-8, but on Unix, Linux, *BSD,
- and MacOS X machines, you must explicitly ensure that your locale is set
- properly. Typically this means that the {bf LANG} environment variable
- must end in {\bf .UTF-8}. An full example is {\bf en\_US.UTF-8}. The
- exact syntax may vary a bit from OS to OS, and exactly how you define it
- will also vary.
-
- On most modern Win32 machines, you can edit the conf files with {\bf
- notepad} and choose output encoding UTF-8.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{Recommended Items}
-\index[general]{Items!Recommended }
-\index[general]{Recommended Items }
-
-Although these items may not be critical, they are recommended and will help
-you avoid problems.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Read the \ilink{Quick Start Guide to Bacula}{QuickStartChapter}
-\item After installing and experimenting with Bacula, read and work carefully
- through the examples in the
- \ilink{Tutorial}{TutorialChapter} chapter of this manual.
-\item Learn what each of the \ilink{Bacula Utility Programs}{_UtilityChapter}
- does.
-\item Set up reasonable retention periods so that your catalog does not grow
- to be too big. See the following three chapters:\\
- \ilink{Recycling your Volumes}{RecyclingChapter},\\
- \ilink{Basic Volume Management}{DiskChapter},\\
- \ilink{Using Pools to Manage Volumes}{PoolsChapter}.
-\item Perform a bare metal recovery using the Bacula Rescue CDROM. See the
- \ilink{Disaster Recovery Using a Bacula Rescue CDROM}{RescueChapter}
- chapter.
-\end{itemize}
-
-If you absolutely must implement a system where you write a different
-tape each night and take it offsite in the morning. We recommend that you do
-several things:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Write a bootstrap file of your backed up data and a bootstrap file
- of your catalog backup to a floppy disk or a CDROM, and take that with
- the tape. If this is not possible, try to write those files to another
- computer or offsite computer, or send them as email to a friend. If none
- of that is possible, at least print the bootstrap files and take that
- offsite with the tape. Having the bootstrap files will make recovery
- much easier.
-\item It is better not to force Bacula to load a particular tape each day.
- Instead, let Bacula choose the tape. If you need to know what tape to
- mount, you can print a list of recycled and appendable tapes daily, and
- select any tape from that list. Bacula may propose a particular tape
- for use that it considers optimal, but it will accept any valid tape
- from the correct pool.
-\end{itemize}
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Configuring the Director}
-\label{DirectorChapter}
-\index[general]{Director!Configuring the}
-\index[general]{Configuring the Director}
-
-Of all the configuration files needed to run {\bf Bacula}, the Director's is
-the most complicated, and the one that you will need to modify the most often
-as you add clients or modify the FileSets.
-
-For a general discussion of configuration files and resources including the
-data types recognized by {\bf Bacula}. Please see the
-\ilink{Configuration}{ConfigureChapter} chapter of this manual.
-
-\section{Director Resource Types}
-\index[general]{Types!Director Resource}
-\index[general]{Director Resource Types}
-
-Director resource type may be one of the following:
-
-Job, JobDefs, Client, Storage, Catalog, Schedule, FileSet, Pool, Director, or
-Messages. We present them here in the most logical order for defining them:
-
-Note, everything revolves around a job and is tied to a job in one
-way or another.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item
- \ilink{Director}{DirectorResource4} -- to define the Director's
- name and its access password used for authenticating the Console program.
- Only a single Director resource definition may appear in the Director's
- configuration file. If you have either {\bf /dev/random} or {\bf bc} on your
- machine, Bacula will generate a random password during the configuration
- process, otherwise it will be left blank.
-\item
- \ilink{Job}{JobResource} -- to define the backup/restore Jobs
- and to tie together the Client, FileSet and Schedule resources to be used
- for each Job. Normally, you will Jobs of different names corresponding
- to each client (i.e. one Job per client, but a different one with a different name
- for each client).
-\item
- \ilink{JobDefs}{JobDefsResource} -- optional resource for
- providing defaults for Job resources.
-\item
- \ilink{Schedule}{ScheduleResource} -- to define when a Job is to
- be automatically run by {\bf Bacula's} internal scheduler. You
- may have any number of Schedules, but each job will reference only
- one.
-\item
- \ilink{FileSet}{FileSetResource} -- to define the set of files
- to be backed up for each Client. You may have any number of
- FileSets but each Job will reference only one.
-\item
- \ilink{Client}{ClientResource2} -- to define what Client is to be
- backed up. You will generally have multiple Client definitions. Each
- Job will reference only a single client.
-\item
- \ilink{Storage}{StorageResource2} -- to define on what physical
- device the Volumes should be mounted. You may have one or
- more Storage definitions.
-\item
- \ilink{Pool}{PoolResource} -- to define the pool of Volumes
- that can be used for a particular Job. Most people use a
- single default Pool. However, if you have a large number
- of clients or volumes, you may want to have multiple Pools.
- Pools allow you to restrict a Job (or a Client) to use
- only a particular set of Volumes.
-\item
- \ilink{Catalog}{CatalogResource} -- to define in what database to
- keep the list of files and the Volume names where they are backed up.
- Most people only use a single catalog. However, if you want to
- scale the Director to many clients, multiple catalogs can be helpful.
- Multiple catalogs require a bit more management because in general
- you must know what catalog contains what data. Currently, all
- Pools are defined in each catalog. This restriction will be removed
- in a later release.
-\item
- \ilink{Messages}{MessagesChapter} -- to define where error and
- information messages are to be sent or logged. You may define
- multiple different message resources and hence direct particular
- classes of messages to different users or locations (files, ...).
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{The Director Resource}
-\label{DirectorResource4}
-\index[general]{Director Resource}
-\index[general]{Resource!Director}
-
-The Director resource defines the attributes of the Directors running on the
-network. In the current implementation, there is only a single Director
-resource, but the final design will contain multiple Directors to maintain
-index and media database redundancy.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Director]
- \index[dir]{Director}
- Start of the Director resource. One and only one director resource must be
-supplied.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Name}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Name}
- The director name used by the system administrator. This directive is
-required.
-
-\item [Description = \lt{}text\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Description}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Description}
- The text field contains a description of the Director that will be displayed
-in the graphical user interface. This directive is optional.
-
-\item [Password = \lt{}UA-password\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Password}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Password}
- Specifies the password that must be supplied for the default Bacula
- Console to be authorized. The same password must appear in the {\bf
- Director} resource of the Console configuration file. For added
- security, the password is never passed across the network but instead a
- challenge response hash code created with the password. This directive
- is required. If you have either {\bf /dev/random} or {\bf bc} on your
- machine, Bacula will generate a random password during the configuration
- process, otherwise it will be left blank and you must manually supply
- it.
-
- The password is plain text. It is not generated through any special
- process but as noted above, it is better to use random text for
- security reasons.
-
-\item [Messages = \lt{}Messages-resource-name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Messages}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Messages}
- The messages resource specifies where to deliver Director messages that are
- not associated with a specific Job. Most messages are specific to a job and
- will be directed to the Messages resource specified by the job. However,
- there are a few messages that can occur when no job is running. This
- directive is required.
-
-\item [Working Directory = \lt{}Directory\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Working Directory}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Working Directory}
- This directive is mandatory and specifies a directory in which the Director
- may put its status files. This directory should be used only by Bacula but
- may be shared by other Bacula daemons. However, please note, if this
- directory is shared with other Bacula daemons (the File daemon and Storage
- daemon), you must ensure that the {\bf Name} given to each daemon is
- unique so that the temporary filenames used do not collide. By default
- the Bacula configure process creates unique daemon names by postfixing them
- with -dir, -fd, and -sd. Standard shell expansion of the {\bf
- Directory} is done when the configuration file is read so that values such
- as {\bf \$HOME} will be properly expanded. This directive is required.
- The working directory specified must already exist and be
- readable and writable by the Bacula daemon referencing it.
-
- If you have specified a Director user and/or a Director group on your
- ./configure line with {\bf {-}{-}with-dir-user} and/or
- {\bf {-}{-}with-dir-group} the Working Directory owner and group will
- be set to those values.
-
-\item [Pid Directory = \lt{}Directory\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Pid Directory}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Pid Directory}
- This directive is mandatory and specifies a directory in which the Director
- may put its process Id file. The process Id file is used to shutdown
- Bacula and to prevent multiple copies of Bacula from running simultaneously.
- Standard shell expansion of the {\bf Directory} is done when the
- configuration file is read so that values such as {\bf \$HOME} will be
- properly expanded.
-
- The PID directory specified must already exist and be
- readable and writable by the Bacula daemon referencing it
-
- Typically on Linux systems, you will set this to: {\bf /var/run}. If you are
- not installing Bacula in the system directories, you can use the {\bf Working
- Directory} as defined above. This directive is required.
-
-\item [Scripts Directory = \lt{}Directory\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Scripts Directory}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Scripts Directory}
- This directive is optional and, if defined, specifies a directory in
- which the Director will look for the Python startup script {\bf
- DirStartup.py}. This directory may be shared by other Bacula daemons.
- Standard shell expansion of the directory is done when the configuration
- file is read so that values such as {\bf \$HOME} will be properly
- expanded.
-
-\item [QueryFile = \lt{}Path\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{QueryFile}
- \index[dir]{Directive!QueryFile}
- This directive is mandatory and specifies a directory and file in which
- the Director can find the canned SQL statements for the {\bf Query}
- command of the Console. Standard shell expansion of the {\bf Path} is
- done when the configuration file is read so that values such as {\bf
- \$HOME} will be properly expanded. This directive is required.
-
-\item [Heartbeat Interval = \lt{}time-interval\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Heartbeat Interval}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Heartbeat}
- This directive is optional and if specified will cause the Director to
- set a keepalive interval (heartbeat) in seconds on each of the sockets
- it opens for the Client resource. This value will override any
- specified at the Director level. It is implemented only on systems
- (Linux, ...) that provide the {\bf setsockopt} TCP\_KEEPIDLE function.
- The default value is zero, which means no change is made to the socket.
-
-
-\label{DirMaxConJobs}
-\item [Maximum Concurrent Jobs = \lt{}number\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Maximum Concurrent Jobs}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Maximum Concurrent Jobs}
- \index[general]{Simultaneous Jobs}
- \index[general]{Concurrent Jobs}
- where \lt{}number\gt{} is the maximum number of total Director Jobs that
- should run concurrently. The default is set to 1, but you may set it to a
- larger number.
-
- The Volume format becomes more complicated with
- multiple simultaneous jobs, consequently, restores may take longer if
- Bacula must sort through interleaved volume blocks from multiple simultaneous
- jobs. This can be avoided by having each simultaneous job write to
- a different volume or by using data spooling, which will first spool the data
- to disk simultaneously, then write one spool file at a time to the volume
- thus avoiding excessive interleaving of the different job blocks.
-
-\item [FD Connect Timeout = \lt{}time\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{FD Connect Timeout}
- \index[dir]{Directive!FD Connect Timeout}
- where {\bf time} is the time that the Director should continue
- attempting to contact the File daemon to start a job, and after which
- the Director will cancel the job. The default is 30 minutes.
-
-\item [SD Connect Timeout = \lt{}time\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{SD Connect Timeout}
- \index[dir]{Directive!SD Connect Timeout}
- where {\bf time} is the time that the Director should continue
- attempting to contact the Storage daemon to start a job, and after which
- the Director will cancel the job. The default is 30 minutes.
-
-\item [DirAddresses = \lt{}IP-address-specification\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{DirAddresses}
- \index[dir]{Address}
- \index[general]{Address}
- \index[dir]{Directive!DirAddresses}
- Specify the ports and addresses on which the Director daemon will listen
- for Bacula Console connections. Probably the simplest way to explain
- this is to show an example:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- DirAddresses = {
- ip = { addr = 1.2.3.4; port = 1205;}
- ipv4 = {
- addr = 1.2.3.4; port = http;}
- ipv6 = {
- addr = 1.2.3.4;
- port = 1205;
- }
- ip = {
- addr = 1.2.3.4
- port = 1205
- }
- ip = { addr = 1.2.3.4 }
- ip = { addr = 201:220:222::2 }
- ip = {
- addr = bluedot.thun.net
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-where ip, ip4, ip6, addr, and port are all keywords. Note, that the address
-can be specified as either a dotted quadruple, or IPv6 colon notation, or as
-a symbolic name (only in the ip specification). Also, port can be specified
-as a number or as the mnemonic value from the /etc/services file. If a port
-is not specified, the default will be used. If an ip section is specified,
-the resolution can be made either by IPv4 or IPv6. If ip4 is specified, then
-only IPv4 resolutions will be permitted, and likewise with ip6.
-
-Please note that if you use the DirAddresses directive, you must
-not use either a DirPort or a DirAddress directive in the same
-resource.
-
-\item [DirPort = \lt{}port-number\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{DirPort}
- \index[dir]{Directive!DirPort}
- Specify the port (a positive integer) on which the Director daemon will
- listen for Bacula Console connections. This same port number must be
- specified in the Director resource of the Console configuration file. The
- default is 9101, so normally this directive need not be specified. This
- directive should not be used if you specify DirAddresses (N.B plural)
- directive.
-
-\item [DirAddress = \lt{}IP-Address\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{DirAddress}
- \index[dir]{Directive!DirAddress}
- This directive is optional, but if it is specified, it will cause the
- Director server (for the Console program) to bind to the specified {\bf
- IP-Address}, which is either a domain name or an IP address specified as a
- dotted quadruple in string or quoted string format. If this directive is
- not specified, the Director will bind to any available address (the
- default). Note, unlike the DirAddresses specification noted above, this
- directive only permits a single address to be specified. This directive
- should not be used if you specify a DirAddresses (N.B. plural) directive.
-
-\item [DirSourceAddress = \lt{}IP-Address\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{DirSourceAddress}
- \index[fd]{Directive!DirSourceAddress}
- This record is optional, and if it is specified, it will cause the Director
- server (when initiating connections to a storage or file daemon) to source
- its connections from the specified address. Only a single IP address may be
- specified. If this record is not specified, the Director server will source
- its outgoing connections according to the system routing table (the default).
-
-\item[Statistics Retention = \lt{}time\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{StatisticsRetention}
- \index[dir]{Directive!StatisticsRetention}
- \label{PruneStatistics}
-
- The \texttt{Statistics Retention} directive defines the length of time that
- Bacula will keep statistics job records in the Catalog database after the
- Job End time. (In \texttt{JobHistory} table) When this time period expires,
- and if user runs \texttt{prune stats} command, Bacula will prune (remove)
- Job records that are older than the specified period.
-
- Theses statistics records aren't use for restore purpose, but mainly for
- capacity planning, billings, etc. See \ilink{Statistics chapter} for
- additional information.
-
- See the \ilink{ Configuration chapter}{Time} of this manual for additional
- details of time specification.
-
- The default is 5 years.
-
-\item[VerId = \lt{}string\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Directive!VerId}
- where \lt{}string\gt{} is an identifier which can be used for support purpose.
- This string is displayed using the \texttt{version} command.
-
-\item[MaxConsoleConnections = \lt{}number\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{MaximumConsoleConnections}
- \index[dir]{MaxConsoleConnections}
- \index[dir]{Directive!MaxConsoleConnections}
- \index[dir]{Console}
- where \lt{}number\gt{} is the maximum number of Console Connections that
- could run concurrently. The default is set to 20, but you may set it to a
- larger number.
-
-\end{description}
-
-The following is an example of a valid Director resource definition:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Director {
- Name = HeadMan
- WorkingDirectory = "$HOME/bacula/bin/working"
- Password = UA_password
- PidDirectory = "$HOME/bacula/bin/working"
- QueryFile = "$HOME/bacula/bin/query.sql"
- Messages = Standard
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{The Job Resource}
-\label{JobResource}
-\index[general]{Resource!Job}
-\index[general]{Job Resource}
-
-The Job resource defines a Job (Backup, Restore, ...) that Bacula must
-perform. Each Job resource definition contains the name of a Client and
-a FileSet to backup, the Schedule for the Job, where the data
-are to be stored, and what media Pool can be used. In effect, each Job
-resource must specify What, Where, How, and When or FileSet, Storage,
-Backup/Restore/Level, and Schedule respectively. Note, the FileSet must
-be specified for a restore job for historical reasons, but it is no longer used.
-
-Only a single type ({\bf Backup}, {\bf Restore}, ...) can be specified for any
-job. If you want to backup multiple FileSets on the same Client or multiple
-Clients, you must define a Job for each one.
-
-Note, you define only a single Job to do the Full, Differential, and
-Incremental backups since the different backup levels are tied together by
-a unique Job name. Normally, you will have only one Job per Client, but
-if a client has a really huge number of files (more than several million),
-you might want to split it into to Jobs each with a different FileSet
-covering only part of the total files.
-
-Multiple Storage daemons are not currently supported for Jobs, so if
-you do want to use multiple storage daemons, you will need to create
-a different Job and ensure that for each Job that the combination of
-Client and FileSet are unique. The Client and FileSet are what Bacula
-uses to restore a client, so if there are multiple Jobs with the same
-Client and FileSet or multiple Storage daemons that are used, the
-restore will not work. This problem can be resolved by defining multiple
-FileSet definitions (the names must be different, but the contents of
-the FileSets may be the same).
-
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Job]
- \index[dir]{Job}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Job}
- Start of the Job resource. At least one Job resource is required.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Name}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Name}
- The Job name. This name can be specified on the {\bf Run} command in the
- console program to start a job. If the name contains spaces, it must be
- specified between quotes. It is generally a good idea to give your job the
- same name as the Client that it will backup. This permits easy
- identification of jobs.
-
- When the job actually runs, the unique Job Name will consist of the name you
- specify here followed by the date and time the job was scheduled for
- execution. This directive is required.
-
-\item [Enabled = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Enable}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Enable}
- This directive allows you to enable or disable automatic execution
- via the scheduler of a Job.
-
-\item [Type = \lt{}job-type\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Type}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Type}
- The {\bf Type} directive specifies the Job type, which may be one of the
- following: {\bf Backup}, {\bf Restore}, {\bf Verify}, or {\bf Admin}. This
- directive is required. Within a particular Job Type, there are also Levels
- as discussed in the next item.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Backup]
- \index[dir]{Backup}
- Run a backup Job. Normally you will have at least one Backup job for each
- client you want to save. Normally, unless you turn off cataloging, most all
- the important statistics and data concerning files backed up will be placed
- in the catalog.
-
-\item [Restore]
- \index[dir]{Restore}
- Run a restore Job. Normally, you will specify only one Restore job
- which acts as a sort of prototype that you will modify using the console
- program in order to perform restores. Although certain basic
- information from a Restore job is saved in the catalog, it is very
- minimal compared to the information stored for a Backup job -- for
- example, no File database entries are generated since no Files are
- saved.
-
- {\bf Restore} jobs cannot be
- automatically started by the scheduler as is the case for Backup, Verify
- and Admin jobs. To restore files, you must use the {\bf restore} command
- in the console.
-
-
-\item [Verify]
- \index[dir]{Verify}
- Run a verify Job. In general, {\bf verify} jobs permit you to compare the
- contents of the catalog to the file system, or to what was backed up. In
- addition, to verifying that a tape that was written can be read, you can
- also use {\bf verify} as a sort of tripwire intrusion detection.
-
-\item [Admin]
- \index[dir]{Admin}
- Run an admin Job. An {\bf Admin} job can be used to periodically run catalog
- pruning, if you do not want to do it at the end of each {\bf Backup} Job.
- Although an Admin job is recorded in the catalog, very little data is saved.
-\end{description}
-
-\label{Level}
-
-\item [Level = \lt{}job-level\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Level}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Level}
- The Level directive specifies the default Job level to be run. Each
- different Job Type (Backup, Restore, ...) has a different set of Levels
- that can be specified. The Level is normally overridden by a different
- value that is specified in the {\bf Schedule} resource. This directive
- is not required, but must be specified either by a {\bf Level} directive
- or as an override specified in the {\bf Schedule} resource.
-
-For a {\bf Backup} Job, the Level may be one of the following:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Full]
-\index[dir]{Full}
- When the Level is set to Full all files in the FileSet whether or not
- they have changed will be backed up.
-
-\item [Incremental]
- \index[dir]{Incremental}
- When the Level is set to Incremental all files specified in the FileSet
- that have changed since the last successful backup of the the same Job
- using the same FileSet and Client, will be backed up. If the Director
- cannot find a previous valid Full backup then the job will be upgraded
- into a Full backup. When the Director looks for a valid backup record
- in the catalog database, it looks for a previous Job with:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The same Job name.
-\item The same Client name.
-\item The same FileSet (any change to the definition of the FileSet such as
- adding or deleting a file in the Include or Exclude sections constitutes a
- different FileSet.
-\item The Job was a Full, Differential, or Incremental backup.
-\item The Job terminated normally (i.e. did not fail or was not canceled).
-\item The Job started no longer ago than {\bf Max Full Interval}.
-\end{itemize}
-
- If all the above conditions do not hold, the Director will upgrade the
- Incremental to a Full save. Otherwise, the Incremental backup will be
- performed as requested.
-
- The File daemon (Client) decides which files to backup for an
- Incremental backup by comparing start time of the prior Job (Full,
- Differential, or Incremental) against the time each file was last
- "modified" (st\_mtime) and the time its attributes were last
- "changed"(st\_ctime). If the file was modified or its attributes
- changed on or after this start time, it will then be backed up.
-
- Some virus scanning software may change st\_ctime while
- doing the scan. For example, if the virus scanning program attempts to
- reset the access time (st\_atime), which Bacula does not use, it will
- cause st\_ctime to change and hence Bacula will backup the file during
- an Incremental or Differential backup. In the case of Sophos virus
- scanning, you can prevent it from resetting the access time (st\_atime)
- and hence changing st\_ctime by using the {\bf \verb:--:no-reset-atime}
- option. For other software, please see their manual.
-
- When Bacula does an Incremental backup, all modified files that are
- still on the system are backed up. However, any file that has been
- deleted since the last Full backup remains in the Bacula catalog,
- which means that if between a Full save and the time you do a
- restore, some files are deleted, those deleted files will also be
- restored. The deleted files will no longer appear in the catalog
- after doing another Full save.
-
- In addition, if you move a directory rather than copy it, the files in
- it do not have their modification time (st\_mtime) or their attribute
- change time (st\_ctime) changed. As a consequence, those files will
- probably not be backed up by an Incremental or Differential backup which
- depend solely on these time stamps. If you move a directory, and wish
- it to be properly backed up, it is generally preferable to copy it, then
- delete the original.
-
- However, to manage deleted files or directories changes in the
- catalog during an Incremental backup you can use \texttt{accurate}
- mode. This is quite memory consuming process. See \ilink{Accurate
- mode}{accuratemode} for more details.
-
-\item [Differential]
- \index[dir]{Differential}
- When the Level is set to Differential
- all files specified in the FileSet that have changed since the last
- successful Full backup of the same Job will be backed up.
- If the Director cannot find a
- valid previous Full backup for the same Job, FileSet, and Client,
- backup, then the Differential job will be upgraded into a Full backup.
- When the Director looks for a valid Full backup record in the catalog
- database, it looks for a previous Job with:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The same Job name.
-\item The same Client name.
-\item The same FileSet (any change to the definition of the FileSet such as
- adding or deleting a file in the Include or Exclude sections constitutes a
- different FileSet.
-\item The Job was a FULL backup.
-\item The Job terminated normally (i.e. did not fail or was not canceled).
-\item The Job started no longer ago than {\bf Max Full Interval}.
-\end{itemize}
-
- If all the above conditions do not hold, the Director will upgrade the
- Differential to a Full save. Otherwise, the Differential backup will be
- performed as requested.
-
- The File daemon (Client) decides which files to backup for a
- differential backup by comparing the start time of the prior Full backup
- Job against the time each file was last "modified" (st\_mtime) and the
- time its attributes were last "changed" (st\_ctime). If the file was
- modified or its attributes were changed on or after this start time, it
- will then be backed up. The start time used is displayed after the {\bf
- Since} on the Job report. In rare cases, using the start time of the
- prior backup may cause some files to be backed up twice, but it ensures
- that no change is missed. As with the Incremental option, you should
- ensure that the clocks on your server and client are synchronized or as
- close as possible to avoid the possibility of a file being skipped.
- Note, on versions 1.33 or greater Bacula automatically makes the
- necessary adjustments to the time between the server and the client so
- that the times Bacula uses are synchronized.
-
- When Bacula does a Differential backup, all modified files that are
- still on the system are backed up. However, any file that has been
- deleted since the last Full backup remains in the Bacula catalog, which
- means that if between a Full save and the time you do a restore, some
- files are deleted, those deleted files will also be restored. The
- deleted files will no longer appear in the catalog after doing another
- Full save. However, to remove deleted files from the catalog during a
- Differential backup is quite a time consuming process and not currently
- implemented in Bacula. It is, however, a planned future feature.
-
- As noted above, if you move a directory rather than copy it, the
- files in it do not have their modification time (st\_mtime) or
- their attribute change time (st\_ctime) changed. As a
- consequence, those files will probably not be backed up by an
- Incremental or Differential backup which depend solely on these
- time stamps. If you move a directory, and wish it to be
- properly backed up, it is generally preferable to copy it, then
- delete the original. Alternatively, you can move the directory, then
- use the {\bf touch} program to update the timestamps.
-
-%% TODO: merge this with incremental
- However, to manage deleted files or directories changes in the
- catalog during an Differential backup you can use \texttt{accurate}
- mode. This is quite memory consuming process. See \ilink{Accurate
- mode}{accuratemode} for more details.
-
- Every once and a while, someone asks why we need Differential
- backups as long as Incremental backups pickup all changed files.
- There are possibly many answers to this question, but the one
- that is the most important for me is that a Differential backup
- effectively merges
- all the Incremental and Differential backups since the last Full backup
- into a single Differential backup. This has two effects: 1. It gives
- some redundancy since the old backups could be used if the merged backup
- cannot be read. 2. More importantly, it reduces the number of Volumes
- that are needed to do a restore effectively eliminating the need to read
- all the volumes on which the preceding Incremental and Differential
- backups since the last Full are done.
-
-\end{description}
-
-For a {\bf Restore} Job, no level needs to be specified.
-
-For a {\bf Verify} Job, the Level may be one of the following:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [InitCatalog]
-\index[dir]{InitCatalog}
- does a scan of the specified {\bf FileSet} and stores the file
- attributes in the Catalog database. Since no file data is saved, you
- might ask why you would want to do this. It turns out to be a very
- simple and easy way to have a {\bf Tripwire} like feature using {\bf
- Bacula}. In other words, it allows you to save the state of a set of
- files defined by the {\bf FileSet} and later check to see if those files
- have been modified or deleted and if any new files have been added.
- This can be used to detect system intrusion. Typically you would
- specify a {\bf FileSet} that contains the set of system files that
- should not change (e.g. /sbin, /boot, /lib, /bin, ...). Normally, you
- run the {\bf InitCatalog} level verify one time when your system is
- first setup, and then once again after each modification (upgrade) to
- your system. Thereafter, when your want to check the state of your
- system files, you use a {\bf Verify} {\bf level = Catalog}. This
- compares the results of your {\bf InitCatalog} with the current state of
- the files.
-
-\item [Catalog]
-\index[dir]{Catalog}
- Compares the current state of the files against the state previously
- saved during an {\bf InitCatalog}. Any discrepancies are reported. The
- items reported are determined by the {\bf verify} options specified on
- the {\bf Include} directive in the specified {\bf FileSet} (see the {\bf
- FileSet} resource below for more details). Typically this command will
- be run once a day (or night) to check for any changes to your system
- files.
-
- Please note! If you run two Verify Catalog jobs on the same client at
- the same time, the results will certainly be incorrect. This is because
- Verify Catalog modifies the Catalog database while running in order to
- track new files.
-
-\item [VolumeToCatalog]
-\index[dir]{VolumeToCatalog}
- This level causes Bacula to read the file attribute data written to the
- Volume from the last Job. The file attribute data are compared to the
- values saved in the Catalog database and any differences are reported.
- This is similar to the {\bf Catalog} level except that instead of
- comparing the disk file attributes to the catalog database, the
- attribute data written to the Volume is read and compared to the catalog
- database. Although the attribute data including the signatures (MD5 or
- SHA1) are compared, the actual file data is not compared (it is not in
- the catalog).
-
- Please note! If you run two Verify VolumeToCatalog jobs on the same
- client at the same time, the results will certainly be incorrect. This
- is because the Verify VolumeToCatalog modifies the Catalog database
- while running.
-
-\item [DiskToCatalog]
-\index[dir]{DiskToCatalog}
- This level causes Bacula to read the files as they currently are on
- disk, and to compare the current file attributes with the attributes
- saved in the catalog from the last backup for the job specified on the
- {\bf VerifyJob} directive. This level differs from the {\bf Catalog}
- level described above by the fact that it doesn't compare against a
- previous Verify job but against a previous backup. When you run this
- level, you must supply the verify options on your Include statements.
- Those options determine what attribute fields are compared.
-
- This command can be very useful if you have disk problems because it
- will compare the current state of your disk against the last successful
- backup, which may be several jobs.
-
- Note, the current implementation (1.32c) does not identify files that
- have been deleted.
-\end{description}
-
-\item [Accurate = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Accurate}
- In accurate mode, the File daemon knowns exactly which files were present
- after the last backup. So it is able to handle deleted or renamed files.
-
- When restoring a FileSet for a specified date (including "most
- recent"), Bacula is able to restore exactly the files and
- directories that existed at the time of the last backup prior to
- that date including ensuring that deleted files are actually deleted,
- and renamed directories are restored properly.
-
- In this mode, the File daemon must keep data concerning all files in
- memory. So you do not have sufficient memory, the restore may
- either be terribly slow or fail.
-
-%% $$ memory = \sum_{i=1}^{n}(strlen(path_i + file_i) + sizeof(CurFile))$$
-
- For 500.000 files (a typical desktop linux system), it will require
- approximately 64 Megabytes of RAM on your File daemon to hold the
- required information.
-
-\item [Verify Job = \lt{}Job-Resource-Name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Verify Job}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Verify Job}
- If you run a verify job without this directive, the last job run will be
- compared with the catalog, which means that you must immediately follow
- a backup by a verify command. If you specify a {\bf Verify Job} Bacula
- will find the last job with that name that ran. This permits you to run
- all your backups, then run Verify jobs on those that you wish to be
- verified (most often a {\bf VolumeToCatalog}) so that the tape just
- written is re-read.
-
-\item [JobDefs = \lt{}JobDefs-Resource-Name\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{JobDefs}
-\index[dir]{Directive!JobDefs}
- If a JobDefs-Resource-Name is specified, all the values contained in the
- named JobDefs resource will be used as the defaults for the current Job.
- Any value that you explicitly define in the current Job resource, will
- override any defaults specified in the JobDefs resource. The use of
- this directive permits writing much more compact Job resources where the
- bulk of the directives are defined in one or more JobDefs. This is
- particularly useful if you have many similar Jobs but with minor
- variations such as different Clients. A simple example of the use of
- JobDefs is provided in the default bacula-dir.conf file.
-
-\item [Bootstrap = \lt{}bootstrap-file\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Bootstrap}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Bootstrap}
- The Bootstrap directive specifies a bootstrap file that, if provided,
- will be used during {\bf Restore} Jobs and is ignored in other Job
- types. The {\bf bootstrap} file contains the list of tapes to be used
- in a restore Job as well as which files are to be restored.
- Specification of this directive is optional, and if specified, it is
- used only for a restore job. In addition, when running a Restore job
- from the console, this value can be changed.
-
- If you use the {\bf Restore} command in the Console program, to start a
- restore job, the {\bf bootstrap} file will be created automatically from
- the files you select to be restored.
-
- For additional details of the {\bf bootstrap} file, please see
- \ilink{Restoring Files with the Bootstrap File}{BootstrapChapter} chapter
- of this manual.
-
-\label{writebootstrap}
-\item [Write Bootstrap = \lt{}bootstrap-file-specification\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Write Bootstrap}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Write Bootstrap}
- The {\bf writebootstrap} directive specifies a file name where Bacula
- will write a {\bf bootstrap} file for each Backup job run. This
- directive applies only to Backup Jobs. If the Backup job is a Full
- save, Bacula will erase any current contents of the specified file
- before writing the bootstrap records. If the Job is an Incremental
- or Differential
- save, Bacula will append the current bootstrap record to the end of the
- file.
-
- Using this feature, permits you to constantly have a bootstrap file that
- can recover the current state of your system. Normally, the file
- specified should be a mounted drive on another machine, so that if your
- hard disk is lost, you will immediately have a bootstrap record
- available. Alternatively, you should copy the bootstrap file to another
- machine after it is updated. Note, it is a good idea to write a separate
- bootstrap file for each Job backed up including the job that backs up
- your catalog database.
-
- If the {\bf bootstrap-file-specification} begins with a vertical bar
- (|), Bacula will use the specification as the name of a program to which
- it will pipe the bootstrap record. It could for example be a shell
- script that emails you the bootstrap record.
-
- On versions 1.39.22 or greater, before opening the file or executing the
- specified command, Bacula performs
- \ilink{character substitution}{character substitution} like in RunScript
- directive. To automatically manage your bootstrap files, you can use
- this in your {\bf JobDefs} resources:
-\begin{verbatim}
-JobDefs {
- Write Bootstrap = "%c_%n.bsr"
- ...
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
- For more details on using this file, please see the chapter entitled
- \ilink{The Bootstrap File}{BootstrapChapter} of this manual.
-
-\item [Client = \lt{}client-resource-name\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Client}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Client}
- The Client directive specifies the Client (File daemon) that will be used in
- the current Job. Only a single Client may be specified in any one Job. The
- Client runs on the machine to be backed up, and sends the requested files to
- the Storage daemon for backup, or receives them when restoring. For
- additional details, see the
- \ilink{Client Resource section}{ClientResource2} of this chapter.
- This directive is required.
-
-\item [FileSet = \lt{}FileSet-resource-name\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{FileSet}
-\index[dir]{FileSet}
- The FileSet directive specifies the FileSet that will be used in the
- current Job. The FileSet specifies which directories (or files) are to
- be backed up, and what options to use (e.g. compression, ...). Only a
- single FileSet resource may be specified in any one Job. For additional
- details, see the \ilink{FileSet Resource section}{FileSetResource} of
- this chapter. This directive is required.
-
-\item [Messages = \lt{}messages-resource-name\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Messages}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Messages}
- The Messages directive defines what Messages resource should be used for
- this job, and thus how and where the various messages are to be
- delivered. For example, you can direct some messages to a log file, and
- others can be sent by email. For additional details, see the
- \ilink{Messages Resource}{MessagesChapter} Chapter of this manual. This
- directive is required.
-
-\item [Pool = \lt{}pool-resource-name\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Pool}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Pool}
- The Pool directive defines the pool of Volumes where your data can be
- backed up. Many Bacula installations will use only the {\bf Default}
- pool. However, if you want to specify a different set of Volumes for
- different Clients or different Jobs, you will probably want to use
- Pools. For additional details, see the \ilink{Pool Resource
- section}{PoolResource} of this chapter. This directive is required.
-
-\item [Full Backup Pool = \lt{}pool-resource-name\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Full Backup Pool}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Full Backup Pool}
- The {\it Full Backup Pool} specifies a Pool to be used for Full backups.
- It will override any Pool specification during a Full backup. This
- directive is optional.
-
-\item [Differential Backup Pool = \lt{}pool-resource-name\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Differential Backup Pool}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Differential Backup Pool}
- The {\it Differential Backup Pool} specifies a Pool to be used for
- Differential backups. It will override any Pool specification during a
- Differential backup. This directive is optional.
-
-\item [Incremental Backup Pool = \lt{}pool-resource-name\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Incremental Backup Pool}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Incremental Backup Pool}
- The {\it Incremental Backup Pool} specifies a Pool to be used for
- Incremental backups. It will override any Pool specification during an
- Incremental backup. This directive is optional.
-
-\item [Schedule = \lt{}schedule-name\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Schedule}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Schedule}
- The Schedule directive defines what schedule is to be used for the Job.
- The schedule in turn determines when the Job will be automatically
- started and what Job level (i.e. Full, Incremental, ...) is to be run.
- This directive is optional, and if left out, the Job can only be started
- manually using the Console program. Although you may specify only a
- single Schedule resource for any one job, the Schedule resource may
- contain multiple {\bf Run} directives, which allow you to run the Job at
- many different times, and each {\bf run} directive permits overriding
- the default Job Level Pool, Storage, and Messages resources. This gives
- considerable flexibility in what can be done with a single Job. For
- additional details, see the \ilink{Schedule Resource
- Chapter}{ScheduleResource} of this manual.
-
-
-\item [Storage = \lt{}storage-resource-name\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Storage}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Storage}
- The Storage directive defines the name of the storage services where you
- want to backup the FileSet data. For additional details, see the
- \ilink{Storage Resource Chapter}{StorageResource2} of this manual.
- The Storage resource may also be specified in the Job's Pool resource,
- in which case the value in the Pool resource overrides any value
- in the Job. This Storage resource definition is not required by either
- the Job resource or in the Pool, but it must be specified in
- one or the other, if not an error will result.
-
-\item [Max Start Delay = \lt{}time\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Max Start Delay}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Max Start Delay}
- The time specifies the maximum delay between the scheduled time and the
- actual start time for the Job. For example, a job can be scheduled to
- run at 1:00am, but because other jobs are running, it may wait to run.
- If the delay is set to 3600 (one hour) and the job has not begun to run
- by 2:00am, the job will be canceled. This can be useful, for example,
- to prevent jobs from running during day time hours. The default is 0
- which indicates no limit.
-
-\item [Max Run Time = \lt{}time\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Max Run Time}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Max Run Time}
- The time specifies the maximum allowed time that a job may run, counted
- from when the job starts, ({\bf not} necessarily the same as when the
- job was scheduled).
-
-\item [Incremental|Differential Max Wait Time = \lt{}time\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Incremental Wait Run Time}
-\index[dir]{Differential Wait Run Time}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Differential Max Wait Time}
- Theses directives have been deprecated in favor of
- \texttt{Incremental|Differential Max Run Time} since bacula 2.3.18.
-
-\item [Incremental Max Run Time = \lt{}time\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Incremental Max Run Time}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Incremental Max Run Time}
-The time specifies the maximum allowed time that an Incremental backup job may
-run, counted from when the job starts, ({\bf not} necessarily the same as when
-the job was scheduled).
-
-\item [Differential Max Wait Time = \lt{}time\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Differential Max Run Time}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Differential Max Run Time}
-The time specifies the maximum allowed time that a Differential backup job may
-run, counted from when the job starts, ({\bf not} necessarily the same as when
-the job was scheduled).
-
-\item [Max Run Sched Time = \lt{}time\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Max Run Sched Time}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Max Run Sched Time}
-
-The time specifies the maximum allowed time that a job may run, counted from
-when the job was scheduled. This can be useful to prevent jobs from running
-during working hours. We can see it like \texttt{Max Start Delay + Max Run
- Time}.
-
-\item [Max Wait Time = \lt{}time\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Max Wait Time}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Max Wait Time}
- The time specifies the maximum allowed time that a job may block waiting
- for a resource (such as waiting for a tape to be mounted, or waiting for
- the storage or file daemons to perform their duties), counted from the
- when the job starts, ({\bf not} necessarily the same as when the job was
- scheduled). This directive works as expected since bacula 2.3.18.
-
-\addcontentsline{lof}{figure}{Job time control directives}
-\includegraphics{\idir different_time.eps}
-
-\item [Max Full Interval = \lt{}time\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Max Full Interval}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Max Full Interval}
- The time specifies the maximum allowed age (counting from start time) of
- the most recent successful Full backup that is required in order to run
- Incremental or Differential backup jobs. If the most recent Full backup
- is older than this interval, Incremental and Differential backups will be
- upgraded to Full backups automatically. If this directive is not present,
- or specified as 0, then the age of the previous Full backup is not
- considered.
-
-\label{PreferMountedVolumes}
-\item [Prefer Mounted Volumes = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Prefer Mounted Volumes}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Prefer Mounted Volumes}
- If the Prefer Mounted Volumes directive is set to {\bf yes} (default
- yes), the Storage daemon is requested to select either an Autochanger or
- a drive with a valid Volume already mounted in preference to a drive
- that is not ready. This means that all jobs will attempt to append
- to the same Volume (providing the Volume is appropriate -- right Pool,
- ... for that job), unless you are using multiple pools.
- If no drive with a suitable Volume is available, it
- will select the first available drive. Note, any Volume that has
- been requested to be mounted, will be considered valid as a mounted
- volume by another job. This if multiple jobs start at the same time
- and they all prefer mounted volumes, the first job will request the
- mount, and the other jobs will use the same volume.
-
- If the directive is set to {\bf no}, the Storage daemon will prefer
- finding an unused drive, otherwise, each job started will append to the
- same Volume (assuming the Pool is the same for all jobs). Setting
- Prefer Mounted Volumes to no can be useful for those sites
- with multiple drive autochangers that prefer to maximize backup
- throughput at the expense of using additional drives and Volumes.
- This means that the job will prefer to use an unused drive rather
- than use a drive that is already in use.
-
- Despite the above, we recommend against setting this directive to
- {\bf no} since
- it tends to add a lot of swapping of Volumes between the different
- drives and can easily lead to deadlock situations in the Storage
- daemon. We will accept bug reports against it, but we cannot guarantee
- that we will be able to fix the problem in a reasonable time.
-
- A better alternative for using multiple drives is to use multiple
- pools so that Bacula will be forced to mount Volumes from those Pools
- on different drives.
-
-\item [Prune Jobs = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Prune Jobs}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Prune Jobs}
- Normally, pruning of Jobs from the Catalog is specified on a Client by
- Client basis in the Client resource with the {\bf AutoPrune} directive.
- If this directive is specified (not normally) and the value is {\bf
- yes}, it will override the value specified in the Client resource. The
- default is {\bf no}.
-
-
-\item [Prune Files = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Prune Files}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Prune Files}
- Normally, pruning of Files from the Catalog is specified on a Client by
- Client basis in the Client resource with the {\bf AutoPrune} directive.
- If this directive is specified (not normally) and the value is {\bf
- yes}, it will override the value specified in the Client resource. The
- default is {\bf no}.
-
-\item [Prune Volumes = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Prune Volumes}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Prune Volumes}
- Normally, pruning of Volumes from the Catalog is specified on a Client
- by Client basis in the Client resource with the {\bf AutoPrune}
- directive. If this directive is specified (not normally) and the value
- is {\bf yes}, it will override the value specified in the Client
- resource. The default is {\bf no}.
-
-\item [RunScript \{\lt{}body-of-runscript\gt{}\}]
- \index[dir]{RunScript}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Run Script}
-
- The RunScript directive behaves like a resource in that it
- requires opening and closing braces around a number of directives
- that make up the body of the runscript.
-
- The specified {\bf Command} (see below for details) is run as an external
- program prior or after the current Job. This is optional. By default, the
- program is executed on the Client side like in \texttt{ClientRunXXXJob}.
-
- \textbf{Console} options are special commands that are sent to the director instead
- of the OS. At this time, console command ouputs are redirected to log with
- the jobid 0.
-
- You can use following console command : \texttt{delete}, \texttt{disable},
- \texttt{enable}, \texttt{estimate}, \texttt{list}, \texttt{llist},
- \texttt{memory}, \texttt{prune}, \texttt{purge}, \texttt{reload},
- \texttt{status}, \texttt{setdebug}, \texttt{show}, \texttt{time},
- \texttt{trace}, \texttt{update}, \texttt{version}, \texttt{.client},
- \texttt{.jobs}, \texttt{.pool}, \texttt{.storage}. See console chapter for
- more information. You need to specify needed information on command line, nothing
- will be prompted. Example :
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- Console = "prune files client=%c"
- Console = "update stats age=3"
-\end{verbatim}
-
- You can specify more than one Command/Console option per RunScript.
-
- You can use following options may be specified in the body
- of the runscript:\\
-
-\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|l}
-Options & Value & Default & Information \\
-\hline
-\hline
-Runs On Success & Yes/No & {\it Yes} & Run command if JobStatus is successful\\
-\hline
-Runs On Failure & Yes/No & {\it No} & Run command if JobStatus isn't successful\\
-\hline
-Runs On Client & Yes/No & {\it Yes} & Run command on client\\
-\hline
-Runs When & Before|After|Always|\textsl{AfterVSS} & {\it Never} & When run commands\\
-\hline
-Fail Job On Error & Yes/No & {\it Yes} & Fail job if script returns
- something different from 0 \\
-\hline
-Command & & & Path to your script\\
-\hline
-Console & & & Console command\\
-\hline
-\end{tabular}
- \\
-
- Any output sent by the command to standard output will be included in the
- Bacula job report. The command string must be a valid program name or name
- of a shell script.
-
- In addition, the command string is parsed then fed to the OS,
- which means that the path will be searched to execute your specified
- command, but there is no shell interpretation, as a consequence, if you
- invoke complicated commands or want any shell features such as redirection
- or piping, you must call a shell script and do it inside that script.
-
- Before submitting the specified command to the operating system, Bacula
- performs character substitution of the following characters:
-
-\label{character substitution}
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- %% = %
- %c = Client's name
- %d = Director's name
- %e = Job Exit Status
- %i = JobId
- %j = Unique Job id
- %l = Job Level
- %n = Job name
- %s = Since time
- %t = Job type (Backup, ...)
- %v = Volume name (Only on director side)
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The Job Exit Status code \%e edits the following values:
-
-\index[dir]{Exit Status}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item OK
-\item Error
-\item Fatal Error
-\item Canceled
-\item Differences
-\item Unknown term code
-\end{itemize}
-
- Thus if you edit it on a command line, you will need to enclose
- it within some sort of quotes.
-
-
-You can use these following shortcuts:\\
-
-\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|c}
-Keyword & RunsOnSuccess & RunsOnFailure & FailJobOnError & Runs On Client & RunsWhen \\
-\hline
-Run Before Job & & & Yes & No & Before \\
-\hline
-Run After Job & Yes & No & & No & After \\
-\hline
-Run After Failed Job & No & Yes & & No & After \\
-\hline
-Client Run Before Job & & & Yes & Yes & Before \\
-\hline
-Client Run After Job & Yes & No & & Yes & After \\
-\end{tabular}
-
-Examples:
-\begin{verbatim}
-RunScript {
- RunsWhen = Before
- FailJobOnError = No
- Command = "/etc/init.d/apache stop"
-}
-
-RunScript {
- RunsWhen = After
- RunsOnFailure = yes
- Command = "/etc/init.d/apache start"
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
- {\bf Notes about ClientRunBeforeJob}
-
- For compatibility reasons, with this shortcut, the command is executed
- directly when the client recieve it. And if the command is in error, other
- remote runscripts will be discarded. To be sure that all commands will be
- sent and executed, you have to use RunScript syntax.
-
- {\bf Special Windows Considerations}
-
- You can run scripts just after snapshots initializations with
- \textsl{AfterVSS} keyword.
-
- In addition, for a Windows client on version 1.33 and above, please take
- note that you must ensure a correct path to your script. The script or
- program can be a .com, .exe or a .bat file. If you just put the program
- name in then Bacula will search using the same rules that cmd.exe uses
- (current directory, Bacula bin directory, and PATH). It will even try the
- different extensions in the same order as cmd.exe.
- The command can be anything that cmd.exe or command.com will recognize
- as an executable file.
-
- However, if you have slashes in the program name then Bacula figures you
- are fully specifying the name, so you must also explicitly add the three
- character extension.
-
- The command is run in a Win32 environment, so Unix like commands will not
- work unless you have installed and properly configured Cygwin in addition
- to and separately from Bacula.
-
- The System \%Path\% will be searched for the command. (under the
- environment variable dialog you have have both System Environment and
- User Environment, we believe that only the System environment will be
- available to bacula-fd, if it is running as a service.)
-
- System environment variables can be referenced with \%var\% and
- used as either part of the command name or arguments.
-
- So if you have a script in the Bacula\\bin directory then the following lines
- should work fine:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Client Run Before Job = systemstate
-or
- Client Run Before Job = systemstate.bat
-or
- Client Run Before Job = "systemstate"
-or
- Client Run Before Job = "systemstate.bat"
-or
- ClientRunBeforeJob = "\"C:/Program Files/Bacula/systemstate.bat\""
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The outer set of quotes is removed when the configuration file is parsed.
-You need to escape the inner quotes so that they are there when the code
-that parses the command line for execution runs so it can tell what the
-program name is.
-
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-ClientRunBeforeJob = "\"C:/Program Files/Software
- Vendor/Executable\" /arg1 /arg2 \"foo bar\""
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- The special characters
-\begin{verbatim}
-&<>()@^|
-\end{verbatim}
- will need to be quoted,
- if they are part of a filename or argument.
-
- If someone is logged in, a blank "command" window running the commands
- will be present during the execution of the command.
-
- Some Suggestions from Phil Stracchino for running on Win32 machines with
- the native Win32 File daemon:
-
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item You might want the ClientRunBeforeJob directive to specify a .bat
- file which runs the actual client-side commands, rather than trying
- to run (for example) regedit /e directly.
- \item The batch file should explicitly 'exit 0' on successful completion.
- \item The path to the batch file should be specified in Unix form:
-
- ClientRunBeforeJob = "c:/bacula/bin/systemstate.bat"
-
- rather than DOS/Windows form:
-
- ClientRunBeforeJob =
-
-"c:\textbackslash{}bacula\textbackslash{}bin\textbackslash{}systemstate.bat"
- INCORRECT
- \end{enumerate}
-
-For Win32, please note that there are certain limitations:
-
-ClientRunBeforeJob = "C:/Program Files/Bacula/bin/pre-exec.bat"
-
-Lines like the above do not work because there are limitations of
-cmd.exe that is used to execute the command.
-Bacula prefixes the string you supply with {\bf cmd.exe /c }. To test that
-your command works you should type {\bf cmd /c "C:/Program Files/test.exe"} at a
-cmd prompt and see what happens. Once the command is correct insert a
-backslash (\textbackslash{}) before each double quote ("), and
-then put quotes around the whole thing when putting it in
-the director's .conf file. You either need to have only one set of quotes
-or else use the short name and don't put quotes around the command path.
-
-Below is the output from cmd's help as it relates to the command line
-passed to the /c option.
-
-
- If /C or /K is specified, then the remainder of the command line after
- the switch is processed as a command line, where the following logic is
- used to process quote (") characters:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item
- If all of the following conditions are met, then quote characters
- on the command line are preserved:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item no /S switch.
- \item exactly two quote characters.
- \item no special characters between the two quote characters,
- where special is one of:
-\begin{verbatim}
-&<>()@^|
-\end{verbatim}
- \item there are one or more whitespace characters between the
- the two quote characters.
- \item the string between the two quote characters is the name
- of an executable file.
- \end{itemize}
-
-\item Otherwise, old behavior is to see if the first character is
- a quote character and if so, strip the leading character and
- remove the last quote character on the command line, preserving
- any text after the last quote character.
-
-\end{enumerate}
-
-
-The following example of the use of the Client Run Before Job directive was
-submitted by a user:\\
-You could write a shell script to back up a DB2 database to a FIFO. The shell
-script is:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- #!/bin/sh
- # ===== backupdb.sh
- DIR=/u01/mercuryd
-
- mkfifo $DIR/dbpipe
- db2 BACKUP DATABASE mercuryd TO $DIR/dbpipe WITHOUT PROMPTING &
- sleep 1
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The following line in the Job resource in the bacula-dir.conf file:
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Client Run Before Job = "su - mercuryd -c \"/u01/mercuryd/backupdb.sh '%t'
-'%l'\""
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-When the job is run, you will get messages from the output of the script
-stating that the backup has started. Even though the command being run is
-backgrounded with \&, the job will block until the "db2 BACKUP DATABASE"
-command, thus the backup stalls.
-
-To remedy this situation, the "db2 BACKUP DATABASE" line should be changed to
-the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- db2 BACKUP DATABASE mercuryd TO $DIR/dbpipe WITHOUT PROMPTING > $DIR/backup.log
-2>&1 < /dev/null &
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-It is important to redirect the input and outputs of a backgrounded command to
-/dev/null to prevent the script from blocking.
-
-\item [Run Before Job = \lt{}command\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Run Before Job}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Run Before Job}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Run Before Job}
-The specified {\bf command} is run as an external program prior to running the
-current Job. This directive is not required, but if it is defined, and if the
-exit code of the program run is non-zero, the current Bacula job will be
-canceled.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-Run Before Job = "echo test"
-\end{verbatim}
- it's equivalent to :
-\begin{verbatim}
-RunScript {
- Command = "echo test"
- RunsOnClient = No
- RunsWhen = Before
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
- Lutz Kittler has pointed out that using the RunBeforeJob directive can be a
- simple way to modify your schedules during a holiday. For example, suppose
- that you normally do Full backups on Fridays, but Thursday and Friday are
- holidays. To avoid having to change tapes between Thursday and Friday when
- no one is in the office, you can create a RunBeforeJob that returns a
- non-zero status on Thursday and zero on all other days. That way, the
- Thursday job will not run, and on Friday the tape you inserted on Wednesday
- before leaving will be used.
-
-\item [Run After Job = \lt{}command\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Run After Job}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Run After Job}
- The specified {\bf command} is run as an external program if the current
- job terminates normally (without error or without being canceled). This
- directive is not required. If the exit code of the program run is
- non-zero, Bacula will print a warning message. Before submitting the
- specified command to the operating system, Bacula performs character
- substitution as described above for the {\bf RunScript} directive.
-
- An example of the use of this directive is given in the
- \ilink{Tips Chapter}{JobNotification} of this manual.
-
- See the {\bf Run After Failed Job} if you
- want to run a script after the job has terminated with any
- non-normal status.
-
-\item [Run After Failed Job = \lt{}command\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Run After Job}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Run After Job}
- The specified {\bf command} is run as an external program after the current
- job terminates with any error status. This directive is not required. The
- command string must be a valid program name or name of a shell script. If
- the exit code of the program run is non-zero, Bacula will print a
- warning message. Before submitting the specified command to the
- operating system, Bacula performs character substitution as described above
- for the {\bf RunScript} directive. Note, if you wish that your script
- will run regardless of the exit status of the Job, you can use this :
-\begin{verbatim}
-RunScript {
- Command = "echo test"
- RunsWhen = After
- RunsOnFailure = yes
- RunsOnClient = no
- RunsOnSuccess = yes # default, you can drop this line
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
- An example of the use of this directive is given in the
- \ilink{Tips Chapter}{JobNotification} of this manual.
-
-
-\item [Client Run Before Job = \lt{}command\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Client Run Before Job}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Client Run Before Job}
- This directive is the same as {\bf Run Before Job} except that the
- program is run on the client machine. The same restrictions apply to
- Unix systems as noted above for the {\bf RunScript}.
-
-\item [Client Run After Job = \lt{}command\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Client Run After Job}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Client Run After Job}
- The specified {\bf command} is run on the client machine as soon
- as data spooling is complete in order to allow restarting applications
- on the client as soon as possible. .
-
- Note, please see the notes above in {\bf RunScript}
- concerning Windows clients.
-
-\item [Rerun Failed Levels = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Rerun Failed Levels}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Rerun Failed Levels}
- If this directive is set to {\bf yes} (default no), and Bacula detects that
- a previous job at a higher level (i.e. Full or Differential) has failed,
- the current job level will be upgraded to the higher level. This is
- particularly useful for Laptops where they may often be unreachable, and if
- a prior Full save has failed, you wish the very next backup to be a Full
- save rather than whatever level it is started as.
-
- There are several points that must be taken into account when using this
- directive: first, a failed job is defined as one that has not terminated
- normally, which includes any running job of the same name (you need to
- ensure that two jobs of the same name do not run simultaneously);
- secondly, the {\bf Ignore FileSet Changes} directive is not considered
- when checking for failed levels, which means that any FileSet change will
- trigger a rerun.
-
-\item [Spool Data = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Spool Data}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Spool Data}
-
- If this directive is set to {\bf yes} (default no), the Storage daemon will
- be requested to spool the data for this Job to disk rather than write it
- directly to tape. Once all the data arrives or the spool files' maximum sizes
- are reached, the data will be despooled and written to tape. Spooling data
- prevents tape shoe-shine (start and stop) during
- Incremental saves. If you are writing to a disk file using this option
- will probably just slow down the backup jobs.
-
- NOTE: When this directive is set to yes, Spool Attributes is also
- automatically set to yes.
-
-\item [Spool Attributes = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Spool Attributes}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Spool Attributes}
- \index[dir]{slow}
- \index[general]{slow}
- \index[dir]{Backups!slow}
- \index[general]{Backups!slow}
- The default is set to {\bf no}, which means that the File attributes are
- sent by the Storage daemon to the Director as they are stored on tape.
- However, if you want to avoid the possibility that database updates will
- slow down writing to the tape, you may want to set the value to {\bf
- yes}, in which case the Storage daemon will buffer the File attributes
- and Storage coordinates to a temporary file in the Working Directory,
- then when writing the Job data to the tape is completed, the attributes
- and storage coordinates will be sent to the Director.
-
- NOTE: When Spool Data is set to yes, Spool Attributes is also
- automatically set to yes.
-
-\item [Where = \lt{}directory\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Where}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Where}
- This directive applies only to a Restore job and specifies a prefix to
- the directory name of all files being restored. This permits files to
- be restored in a different location from which they were saved. If {\bf
- Where} is not specified or is set to backslash ({\bf /}), the files will
- be restored to their original location. By default, we have set {\bf
- Where} in the example configuration files to be {\bf
- /tmp/bacula-restores}. This is to prevent accidental overwriting of
- your files.
-
-\item [Add Prefix = \lt{}directory\gt{}]
- \label{confaddprefix}
- \index[dir]{AddPrefix}
- \index[dir]{Directive!AddPrefix}
- This directive applies only to a Restore job and specifies a prefix to the
- directory name of all files being restored. This will use \ilink{File
- Relocation}{filerelocation} feature implemented in Bacula 2.1.8 or later.
-
-\item [Add Suffix = \lt{}extention\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{AddSuffix}
- \index[dir]{Directive!AddSuffix}
- This directive applies only to a Restore job and specifies a suffix to all
- files being restored. This will use \ilink{File Relocation}{filerelocation}
- feature implemented in Bacula 2.1.8 or later.
-
- Using \texttt{Add Suffix=.old}, \texttt{/etc/passwd} will be restored to
- \texttt{/etc/passwsd.old}
-
-\item [Strip Prefix = \lt{}directory\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{StripPrefix}
- \index[dir]{Directive!StripPrefix}
- This directive applies only to a Restore job and specifies a prefix to remove
- from the directory name of all files being restored. This will use the
- \ilink{File Relocation}{filerelocation} feature implemented in Bacula 2.1.8
- or later.
-
- Using \texttt{Strip Prefix=/etc}, \texttt{/etc/passwd} will be restored to
- \texttt{/passwd}
-
- Under Windows, if you want to restore \texttt{c:/files} to \texttt{d:/files},
- you can use :
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- Strip Prefix = c:
- Add Prefix = d:
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\item [RegexWhere = \lt{}expressions\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{RegexWhere}
- \index[dir]{Directive!RegexWhere}
- This directive applies only to a Restore job and specifies a regex filename
- manipulation of all files being restored. This will use \ilink{File
- Relocation}{filerelocation} feature implemented in Bacula 2.1.8 or later.
-
- For more informations about how use this option, see
- \ilink{this}{useregexwhere}.
-
-\item [Replace = \lt{}replace-option\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Replace}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Replace}
- This directive applies only to a Restore job and specifies what happens
- when Bacula wants to restore a file or directory that already exists.
- You have the following options for {\bf replace-option}:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [always]
- \index[dir]{always}
- when the file to be restored already exists, it is deleted and then
- replaced by the copy that was backed up. This is the default value.
-
-\item [ifnewer]
-\index[dir]{ifnewer}
- if the backed up file (on tape) is newer than the existing file, the
- existing file is deleted and replaced by the back up.
-
-\item [ifolder]
- \index[dir]{ifolder}
- if the backed up file (on tape) is older than the existing file, the
- existing file is deleted and replaced by the back up.
-
-\item [never]
- \index[dir]{never}
- if the backed up file already exists, Bacula skips restoring this file.
-\end{description}
-
-\item [Prefix Links=\lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Prefix Links}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Prefix Links}
- If a {\bf Where} path prefix is specified for a recovery job, apply it
- to absolute links as well. The default is {\bf No}. When set to {\bf
- Yes} then while restoring files to an alternate directory, any absolute
- soft links will also be modified to point to the new alternate
- directory. Normally this is what is desired -- i.e. everything is self
- consistent. However, if you wish to later move the files to their
- original locations, all files linked with absolute names will be broken.
-
-\item [Maximum Concurrent Jobs = \lt{}number\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Maximum Concurrent Jobs}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Maximum Concurrent Jobs}
- where \lt{}number\gt{} is the maximum number of Jobs from the current
- Job resource that can run concurrently. Note, this directive limits
- only Jobs with the same name as the resource in which it appears. Any
- other restrictions on the maximum concurrent jobs such as in the
- Director, Client, or Storage resources will also apply in addition to
- the limit specified here. The default is set to 1, but you may set it
- to a larger number. We strongly recommend that you read the WARNING
- documented under \ilink{ Maximum Concurrent Jobs}{DirMaxConJobs} in the
- Director's resource.
-
-\item [Reschedule On Error = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Reschedule On Error}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Reschedule On Error}
- If this directive is enabled, and the job terminates in error, the job
- will be rescheduled as determined by the {\bf Reschedule Interval} and
- {\bf Reschedule Times} directives. If you cancel the job, it will not
- be rescheduled. The default is {\bf no} (i.e. the job will not be
- rescheduled).
-
- This specification can be useful for portables, laptops, or other
- machines that are not always connected to the network or switched on.
-
-\item [Reschedule Interval = \lt{}time-specification\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Reschedule Interval}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Reschedule Interval}
- If you have specified {\bf Reschedule On Error = yes} and the job
- terminates in error, it will be rescheduled after the interval of time
- specified by {\bf time-specification}. See \ilink{the time
- specification formats}{Time} in the Configure chapter for details of
- time specifications. If no interval is specified, the job will not be
- rescheduled on error.
-
-\item [Reschedule Times = \lt{}count\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Reschedule Times}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Reschedule Times}
- This directive specifies the maximum number of times to reschedule the
- job. If it is set to zero (the default) the job will be rescheduled an
- indefinite number of times.
-
-\item [Run = \lt{}job-name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Run}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Run}
- \index[dir]{Clone a Job}
- The Run directive (not to be confused with the Run option in a
- Schedule) allows you to start other jobs or to clone jobs. By using the
- cloning keywords (see below), you can backup
- the same data (or almost the same data) to two or more drives
- at the same time. The {\bf job-name} is normally the same name
- as the current Job resource (thus creating a clone). However, it
- may be any Job name, so one job may start other related jobs.
-
- The part after the equal sign must be enclosed in double quotes,
- and can contain any string or set of options (overrides) that you
- can specify when entering the Run command from the console. For
- example {\bf storage=DDS-4 ...}. In addition, there are two special
- keywords that permit you to clone the current job. They are {\bf level=\%l}
- and {\bf since=\%s}. The \%l in the level keyword permits
- entering the actual level of the current job and the \%s in the since
- keyword permits putting the same time for comparison as used on the
- current job. Note, in the case of the since keyword, the \%s must be
- enclosed in double quotes, and thus they must be preceded by a backslash
- since they are already inside quotes. For example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- run = "Nightly-backup level=%l since=\"%s\" storage=DDS-4"
-\end{verbatim}
-
- A cloned job will not start additional clones, so it is not
- possible to recurse.
-
- Please note that all cloned jobs, as specified in the Run directives are
- submitted for running before the original job is run (while it is being
- initialized). This means that any clone job will actually start before
- the original job, and may even block the original job from starting
- until the original job finishes unless you allow multiple simultaneous
- jobs. Even if you set a lower priority on the clone job, if no other
- jobs are running, it will start before the original job.
-
- If you are trying to prioritize jobs by using the clone feature (Run
- directive), you will find it much easier to do using a RunScript
- resource, or a RunBeforeJob directive.
-
-\label{Priority}
-\item [Priority = \lt{}number\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Priority}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Priority}
- This directive permits you to control the order in which your jobs will
- be run by specifying a positive non-zero number. The higher the number,
- the lower the job priority. Assuming you are not running concurrent jobs,
- all queued jobs of priority 1 will run before queued jobs of priority 2
- and so on, regardless of the original scheduling order.
-
- The priority only affects waiting jobs that are queued to run, not jobs
- that are already running. If one or more jobs of priority 2 are already
- running, and a new job is scheduled with priority 1, the currently
- running priority 2 jobs must complete before the priority 1 job is
- run, unless Allow Mixed Priority is set.
-
- The default priority is 10.
-
- If you want to run concurrent jobs you should
- keep these points in mind:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item See \ilink{Running Concurrent Jobs}{ConcurrentJobs} on how to setup
- concurrent jobs.
-
-\item Bacula concurrently runs jobs of only one priority at a time. It
- will not simultaneously run a priority 1 and a priority 2 job.
-
-\item If Bacula is running a priority 2 job and a new priority 1 job is
- scheduled, it will wait until the running priority 2 job terminates even
- if the Maximum Concurrent Jobs settings would otherwise allow two jobs
- to run simultaneously.
-
-\item Suppose that bacula is running a priority 2 job and a new priority 1
- job is scheduled and queued waiting for the running priority 2 job to
- terminate. If you then start a second priority 2 job, the waiting
- priority 1 job will prevent the new priority 2 job from running
- concurrently with the running priority 2 job. That is: as long as there
- is a higher priority job waiting to run, no new lower priority jobs will
- start even if the Maximum Concurrent Jobs settings would normally allow
- them to run. This ensures that higher priority jobs will be run as soon
- as possible.
-\end{itemize}
-
-If you have several jobs of different priority, it may not best to start
-them at exactly the same time, because Bacula must examine them one at a
-time. If by Bacula starts a lower priority job first, then it will run
-before your high priority jobs. If you experience this problem, you may
-avoid it by starting any higher priority jobs a few seconds before lower
-priority ones. This insures that Bacula will examine the jobs in the
-correct order, and that your priority scheme will be respected.
-
-\label{AllowMixedPriority}
-\item [Allow Mixed Priority = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Allow Mixed Priority}
- This directive is only implemented in version 2.5 and later. When
- set to {\bf yes} (default {\bf no}), this job may run even if lower
- priority jobs are already running. This means a high priority job
- will not have to wait for other jobs to finish before starting.
- The scheduler will only mix priorities when all running jobs have
- this set to true.
-
- Note that only higher priority jobs will start early. Suppose the
- director will allow two concurrent jobs, and that two jobs with
- priority 10 are running, with two more in the queue. If a job with
- priority 5 is added to the queue, it will be run as soon as one of
- the running jobs finishes. However, new priority 10 jobs will not
- be run until the priority 5 job has finished.
-
-\label{WritePartAfterJob}
-\item [Write Part After Job = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Write Part After Job}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Write Part After Job}
- This directive is only implemented in version 1.37 and later.
- If this directive is set to {\bf yes} (default {\bf no}), a new part file
- will be created after the job is finished.
-
- It should be set to {\bf yes} when writing to devices that require mount
- (for example DVD), so you are sure that the current part, containing
- this job's data, is written to the device, and that no data is left in
- the temporary file on the hard disk. However, on some media, like DVD+R
- and DVD-R, a lot of space (about 10Mb) is lost every time a part is
- written. So, if you run several jobs each after another, you could set
- this directive to {\bf no} for all jobs, except the last one, to avoid
- wasting too much space, but to ensure that the data is written to the
- medium when all jobs are finished.
-
- This directive is ignored with tape and FIFO devices.
-
-\end{description}
-
-The following is an example of a valid Job resource definition:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Job {
- Name = "Minou"
- Type = Backup
- Level = Incremental # default
- Client = Minou
- FileSet="Minou Full Set"
- Storage = DLTDrive
- Pool = Default
- Schedule = "MinouWeeklyCycle"
- Messages = Standard
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{The JobDefs Resource}
-\label{JobDefsResource}
-\index[general]{JobDefs Resource}
-\index[general]{Resource!JobDefs}
-
-The JobDefs resource permits all the same directives that can appear in a Job
-resource. However, a JobDefs resource does not create a Job, rather it can be
-referenced within a Job to provide defaults for that Job. This permits you to
-concisely define several nearly identical Jobs, each one referencing a JobDefs
-resource which contains the defaults. Only the changes from the defaults need to
-be mentioned in each Job.
-
-\section{The Schedule Resource}
-\label{ScheduleResource}
-\index[general]{Resource!Schedule}
-\index[general]{Schedule Resource}
-
-The Schedule resource provides a means of automatically scheduling a Job as
-well as the ability to override the default Level, Pool, Storage and Messages
-resources. If a Schedule resource is not referenced in a Job, the Job can only
-be run manually. In general, you specify an action to be taken and when.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Schedule]
-\index[dir]{Schedule}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Schedule}
- Start of the Schedule directives. No {\bf Schedule} resource is
- required, but you will need at least one if you want Jobs to be
- automatically started.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Name}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Name}
- The name of the schedule being defined. The Name directive is required.
-
-\item [Run = \lt{}Job-overrides\gt{} \lt{}Date-time-specification\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Run}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Run}
- The Run directive defines when a Job is to be run, and what overrides if
- any to apply. You may specify multiple {\bf run} directives within a
- {\bf Schedule} resource. If you do, they will all be applied (i.e.
- multiple schedules). If you have two {\bf Run} directives that start at
- the same time, two Jobs will start at the same time (well, within one
- second of each other).
-
- The {\bf Job-overrides} permit overriding the Level, the Storage, the
- Messages, and the Pool specifications provided in the Job resource. In
- addition, the FullPool, the IncrementalPool, and the DifferentialPool
- specifications permit overriding the Pool specification according to
- what backup Job Level is in effect.
-
- By the use of overrides, you may customize a particular Job. For
- example, you may specify a Messages override for your Incremental
- backups that outputs messages to a log file, but for your weekly or
- monthly Full backups, you may send the output by email by using a
- different Messages override.
-
- {\bf Job-overrides} are specified as: {\bf keyword=value} where the
- keyword is Level, Storage, Messages, Pool, FullPool, DifferentialPool,
- or IncrementalPool, and the {\bf value} is as defined on the respective
- directive formats for the Job resource. You may specify multiple {\bf
- Job-overrides} on one {\bf Run} directive by separating them with one or
- more spaces or by separating them with a trailing comma. For example:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Level=Full]
- \index[dir]{Level}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Level}
- is all files in the FileSet whether or not they have changed.
-
-\item [Level=Incremental]
- \index[dir]{Level}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Level}
- is all files that have changed since the last backup.
-
-\item [Pool=Weekly]
- \index[dir]{Pool}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Pool}
- specifies to use the Pool named {\bf Weekly}.
-
-\item [Storage=DLT\_Drive]
- \index[dir]{Storage}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Storage}
- specifies to use {\bf DLT\_Drive} for the storage device.
-
-\item [Messages=Verbose]
- \index[dir]{Messages}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Messages}
- specifies to use the {\bf Verbose} message resource for the Job.
-
-\item [FullPool=Full]
- \index[dir]{FullPool}
- \index[dir]{Directive!FullPool}
- specifies to use the Pool named {\bf Full} if the job is a full backup, or
-is
-upgraded from another type to a full backup.
-
-\item [DifferentialPool=Differential]
- \index[dir]{DifferentialPool}
- \index[dir]{Directive!DifferentialPool}
- specifies to use the Pool named {\bf Differential} if the job is a
- differential backup.
-
-\item [IncrementalPool=Incremental]
- \index[dir]{IncrementalPool}
- \index[dir]{Directive!IncrementalPool}
- specifies to use the Pool named {\bf Incremental} if the job is an
-incremental backup.
-
-\item [SpoolData=yes\vb{}no]
- \index[dir]{SpoolData}
- \index[dir]{Directive!SpoolData}
- tells Bacula to request the Storage daemon to spool data to a disk file
- before writing it to the Volume (normally a tape). Thus the data is
- written in large blocks to the Volume rather than small blocks. This
- directive is particularly useful when running multiple simultaneous
- backups to tape. It prevents interleaving of the job data and reduces
- or eliminates tape drive stop and start commonly known as "shoe-shine".
-
-\item [SpoolSize={\it bytes}]
- \index[dir]{SpoolSize}
- \index[dir]{Directive!SpoolSize}
- where the bytes specify the maximum spool size for this job.
- The default is take from Device Maximum Spool Size limit.
- This directive is available only in Bacula version 2.3.5 or
- later.
-
-\item [WritePartAfterJob=yes\vb{}no]
- \index[dir]{WritePartAfterJob}
- \index[dir]{Directive!WritePartAfterJob}
- tells Bacula to request the Storage daemon to write the current part
- file to the device when the job is finished (see \ilink{Write Part After
- Job directive in the Job resource}{WritePartAfterJob}). Please note,
- this directive is implemented only in version 1.37 and later. The
- default is yes. We strongly recommend that you keep this set to yes
- otherwise, when the last job has finished one part will remain in the
- spool file and restore may or may not work.
-
-\end{description}
-
-{\bf Date-time-specification} determines when the Job is to be run. The
-specification is a repetition, and as a default Bacula is set to run a job at
-the beginning of the hour of every hour of every day of every week of every
-month of every year. This is not normally what you want, so you must specify
-or limit when you want the job to run. Any specification given is assumed to
-be repetitive in nature and will serve to override or limit the default
-repetition. This is done by specifying masks or times for the hour, day of the
-month, day of the week, week of the month, week of the year, and month when
-you want the job to run. By specifying one or more of the above, you can
-define a schedule to repeat at almost any frequency you want.
-
-Basically, you must supply a {\bf month}, {\bf day}, {\bf hour}, and {\bf
-minute} the Job is to be run. Of these four items to be specified, {\bf day}
-is special in that you may either specify a day of the month such as 1, 2,
-... 31, or you may specify a day of the week such as Monday, Tuesday, ...
-Sunday. Finally, you may also specify a week qualifier to restrict the
-schedule to the first, second, third, fourth, or fifth week of the month.
-
-For example, if you specify only a day of the week, such as {\bf Tuesday} the
-Job will be run every hour of every Tuesday of every Month. That is the {\bf
-month} and {\bf hour} remain set to the defaults of every month and all
-hours.
-
-Note, by default with no other specification, your job will run at the
-beginning of every hour. If you wish your job to run more than once in any
-given hour, you will need to specify multiple {\bf run} specifications each
-with a different minute.
-
-The date/time to run the Job can be specified in the following way in
-pseudo-BNF:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-<void-keyword> = on
-<at-keyword> = at
-<week-keyword> = 1st | 2nd | 3rd | 4th | 5th | first |
- second | third | fourth | fifth
-<wday-keyword> = sun | mon | tue | wed | thu | fri | sat |
- sunday | monday | tuesday | wednesday |
- thursday | friday | saturday
-<week-of-year-keyword> = w00 | w01 | ... w52 | w53
-<month-keyword> = jan | feb | mar | apr | may | jun | jul |
- aug | sep | oct | nov | dec | january |
- february | ... | december
-<daily-keyword> = daily
-<weekly-keyword> = weekly
-<monthly-keyword> = monthly
-<hourly-keyword> = hourly
-<digit> = 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 0
-<number> = <digit> | <digit><number>
-<12hour> = 0 | 1 | 2 | ... 12
-<hour> = 0 | 1 | 2 | ... 23
-<minute> = 0 | 1 | 2 | ... 59
-<day> = 1 | 2 | ... 31
-<time> = <hour>:<minute> |
- <12hour>:<minute>am |
- <12hour>:<minute>pm
-<time-spec> = <at-keyword> <time> |
- <hourly-keyword>
-<date-keyword> = <void-keyword> <weekly-keyword>
-<day-range> = <day>-<day>
-<month-range> = <month-keyword>-<month-keyword>
-<wday-range> = <wday-keyword>-<wday-keyword>
-<range> = <day-range> | <month-range> |
- <wday-range>
-<date> = <date-keyword> | <day> | <range>
-<date-spec> = <date> | <date-spec>
-<day-spec> = <day> | <wday-keyword> |
- <day> | <wday-range> |
- <week-keyword> <wday-keyword> |
- <week-keyword> <wday-range> |
- <daily-keyword>
-<month-spec> = <month-keyword> | <month-range> |
- <monthly-keyword>
-<date-time-spec> = <month-spec> <day-spec> <time-spec>
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\end{description}
-
-Note, the Week of Year specification wnn follows the ISO standard definition
-of the week of the year, where Week 1 is the week in which the first Thursday
-of the year occurs, or alternatively, the week which contains the 4th of
-January. Weeks are numbered w01 to w53. w00 for Bacula is the week that
-precedes the first ISO week (i.e. has the first few days of the year if any
-occur before Thursday). w00 is not defined by the ISO specification. A week
-starts with Monday and ends with Sunday.
-
-According to the NIST (US National Institute of Standards and Technology),
-12am and 12pm are ambiguous and can be defined to anything. However,
-12:01am is the same as 00:01 and 12:01pm is the same as 12:01, so Bacula
-defines 12am as 00:00 (midnight) and 12pm as 12:00 (noon). You can avoid
-this abiguity (confusion) by using 24 hour time specifications (i.e. no
-am/pm). This is the definition in Bacula version 2.0.3 and later.
-
-An example schedule resource that is named {\bf WeeklyCycle} and runs a job
-with level full each Sunday at 2:05am and an incremental job Monday through
-Saturday at 2:05am is:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Schedule {
- Name = "WeeklyCycle"
- Run = Level=Full sun at 2:05
- Run = Level=Incremental mon-sat at 2:05
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-An example of a possible monthly cycle is as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Schedule {
- Name = "MonthlyCycle"
- Run = Level=Full Pool=Monthly 1st sun at 2:05
- Run = Level=Differential 2nd-5th sun at 2:05
- Run = Level=Incremental Pool=Daily mon-sat at 2:05
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The first of every month:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Schedule {
- Name = "First"
- Run = Level=Full on 1 at 2:05
- Run = Level=Incremental on 2-31 at 2:05
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Every 10 minutes:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Schedule {
- Name = "TenMinutes"
- Run = Level=Full hourly at 0:05
- Run = Level=Full hourly at 0:15
- Run = Level=Full hourly at 0:25
- Run = Level=Full hourly at 0:35
- Run = Level=Full hourly at 0:45
- Run = Level=Full hourly at 0:55
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{Technical Notes on Schedules}
-\index[general]{Schedules!Technical Notes on}
-\index[general]{Technical Notes on Schedules}
-
-Internally Bacula keeps a schedule as a bit mask. There are six masks and a
-minute field to each schedule. The masks are hour, day of the month (mday),
-month, day of the week (wday), week of the month (wom), and week of the year
-(woy). The schedule is initialized to have the bits of each of these masks
-set, which means that at the beginning of every hour, the job will run. When
-you specify a month for the first time, the mask will be cleared and the bit
-corresponding to your selected month will be selected. If you specify a second
-month, the bit corresponding to it will also be added to the mask. Thus when
-Bacula checks the masks to see if the bits are set corresponding to the
-current time, your job will run only in the two months you have set. Likewise,
-if you set a time (hour), the hour mask will be cleared, and the hour you
-specify will be set in the bit mask and the minutes will be stored in the
-minute field.
-
-For any schedule you have defined, you can see how these bits are set by doing
-a {\bf show schedules} command in the Console program. Please note that the
-bit mask is zero based, and Sunday is the first day of the week (bit zero).
-
-\input{fileset}
-
-\section{The Client Resource}
-\label{ClientResource2}
-\index[general]{Resource!Client}
-\index[general]{Client Resource}
-
-The Client resource defines the attributes of the Clients that are served by
-this Director; that is the machines that are to be backed up. You will need
-one Client resource definition for each machine to be backed up.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Client (or FileDaemon)]
- \index[dir]{Client (or FileDaemon)}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Client (or FileDaemon)}
- Start of the Client directives.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Name}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Name}
- The client name which will be used in the Job resource directive or in the
-console run command. This directive is required.
-
-\item [Address = \lt{}address\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Address}
- \index[dir]{Directive!FD Address}
- \index[dir]{File Daemon Address}
- \index[dir]{Client Address}
- Where the address is a host name, a fully qualified domain name, or a
- network address in dotted quad notation for a Bacula File server daemon.
- This directive is required.
-
-\item [FD Port = \lt{}port-number\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{FD Port}
- \index[dir]{Directive!FD Port}
- Where the port is a port number at which the Bacula File server daemon can
- be contacted. The default is 9102.
-
-\item [Catalog = \lt{}Catalog-resource-name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Catalog}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Catalog}
- This specifies the name of the catalog resource to be used for this Client.
- This directive is required.
-
-\item [Password = \lt{}password\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Password}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Password}
- This is the password to be used when establishing a connection with the File
- services, so the Client configuration file on the machine to be backed up
- must have the same password defined for this Director. This directive is
- required. If you have either {\bf /dev/random} {\bf bc} on your machine,
- Bacula will generate a random password during the configuration process,
- otherwise it will be left blank.
-
- The password is plain text. It is not generated through any special
- process, but it is preferable for security reasons to make the text
- random.
-
-\label{FileRetention}
-\item [File Retention = \lt{}time-period-specification\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{File Retention}
- \index[dir]{Directive!File Retention}
- The File Retention directive defines the length of time that Bacula will
- keep File records in the Catalog database after the End time of the
- Job corresponding to the File records.
- When this time period expires, and if
- {\bf AutoPrune} is set to {\bf yes} Bacula will prune (remove) File records
- that are older than the specified File Retention period. Note, this affects
- only records in the catalog database. It does not affect your archive
- backups.
-
- File records may actually be retained for a shorter period than you specify
- on this directive if you specify either a shorter {\bf Job Retention} or a
- shorter {\bf Volume Retention} period. The shortest retention period of the
- three takes precedence. The time may be expressed in seconds, minutes,
- hours, days, weeks, months, quarters, or years. See the
- \ilink{ Configuration chapter}{Time} of this manual for
- additional details of time specification.
-
- The default is 60 days.
-
-\label{JobRetention}
-\item [Job Retention = \lt{}time-period-specification\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Job Retention}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Job Retention}
- The Job Retention directive defines the length of time that Bacula will keep
- Job records in the Catalog database after the Job End time. When
- this time period expires, and if {\bf AutoPrune} is set to {\bf yes}
- Bacula will prune (remove) Job records that are older than the specified
- File Retention period. As with the other retention periods, this
- affects only records in the catalog and not data in your archive backup.
-
- If a Job record is selected for pruning, all associated File and JobMedia
- records will also be pruned regardless of the File Retention period set.
- As a consequence, you normally will set the File retention period to be
- less than the Job retention period. The Job retention period can actually
- be less than the value you specify here if you set the {\bf Volume
- Retention} directive in the Pool resource to a smaller duration. This is
- because the Job retention period and the Volume retention period are
- independently applied, so the smaller of the two takes precedence.
-
- The Job retention period is specified as seconds, minutes, hours, days,
- weeks, months, quarters, or years. See the
- \ilink{ Configuration chapter}{Time} of this manual for
- additional details of time specification.
-
- The default is 180 days.
-
-\label{AutoPrune}
-\item [AutoPrune = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{AutoPrune}
- \index[dir]{Directive!AutoPrune}
- If AutoPrune is set to {\bf yes} (default), Bacula (version 1.20 or greater)
- will automatically apply the File retention period and the Job retention
- period for the Client at the end of the Job. If you set {\bf AutoPrune = no},
- pruning will not be done, and your Catalog will grow in size each time you
- run a Job. Pruning affects only information in the catalog and not data
- stored in the backup archives (on Volumes).
-
-\item [Maximum Concurrent Jobs = \lt{}number\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Maximum Concurrent Jobs}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Maximum Concurrent Jobs}
- where \lt{}number\gt{} is the maximum number of Jobs with the current Client
- that can run concurrently. Note, this directive limits only Jobs for Clients
- with the same name as the resource in which it appears. Any other
- restrictions on the maximum concurrent jobs such as in the Director, Job, or
- Storage resources will also apply in addition to any limit specified here.
- The default is set to 1, but you may set it to a larger number.
-
-\item [Priority = \lt{}number\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Priority}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Priority}
- The number specifies the priority of this client relative to other clients
- that the Director is processing simultaneously. The priority can range from
- 1 to 1000. The clients are ordered such that the smaller number priorities
- are performed first (not currently implemented).
-\end{description}
-
- The following is an example of a valid Client resource definition:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Client {
- Name = Minimatou
- FDAddress = minimatou
- Catalog = MySQL
- Password = very_good
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{The Storage Resource}
-\label{StorageResource2}
-\index[general]{Resource!Storage}
-\index[general]{Storage Resource}
-
-The Storage resource defines which Storage daemons are available for use by
-the Director.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Storage]
- \index[dir]{Storage}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Storage}
- Start of the Storage resources. At least one storage resource must be
- specified.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Name}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Name}
- The name of the storage resource. This name appears on the Storage directive
- specified in the Job resource and is required.
-
-\item [Address = \lt{}address\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Address}
- \index[dir]{Directive!SD Address}
- \index[dir]{Storage daemon Address}
- Where the address is a host name, a {\bf fully qualified domain name}, or an
- {\bf IP address}. Please note that the \lt{}address\gt{} as specified here
- will be transmitted to the File daemon who will then use it to contact the
- Storage daemon. Hence, it is {\bf not}, a good idea to use {\bf localhost} as
- the name but rather a fully qualified machine name or an IP address. This
- directive is required.
-
-\item [SD Port = \lt{}port\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{SD Port}
- \index[dir]{Directive!SD Port}
- Where port is the port to use to contact the storage daemon for information
- and to start jobs. This same port number must appear in the Storage resource
- of the Storage daemon's configuration file. The default is 9103.
-
-\item [Password = \lt{}password\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Password}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Password}
- This is the password to be used when establishing a connection with the
- Storage services. This same password also must appear in the Director
- resource of the Storage daemon's configuration file. This directive is
- required. If you have either {\bf /dev/random} {\bf bc} on your machine,
- Bacula will generate a random password during the configuration process,
- otherwise it will be left blank.
-
- The password is plain text. It is not generated through any special
- process, but it is preferable for security reasons to use random text.
-
-\item [Device = \lt{}device-name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Device}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Device}
- This directive specifies the Storage daemon's name of the device
- resource to be used for the storage. If you are using an Autochanger,
- the name specified here should be the name of the Storage daemon's
- Autochanger resource rather than the name of an individual device. This
- name is not the physical device name, but the logical device name as
- defined on the {\bf Name} directive contained in the {\bf Device} or the
- {\bf Autochanger} resource definition of the {\bf Storage daemon}
- configuration file. You can specify any name you would like (even the
- device name if you prefer) up to a maximum of 127 characters in length.
- The physical device name associated with this device is specified in the
- {\bf Storage daemon} configuration file (as {\bf Archive Device}).
- Please take care not to define two different Storage resource directives
- in the Director that point to the same Device in the Storage daemon.
- Doing so may cause the Storage daemon to block (or hang) attempting to
- open the same device that is already open. This directive is required.
-
-\label{MediaType}
-\item [Media Type = \lt{}MediaType\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Media Type}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Media Type}
- This directive specifies the Media Type to be used to store the data.
- This is an arbitrary string of characters up to 127 maximum that you
- define. It can be anything you want. However, it is best to make it
- descriptive of the storage media (e.g. File, DAT, "HP DLT8000", 8mm,
- ...). In addition, it is essential that you make the {\bf Media Type}
- specification unique for each storage media type. If you have two DDS-4
- drives that have incompatible formats, or if you have a DDS-4 drive and
- a DDS-4 autochanger, you almost certainly should specify different {\bf
- Media Types}. During a restore, assuming a {\bf DDS-4} Media Type is
- associated with the Job, Bacula can decide to use any Storage daemon
- that supports Media Type {\bf DDS-4} and on any drive that supports it.
-
- If you are writing to disk Volumes, you must make doubly sure that each
- Device resource defined in the Storage daemon (and hence in the
- Director's conf file) has a unique media type. Otherwise for Bacula
- versions 1.38 and older, your restores may not work because Bacula
- will assume that you can mount any Media Type with the same name on
- any Device associated with that Media Type. This is possible with
- tape drives, but with disk drives, unless you are very clever you
- cannot mount a Volume in any directory -- this can be done by creating
- an appropriate soft link.
-
- Currently Bacula permits only a single Media Type per Storage
- and Device definition. Consequently, if
- you have a drive that supports more than one Media Type, you can
- give a unique string to Volumes with different intrinsic Media
- Type (Media Type = DDS-3-4 for DDS-3 and DDS-4 types), but then
- those volumes will only be mounted on drives indicated with the
- dual type (DDS-3-4).
-
- If you want to tie Bacula to using a single Storage daemon or drive, you
- must specify a unique Media Type for that drive. This is an important
- point that should be carefully understood. Note, this applies equally
- to Disk Volumes. If you define more than one disk Device resource in
- your Storage daemon's conf file, the Volumes on those two devices are in
- fact incompatible because one can not be mounted on the other device
- since they are found in different directories. For this reason, you
- probably should use two different Media Types for your two disk Devices
- (even though you might think of them as both being File types). You can
- find more on this subject in the \ilink{Basic Volume
- Management}{DiskChapter} chapter of this manual.
-
- The {\bf MediaType} specified in the Director's Storage resource, {\bf
- must} correspond to the {\bf Media Type} specified in the {\bf Device}
- resource of the {\bf Storage daemon} configuration file. This directive
- is required, and it is used by the Director and the Storage daemon to
- ensure that a Volume automatically selected from the Pool corresponds to
- the physical device. If a Storage daemon handles multiple devices (e.g.
- will write to various file Volumes on different partitions), this
- directive allows you to specify exactly which device.
-
- As mentioned above, the value specified in the Director's Storage
- resource must agree with the value specified in the Device resource in
- the {\bf Storage daemon's} configuration file. It is also an additional
- check so that you don't try to write data for a DLT onto an 8mm device.
-
-\label{Autochanger1}
-\item [Autochanger = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Autochanger}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Autochanger}
- If you specify {\bf yes} for this command (the default is {\bf no}),
- when you use the {\bf label} command or the {\bf add} command to create
- a new Volume, {\bf Bacula} will also request the Autochanger Slot
- number. This simplifies creating database entries for Volumes in an
- autochanger. If you forget to specify the Slot, the autochanger will
- not be used. However, you may modify the Slot associated with a Volume
- at any time by using the {\bf update volume} or {\bf update slots}
- command in the console program. When {\bf autochanger} is enabled, the
- algorithm used by Bacula to search for available volumes will be
- modified to consider only Volumes that are known to be in the
- autochanger's magazine. If no {\bf in changer} volume is found, Bacula
- will attempt recycling, pruning, ..., and if still no volume is found,
- Bacula will search for any volume whether or not in the magazine. By
- privileging in changer volumes, this procedure minimizes operator
- intervention. The default is {\bf no}.
-
- For the autochanger to be used, you must also specify {\bf Autochanger =
- yes} in the \ilink{Device Resource}{Autochanger} in the Storage daemon's
- configuration file as well as other important Storage daemon
- configuration information. Please consult the \ilink{Using
- Autochangers}{AutochangersChapter} manual of this chapter for the
- details of using autochangers.
-
-\item [Maximum Concurrent Jobs = \lt{}number\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Maximum Concurrent Jobs}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Maximum Concurrent Jobs}
- where \lt{}number\gt{} is the maximum number of Jobs with the current
- Storage resource that can run concurrently. Note, this directive limits
- only Jobs for Jobs using this Storage daemon. Any other restrictions on
- the maximum concurrent jobs such as in the Director, Job, or Client
- resources will also apply in addition to any limit specified here. The
- default is set to 1, but you may set it to a larger number. However, if
- you set the Storage daemon's number of concurrent jobs greater than one,
- we recommend that you read the waring documented under \ilink{Maximum
- Concurrent Jobs}{DirMaxConJobs} in the Director's resource or simply
- turn data spooling on as documented in the \ilink{Data
- Spooling}{SpoolingChapter} chapter of this manual.
-
-\item [Heartbeat Interval = \lt{}time-interval\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Heartbeat Interval}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Heartbeat}
- This directive is optional and if specified will cause the Director to
- set a keepalive interval (heartbeat) in seconds on each of the sockets
- it opens for the Storage resource. This value will override any
- specified at the Director level. It is implemented only on systems
- (Linux, ...) that provide the {\bf setsockopt} TCP\_KEEPIDLE function.
- The default value is zero, which means no change is made to the socket.
-
-\end{description}
-
-The following is an example of a valid Storage resource definition:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-# Definition of tape storage device
-Storage {
- Name = DLTDrive
- Address = lpmatou
- Password = storage_password # password for Storage daemon
- Device = "HP DLT 80" # same as Device in Storage daemon
- Media Type = DLT8000 # same as MediaType in Storage daemon
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{The Pool Resource}
-\label{PoolResource}
-\index[general]{Resource!Pool}
-\index[general]{Pool Resource}
-
-The Pool resource defines the set of storage Volumes (tapes or files) to be
-used by Bacula to write the data. By configuring different Pools, you can
-determine which set of Volumes (media) receives the backup data. This permits,
-for example, to store all full backup data on one set of Volumes and all
-incremental backups on another set of Volumes. Alternatively, you could assign
-a different set of Volumes to each machine that you backup. This is most
-easily done by defining multiple Pools.
-
-Another important aspect of a Pool is that it contains the default attributes
-(Maximum Jobs, Retention Period, Recycle flag, ...) that will be given to a
-Volume when it is created. This avoids the need for you to answer a large
-number of questions when labeling a new Volume. Each of these attributes can
-later be changed on a Volume by Volume basis using the {\bf update} command in
-the console program. Note that you must explicitly specify which Pool Bacula
-is to use with each Job. Bacula will not automatically search for the correct
-Pool.
-
-Most often in Bacula installations all backups for all machines (Clients) go
-to a single set of Volumes. In this case, you will probably only use the {\bf
-Default} Pool. If your backup strategy calls for you to mount a different tape
-each day, you will probably want to define a separate Pool for each day. For
-more information on this subject, please see the
-\ilink{Backup Strategies}{StrategiesChapter} chapter of this
-manual.
-
-
-To use a Pool, there are three distinct steps. First the Pool must be defined
-in the Director's configuration file. Then the Pool must be written to the
-Catalog database. This is done automatically by the Director each time that it
-starts, or alternatively can be done using the {\bf create} command in the
-console program. Finally, if you change the Pool definition in the Director's
-configuration file and restart Bacula, the pool will be updated alternatively
-you can use the {\bf update pool} console command to refresh the database
-image. It is this database image rather than the Director's resource image
-that is used for the default Volume attributes. Note, for the pool to be
-automatically created or updated, it must be explicitly referenced by a Job
-resource.
-
-Next the physical media must be labeled. The labeling can either be done with
-the {\bf label} command in the {\bf console} program or using the {\bf btape}
-program. The preferred method is to use the {\bf label} command in the {\bf
-console} program.
-
-Finally, you must add Volume names (and their attributes) to the Pool. For
-Volumes to be used by Bacula they must be of the same {\bf Media Type} as the
-archive device specified for the job (i.e. if you are going to back up to a
-DLT device, the Pool must have DLT volumes defined since 8mm volumes cannot be
-mounted on a DLT drive). The {\bf Media Type} has particular importance if you
-are backing up to files. When running a Job, you must explicitly specify which
-Pool to use. Bacula will then automatically select the next Volume to use from
-the Pool, but it will ensure that the {\bf Media Type} of any Volume selected
-from the Pool is identical to that required by the Storage resource you have
-specified for the Job.
-
-If you use the {\bf label} command in the console program to label the
-Volumes, they will automatically be added to the Pool, so this last step is
-not normally required.
-
-It is also possible to add Volumes to the database without explicitly labeling
-the physical volume. This is done with the {\bf add} console command.
-
-As previously mentioned, each time Bacula starts, it scans all the Pools
-associated with each Catalog, and if the database record does not already
-exist, it will be created from the Pool Resource definition. {\bf Bacula}
-probably should do an {\bf update pool} if you change the Pool definition, but
-currently, you must do this manually using the {\bf update pool} command in
-the Console program.
-
-The Pool Resource defined in the Director's configuration file
-(bacula-dir.conf) may contain the following directives:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Pool]
- \index[dir]{Pool}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Pool}
- Start of the Pool resource. There must be at least one Pool resource
- defined.
-
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Name}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Name}
- The name of the pool. For most applications, you will use the default
- pool name {\bf Default}. This directive is required.
-
-\label{MaxVolumes}
-\item [Maximum Volumes = \lt{}number\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Maximum Volumes}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Maximum Volumes}
- This directive specifies the maximum number of volumes (tapes or files)
- contained in the pool. This directive is optional, if omitted or set to
- zero, any number of volumes will be permitted. In general, this
- directive is useful for Autochangers where there is a fixed number of
- Volumes, or for File storage where you wish to ensure that the backups
- made to disk files do not become too numerous or consume too much space.
-
-\item [Pool Type = \lt{}type\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Pool Type}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Pool Type}
- This directive defines the pool type, which corresponds to the type of
- Job being run. It is required and may be one of the following:
-
-\begin{itemize}
- \item [Backup]
- \item [*Archive]
- \item [*Cloned]
- \item [*Migration]
- \item [*Copy]
- \item [*Save]
-\end{itemize}
- Note, only Backup is current implemented.
-
-\item [Storage = \lt{}storage-resource-name\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Storage}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Storage}
- The Storage directive defines the name of the storage services where you
- want to backup the FileSet data. For additional details, see the
- \ilink{Storage Resource Chapter}{StorageResource2} of this manual.
- The Storage resource may also be specified in the Job resource,
- but the value, if any, in the Pool resource overrides any value
- in the Job. This Storage resource definition is not required by either
- the Job resource or in the Pool, but it must be specified in
- one or the other. If not configuration error will result.
-
-\item [Use Volume Once = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Use Volume Once}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Use Volume Once}
- This directive if set to {\bf yes} specifies that each volume is to be
- used only once. This is most useful when the Media is a file and you
- want a new file for each backup that is done. The default is {\bf no}
- (i.e. use volume any number of times). This directive will most likely
- be phased out (deprecated), so you are recommended to use {\bf Maximum
- Volume Jobs = 1} instead.
-
- The value defined by this directive in the bacula-dir.conf file is the
- default value used when a Volume is created. Once the volume is
- created, changing the value in the bacula-dir.conf file will not change
- what is stored for the Volume. To change the value for an existing
- Volume you must use the {\bf update} command in the Console.
-
- Please see the notes below under {\bf Maximum Volume Jobs} concerning
- using this directive with multiple simultaneous jobs.
-
-\item [Maximum Volume Jobs = \lt{}positive-integer\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Maximum Volume Jobs}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Maximum Volume Jobs}
- This directive specifies the maximum number of Jobs that can be written
- to the Volume. If you specify zero (the default), there is no limit.
- Otherwise, when the number of Jobs backed up to the Volume equals {\bf
- positive-integer} the Volume will be marked {\bf Used}. When the Volume
- is marked {\bf Used} it can no longer be used for appending Jobs, much
- like the {\bf Full} status but it can be recycled if recycling is
- enabled, and thus used again. By setting {\bf MaximumVolumeJobs} to
- one, you get the same effect as setting {\bf UseVolumeOnce = yes}.
-
- The value defined by this directive in the bacula-dir.conf
- file is the default value used when a Volume is created. Once the volume is
- created, changing the value in the bacula-dir.conf file will not change what
- is stored for the Volume. To change the value for an existing Volume you
- must use the {\bf update} command in the Console.
-
- If you are running multiple simultaneous jobs, this directive may not
- work correctly because when a drive is reserved for a job, this
- directive is not taken into account, so multiple jobs may try to
- start writing to the Volume. At some point, when the Media record is
- updated, multiple simultaneous jobs may fail since the Volume can no
- longer be written.
-
-\item [Maximum Volume Files = \lt{}positive-integer\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Maximum Volume Files}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Maximum Volume Files}
- This directive specifies the maximum number of files that can be written
- to the Volume. If you specify zero (the default), there is no limit.
- Otherwise, when the number of files written to the Volume equals {\bf
- positive-integer} the Volume will be marked {\bf Used}. When the Volume
- is marked {\bf Used} it can no longer be used for appending Jobs, much
- like the {\bf Full} status but it can be recycled if recycling is
- enabled and thus used again. This value is checked and the {\bf Used}
- status is set only at the end of a job that writes to the particular
- volume.
-
- The value defined by this directive in the bacula-dir.conf file is the
- default value used when a Volume is created. Once the volume is
- created, changing the value in the bacula-dir.conf file will not change
- what is stored for the Volume. To change the value for an existing
- Volume you must use the {\bf update} command in the Console.
-
-\item [Maximum Volume Bytes = \lt{}size\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Maximum Volume Bytes}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Maximum Volume Bytes}
- This directive specifies the maximum number of bytes that can be written
- to the Volume. If you specify zero (the default), there is no limit
- except the physical size of the Volume. Otherwise, when the number of
- bytes written to the Volume equals {\bf size} the Volume will be marked
- {\bf Used}. When the Volume is marked {\bf Used} it can no longer be
- used for appending Jobs, much like the {\bf Full} status but it can be
- recycled if recycling is enabled, and thus the Volume can be re-used
- after recycling. This value is checked and the {\bf Used} status set
- while the job is writing to the particular volume.
-
- This directive is particularly useful for restricting the size
- of disk volumes, and will work correctly even in the case of
- multiple simultaneous jobs writing to the volume.
-
- The value defined by this directive in the bacula-dir.conf file is the
- default value used when a Volume is created. Once the volume is
- created, changing the value in the bacula-dir.conf file will not change
- what is stored for the Volume. To change the value for an existing
- Volume you must use the {\bf update} command in the Console.
-
-\item [Volume Use Duration = \lt{}time-period-specification\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Volume Use Duration}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Volume Use Duration}
- The Volume Use Duration directive defines the time period that the
- Volume can be written beginning from the time of first data write to the
- Volume. If the time-period specified is zero (the default), the Volume
- can be written indefinitely. Otherwise, the next time a job
- runs that wants to access this Volume, and the time period from the
- first write to the volume (the first Job written) exceeds the
- time-period-specification, the Volume will be marked {\bf Used}, which
- means that no more Jobs can be appended to the Volume, but it may be
- recycled if recycling is enabled. Using the command {\bf
- status dir} applies algorithms similar to running jobs, so
- during such a command, the Volume status may also be changed.
- Once the Volume is
- recycled, it will be available for use again.
-
- You might use this directive, for example, if you have a Volume used for
- Incremental backups, and Volumes used for Weekly Full backups. Once the
- Full backup is done, you will want to use a different Incremental
- Volume. This can be accomplished by setting the Volume Use Duration for
- the Incremental Volume to six days. I.e. it will be used for the 6
- days following a Full save, then a different Incremental volume will be
- used. Be careful about setting the duration to short periods such as 23
- hours, or you might experience problems of Bacula waiting for a tape
- over the weekend only to complete the backups Monday morning when an
- operator mounts a new tape.
-
- The use duration is checked and the {\bf Used} status is set only at the
- end of a job that writes to the particular volume, which means that even
- though the use duration may have expired, the catalog entry will not be
- updated until the next job that uses this volume is run. This
- directive is not intended to be used to limit volume sizes
- and will not work correctly (i.e. will fail jobs) if the use
- duration expires while multiple simultaneous jobs are writing
- to the volume.
-
- Please note that the value defined by this directive in the bacula-dir.conf
- file is the default value used when a Volume is created. Once the volume is
- created, changing the value in the bacula-dir.conf file will not change what
- is stored for the Volume. To change the value for an existing Volume you
- must use the
- \ilink{\bf update volume}{UpdateCommand} command in the Console.
-
-\item [Catalog Files = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Catalog Files}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Catalog Files}
- This directive defines whether or not you want the names of the files
- that were saved to be put into the catalog. The default is {\bf yes}.
- The advantage of specifying {\bf Catalog Files = No} is that you will
- have a significantly smaller Catalog database. The disadvantage is that
- you will not be able to produce a Catalog listing of the files backed up
- for each Job (this is often called Browsing). Also, without the File
- entries in the catalog, you will not be able to use the Console {\bf
- restore} command nor any other command that references File entries.
-
-\label{PoolAutoPrune}
-\item [AutoPrune = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{AutoPrune}
- \index[dir]{Directive!AutoPrune}
- If AutoPrune is set to {\bf yes} (default), Bacula (version 1.20 or
- greater) will automatically apply the Volume Retention period when new
- Volume is needed and no appendable Volumes exist in the Pool. Volume
- pruning causes expired Jobs (older than the {\bf Volume Retention}
- period) to be deleted from the Catalog and permits possible recycling of
- the Volume.
-
-\label{VolRetention}
-\item [Volume Retention = \lt{}time-period-specification\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Volume Retention}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Volume Retention}
- The Volume Retention directive defines the length of time that {\bf
- Bacula} will keep records associated with the Volume in
- the Catalog database after the End time of each Job written to the
- Volume. When this time period expires, and if {\bf AutoPrune} is set to
- {\bf yes} Bacula may prune (remove) Job records that are older than the
- specified Volume Retention period if it is necessary to free up a
- Volume. Recycling will not occur until it is absolutely necessary to
- free up a volume (i.e. no other writable volume exists).
- All File records associated with pruned Jobs are also
- pruned. The time may be specified as seconds, minutes, hours, days,
- weeks, months, quarters, or years. The {\bf Volume Retention} is
- applied independently of the {\bf Job Retention} and the {\bf File
- Retention} periods defined in the Client resource. This means that all
- the retentions periods are applied in turn and that the shorter period
- is the one that effectively takes precedence. Note, that when the {\bf
- Volume Retention} period has been reached, and it is necessary to obtain
- a new volume, Bacula will prune both the Job and the File records. This
- pruning could also occur during a {\bf status dir} command because it
- uses similar algorithms for finding the next available Volume.
-
- It is important to know that when the Volume Retention period expires,
- Bacula does not automatically recycle a Volume. It attempts to keep the
- Volume data intact as long as possible before over writing the Volume.
-
- By defining multiple Pools with different Volume Retention periods, you
- may effectively have a set of tapes that is recycled weekly, another
- Pool of tapes that is recycled monthly and so on. However, one must
- keep in mind that if your {\bf Volume Retention} period is too short, it
- may prune the last valid Full backup, and hence until the next Full
- backup is done, you will not have a complete backup of your system, and
- in addition, the next Incremental or Differential backup will be
- promoted to a Full backup. As a consequence, the minimum {\bf Volume
- Retention} period should be at twice the interval of your Full backups.
- This means that if you do a Full backup once a month, the minimum Volume
- retention period should be two months.
-
- The default Volume retention period is 365 days, and either the default
- or the value defined by this directive in the bacula-dir.conf file is
- the default value used when a Volume is created. Once the volume is
- created, changing the value in the bacula-dir.conf file will not change
- what is stored for the Volume. To change the value for an existing
- Volume you must use the {\bf update} command in the Console.
-
-\label{PoolScratchPool}
-\item [ScratchPool = \lt{}pool-resource-name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{ScrachPool}
- \index[dir]{Directive!ScrachPool}
- This directive permits to specify a dedicate \textsl{Scratch} for the
- current pool. This pool will replace the special pool named \textsl{Scrach}
- for volume selection. For more information about \textsl{Scratch} see
- \ilink{Scratch Pool}{TheScratchPool} section of this manual. This is useful
- when using multiple storage sharing the same mediatype or when you want to
- dedicate volumes to a particular set of pool.
-
-\label{PoolRecyclePool}
-\item [RecyclePool = \lt{}pool-resource-name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{RecyclePool}
- \index[dir]{Directive!RecyclePool}
- This directive defines to which pool
- the Volume will be placed (moved) when it is recycled. Without
- this directive, a Volume will remain in the same pool when it is
- recycled. With this directive, it can be moved automatically to any
- existing pool during a recycle. This directive is probably most
- useful when defined in the Scratch pool, so that volumes will
- be recycled back into the Scratch pool. For more on the see the
- \ilink{Scratch Pool}{TheScratchPool} section of this manual.
-
- Although this directive is called RecyclePool, the Volume in
- question is actually moved from its current pool to the one
- you specify on this directive when Bacula prunes the Volume and
- discovers that there are no records left in the catalog and hence
- marks it as {\bf Purged}.
-
-
-\label{PoolRecycle}
-\item [Recycle = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Recycle}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Recycle}
- This directive specifies whether or not Purged Volumes may be recycled.
- If it is set to {\bf yes} (default) and Bacula needs a volume but finds
- none that are appendable, it will search for and recycle (reuse) Purged
- Volumes (i.e. volumes with all the Jobs and Files expired and thus
- deleted from the Catalog). If the Volume is recycled, all previous data
- written to that Volume will be overwritten. If Recycle is set to {\bf
- no}, the Volume will not be recycled, and hence, the data will remain
- valid. If you want to reuse (re-write) the Volume, and the recycle flag
- is no (0 in the catalog), you may manually set the recycle flag (update
- command) for a Volume to be reused.
-
- Please note that the value defined by this directive in the
- bacula-dir.conf file is the default value used when a Volume is created.
- Once the volume is created, changing the value in the bacula-dir.conf
- file will not change what is stored for the Volume. To change the value
- for an existing Volume you must use the {\bf update} command in the
- Console.
-
- When all Job and File records have been pruned or purged from the
- catalog for a particular Volume, if that Volume is marked as
- Append, Full, Used, or Error, it will then be marked as Purged. Only
- Volumes marked as Purged will be considered to be converted to the
- Recycled state if the {\bf Recycle} directive is set to {\bf yes}.
-
-
-\label{RecycleOldest}
-\item [Recycle Oldest Volume = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Recycle Oldest Volume}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Recycle Oldest Volume}
- This directive instructs the Director to search for the oldest used
- Volume in the Pool when another Volume is requested by the Storage
- daemon and none are available. The catalog is then {\bf pruned}
- respecting the retention periods of all Files and Jobs written to this
- Volume. If all Jobs are pruned (i.e. the volume is Purged), then the
- Volume is recycled and will be used as the next Volume to be written.
- This directive respects any Job, File, or Volume retention periods that
- you may have specified, and as such it is {\bf much} better to use this
- directive than the Purge Oldest Volume.
-
- This directive can be useful if you have a fixed number of Volumes in the
- Pool and you want to cycle through them and you have specified the correct
- retention periods.
-
- However, if you use this directive and have only one
- Volume in the Pool, you will immediately recycle your Volume if you fill
- it and Bacula needs another one. Thus your backup will be totally invalid.
- Please use this directive with care. The default is {\bf no}.
-
-\label{RecycleCurrent}
-
-\item [Recycle Current Volume = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Recycle Current Volume}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Recycle Current Volume}
- If Bacula needs a new Volume, this directive instructs Bacula to Prune
- the volume respecting the Job and File retention periods. If all Jobs
- are pruned (i.e. the volume is Purged), then the Volume is recycled and
- will be used as the next Volume to be written. This directive respects
- any Job, File, or Volume retention periods that you may have specified,
- and thus it is {\bf much} better to use it rather than the Purge Oldest
- Volume directive.
-
- This directive can be useful if you have: a fixed number of Volumes in
- the Pool, you want to cycle through them, and you have specified
- retention periods that prune Volumes before you have cycled through the
- Volume in the Pool.
-
- However, if you use this directive and have only one Volume in the Pool,
- you will immediately recycle your Volume if you fill it and Bacula needs
- another one. Thus your backup will be totally invalid. Please use this
- directive with care. The default is {\bf no}.
-
-\label{PurgeOldest}
-
-\item [Purge Oldest Volume = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Purge Oldest Volume}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Purge Oldest Volume}
- This directive instructs the Director to search for the oldest used
- Volume in the Pool when another Volume is requested by the Storage
- daemon and none are available. The catalog is then {\bf purged}
- irrespective of retention periods of all Files and Jobs written to this
- Volume. The Volume is then recycled and will be used as the next Volume
- to be written. This directive overrides any Job, File, or Volume
- retention periods that you may have specified.
-
- This directive can be useful if you have a fixed number of Volumes in
- the Pool and you want to cycle through them and reusing the oldest one
- when all Volumes are full, but you don't want to worry about setting
- proper retention periods. However, by using this option you risk losing
- valuable data.
-
- Please be aware that {\bf Purge Oldest Volume} disregards all retention
- periods. If you have only a single Volume defined and you turn this
- variable on, that Volume will always be immediately overwritten when it
- fills! So at a minimum, ensure that you have a decent number of Volumes
- in your Pool before running any jobs. If you want retention periods to
- apply do not use this directive. To specify a retention period, use the
- {\bf Volume Retention} directive (see above).
-
- We {\bf highly} recommend against using this directive, because it is
- sure that some day, Bacula will recycle a Volume that contains current
- data. The default is {\bf no}.
-
-\item [Cleaning Prefix = \lt{}string\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Cleaning Prefix}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Cleaning Prefix}
- This directive defines a prefix string, which if it matches the
- beginning of a Volume name during labeling of a Volume, the Volume will
- be defined with the VolStatus set to {\bf Cleaning} and thus Bacula will
- never attempt to use this tape. This is primarily for use with
- autochangers that accept barcodes where the convention is that barcodes
- beginning with {\bf CLN} are treated as cleaning tapes.
-
-\label{Label}
-\item [Label Format = \lt{}format\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Label Format}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Label Format}
- This directive specifies the format of the labels contained in this
- pool. The format directive is used as a sort of template to create new
- Volume names during automatic Volume labeling.
-
- The {\bf format} should be specified in double quotes, and consists of
- letters, numbers and the special characters hyphen ({\bf -}), underscore
- ({\bf \_}), colon ({\bf :}), and period ({\bf .}), which are the legal
- characters for a Volume name. The {\bf format} should be enclosed in
- double quotes (").
-
- In addition, the format may contain a number of variable expansion
- characters which will be expanded by a complex algorithm allowing you to
- create Volume names of many different formats. In all cases, the
- expansion process must resolve to the set of characters noted above that
- are legal Volume names. Generally, these variable expansion characters
- begin with a dollar sign ({\bf \$}) or a left bracket ({\bf [}). If you
- specify variable expansion characters, you should always enclose the
- format with double quote characters ({\bf "}). For more details on
- variable expansion, please see the \ilink{Variable
- Expansion}{VarsChapter} Chapter of this manual.
-
- If no variable expansion characters are found in the string, the Volume
- name will be formed from the {\bf format} string appended with the
- a unique number that increases. If you do not remove volumes from the
- pool, this number should be the number of volumes plus one, but this
- is not guaranteed. The unique number will be edited as four
- digits with leading zeros. For example, with a {\bf Label Format =
- "File-"}, the first volumes will be named {\bf File-0001}, {\bf
- File-0002}, ...
-
- With the exception of Job specific variables, you can test your {\bf
- LabelFormat} by using the \ilink{ var command}{var} the Console Chapter
- of this manual.
-
- In almost all cases, you should enclose the format specification (part
- after the equal sign) in double quotes. Please note that this directive
- is deprecated and is replaced in version 1.37 and greater with a Python
- script for creating volume names.
-
-\end{description}
-
-In order for a Pool to be used during a Backup Job, the Pool must have at
-least one Volume associated with it. Volumes are created for a Pool using
-the {\bf label} or the {\bf add} commands in the {\bf Bacula Console},
-program. In addition to adding Volumes to the Pool (i.e. putting the
-Volume names in the Catalog database), the physical Volume must be labeled
-with a valid Bacula software volume label before {\bf Bacula} will accept
-the Volume. This will be automatically done if you use the {\bf label}
-command. Bacula can automatically label Volumes if instructed to do so,
-but this feature is not yet fully implemented.
-
-The following is an example of a valid Pool resource definition:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-
-Pool {
- Name = Default
- Pool Type = Backup
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\subsection{The Scratch Pool}
-\label{TheScratchPool}
-\index[general]{Scratch Pool}
-In general, you can give your Pools any name you wish, but there is one
-important restriction: the Pool named {\bf Scratch}, if it exists behaves
-like a scratch pool of Volumes in that when Bacula needs a new Volume for
-writing and it cannot find one, it will look in the Scratch pool, and if
-it finds an available Volume, it will move it out of the Scratch pool into
-the Pool currently being used by the job.
-
-
-\section{The Catalog Resource}
-\label{CatalogResource}
-\index[general]{Resource!Catalog}
-\index[general]{Catalog Resource}
-
-The Catalog Resource defines what catalog to use for the current job.
-Currently, Bacula can only handle a single database server (SQLite, MySQL,
-PostgreSQL) that is defined when configuring {\bf Bacula}. However, there
-may be as many Catalogs (databases) defined as you wish. For example, you
-may want each Client to have its own Catalog database, or you may want
-backup jobs to use one database and verify or restore jobs to use another
-database.
-
-Since SQLite is compiled in, it always runs on the same machine
-as the Director and the database must be directly accessible (mounted) from
-the Director. However, since both MySQL and PostgreSQL are networked
-databases, they may reside either on the same machine as the Director
-or on a different machine on the network. See below for more details.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Catalog]
- \index[dir]{Catalog}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Catalog}
- Start of the Catalog resource. At least one Catalog resource must be
-defined.
-
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Name}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Name}
- The name of the Catalog. No necessary relation to the database server
- name. This name will be specified in the Client resource directive
- indicating that all catalog data for that Client is maintained in this
- Catalog. This directive is required.
-
-\item [password = \lt{}password\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{password}
- \index[dir]{Directive!password}
- This specifies the password to use when logging into the database. This
- directive is required.
-
-\item [DB Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{DB Name}
- \index[dir]{Directive!DB Name}
- This specifies the name of the database. If you use multiple catalogs
- (databases), you specify which one here. If you are using an external
- database server rather than the internal one, you must specify a name
- that is known to the server (i.e. you explicitly created the Bacula
- tables using this name. This directive is required.
-
-\item [user = \lt{}user\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{user}
- \index[dir]{Directive!user}
- This specifies what user name to use to log into the database. This
- directive is required.
-
-\item [DB Socket = \lt{}socket-name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{DB Socket}
- \index[dir]{Directive!DB Socket}
- This is the name of a socket to use on the local host to connect to the
- database. This directive is used only by MySQL and is ignored by SQLite.
- Normally, if neither {\bf DB Socket} or {\bf DB Address} are specified, MySQL
- will use the default socket. If the DB Socket is specified, the
- MySQL server must reside on the same machine as the Director.
-
-\item [DB Address = \lt{}address\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{DB Address}
- \index[dir]{Directive!DB Address}
- This is the host address of the database server. Normally, you would specify
- this instead of {\bf DB Socket} if the database server is on another machine.
- In that case, you will also specify {\bf DB Port}. This directive is used
- only by MySQL and PostgreSQL and is ignored by SQLite if provided.
- This directive is optional.
-
-\item [DB Port = \lt{}port\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{DB Port}
- \index[dir]{Directive!DB Port}
- This defines the port to be used in conjunction with {\bf DB Address} to
- access the database if it is on another machine. This directive is used only
- by MySQL and PostgreSQL and is ignored by SQLite if provided. This
- directive is optional.
-
-%% \item [Multiple Connections = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
-%% \index[dir]{Multiple Connections}
-%% \index[dir]{Directive!Multiple Connections}
-%% By default, this directive is set to no. In that case, each job that uses
-the
-%% same Catalog will use a single connection to the catalog. It will be shared,
-%% and Bacula will allow only one Job at a time to communicate. If you set this
-%% directive to yes, Bacula will permit multiple connections to the database,
-%% and the database must be multi-thread capable. For SQLite and PostgreSQL,
-%% this is no problem. For MySQL, you must be *very* careful to have the
-%% multi-thread version of the client library loaded on your system. When this
-%% directive is set yes, each Job will have a separate connection to the
-%% database, and the database will control the interaction between the
-different
-%% Jobs. This can significantly speed up the database operations if you are
-%% running multiple simultaneous jobs. In addition, for SQLite and PostgreSQL,
-%% Bacula will automatically enable transactions. This can significantly speed
-%% up insertion of attributes in the database either for a single Job or
-%% multiple simultaneous Jobs.
-
-%% This directive has not been tested. Please test carefully before running it
-%% in production and report back your results.
-
-\end{description}
-
-The following is an example of a valid Catalog resource definition:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Catalog
-{
- Name = SQLite
- dbname = bacula;
- user = bacula;
- password = "" # no password = no security
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-or for a Catalog on another machine:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Catalog
-{
- Name = MySQL
- dbname = bacula
- user = bacula
- password = ""
- DB Address = remote.acme.com
- DB Port = 1234
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{The Messages Resource}
-\label{MessagesResource2}
-\index[general]{Resource!Messages}
-\index[general]{Messages Resource}
-
-For the details of the Messages Resource, please see the
-\ilink{Messages Resource Chapter}{MessagesChapter} of this
-manual.
-
-\section{The Console Resource}
-\label{ConsoleResource1}
-\index[general]{Console Resource}
-\index[general]{Resource!Console}
-
-As of Bacula version 1.33 and higher, there are three different kinds of
-consoles, which the administrator or user can use to interact with the
-Director. These three kinds of consoles comprise three different security
-levels.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The first console type is an {\bf anonymous} or {\bf default} console,
- which has full privileges. There is no console resource necessary for
- this type since the password is specified in the Director's resource and
- consequently such consoles do not have a name as defined on a {\bf Name
- =} directive. This is the kind of console that was initially
- implemented in versions prior to 1.33 and remains valid. Typically you
- would use it only for administrators.
-
-\item The second type of console, and new to version 1.33 and higher is a
- "named" console defined within a Console resource in both the Director's
- configuration file and in the Console's configuration file. Both the
- names and the passwords in these two entries must match much as is the
- case for Client programs.
-
- This second type of console begins with absolutely no privileges except
- those explicitly specified in the Director's Console resource. Thus you
- can have multiple Consoles with different names and passwords, sort of
- like multiple users, each with different privileges. As a default,
- these consoles can do absolutely nothing -- no commands whatsoever. You
- give them privileges or rather access to commands and resources by
- specifying access control lists in the Director's Console resource. The
- ACLs are specified by a directive followed by a list of access names.
- Examples of this are shown below.
-
-\item The third type of console is similar to the above mentioned one in that
- it requires a Console resource definition in both the Director and the
- Console. In addition, if the console name, provided on the {\bf Name =}
- directive, is the same as a Client name, that console is permitted to
- use the {\bf SetIP} command to change the Address directive in the
- Director's client resource to the IP address of the Console. This
- permits portables or other machines using DHCP (non-fixed IP addresses)
- to "notify" the Director of their current IP address.
-\end{itemize}
-
-The Console resource is optional and need not be specified. The following
-directives are permitted within the Director's configuration resource:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Name}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Name}
- The name of the console. This name must match the name specified in the
-Console's configuration resource (much as is the case with Client
-definitions).
-
-\item [Password = \lt{}password\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Password}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Password}
- Specifies the password that must be supplied for a named Bacula Console
- to be authorized. The same password must appear in the {\bf Console}
- resource of the Console configuration file. For added security, the
- password is never actually passed across the network but rather a
- challenge response hash code created with the password. This directive
- is required. If you have either {\bf /dev/random} {\bf bc} on your
- machine, Bacula will generate a random password during the configuration
- process, otherwise it will be left blank.
-
- The password is plain text. It is not generated through any special
- process. However, it is preferable for security reasons to choose
- random text.
-
-\item [JobACL = \lt{}name-list\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{JobACL}
- \index[dir]{Directive!JobACL}
- This directive is used to specify a list of Job resource names that can
- be accessed by the console. Without this directive, the console cannot
- access any of the Director's Job resources. Multiple Job resource names
- may be specified by separating them with commas, and/or by specifying
- multiple JobACL directives. For example, the directive may be specified
- as:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- JobACL = kernsave, "Backup client 1", "Backup client 2"
- JobACL = "RestoreFiles"
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-With the above specification, the console can access the Director's resources
-for the four jobs named on the JobACL directives, but for no others.
-
-\item [ClientACL = \lt{}name-list\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{ClientACL}
- \index[dir]{Directive!ClientACL}
- This directive is used to specify a list of Client resource names that can
-be
-accessed by the console.
-
-\item [StorageACL = \lt{}name-list\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{StorageACL}
- \index[dir]{Directive!StorageACL}
- This directive is used to specify a list of Storage resource names that can
-be accessed by the console.
-
-\item [ScheduleACL = \lt{}name-list\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{ScheduleACL}
- \index[dir]{Directive!ScheduleACL}
- This directive is used to specify a list of Schedule resource names that can
- be accessed by the console.
-
-\item [PoolACL = \lt{}name-list\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{PoolACL}
- \index[dir]{Directive!PoolACL}
- This directive is used to specify a list of Pool resource names that can be
- accessed by the console.
-
-\item [FileSetACL = \lt{}name-list\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{FileSetACL}
- \index[dir]{Directive!FileSetACL}
- This directive is used to specify a list of FileSet resource names that
- can be accessed by the console.
-
-\item [CatalogACL = \lt{}name-list\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{CatalogACL}
- \index[dir]{Directive!CatalogACL}
- This directive is used to specify a list of Catalog resource names that
- can be accessed by the console.
-
-\item [CommandACL = \lt{}name-list\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{CommandACL}
- \index[dir]{Directive!CommandACL}
- This directive is used to specify a list of of console commands that can
- be executed by the console.
-
-\item [WhereACL = \lt{}string\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{WhereACL}
- \index[dir]{Directive!WhereACL}
- This directive permits you to specify where a restricted console
- can restore files. If this directive is not specified, only the
- default restore location is permitted (normally {\bf
- /tmp/bacula-restores}. If {\bf *all*} is specified any path the
- user enters will be accepted (not very secure), any other
- value specified (there may be multiple WhereACL directives) will
- restrict the user to use that path. For example, on a Unix system,
- if you specify "/", the file will be restored to the original
- location. This directive is untested.
-
-\end{description}
-
-Aside from Director resource names and console command names, the special
-keyword {\bf *all*} can be specified in any of the above access control lists.
-When this keyword is present, any resource or command name (which ever is
-appropriate) will be accepted. For an example configuration file, please see
-the
-\ilink{Console Configuration}{ConsoleConfChapter} chapter of this
-manual.
-
-\section{The Counter Resource}
-\label{CounterResource}
-\index[general]{Resource!Counter}
-\index[general]{Counter Resource}
-
-The Counter Resource defines a counter variable that can be accessed by
-variable expansion used for creating Volume labels with the {\bf LabelFormat}
-directive. See the
-\ilink{LabelFormat}{Label} directive in this chapter for more
-details.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Counter]
- \index[dir]{Counter}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Counter}
- Start of the Counter resource. Counter directives are optional.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Name}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Name}
- The name of the Counter. This is the name you will use in the variable
-expansion to reference the counter value.
-
-\item [Minimum = \lt{}integer\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Minimum}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Minimum}
- This specifies the minimum value that the counter can have. It also becomes
-the default. If not supplied, zero is assumed.
-
-\item [Maximum = \lt{}integer\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Maximum}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Maximum}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Maximum}
- This is the maximum value value that the counter can have. If not specified
-or set to zero, the counter can have a maximum value of 2,147,483,648 (2 to
-the 31 power). When the counter is incremented past this value, it is reset
-to the Minimum.
-
-\item [*WrapCounter = \lt{}counter-name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{*WrapCounter}
- \index[dir]{Directive!*WrapCounter}
- If this value is specified, when the counter is incremented past the
-maximum
-and thus reset to the minimum, the counter specified on the {\bf WrapCounter}
-is incremented. (This is not currently implemented).
-
-\item [Catalog = \lt{}catalog-name\gt{}]
- \index[dir]{Catalog}
- \index[dir]{Directive!Catalog}
- If this directive is specified, the counter and its values will be saved in
-the specified catalog. If this directive is not present, the counter will be
-redefined each time that Bacula is started.
-\end{description}
-
-\section{Example Director Configuration File}
-\label{SampleDirectorConfiguration}
-\index[general]{File!Example Director Configuration}
-\index[general]{Example Director Configuration File}
-
-An example Director configuration file might be the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#
-# Default Bacula Director Configuration file
-#
-# The only thing that MUST be changed is to add one or more
-# file or directory names in the Include directive of the
-# FileSet resource.
-#
-# For Bacula release 1.15 (5 March 2002) -- redhat
-#
-# You might also want to change the default email address
-# from root to your address. See the "mail" and "operator"
-# directives in the Messages resource.
-#
-Director { # define myself
- Name = rufus-dir
- QueryFile = "/home/kern/bacula/bin/query.sql"
- WorkingDirectory = "/home/kern/bacula/bin/working"
- PidDirectory = "/home/kern/bacula/bin/working"
- Password = "XkSfzu/Cf/wX4L8Zh4G4/yhCbpLcz3YVdmVoQvU3EyF/"
-}
-# Define the backup Job
-Job {
- Name = "NightlySave"
- Type = Backup
- Level = Incremental # default
- Client=rufus-fd
- FileSet="Full Set"
- Schedule = "WeeklyCycle"
- Storage = DLTDrive
- Messages = Standard
- Pool = Default
-}
-Job {
- Name = "Restore"
- Type = Restore
- Client=rufus-fd
- FileSet="Full Set"
- Where = /tmp/bacula-restores
- Storage = DLTDrive
- Messages = Standard
- Pool = Default
-}
-
-# List of files to be backed up
-FileSet {
- Name = "Full Set"
- Include {
- Options { signature=SHA1}
-#
-# Put your list of files here, one per line or include an
-# external list with:
-#
-# @file-name
-#
-# Note: / backs up everything
- File = /
-}
- Exclude {}
-}
-# When to do the backups
-Schedule {
- Name = "WeeklyCycle"
- Run = level=Full sun at 2:05
- Run = level=Incremental mon-sat at 2:05
-}
-# Client (File Services) to backup
-Client {
- Name = rufus-fd
- Address = rufus
- Catalog = MyCatalog
- Password = "MQk6lVinz4GG2hdIZk1dsKE/LxMZGo6znMHiD7t7vzF+"
- File Retention = 60d # sixty day file retention
- Job Retention = 1y # 1 year Job retention
- AutoPrune = yes # Auto apply retention periods
-}
-# Definition of DLT tape storage device
-Storage {
- Name = DLTDrive
- Address = rufus
- Password = "jMeWZvfikUHvt3kzKVVPpQ0ccmV6emPnF2cPYFdhLApQ"
- Device = "HP DLT 80" # same as Device in Storage daemon
- Media Type = DLT8000 # same as MediaType in Storage daemon
-}
-# Definition for a DLT autochanger device
-Storage {
- Name = Autochanger
- Address = rufus
- Password = "jMeWZvfikUHvt3kzKVVPpQ0ccmV6emPnF2cPYFdhLApQ"
- Device = "Autochanger" # same as Device in Storage daemon
- Media Type = DLT-8000 # Different from DLTDrive
- Autochanger = yes
-}
-# Definition of DDS tape storage device
-Storage {
- Name = SDT-10000
- Address = rufus
- Password = "jMeWZvfikUHvt3kzKVVPpQ0ccmV6emPnF2cPYFdhLApQ"
- Device = SDT-10000 # same as Device in Storage daemon
- Media Type = DDS-4 # same as MediaType in Storage daemon
-}
-# Definition of 8mm tape storage device
-Storage {
- Name = "8mmDrive"
- Address = rufus
- Password = "jMeWZvfikUHvt3kzKVVPpQ0ccmV6emPnF2cPYFdhLApQ"
- Device = "Exabyte 8mm"
- MediaType = "8mm"
-}
-# Definition of file storage device
-Storage {
- Name = File
- Address = rufus
- Password = "jMeWZvfikUHvt3kzKVVPpQ0ccmV6emPnF2cPYFdhLApQ"
- Device = FileStorage
- Media Type = File
-}
-# Generic catalog service
-Catalog {
- Name = MyCatalog
- dbname = bacula; user = bacula; password = ""
-}
-# Reasonable message delivery -- send most everything to
-# the email address and to the console
-Messages {
- Name = Standard
- mail = root@localhost = all, !skipped, !terminate
- operator = root@localhost = mount
- console = all, !skipped, !saved
-}
-
-# Default pool definition
-Pool {
- Name = Default
- Pool Type = Backup
- AutoPrune = yes
- Recycle = yes
-}
-#
-# Restricted console used by tray-monitor to get the status of the director
-#
-Console {
- Name = Monitor
- Password = "GN0uRo7PTUmlMbqrJ2Gr1p0fk0HQJTxwnFyE4WSST3MWZseR"
- CommandACL = status, .status
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
+++ /dev/null
-#
-# Avoid that @VERSION@ and @DATE@ are changed by configure
-# This file is sourced by update_version
-#
-echo "s%@VERSION@%${VERSION}%g" >${out}
-echo "s%@DATE@%${DATE}%g" >>${out}
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Client/File daemon Configuration}
-\label{FiledConfChapter}
-\index[general]{Configuration!Client/File daemon }
-\index[general]{Client/File daemon Configuration }
-
-The Client (or File Daemon) Configuration is one of the simpler ones to
-specify. Generally, other than changing the Client name so that error messages
-are easily identified, you will not need to modify the default Client
-configuration file.
-
-For a general discussion of configuration file and resources including the
-data types recognized by {\bf Bacula}, please see the
-\ilink{Configuration}{ConfigureChapter} chapter of this manual. The
-following Client Resource definitions must be defined:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item
- \ilink{Client}{ClientResource} -- to define what Clients are to
- be backed up.
-\item
- \ilink{Director}{DirectorResource} -- to define the Director's
- name and its access password.
-\item
- \ilink{Messages}{MessagesChapter} -- to define where error and
- information messages are to be sent.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{The Client Resource}
-\label{ClientResource}
-\index[general]{Resource!Client }
-\index[general]{Client Resource }
-
-The Client Resource (or FileDaemon) resource defines the name of the Client
-(as used by the Director) as well as the port on which the Client listens for
-Director connections.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Client (or FileDaemon)]
- \index[fd]{Client (or FileDaemon)}
- \index[fd]{Directive!Client (or FileDaemon)}
- Start of the Client records. There must be one and only one Client resource
- in the configuration file, since it defines the properties of the current
- client program.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Name}
- \index[fd]{Directive!Name}
- The client name that must be used by the Director when connecting. Generally,
- it is a good idea to use a name related to the machine so that error messages
- can be easily identified if you have multiple Clients. This directive is
- required.
-
-\item [Working Directory = \lt{}Directory\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Working Directory}
- \index[fd]{Directive!Working Directory}
- This directive is mandatory and specifies a directory in which the File
- daemon may put its status files. This directory should be used only by {\bf
- Bacula}, but may be shared by other Bacula daemons provided the daemon
- names on the {\bf Name} definition are unique for each daemon. This directive
- is required.
-
- On Win32 systems, in some circumstances you may need to specify a drive
- letter in the specified working directory path. Also, please be sure
- that this directory is writable by the SYSTEM user otherwise restores
- may fail (the bootstrap file that is transferred to the File daemon from
- the Director is temporarily put in this directory before being passed
- to the Storage daemon).
-
-\item [Pid Directory = \lt{}Directory\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Pid Directory}
- \index[fd]{Directive!Pid Directory}
- This directive is mandatory and specifies a directory in which the Director
- may put its process Id file files. The process Id file is used to shutdown
- Bacula and to prevent multiple copies of Bacula from running simultaneously.
- This record is required. Standard shell expansion of the {\bf Directory} is
- done when the configuration file is read so that values such as {\bf \$HOME}
- will be properly expanded.
-
- Typically on Linux systems, you will set this to: {\bf /var/run}. If you are
- not installing Bacula in the system directories, you can use the {\bf Working
- Directory} as defined above.
-
-\item [Heartbeat Interval = \lt{}time-interval\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Heartbeat Interval}
- \index[fd]{Directive!Heartbeat Interval}
- \index[general]{Heartbeat Interval}
- \index[general]{Broken pipe}
- \index[general]{slow}
- \index[general]{Backups!slow}
- This record defines an interval of time in seconds. For each heartbeat that the
- File daemon receives from the Storage daemon, it will forward it to the
- Director. In addition, if no heartbeat has been received from the
- Storage daemon and thus forwarded the File daemon will send a heartbeat
- signal to the Director and to the Storage daemon to keep the channels
- active. The default interval is zero which disables the heartbeat.
- This feature is particularly useful if you have a router such as 3Com
- that does not follow Internet standards and times out a valid
- connection after a short duration despite the fact that keepalive is
- set. This usually results in a broken pipe error message.
-
- If you continue getting broken pipe error messages despite using the
- Heartbeat Interval, and you are using Windows, you should consider
- upgrading your ethernet driver. This is a known problem with NVidia
- NForce 3 drivers (4.4.2 17/05/2004), or try the following workaround
- suggested by Thomas Simmons for Win32 machines:
-
- Browse to:
- Start \gt{} Control Panel \gt{} Network Connections
-
- Right click the connection for the nvidia adapter and select properties.
- Under the General tab, click "Configure...". Under the Advanced tab set
- "Checksum Offload" to disabled and click OK to save the change.
-
- Lack of communications, or communications that get interrupted can
- also be caused by Linux firewalls where you have a rule that throttles
- connections or traffic.
-
-
-\item [Maximum Concurrent Jobs = \lt{}number\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Maximum Concurrent Jobs}
- \index[fd]{Directive!Maximum Concurrent Jobs}
- where \lt{}number\gt{} is the maximum number of Jobs that should run
- concurrently. The default is set to 2, but you may set it to a larger
- number. Each contact from the Director (e.g. status request, job start
- request) is considered as a Job, so if you want to be able to do a {\bf
- status} request in the console at the same time as a Job is running, you
- will need to set this value greater than 1.
-
-\item [FDAddresses = \lt{}IP-address-specification\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{FDAddresses}
- \index[fd]{Directive!FDAddresses}
- Specify the ports and addresses on which the File daemon listens for
- Director connections. Probably the simplest way to explain is to show
- an example:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- FDAddresses = {
- ip = { addr = 1.2.3.4; port = 1205; }
- ipv4 = {
- addr = 1.2.3.4; port = http; }
- ipv6 = {
- addr = 1.2.3.4;
- port = 1205;
- }
- ip = {
- addr = 1.2.3.4
- port = 1205
- }
- ip = { addr = 1.2.3.4 }
- ip = {
- addr = 201:220:222::2
- }
- ip = {
- addr = bluedot.thun.net
- }
- }
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-where ip, ip4, ip6, addr, and port are all keywords. Note, that the address
-can be specified as either a dotted quadruple, or IPv6 colon notation, or as
-a symbolic name (only in the ip specification). Also, port can be specified
-as a number or as the mnemonic value from the /etc/services file. If a port
-is not specified, the default will be used. If an ip section is specified,
-the resolution can be made either by IPv4 or IPv6. If ip4 is specified, then
-only IPv4 resolutions will be permitted, and likewise with ip6.
-
-\item [FDPort = \lt{}port-number\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{FDPort}
- \index[fd]{Directive!FDPort}
- This specifies the port number on which the Client listens for Director
- connections. It must agree with the FDPort specified in the Client resource
- of the Director's configuration file. The default is 9102.
-
-\item [FDAddress = \lt{}IP-Address\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{FDAddress}
- \index[fd]{Directive!FDAddress}
- This record is optional, and if it is specified, it will cause the File
- daemon server (for Director connections) to bind to the specified {\bf
- IP-Address}, which is either a domain name or an IP address specified as a
- dotted quadruple. If this record is not specified, the File daemon will bind
- to any available address (the default).
-
-\item [FDSourceAddress = \lt{}IP-Address\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{FDSourceAddress}
- \index[fd]{Directive!FDSourceAddress}
- This record is optional, and if it is specified, it will cause the File
- daemon server (for Storage connections) to bind to the specified {\bf
- IP-Address}, which is either a domain name or an IP address specified as a
- dotted quadruple. If this record is not specified, the kernel will choose
- the best address according to the routing table (the default).
-
-\item [SDConnectTimeout = \lt{}time-interval\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{SDConnectTimeout}
- \index[fd]{Directive!SDConnectTimeout}
- This record defines an interval of time that the File daemon will try to
- connect to the Storage daemon. The default is 30 minutes. If no connection
- is made in the specified time interval, the File daemon cancels the Job.
-
-\item [Maximum Network Buffer Size = \lt{}bytes\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Maximum Network Buffer Size}
- \index[fd]{Directive!Maximum Network Buffer Size}
- where \lt{}bytes\gt{} specifies the initial network buffer size to use with
- the File daemon. This size will be adjusted down if it is too large until it
- is accepted by the OS. Please use care in setting this value since if it is
- too large, it will be trimmed by 512 bytes until the OS is happy, which may
- require a large number of system calls. The default value is 65,536 bytes.
-
- Note, on certain Windows machines, there are reports that the
- transfer rates are very slow and this seems to be related to
- the default 65,536 size. On systems where the transfer rates
- seem abnormally slow compared to other systems, you might try
- setting the Maximum Network Buffer Size to 32,768 in both the
- File daemon and in the Storage daemon.
-
-\item [Heartbeat Interval = \lt{}time-interval\gt{}]
- \index[console]{Heartbeat Interval}
- \index[console]{Directive!Heartbeat}
- This directive is optional and if specified will cause the File daemon to
- set a keepalive interval (heartbeat) in seconds on each of the sockets
- to communicate with the Storage daemon. It is implemented only on systems
- (Linux, ...) that provide the {\bf setsockopt} TCP\_KEEPIDLE function.
- The default value is zero, which means no change is made to the socket.
-
-
-\item [PKI Encryption]
- See the \ilink{Data Encryption}{DataEncryption} chapter of this manual.
-
-\item [PKI Signatures]
- See the \ilink{Data Encryption}{DataEncryption} chapter of this manual.
-
-\item [PKI Keypair]
- See the \ilink{Data Encryption}{DataEncryption} chapter of this manual.
-
-\item [PKI Master Key]
- See the \ilink{Data Encryption}{DataEncryption} chapter of this manual.
-
-\end{description}
-
-The following is an example of a valid Client resource definition:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Client { # this is me
- Name = rufus-fd
- WorkingDirectory = $HOME/bacula/bin/working
- Pid Directory = $HOME/bacula/bin/working
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{The Director Resource}
-\label{DirectorResource}
-\index[general]{Director Resource }
-\index[general]{Resource!Director }
-
-The Director resource defines the name and password of the Directors that are
-permitted to contact this Client.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Director]
- \index[fd]{Director}
- \index[fd]{Directive!Director}
- Start of the Director records. There may be any number of Director resources
- in the Client configuration file. Each one specifies a Director that is
- allowed to connect to this Client.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Name}
- \index[fd]{Directive!Name}
- The name of the Director that may contact this Client. This name must be the
- same as the name specified on the Director resource in the Director's
- configuration file. Note, the case (upper/lower) of the characters in
- the name are significant (i.e. S is not the same as s). This directive
- is required.
-
-\item [Password = \lt{}password\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Password}
- \index[fd]{Directive!Password}
- Specifies the password that must be supplied for a Director to be authorized.
-This password must be the same as the password specified in the Client
-resource in the Director's configuration file. This directive is required.
-
-\item [Monitor = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Monitor}
- \index[fd]{Directive!Monitor}
- If Monitor is set to {\bf no} (default), this director will have full access
- to this Client. If Monitor is set to {\bf yes}, this director will only be
- able to fetch the current status of this Client.
-
- Please note that if this director is being used by a Monitor, we highly
- recommend to set this directive to {\bf yes} to avoid serious security
- problems.
-\end{description}
-
-Thus multiple Directors may be authorized to use this Client's services. Each
-Director will have a different name, and normally a different password as
-well.
-
-The following is an example of a valid Director resource definition:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#
-# List Directors who are permitted to contact the File daemon
-#
-Director {
- Name = HeadMan
- Password = very_good # password HeadMan must supply
-}
-Director {
- Name = Worker
- Password = not_as_good
- Monitor = Yes
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{The Message Resource}
-\label{MessagesResource3}
-\index[general]{Message Resource}
-\index[general]{Resource!Message }
-
-Please see the
-\ilink{Messages Resource}{MessagesChapter} Chapter of this
-manual for the details of the Messages Resource.
-
-There must be at least one Message resource in the Client configuration file.
-
-\section{Example Client Configuration File}
-\label{SampleClientConfiguration}
-\index[general]{Example Client Configuration File }
-\index[general]{File!Example Client Configuration }
-
-An example File Daemon configuration file might be the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#
-# Default Bacula File Daemon Configuration file
-#
-# For Bacula release 1.35.2 (16 August 2004) -- gentoo 1.4.16
-#
-# There is not much to change here except perhaps to
-# set the Director's name and File daemon's name
-# to something more appropriate for your site.
-#
-#
-# List Directors who are permitted to contact this File daemon
-#
-Director {
- Name = rufus-dir
- Password = "/LqPRkX++saVyQE7w7mmiFg/qxYc1kufww6FEyY/47jU"
-}
-#
-# Restricted Director, used by tray-monitor to get the
-# status of the file daemon
-#
-Director {
- Name = rufus-mon
- Password = "FYpq4yyI1y562EMS35bA0J0QC0M2L3t5cZObxT3XQxgxppTn"
- Monitor = yes
-}
-#
-# "Global" File daemon configuration specifications
-#
-FileDaemon { # this is me
- Name = rufus-fd
- WorkingDirectory = $HOME/bacula/bin/working
- Pid Directory = $HOME/bacula/bin/working
-}
-# Send all messages except skipped files back to Director
-Messages {
- Name = Standard
- director = rufus-dir = all, !skipped
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
+++ /dev/null
--%
-%%
-
-\section{The FileSet Resource}
-\label{FileSetResource}
-\index[general]{Resource!FileSet}
-\index[general]{FileSet Resource}
-
-The FileSet resource defines what files are to be included or excluded in a
-backup job. A {\bf FileSet} resource is required for each backup Job. It
-consists of a list of files or directories to be included, a list of files
-or directories to be excluded and the various backup options such as
-compression, encryption, and signatures that are to be applied to each
-file.
-
-Any change to the list of the included files will cause Bacula to
-automatically create a new FileSet (defined by the name and an MD5 checksum
-of the Include/Exclude contents). Each time a new FileSet is created,
-Bacula will ensure that the next backup is always a Full save.
-
-Bacula is designed to handle most character sets of the world,
-US ASCII, German, French, Chinese, ... However, it does this by
-encoding everything in UTF-8, and it expects all configuration files
-(including those read on Win32 machines) to be in UTF-8 format.
-UTF-8 is typically the default on Linux machines, but not on all
-Unix machines, nor on Windows, so you must take some care to ensure
-that your locale is set properly before starting Bacula.
-On most modern Win32 machines, you can edit the conf files with {\bf
-notebook} and choose output encoding UTF-8.
-
-To ensure that Bacula configuration files can be correctly read including
-foreign characters the {bf LANG} environment variable
-must end in {\bf .UTF-8}. An full example is {\bf en\_US.UTF-8}. The
-exact syntax may vary a bit from OS to OS, and exactly how you define
-it will also vary.
-
-Bacula assumes that all filenames are in UTF-8 format on Linux and
-Unix machines. On Win32 they are in Unicode (UTF-16), and will
-be automatically converted to UTF-8 format.
-
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [FileSet]
-\index[dir]{FileSet}
-\index[dir]{Directive!FileSet}
-Start of the FileSet resource. One {\bf FileSet} resource must be
-defined for each Backup job.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Name}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Name}
- The name of the FileSet resource. This directive is required.
-
-\item [Ignore FileSet Changes = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Ignore FileSet Changes}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Ignore FileSet Changes}
- Normally, if you modify the FileSet Include or Exclude lists,
- the next backup will be forced to a Full so that Bacula can
- guarantee that any additions or deletions are properly saved.
-
- We strongly recommend against setting this directive to yes,
- since doing so may cause you to have an incomplete set of backups.
-
- If this directive is set to {\bf yes}, any changes you make to the
- FileSet Include or Exclude lists, will not force a Full during
- subsequent backups.
-
- The default is {\bf no}, in which case, if you change the Include or
- Exclude, Bacula will force a Full backup to ensure that everything is
- properly backed up.
-
-\item [Enable VSS = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Enable VSS}
-\index[dir]{Directive!Enable VSS}
- If this directive is set to {\bf yes} the File daemon will be notified
- that the user wants to use a Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) backup
- for this job. The default is {\bf yes}. This directive is effective
- only for VSS enabled Win32 File daemons. It permits a consistent copy
- of open files to be made for cooperating writer applications, and for
- applications that are not VSS away, Bacula can at least copy open files.
- For more information, please see the
- \ilink{Windows}{VSS} chapter of this manual.
-
-
-\item [Include \{ Options \{\lt{}file-options\gt{}\} ...;
- \lt{}file-list\gt{} \} ]
-\index[dir]{Include \{ [ Options \{\lt{}file-options\gt{}\} ...]
- \lt{}file-list\gt{} \} }
-\index[dir]{Directive!Include}
-
-\item [Options \{ \lt{}file-options\gt{} \} ]
-\index[dir]{Options \{ \lt{}file-options\gt{} \} }
-
-\item [Exclude \{ \lt{}file-list\gt{} \}]
-\index[dir]{Exclude \{ \lt{}file-list\gt{} \} }
-\index[dir]{Directive!Exclude}
-
-
-\end{description}
-
-The Include resource must contain a list of directories and/or files to be
-processed in the backup job. Normally, all files found in all
-subdirectories of any directory in the Include File list will be backed up.
-Note, see below for the definition of \lt{}file-list\gt{}.
-The Include resource may also contain one or more Options resources that
-specify options such as compression to be applied to all or any subset of
-the files found when processing the file-list for backup. Please see
-below for more details concerning Options resources.
-
-There can be any number of {\bf Include} resources within the FileSet, each
-having its own list of directories or files to be backed up and the backup
-options defined by one or more Options resources. The {\bf file-list}
-consists of one file or directory name per line. Directory names should be
-specified without a trailing slash with Unix path notation.
-
-Windows users, please take note to specify directories (even c:/...) in
-Unix path notation. If you use Windows conventions, you will most likely
-not be able to restore your files due to the fact that the Windows
-path separator was defined as an escape character long before Windows
-existed, and Bacula adheres to that convention (i.e. \\ means the next character
-appears as itself).
-
-You should always specify a full path for every directory and file that you
-list in the FileSet. In addition, on Windows machines, you should {\bf
-always} prefix the directory or filename with the drive specification
-(e.g. {\bf c:/xxx}) using Unix directory name separators
-(forward slash). The drive letter itself can be upper or lower case (e.g.
-c:/xxx or C:/xxx).
-
-Bacula's default for processing directories is to recursively descend in
-the directory saving all files and subdirectories. Bacula will not by
-default cross filesystems (or mount points in Unix parlance). This means
-that if you specify the root partition (e.g. {\bf /}), Bacula will save
-only the root partition and not any of the other mounted filesystems.
-Similarly on Windows systems, you must explicitly specify each of the
-drives you want saved (e.g.
-{\bf c:/} and {\bf d:/} ...). In addition, at least for Windows systems, you
-will most likely want to enclose each specification within double quotes
-particularly if the directory (or file) name contains spaces. The {\bf df}
-command on Unix systems will show you which mount points you must specify to
-save everything. See below for an example.
-
-Take special care not to include a directory twice or Bacula will backup
-the same files two times wasting a lot of space on your archive device.
-Including a directory twice is very easy to do. For example:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Include {
- File = /
- File = /usr
- Options { compression=GZIP }
- }
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-on a Unix system where /usr is a subdirectory (rather than a mounted
-filesystem) will cause /usr to be backed up twice. In this case, on Bacula
-versions prior to 1.32f-5-09Mar04 due to a bug, you will not be able to
-restore hard linked files that were backed up twice.
-
-If you have used Bacula prior to version 1.36.3, you will note three things in
-the new FileSet syntax:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item There is no equal sign (=) after the Include and before the opening
- brace (\{). The same is true for the Exclude.
-\item Each directory (or filename) to be included or excluded is preceded by a {\bf File
- =}. Previously they were simply listed on separate lines.
-\item The options that previously appeared on the Include line now must be
- specified within their own Options resource.
-\item The Exclude resource does not accept Options.
-\item When using wild-cards or regular expressions, directory names are
- always terminated with a slash (/) and filenames have no trailing slash.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-The Options resource is optional, but when specified, it will contain a
-list of {\bf keyword=value} options to be applied to the file-list.
-See below for the definition of file-list.
-Multiple Options resources may be specified one after another. As the
-files are found in the specified directories, the Options will applied to
-the filenames to determine if and how the file should be backed up. The
-wildcard and regular expression pattern matching parts of the
-Options resources are checked in the order they are specified in the
-FileSet until the first one that matches. Once one matches, the
-compression and other flags within the Options specification will
-apply to the pattern matched.
-
-A key point is that in the absence of an Option or no other Option is
-matched, every file is accepted for backing up. This means that if
-you want to exclude something, you must explicitly specify an Option
-with an {\bf exclude = yes} and some pattern matching.
-
-Once Bacula determines that the Options resource matches the file under
-consideration, that file will be saved without looking at any other Options
-resources that may be present. This means that any wild cards must appear
-before an Options resource without wild cards.
-
-If for some reason, Bacula checks all the Options resources to a file under
-consideration for backup, but there are no matches (generally because of wild
-cards that don't match), Bacula as a default will then backup the file. This
-is quite logical if you consider the case of no Options clause is specified,
-where you want everything to be backed up, and it is important to keep in mind
-when excluding as mentioned above.
-
-However, one additional point is that in the case that no match was found,
-Bacula will use the options found in the last Options resource. As a
-consequence, if you want a particular set of "default" options, you should put
-them in an Options resource after any other Options.
-
-It is a good idea to put all your wild-card and regex expressions inside
-double quotes to prevent conf file scanning problems.
-
-This is perhaps a bit overwhelming, so there are a number of examples included
-below to illustrate how this works.
-
-You find yourself using a lot of Regex statements, which will cost quite a lot
-of CPU time, we recommend you simplify them if you can, or better yet
-convert them to Wild statements which are much more efficient.
-
-The directives within an Options resource may be one of the following:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [compression=GZIP]
-\index[dir]{compression}
-\index[dir]{Directive!compression}
- All files saved will be software compressed using the GNU ZIP
- compression format. The compression is done on a file by file basis by
- the File daemon. If there is a problem reading the tape in a single
- record of a file, it will at most affect that file and none of the other
- files on the tape. Normally this option is {\bf not} needed if you have
- a modern tape drive as the drive will do its own compression. In fact,
- if you specify software compression at the same time you have hardware
- compression turned on, your files may actually take more space on the
- volume.
-
- Software compression is very important if you are writing your Volumes
- to a file, and it can also be helpful if you have a fast computer but a
- slow network, otherwise it is generally better to rely your tape drive's
- hardware compression. As noted above, it is not generally a good idea
- to do both software and hardware compression.
-
- Specifying {\bf GZIP} uses the default compression level 6 (i.e. {\bf
- GZIP} is identical to {\bf GZIP6}). If you want a different compression
- level (1 through 9), you can specify it by appending the level number
- with no intervening spaces to {\bf GZIP}. Thus {\bf compression=GZIP1}
- would give minimum compression but the fastest algorithm, and {\bf
- compression=GZIP9} would give the highest level of compression, but
- requires more computation. According to the GZIP documentation,
- compression levels greater than six generally give very little extra
- compression and are rather CPU intensive.
-
-\item [signature=SHA1]
-\index[dir]{signature}
-\index[dir]{SHA1}
-\index[dir]{Directive!signature}
- An SHA1 signature will be computed for all The SHA1 algorithm is
- purported to be some what slower than the MD5 algorithm, but at the same
- time is significantly better from a cryptographic point of view (i.e.
- much fewer collisions, much lower probability of being hacked.) It adds
- four more bytes than the MD5 signature. We strongly recommend that
- either this option or MD5 be specified as a default for all files.
- Note, only one of the two options MD5 or SHA1 can be computed for any
- file.
-
-\item [signature=MD5]
-\index[dir]{signature}
-\index[dir]{MD5}
-\index[dir]{Directive!signature}
- An MD5 signature will be computed for all files saved. Adding this
- option generates about 5\% extra overhead for each file saved. In
- addition to the additional CPU time, the MD5 signature adds 16 more
- bytes per file to your catalog. We strongly recommend that this option
- or the SHA1 option be specified as a default for all files.
-
-
-\item[basejob=\lt{}options\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{basejob}
-\index[dir]{Directive!basejob}
-
-The options letters specified are used when running a {\bf Backup Level=Full}
-with BaseJobs. The options letters are the same than in the \textbf{verify=}
-option below.
-
-\item[accurate=\lt{}options\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{accurate}
-\index[dir]{Directive!accurate}
- The options letters specified are used when running a {\bf Backup
- Level=Incremental/Differential} in Accurate mode. The options
- letters are the same than in the \textbf{verify=} option below.
-
-\item [verify=\lt{}options\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{verify}
-\index[dir]{Directive!verify}
- The options letters specified are used when running a {\bf Verify
- Level=Catalog} as well as the {\bf DiskToCatalog} level job. The options
- letters may be any combination of the following:
-
- \begin{description}
-
- \item {\bf i}
- compare the inodes
-
- \item {\bf p}
- compare the permission bits
-
- \item {\bf n}
- compare the number of links
-
- \item {\bf u}
- compare the user id
-
- \item {\bf g}
- compare the group id
-
- \item {\bf s}
- compare the size
-
- \item {\bf a}
- compare the access time
-
- \item {\bf m}
- compare the modification time (st\_mtime)
-
- \item {\bf c}
- compare the change time (st\_ctime)
-
- \item {\bf d}
- report file size decreases
-
- \item {\bf 5}
- compare the MD5 signature
-
- \item {\bf 1}
- compare the SHA1 signature
- \end{description}
-
- A useful set of general options on the {\bf Level=Catalog} or {\bf
- Level=DiskToCatalog} verify is {\bf pins5} i.e. compare permission bits,
- inodes, number of links, size, and MD5 changes.
-
-\item [onefs=yes\vb{}no]
-\index[dir]{onefs}
-\index[dir]{Directive!onefs}
- If set to {\bf yes} (the default), {\bf Bacula} will remain on a single
- file system. That is it will not backup file systems that are mounted
- on a subdirectory. If you are using a *nix system, you may not even be
- aware that there are several different filesystems as they are often
- automatically mounted by the OS (e.g. /dev, /net, /sys, /proc, ...).
- With Bacula 1.38.0 or later, it will inform you when it decides not to
- traverse into another filesystem. This can be very useful if you forgot
- to backup a particular partition. An example of the informational
- message in the job report is:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-rufus-fd: /misc is a different filesystem. Will not descend from / into /misc
-rufus-fd: /net is a different filesystem. Will not descend from / into /net
-rufus-fd: /var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs is a different filesystem. Will not descend from /var/lib/nfs into /var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs
-rufus-fd: /selinux is a different filesystem. Will not descend from / into /selinux
-rufus-fd: /sys is a different filesystem. Will not descend from / into /sys
-rufus-fd: /dev is a different filesystem. Will not descend from / into /dev
-rufus-fd: /home is a different filesystem. Will not descend from / into /home
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- Note: in previous versions of Bacula, the above message was of the form:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Filesystem change prohibited. Will not descend into /misc
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- If you wish to backup multiple filesystems, you can explicitly
- list each filesystem you want saved. Otherwise, if you set the onefs option
- to {\bf no}, Bacula will backup all mounted file systems (i.e. traverse mount
- points) that are found within the {\bf FileSet}. Thus if you have NFS or
- Samba file systems mounted on a directory listed in your FileSet, they will
- also be backed up. Normally, it is preferable to set {\bf onefs=yes} and to
- explicitly name each filesystem you want backed up. Explicitly naming the
- filesystems you want backed up avoids the possibility of getting into a
- infinite loop recursing filesystems. Another possibility is to
- use {\bf onefs=no} and to set {\bf fstype=ext2, ...}.
- See the example below for more details.
-
- If you think that Bacula should be backing up a particular directory
- and it is not, and you have {\bf onefs=no} set, before you complain,
- please do:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- stat /
- stat <filesystem>
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-where you replace {\bf filesystem} with the one in question. If the
-{\bf Device:} number is different for / and for your filesystem, then they
-are on different filesystems. E.g.
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-stat /
- File: `/'
- Size: 4096 Blocks: 16 IO Block: 4096 directory
-Device: 302h/770d Inode: 2 Links: 26
-Access: (0755/drwxr-xr-x) Uid: ( 0/ root) Gid: ( 0/ root)
-Access: 2005-11-10 12:28:01.000000000 +0100
-Modify: 2005-09-27 17:52:32.000000000 +0200
-Change: 2005-09-27 17:52:32.000000000 +0200
-
-stat /net
- File: `/home'
- Size: 4096 Blocks: 16 IO Block: 4096 directory
-Device: 308h/776d Inode: 2 Links: 7
-Access: (0755/drwxr-xr-x) Uid: ( 0/ root) Gid: ( 0/ root)
-Access: 2005-11-10 12:28:02.000000000 +0100
-Modify: 2005-11-06 12:36:48.000000000 +0100
-Change: 2005-11-06 12:36:48.000000000 +0100
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- Also be aware that even if you include {\bf /home} in your list
- of files to backup, as you most likely should, you will get the
- informational message that "/home is a different filesystem" when
- Bacula is processing the {\bf /} directory. This message does not
- indicate an error. This message means that while examining the
- {\bf File =} referred to in the second part of the message, Bacula will
- not descend into the directory mentioned in the first part of the message.
- However, it is possible that the separate filesystem will be backed up
- despite the message. For example, consider the following FileSet:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- File = /
- File = /var
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- where {\bf /var} is a separate filesystem. In this example, you will get a
- message saying that Bacula will not decend from {\bf /} into {\bf /var}. But
- it is important to realise that Bacula will descend into {\bf /var} from the
- second File directive shown above. In effect, the warning is bogus,
- but it is supplied to alert you to possible omissions from your FileSet. In
- this example, {\bf /var} will be backed up. If you changed the FileSet such
- that it did not specify {\bf /var}, then {\bf /var} will not be backed up.
-
-
-\item [honor nodump flag=\lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{honornodumpflag}
-\index[dir]{Directive!honornodumpflag}
- If your file system supports the {\bf nodump} flag (e. g. most
- BSD-derived systems) Bacula will honor the setting of the flag
- when this option is set to {\bf yes}. Files having this flag set
- will not be included in the backup and will not show up in the
- catalog. For directories with the {\bf nodump} flag set recursion
- is turned off and the directory will be listed in the catalog.
- If the {\bf honor nodump flag} option is not defined
- or set to {\bf no} every file and directory will be eligible for
- backup.
-
-
-\label{portable}
-\item [portable=yes\vb{}no]
-\index[dir]{portable}
-\index[dir]{Directive!portable}
- If set to {\bf yes} (default is {\bf no}), the Bacula File daemon will
- backup Win32 files in a portable format, but not all Win32 file
- attributes will be saved and restored. By default, this option is set
- to {\bf no}, which means that on Win32 systems, the data will be backed
- up using Windows API calls and on WinNT/2K/XP, all the security and
- ownership attributes will be properly backed up (and restored). However
- this format is not portable to other systems -- e.g. Unix, Win95/98/Me.
- When backing up Unix systems, this option is ignored, and unless you
- have a specific need to have portable backups, we recommend accept the
- default ({\bf no}) so that the maximum information concerning your files
- is saved.
-
-\item [recurse=yes\vb{}no]
-\index[dir]{recurse}
-\index[dir]{Directive!recurse}
- If set to {\bf yes} (the default), Bacula will recurse (or descend) into
- all subdirectories found unless the directory is explicitly excluded
- using an {\bf exclude} definition. If you set {\bf recurse=no}, Bacula
- will save the subdirectory entries, but not descend into the
- subdirectories, and thus will not save the files or directories
- contained in the subdirectories. Normally, you will want the default
- ({\bf yes}).
-
-\item [sparse=yes\vb{}no]
-\index[dir]{sparse}
-\index[dir]{Directive!sparse}
- Enable special code that checks for sparse files such as created by
- ndbm. The default is {\bf no}, so no checks are made for sparse files.
- You may specify {\bf sparse=yes} even on files that are not sparse file.
- No harm will be done, but there will be a small additional overhead to
- check for buffers of all zero, and a small additional amount of space on
- the output archive will be used to save the seek address of each
- non-zero record read.
-
- {\bf Restrictions:} Bacula reads files in 32K buffers. If the whole
- buffer is zero, it will be treated as a sparse block and not written to
- tape. However, if any part of the buffer is non-zero, the whole buffer
- will be written to tape, possibly including some disk sectors (generally
- 4098 bytes) that are all zero. As a consequence, Bacula's detection of
- sparse blocks is in 32K increments rather than the system block size.
- If anyone considers this to be a real problem, please send in a request
- for change with the reason.
-
- If you are not familiar with sparse files, an example is say a file
- where you wrote 512 bytes at address zero, then 512 bytes at address 1
- million. The operating system will allocate only two blocks, and the
- empty space or hole will have nothing allocated. However, when you read
- the sparse file and read the addresses where nothing was written, the OS
- will return all zeros as if the space were allocated, and if you backup
- such a file, a lot of space will be used to write zeros to the volume.
- Worse yet, when you restore the file, all the previously empty space
- will now be allocated using much more disk space. By turning on the
- {\bf sparse} option, Bacula will specifically look for empty space in
- the file, and any empty space will not be written to the Volume, nor
- will it be restored. The price to pay for this is that Bacula must
- search each block it reads before writing it. On a slow system, this
- may be important. If you suspect you have sparse files, you should
- benchmark the difference or set sparse for only those files that are
- really sparse.
-
-\label{readfifo}
-\item [readfifo=yes\vb{}no]
-\index[dir]{readfifo}
-\index[dir]{Directive!readfifo}
- If enabled, tells the Client to read the data on a backup and write the
- data on a restore to any FIFO (pipe) that is explicitly mentioned in the
- FileSet. In this case, you must have a program already running that
- writes into the FIFO for a backup or reads from the FIFO on a restore.
- This can be accomplished with the {\bf RunBeforeJob} directive. If this
- is not the case, Bacula will hang indefinitely on reading/writing the
- FIFO. When this is not enabled (default), the Client simply saves the
- directory entry for the FIFO.
-
- Unfortunately, when Bacula runs a RunBeforeJob, it waits until that
- script terminates, and if the script accesses the FIFO to write
- into the it, the Bacula job will block and everything will stall.
- However, Vladimir Stavrinov as supplied tip that allows this feature
- to work correctly. He simply adds the following to the beginning
- of the RunBeforeJob script:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- exec > /dev/null
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\item [noatime=yes\vb{}no]
-\index[dir]{noatime}
-\index[dir]{Directive!noatime}
- If enabled, and if your Operating System supports the O\_NOATIME file
- open flag, Bacula will open all files to be backed up with this option.
- It makes it possible to read a file without updating the inode atime
- (and also without the inode ctime update which happens if you try to set
- the atime back to its previous value). It also prevents a race
- condition when two programs are reading the same file, but only one does
- not want to change the atime. It's most useful for backup programs and
- file integrity checkers (and bacula can fit on both categories).
-
- This option is particularly useful for sites where users are sensitive
- to their MailBox file access time. It replaces both the {\bf keepatime}
- option without the inconveniences of that option (see below).
-
- If your Operating System does not support this option, it will be
- silently ignored by Bacula.
-
-
-\item [mtimeonly=yes\vb{}no]
-\index[dir]{mtimeonly}
-\index[dir]{Directive!mtimeonly}
- If enabled, tells the Client that the selection of files during
- Incremental and Differential backups should based only on the st\_mtime
- value in the stat() packet. The default is {\bf no} which means that
- the selection of files to be backed up will be based on both the
- st\_mtime and the st\_ctime values. In general, it is not recommended
- to use this option.
-
-\item [keepatime=yes\vb{}no]
-\index[dir]{keepatime}
-\index[dir]{Directive!keepatime}
- The default is {\bf no}. When enabled, Bacula will reset the st\_atime
- (access time) field of files that it backs up to their value prior to
- the backup. This option is not generally recommended as there are very
- few programs that use st\_atime, and the backup overhead is increased
- because of the additional system call necessary to reset the times.
- However, for some files, such as mailboxes, when Bacula backs up the
- file, the user will notice that someone (Bacula) has accessed the
- file. In this, case keepatime can be useful.
- (I'm not sure this works on Win32).
-
- Note, if you use this feature, when Bacula resets the access time, the
- change time (st\_ctime) will automatically be modified by the system,
- so on the next incremental job, the file will be backed up even if
- it has not changed. As a consequence, you will probably also want
- to use {\bf mtimeonly = yes} as well as keepatime (thanks to
- Rudolf Cejka for this tip).
-
-\item [checkfilechanges=yes\vb{}no]
-\index[dir]{checkfilechanges}
-\index[dir]{Directive!checkfilechanges}
- On versions 2.0.4 or greater,
- if enabled, the Client will checks size, age of each file after
- their backup to see if they have changed during backup. If time
- or size mismatch, an error will raise.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- zog-fd: Client1.2007-03-31_09.46.21 Error: /tmp/test mtime changed during backup.
-\end{verbatim}
-
- In general, it is recommended to use this option.
-
-\item [hardlinks=yes\vb{}no]
-\index[dir]{hardlinks}
-\index[dir]{Directive!hardlinks}
- When enabled (default), this directive will cause hard links to be
- backed up. However, the File daemon keeps track of hard linked files and
- will backup the data only once. The process of keeping track of the
- hard links can be quite expensive if you have lots of them (tens of
- thousands or more). This doesn't occur on normal Unix systems, but if
- you use a program like BackupPC, it can create hundreds of thousands, or
- even millions of hard links. Backups become very long and the File daemon
- will consume a lot of CPU power checking hard links. In such a case,
- set {\bf hardlinks=no} and hard links will not be backed up. Note, using
- this option will most likely backup more data and on a restore the file
- system will not be restored identically to the original.
-
-\item [wild=\lt{}string\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{wild}
-\index[dir]{Directive!wild}
- Specifies a wild-card string to be applied to the filenames and
- directory names. Note, if {\bf Exclude} is not enabled, the wild-card
- will select which files are to be included. If {\bf Exclude=yes} is
- specified, the wild-card will select which files are to be excluded.
- Multiple wild-card directives may be specified, and they will be applied
- in turn until the first one that matches. Note, if you exclude a
- directory, no files or directories below it will be matched.
-
- You may want to test your expressions prior to running your
- backup by using the bwild program. Please see the
- \ilink{Utilities}{bwild} chapter of this manual for
- more. You can also test your full FileSet definition by using
- the \ilink{estimate}{estimate} command in the Console
- chapter of this manual.
- It is recommended to enclose the string in double quotes.
-
-\item [wilddir=\lt{}string\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{wilddir}
-\index[dir]{Directive!wilddir}
- Specifies a wild-card string to be applied to directory names only. No
- filenames will be matched by this directive. Note, if {\bf Exclude} is
- not enabled, the wild-card will select directories to be
- included. If {\bf Exclude=yes} is specified, the wild-card will select
- which directories are to be excluded. Multiple wild-card directives may be
- specified, and they will be applied in turn until the first one that
- matches. Note, if you exclude a directory, no files or directories
- below it will be matched.
-
- It is recommended to enclose the string in double quotes.
-
- You may want to test your expressions prior to running your
- backup by using the bwild program. Please see the
- \ilink{Utilities}{bwild} chapter of this manual for
- more. You can also test your full FileSet definition by using
- the \ilink{estimate}{estimate} command in the Console
- chapter of this manual.
- An example of excluding with the WildDir option on Win32 machines is
- presented below.
-
-\item [wildfile=\lt{}string\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{wildfile}
-\index[dir]{Directive!wildfile}
- Specifies a wild-card string to be applied to non-directories. That
- is no directory entries will be matched by this directive.
- However, note that the match is done against the full path and filename,
- so your wild-card string must take into account that filenames
- are preceded by the full path.
- If {\bf Exclude}
- is not enabled, the wild-card will select which files are to be
- included. If {\bf Exclude=yes} is specified, the wild-card will select
- which files are to be excluded. Multiple wild-card directives may be
- specified, and they will be applied in turn until the first one that
- matches.
-
- It is recommended to enclose the string in double quotes.
-
- You may want to test your expressions prior to running your
- backup by using the bwild program. Please see the
- \ilink{Utilities}{bwild} chapter of this manual for
- more. You can also test your full FileSet definition by using
- the \ilink{estimate}{estimate} command in the Console
- chapter of this manual.
- An example of excluding with the WildFile option on Win32 machines is
- presented below.
-
-
-\item [regex=\lt{}string\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{regex}
-\index[dir]{Directive!regex}
- Specifies a POSIX extended regular expression to be applied to the
- filenames and directory names, which include the full path. If {\bf
- Exclude} is not enabled, the regex will select which files are to be
- included. If {\bf Exclude=yes} is specified, the regex will select
- which files are to be excluded. Multiple regex directives may be
- specified within an Options resource, and they will be applied in turn
- until the first one that matches. Note, if you exclude a directory, no
- files or directories below it will be matched.
-
- It is recommended to enclose the string in double quotes.
-
- The regex libraries differ from one operating system to
- another, and in addition, regular expressions are complicated,
- so you may want to test your expressions prior to running your
- backup by using the bregex program. Please see the
- \ilink{Utilities}{bwild} chapter of this manual for
- more. You can also test your full FileSet definition by using
- the \ilink{estimate}{estimate} command in the Console
- chapter of this manual.
-
- You find yourself using a lot of Regex statements, which will cost quite a lot
- of CPU time, we recommend you simplify them if you can, or better yet
- convert them to Wild statements which are much more efficient.
-
-
-\item [regexfile=\lt{}string\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{regexfile}
-\index[dir]{Directive!regexfile}
- Specifies a POSIX extended regular expression to be applied to
- non-directories. No directories will be matched by this directive.
- However, note that the match is done against the full path and
- filename, so your regex string must take into account that filenames
- are preceded by the full path.
- If {\bf Exclude} is not enabled, the regex will select which files are
- to be included. If {\bf Exclude=yes} is specified, the regex will
- select which files are to be excluded. Multiple regex directives may be
- specified, and they will be applied in turn until the first one that
- matches.
-
- It is recommended to enclose the string in double quotes.
-
- The regex libraries differ from one operating system to
- another, and in addition, regular expressions are complicated,
- so you may want to test your expressions prior to running your
- backup by using the bregex program. Please see the
- \ilink{Utilities}{bregex} chapter of this manual for
- more.
-
-
-\item [regexdir=\lt{}string\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{regexdir}
-\index[dir]{Directive!regexdir}
- Specifies a POSIX extended regular expression to be applied to directory
- names only. No filenames will be matched by this directive. Note, if
- {\bf Exclude} is not enabled, the regex will select directories
- files are to be included. If {\bf Exclude=yes} is specified, the
- regex will select which files are to be excluded. Multiple
- regex directives may be specified, and they will be applied in turn
- until the first one that matches. Note, if you exclude a directory, no
- files or directories below it will be matched.
-
- It is recommended to enclose the string in double quotes.
-
- The regex libraries differ from one operating system to
- another, and in addition, regular expressions are complicated,
- so you may want to test your expressions prior to running your
- backup by using the bregex program. Please see the
- \ilink{Utilities}{bregex} chapter of this manual for
- more.
-
-
-\item [exclude=yes\vb{}no]
-\index[dir]{exclude}
-\index[dir]{Directive!exclude}
- The default is {\bf no}. When enabled, any files matched within the
- Options will be excluded from the backup.
-
-\label{ACLSupport}
-\item [aclsupport=yes\vb{}no]
-\index[dir]{aclsupport}
-\index[dir]{Directive!aclsupport}
- The default is {\bf no}. If this option is set to yes, and you have the
- POSIX {\bf libacl} installed on your system, Bacula will backup the file
- and directory UNIX Access Control Lists (ACL) as defined in IEEE Std
- 1003.1e draft 17 and "POSIX.1e" (abandoned). This feature is
- available on UNIX only and depends on the ACL library. Bacula is
- automatically compiled with ACL support if the {\bf libacl} library is
- installed on your system (shown in config.out). While restoring the
- files Bacula will try to restore the ACLs, if there is no ACL support
- available on the system, Bacula restores the files and directories but
- not the ACL information. Please note, if you backup an EXT3 or XFS
- filesystem with ACLs, then you restore them to a different filesystem
- (perhaps reiserfs) that does not have ACLs, the ACLs will be ignored.
-
-\item [ignore case=yes\vb{}no]
-\index[dir]{ignore case}
-\index[dir]{Directive!ignore case}
- The default is {\bf no}. On Windows systems, you will almost surely
- want to set this to {\bf yes}. When this directive is set to {\bf yes}
- all the case of character will be ignored in wild-card and regex
- comparisons. That is an uppercase A will match a lowercase a.
-
-\item [fstype=filesystem-type]
-\index[dir]{fstype}
-\index[dir]{Directive!fstype}
- This option allows you to select files and directories by the
- filesystem type. The permitted filesystem-type names are:
-
- ext2, jfs, ntfs, proc, reiserfs, xfs, usbdevfs, sysfs, smbfs,
- iso9660. For ext3 systems, use ext2.
-
- You may have multiple Fstype directives, and thus permit matching
- of multiple filesystem types within a single Options resource. If
- the type specified on the fstype directive does not match the
- filesystem for a particular directive, that directory will not be
- backed up. This directive can be used to prevent backing up
- non-local filesystems. Normally, when you use this directive, you
- would also set {\bf onefs=no} so that Bacula will traverse filesystems.
-
- This option is not implemented in Win32 systems.
-
-\item [DriveType=Windows-drive-type]
-\index[dir]{DriveType}
-\index[dir]{Directive!DriveType}
- This option is effective only on Windows machines and is
- somewhat similar to the Unix/Linux {\bf fstype} described
- above, except that it allows you to select what Windows
- drive types you want to allow. By default all drive
- types are accepted.
-
- The permitted drivetype names are:
-
- removable, fixed, remote, cdrom, ramdisk
-
- You may have multiple Driveype directives, and thus permit matching
- of multiple drive types within a single Options resource. If
- the type specified on the drivetype directive does not match the
- filesystem for a particular directive, that directory will not be
- backed up. This directive can be used to prevent backing up
- non-local filesystems. Normally, when you use this directive, you
- would also set {\bf onefs=no} so that Bacula will traverse filesystems.
-
- This option is not implemented in Unix/Linux systems.
-
-
-\item [hfsplussupport=yes\vb{}no]
-\index[dir]{hfsplussupport}
-\index[dir]{Directive!hfsplussupport}
- This option allows you to turn on support for Mac OSX HFS plus
- finder information.
-
-\item [strippath=\lt{}integer\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{strippath}
-\index[dir]{Directive!strippath}
- This option will cause {\bf integer} paths to be stripped from
- the front of the full path/filename being backed up. This can
- be useful if you are migrating data from another vendor or if
- you have taken a snapshot into some subdirectory. This directive
- can cause your filenames to be overlayed with regular backup data,
- so should be used only by experts and with great care.
-\end{description}
-
-{\bf \lt{}file-list\gt{}} is a list of directory and/or filename names
-specified with a {\bf File =} directive. To include names containing spaces,
-enclose the name between double-quotes. Wild-cards are not interpreted
-in file-lists. They can only be specified in Options resources.
-
-There are a number of special cases when specifying directories and files in a
-{\bf file-list}. They are:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Any name preceded by an at-sign (@) is assumed to be the name of a
- file, which contains a list of files each preceded by a "File =". The
- named file is read once when the configuration file is parsed during the
- Director startup. Note, that the file is read on the Director's machine
- and not on the Client's. In fact, the @filename can appear anywhere
- within the conf file where a token would be read, and the contents of
- the named file will be logically inserted in the place of the @filename.
- What must be in the file depends on the location the @filename is
- specified in the conf file. For example:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Include {
- Options { compression=GZIP }
- @/home/files/my-files
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\item Any name beginning with a vertical bar (\vb) is assumed to be the name of
- a program. This program will be executed on the Director's machine at
- the time the Job starts (not when the Director reads the configuration
- file), and any output from that program will be assumed to be a list of
- files or directories, one per line, to be included. Before submitting the
- specified command bacula will performe
- \ilink{character substitution}{character substitution}.
-
- This allows you to have a job that, for example, includes all the local
- partitions even if you change the partitioning by adding a disk. The
- examples below show you how to do this. However, please note two
- things: \\
- 1. if you want the local filesystems, you probably should be
- using the new {\bf fstype} directive, which was added in version 1.36.3
- and set {\bf onefs=no}.
- \\
-
- 2. the exact syntax of the command needed in the examples below is very
- system dependent. For example, on recent Linux systems, you may need to
- add the -P option, on FreeBSD systems, the options will be different as
- well.
-
- In general, you will need to prefix your command or commands with a {\bf
- sh -c} so that they are invoked by a shell. This will not be the case
- if you are invoking a script as in the second example below. Also, you
- must take care to escape (precede with a \textbackslash{}) wild-cards,
- shell character, and to ensure that any spaces in your command are
- escaped as well. If you use a single quotes (') within a double quote
- ("), Bacula will treat everything between the single quotes as one field
- so it will not be necessary to escape the spaces. In general, getting
- all the quotes and escapes correct is a real pain as you can see by the
- next example. As a consequence, it is often easier to put everything in
- a file and simply use the file name within Bacula. In that case the
- {\bf sh -c} will not be necessary providing the first line of the file
- is {\bf \#!/bin/sh}.
-
- As an example:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-
-Include {
- Options { signature = SHA1 }
- File = "|sh -c 'df -l | grep \"^/dev/hd[ab]\" | grep -v \".*/tmp\" \
- | awk \"{print \\$6}\"'"
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- will produce a list of all the local partitions on a Red Hat Linux system.
- Note, the above line was split, but should normally be written on one line.
- Quoting is a real problem because you must quote for Bacula which consists of
- preceding every \textbackslash{} and every " with a \textbackslash{}, and
- you must also quote for the shell command. In the end, it is probably easier
- just to execute a small file with:
-
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Include {
- Options {
- signature=MD5
- }
- File = "|my_partitions"
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- where my\_partitions has:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#!/bin/sh
-df -l | grep "^/dev/hd[ab]" | grep -v ".*/tmp" \
- | awk "{print \$6}"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- If the vertical bar (|) in front of my\_partitions is preceded by a
- backslash as in \textbackslash{}|, the program will be executed on the
- Client's machine instead of on the Director's machine.
- Please note that if the filename is given within quotes, you
- will need to use two slashes. An example, provided by John Donagher,
- that backs up all the local UFS partitions on a remote system is:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = "All local partitions"
- Include {
- Options { signature=SHA1; onefs=yes; }
- File = "\\|bash -c \"df -klF ufs | tail +2 | awk '{print \$6}'\""
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- The above requires two backslash characters after the double quote (one
- preserves the next one). If you are a Linux user, just change the {\bf ufs}
- to {\bf ext3} (or your preferred filesystem type), and you will be in
- business.
-
- If you know what filesystems you have mounted on your system, e.g.
- for Red Hat Linux normally only ext2 and ext3, you can backup
- all local filesystems using something like:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-
-Include {
- Options { signature = SHA1; onfs=no; fstype=ext2 }
- File = /
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-
-\item Any file-list item preceded by a less-than sign (\lt{}) will be taken
- to be a file. This file will be read on the Director's machine (see
- below for doing it on the Client machine) at the time
- the Job starts, and the data will be assumed to be a list of directories or
- files, one per line, to be included. The names should start in column 1 and
- should not be quoted even if they contain spaces. This feature allows you to
- modify the external file and change what will be saved without stopping and
- restarting Bacula as would be necessary if using the @ modifier noted above.
- For example:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Include {
- Options { signature = SHA1 }
- File = "</home/files/local-filelist"
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- If you precede the less-than sign (\lt{}) with a backslash as in
- \textbackslash{}\lt{}, the file-list will be read on the Client machine
- instead of on the Director's machine. Please note that if the filename
- is given within quotes, you will need to use two slashes.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Include {
- Options { signature = SHA1 }
- File = "\\</home/xxx/filelist-on-client"
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\item If you explicitly specify a block device such as {\bf /dev/hda1}, then
- Bacula (starting with version 1.28) will assume that this is a raw partition
- to be backed up. In this case, you are strongly urged to specify a {\bf
- sparse=yes} include option, otherwise, you will save the whole partition
- rather than just the actual data that the partition contains. For example:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Include {
- Options { signature=MD5; sparse=yes }
- File = /dev/hd6
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- will backup the data in device /dev/hd6. Note, the {bf /dev/hd6} must be
- the raw partition itself. Bacula will not back it up as a raw device if
- you specify a symbolic link to a raw device such as my be created by the
- LVM Snapshot utilities.
-
- Ludovic Strappazon has pointed out that this feature can be used to backup a
- full Microsoft Windows disk. Simply boot into the system using a Linux Rescue
- disk, then load a statically linked Bacula as described in the
- \ilink{ Disaster Recovery Using Bacula}{RescueChapter} chapter of
- this manual. Then save the whole disk partition. In the case of a disaster,
- you can then restore the desired partition by again booting with the rescue
- disk and doing a restore of the partition.
- \item If you explicitly specify a FIFO device name (created with mkfifo), and
- you add the option {\bf readfifo=yes} as an option, Bacula will read the FIFO
- and back its data up to the Volume. For example:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Include {
- Options {
- signature=SHA1
- readfifo=yes
- }
- File = /home/abc/fifo
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- if {\bf /home/abc/fifo} is a fifo device, Bacula will open the fifo,
- read it, and store all data thus obtained on the Volume. Please note,
- you must have a process on the system that is writing into the fifo, or
- Bacula will hang, and after one minute of waiting, Bacula will give up
- and go on to the next file. The data read can be anything since Bacula
- treats it as a stream.
-
- This feature can be an excellent way to do a "hot" backup of a very
- large database. You can use the {\bf RunBeforeJob} to create the fifo
- and to start a program that dynamically reads your database and writes
- it to the fifo. Bacula will then write it to the Volume. Be sure to
- read the \ilink{readfifo section}{readfifo} that gives a
- tip to ensure that the RunBeforeJob does not block Bacula.
-
- During the restore operation, the inverse is true, after Bacula creates
- the fifo if there was any data stored with it (no need to explicitly
- list it or add any options), that data will be written back to the fifo.
- As a consequence, if any such FIFOs exist in the fileset to be restored,
- you must ensure that there is a reader program or Bacula will block, and
- after one minute, Bacula will time out the write to the fifo and move on
- to the next file.
-
-\item A file-list may not contain wild-cards. Use directives in the
- Options resource if you wish to specify wild-cards or regular expression
- matching.
-
-\item
-\index[general]{IgnoreDir}
-The {\bf ExcludeDirContaining = \lt{}filename\gt{}} is a directive that
-can be added to the Include section of the FileSet resource. If the specified
-filename ({\bf filename-string}) is found on the Client in any directory to be
-backed up, the whole directory will be ignored (not backed up). For example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- # List of files to be backed up
- FileSet {
- Name = "MyFileSet"
- Include {
- Options {
- signature = MD5
- }
- File = /home
- Exclude Dir Containing = .excludeme
- }
- }
-\end{verbatim}
-
-But in /home, there may be hundreds of directories of users and some
-people want to indicate that they don't want to have certain
-directories backed up. For example, with the above FileSet, if
-the user or sysadmin creates a file named {\bf .excludeme} in
-specific directories, such as
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- /home/user/www/cache/.excludeme
- /home/user/temp/.excludeme
-\end{verbatim}
-
-then Bacula will not backup the two directories named:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- /home/user/www/cache
- /home/user/temp
-\end{verbatim}
-
-NOTE: subdirectories will not be backed up. That is, the directive
-applies to the two directories in question and any children (be they
-files, directories, etc).
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{FileSet Examples}
-\index[general]{Examples!FileSet }
-\index[general]{FileSet Examples}
-
-The following is an example of a valid FileSet resource definition. Note,
-the first Include pulls in the contents of the file {\bf /etc/backup.list}
-when Bacula is started (i.e. the @), and that file must have each filename
-to be backed up preceded by a {\bf File =} and on a separate line.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = "Full Set"
- Include {
- Options {
- Compression=GZIP
- signature=SHA1
- Sparse = yes
- }
- @/etc/backup.list
- }
- Include {
- Options {
- wildfile = "*.o"
- wildfile = "*.exe"
- Exclude = yes
- }
- File = /root/myfile
- File = /usr/lib/another_file
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-In the above example, all the files contained in /etc/backup.list will
-be compressed with GZIP compression, an SHA1 signature will be computed on the
-file's contents (its data), and sparse file handling will apply.
-
-The two directories /root/myfile and /usr/lib/another\_file will also be saved
-without any options, but all files in those directories with the extensions
-{\bf .o} and {\bf .exe} will be excluded.
-
-Let's say that you now want to exclude the directory /tmp. The simplest way
-to do so is to add an exclude directive that lists /tmp. The example
-above would then become:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = "Full Set"
- Include {
- Options {
- Compression=GZIP
- signature=SHA1
- Sparse = yes
- }
- @/etc/backup.list
- }
- Include {
- Options {
- wildfile = "*.o"
- wildfile = "*.exe"
- Exclude = yes
- }
- File = /root/myfile
- File = /usr/lib/another_file
- }
- Exclude {
- File = /tmp
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-
-You can add wild-cards to the File directives listed in the Exclude
-directory, but you need to take care because if you exclude a directory,
-it and all files and directories below it will also be excluded.
-
-Now lets take a slight variation on the above and suppose
-you want to save all your whole filesystem except {\bf /tmp}.
-The problem that comes up is that Bacula will not normally
-cross from one filesystem to another.
-Doing a {\bf df} command, you get the following output:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-[kern@rufus k]$ df
-Filesystem 1k-blocks Used Available Use% Mounted on
-/dev/hda5 5044156 439232 4348692 10% /
-/dev/hda1 62193 4935 54047 9% /boot
-/dev/hda9 20161172 5524660 13612372 29% /home
-/dev/hda2 62217 6843 52161 12% /rescue
-/dev/hda8 5044156 42548 4745376 1% /tmp
-/dev/hda6 5044156 2613132 2174792 55% /usr
-none 127708 0 127708 0% /dev/shm
-//minimatou/c$ 14099200 9895424 4203776 71% /mnt/mmatou
-lmatou:/ 1554264 215884 1258056 15% /mnt/matou
-lmatou:/home 2478140 1589952 760072 68% /mnt/matou/home
-lmatou:/usr 1981000 1199960 678628 64% /mnt/matou/usr
-lpmatou:/ 995116 484112 459596 52% /mnt/pmatou
-lpmatou:/home 19222656 2787880 15458228 16% /mnt/pmatou/home
-lpmatou:/usr 2478140 2038764 311260 87% /mnt/pmatou/usr
-deuter:/ 4806936 97684 4465064 3% /mnt/deuter
-deuter:/home 4806904 280100 4282620 7% /mnt/deuter/home
-deuter:/files 44133352 27652876 14238608 67% /mnt/deuter/files
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-And we see that there are a number of separate filesystems (/ /boot
-/home /rescue /tmp and /usr not to mention mounted systems).
-If you specify only {\bf /} in your Include list, Bacula will only save the
-Filesystem {\bf /dev/hda5}. To save all filesystems except {\bf /tmp} with
-out including any of the Samba or NFS mounted systems, and explicitly
-excluding a /tmp, /proc, .journal, and .autofsck, which you will not want to
-be saved and restored, you can use the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = Include_example
- Include {
- Options {
- wilddir = /proc
- wilddir = /tmp
- wildfile = "/.journal"
- wildfile = "/.autofsck"
- exclude = yes
- }
- File = /
- File = /boot
- File = /home
- File = /rescue
- File = /usr
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Since /tmp is on its own filesystem and it was not explicitly named in the
-Include list, it is not really needed in the exclude list. It is better to
-list it in the Exclude list for clarity, and in case the disks are changed so
-that it is no longer in its own partition.
-
-Now, lets assume you only want to backup .Z and .gz files and nothing
-else. This is a bit trickier because Bacula by default will select
-everything to backup, so we must exclude everything but .Z and .gz files.
-If we take the first example above and make the obvious modifications
-to it, we might come up with a FileSet that looks like this:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = "Full Set"
- Include { !!!!!!!!!!!!
- Options { This
- wildfile = "*.Z" example
- wildfile = "*.gz" doesn't
- work
- } !!!!!!!!!!!!
- File = /myfile
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The *.Z and *.gz files will indeed be backed up, but all other files
-that are not matched by the Options directives will automatically
-be backed up too (i.e. that is the default rule).
-
-To accomplish what we want, we must explicitly exclude all other files.
-We do this with the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = "Full Set"
- Include {
- Options {
- wildfile = "*.Z"
- wildfile = "*.gz"
- }
- Options {
- Exclude = yes
- RegexFile = ".*"
- }
- File = /myfile
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The "trick" here was to add a RegexFile expression that matches
-all files. It does not match directory names, so all directories in
-/myfile will be backed up (the directory entry) and any *.Z and *.gz
-files contained in them. If you know that certain directories do
-not contain any *.Z or *.gz files and you do not want the directory
-entries backed up, you will need to explicitly exclude those directories.
-Backing up a directory entries is not very expensive.
-
-Bacula uses the system regex library and some of them are
-different on different OSes. The above has been reported not to work
-on FreeBSD. This can be tested by using the {\bf estimate job=job-name
-listing} command in the console and adapting the RegexFile expression
-appropriately. In a future version of Bacula, we will supply our own
-Regex code to avoid such system dependencies.
-
-Please be aware that allowing Bacula to traverse or change file systems can be
-{\bf very} dangerous. For example, with the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = "Bad example"
- Include {
- Options { onefs=no }
- File = /mnt/matou
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-you will be backing up an NFS mounted partition ({\bf /mnt/matou}), and since
-{\bf onefs} is set to {\bf no}, Bacula will traverse file systems. Now if {\bf
-/mnt/matou} has the current machine's file systems mounted, as is often the
-case, you will get yourself into a recursive loop and the backup will never
-end.
-
-As a final example, let's say that you have only one or two
-subdirectories of /home that you want to backup. For example,
-you want to backup only subdirectories beginning with the letter
-a and the letter b -- i.e. /home/a* and /home/b*. Now, you might first
-try:
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = "Full Set"
- Include {
- Options {
- wilddir = "/home/a*"
- wilddir = "/home/b*"
- }
- File = /home
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The problem is that the above will include everything in /home. To get
-things to work correctly, you need to start with the idea of exclusion
-instead of inclusion. So, you could simply exclude all directories
-except the two you want to use:
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = "Full Set"
- Include {
- Options {
- RegexDir = "^/home/[c-z]"
- exclude = yes
- }
- File = /home
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-And assuming that all subdirectories start with a lowercase letter, this
-would work.
-
-An alternative would be to include the two subdirectories desired and
-exclude everything else:
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = "Full Set"
- Include {
- Options {
- wilddir = "/home/a*"
- wilddir = "/home/b*"
- }
- Options {
- RegexDir = ".*"
- exclude = yes
- }
- File = /home
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-
-The following example shows how to back up only the My Pictures directory inside
-the My Documents directory for all users in C:/Documents and Settings, i.e.
-everything matching the pattern:
-
-C:/Documents and Settings/*/My Documents/My Pictures/*
-
-To understand how this can be achieved, there are two important points to
-remember:
-
-Firstly, Bacula walks over the filesystem depth-first starting from the File =
-lines. It stops descending when a directory is excluded, so you must include
-all ancestor directories of each directory containing files to be included.
-
-Secondly, each directory and file is compared to the Options clauses in the
-order they appear in the FileSet. When a match is found, no further clauses
-are compared and the directory or file is either included or excluded.
-
-The FileSet resource definition below implements this by including specifc
-directories and files and excluding everything else.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = "AllPictures"
-
- Include {
-
- File = "C:/Documents and Settings"
-
- Options {
- signature = SHA1
- verify = s1
- IgnoreCase = yes
-
- # Include all users' directories so we reach the inner ones. Unlike a
- # WildDir pattern ending in *, this RegExDir only matches the top-level
- # directories and not any inner ones.
- RegExDir = "^C:/Documents and Settings/[^/]+$"
-
- # Ditto all users' My Documents directories.
- WildDir = "C:/Documents and Settings/*/My Documents"
-
- # Ditto all users' My Documents/My Pictures directories.
- WildDir = "C:/Documents and Settings/*/My Documents/My Pictures"
-
- # Include the contents of the My Documents/My Pictures directories and
- # any subdirectories.
- Wild = "C:/Documents and Settings/*/My Documents/My Pictures/*"
- }
-
- Options {
- Exclude = yes
- IgnoreCase = yes
-
- # Exclude everything else, in particular any files at the top level and
- # any other directories or files in the users' directories.
- Wild = "C:/Documents and Settings/*"
- }
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{Backing up Raw Partitions}
-\index[general]{Backing up!Partitions }
-\index[general]{Backing up Raw Partitions }
-
-The following FileSet definition will backup a raw partition:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = "RawPartition"
- Include {
- Options { sparse=yes }
- File = /dev/hda2
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-While backing up and restoring a raw partition, you should ensure that no
-other process including the system is writing to that partition. As a
-precaution, you are strongly urged to ensure that the raw partition is not
-mounted or is mounted read-only. If necessary, this can be done using the {\bf
-RunBeforeJob} directive.
-
-
-\section{Excluding Files and Directories}
-\index[general]{Directories!Excluding Files and }
-\index[general]{Excluding Files and Directories }
-
-You may also include full filenames or directory names in addition to using
-wild-cards and {\bf Exclude=yes} in the Options resource as specified above by
-simply including the files to be excluded in an Exclude resource within the
-FileSet. For example:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = Exclusion_example
- Include {
- Options {
- Signature = SHA1
- }
- File = /
- File = /boot
- File = /home
- File = /rescue
- File = /usr
- }
- Exclude {
- File = /proc
- File = /tmp
- File = .journal
- File = .autofsck
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\label{win32}
-\section{Windows FileSets}
-\index[general]{Windows FileSets }
-\index[general]{FileSets!Windows }
-If you are entering Windows file names, the directory path may be preceded by
-the drive and a colon (as in c:). However, the path separators must be
-specified in Unix convention (i.e. forward slash (/)). If you wish to include
-a quote in a file name, precede the quote with a backslash
-(\textbackslash{}). For example you might use the following
-for a Windows machine to backup the "My Documents" directory:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = "Windows Set"
- Include {
- Options {
- WildFile = "*.obj"
- WildFile = "*.exe"
- exclude = yes
- }
- File = "c:/My Documents"
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-For exclude lists to work correctly on Windows, you must observe the following
-rules:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Filenames are case sensitive, so you must use the correct case.
-\item To exclude a directory, you must not have a trailing slash on the
- directory name.
-\item If you have spaces in your filename, you must enclose the entire name
- in double-quote characters ("). Trying to use a backslash before the space
- will not work.
-\item If you are using the old Exclude syntax (noted below), you may not
- specify a drive letter in the exclude. The new syntax noted above
- should work fine including driver letters.
-\end{itemize}
-
-Thanks to Thiago Lima for summarizing the above items for us. If you are
-having difficulties getting includes or excludes to work, you might want to
-try using the {\bf estimate job=xxx listing} command documented in the
-\ilink{Console chapter}{estimate} of this manual.
-
-On Win32 systems, if you move a directory or file or rename a file into the
-set of files being backed up, and a Full backup has already been made, Bacula
-will not know there are new files to be saved during an Incremental or
-Differential backup (blame Microsoft, not me). To avoid this problem, please
-{\bf copy} any new directory or files into the backup area. If you do not have
-enough disk to copy the directory or files, move them, but then initiate a
-Full backup.
-
-
-\paragraph*{A Windows Example FileSet}
-\index[general]{FileSet!Windows Example }
-\index[general]{Windows Example FileSet }
-
-The following example was contributed by Russell Howe. Please note that
-for presentation purposes, the lines beginning with Data and Internet
-have been wrapped and should included on the previous line with one
-space.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-This is my Windows 2000 fileset:
-FileSet {
- Name = "Windows 2000"
- Include {
- Options {
- signature = MD5
- Exclude = yes
- IgnoreCase = yes
- # Exclude Mozilla-based programs' file caches
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Documents and Settings/*/Application
-Data/*/Profiles/*/*/Cache"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Documents and Settings/*/Application
-Data/*/Profiles/*/*/Cache.Trash"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Documents and Settings/*/Application
-Data/*/Profiles/*/*/ImapMail"
-
- # Exclude user's registry files - they're always in use anyway.
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/Documents and Settings/*/Local Settings/Application
-Data/Microsoft/Windows/usrclass.*"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/Documents and Settings/*/ntuser.*"
-
- # Exclude directories full of lots and lots of useless little files
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Documents and Settings/*/Cookies"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Documents and Settings/*/Recent"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Documents and Settings/*/Local Settings/History"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Documents and Settings/*/Local Settings/Temp"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Documents and Settings/*/Local Settings/Temporary
-Internet Files"
-
- # These are always open and unable to be backed up
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/Documents and Settings/All Users/Application
-Data/Microsoft/Network/Downloader/qmgr[01].dat"
-
- # Some random bits of Windows we want to ignore
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/security/logs/scepol.log"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/system32/config"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/msdownld.tmp"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/Internet Logs"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/$Nt*Uninstall*"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/sysvol"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/cluster/CLUSDB"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/cluster/CLUSDB.LOG"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/NTDS/edb.log"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/NTDS/ntds.dit"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/NTDS/temp.edb"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/ntfrs/jet/log/edb.log"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/ntfrs/jet/ntfrs.jdb"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/ntfrs/jet/temp/tmp.edb"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/system32/CPL.CFG"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/system32/dhcp/dhcp.mdb"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/system32/dhcp/j50.log"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/system32/dhcp/tmp.edb"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/system32/LServer/edb.log"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/system32/LServer/TLSLic.edb"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/system32/LServer/tmp.edb"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/system32/wins/j50.log"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/system32/wins/wins.mdb"
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/system32/wins/winstmp.mdb"
-
- # Temporary directories & files
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/WINNT/Temp"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/temp"
- WildFile = "*.tmp"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/tmp"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/var/tmp"
-
- # Recycle bins
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/RECYCLER"
-
- # Swap files
- WildFile = "[A-Z]:/pagefile.sys"
-
- # These are programs and are easier to reinstall than restore from
- # backup
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/cygwin"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Program Files/Grisoft"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Program Files/Java"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Program Files/Java Web Start"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Program Files/JavaSoft"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Program Files/Microsoft Office"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Program Files/Mozilla Firefox"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Program Files/Mozilla Thunderbird"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Program Files/mozilla.org"
- WildDir = "[A-Z]:/Program Files/OpenOffice*"
- }
-
- # Our Win2k boxen all have C: and D: as the main hard drives.
- File = "C:/"
- File = "D:/"
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Note, the three line of the above Exclude were split to fit on the document
-page, they should be written on a single line in real use.
-
-\paragraph*{Windows NTFS Naming Considerations}
-\index[general]{Windows NTFS Naming Considerations }
-\index[general]{Considerations!Windows NTFS Naming }
-
-NTFS filenames containing Unicode characters should now be supported
-as of version 1.37.30 or later.
-
-\section{Testing Your FileSet}
-\index[general]{FileSet!Testing Your }
-\index[general]{Testing Your FileSet }
-
-If you wish to get an idea of what your FileSet will really backup or if your
-exclusion rules will work correctly, you can test it by using the {\bf
-estimate} command in the Console program. See the
-\ilink{estimate}{estimate} in the Console chapter of this
-manual.
-
-As an example, suppose you add the following test FileSet:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-FileSet {
- Name = Test
- Include {
- File = /home/xxx/test
- Options {
- regex = ".*\.c$"
- }
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-You could then add some test files to the directory {\bf /home/xxx/test}
-and use the following command in the console:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-estimate job=<any-job-name> listing client=<desired-client> fileset=Test
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-to give you a listing of all files that match.
+++ /dev/null
-#!/usr/bin/perl -w
-# Fixes various things within tex files.
-
-use strict;
-
-my %args;
-
-
-sub get_includes {
- # Get a list of include files from the top-level tex file.
- my (@list,$file);
-
- foreach my $filename (@_) {
- $filename or next;
- # Start with the top-level latex file so it gets checked too.
- push (@list,$filename);
-
- # Get a list of all the html files in the directory.
- open IF,"<$filename" or die "Cannot open input file $filename";
- while (<IF>) {
- chomp;
- push @list,"$1.tex" if (/\\include\{(.*?)\}/);
- }
-
- close IF;
- }
- return @list;
-}
-
-sub convert_files {
- my (@files) = @_;
- my ($linecnt,$filedata,$output,$itemcnt,$indentcnt,$cnt);
-
- $cnt = 0;
- foreach my $file (@files) {
- # Open the file and load the whole thing into $filedata. A bit wasteful but
- # easier to deal with, and we don't have a problem with speed here.
- $filedata = "";
- open IF,"<$file" or die "Cannot open input file $file";
- while (<IF>) {
- $filedata .= $_;
- }
- close IF;
-
- # We look for a line that starts with \item, and indent the two next lines (if not blank)
- # by three spaces.
- my $linecnt = 3;
- $indentcnt = 0;
- $output = "";
- # Process a line at a time.
- foreach (split(/\n/,$filedata)) {
- $_ .= "\n"; # Put back the return.
- # If this line is less than the third line past the \item command,
- # and the line isn't blank and doesn't start with whitespace
- # add three spaces to the start of the line. Keep track of the number
- # of lines changed.
- if ($linecnt < 3 and !/^\\item/) {
- if (/^[^\n\s]/) {
- $output .= " " . $_;
- $indentcnt++;
- } else {
- $output .= $_;
- }
- $linecnt++;
- } else {
- $linecnt = 3;
- $output .= $_;
- }
- /^\\item / and $linecnt = 1;
- }
-
-
- # This is an item line. We need to process it too. If inside a \begin{description} environment, convert
- # \item {\bf xxx} to \item [xxx] or \item [{xxx}] (if xxx contains '[' or ']'.
- $itemcnt = 0;
- $filedata = $output;
- $output = "";
- my ($before,$descrip,$this,$between);
-
- # Find any \begin{description} environment
- while ($filedata =~ /(\\begin[\s\n]*\{[\s\n]*description[\s\n]*\})(.*?)(\\end[\s\n]*\{[\s\n]*description[\s\n]*\})/s) {
- $output .= $` . $1;
- $filedata = $3 . $';
- $descrip = $2;
-
- # Search for \item {\bf xxx}
- while ($descrip =~ /\\item[\s\n]*\{[\s\n]*\\bf[\s\n]*/s) {
- $descrip = $';
- $output .= $`;
- ($between,$descrip) = find_matching_brace($descrip);
- if (!$descrip) {
- $linecnt = $output =~ tr/\n/\n/;
- print STDERR "Missing matching curly brace at line $linecnt in $file\n" if (!$descrip);
- }
-
- # Now do the replacement.
- $between = '{' . $between . '}' if ($between =~ /\[|\]/);
- $output .= "\\item \[$between\]";
- $itemcnt++;
- }
- $output .= $descrip;
- }
- $output .= $filedata;
-
- # If any hyphens or \item commnads were converted, save the file.
- if ($indentcnt or $itemcnt) {
- open OF,">$file" or die "Cannot open output file $file";
- print OF $output;
- close OF;
- print "$indentcnt indent", ($indentcnt == 1) ? "" : "s"," added in $file\n";
- print "$itemcnt item", ($itemcnt == 1) ? "" : "s"," Changed in $file\n";
- }
-
- $cnt += $indentcnt + $itemcnt;
- }
- return $cnt;
-}
-
-sub find_matching_brace {
- # Finds text up to the next matching brace. Assumes that the input text doesn't contain
- # the opening brace, but we want to find text up to a matching closing one.
- # Returns the text between the matching braces, followed by the rest of the text following
- # (which does not include the matching brace).
- #
- my $str = shift;
- my ($this,$temp);
- my $cnt = 1;
-
- while ($cnt) {
- # Ignore verbatim constructs involving curly braces, or if the character preceding
- # the curly brace is a backslash.
- if ($str =~ /\\verb\*?\{.*?\{|\\verb\*?\}.*?\}|\{|\}/s) {
- $this .= $`;
- $str = $';
- $temp = $&;
-
- if ((substr($this,-1,1) eq '\\') or
- $temp =~ /^\\verb/) {
- $this .= $temp;
- next;
- }
-
- $cnt += ($temp eq '{') ? 1 : -1;
- # If this isn't the matching curly brace ($cnt > 0), include the brace.
- $this .= $temp if ($cnt);
- } else {
- # No matching curly brace found.
- return ($this . $str,'');
- }
- }
- return ($this,$str);
-}
-
-sub check_arguments {
- # Checks command-line arguments for ones starting with -- puts them into
- # a hash called %args and removes them from @ARGV.
- my $args = shift;
- my $i;
-
- for ($i = 0; $i < $#ARGV; $i++) {
- $ARGV[$i] =~ /^\-+/ or next;
- $ARGV[$i] =~ s/^\-+//;
- $args{$ARGV[$i]} = "";
- delete ($ARGV[$i]);
-
- }
-}
-
-##################################################################
-# MAIN ####
-##################################################################
-
-my @includes;
-my $cnt;
-
-check_arguments(\%args);
-die "No Files given to Check\n" if ($#ARGV < 0);
-
-# Examine the file pointed to by the first argument to get a list of
-# includes to test.
-@includes = get_includes(@ARGV);
-
-$cnt = convert_files(@includes);
-print "No lines changed\n" unless $cnt;
+++ /dev/null
-# This module does multiple indices, supporting the style of the LaTex 'index'
-# package.
-
-# Version Information:
-# 16-Feb-2005 -- Original Creation. Karl E. Cunningham
-# 14-Mar-2005 -- Clarified and Consolodated some of the code.
-# Changed to smoothly handle single and multiple indices.
-
-# Two LaTeX index formats are supported...
-# --- SINGLE INDEX ---
-# \usepackage{makeidx}
-# \makeindex
-# \index{entry1}
-# \index{entry2}
-# \index{entry3}
-# ...
-# \printindex
-#
-# --- MULTIPLE INDICES ---
-#
-# \usepackage{makeidx}
-# \usepackage{index}
-# \makeindex -- latex2html doesn't care but LaTeX does.
-# \newindex{ref1}{ext1}{ext2}{title1}
-# \newindex{ref2}{ext1}{ext2}{title2}
-# \newindex{ref3}{ext1}{ext2}{title3}
-# \index[ref1]{entry1}
-# \index[ref1]{entry2}
-# \index[ref3]{entry3}
-# \index[ref2]{entry4}
-# \index{entry5}
-# \index[ref3]{entry6}
-# ...
-# \printindex[ref1]
-# \printindex[ref2]
-# \printindex[ref3]
-# \printindex
-# ___________________
-#
-# For the multiple-index style, each index is identified by the ref argument to \newindex, \index,
-# and \printindex. A default index is allowed, which is indicated by omitting the optional
-# argument. The default index does not require a \newindex command. As \index commands
-# are encountered, their entries are stored according
-# to the ref argument. When the \printindex command is encountered, the stored index
-# entries for that argument are retrieved and printed. The title for each index is taken
-# from the last argument in the \newindex command.
-# While processing \index and \printindex commands, if no argument is given the index entries
-# are built into a default index. The title of the default index is simply "Index".
-# This makes the difference between single- and multiple-index processing trivial.
-#
-# Another method can be used by omitting the \printindex command and just using \include to
-# pull in index files created by the makeindex program. These files will start with
-# \begin{theindex}. This command is used to determine where to print the index. Using this
-# approach, the indices will be output in the same order as the newindex commands were
-# originally found (see below). Using a combination of \printindex and \include{indexfile} has not
-# been tested and may produce undesireable results.
-#
-# The index data are stored in a hash for later sorting and output. As \printindex
-# commands are handled, the order in which they were found in the tex filea is saved,
-# associated with the ref argument to \printindex.
-#
-# We use the original %index hash to store the index data into. We append a \002 followed by the
-# name of the index to isolate the entries in different indices from each other. This is necessary
-# so that different indices can have entries with the same name. For the default index, the \002 is
-# appended without the name.
-#
-# Since the index order in the output cannot be determined if the \include{indexfile}
-# command is used, the order will be assumed from the order in which the \newindex
-# commands were originally seen in the TeX files. This order is saved as well as the
-# order determined from any printindex{ref} commands. If \printindex commnads are used
-# to specify the index output, that order will be used. If the \include{idxfile} command
-# is used, the order of the original newindex commands will be used. In this case the
-# default index will be printed last since it doesn't have a corresponding \newindex
-# command and its order cannot be determined. Mixing \printindex and \include{idxfile}
-# commands in the same file is likely to produce less than satisfactory results.
-#
-#
-# The hash containing index data is named %indices. It contains the following data:
-#{
-# 'title' => {
-# $ref1 => $indextitle ,
-# $ref2 => $indextitle ,
-# ...
-# },
-# 'newcmdorder' => [ ref1, ref2, ..., * ], # asterisk indicates the position of the default index.
-# 'printindorder' => [ ref1, ref2, ..., * ], # asterisk indicates the position of the default index.
-#}
-
-
-# Globals to handle multiple indices.
-my %indices;
-
-# This tells the system to use up to 7 words in index entries.
-$WORDS_IN_INDEX = 10;
-
-# KEC 2-18-05
-# Handles the \newindex command. This is called if the \newindex command is
-# encountered in the LaTex source. Gets the index ref and title from the arguments.
-# Saves the index ref and title.
-# Note that we are called once to handle multiple \newindex commands that are
-# newline-separated.
-sub do_cmd_newindex {
- my $data = shift;
- # The data is sent to us as fields delimited by their ID #'s. We extract the
- # fields.
- foreach my $line (split("\n",$data)) {
- my @fields = split (/(?:\<\#\d+?\#\>)+/,$line);
-
- # The index name and title are the second and fourth fields in the data.
- if ($line =~ /^</ or $line =~ /^\\newindex/) {
- my ($indexref,$indextitle) = ($fields[1],$fields[4]);
- $indices{'title'}{$indexref} = $indextitle;
- push (@{$indices{'newcmdorder'}},$indexref);
- }
- }
-}
-
-
-# KEC -- Copied from makeidx.perl and modified to do multiple indices.
-# Processes an \index entry from the LaTex file.
-# Gets the optional argument from the index command, which is the name of the index
-# into which to place the entry.
-# Drops the brackets from the index_name
-# Puts the index entry into the html stream
-# Creates the tokenized index entry (which also saves the index entry info
-sub do_real_index {
- local($_) = @_;
- local($pat,$idx_entry,$index_name);
- # catches opt-arg from \index commands for index.sty
- $index_name = &get_next_optional_argument;
- $index_name = "" unless defined $index_name;
- # Drop leading and trailing brackets from the index name.
- $index_name =~ s/^\[|\]$//g;
-
- $idx_entry = &missing_braces unless (
- (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$pat=$1;$idx_entry=$2;''/e)
- ||(s/$next_pair_rx/$pat=$1;$idx_entry=$2;''/e));
-
- if ($index_name and defined $idx_entry and
- !defined $indices{'title'}{$index_name}) {
- print STDERR "\nInvalid Index Name: \\index \[$index_name\]\{$idx_entry\}\n";
- }
-
- $idx_entry = &named_index_entry($pat, $idx_entry,$index_name);
- $idx_entry.$_;
-}
-
-# Creates and saves an index entry in the index hashes.
-# Modified to do multiple indices.
-# Creates an index_key that allows index entries to have the same characteristics but be in
-# different indices. This index_key is the regular key with the index name appended.
-# Save the index order for the entry in the %index_order hash.
-sub named_index_entry {
- local($br_id, $str, $index_name) = @_;
- my ($index_key);
- # escape the quoting etc characters
- # ! -> \001
- # @ -> \002
- # | -> \003
- $* = 1; $str =~ s/\n\s*/ /g; $* = 0; # remove any newlines
- # protect \001 occurring with images
- $str =~ s/\001/\016/g; # 0x1 to 0xF
- $str =~ s/\\\\/\011/g; # Double backslash -> 0xB
- $str =~ s/\\;SPMquot;/\012/g; # \;SPMquot; -> 0xC
- $str =~ s/;SPMquot;!/\013/g; # ;SPMquot; -> 0xD
- $str =~ s/!/\001/g; # Exclamation point -> 0x1
- $str =~ s/\013/!/g; # 0xD -> Exclaimation point
- $str =~ s/;SPMquot;@/\015/g; # ;SPMquot;@ to 0xF
- $str =~ s/@/\002/g; # At sign -> 0x2
- $str =~ s/\015/@/g; # 0xF to At sign
- $str =~ s/;SPMquot;\|/\017/g; # ;SMPquot;| to 0x11
- $str =~ s/\|/\003/g; # Vertical line to 0x3
- $str =~ s/\017/|/g; # 0x11 to vertical line
- $str =~ s/;SPMquot;(.)/\1/g; # ;SPMquot; -> whatever the next character is
- $str =~ s/\012/;SPMquot;/g; # 0x12 to ;SPMquot;
- $str =~ s/\011/\\\\/g; # 0x11 to double backslash
- local($key_part, $pageref) = split("\003", $str, 2);
-
- # For any keys of the form: blablabla!blablabla, which want to be split at the
- # exclamation point, replace the ! with a comma and a space. We don't do it
- # that way for this index.
- $key_part =~ s/\001/, /g;
- local(@keys) = split("\001", $key_part);
- # If TITLE is not yet available use $before.
- $TITLE = $saved_title if (($saved_title)&&(!($TITLE)||($TITLE eq $default_title)));
- $TITLE = $before unless $TITLE;
- # Save the reference
- local($words) = '';
- if ($SHOW_SECTION_NUMBERS) { $words = &make_idxnum; }
- elsif ($SHORT_INDEX) { $words = &make_shortidxname; }
- else { $words = &make_idxname; }
- local($super_key) = '';
- local($sort_key, $printable_key, $cur_key);
- foreach $key (@keys) {
- $key =~ s/\016/\001/g; # revert protected \001s
- ($sort_key, $printable_key) = split("\002", $key);
- #
- # RRM: 16 May 1996
- # any \label in the printable-key will have already
- # created a label where the \index occurred.
- # This has to be removed, so that the desired label
- # will be found on the Index page instead.
- #
- if ($printable_key =~ /tex2html_anchor_mark/ ) {
- $printable_key =~ s/><tex2html_anchor_mark><\/A><A//g;
- local($tmpA,$tmpB) = split("NAME=\"", $printable_key);
- ($tmpA,$tmpB) = split("\"", $tmpB);
- $ref_files{$tmpA}='';
- $index_labels{$tmpA} = 1;
- }
- #
- # resolve and clean-up the hyperlink index-entries
- # so they can be saved in an index.pl file
- #
- if ($printable_key =~ /$cross_ref_mark/ ) {
- local($label,$id,$ref_label);
- # $printable_key =~ s/$cross_ref_mark#(\w+)#(\w+)>$cross_ref_mark/
- $printable_key =~ s/$cross_ref_mark#([^#]+)#([^>]+)>$cross_ref_mark/
- do { ($label,$id) = ($1,$2);
- $ref_label = $external_labels{$label} unless
- ($ref_label = $ref_files{$label});
- '"' . "$ref_label#$label" . '">' .
- &get_ref_mark($label,$id)}
- /geo;
- }
- $printable_key =~ s/<\#[^\#>]*\#>//go;
- #RRM
- # recognise \char combinations, for a \backslash
- #
- $printable_key =~ s/\&\#;\'134/\\/g; # restore \\s
- $printable_key =~ s/\&\#;\`<BR> /\\/g; # ditto
- $printable_key =~ s/\&\#;*SPMquot;92/\\/g; # ditto
- #
- # $sort_key .= "@$printable_key" if !($printable_key); # RRM
- $sort_key .= "@$printable_key" if !($sort_key); # RRM
- $sort_key =~ tr/A-Z/a-z/;
- if ($super_key) {
- $cur_key = $super_key . "\001" . $sort_key;
- $sub_index{$super_key} .= $cur_key . "\004";
- } else {
- $cur_key = $sort_key;
- }
-
- # Append the $index_name to the current key with a \002 delimiter. This will
- # allow the same index entry to appear in more than one index.
- $index_key = $cur_key . "\002$index_name";
-
- $index{$index_key} .= "";
-
- #
- # RRM, 15 June 1996
- # if there is no printable key, but one is known from
- # a previous index-entry, then use it.
- #
- if (!($printable_key) && ($printable_key{$index_key}))
- { $printable_key = $printable_key{$index_key}; }
-# if (!($printable_key) && ($printable_key{$cur_key}))
-# { $printable_key = $printable_key{$cur_key}; }
- #
- # do not overwrite the printable_key if it contains an anchor
- #
- if (!($printable_key{$index_key} =~ /tex2html_anchor_mark/ ))
- { $printable_key{$index_key} = $printable_key || $key; }
-# if (!($printable_key{$cur_key} =~ /tex2html_anchor_mark/ ))
-# { $printable_key{$cur_key} = $printable_key || $key; }
-
- $super_key = $cur_key;
- }
- #
- # RRM
- # page-ranges, from |( and |) and |see
- #
- if ($pageref) {
- if ($pageref eq "\(" ) {
- $pageref = '';
- $next .= " from ";
- } elsif ($pageref eq "\)" ) {
- $pageref = '';
- local($next) = $index{$index_key};
-# local($next) = $index{$cur_key};
- # $next =~ s/[\|] *$//;
- $next =~ s/(\n )?\| $//;
- $index{$index_key} = "$next to ";
-# $index{$cur_key} = "$next to ";
- }
- }
-
- if ($pageref) {
- $pageref =~ s/\s*$//g; # remove trailing spaces
- if (!$pageref) { $pageref = ' ' }
- $pageref =~ s/see/<i>see <\/i> /g;
- #
- # RRM: 27 Dec 1996
- # check if $pageref corresponds to a style command.
- # If so, apply it to the $words.
- #
- local($tmp) = "do_cmd_$pageref";
- if (defined &$tmp) {
- $words = &$tmp("<#0#>$words<#0#>");
- $words =~ s/<\#[^\#]*\#>//go;
- $pageref = '';
- }
- }
- #
- # RRM: 25 May 1996
- # any \label in the pageref section will have already
- # created a label where the \index occurred.
- # This has to be removed, so that the desired label
- # will be found on the Index page instead.
- #
- if ($pageref) {
- if ($pageref =~ /tex2html_anchor_mark/ ) {
- $pageref =~ s/><tex2html_anchor_mark><\/A><A//g;
- local($tmpA,$tmpB) = split("NAME=\"", $pageref);
- ($tmpA,$tmpB) = split("\"", $tmpB);
- $ref_files{$tmpA}='';
- $index_labels{$tmpA} = 1;
- }
- #
- # resolve and clean-up any hyperlinks in the page-ref,
- # so they can be saved in an index.pl file
- #
- if ($pageref =~ /$cross_ref_mark/ ) {
- local($label,$id,$ref_label);
- # $pageref =~ s/$cross_ref_mark#(\w+)#(\w+)>$cross_ref_mark/
- $pageref =~ s/$cross_ref_mark#([^#]+)#([^>]+)>$cross_ref_mark/
- do { ($label,$id) = ($1,$2);
- $ref_files{$label} = ''; # ???? RRM
- if ($index_labels{$label}) { $ref_label = ''; }
- else { $ref_label = $external_labels{$label}
- unless ($ref_label = $ref_files{$label});
- }
- '"' . "$ref_label#$label" . '">' . &get_ref_mark($label,$id)}/geo;
- }
- $pageref =~ s/<\#[^\#>]*\#>//go;
-
- if ($pageref eq ' ') { $index{$index_key}='@'; }
- else { $index{$index_key} .= $pageref . "\n | "; }
- } else {
- local($thisref) = &make_named_href('',"$CURRENT_FILE#$br_id",$words);
- $thisref =~ s/\n//g;
- $index{$index_key} .= $thisref."\n | ";
- }
- #print "\nREF: $sort_key : $index_key :$index{$index_key}";
-
- #join('',"<A NAME=$br_id>$anchor_invisible_mark<\/A>",$_);
-
- "<A NAME=\"$br_id\">$anchor_invisible_mark<\/A>";
-}
-
-
-# KEC. -- Copied from makeidx.perl, then modified to do multiple indices.
-# Feeds the index entries to the output. This is called for each index to be built.
-#
-# Generates a list of lookup keys for index entries, from both %printable_keys
-# and %index keys.
-# Sorts the keys according to index-sorting rules.
-# Removes keys with a 0x01 token. (duplicates?)
-# Builds a string to go to the index file.
-# Adds the index entries to the string if they belong in this index.
-# Keeps track of which index is being worked on, so only the proper entries
-# are included.
-# Places the index just built in to the output at the proper place.
-{ my $index_number = 0;
-sub add_real_idx {
- print "\nDoing the index ... Index Number $index_number\n";
- local($key, @keys, $next, $index, $old_key, $old_html);
- my ($idx_ref,$keyref);
- # RRM, 15.6.96: index constructed from %printable_key, not %index
- @keys = keys %printable_key;
-
- while (/$idx_mark/) {
- # Get the index reference from what follows the $idx_mark and
- # remove it from the string.
- s/$idxmark\002(.*?)\002/$idxmark/;
- $idx_ref = $1;
- $index = '';
- # include non- makeidx index-entries
- foreach $key (keys %index) {
- next if $printable_key{$key};
- $old_key = $key;
- if ($key =~ s/###(.*)$//) {
- next if $printable_key{$key};
- push (@keys, $key);
- $printable_key{$key} = $key;
- if ($index{$old_key} =~ /HREF="([^"]*)"/i) {
- $old_html = $1;
- $old_html =~ /$dd?([^#\Q$dd\E]*)#/;
- $old_html = $1;
- } else { $old_html = '' }
- $index{$key} = $index{$old_key} . $old_html."</A>\n | ";
- };
- }
- @keys = sort makeidx_keysort @keys;
- @keys = grep(!/\001/, @keys);
- my $cnt = 0;
- foreach $key (@keys) {
- my ($keyref) = $key =~ /.*\002(.*)/;
- next unless ($idx_ref eq $keyref); # KEC.
- $index .= &add_idx_key($key);
- $cnt++;
- }
- print "$cnt Index Entries Added\n";
- $index = '<DD>'.$index unless ($index =~ /^\s*<D(D|T)>/);
- $index_number++; # KEC.
- if ($SHORT_INDEX) {
- print "(compact version with Legend)";
- local($num) = ( $index =~ s/\<D/<D/g );
- if ($num > 50 ) {
- s/$idx_mark/$preindex<HR><DL>\n$index\n<\/DL>$preindex/o;
- } else {
- s/$idx_mark/$preindex<HR><DL>\n$index\n<\/DL>/o;
- }
- } else {
- s/$idx_mark/<DL COMPACT>\n$index\n<\/DL>/o; }
- }
-}
-}
-
-# KEC. Copied from latex2html.pl and modified to support multiple indices.
-# The bibliography and the index should be treated as separate sections
-# in their own HTML files. The \bibliography{} command acts as a sectioning command
-# that has the desired effect. But when the bibliography is constructed
-# manually using the thebibliography environment, or when using the
-# theindex environment it is not possible to use the normal sectioning
-# mechanism. This subroutine inserts a \bibliography{} or a dummy
-# \textohtmlindex command just before the appropriate environments
-# to force sectioning.
-sub add_bbl_and_idx_dummy_commands {
- local($id) = $global{'max_id'};
-
- s/([\\]begin\s*$O\d+$C\s*thebibliography)/$bbl_cnt++; $1/eg;
- ## if ($bbl_cnt == 1) {
- s/([\\]begin\s*$O\d+$C\s*thebibliography)/$id++; "\\bibliography$O$id$C$O$id$C $1"/geo;
- #}
- $global{'max_id'} = $id;
- # KEC. Modified to global substitution to place multiple index tokens.
- s/[\\]begin\s*($O\d+$C)\s*theindex/\\textohtmlindex$1/go;
- # KEC. Modified to pick up the optional argument to \printindex
- s/[\\]printindex\s*(\[.*?\])?/
- do { (defined $1) ? "\\textohtmlindex $1" : "\\textohtmlindex []"; } /ego;
- &lib_add_bbl_and_idx_dummy_commands() if defined(&lib_add_bbl_and_idx_dummy_commands);
-}
-
-# KEC. Copied from latex2html.pl and modified to support multiple indices.
-# For each textohtmlindex mark found, determine the index titles and headers.
-# We place the index ref in the header so the proper index can be generated later.
-# For the default index, the index ref is blank.
-#
-# One problem is that this routine is called twice.. Once for processing the
-# command as originally seen, and once for processing the command when
-# doing the name for the index file. We can detect that by looking at the
-# id numbers (or ref) surrounding the \theindex command, and not incrementing
-# index_number unless a new id (or ref) is seen. This has the side effect of
-# having to unconventionally start the index_number at -1. But it works.
-#
-# Gets the title from the list of indices.
-# If this is the first index, save the title in $first_idx_file. This is what's referenced
-# in the navigation buttons.
-# Increment the index_number for next time.
-# If the indexname command is defined or a newcommand defined for indexname, do it.
-# Save the index TITLE in the toc
-# Save the first_idx_file into the idxfile. This goes into the nav buttons.
-# Build index_labels if needed.
-# Create the index headings and put them in the output stream.
-
-{ my $index_number = 0; # Will be incremented before use.
- my $first_idx_file; # Static
- my $no_increment = 0;
-
-sub do_cmd_textohtmlindex {
- local($_) = @_;
- my ($idxref,$idxnum,$index_name);
-
- # We get called from make_name with the first argument = "\001noincrement". This is a sign
- # to not increment $index_number the next time we are called. We get called twice, once
- # my make_name and once by process_command. Unfortunately, make_name calls us just to set the name
- # but doesn't use the result so we get called a second time by process_command. This works fine
- # except for cases where there are multiple indices except if they aren't named, which is the case
- # when the index is inserted by an include command in latex. In these cases we are only able to use
- # the index number to decide which index to draw from, and we don't know how to increment that index
- # number if we get called a variable number of times for the same index, as is the case between
- # making html (one output file) and web (multiple output files) output formats.
- if (/\001noincrement/) {
- $no_increment = 1;
- return;
- }
-
- # Remove (but save) the index reference
- s/^\s*\[(.*?)\]/{$idxref = $1; "";}/e;
-
- # If we have an $idxref, the index name was specified. In this case, we have all the
- # information we need to carry on. Otherwise, we need to get the idxref
- # from the $index_number and set the name to "Index".
- if ($idxref) {
- $index_name = $indices{'title'}{$idxref};
- } else {
- if (defined ($idxref = $indices{'newcmdorder'}->[$index_number])) {
- $index_name = $indices{'title'}{$idxref};
- } else {
- $idxref = '';
- $index_name = "Index";
- }
- }
-
- $idx_title = "Index"; # The name displayed in the nav bar text.
-
- # Only set $idxfile if we are at the first index. This will point the
- # navigation panel to the first index file rather than the last.
- $first_idx_file = $CURRENT_FILE if ($index_number == 0);
- $idxfile = $first_idx_file; # Pointer for the Index button in the nav bar.
- $toc_sec_title = $index_name; # Index link text in the toc.
- $TITLE = $toc_sec_title; # Title for this index, from which its filename is built.
- if (%index_labels) { &make_index_labels(); }
- if (($SHORT_INDEX) && (%index_segment)) { &make_preindex(); }
- else { $preindex = ''; }
- local $idx_head = $section_headings{'textohtmlindex'};
- local($heading) = join(''
- , &make_section_heading($TITLE, $idx_head)
- , $idx_mark, "\002", $idxref, "\002" );
- local($pre,$post) = &minimize_open_tags($heading);
- $index_number++ unless ($no_increment);
- $no_increment = 0;
- join('',"<BR>\n" , $pre, $_);
-}
-}
-
-# Returns an index key, given the key passed as the first argument.
-# Not modified for multiple indices.
-sub add_idx_key {
- local($key) = @_;
- local($index, $next);
- if (($index{$key} eq '@' )&&(!($index_printed{$key}))) {
- if ($SHORT_INDEX) { $index .= "<DD><BR>\n<DT>".&print_key."\n<DD>"; }
- else { $index .= "<DT><DD><BR>\n<DT>".&print_key."\n<DD>"; }
- } elsif (($index{$key})&&(!($index_printed{$key}))) {
- if ($SHORT_INDEX) {
- $next = "<DD>".&print_key."\n : ". &print_idx_links;
- } else {
- $next = "<DT>".&print_key."\n<DD>". &print_idx_links;
- }
- $index .= $next."\n";
- $index_printed{$key} = 1;
- }
-
- if ($sub_index{$key}) {
- local($subkey, @subkeys, $subnext, $subindex);
- @subkeys = sort(split("\004", $sub_index{$key}));
- if ($SHORT_INDEX) {
- $index .= "<DD>".&print_key unless $index_printed{$key};
- $index .= "<DL>\n";
- } else {
- $index .= "<DT>".&print_key."\n<DD>" unless $index_printed{$key};
- $index .= "<DL COMPACT>\n";
- }
- foreach $subkey (@subkeys) {
- $index .= &add_sub_idx_key($subkey) unless ($index_printed{$subkey});
- }
- $index .= "</DL>\n";
- }
- return $index;
-}
-
-1; # Must be present as the last line.
+++ /dev/null
-/* Century Schoolbook font is very similar to Computer Modern Math: cmmi */
-.MATH { font-family: "Century Schoolbook", serif; }
-.MATH I { font-family: "Century Schoolbook", serif; font-style: italic }
-.BOLDMATH { font-family: "Century Schoolbook", serif; font-weight: bold }
-
-/* implement both fixed-size and relative sizes */
-SMALL.XTINY { font-size : xx-small }
-SMALL.TINY { font-size : x-small }
-SMALL.SCRIPTSIZE { font-size : smaller }
-SMALL.FOOTNOTESIZE { font-size : small }
-SMALL.SMALL { }
-BIG.LARGE { }
-BIG.XLARGE { font-size : large }
-BIG.XXLARGE { font-size : x-large }
-BIG.HUGE { font-size : larger }
-BIG.XHUGE { font-size : xx-large }
-
-/* heading styles */
-H1 { }
-H2 { }
-H3 { }
-H4 { }
-H5 { }
-
-/* mathematics styles */
-DIV.displaymath { } /* math displays */
-TD.eqno { } /* equation-number cells */
-
-
-/* document-specific styles come next */
+++ /dev/null
-[General]
-img_extIsRegExp=false
-img_extensions=.eps .jpg .jpeg .png .pdf .ps .fig .gif
-kileprversion=2
-kileversion=2.0
-lastDocument=install.tex
-masterDocument=
-name=Install
-pkg_extIsRegExp=false
-pkg_extensions=.cls .sty
-src_extIsRegExp=false
-src_extensions=.tex .ltx .latex .dtx .ins
-
-[Tools]
-MakeIndex=
-QuickBuild=
-
-[item:autochangerres.tex]
-archive=true
-column=111
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:configure.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=UTF-8
-highlight=LaTeX
-line=359
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:consoleconf.tex]
-archive=true
-column=85
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:critical.tex]
-archive=true
-column=134217832
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:dirdconf.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:filedconf.tex]
-archive=true
-column=143543216
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:fileset.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:install.kilepr]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:install.tex]
-archive=true
-column=16
-encoding=UTF-8
-highlight=LaTeX
-line=37
-open=true
-order=0
-
-[item:installation.tex]
-archive=true
-column=2949164
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:messagesres.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:monitorconf.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:quickstart.tex]
-archive=true
-column=23
-encoding=UTF-8
-highlight=LaTeX
-line=156
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:security.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:storedconf.tex]
-archive=true
-column=0
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
-
-[item:version.tex]
-archive=true
-column=161
-encoding=
-highlight=
-line=0
-open=false
-order=-1
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-%% The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-%% to be entered as printable characters:
-%%
-%% # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-%%
-
-\documentclass[10pt,a4paper]{book}
-
-\topmargin -0.5in
-\oddsidemargin 0.0in
-\evensidemargin 0.0in
-\textheight 10in
-\textwidth 6.5in
-
-\usepackage{html}
-\usepackage{float}
-\usepackage{graphicx}
-\usepackage{bacula}
-\usepackage{longtable}
-\usepackage{makeidx}
-\usepackage{index}
-\usepackage{setspace}
-\usepackage{hyperref}
-\usepackage{url}
-
-
-\makeindex
-\newindex{dir}{ddx}{dnd}{Director Index}
-\newindex{fd}{fdx}{fnd}{File Daemon Index}
-\newindex{sd}{sdx}{snd}{Storage Daemon Index}
-\newindex{console}{cdx}{cnd}{Console Index}
-\newindex{general}{idx}{ind}{General Index}
-
-\sloppy
-
-\begin{document}
-\sloppy
-
-\newfont{\bighead}{cmr17 at 36pt}
-\parskip 10pt
-\parindent 0pt
-
-\title{\includegraphics{\idir bacula-logo.eps} \\ \bigskip
- \Huge{Bacula Installation and Configuration Guide}
- \begin{center}
- \large{It comes in the night and sucks
- the essence from your computers. }
- \end{center}
-}
-
-
-\author{Kern Sibbald}
-\date{\vspace{1.0in}\today \\
- This manual documents Bacula version \input{version} \\
- \vspace{0.2in}
- Copyright \copyright 1999-2009, Free Software Foundation Europe
- e.V. \\
- \vspace{0.2in}
- Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the
- GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 published by the Free Software Foundation;
- with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
- A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
-}
-
-\maketitle
-
-\clearpage
-\tableofcontents
-\clearpage
-
-\include{quickstart}
-\include{installation}
-\include{critical}
-\include{configure}
-\include{dirdconf}
-\include{filedconf}
-\include{storedconf}
-\include{messagesres}
-\include{consoleconf}
-\include{monitorconf}
-\include{security}
-\include{fdl}
-
-
-% The following line tells link_resolver.pl to not include these files:
-% nolinks developersi baculai-dir baculai-fd baculai-sd baculai-console baculai-main
-
-% pull in the index
-\clearpage
-\printindex[general]
-\printindex[dir]
-\printindex[fd]
-\printindex[sd]
-\printindex[console]
-
-\end{document}
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Installing Bacula}
-\label{InstallChapter}
-\index[general]{Bacula!Installing}
-\index[general]{Installing Bacula}
-
-In general, you will need the Bacula source release, and if you want to run
-a Windows client, you will need the Bacula Windows binary release.
-However, Bacula needs certain third party packages (such as {\bf MySQL},
-{\bf PostgreSQL}, or {\bf SQLite} to build and run
-properly depending on the
-options you specify. Normally, {\bf MySQL} and {\bf PostgreSQL} are
-packages that can be installed on your distribution. However, if you do
-not have them, to simplify your task, we have combined a number of these
-packages into three {\bf depkgs} releases (Dependency Packages). This can
-vastly simplify your life by providing you with all the necessary packages
-rather than requiring you to find them on the Web, load them, and install
-them.
-
-\section{Source Release Files}
-\index[general]{Source Files}
-\index[general]{Release Files}
- Beginning with Bacula 1.38.0, the source code has been broken into
- four separate tar files each corresponding to a different module in
- the Bacula SVN. The released files are:
-
-\begin{description}
-\item [bacula-3.0.3.tar.gz]
- This is the primary source code release for Bacula. On each
- release the version number (3.0.3) will be updated.
-
-\item [bacula-docs-3.0.3.tar.gz]
- This file contains a copy of the docs directory with the
- documents prebuild. English HTML directory, single HTML
- file, and pdf file. The French and German translations
- are in progress, but are not built.
-
-\item [bacula-gui-3.0.3.tar.gz]
- This file contains the non-core GUI programs. Currently,
- it contains bacula-web, a PHP program for producing management
- viewing of your Bacula job status in a browser; and bimagemgr
- a browser program for burning CDROM images with Bacula Volumes.
-
-\item [bacula-rescue-3.0.3.tar.gz]
- This is the Bacula Rescue CDROM code. Note, the version number
- of this package is not tied to the Bacula release version, so
- it will be different. Using this code, you can burn a CDROM
- with your system configuration and containing a statically
- linked version of the File daemon. This can permit you to easily
- repartition and reformat your hard disks and reload your
- system with Bacula in the case of a hard disk failure.
- Unfortunately this rescue disk does not properly boot for
- all Linux distributions. The problem is that the boot procedure
- can vary significantly between distributions, and even within
- a distribution, they are a moving target.
-
- This package evolves slower than the Bacula source code,
- so there may not always be a new release of the rescue package when
- making minor updates to the Bacula code. For example, when releasing
- Bacula version 3.0.3, the rescue package may still be at a prior
- version if there were no updates.
-
-\item [winbacula-3.0.3.exe]
- This file is the 32 bit Windows installer for installing
- the Windows client (File daemon) on a Windows machine.
- This client will also run on 64 bit Windows machines.
- Beginning with Bacula version 1.39.20, this executable will
- also optionally load the Win32 Director and the Win32
- Storage daemon.
-
-\item [win64bacula-3.0.3.exe]
- This file is the 64 bit Windows installer for installing
- the Windows client (File daemon) on a Windows machine.
- This client will only run on 64 bit Windows OS machines.
- It will not run on 32 bit machines or 32 bit Windows OSes.
- The win64bacula release is necessary for Volume Shadow
- Copy (VSS) to work on Win64 OSes. This installer
- installs only the FD, the Director and Storage daemon
- are not included.
-
-\end{description}
-
-\label{upgrading1}
-\section{Upgrading Bacula}
-\index[general]{Bacula!Upgrading}
-\index[general]{Upgrading Bacula}
-\index[general]{Upgrading}
-
-If you are upgrading from one Bacula version to another, you should first
-carefully read the ReleaseNotes of all major versions between your current
-version and the version to which you are upgrading. In many upgrades,
-especially for minor patch upgrades (e.g. between 3.0.0 and 3.0.1) there
-will be no database upgrade, and hence the process is rather simple.
-
-With version 3.0.0 and later, you {\bf must} ensure that on any one
-machine that all components of Bacula are running on exactly the
-same version. Prior to version 3.0.0, it was possible to run a
-lower level FD with a newer Director and SD. This is no longer the
-case.
-
-As always, we attempt to support older File daemons. This avoids the
-need to do a simultaneous upgrade of many machines. For exactly what
-older versions of the FD are supported, please see the ReleaseNotes
-for the new version. In any case, you must always upgrade both the
-Director and the Storage daemon at the same time, and you must also
-upgrade any File daemon that is running on the same machine as a Director
-or a Storage daemon (see the prior paragraph).
-
-If the Bacula catalog
-database has been upgraded (as it is almost every major release), you will
-either need to reinitialize your database starting from scratch (not
-normally a good idea), or save an ASCII copy of your database, then proceed
-to upgrade it. If you are upgrading two major versions (e.g. 1.36 to 2.0)
-then life will be more complicated because you must do two database
-upgrades. See below for more on this.
-
-Upgrading the catalog is normally done after Bacula is build and installed
-by:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-cd <installed-scripts-dir> (default /etc/bacula)
-./update_bacula_tables
-\end{verbatim}
-
-This update script can also be find in the Bacula source src/cats
-directory.
-
-If there are several database upgrades between your version and the
-version to which you are upgrading, you will need to apply each database
-upgrade script. For your convenience, you can find all the old upgrade scripts
-in the {\bf upgradedb} directory of the source code. You will need to edit the
-scripts to correspond to your system configuration. The final upgrade script,
-if any, can be applied as noted above.
-
-If you are upgrading from one major version to another, you will need to
-replace all your components at the same time as generally the inter-daemon
-protocol will change. However, within any particular release (e.g. version
-1.32.x) unless there is an oversight or bug, the daemon protocol will not
-change. If this is confusing, simply read the ReleaseNotes very carefully as
-they will note if all daemons must be upgraded at the same time.
-
-Finally, please note that in general it is not necessary or desirable
-to do a {\bf make uninstall} before doing an upgrade providing you are careful
-not to change the installation directories. In fact, if you do so, you will
-most likely delete all your conf files, which could be disastrous.
-The normal procedure during an upgrade is simply:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-./configure (your options)
-make
-make install
-\end{verbatim}
-
-In general none of your existing .conf or .sql files will be overwritten,
-and you must do both the {\bf make} and {\bf make install} commands, a
-{\bf make install} without the preceding {\bf make} will not work.
-
-For additional information on upgrading, please see the \ilink{Upgrading Bacula
-Versions}{upgrading} in the Tips chapter of this manual.
-
-\section{Releases Numbering}
-\index[general]{Release Numbering}
-\index[general]{Version Numbering}
-Every Bacula release whether beta or production has a different number
-as well as the date of the release build. The numbering system follows
-traditional Open Source conventions in that it is of the form.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-major.minor.release
-\end{verbatim}
-
-For example:
-\begin{verbatim}
-1.38.11
-\end{verbatim}
-
-where each component (major, minor, patch) is a number.
-The major number is currently 1 and normally does not change
-very frequently. The minor number starts at 0 and increases
-each for each production release by 2 (i.e. it is always an
-even number for a production release), and the patch number is
-starts at zero each time the minor number changes. The patch
-number is increased each time a bug fix (or fixes) is released
-to production.
-
-So, as of this date (10 September 2006), the current production Bacula
-release is version 1.38.11. If there are bug fixes, the next release
-will be 1.38.12 (i.e. the patch number has increased by one).
-
-For all patch releases where the minor version number does not change,
-the database and all the daemons will be compatible. That means that
-you can safely run a 1.38.0 Director with a 1.38.11 Client. Of course,
-in this case, the Director may have bugs that are not fixed. Generally,
-within a minor release (some minor releases are not so minor), all
-patch numbers are officially released to production. This means that while
-the current Bacula version is 1.38.11, versions 1.38.0, 1.38.1, ... 1.38.10
-have all been previously released.
-
-When the minor number is odd, it indicates that the package is under
-development and thus may not be stable. For example, while the current
-production release of Bacula is currently 1.38.11, the current development
-version is 1.39.22. All patch versions of the development code are
-available in the SVN (source repository). However, not all patch versions
-of the development code (odd minor version) are officially released. When
-they are released, they are released as beta versions (see below for a
-definition of what beta means for Bacula releases).
-
-In general when the minor number increases from one production release
-to the next (i.e. 1.38.x to 1.40.0), the catalog database must be upgraded,
-the Director and Storage daemon must always be on the same minor release
-number, and often (not always), the Clients must also be on the same minor
-release. As often as possible, we attempt to make new releases that are
-downwards compatible with prior clients, but this is not always possible.
-You must check the release notes. In general, you will have fewer problems
-if you always run all the components on the same minor version number (i.e.
-all either 1.38.x or 1.40.x but not mixed).
-
-
-\label{BetaReleases}
-\section*{Beta Releases}
-\index[general]{Beta Releases}
-Towards the end of the development cycle, which typically runs
-one year from a major release to another, there will be several beta
-releases of the development code prior to a production release.
-As noted above, beta versions always have odd minor version numbers
-(e.g 1.37.x or 1.39.x).
-The purpose of the beta releases is to allow early adopter users to test
-the new code. Beta releases are made with the following considerations:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The code passes the regression testing on FreeBSD, Linux, and Solaris
- machines.
-
-\item There are no known major bugs, or on the rare occasion that
- there are, they will be documented or already in the bugs database.
-
-\item Some of the new code/features may not yet be tested.
-
-\item Bugs are expected to be found, especially in the new
- code before the final production release.
-
-\item The code will have been run in production in at least one small
- site (mine).
-
-\item The Win32 client will have been run in production at least
- one night at that small site.
-
-\item The documentation in the manual is unlikely to be complete especially
- for the new features, and the Release Notes may not be fully
- organized.
-
-\item Beta code is not generally recommended for everyone, but
- rather for early adopters.
-\end{itemize}
-
-
-\label{Dependency}
-\section{Dependency Packages}
-\index[general]{Dependency Packages}
-\index[general]{Packages!Dependency}
-
-As discussed above, we have combined a number of third party packages that
-Bacula might need into the {\bf depkgs} release. You can,
-of course, get the latest packages from the original authors or
-from your operating system supplier. The locations of
-where we obtained the packages are in the README file in each package.
-However, be aware that the packages in the depkgs files have been tested by us
-for compatibility with Bacula.
-
-Typically, a dependency package will be named {\bf depkgs-ddMMMyy.tar.gz}
-where {\bf dd} is the day we release it, {\bf MMM}
-is the abbreviated month (e.g. Jan), and {\bf yy} is the year. An actual
-example is: {\bf depkgs-24Jul09.tar.gz}. To install and build this package (if
-needed), you do the following:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Create a {\bf bacula} directory, into which you will place both the
- Bacula source as well as the dependency package.
-\item Detar the {\bf depkgs} into the {\bf bacula} directory.
-\item cd bacula/depkgs
-\item make
-\end{enumerate}
-
-Although the exact composition of the dependency packages may change from time
-to time, the current makeup is the following:
-
-\addcontentsline{lot}{table}{Dependency Packages}
-\begin{longtable}{|l|l|l|}
- \hline
-\multicolumn{1}{|c| }{\bf 3rd Party Package} & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{\bf depkgs}
- & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{\bf depkgs-qt} \\
- \hline {SQLite } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{X } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{ }\\
- \hline {SQLite3 } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{X } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{ }\\
- \hline {mtx } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{X } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{ } \\
- \hline {qt4 } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{ } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{X } \\
- \hline {qwt } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{ } & \multicolumn{1}{c| }{X } \\
- \hline
-\end{longtable}
-
-Note, some of these packages are quite large, so that building them can be a
-bit time consuming. The above instructions will build all the packages
-contained in the directory. However, when building Bacula, it will take only
-those pieces that it actually needs.
-
-Alternatively, you can make just the packages that are needed. For example,
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-cd bacula/depkgs
-make sqlite
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-will configure and build only the SQLite package.
-
-You should build the packages that you will require in {\bf depkgs} a
-prior to configuring and building Bacula, since Bacula will need
-them during the build process.
-
-For more information on the {\bf depkgs-qt} package, please read the
-INSTALL file in the main directory of that package. If you are going to
-build Qt4 using {\bf depkgs-qt}, you must source the {\bf qt4-paths} file
-included in the package prior to building Bacula. Please read the INSTALL
-file for more details.
-
-Even if you do not use SQLite, you might find it worthwhile to build {\bf mtx}
-because the {\bf tapeinfo} program that comes with it can often provide you
-with valuable information about your SCSI tape drive (e.g. compression,
-min/max block sizes, ...). Note, most distros provide {\bf mtx} as part of
-their release.
-
-The {\bf depkgs1} package is depreciated and previously contained
-readline, which should be available on all operating systems.
-
-The {\bf depkgs-win32} package is deprecated and no longer used in
-Bacula version 1.39.x and later. It was previously used to build
-the native Win32 client program, but this program is now built on Linux
-systems using cross-compiling. All the tools and third party libraries
-are automatically downloaded by executing the appropriate scripts. See
-src/win32/README.mingw32 for more details.
-
-\section{Supported Operating Systems}
-\label{Systems}
-\index[general]{Systems!Supported Operating}
-\index[general]{Supported Operating Systems}
-
-Please see the
-\ilink{ Supported Operating Systems}{SupportedOSes} section
-of the QuickStart chapter of this manual.
-
-\section{Building Bacula from Source}
-\label{Building}
-\index[general]{Source!Building Bacula from}
-\index[general]{Building Bacula from Source}
-
-The basic installation is rather simple.
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Install and build any {\bf depkgs} as noted above. This
- should be unnecessary on most modern Operating Systems.
-
-\item Configure and install MySQL or PostgreSQL (if desired).
- \ilink{Installing and Configuring MySQL Phase I}{MySqlChapter} or
- \ilink{Installing and Configuring PostgreSQL Phase
- I}{PostgreSqlChapter}. If you are installing from rpms, and are
- using MySQL, please be sure to install {\bf mysql-devel}, so that the MySQL
- header files are available while compiling Bacula. In addition, the MySQL
- client library {\bf mysqlclient} requires the gzip compression library {\bf
- libz.a} or {\bf libz.so}. If you are using rpm packages, these libraries are
- in the {\bf libz-devel} package. On Debian systems, you will need to load the
- {\bf zlib1g-dev} package. If you are not using rpms or debs, you will need to
- find the appropriate package for your system.
-
- Note, if you already have a running MySQL or PostgreSQL on your system, you
- can skip this phase provided that you have built the thread safe libraries.
- And you have already installed the additional rpms noted above.
-
- SQLite is not supported on Solaris. This is because it
- frequently fails with bus errors. However SQLite3 may work.
-
-\item Detar the Bacula source code preferably into the {\bf bacula} directory
- discussed above.
-
-\item {\bf cd} to the directory containing the source code.
-
-\item ./configure (with appropriate options as described below). Any
- path names you specify as options on the ./configure command line
- must be absolute paths and not relative.
-
-\item Check the output of ./configure very carefully, especially the Install
- binaries and Install config directories. If they are not correct,
- please rerun ./configure until they are. The output from ./configure is
- stored in {\bf config.out} and can be re-displayed at any time without
- rerunning the ./configure by doing {\bf cat config.out}.
-
-\item If after running ./configure once, you decide to change options and
- re-run it, that is perfectly fine, but before re-running it, you should run:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- make distclean
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-so that you are sure to start from scratch and not have a mixture of the two
-options. This is because ./configure caches much of the information. The {\bf
-make distclean} is also critical if you move the source directory from one
-machine to another. If the {\bf make distclean} fails, just ignore it and
-continue on.
-
-\item make
- If you get errors while linking in the Storage daemon directory
- (src/stored), it is probably because you have not loaded the static
- libraries on your system. I noticed this problem on a Solaris system.
- To correct it, make sure that you have not added {\bf
- {-}{-}enable-static-tools} to the {\bf ./configure} command.
-
- If you skip this step ({\bf make}) and proceed immediately to the {\bf
- make install} you are making two serious errors: 1. your install will
- fail because Bacula requires a {\bf make} before a {\bf make install}.
- 2. you are depriving yourself of the chance to make sure there are no
- errors before beginning to write files to your system directories.
-
-
-\item make install
- Please be sure you have done a {\bf make} before entering this command,
- and that everything has properly compiled and linked without errors.
-
-
-\item If you are new to Bacula, we {\bf strongly} recommend that you skip
- the next step and use the default configuration files, then run the
- example program in the next chapter, then come back and modify your
- configuration files to suit your particular needs.
-
-\item Customize the configuration files for each of the three daemons
- (Directory, File, Storage) and for the Console program. For the details
- of how to do this, please see \ilink{Setting Up Bacula Configuration
- Files}{ConfigureChapter} in the Configuration chapter of this manual. We
- recommend that you start by modifying the default configuration files
- supplied, making the minimum changes necessary. Complete customization
- can be done after you have Bacula up and running. Please take care when
- modifying passwords, which were randomly generated, and the {\bf Name}s
- as the passwords and names must agree between the configuration files
- for security reasons.
-
-\label{CreateDatabase}
-\item Create the Bacula MySQL database and tables
- (if using MySQL)
- \ilink{Installing and Configuring MySQL Phase II}{mysql_phase2} or
- create the Bacula PostgreSQL database and tables
- \ilink{Configuring PostgreSQL
- II}{PostgreSQL_configure} or alternatively if you are using
- SQLite \ilink{Installing and Configuring SQLite Phase II}{phase2}.
-
-\item Start Bacula ({\bf ./bacula start}) Note. the next chapter shows you
- how to do this in detail.
-
-\item Interface with Bacula using the Console program
-
-\item For the previous two items, please follow the instructions in the
- \ilink{Running Bacula}{TutorialChapter} chapter of this manual,
- where you will run a simple backup and do a restore. Do this before you make
- heavy modifications to the configuration files so that you are sure that
- Bacula works and are familiar with it. After that changing the conf files
- will be easier.
-
-\item If after installing Bacula, you decide to "move it", that is to
- install it in a different set of directories, proceed as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- make uninstall
- make distclean
- ./configure (your-new-options)
- make
- make install
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\end{enumerate}
-
-If all goes well, the {\bf ./configure} will correctly determine which
-operating system you are running and configure the source code appropriately.
-Currently, FreeBSD, Linux (Red Hat), and Solaris are supported. The Bacula
-client (File daemon) is reported to work with MacOS X 10.3 is if
-readline support is not enabled (default) when building the client.
-
-If you install Bacula on more than one system, and they are identical, you can
-simply transfer the source tree to that other system and do a "make
-install". However, if there are differences in the libraries or OS versions,
-or you wish to install on a different OS, you should start from the original
-compress tar file. If you do transfer the source tree, and you have previously
-done a ./configure command, you MUST do:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-make distclean
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-prior to doing your new ./configure. This is because the GNU autoconf tools
-cache the configuration, and if you re-use a configuration for a Linux machine
-on a Solaris, you can be sure your build will fail. To avoid this, as
-mentioned above, either start from the tar file, or do a "make distclean".
-
-In general, you will probably want to supply a more complicated {\bf
-configure} statement to ensure that the modules you want are built and that
-everything is placed into the correct directories.
-
-For example, on Fedora, Red Hat, or SuSE one could use the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-CFLAGS="-g -Wall" \
- ./configure \
- --sbindir=$HOME/bacula/bin \
- --sysconfdir=$HOME/bacula/bin \
- --with-pid-dir=$HOME/bacula/bin/working \
- --with-subsys-dir=$HOME/bacula/bin/working \
- --with-mysql \
- --with-working-dir=$HOME/bacula/bin/working \
- --with-dump-email=$USER
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The advantage of using the above configuration to start is that
-everything will be put into a single directory, which you can later delete
-once you have run the examples in the next chapter and learned how Bacula
-works. In addition, the above can be installed and run as non-root.
-
-For the developer's convenience, I have added a {\bf defaultconfig} script to
-the {\bf examples} directory. This script contains the statements that you
-would normally use, and each developer/user may modify them to suit his needs.
-You should find additional useful examples in this directory as well.
-
-The {\bf \verb:--:enable-conio} or {\bf \verb:--:enable-readline} options are useful because
-they provide a command line history and editing capability for the Console
-program. If you have included either option in the build, either the {\bf
-termcap} or the {\bf ncurses} package will be needed to link. On most
-systems, including Red Hat and SuSE, you should include the ncurses package.
-If Bacula's configure process finds the ncurses libraries, it will use
-those rather than the termcap library.
-On some systems, such as SuSE, the termcap library is not in the standard
-library directory. As a consequence, the option may be disabled or you may
-get an error message such as:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-/usr/lib/gcc-lib/i586-suse-linux/3.3.1/.../ld:
-cannot find -ltermcap
-collect2: ld returned 1 exit status
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-while building the Bacula Console. In that case, you will need to set the {\bf
-LDFLAGS} environment variable prior to building.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-export LDFLAGS="-L/usr/lib/termcap"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The same library requirements apply if you wish to use the readline
-subroutines for command line editing and history or
-if you are using a MySQL library that requires encryption. If you need encryption,
-you can either export the appropriate additional library options as shown
-above or, alternatively, you can include them directly on the ./configure line
-as in:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-LDFLAGS="-lssl -lcyrpto" \
- ./configure <your-options>
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-On some systems such as Mandriva, readline tends to
-gobble up prompts, which makes it totally useless. If this happens to you, use
-the disable option, or if you are using version 1.33 and above try using {\bf
-\verb:--:enable-conio} to use a built-in readline replacement. You will still need
-either the termcap or the ncurses library, but it is unlikely that the {\bf conio}
-package will gobble up prompts.
-
-readline is no longer supported after version 1.34. The code within Bacula
-remains, so it should be usable, and if users submit patches for it, we will
-be happy to apply them. However, due to the fact that each version of
-readline seems to be incompatible with previous versions, and that there
-are significant differences between systems, we can no longer afford to
-support it.
-
-\section{What Database to Use?}
-\label{DB}
-\index[general]{What Database to Use?}
-\index[general]{Use!What Database to}
-
-Before building Bacula you need to decide if you want to use SQLite, MySQL, or
-PostgreSQL. If you are not already running MySQL or PostgreSQL, you might
-want to start by testing with SQLite (not supported on Solaris).
-This will greatly simplify the setup for you
-because SQLite is compiled into Bacula an requires no administration. It
-performs well and is suitable for small to medium sized installations (maximum
-10-20 machines). However, we should note that a number of users have
-had unexplained database corruption with SQLite. For that reason, we
-recommend that you install either MySQL or PostgreSQL for production
-work.
-
-If you wish to use MySQL as the Bacula catalog, please see the
-\ilink{Installing and Configuring MySQL}{MySqlChapter} chapter of
-this manual. You will need to install MySQL prior to continuing with the
-configuration of Bacula. MySQL is a high quality database that is very
-efficient and is suitable for any sized installation. It is slightly more
-complicated than SQLite to setup and administer because it has a number of
-sophisticated features such as userids and passwords. It runs as a separate
-process, is truly professional and can manage a database of any size.
-
-If you wish to use PostgreSQL as the Bacula catalog, please see the
-\ilink{Installing and Configuring PostgreSQL}{PostgreSqlChapter}
-chapter of this manual. You will need to install PostgreSQL prior to
-continuing with the configuration of Bacula. PostgreSQL is very similar to
-MySQL, though it tends to be slightly more SQL92 compliant and has many more
-advanced features such as transactions, stored procedures, and the such. It
-requires a certain knowledge to install and maintain.
-
-If you wish to use SQLite as the Bacula catalog, please see
-\ilink{Installing and Configuring SQLite}{SqlLiteChapter} chapter of
-this manual. SQLite is not supported on Solaris.
-
-\section{Quick Start}
-\index[general]{Quick Start}
-\index[general]{Start!Quick}
-
-There are a number of options and important considerations given below
-that you can skip for the moment if you have not had any problems building
-Bacula with a simplified configuration as shown above.
-
-If the ./configure process is unable to find specific libraries (e.g.
-libintl, you should ensure that the appropriate package is installed on
-your system. Alternatively, if the package is installed in a non-standard
-location (as far as Bacula is concerned), then there is generally an
-option listed below (or listed with "./configure {-}{-}help" that will
-permit you to specify the directory that should be searched. In other
-cases, there are options that will permit you to disable to feature
-(e.g. {-}{-}disable-nls).
-
-If you want to dive right into it, we recommend you skip to the next chapter,
-and run the example program. It will teach you a lot about Bacula and as an
-example can be installed into a single directory (for easy removal) and run as
-non-root. If you have any problems or when you want to do a real installation,
-come back to this chapter and read the details presented below.
-
-\section{Configure Options}
-\label{Options}
-\index[general]{Options!Configure}
-\index[general]{Configure Options}
-
-The following command line options are available for {\bf configure} to
-customize your installation.
-
-\begin{description}
-\item [ {-}prefix=\lt{}patch\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}prefix}
- This option is meant to allow you to direct where the architecture
- independent files should be placed. However, we find this a somewhat
- vague concept, and so we have not implemented this option other than
- what ./configure does by default. As a consequence, we suggest that
- you avoid it. We have provided options that allow you to explicitly
- specify the directories for each of the major categories of installation
- files.
-\item [ {-}{-}sbindir=\lt{}binary-path\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}sbindir}
- Defines where the Bacula binary (executable) files will be placed during a
- {\bf make install} command.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}sysconfdir=\lt{}config-path\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}sysconfdir}
- Defines where the Bacula configuration files should be placed during a
- {\bf make install} command.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}mandir=\lt{}path\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}mandir}
- Note, as of Bacula version 1.39.14, the meaning of any path
- specified on this option is change from prior versions. It
- now specifies the top level man directory.
- Previously the mandir specified the full path to where you
- wanted the man files installed.
- The man files will be installed in gzip'ed format under
- mandir/man1 and mandir/man8 as appropriate.
- For the install to succeed you must have {\bf gzip} installed
- on your system.
-
- By default, Bacula will install the Unix man pages in
- /usr/share/man/man1 and /usr/share/man/man8.
- If you wish the man page to be installed in
- a different location, use this option to specify the path.
- Note, the main HTML and PDF Bacula documents are in a separate
- tar file that is not part of the source distribution.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}datadir=\lt{}path\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}datadir}
- If you translate Bacula or parts of Bacula into a different language
- you may specify the location of the po files using the {\bf
- {-}{-}datadir} option. You must manually install any po files as
- Bacula does not (yet) automatically do so.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}disable-ipv6 ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}disable-ipv6}
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-smartalloc ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-smartalloc}
- This enables the inclusion of the Smartalloc orphaned buffer detection
- code. This option is highly recommended. Because we never build
- without this option, you may experience problems if it is not enabled.
- In this case, simply re-enable the option. We strongly recommend
- keeping this option enabled as it helps detect memory leaks. This
- configuration parameter is used while building Bacula
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-bat ]
- \label{enablebat}
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-bat}
- If you have Qt4 >= 4.3 installed on your computer including the
- libqt4 and libqt4-devel (libqt4-dev on Debian) libraries, and you want
- to use the Bacula Administration Tool (bat) GUI Console interface to
- Bacula, you must specify this option. Doing so will build everything in
- the {\bf src/qt-console} directory. The build with enable-bat will work
- only with a full Bacula build (i.e. it will not work with a client-only
- build).
-
- Qt4 is available on OpenSUSE 10.2, CentOS 5, Fedora, and Debian. If it
- is not available on your system, you can download the {\bf depkgs-qt}
- package from the Bacula Source Forge download area and build it and
- the qwt package, both of which are needed to build bat. See the
- INSTALL file in that package for more details. In particular to use
- the Qt4 built by {\bf depkgs-qt} you {bf must} source the file
- {\bf qt4-paths}.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-qwt=\lt{}path\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-qwt}
- The qwt package is a graphics library for Qt. If it is included
- during the building of bat, you will get one extra graphical function.
- At the current time, we recommend not including this option when
- building bat. The path specified must be an absolute path and
- not relative.
-
- The qwt package is available for download from
- the qwt project on Source Forge. If you wish, you may build and
- install it on your system (by default in /usr/lib).
- If you have done so, you would specify:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- --with-qwt=/usr/lib/qwt-5.0.2
-\end{verbatim}
-
- Alternatively, you can download the Bacula depkgs-qt package (currently
- version 28Jul09) and build it, then assuming that you have put it
- into a directory named bacula, you would specify:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- --with-qwt=$HOME/bacula/depkgs-qt/qwt
-\end{verbatim}
-
- Some packages such as Debian do not adhere to the standard of
- naming the library libqwt.a or libqwt.so, and you will either need
- to manually add a soft link to the name they use or use the
- depkgs version, which handles the naming correctly.
-
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-batch-insert ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-batch-insert}
- This option enables batch inserts of the attribute records (default) in
- the catalog database, which is much faster (10 times or more) than
- without this option for large numbers of files. However, this option
- will automatically be disabled if your SQL libraries are not
- thread safe. If you find that batch mode is not enabled on your Bacula
- installation, then your database most likely does not support threads.
-
- SQLite2 is not thread safe. Batch insert cannot be enabled when using
- SQLite2
-
- On most systems, MySQL, PostgreSQL and SQLite3 are thread safe.
-
- To verify that your PostgreSQL is thread safe, you can try this
- (change the path to point to your particular installed libpq.a;
- these commands were issued on FreeBSD 6.2):
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-$ nm /usr/local/lib/libpq.a | grep PQputCopyData
-00001b08 T PQputCopyData
-$ nm /usr/local/lib/libpq.a | grep mutex
- U pthread_mutex_lock
- U pthread_mutex_unlock
- U pthread_mutex_init
- U pthread_mutex_lock
- U pthread_mutex_unlock
-\end{verbatim}
-
- The above example shows a libpq that contains the required function
- PQputCopyData and is thread enabled (i.e. the pthread\_mutex* entries).
- If you do not see PQputCopyData, your version of PostgreSQL is too old
- to allow batch insert. If you do not see the mutex entries, then thread
- support has not been enabled. Our tests indicate you usually need to
- change the configuration options and recompile/reinstall the PostgreSQL
- client software to get thread support.
-
- Bacula always links to the thread safe MySQL libraries.
-
- As a default, Bacula runs SQLite3 with {\bf PRAGMA synchronous=OFF}
- because it improves performance by more than 30 times. However, it
- increases the possibility of a corrupted database. If you want more
- security, please modify src/version.h appropriately (it should be
- obvious when you look at the file).
-
- Running with Batch Insert turned on is recommended because it can
- significantly improve attribute insertion times. However, it does
- put a significantly larger part of the work on your SQL engine, so
- you may need to pay more attention to tuning it. In particular,
- Batch Insert can require large temporary table space, and consequently,
- the default location (often /tmp) may run out of space causing errors.
- For MySQL, the location is set in my.conf with "tmpdir". You may also
- want to increase the memory available to your SQL engine to further
- improve performance during Batch Inserts.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-gnome ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-gnome}
- If you have GNOME installed on your computer including the
- GNOME development libraries, and you want to use the
- GNOME GUI Console interface to Bacula, you must specify this option.
- Doing so will build everything in the {\bf src/gnome2-console} directory.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-bwx-console ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-bwx-console}
- If you have wxWidgets installed on your computer and you want to use the
- wxWidgets GUI Console interface to Bacula, you must specify this option.
- Doing so will build everything in the {\bf src/wx-console} directory.
- This could also be useful to users who want a GUI Console and don't want
- to install GNOME, as wxWidgets can work with GTK+, Motif or even X11
- libraries.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-tray-monitor ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-tray-monitor}
- If you have GTK installed on your computer, you run a graphical
- environment or a window manager compatible with the FreeDesktop system
- tray standard (like KDE and GNOME) and you want to use a GUI to monitor
- Bacula daemons, you must specify this option. Doing so will build
- everything in the {\bf src/tray-monitor} directory. Note, due to
- restrictions on what can be linked with GPLed code, we were forced to
- remove the egg code that dealt with the tray icons and replace it by
- calls to the GTK+ API, and unfortunately, the tray icon API necessary
- was not implemented until GTK version 2.10 or later.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-static-tools]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-static-tools}
- This option causes the linker to link the Storage daemon utility tools
- ({\bf bls}, {\bf bextract}, and {\bf bscan}) statically. This permits
- using them without having the shared libraries loaded. If you have
- problems linking in the {\bf src/stored} directory, make sure you have
- not enabled this option, or explicitly disable static linking by adding
- {\bf \verb:--:disable-static-tools}.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-static-fd]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-static-fd}
- This option causes the make process to build a {\bf static-bacula-fd} in
- addition to the standard File daemon. This static version will include
- statically linked libraries and is required for the Bare Metal recovery.
- This option is largely superseded by using {\bf make static-bacula-fd}
- from with in the {\bf src/filed} directory. Also, the {\bf
- \verb:--:enable-client-only} option described below is useful for just
- building a client so that all the other parts of the program are not
- compiled.
-
- When linking a static binary, the linker needs the static versions
- of all the libraries that are used, so frequently users will
- experience linking errors when this option is used. The first
- thing to do is to make sure you have the static glibc library
- installed on your system. The second thing to do is the make sure
- you do not specify {\bf {-}{-}openssl} or {\bf {-}{-}with-python}
- on your ./configure statement as these options require additional
- libraries. You may be able to enable those options, but you will
- need to load additional static libraries.
-
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-static-sd]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-static-sd}
- This option causes the make process to build a {\bf static-bacula-sd} in
- addition to the standard Storage daemon. This static version will
- include statically linked libraries and could be useful during a Bare
- Metal recovery.
-
- When linking a static binary, the linker needs the static versions
- of all the libraries that are used, so frequently users will
- experience linking errors when this option is used. The first
- thing to do is to make sure you have the static glibc library
- installed on your system. The second thing to do is the make sure
- you do not specify {\bf {-}{-}openssl} or {\bf {-}{-}with-python}
- on your ./configure statement as these options require additional
- libraries. You may be able to enable those options, but you will
- need to load additional static libraries.
-
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-static-dir]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-static-dir}
- This option causes the make process to build a {\bf static-bacula-dir}
- in addition to the standard Director. This static version will include
- statically linked libraries and could be useful during a Bare Metal
- recovery.
-
- When linking a static binary, the linker needs the static versions
- of all the libraries that are used, so frequently users will
- experience linking errors when this option is used. The first
- thing to do is to make sure you have the static glibc library
- installed on your system. The second thing to do is the make sure
- you do not specify {\bf {-}{-}openssl} or {\bf {-}{-}with-python}
- on your ./configure statement as these options require additional
- libraries. You may be able to enable those options, but you will
- need to load additional static libraries.
-
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-static-cons]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-static-cons}
- This option causes the make process to build a {\bf static-console} and
- a {\bf static-gnome-console} in addition to the standard console. This
- static version will include statically linked libraries and could be
- useful during a Bare Metal recovery.
-
- When linking a static binary, the linker needs the static versions
- of all the libraries that are used, so frequently users will
- experience linking errors when this option is used. The first
- thing to do is to make sure you have the static glibc library
- installed on your system. The second thing to do is the make sure
- you do not specify {\bf {-}{-}openssl} or {\bf {-}{-}with-python}
- on your ./configure statement as these options require additional
- libraries. You may be able to enable those options, but you will
- need to load additional static libraries.
-
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-client-only]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-client-only}
- This option causes the make process to build only the File daemon and
- the libraries that it needs. None of the other daemons, storage tools,
- nor the console will be built. Likewise a {\bf make install} will then
- only install the File daemon. To cause all daemons to be built, you
- will need to do a configuration without this option. This option
- greatly facilitates building a Client on a client only machine.
-
- When linking a static binary, the linker needs the static versions
- of all the libraries that are used, so frequently users will
- experience linking errors when this option is used. The first
- thing to do is to make sure you have the static glibc library
- installed on your system. The second thing to do is the make sure
- you do not specify {\bf {-}{-}openssl} or {\bf {-}{-}with-python}
- on your ./configure statement as these options require additional
- libraries. You may be able to enable those options, but you will
- need to load additional static libraries.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-build-dird]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-build-dird}
- This option causes the make process to build the Director and the
- Director's tools. By default, this option is on, but you may turn
- it off by using {\bf {-}{-}disable-build-dird} to prevent the
- Director from being built.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-build-stored]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-build-stored}
- This option causes the make process to build the Storage daemon.
- By default, this option is on, but you may turn
- it off by using {\bf {-}{-}disable-build-stored} to prevent the
- Storage daemon from being built.
-
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-largefile]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-largefile}
- This option (default) causes Bacula to be built with 64 bit file address
- support if it is available on your system. This permits Bacula to read and
- write files greater than 2 GBytes in size. You may disable this feature and
- revert to 32 bit file addresses by using {\bf \verb:--:disable-largefile}.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}disable-nls]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}disable-nls}
- By default, Bacula uses the GNU Native Language Support (NLS) libraries. On
- some machines, these libraries may not be present or may not function
- correctly (especially on non-Linux implementations). In such cases, you
- may specify {\bf {-}{-}disable-nls} to disable use of those libraries.
- In such a case, Bacula will revert to using English.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}disable-ipv6 ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}disable-ipv6}
- By default, Bacula enables IPv6 protocol. On some systems, the files
- for IPv6 may exist, but the functionality could be turned off in the
- kernel. In that case, in order to correctly build Bacula, you will
- explicitly need to use this option so that Bacula does not attempt
- to reference OS function calls that do not exist.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-sqlite=\lt{}sqlite-path\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-sqlite}
- This enables use of the SQLite version 2.8.x database. The {\bf
- sqlite-path} is not normally specified as Bacula looks for the necessary
- components in a standard location ({\bf depkgs/sqlite}). See
- \ilink{Installing and Configuring SQLite}{SqlLiteChapter} chapter of
- this manual for more details. SQLite is not supported on Solaris.
-
- See the note below under the {-}{-}with-postgresql item.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-sqlite3=\lt{}sqlite3-path\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-sqlite3}
- This enables use of the SQLite version 3.x database. The {\bf
- sqlite3-path} is not normally specified as Bacula looks for the
- necessary components in a standard location ({\bf depkgs/sqlite3}). See
- \ilink{Installing and Configuring SQLite}{SqlLiteChapter} chapter of
- this manual for more details. SQLite3 is not supported on Solaris.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-mysql=\lt{}mysql-path\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-mysql}
- This enables building of the Catalog services for Bacula. It assumes
- that MySQL is running on your system, and expects it to be installed in
- the {\bf mysql-path} that you specify. Normally, if MySQL is installed
- in a standard system location, you can simply use {\bf {-}{-}with-mysql}
- with no path specification. If you do use this option, please proceed
- to installing MySQL in the \ilink{Installing and Configuring
- MySQL}{MySqlChapter} chapter before proceeding with the configuration.
-
- See the note below under the {-}{-}with-postgresql item.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-postgresql=\lt{}path\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-postgresql}
- This provides an explicit path to the PostgreSQL libraries if Bacula
- cannot find it by default. Normally to build with PostgreSQL, you would
- simply use {\bf {-}{-}with-postgresql}.
-
- Note, for Bacula to be configured properly, you must specify one
- of the four database options supported. That is:
- {-}{-}with-sqlite, {-}{-}with-sqlite3, {-}{-}with-mysql, or
- {-}{-}with-postgresql, otherwise the ./configure will fail.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-openssl=\lt{}path\gt{}]
- This configuration option is necessary if you want to enable TLS (ssl),
- which encrypts the communications within
- Bacula or if you want to use File Daemon PKI data encryption.
- Normally, the {\bf path} specification is not necessary since
- the configuration searches for the OpenSSL libraries in standard system
- locations. Enabling OpenSSL in Bacula permits secure communications
- between the daemons and/or data encryption in the File daemon.
- For more information on using TLS, please see the
- \ilink{Bacula TLS -- Communications Encryption}{CommEncryption} chapter
- of this manual.
- For more information on using PKI data encryption, please see the
- \ilink{Bacula PKI -- Data Encryption}{DataEncryption}
- chapter of this manual.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-python=\lt{}path\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-python}
- This option enables Bacula support for Python. If no path is supplied,
- configure will search the standard library locations for Python 2.2,
- 2.3, 2.4, or 2.5. If it cannot find the library, you will need to
- supply a path to your Python library directory. Please see the
- \ilink{Python chapter}{PythonChapter} for the details of using Python
- scripting.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-libintl-prefix=\lt{}DIR\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-libintl-prefix}
- This option may be used to tell Bacula to search DIR/include and
- DIR/lib for the libintl headers and libraries needed for Native
- Language Support (NLS).
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-conio]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-conio}
- Tells Bacula to enable building the small, light weight readline
- replacement routine. It is generally much easier to configure than
- readline, although, like readline, it needs either the termcap or
- ncurses library.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-readline=\lt{}readline-path\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-readline}
- Tells Bacula where {\bf readline} is installed. Normally, Bacula will
- find readline if it is in a standard library. If it is not found and no
- {-}{-}with-readline is specified, readline will be disabled. This
- option affects the Bacula build. Readline provides the Console program
- with a command line history and editing capability and is no longer
- supported, so you are on your own if you have problems.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}enable-readline]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}enable-readline}
- Tells Bacula to enable readline support. It is normally disabled due to the
- large number of configuration problems and the fact that the package seems to
- change in incompatible ways from version to version.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-tcp-wrappers=\lt{}path\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-tcp-wrappers}
- \index[general]{TCP Wrappers}
- \index[general]{Wrappers!TCP}
- \index[general]{libwrappers}
- This specifies that you want TCP wrappers (man hosts\_access(5)) compiled in.
- The path is optional since Bacula will normally find the libraries in the
- standard locations. This option affects the Bacula build. In specifying your
- restrictions in the {\bf /etc/hosts.allow} or {\bf /etc/hosts.deny} files, do
- not use the {\bf twist} option (hosts\_options(5)) or the Bacula process will
- be terminated. Note, when setting up your {\bf /etc/hosts.allow}
- or {\bf /etc/hosts.deny}, you must identify the Bacula daemon in
- question with the name you give it in your conf file rather than the
- name of the executable.
-
- For more information on configuring and testing TCP wrappers, please see the
- \ilink{Configuring and Testing TCP Wrappers}{wrappers} section
- in the Security Chapter.
-
- On SuSE, the libwrappers libraries needed to link Bacula are
- contained in the tcpd-devel package. On Red Hat, the package is named
- tcp\_wrappers.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-archivedir=\lt{}path\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-archivedir}
- The directory used for disk-based backups. Default value is /tmp.
- This parameter sets the default values in the bacula-dir.conf and bacula-sd.conf
- configuration files. For example, it sets the Where directive for the
- default restore job and the Archive Device directive for the FileStorage
- device.
-
- This option is designed primarily for use in regression testing.
- Most users can safely ignore this option.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-working-dir=\lt{}working-directory-path\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-working-dir}
- This option is mandatory and specifies a directory into which Bacula may
- safely place files that will remain between Bacula executions. For example,
- if the internal database is used, Bacula will keep those files in this
- directory. This option is only used to modify the daemon configuration
- files. You may also accomplish the same thing by directly editing them later.
- The working directory is not automatically created by the install process, so
- you must ensure that it exists before using Bacula for the first time.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-base-port=\lt{}port=number\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-base-port}
- In order to run, Bacula needs three TCP/IP ports (one for the Bacula
- Console, one for the Storage daemon, and one for the File daemon). The {\bf
- \verb:--:with-baseport} option will automatically assign three ports beginning at
- the base port address specified. You may also change the port number in the
- resulting configuration files. However, you need to take care that the
- numbers correspond correctly in each of the three daemon configuration
- files. The default base port is 9101, which assigns ports 9101 through 9103.
- These ports (9101, 9102, and 9103) have been officially assigned to Bacula by
- IANA. This option is only used to modify the daemon configuration files. You
- may also accomplish the same thing by directly editing them later.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-dump-email=\lt{}email-address\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-dump-email}
- This option specifies the email address where any core dumps should be set.
- This option is normally only used by developers.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-pid-dir=\lt{}PATH\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-pid-dir}
- This specifies where Bacula should place the process id file during
- execution. The default is: {\bf /var/run}. This directory is not created by
- the install process, so you must ensure that it exists before using Bacula
- the first time.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-subsys-dir=\lt{}PATH\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-subsys-dir}
- This specifies where Bacula should place the subsystem lock file during
- execution. The default is {\bf /var/run/subsys}. Please make sure that you do
- not specify the same directory for this directory and for the {\bf sbindir}
- directory. This directory is used only within the autostart scripts. The
- subsys directory is not created by the Bacula install, so you must be sure to
- create it before using Bacula.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-dir-password=\lt{}Password\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-dir-password}
- This option allows you to specify the password used to access the Director
- (normally from the Console program). If it is not specified, configure will
- automatically create a random password.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-fd-password=\lt{}Password\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-fd-password}
- This option allows you to specify the password used to access the File daemon
- (normally called from the Director). If it is not specified, configure will
- automatically create a random password.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-sd-password=\lt{}Password\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-sd-password}
- This option allows you to specify the password used to access the Storage daemon
- (normally called from the Director). If it is not specified, configure will
- automatically create a random password.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-dir-user=\lt{}User\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-dir-user}
- This option allows you to specify the Userid used to run the Director. The
- Director must be started as root, but doesn't need to run as root, and
- after doing preliminary initializations, it can "drop" to the UserId
- specified on this option.
- If you specify this option, you must
- create the User prior to running {\bf make install}, because the
- working directory owner will be set to {\bf User}.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-dir-group=\lt{}Group\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-dir-group}
- This option allows you to specify the GroupId used to run the Director. The
- Director must be started as root, but doesn't need to run as root, and after
- doing preliminary initializations, it can "drop" to the GroupId specified
- on this option.
- If you specify this option, you must
- create the Group prior to running {\bf make install}, because the
- working directory group will be set to {\bf Group}.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-sd-user=\lt{}User\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-sd-user}
- This option allows you to specify the Userid used to run the Storage daemon.
- The Storage daemon must be started as root, but doesn't need to run as root,
- and after doing preliminary initializations, it can "drop" to the UserId
- specified on this option. If you use this option, you will need to take care
- that the Storage daemon has access to all the devices (tape drives, ...) that
- it needs.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-sd-group=\lt{}Group\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-sd-group}
- This option allows you to specify the GroupId used to run the Storage daemon.
- The Storage daemon must be started as root, but doesn't need to run as root,
- and after doing preliminary initializations, it can "drop" to the GroupId
- specified on this option.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-fd-user=\lt{}User\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-fd-user}
- This option allows you to specify the Userid used to run the File daemon. The
- File daemon must be started as root, and in most cases, it needs to run as
- root, so this option is used only in very special cases, after doing
- preliminary initializations, it can "drop" to the UserId specified on this
- option.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-fd-group=\lt{}Group\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-fd-group}
- This option allows you to specify the GroupId used to run the File daemon.
- The File daemon must be started as root, and in most cases, it must be run as
- root, however, after doing preliminary initializations, it can "drop" to
- the GroupId specified on this option.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-mon-dir-password=\lt{}Password\gt{}]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-mon-dir-password}
- This option allows you to specify the password used to access the Directory
- from the monitor. If it is not specified, configure will
- automatically create a random password.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-mon-fd-password=\lt{}Password\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-mon-fd-password}
- This option allows you to specify the password used to access the File daemon
- from the Monitor. If it is not specified, configure will
- automatically create a random password.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-mon-sd-password=\lt{}Password\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-mon-sd-password}
- This option allows you to specify the password used to access the
- Storage daemon from the Monitor. If it is not specified, configure will
- automatically create a random password.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-db-name=\lt{}database-name\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-db-name}
- This option allows you to specify the database name to be used in
- the conf files. The default is bacula.
-
-\item [ {-}{-}with-db-user=\lt{}database-user\gt{} ]
- \index[general]{{-}{-}with-db-user}
- This option allows you to specify the database user name to be used in
- the conf files. The default is bacula.
-
-\end{description}
-
-Note, many other options are presented when you do a {\bf ./configure
-\verb:--:help}, but they are not implemented.
-
-\section{Recommended Options for Most Systems}
-\index[general]{Systems!Recommended Options for Most}
-\index[general]{Recommended Options for Most Systems}
-
-For most systems, we recommend starting with the following options:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-./configure \
- --enable-smartalloc \
- --sbindir=$HOME/bacula/bin \
- --sysconfdir=$HOME/bacula/bin \
- --with-pid-dir=$HOME/bacula/bin/working \
- --with-subsys-dir=$HOME/bacula/bin/working \
- --with-mysql=$HOME/mysql \
- --with-working-dir=$HOME/bacula/working
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If you want to install Bacula in an installation directory rather than run it
-out of the build directory (as developers will do most of the time), you
-should also include the \verb:--:sbindir and \verb:--:sysconfdir options with appropriate
-paths. Neither are necessary if you do not use "make install" as is the case
-for most development work. The install process will create the sbindir and
-sysconfdir if they do not exist, but it will not automatically create the
-pid-dir, subsys-dir, or working-dir, so you must ensure that they exist before
-running Bacula for the first time.
-
-\section{Red Hat}
-\index[general]{Red Hat}
-
-Using SQLite:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-
-CFLAGS="-g -Wall" ./configure \
- --sbindir=$HOME/bacula/bin \
- --sysconfdir=$HOME/bacula/bin \
- --enable-smartalloc \
- --with-sqlite=$HOME/bacula/depkgs/sqlite \
- --with-working-dir=$HOME/bacula/working \
- --with-pid-dir=$HOME/bacula/bin/working \
- --with-subsys-dir=$HOME/bacula/bin/working \
- --enable-bat \
- --with-qwt=$HOME/bacula/depkgs/qwt \
- --enable-conio
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-or
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-
-CFLAGS="-g -Wall" ./configure \
- --sbindir=$HOME/bacula/bin \
- --sysconfdir=$HOME/bacula/bin \
- --enable-smartalloc \
- --with-mysql=$HOME/mysql \
- --with-working-dir=$HOME/bacula/working
- --with-pid-dir=$HOME/bacula/bin/working \
- --with-subsys-dir=$HOME/bacula/bin/working
- --enable-gnome \
- --enable-conio
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-or finally, a completely traditional Red Hat Linux install:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-CFLAGS="-g -Wall" ./configure \
- --sbindir=/usr/sbin \
- --sysconfdir=/etc/bacula \
- --with-scriptdir=/etc/bacula \
- --enable-smartalloc \
- --enable-bat \
- --with-qwt=$HOME/bacula/depkgs/qwt \
- --with-mysql \
- --with-working-dir=/var/bacula \
- --with-pid-dir=/var/run \
- --enable-conio
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Note, Bacula assumes that /var/bacula, /var/run, and /var/lock/subsys exist so
-it will not automatically create them during the install process.
-
-\section{Solaris}
-\index[general]{Solaris}
-
-To build Bacula from source, you will need the following installed on your
-system (they are not by default): libiconv, gcc 3.3.2, stdc++, libgcc (for
-stdc++ and gcc\_s libraries), make 3.8 or later.
-
-You will probably also need to: Add /usr/local/bin to PATH and Add
-/usr/ccs/bin to PATH for ar.
-
-It is possible to build Bacula on Solaris with the Solaris compiler, but
-we recommend using GNU C++ if possible.
-
-A typical configuration command might look like:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#!/bin/sh
-CFLAGS="-g" ./configure \
- --sbindir=$HOME/bacula/bin \
- --sysconfdir=$HOME/bacula/bin \
- --with-mysql=$HOME/mysql \
- --enable-smartalloc \
- --with-pid-dir=$HOME/bacula/bin/working \
- --with-subsys-dir=$HOME/bacula/bin/working \
- --with-working-dir=$HOME/bacula/working
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-As mentioned above, the install process will create the sbindir and sysconfdir
-if they do not exist, but it will not automatically create the pid-dir,
-subsys-dir, or working-dir, so you must ensure that they exist before running
-Bacula for the first time.
-
-Note, you may need to install the following packages to build Bacula
-from source:
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-SUNWbinutils,
-SUNWarc,
-SUNWhea,
-SUNWGcc,
-SUNWGnutls
-SUNWGnutls-devel
-SUNWGmake
-SUNWgccruntime
-SUNWlibgcrypt
-SUNWzlib
-SUNWzlibs
-SUNWbinutilsS
-SUNWGmakeS
-SUNWlibm
-
-export
-PATH=/usr/bin::/usr/ccs/bin:/etc:/usr/openwin/bin:/usr/local/bin:/usr/sfw/bin:/opt/sfw/bin:/usr/ucb:/usr/sbin
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If you have installed special software not normally in the Solaris
-libraries, such as OpenSSL, or the packages shown above, then you may need
-to add {\bf /usr/sfw/lib} to the library search path. Probably the
-simplest way to do so is to run:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-setenv LDFLAGS "-L/usr/sfw/lib -R/usr/sfw/lib"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Prior to running the ./configure command.
-
-Alternatively, you can set the LD\_LIBARY\_PATH and/or the LD\_RUN\_PATH
-environment variables appropriately.
-
-It is also possible to use the {\bf crle} program to set the library
-search path. However, this should be used with caution.
-
-\section{FreeBSD}
-\index[general]{FreeBSD}
-
-Please see:
-\elink{The FreeBSD Diary}{http://www.freebsddiary.org/bacula.php} for a
-detailed description on how to make Bacula work on your system. In addition,
-users of FreeBSD prior to 4.9-STABLE dated Mon Dec 29 15:18:01 2003 UTC who
-plan to use tape devices, please see the
-\ilink{Tape Testing Chapter}{FreeBSDTapes} of this manual for
-{\bf important} information on how to configure your tape drive for
-compatibility with Bacula.
-
-If you are using Bacula with MySQL, you should take care to compile MySQL with
-FreeBSD native threads rather than LinuxThreads, since Bacula is normally built
-with FreeBSD native threads rather than LinuxTreads. Mixing the two will
-probably not work.
-
-\section{Win32}
-\index[general]{Win32}
-
-To install the binary Win32 version of the File daemon please see the
-\ilink{Win32 Installation Chapter}{Win32Chapter} in this document.
-
-\section{One File Configure Script}
-\index[general]{Script!One File Configure}
-\index[general]{One Files Configure Script}
-
-The following script could be used if you want to put everything
-in a single file:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#!/bin/sh
-CFLAGS="-g -Wall" \
- ./configure \
- --sbindir=$HOME/bacula/bin \
- --sysconfdir=$HOME/bacula/bin \
- --mandir=$HOME/bacula/bin \
- --enable-smartalloc \
- --enable-gnome \
- --enable-bat \
- --with-qwt=$HOME/bacula/depkgs/qwt \
- --enable-bwx-console \
- --enable-tray-monitor \
- --with-pid-dir=$HOME/bacula/bin/working \
- --with-subsys-dir=$HOME/bacula/bin/working \
- --with-mysql \
- --with-working-dir=$HOME/bacula/bin/working \
- --with-dump-email=$USER@your-site.com \
- --with-job-email=$USER@your-site.com \
- --with-smtp-host=mail.your-site.com
-exit 0
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-You may also want to put the following entries in your {\bf /etc/services}
-file as it will make viewing the connections made by Bacula easier to
-recognize (i.e. netstat -a):
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-bacula-dir 9101/tcp
-bacula-fd 9102/tcp
-bacula-sd 9103/tcp
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{Installing Bacula}
-\index[general]{Bacula!Installing}
-\index[general]{Installing Bacula}
-
-Before setting up your configuration files, you will want to install Bacula in
-its final location. Simply enter:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-make install
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If you have previously installed Bacula, the old binaries will be overwritten,
-but the old configuration files will remain unchanged, and the "new"
-configuration files will be appended with a {\bf .new}. Generally if you have
-previously installed and run Bacula you will want to discard or ignore the
-configuration files with the appended {\bf .new}.
-
-\section{Building a File Daemon or Client}
-\index[general]{Client!Building a File Daemon or}
-\index[general]{Building a File Daemon or Client}
-
-If you run the Director and the Storage daemon on one machine and you wish to
-back up another machine, you must have a copy of the File daemon for that
-machine. If the machine and the Operating System are identical, you can simply
-copy the Bacula File daemon binary file {\bf bacula-fd} as well as its
-configuration file {\bf bacula-fd.conf} then modify the name and password in
-the conf file to be unique. Be sure to make corresponding additions to the
-Director's configuration file ({\bf bacula-dir.conf}).
-
-If the architecture or the OS level are different, you will need to build a
-File daemon on the Client machine. To do so, you can use the same {\bf
-./configure} command as you did for your main program, starting either from a
-fresh copy of the source tree, or using {\bf make\ distclean} before the {\bf
-./configure}.
-
-Since the File daemon does not access the Catalog database, you can remove
-the {\bf \verb:--:with-mysql} or {\bf \verb:--:with-sqlite} options, then
-add {\bf \verb:--:enable-client-only}. This will compile only the
-necessary libraries and the client programs and thus avoids the necessity
-of installing one or another of those database programs to build the File
-daemon. With the above option, you simply enter {\bf make} and just the
-client will be built.
-
-\label{autostart}
-\section{Auto Starting the Daemons}
-\index[general]{Daemons!Auto Starting the}
-\index[general]{Auto Starting the Daemons}
-
-If you wish the daemons to be automatically started and stopped when your
-system is booted (a good idea), one more step is necessary. First, the
-./configure process must recognize your system -- that is it must be a
-supported platform and not {\bf unknown}, then you must install the platform
-dependent files by doing:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-(become root)
-make install-autostart
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Please note, that the auto-start feature is implemented only on systems
-that we officially support (currently, FreeBSD, Red Hat/Fedora Linux, and
-Solaris), and has only been fully tested on Fedora Linux.
-
-The {\bf make install-autostart} will cause the appropriate startup scripts
-to be installed with the necessary symbolic links. On Red Hat/Fedora Linux
-systems, these scripts reside in {\bf /etc/rc.d/init.d/bacula-dir} {\bf
-/etc/rc.d/init.d/bacula-fd}, and {\bf /etc/rc.d/init.d/bacula-sd}. However
-the exact location depends on what operating system you are using.
-
-If you only wish to install the File daemon, you may do so with:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-make install-autostart-fd
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{Other Make Notes}
-\index[general]{Notes!Other Make}
-\index[general]{Other Make Notes}
-
-To simply build a new executable in any directory, enter:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-make
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-To clean out all the objects and binaries (including the files named 1, 2, or
-3, which are development temporary files), enter:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-make clean
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-To really clean out everything for distribution, enter:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-make distclean
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-note, this cleans out the Makefiles and is normally done from the top level
-directory to prepare for distribution of the source. To recover from this
-state, you must redo the {\bf ./configure} in the top level directory, since
-all the Makefiles will be deleted.
-
-To add a new file in a subdirectory, edit the Makefile.in in that directory,
-then simply do a {\bf make}. In most cases, the make will rebuild the Makefile
-from the new Makefile.in. In some case, you may need to issue the {\bf make} a
-second time. In extreme cases, cd to the top level directory and enter: {\bf
-make Makefiles}.
-
-To add dependencies:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-make depend
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The {\bf make depend} appends the header file dependencies for each of the
-object files to Makefile and Makefile.in. This command should be done in each
-directory where you change the dependencies. Normally, it only needs to be run
-when you add or delete source or header files. {\bf make depend} is normally
-automatically invoked during the configuration process.
-
-To install:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-make install
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-This not normally done if you are developing Bacula, but is used if you are
-going to run it to backup your system.
-
-After doing a {\bf make install} the following files will be installed on your
-system (more or less). The exact files and location (directory) for each file
-depends on your {\bf ./configure} command (e.g. bgnome-console and
-bgnome-console.conf are not installed if you do not configure GNOME. Also, if
-you are using SQLite instead of MySQL, some of the files will be different).
-
-NOTE: it is quite probable that this list is out of date. But it is a
-starting point.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-bacula
-bacula-dir
-bacula-dir.conf
-bacula-fd
-bacula-fd.conf
-bacula-sd
-bacula-sd.conf
-bacula-tray-monitor
-tray-monitor.conf
-bextract
-bls
-bscan
-btape
-btraceback
-btraceback.gdb
-bconsole
-bconsole.conf
-create_mysql_database
-dbcheck
-delete_catalog_backup
-drop_bacula_tables
-drop_mysql_tables
-bgnome-console
-bgnome-console.conf
-make_bacula_tables
-make_catalog_backup
-make_mysql_tables
-mtx-changer
-query.sql
-bsmtp
-startmysql
-stopmysql
-bwx-console
-bwx-console.conf
-9 man pages
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\label{monitor}
-
-\section{Installing Tray Monitor}
-\index[general]{Monitor!Installing Tray}
-\index[general]{Installing Tray Monitor}
-
-The Tray Monitor is already installed if you used the {\bf
-\verb:--:enable-tray-monitor} configure option and ran {\bf make install}.
-
-As you don't run your graphical environment as root (if you do, you should
-change that bad habit), don't forget to allow your user to read {\bf
-tray-monitor.conf}, and to execute {\bf bacula-tray-monitor} (this is not a
-security issue).
-
-Then log into your graphical environment (KDE, GNOME or something else), run
-{\bf bacula-tray-monitor} as your user, and see if a cassette icon appears
-somewhere on the screen, usually on the task bar.
-If it doesn't, follow the instructions below related to your environment or
-window manager.
-
-\subsection{GNOME}
-\index[general]{GNOME}
-
-System tray, or notification area if you use the GNOME terminology, has been
-supported in GNOME since version 2.2. To activate it, right-click on one of
-your panels, open the menu {\bf Add to this Panel}, then {\bf Utility} and
-finally click on {\bf Notification Area}.
-
-\subsection{KDE}
-\index[general]{KDE}
-
-System tray has been supported in KDE since version 3.1. To activate it,
-right-click on one of your panels, open the menu {\bf Add}, then {\bf Applet}
-and finally click on {\bf System Tray}.
-
-\subsection{Other window managers}
-\index[general]{Managers!Other window}
-\index[general]{Other window managers}
-
-Read the documentation to know if the Freedesktop system tray standard is
-supported by your window manager, and if applicable, how to activate it.
-
-\section{Modifying the Bacula Configuration Files}
-\index[general]{Modifying the Bacula Configuration Files}
-\index[general]{Files!Modifying the Bacula Configuration}
-
-See the chapter
-\ilink{Configuring Bacula}{ConfigureChapter} in this manual for
-instructions on how to set Bacula configuration files.
+++ /dev/null
-# This file serves as a place to put initialization code and constants to
-# affect the behavior of latex2html for generating the bacula manuals.
-
-# $LINKPOINT specifies what filename to use to link to when creating
-# index.html. Not that this is a hard link.
-$LINKPOINT='"$OVERALL_TITLE"';
-
-
-# The following must be the last line of this file.
-1;
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Messages Resource}
-\label{MessagesChapter}
-\index[general]{Resource!Messages}
-\index[general]{Messages Resource}
-
-The Messages resource defines how messages are to be handled and destinations
-to which they should be sent.
-
-Even though each daemon has a full message handler, within the File daemon and
-the Storage daemon, you will normally choose to send all the appropriate
-messages back to the Director. This permits all the messages associated with
-a single Job to be combined in the Director and sent as a single email message
-to the user, or logged together in a single file.
-
-Each message that Bacula generates (i.e. that each daemon generates) has an
-associated type such as INFO, WARNING, ERROR, FATAL, etc. Using the message
-resource, you can specify which message types you wish to see and where they
-should be sent. In addition, a message may be sent to multiple destinations.
-For example, you may want all error messages both logged as well as sent to
-you in an email. By defining multiple messages resources, you can have
-different message handling for each type of Job (e.g. Full backups versus
-Incremental backups).
-
-In general, messages are attached to a Job and are included in the Job report.
-There are some rare cases, where this is not possible, e.g. when no job is
-running, or if a communications error occurs between a daemon and the
-director. In those cases, the message may remain in the system, and should be
-flushed at the end of the next Job. However, since such messages are not
-attached to a Job, any that are mailed will be sent to {\bf
-/usr/lib/sendmail}. On some systems, such as FreeBSD, if your sendmail is in a
-different place, you may want to link it to the the above location.
-
-The records contained in a Messages resource consist of a {\bf destination}
-specification followed by a list of {\bf message-types} in the format:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [destination = message-type1, message-type2, message-type3, ... ]
-\index[dir]{destination}
-\end{description}
-
-or for those destinations that need and address specification (e.g. email):
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [destination = address = message-type1, message-type2,
- message-type3, ... ]
-\index[dir]{destination}
-
- Where {\bf destination} is one of a predefined set of keywords that define
- where the message is to be sent ({\bf stdout}, {\bf file}, ...), {\bf
- message-type} is one of a predefined set of keywords that define the type of
- message generated by {\bf Bacula} ({\bf ERROR}, {\bf WARNING}, {\bf FATAL},
- ...), and {\bf address} varies according to the {\bf destination} keyword, but
- is typically an email address or a filename.
-\end{description}
-
-The following are the list of the possible record definitions that can be used
-in a message resource.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Messages]
-\index[dir]{Messages}
- Start of the Messages records.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{Name}
- The name of the Messages resource. The name you specify here will be used to
- tie this Messages resource to a Job and/or to the daemon.
-
-\label{mailcommand}
-\item [MailCommand = \lt{}command\gt{}]
-\index[dir]{MailCommand}
- In the absence of this resource, Bacula will send all mail using the
- following command:
-
-{\bf mail -s "Bacula Message" \lt{}recipients\gt{}}
-
-In many cases, depending on your machine, this command may not work.
-However, by using the {\bf MailCommand}, you can specify exactly how to
-send the mail. During the processing of the {\bf command} part, normally
-specified as a quoted string, the following substitutions will be used:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item \%\% = \%
-\item \%c = Client's name
-\item \%d = Director's name
-\item \%e = Job Exit code (OK, Error, ...)
-\item \%i = Job Id
-\item \%j = Unique Job name
-\item \%l = Job level
-\item \%n = Job name
-\item \%r = Recipients
-\item \%t = Job type (e.g. Backup, ...)
-\end{itemize}
-
-Please note: any {\bf MailCommand} directive must be specified
-in the {\bf Messages} resource {\bf before} the desired
-{\bf Mail}, {\bf MailOnSuccess}, or {\bf MailOnError}
-directive. In fact, each of those directives may be preceded by
-a different {\bf MailCommand}.
-
-The following is the command I (Kern) use. Note, the whole command should
-appear on a single line in the configuration file rather than split as is
-done here for presentation:
-
-{\bf mailcommand = "/home/kern/bacula/bin/bsmtp -h mail.example.com -f
-\textbackslash{}"\textbackslash{}(Bacula\textbackslash{})
-\%r\textbackslash{}" -s \textbackslash{}"Bacula: \%t \%e of \%c
-\%l\textbackslash{}" \%r"}
-
-The {\bf bsmtp} program is provided as part of {\bf Bacula}. For
-additional details, please see the
-\ilink{ bsmtp -- Customizing Your Email Messages}{bsmtp} section of
-the Bacula Utility Programs chapter of this manual. Please test any {\bf
-mailcommand} that you use to ensure that your bsmtp gateway accepts the
-addressing form that you use. Certain programs such as Exim can be very
-selective as to what forms are permitted particularly in the from part.
-
-\item [OperatorCommand = \lt{}command\gt{}]
-\index[fd]{OperatorCommand}
- This resource specification is similar to the {\bf MailCommand} except that
- it is used for Operator messages. The substitutions performed for the {\bf
- MailCommand} are also done for this command. Normally, you will set this
- command to the same value as specified for the {\bf MailCommand}.
- The {\bf OperatorCommand} directive must appear in the {\bf Messages}
- resource before the {\bf Operator} directive.
-
-\item [\lt{}destination\gt{} = \lt{}message-type1\gt{},
- \lt{}message-type2\gt{}, ...]
- \index[fd]{\lt{}destination\gt{}}
-
-Where {\bf destination} may be one of the following:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [stdout]
- \index[fd]{stdout}
- Send the message to standard output.
-
-\item [stderr]
- \index[fd]{stderr}
- Send the message to standard error.
-
-\item [console]
- \index[console]{console}
- Send the message to the console (Bacula Console). These messages are held
-until the console program connects to the Director.
-\end{description}
-
-\item {\bf \lt{}destination\gt{} = \lt{}address\gt{} =
- \lt{}message-type1\gt{}, \lt{}message-type2\gt{}, ...}
- \index[console]{\lt{}destination\gt{}}
-
-Where {\bf address} depends on the {\bf destination}.
-
-The {\bf destination} may be one of the following:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [director]
- \index[dir]{director}
- \index[general]{director}
- Send the message to the Director whose name is given in the {\bf address}
- field. Note, in the current implementation, the Director Name is ignored, and
- the message is sent to the Director that started the Job.
-
-\item [file]
-\index[dir]{file}
-\index[general]{file}
- Send the message to the filename given in the {\bf address} field. If the
- file already exists, it will be overwritten.
-
-\item [append]
-\index[dir]{append}
-\index[general]{append}
- Append the message to the filename given in the {\bf address} field. If the
- file already exists, it will be appended to. If the file does not exist, it
- will be created.
-
-\item [syslog]
-\index[general]{syslog}
- Send the message to the system log (syslog) using the facility specified in
- the {\bf address} field. Note, for the moment, the {\bf address} field is
- ignored and the message is always sent to the LOG\_DAEMON facility with
- level LOG\_ERR. See {\bf man 3 syslog} for more details. Example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- syslog = all, !skipped
-\end{verbatim}
-
- Although the {\bf syslog} destination is not used in the default Bacula
- config files, in certain cases where Bacula encounters errors in trying
- to deliver a message, as a last resort, it will send it to the system
- {\bf syslog} to prevent loss of the message, so you might occassionally
- check the {\bf syslog} for Bacula output (normally {\bf
- /var/log/syslog}).
-
-\item [mail]
- \index[general]{mail}
- Send the message to the email addresses that are given as a comma
- separated list in the {\bf address} field. Mail messages are grouped
- together during a job and then sent as a single email message when the
- job terminates. The advantage of this destination is that you are
- notified about every Job that runs. However, if you backup five or ten
- machines every night, the volume of email messages can be important.
- Some users use filter programs such as {\bf procmail} to automatically
- file this email based on the Job termination code (see {\bf
- mailcommand}).
-
-\item [mail on error]
- \index[general]{mail on error}
- Send the message to the email addresses that are given as a comma
- separated list in the {\bf address} field if the Job terminates with an
- error condition. MailOnError messages are grouped together during a job
- and then sent as a single email message when the job terminates. This
- destination differs from the {\bf mail} destination in that if the Job
- terminates normally, the message is totally discarded (for this
- destination). If the Job terminates in error, it is emailed. By using
- other destinations such as {\bf append} you can ensure that even if the
- Job terminates normally, the output information is saved.
-
-\item [mail on success]
- \index[general]{mail on success}
- Send the message to the email addresses that are given as a comma
- separated list in the {\bf address} field if the Job terminates
- normally (no error condition). MailOnSuccess messages are grouped
- together during a job and then sent as a single email message when the
- job terminates. This destination differs from the {\bf mail}
- destination in that if the Job terminates abnormally, the message is
- totally discarded (for this destination). If the Job terminates
- normally, it is emailed.
-
-\item [operator]
- \index[general]{operator}
- Send the message to the email addresses that are specified as a comma
- separated list in the {\bf address} field. This is similar to {\bf
- mail} above, except that each message is sent as received. Thus there
- is one email per message. This is most useful for {\bf mount} messages
- (see below).
-
-\item [console]
- \index[general]{console}
- Send the message to the Bacula console.
-
-\item [stdout]
- \index[general]{stdout}
- Send the message to the standard output (normally not used).
-
-\item [stderr]
- \index[general]{stderr}
- Send the message to the standard error output (normally not used).
-
-\item [catalog]
- \index[general]{catalog}
- Send the message to the Catalog database. The message will be
- written to the table named {\bf Log} and a timestamp field will
- also be added. This permits Job Reports and other messages to
- be recorded in the Catalog so that they can be accessed by
- reporting software. Bacula will prune the Log records associated
- with a Job when the Job records are pruned. Otherwise, Bacula
- never uses these records internally, so this destination is only
- used for special purpose programs (e.g. {\bf bweb}).
-
-\end{description}
-
- For any destination, the {\bf message-type} field is a comma separated
- list of the following types or classes of messages:
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [info]
- \index[general]{info}
- General information messages.
-
-\item [warning]
- \index[general]{warning}
- Warning messages. Generally this is some unusual condition but not expected
- to be serious.
-
-\item [error]
- \index[general]{error}
- Non-fatal error messages. The job continues running. Any error message should
- be investigated as it means that something went wrong.
-
-\item [fatal]
- \index[general]{fatal}
- Fatal error messages. Fatal errors cause the job to terminate.
-
-\item [terminate]
- \index[general]{terminate}
- Message generated when the daemon shuts down.
-
-\item [notsaved]
- \index[fd]{notsaved}
- \index[general]{notsaved}
- Files not saved because of some error. Usually because the file cannot be
- accessed (i.e. it does not exist or is not mounted).
-
-\item [skipped]
- \index[fd]{skipped}
- \index[general]{skipped}
- Files that were skipped because of a user supplied option such as an
- incremental backup or a file that matches an exclusion pattern. This is
- not considered an error condition such as the files listed for the {\bf
- notsaved} type because the configuration file explicitly requests these
- types of files to be skipped. For example, any unchanged file during an
- incremental backup, or any subdirectory if the no recursion option is
- specified.
-
-\item [mount]
- \index[dir]{mount}
- \index[general]{mount}
- Volume mount or intervention requests from the Storage daemon. These
- requests require a specific operator intervention for the job to
- continue.
-
-\item [restored]
- \index[fd]{restored}
- \index[general]{restored}
- The {\bf ls} style listing generated for each file restored is sent to
- this message class.
-
-\item [all]
- \index[general]{all}
- All message types.
-
-\item [security]
- \index[general]{security}
- Security info/warning messages principally from unauthorized
- connection attempts.
-
-\item [alert]
- \index[general]{alert}
- Alert messages. These are messages generated by tape alerts.
-
-\item [volmgmt]
- \index[general]{volmgmt}
- Volume management messages. Currently there are no volume mangement
- messages generated.
-\end{description}
-
-\end{description}
-
-The following is an example of a valid Messages resource definition, where
-all messages except files explicitly skipped or daemon termination messages
-are sent by email to enforcement@sec.com. In addition all mount messages
-are sent to the operator (i.e. emailed to enforcement@sec.com). Finally
-all messages other than explicitly skipped files and files saved are sent
-to the console:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Messages {
- Name = Standard
- mail = enforcement@sec.com = all, !skipped, !terminate
- operator = enforcement@sec.com = mount
- console = all, !skipped, !saved
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-With the exception of the email address (changed to avoid junk mail from
-robot's), an example Director's Messages resource is as follows. Note, the {\bf
-mailcommand} and {\bf operatorcommand} are on a single line -- they had to be
-split for this manual:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Messages {
- Name = Standard
- mailcommand = "bacula/bin/bsmtp -h mail.example.com \
- -f \"\(Bacula\) %r\" -s \"Bacula: %t %e of %c %l\" %r"
- operatorcommand = "bacula/bin/bsmtp -h mail.example.com \
- -f \"\(Bacula\) %r\" -s \"Bacula: Intervention needed \
- for %j\" %r"
- MailOnError = security@example.com = all, !skipped, \
- !terminate
- append = "bacula/bin/log" = all, !skipped, !terminate
- operator = security@example.com = mount
- console = all, !skipped, !saved
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Monitor Configuration}
-\label{_MonitorChapter}
-\index[general]{Monitor Configuration }
-\index[general]{Configuration!Monitor }
-
-The Monitor configuration file is a stripped down version of the Director
-configuration file, mixed with a Console configuration file. It simply
-contains the information necessary to contact Directors, Clients, and Storage
-daemons you want to monitor.
-
-For a general discussion of configuration file and resources including the
-data types recognized by {\bf Bacula}, please see the
-\ilink{Configuration}{ConfigureChapter} chapter of this manual.
-
-The following Monitor Resource definition must be defined:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item
- \ilink{Monitor}{MonitorResource} -- to define the Monitor's
- name used to connect to all the daemons and the password used to connect to
-the Directors. Note, you must not define more than one Monitor resource in
-the Monitor configuration file.
-\item At least one
- \ilink{Client}{ClientResource1},
- \ilink{Storage}{StorageResource1} or
-\ilink{Director}{DirectorResource2} resource, to define the
-daemons to monitor.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{The Monitor Resource}
-\label{MonitorResource}
-\index[general]{Monitor Resource }
-\index[general]{Resource!Monitor }
-
-The Monitor resource defines the attributes of the Monitor running on the
-network. The parameters you define here must be configured as a Director
-resource in Clients and Storages configuration files, and as a Console
-resource in Directors configuration files.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Monitor]
- \index[fd]{Monitor }
- Start of the Monitor records.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Name }
- Specify the Director name used to connect to Client and Storage, and the
-Console name used to connect to Director. This record is required.
-
-\item [Password = \lt{}password\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Password }
- Where the password is the password needed for Directors to accept the Console
-connection. This password must be identical to the {\bf Password} specified
-in the {\bf Console} resource of the
-\ilink{Director's configuration}{DirectorChapter} file. This
-record is required if you wish to monitor Directors.
-
-\item [Refresh Interval = \lt{}time\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Refresh Interval }
- Specifies the time to wait between status requests to each daemon. It can't
-be set to less than 1 second, or more than 10 minutes, and the default value
-is 5 seconds.
-% TODO: what is format of the time?
-% TODO: should the digits in this definition be spelled out? should
-% TODO: this say "time-period-specification" above??)
-\end{description}
-
-\section{The Director Resource}
-\label{DirectorResource2}
-\index[general]{Director Resource }
-\index[general]{Resource!Director }
-
-The Director resource defines the attributes of the Directors that are
-monitored by this Monitor.
-
-As you are not permitted to define a Password in this resource, to avoid
-obtaining full Director privileges, you must create a Console resource in the
-\ilink{Director's configuration}{DirectorChapter} file, using the
-Console Name and Password defined in the Monitor resource. To avoid security
-problems, you should configure this Console resource to allow access to no
-other daemons, and permit the use of only two commands: {\bf status} and {\bf
-.status} (see below for an example).
-
-You may have multiple Director resource specifications in a single Monitor
-configuration file.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Director]
- \index[fd]{Director }
- Start of the Director records.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Name }
- The Director name used to identify the Director in the list of monitored
-daemons. It is not required to be the same as the one defined in the Director's
-configuration file. This record is required.
-
-\item [DIRPort = \lt{}port-number\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{DIRPort }
- Specify the port to use to connect to the Director. This value will most
-likely already be set to the value you specified on the {\bf
-\verb:--:with-base-port} option of the {\bf ./configure} command. This port must be
-identical to the {\bf DIRport} specified in the {\bf Director} resource of
-the
-\ilink{Director's configuration}{DirectorChapter} file. The
-default is 9101 so this record is not normally specified.
-
-\item [Address = \lt{}address\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Address }
- Where the address is a host name, a fully qualified domain name, or a network
-address used to connect to the Director. This record is required.
-\end{description}
-
-\section{The Client Resource}
-\label{ClientResource1}
-\index[general]{Resource!Client }
-\index[general]{Client Resource }
-
-The Client resource defines the attributes of the Clients that are monitored
-by this Monitor.
-
-You must create a Director resource in the
-\ilink{Client's configuration}{FiledConfChapter} file, using the
-Director Name defined in the Monitor resource. To avoid security problems, you
-should set the {\bf Monitor} directive to {\bf Yes} in this Director resource.
-
-
-You may have multiple Director resource specifications in a single Monitor
-configuration file.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Client (or FileDaemon)]
- \index[fd]{Client (or FileDaemon) }
- Start of the Client records.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Name }
- The Client name used to identify the Director in the list of monitored
-daemons. It is not required to be the same as the one defined in the Client's
-configuration file. This record is required.
-
-\item [Address = \lt{}address\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Address }
- Where the address is a host name, a fully qualified domain name, or a network
-address in dotted quad notation for a Bacula File daemon. This record is
-required.
-
-\item [FD Port = \lt{}port-number\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{FD Port }
- Where the port is a port number at which the Bacula File daemon can be
-contacted. The default is 9102.
-
-\item [Password = \lt{}password\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Password }
- This is the password to be used when establishing a connection with the File
-services, so the Client configuration file on the machine to be backed up
-must have the same password defined for this Director. This record is
-required.
-\end{description}
-
-\section{The Storage Resource}
-\label{StorageResource1}
-\index[general]{Resource!Storage }
-\index[general]{Storage Resource }
-
-The Storage resource defines the attributes of the Storages that are monitored
-by this Monitor.
-
-You must create a Director resource in the
-\ilink{Storage's configuration}{StoredConfChapter} file, using the
-Director Name defined in the Monitor resource. To avoid security problems, you
-should set the {\bf Monitor} directive to {\bf Yes} in this Director resource.
-
-
-You may have multiple Director resource specifications in a single Monitor
-configuration file.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Storage]
- \index[fd]{Storage }
- Start of the Storage records.
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}name\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Name }
- The Storage name used to identify the Director in the list of monitored
-daemons. It is not required to be the same as the one defined in the Storage's
-configuration file. This record is required.
-
-\item [Address = \lt{}address\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{Address }
- Where the address is a host name, a fully qualified domain name, or a network
-address in dotted quad notation for a Bacula Storage daemon. This record is
-required.
-
-\item [SD Port = \lt{}port\gt{}]
- \index[fd]{SD Port }
- Where port is the port to use to contact the storage daemon for information
-and to start jobs. This same port number must appear in the Storage resource
-of the Storage daemon's configuration file. The default is 9103.
-
-\item [Password = \lt{}password\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Password }
- This is the password to be used when establishing a connection with the
-Storage services. This same password also must appear in the Director
-resource of the Storage daemon's configuration file. This record is required.
-
-\end{description}
-
-\section{Tray Monitor Security}
-\index[general]{Tray Monitor Security}
-
-There is no security problem in relaxing the permissions on
-tray-monitor.conf as long as FD, SD and DIR are configured properly, so
-the passwords contained in this file only gives access to the status of
-the daemons. It could be a security problem if you consider the status
-information as potentially dangerous (I don't think it is the case).
-
-Concerning Director's configuration: \\
-In tray-monitor.conf, the password in the Monitor resource must point to
-a restricted console in bacula-dir.conf (see the documentation). So, if
-you use this password with bconsole, you'll only have access to the
-status of the director (commands status and .status).
-It could be a security problem if there is a bug in the ACL code of the
-director.
-
-Concerning File and Storage Daemons' configuration:\\
-In tray-monitor.conf, the Name in the Monitor resource must point to a
-Director resource in bacula-fd/sd.conf, with the Monitor directive set
-to Yes (once again, see the documentation).
-It could be a security problem if there is a bug in the code which check
-if a command is valid for a Monitor (this is very unlikely as the code
-is pretty simple).
-
-
-\section{Sample Tray Monitor configuration}
-\label{SampleConfiguration1}
-\index[general]{Sample Tray Monitor configuration}
-
-An example Tray Monitor configuration file might be the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#
-# Bacula Tray Monitor Configuration File
-#
-Monitor {
- Name = rufus-mon # password for Directors
- Password = "GN0uRo7PTUmlMbqrJ2Gr1p0fk0HQJTxwnFyE4WSST3MWZseR"
- RefreshInterval = 10 seconds
-}
-
-Client {
- Name = rufus-fd
- Address = rufus
- FDPort = 9102 # password for FileDaemon
- Password = "FYpq4yyI1y562EMS35bA0J0QC0M2L3t5cZObxT3XQxgxppTn"
-}
-Storage {
- Name = rufus-sd
- Address = rufus
- SDPort = 9103 # password for StorageDaemon
- Password = "9usxgc307dMbe7jbD16v0PXlhD64UVasIDD0DH2WAujcDsc6"
-}
-Director {
- Name = rufus-dir
- DIRport = 9101
- address = rufus
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\subsection{Sample File daemon's Director record.}
-\index[general]{Sample File daemon's Director record. }
-\index[general]{Record!Sample File daemon's Director }
-
-Click
-\ilink{here to see the full example.}{SampleClientConfiguration}
-
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#
-# Restricted Director, used by tray-monitor to get the
-# status of the file daemon
-#
-Director {
- Name = rufus-mon
- Password = "FYpq4yyI1y562EMS35bA0J0QC0M2L3t5cZObxT3XQxgxppTn"
- Monitor = yes
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\subsection{Sample Storage daemon's Director record.}
-\index[general]{Record!Sample Storage daemon's Director }
-\index[general]{Sample Storage daemon's Director record. }
-
-Click
-\ilink{here to see the full example.}{SampleConfiguration}
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#
-# Restricted Director, used by tray-monitor to get the
-# status of the storage daemon
-#
-Director {
- Name = rufus-mon
- Password = "9usxgc307dMbe7jbD16v0PXlhD64UVasIDD0DH2WAujcDsc6"
- Monitor = yes
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\subsection{Sample Director's Console record.}
-\index[general]{Record!Sample Director's Console }
-\index[general]{Sample Director's Console record. }
-
-Click
-\ilink{here to see the full
-example.}{SampleDirectorConfiguration}
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#
-# Restricted console used by tray-monitor to get the status of the director
-#
-Console {
- Name = Monitor
- Password = "GN0uRo7PTUmlMbqrJ2Gr1p0fk0HQJTxwnFyE4WSST3MWZseR"
- CommandACL = status, .status
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Getting Started with Bacula}
-\label{QuickStartChapter}
-\index[general]{Getting Started with Bacula }
-
-If you are like me, you want to get Bacula running immediately to get a feel
-for it, then later you want to go back and read about all the details. This
-chapter attempts to accomplish just that: get you going quickly without all
-the details. If you want to skip the section on Pools, Volumes and Labels, you
-can always come back to it, but please read to the end of this chapter, and in
-particular follow the instructions for testing your tape drive.
-
-We assume that you have managed to build and install Bacula, if not, you might
-want to first look at the
-\ilink{System Requirements}{SysReqs} then at the
-\ilink{Compiling and Installing Bacula}{InstallChapter} chapter of
-this manual.
-
-\label{JobsandSchedules}
-\section{Understanding Jobs and Schedules}
-\index[general]{Jobs!Understanding}
-\index[general]{Schedules!Understanding}
-
-In order to make Bacula as flexible as possible, the directions given
-to Bacula are specified in several pieces. The main instruction is the
-job resource, which defines a job. A backup job generally consists of a
-FileSet, a Client, a Schedule for one or several levels or times of backups,
-a Pool, as well as additional instructions. Another way of looking
-at it is the FileSet is what to backup; the Client is who to backup; the
-Schedule defines when, and the Pool defines where (i.e. what Volume).
-
-Typically one FileSet/Client combination will have one corresponding job.
-Most of the directives, such as FileSets, Pools, Schedules, can be mixed
-and matched among the jobs. So you might have two different Job
-definitions (resources) backing up different servers using the same
-Schedule, the same Fileset (backing up the same directories on two machines)
-and maybe even the same Pools. The Schedule will define what type of
-backup will run when (e.g. Full on Monday, incremental the rest of the
-week), and when more than one job uses the same schedule, the job priority
-determines which actually runs first. If you have a lot of jobs, you might
-want to use JobDefs, where you can set defaults for the jobs, which can
-then be changed in the job resource, but this saves rewriting the
-identical parameters for each job. In addition to the FileSets you want to
-back up, you should also have a job that backs up your catalog.
-
-Finally, be aware that in addition to the backup jobs there are
-restore, verify, and admin jobs, which have different requirements.
-
-\label{PoolsVolsLabels}
-\section{Understanding Pools, Volumes and Labels}
-\index[general]{Labels!Understanding Pools Volumes and }
-\index[general]{Understanding Pools, Volumes and Labels }
-
-If you have been using a program such as {\bf tar} to backup your system,
-Pools, Volumes, and labeling may be a bit confusing at first. A Volume is a
-single physical tape (or possibly a single file) on which Bacula will write
-your backup data. Pools group together Volumes so that a backup is not
-restricted to the length of a single Volume (tape). Consequently, rather than
-explicitly naming Volumes in your Job, you specify a Pool, and Bacula will
-select the next appendable Volume from the Pool and request you to mount it.
-% TODO: can't it mount it itself if already available?
-
-Although the basic Pool options are specified in the Director's Pool resource,
-the {\bf real} Pool is maintained in the Bacula Catalog. It contains
-information taken from the Pool resource (bacula-dir.conf) as well as
-information on all the Volumes that have been added to the Pool. Adding
-Volumes to a Pool is usually done manually with the Console program using the
-{\bf label} command.
-
-For each Volume, Bacula maintains a fair amount of catalog information such as
-the first write date/time, the last write date/time, the number of files on
-the Volume, the number of bytes on the Volume, the number of Mounts, etc.
-
-Before Bacula will read or write a Volume, the physical Volume must have a
-Bacula software label so that Bacula can be sure the correct Volume is
-mounted. This is usually done using the {\bf label} command in the Console
-program.
-
-The steps for creating a Pool, adding Volumes to it, and writing software
-labels to the Volumes, may seem tedious at first, but in fact, they are quite
-simple to do, and they allow you to use multiple Volumes (rather than being
-limited to the size of a single tape). Pools also give you significant
-flexibility in your backup process. For example, you can have a "Daily" Pool
-of Volumes for Incremental backups and a "Weekly" Pool of Volumes for Full
-backups. By specifying the appropriate Pool in the daily and weekly backup
-Jobs, you thereby insure that no daily Job ever writes to a Volume in the
-Weekly Pool and vice versa, and Bacula will tell you what tape is needed and
-when.
-
-For more on Pools, see the
-\ilink{Pool Resource}{PoolResource} section of the Director
-Configuration chapter, or simply read on, and we will come back to this
-subject later.
-
-\section{Setting Up Bacula Configuration Files}
-\label{config}
-\index[general]{Setting Up Bacula Configuration Files }
-\index[general]{Files!Setting Up Bacula Configuration }
-
-% TODO: this assumes installation from source:
-After running the appropriate {\bf ./configure} command and doing
-a {\bf make}, and a {\bf make install}, if this is the first time
-you are running Bacula, you must create valid configuration files
-for the Director, the File daemon, the Storage daemon, and the
-Console programs. If you have followed our recommendations,
-default configuration files as well as the daemon binaries will
-be located in your installation directory. In any case, the
-binaries are found in the directory you specified on the {\bf
-\verb:--:sbindir} option to the {\bf ./configure} command, and
-the configuration files are found in the directory you specified
-on the {\bf \verb:--:sysconfdir} option.
-
-When initially setting up Bacula you will need to invest a bit of time in
-modifying the default configuration files to suit your environment. This may
-entail starting and stopping Bacula a number of times until you get everything
-right. Please do not despair. Once you have created your configuration files,
-you will rarely need to change them nor will you stop and start Bacula very
-often. Most of the work will simply be in changing the tape when it is full.
-
-\subsection{Configuring the Console Program}
-\index[general]{Configuring the Console Program }
-\index[general]{Program!Configuring the Console }
-
-The Console program is used by the administrator to interact with the Director
-and to manually start/stop Jobs or to obtain Job status information.
-
-The Console configuration file is found in the directory specified on the
-{\bf \verb:--:sysconfdir} option that you specified on the {\bf
-./configure} command and by default is named {\bf bconsole.conf}.
-
-If you choose to build the GNOME console with the {\bf
-\verb:--:enable-gnome} option, you also find a default configuration file
-for it, named {\bf bgnome-console.conf}.
-
-The same applies to the wxWidgets console, which is build with the {\bf
-\verb:--:enable-bwx-console} option, and the name of the default
-configuration file is, in this case, {\bf bwx-console.conf}.
-
-Normally, for first time users, no change is needed to these files. Reasonable
-defaults are set.
-
-Further details are in the
-\ilink{Console configuration}{ConsoleConfChapter} chapter.
-
-\subsection{Configuring the Monitor Program}
-\index[general]{Program!Configuring the Monitor }
-\index[general]{Configuring the Monitor Program }
-
-The Monitor program is typically an icon in the system tray. However, once the
-icon is expanded into a full window, the administrator or user can obtain
-status information about the Director or the backup status on the local
-workstation or any other Bacula daemon that is configured.
-
-\addcontentsline{lof}{figure}{Bacula Tray Monitor}
-\includegraphics{\idir Bacula-tray-monitor.eps}
-
-% TODO: image may be too wide for 6" wide printed page.
-The image shows a tray-monitor configured for three daemons. By clicking on
-the radio buttons in the upper left corner of the image, you can see the
-status for each of the daemons. The image shows the status for the Storage
-daemon (MainSD) that is currently selected.
-
-The Monitor configuration file is found in the directory specified on the {\bf
-\verb:--:sysconfdir} option that you specified on the {\bf ./configure} command
-and
-by default is named {\bf tray-monitor.conf}. Normally, for first time users,
-you just need to change the permission of this file to allow non-root users to
-run the Monitor, as this application must run as the same user as the
-graphical environment (don't forget to allow non-root users to execute {\bf
-bacula-tray-monitor}). This is not a security problem as long as you use the
-default settings.
-
-More information is in the
-\ilink{Monitor configuration}{_MonitorChapter} chapter.
-
-\subsection{Configuring the File daemon}
-\index[general]{Daemon!Configuring the File }
-\index[general]{Configuring the File daemon }
-
-The File daemon is a program that runs on each (Client) machine. At the
-request of the Director, finds the files to be backed up and sends them (their
-data) to the Storage daemon.
-
-The File daemon configuration file is found in the directory specified on
-the {\bf \verb:--:sysconfdir} option that you specified on the {\bf ./configure}
-command. By default, the File daemon's configuration file is named {\bf
-bacula-fd.conf}. Normally, for first time users, no change is needed to this
-file. Reasonable defaults are set. However, if you are going to back up more
-than one machine, you will need to install the File daemon with a unique
-configuration file on each machine to be backed up. The information about each
-File daemon must appear in the Director's configuration file.
-% TODO: point to section about how to install just the File daemon
-% TODO: and creating the unique configuration file.
-
-Further details are in the
-\ilink{File daemon configuration}{FiledConfChapter} chapter.
-
-\subsection{Configuring the Director}
-\index[general]{Director!Configuring the }
-\index[general]{Configuring the Director }
-
-The Director is the central control program for all the other daemons. It
-schedules and monitors all jobs to be backed up.
-
-The Director configuration file is found in the directory specified on the
-{\bf \verb:--:sysconfdir} option that you specified on the {\bf ./configure}
-command. Normally the Director's configuration file is named {\bf bacula-dir.conf}.
-
-In general, the only change you must make is modify the FileSet resource so
-that the {\bf Include} configuration directive contains at least one line with
-a valid name of a directory (or file) to be saved.
-
-% TODO: is DLT still the default config?
-If you do not have a DLT tape drive, you will probably want to edit the
-Storage resource to contain names that are more representative of your actual
-storage device. You can always use the existing names as you are free to
-arbitrarily assign them, but they must agree with the corresponding names in
-the Storage daemon's configuration file.
-
-You may also want to change the email address for notification from the
-default {\bf root} to your email address.
-
-Finally, if you have multiple systems to be backed up, you will need a
-separate File daemon or Client specification for each system, specifying its
-% TODO: I don't see any example "File" configuraton in the default
-% TODO: bacula-dir.conf; I do see FileDaemon config in the default
-% TODO: bacula-fd.conf. Be more clear about this or point to explanation
-% TODO: about this.
-name, address, and password. We have found that giving your daemons the same
-% TODO: what passwords should I use? I have different ones in the
-% TODO: different configs on different systems. Point to explanation of
-% this.
-name as your system but post fixed with {\bf -fd} helps a lot in debugging.
-That is, if your system name is {\bf foobaz}, you would give the File daemon
-the name {\bf foobaz-fd}. For the Director, you should use {\bf foobaz-dir},
-and for the storage daemon, you might use {\bf foobaz-sd}.
-Each of your Bacula components {\bf must} have a unique name. If you
-make them all the same, aside from the fact that you will not
-know what daemon is sending what message, if they share the same
-working directory, the daemons temporary file names will not
-be unique, and you will get many strange failures.
-% TODO: why not check for that and not allow sharing working directory?
-
-More information is in the
-\ilink{Director configuration}{DirectorChapter} chapter.
-
-\subsection{Configuring the Storage daemon}
-\index[general]{Daemon!Configuring the Storage }
-\index[general]{Configuring the Storage daemon }
-
-The Storage daemon is responsible, at the Director's request, for accepting
-data from a File daemon and placing it on Storage media, or in the case of a
-restore request, to find the data and send it to the File daemon.
-
-The Storage daemon's configuration file is found in the directory specified on
-the {\bf \verb:--:sysconfdir} option that you specified on the {\bf ./configure}
-command. By default, the Storage daemon's file is named {\bf bacula-sd.conf}.
-Edit this file to contain the correct Archive device names for any tape
-devices that you have. If the configuration process properly detected your
-system, they will already be correctly set. These Storage resource name and
-Media Type must be the same as the corresponding ones in the Director's
-configuration file {\bf bacula-dir.conf}. If you want to backup to a file
-instead of a tape, the Archive device must point to a directory in which the
-Volumes will be created as files when you label the Volume.
-\label{ConfigTesting}
-
-Further information is in the
-\ilink{Storage daemon configuration}{StoredConfChapter} chapter.
-
-\section{Testing your Configuration Files}
-\index[general]{Testing your Configuration Files }
-\index[general]{Files!Testing your Configuration }
-
-You can test if your configuration file is syntactically correct by running
-the appropriate daemon with the {\bf -t} option. The daemon will process the
-configuration file and print any error messages then terminate. For example,
-assuming you have installed your binaries and configuration files in the same
-directory.
-% TODO: why assume that? common default install has the executable
-% TODO: is in ./sbin and the configs are in ./etc. So maybe just have
-% TODO: example correct or change default install to be same.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-cd <installation-directory>
-./bacula-dir -t -c bacula-dir.conf
-./bacula-fd -t -c bacula-fd.conf
-./bacula-sd -t -c bacula-sd.conf
-./bconsole -t -c bconsole.conf
-./bgnome-console -t -c bgnome-console.conf
-./bwx-console -t -c bwx-console.conf
-./bat -t -c bat.conf
-su <normal user> -c "./bacula-tray-monitor -t -c tray-monitor.conf"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-will test the configuration files of each of the main programs. If the
-configuration file is OK, the program will terminate without printing
-anything. Please note that, depending on the configure options you choose,
-some, or even all, of the three last commands will not be available on your
-system. If you have installed the binaries in traditional Unix locations
-rather than a single file, you will need to modify the above commands
-appropriately (no ./ in front of the command name, and a path in front of the
-conf file name).
-\label{TapeTesting}
-
-\section{Testing Compatibility with Your Tape Drive}
-\index[general]{Drive!Testing Bacula Compatibility with Your Tape}
-\index[general]{Testing Bacula Compatibility with Your Tape Drive}
-
-Before spending a lot of time on Bacula only to find that it doesn't work
-with your tape drive, please read the {\bf Testing Your Tape
-Drive} chapter of this manual. If you have a modern
-standard SCSI tape drive on a Linux or Solaris, most likely it will work,
-but better test than be sorry. For FreeBSD (and probably other xBSD
-flavors), reading the above mentioned tape testing chapter is a must.
-Also, for FreeBSD, please see \elink{The FreeBSD
-Diary}{\url{http://www.freebsddiary.org/bacula.php}} for a detailed description
-%TODO: fix elink so it shows URL in PDF
-on how to make Bacula work on your system. In addition, users of FreeBSD
-prior to 4.9-STABLE dated Mon Dec 29 15:18:01 2003 UTC who plan to use tape
-devices, please see the file {\bf platforms/freebsd/pthreads-fix.txt} in
-the main Bacula directory concerning important information concerning
-compatibility of Bacula and your system. \label{notls}
-
-\section{Get Rid of the /lib/tls Directory}
-\index[general]{Directory!Get Rid of the /lib/tls }
-\index[general]{Get Rid of the /lib/tls Directory }
-The new pthreads library {\bf /lib/tls} installed by default on recent Red
-Hat systems running Linux kernel 2.4.x is defective. You must remove it or
-rename it, then reboot your system before running Bacula otherwise after a
-week or so of running, Bacula will either block for long periods or
-deadlock entirely. You may want to use the loader environment variable
-override rather than removing /lib/tls. Please see \ilink{ Supported
-Operating Systems}{SupportedOSes} for more information on this problem.
-
-This problem does not occur on systems running Linux 2.6.x kernels.
-
-\label{Running1}
-
-\section{Running Bacula}
-\index[general]{Bacula!Running }
-\index[general]{Running Bacula }
-
-Probably the most important part of running Bacula is being able to restore
-files. If you haven't tried recovering files at least once, when you actually
-have to do it, you will be under a lot more pressure, and prone to make
-errors, than if you had already tried it once.
-
-To get a good idea how to use Bacula in a short time, we {\bf strongly}
-recommend that you follow the example in the
-\ilink{Running Bacula Chapter}{TutorialChapter} of this manual where
-you will get detailed instructions on how to run Bacula.
-
-\section{Log Rotation}
-\index[general]{Rotation!Log }
-\index[general]{Log Rotation }
-If you use the default {\bf bacula-dir.conf} or some variation of it, you will
-note that it logs all the Bacula output to a file. To avoid that this file
-grows without limit, we recommend that you copy the file {\bf logrotate} from
-the {\bf scripts/logrotate} to {\bf /etc/logrotate.d/bacula}. This will cause
-the log file to be rotated once a month and kept for a maximum of five months.
-You may want to edit this file to change the default log rotation preferences.
-
-\section{Log Watch}
-\index[general]{Watch!Log}
-\index[general]{Log Watch}
-Some systems such as Red Hat and Fedora run the logwatch program
-every night, which does an analysis of your log file and sends an
-email report. If you wish to include the output from your Bacula
-jobs in that report, please look in the {\bf scripts/logwatch}
-directory. The {\bf README} file in that directory gives a brief
-explanation on how to install it and what kind of output to expect.
-
-
-\section{Disaster Recovery}
-\index[general]{Recovery!Disaster }
-\index[general]{Disaster Recovery }
-
-If you intend to use Bacula as a disaster recovery tool rather than simply a
-program to restore lost or damaged files, you will want to read the
-\ilink{Disaster Recovery Using Bacula Chapter}{RescueChapter} of
-this manual.
-
-In any case, you are strongly urged to carefully test restoring some files
-that you have saved rather than wait until disaster strikes. This way, you
-will be prepared.
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Bacula Security Issues}
-\label{SecurityChapter}
-\index[general]{Bacula Security Issues}
-\index[general]{Security}
-\index[general]{Issues!Bacula Security}
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Security means being able to restore your files, so read the
- \ilink{Critical Items Chapter}{Critical} of this manual.
-\item The Clients ({\bf bacula-fd}) must run as root to be able to access all
- the system files.
-\item It is not necessary to run the Director as root.
-\item It is not necessary to run the Storage daemon as root, but you must
- ensure that it can open the tape drives, which are often restricted to root
- access by default. In addition, if you do not run the Storage daemon as root,
- it will not be able to automatically set your tape drive parameters on most
- OSes since these functions, unfortunately require root access.
-\item You should restrict access to the Bacula configuration files, so that
- the passwords are not world-readable. The {\bf Bacula} daemons are password
- protected using CRAM-MD5 (i.e. the password is not sent across the network).
- This will ensure that not everyone can access the daemons. It is a reasonably
- good protection, but can be cracked by experts.
-\item If you are using the recommended ports 9101, 9102, and 9103, you will
- probably want to protect these ports from external access using a firewall
- and/or using tcp wrappers ({\bf etc/hosts.allow}).
-\item By default, all data that is sent across the network is unencrypted.
- However, Bacula does support TLS (transport layer security) and can
- encrypt transmitted data. Please read the
- \ilink{TLS (SSL) Communications Encryption}{CommEncryption}
- section of this manual.
-\item You should ensure that the Bacula working directories are readable and
- writable only by the Bacula daemons.
-\item If you are using {\bf MySQL} it is not necessary for it to run with
- {\bf root} permission.
-\item The default Bacula {\bf grant-mysql-permissions} script grants all
- permissions to use the MySQL database without a password. If you want
- security, please tighten this up!
-\item Don't forget that Bacula is a network program, so anyone anywhere on
- the network with the console program and the Director's password can access
- Bacula and the backed up data.
-\item You can restrict what IP addresses Bacula will bind to by using the
- appropriate {\bf DirAddress}, {\bf FDAddress}, or {\bf SDAddress} records in
- the respective daemon configuration files.
-\item Be aware that if you are backing up your database using the default
- script, if you have a password on your database, it will be passed as
- a command line option to that script, and any user will be able to see
- this information. If you want it to be secure, you will need to pass it
- by an environment variable or a secure file.
-
- See also \ilink{Backing Up Your Bacula
- Database - Security Considerations }{BackingUpBaculaSecurityConsiderations}
- for more information.
-\end{itemize}
-
-
-\section{Backward Compatibility}
-\index[general]{Backward Compatibility}
-One of the major goals of Bacula is to ensure that you can restore
-tapes (I'll use the word tape to include disk Volumes) that you wrote years
-ago. This means that each new version of Bacula should be able to read old
-format tapes. The first problem you will have is to ensure that the
-hardware is still working some years down the road, and the second
-problem will be to ensure that the media will still be good, then
-your OS must be able to interface to the device, and finally Bacula
-must be able to recognize old formats. All the problems except the
-last are ones that we cannot solve, but by careful planning you can.
-
-Since the very beginning of Bacula (January 2000) until today (December
-2005), there have been two major Bacula tape formats. The second format
-was introduced in version 1.27 in November of 2002, and it has not
-changed since then. In principle, Bacula can still read the original
-format, but I haven't tried it lately so who knows ...
-
-Though the tape format is fixed, the kinds of data that we can put on the
-tapes are extensible, and that is how we added new features
-such as ACLs, Win32 data, encrypted data, ... Obviously, an older
-version of Bacula would not know how to read these newer data streams,
-but each newer version of Bacula should know how to read all the
-older streams.
-
-If you want to be 100% sure that you can read old tapes, you
-should:
-
-1. Try reading old tapes from time to time -- e.g. at least once
-a year.
-
-2. Keep statically linked copies of every version of Bacula that you use
-in production then if for some reason, we botch up old tape compatibility, you
-can always pull out an old copy of Bacula ...
-
-The second point is probably overkill but if you want to be sure, it may
-save you someday.
-
-
-
-\label{wrappers}
-\section{Configuring and Testing TCP Wrappers}
-\index[general]{Configuring and Testing TCP Wrappers}
-\index[general]{TCP Wrappers}
-\index[general]{Wrappers!TCP}
-\index[general]{libwrappers}
-
-TCP Wrappers are implemented if you turn them on when configuring
-({\bf ./configure \verb:--:with-tcp-wrappers}).
-With this code enabled, you may control who may access your
-daemons. This control is done by modifying the file: {\bf
-/etc/hosts.allow}. The program name that {\bf Bacula} uses when
-applying these access restrictions is the name you specify in the
-daemon configuration file (see below for examples).
-You must not use the {\bf twist} option in your {\bf
-/etc/hosts.allow} or it will terminate the Bacula daemon when a
-connection is refused.
-
-The exact name of the package you need loaded to build with TCP wrappers
-depends on the system. For example,
-on SuSE, the TCP wrappers libraries needed to link Bacula are
-contained in the tcpd-devel package. On Red Hat, the package is named
-tcp\_wrappers.
-
-Dan Langille has provided the following information on configuring and
-testing TCP wrappers with Bacula.
-
-If you read hosts\_options(5), you will see an option called twist. This
-option replaces the current process by an instance of the specified shell
-command. Typically, something like this is used:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-ALL : ALL \
- : severity auth.info \
- : twist /bin/echo "You are not welcome to use %d from %h."
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The libwrap code tries to avoid {\bf twist} if it runs in a resident process,
-but that test will not protect the first hosts\_access() call. This will
-result in the process (e.g. bacula-fd, bacula-sd, bacula-dir) being terminated
-if the first connection to their port results in the twist option being
-invoked. The potential, and I stress potential, exists for an attacker to
-prevent the daemons from running. This situation is eliminated if your
-/etc/hosts.allow file contains an appropriate rule set. The following example
-is sufficient:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-undef-fd : localhost : allow
-undef-sd : localhost : allow
-undef-dir : localhost : allow
-undef-fd : ALL : deny
-undef-sd : ALL : deny
-undef-dir : ALL : deny
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-You must adjust the names to be the same as the Name directives found
-in each of the daemon configuration files. They are, in general, not the
-same as the binary daemon names. It is not possible to use the
-daemon names because multiple daemons may be running on the same machine
-but with different configurations.
-
-In these examples, the Director is undef-dir, the
-Storage Daemon is undef-sd, and the File Daemon is undef-fd. Adjust to suit
-your situation. The above example rules assume that the SD, FD, and DIR all
-reside on the same box. If you have a remote FD client, then the following
-rule set on the remote client will suffice:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-undef-fd : director.example.org : allow
-undef-fd : ALL : deny
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-where director.example.org is the host which will be contacting the client
-(ie. the box on which the Bacula Director daemon runs). The use of "ALL :
-deny" ensures that the twist option (if present) is not invoked. To properly
-test your configuration, start the daemon(s), then attempt to connect from an
-IP address which should be able to connect. You should see something like
-this:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-$ telnet undef 9103
-Trying 192.168.0.56...
-Connected to undef.example.org.
-Escape character is '^]'.
-Connection closed by foreign host.
-$
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-This is the correct response. If you see this:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-$ telnet undef 9103
-Trying 192.168.0.56...
-Connected to undef.example.org.
-Escape character is '^]'.
-You are not welcome to use undef-sd from xeon.example.org.
-Connection closed by foreign host.
-$
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-then twist has been invoked and your configuration is not correct and you need
-to add the deny statement. It is important to note that your testing must
-include restarting the daemons after each connection attempt. You can also
-tcpdchk(8) and tcpdmatch(8) to validate your /etc/hosts.allow rules. Here is a
-simple test using tcpdmatch:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-$ tcpdmatch undef-dir xeon.example.org
-warning: undef-dir: no such process name in /etc/inetd.conf
-client: hostname xeon.example.org
-client: address 192.168.0.18
-server: process undef-dir
-matched: /etc/hosts.allow line 40
-option: allow
-access: granted
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-If you are running Bacula as a standalone daemon, the warning above can be
-safely ignored. Here is an example which indicates that your rules are missing
-a deny statement and the twist option has been invoked.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-$ tcpdmatch undef-dir 10.0.0.1
-warning: undef-dir: no such process name in /etc/inetd.conf
-client: address 10.0.0.1
-server: process undef-dir
-matched: /etc/hosts.allow line 91
-option: severity auth.info
-option: twist /bin/echo "You are not welcome to use
- undef-dir from 10.0.0.1."
-access: delegated
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{Running as non-root}
-\index[general]{Running as non-root }
-
-Security advice from Dan Langille:
-% TODO: don't use specific name
-
-% TODO: don't be too specific on operating system
-
-% TODO: maybe remove personalization?
-
-It is a good idea to run daemons with the lowest possible privileges. In
-other words, if you can, don't run applications as root which do not have to
-be root. The Storage Daemon and the Director Daemon do not need to be root.
-The File Daemon needs to be root in order to access all files on your system.
-In order to run as non-root, you need to create a user and a group. Choosing
-{\tt bacula} as both the user name and the group name sounds like a good idea
-to me.
-
-The FreeBSD port creates this user and group for you.
-Here is what those entries looked like on my FreeBSD laptop:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-bacula:*:1002:1002::0:0:Bacula Daemon:/var/db/bacula:/sbin/nologin
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-I used vipw to create this entry. I selected a User ID and Group ID of 1002
-as they were unused on my system.
-
-I also created a group in /etc/group:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-bacula:*:1002:
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-The bacula user (as opposed to the Bacula daemon) will have a home directory
-of {\tt /var/db/bacula} which is the default location for the Bacula
-database.
-
-Now that you have both a bacula user and a bacula group, you can secure the
-bacula home directory by issuing this command:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-chown -R bacula:bacula /var/db/bacula/
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-This ensures that only the bacula user can access this directory. It also
-means that if we run the Director and the Storage daemon as bacula, those
-daemons also have restricted access. This would not be the case if they were
-running as root.
-
-It is important to note that the storage daemon actually needs to be in the
-operator group for normal access to tape drives etc (at least on a FreeBSD
-system, that's how things are set up by default) Such devices are normally
-chown root:operator. It is easier and less error prone to make Bacula a
-member of that group than it is to play around with system permissions.
-
-Starting the Bacula daemons
-
-To start the bacula daemons on a FreeBSD system, issue the following command:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-/usr/local/etc/rc.d/bacula-dir start
-/usr/local/etc/rc.d/bacula-sd start
-/usr/local/etc/rc.d/bacula-fd start
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-To confirm they are all running:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-$ ps auwx | grep bacula
-root 63418 0.0 0.3 1856 1036 ?? Ss 4:09PM 0:00.00
- /usr/local/sbin/bacula-fd -v -c /usr/local/etc/bacula-fd.conf
-bacula 63416 0.0 0.3 2040 1172 ?? Ss 4:09PM 0:00.01
- /usr/local/sbin/bacula-sd -v -c /usr/local/etc/bacula-sd.conf
-bacula 63422 0.0 0.4 2360 1440 ?? Ss 4:09PM 0:00.00
- /usr/local/sbin/bacula-dir -v -c /usr/local/etc/bacula-dir.conf
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
+++ /dev/null
-/*
- * html2latex
- */
-
-available {
- sun4_sunos.4
- sun4_solaris.2
- rs_aix.3
- rs_aix.4
- sgi_irix
-}
-
-description {
- From Jeffrey Schaefer, Geometry Center. Translates HTML document to LaTeX
-}
-
-install {
- bin/html2latex /afs/rpi.edu/dept/acs/rpinfo/filters/GChtml2latex/html2latex
- bin/html2latex.tag /afs/rpi.edu/dept/acs/rpinfo/filters/GChtml2latex/html2latex.tag
- bin/html2latex-local.tag /afs/rpi.edu/dept/acs/rpinfo/filters/GChtml2latex/html2latex-local.tag
- bin/webtex2latex.tag /afs/rpi.edu/dept/acs/rpinfo/filters/GChtml2latex/webtex2latex.tag
- man/man1/html2latex.1 /afs/rpi.edu/dept/acs/rpinfo/filters/GChtml2latex/html2latex.1
-}
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%%
-
-\chapter{Storage Daemon Configuration}
-\label{StoredConfChapter}
-\index[general]{Storage Daemon Configuration}
-\index[general]{Configuration!Storage Daemon}
-
-The Storage Daemon configuration file has relatively few resource definitions.
-However, due to the great variation in backup media and system capabilities,
-the storage daemon must be highly configurable. As a consequence, there are
-quite a large number of directives in the Device Resource definition that
-allow you to define all the characteristics of your Storage device (normally a
-tape drive). Fortunately, with modern storage devices, the defaults are
-sufficient, and very few directives are actually needed.
-
-Examples of {\bf Device} resource directives that are known to work for a
-number of common tape drives can be found in the {\bf
-\lt{}bacula-src\gt{}/examples/devices} directory, and most will also be listed
-here.
-
-For a general discussion of configuration file and resources including the
-data types recognized by {\bf Bacula}, please see the
-\ilink{Configuration}{ConfigureChapter} chapter of this manual. The
-following Storage Resource definitions must be defined:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item
- \ilink{Storage}{StorageResource} -- to define the name of the
- Storage daemon.
-\item
- \ilink{Director}{DirectorResource1} -- to define the Director's
- name and his access password.
-\item
- \ilink{Device}{DeviceResource} -- to define the
- characteristics of your storage device (tape drive).
-\item
- \ilink{Messages}{MessagesChapter} -- to define where error and
- information messages are to be sent.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{Storage Resource}
-\label{StorageResource}
-\index[general]{Resource!Storage}
-\index[general]{Storage Resource}
-
-In general, the properties specified under the Storage resource define global
-properties of the Storage daemon. Each Storage daemon configuration file must
-have one and only one Storage resource definition.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}Storage-Daemon-Name\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Name}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Name}
- Specifies the Name of the Storage daemon. This directive is required.
-
-\item [Working Directory = \lt{}Directory\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Working Directory}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Working Directory}
- This directive is mandatory and specifies a directory in which the Storage
- daemon may put its status files. This directory should be used only by {\bf
- Bacula}, but may be shared by other Bacula daemons provided the names
- given to each daemon are unique. This directive is
- required
-
-\item [Pid Directory = \lt{}Directory\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Pid Directory}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Pid Directory}
- This directive is mandatory and specifies a directory in which the Director
- may put its process Id file files. The process Id file is used to shutdown
- Bacula and to prevent multiple copies of Bacula from running simultaneously.
- This directive is required. Standard shell expansion of the {\bf Directory}
- is done when the configuration file is read so that values such as {\bf
- \$HOME} will be properly expanded.
-
- Typically on Linux systems, you will set this to: {\bf /var/run}. If you are
- not installing Bacula in the system directories, you can use the {\bf Working
- Directory} as defined above.
-
-\item [Heartbeat Interval = \lt{}time-interval\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Heartbeat Interval}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Heartbeat Interval}
- \index[general]{Heartbeat Interval}
- \index[general]{Broken pipe}
- This directive defines an interval of time in seconds. When
- the Storage daemon is waiting for the operator to mount a
- tape, each time interval, it will send a heartbeat signal to
- the File daemon. The default interval is zero which disables
- the heartbeat. This feature is particularly useful if you
- have a router such as 3Com that does not follow Internet
- standards and times out an valid connection after a short
- duration despite the fact that keepalive is set. This usually
- results in a broken pipe error message.
-
-\item [Client Connect Wait = \lt{}time-interval\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Connect Wait}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Connect Wait}
- \index[general]{Client Connect Wait}
- This directive defines an interval of time in seconds that
- the Storage daemon will wait for a Client (the File daemon)
- to connect. The default is 30 minutes. Be aware that the
- longer the Storage daemon waits for a Client, the more
- resources will be tied up.
-
-\item [Maximum Concurrent Jobs = \lt{}number\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Maximum Concurrent Jobs}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Maximum Concurrent Jobs}
- where \lt{}number\gt{} is the maximum number of Jobs that may run
- concurrently. The default is set to 10, but you may set it to a larger
- number. Each contact from the Director (e.g. status request, job start
- request) is considered as a Job, so if you want to be able to do a {\bf
- status} request in the console at the same time as a Job is running, you
- will need to set this value greater than 1. To run simultaneous Jobs,
- you will need to set a number of other directives in the Director's
- configuration file. Which ones you set depend on what you want, but you
- will almost certainly need to set the {\bf Maximum Concurrent Jobs} in
- the Storage resource in the Director's configuration file and possibly
- those in the Job and Client resources.
-
-\item [SDAddresses = \lt{}IP-address-specification\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{SDAddresses}
- \index[sd]{Directive!SDAddresses}
- Specify the ports and addresses on which the Storage daemon will listen
- for Director connections. Normally, the default is sufficient and you
- do not need to specify this directive. Probably the simplest way to
- explain how this directive works is to show an example:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- SDAddresses = { ip = {
- addr = 1.2.3.4; port = 1205; }
- ipv4 = {
- addr = 1.2.3.4; port = http; }
- ipv6 = {
- addr = 1.2.3.4;
- port = 1205;
- }
- ip = {
- addr = 1.2.3.4
- port = 1205
- }
- ip = {
- addr = 1.2.3.4
- }
- ip = {
- addr = 201:220:222::2
- }
- ip = {
- addr = bluedot.thun.net
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-where ip, ip4, ip6, addr, and port are all keywords. Note, that the address
-can be specified as either a dotted quadruple, or IPv6 colon notation, or as
-a symbolic name (only in the ip specification). Also, port can be specified
-as a number or as the mnemonic value from the /etc/services file. If a port
-is not specified, the default will be used. If an ip section is specified,
-the resolution can be made either by IPv4 or IPv6. If ip4 is specified, then
-only IPv4 resolutions will be permitted, and likewise with ip6.
-
-Using this directive, you can replace both the SDPort and SDAddress
-directives shown below.
-
-\item [SDPort = \lt{}port-number\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{SDPort}
- \index[sd]{Directive!SDPort}
- Specifies port number on which the Storage daemon listens for Director
- connections. The default is 9103.
-
-\item [SDAddress = \lt{}IP-Address\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{SDAddress}
- \index[sd]{Directive!SDAddress}
- This directive is optional, and if it is specified, it will cause the
- Storage daemon server (for Director and File daemon connections) to bind
- to the specified {\bf IP-Address}, which is either a domain name or an
- IP address specified as a dotted quadruple. If this directive is not
- specified, the Storage daemon will bind to any available address (the
- default).
-
-\end{description}
-
-The following is a typical Storage daemon Storage definition.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#
-# "Global" Storage daemon configuration specifications appear
-# under the Storage resource.
-#
-Storage {
- Name = "Storage daemon"
- Address = localhost
- WorkingDirectory = "~/bacula/working"
- Pid Directory = "~/bacula/working"
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\section{Director Resource}
-\label{DirectorResource1}
-\index[general]{Director Resource}
-\index[general]{Resource!Director}
-
-The Director resource specifies the Name of the Director which is permitted
-to use the services of the Storage daemon. There may be multiple Director
-resources. The Director Name and Password must match the corresponding
-values in the Director's configuration file.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Name = \lt{}Director-Name\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Name}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Name}
- Specifies the Name of the Director allowed to connect to the Storage daemon.
- This directive is required.
-
-\item [Password = \lt{}Director-password\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Password}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Password}
- Specifies the password that must be supplied by the above named Director.
- This directive is required.
-
-\item [Monitor = \lt{}yes\vb{}no\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Monitor}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Monitor}
- If Monitor is set to {\bf no} (default), this director will have full
- access to this Storage daemon. If Monitor is set to {\bf yes}, this
- director will only be able to fetch the current status of this Storage
- daemon.
-
- Please note that if this director is being used by a Monitor, we highly
- recommend to set this directive to {\bf yes} to avoid serious security
- problems.
-
-\end{description}
-
-The following is an example of a valid Director resource definition:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Director {
- Name = MainDirector
- Password = my_secret_password
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\label{DeviceResource}
-\section{Device Resource}
-\index[general]{Resource!Device}
-\index[general]{Device Resource}
-
-The Device Resource specifies the details of each device (normally a tape
-drive) that can be used by the Storage daemon. There may be multiple
-Device resources for a single Storage daemon. In general, the properties
-specified within the Device resource are specific to the Device.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Name = {\it Device-Name}]
- \index[sd]{Name}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Name}
- Specifies the Name that the Director will use when asking to backup or
- restore to or from to this device. This is the logical Device name, and may
- be any string up to 127 characters in length. It is generally a good idea to
- make it correspond to the English name of the backup device. The physical
- name of the device is specified on the {\bf Archive Device} directive
- described below. The name you specify here is also used in your Director's
- conf file on the
- \ilink{Device directive}{StorageResource2} in its Storage
- resource.
-
-\item [Archive Device = {\it name-string}]
- \index[sd]{Archive Device}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Archive Device}
- The specified {\bf name-string} gives the system file name of the storage
- device managed by this storage daemon. This will usually be the device file
- name of a removable storage device (tape drive), for example "{\bf
- /dev/nst0}" or "{\bf /dev/rmt/0mbn}". For a DVD-writer, it will be for
- example {\bf /dev/hdc}. It may also be a directory name if you are archiving
- to disk storage. In this case, you must supply the full absolute path to the
- directory. When specifying a tape device, it is preferable that the
- "non-rewind" variant of the device file name be given. In addition, on
- systems such as Sun, which have multiple tape access methods, you must be
- sure to specify to use Berkeley I/O conventions with the device. The {\bf b}
- in the Solaris (Sun) archive specification {\bf /dev/rmt/0mbn} is what is
- needed in this case. Bacula does not support SysV tape drive behavior.
-
- As noted above, normally the Archive Device is the name of a tape drive, but
- you may also specify an absolute path to an existing directory. If the
- Device is a directory Bacula will write to file storage in the specified
- directory, and the filename used will be the Volume name as specified in the
- Catalog. If you want to write into more than one directory (i.e. to spread
- the load to different disk drives), you will need to define two Device
- resources, each containing an Archive Device with a different directory.
- \label{SetupFifo}
- In addition to a tape device name or a directory name, Bacula will accept the
- name of a FIFO. A FIFO is a special kind of file that connects two programs
- via kernel memory. If a FIFO device is specified for a backup operation, you
- must have a program that reads what Bacula writes into the FIFO. When the
- Storage daemon starts the job, it will wait for {\bf MaximumOpenWait} seconds
- for the read program to start reading, and then time it out and terminate
- the job. As a consequence, it is best to start the read program at the
- beginning of the job perhaps with the {\bf RunBeforeJob} directive. For this
- kind of device, you never want to specify {\bf AlwaysOpen}, because you want
- the Storage daemon to open it only when a job starts, so you must explicitly
- set it to {\bf No}. Since a FIFO is a one way device, Bacula will not attempt
- to read a label of a FIFO device, but will simply write on it. To create a
- FIFO Volume in the catalog, use the {\bf add} command rather than the {\bf
- label} command to avoid attempting to write a label.
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Device {
- Name = FifoStorage
- Media Type = Fifo
- Device Type = Fifo
- Archive Device = /tmp/fifo
- LabelMedia = yes
- Random Access = no
- AutomaticMount = no
- RemovableMedia = no
- MaximumOpenWait = 60
- AlwaysOpen = no
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- During a restore operation, if the Archive Device is a FIFO, Bacula will
- attempt to read from the FIFO, so you must have an external program that
- writes into the FIFO. Bacula will wait {\bf MaximumOpenWait} seconds for the
- program to begin writing and will then time it out and terminate the job. As
- noted above, you may use the {\bf RunBeforeJob} to start the writer program
- at the beginning of the job.
-
- The Archive Device directive is required.
-
-\item [Device Type = {\it type-specification}]
- \index[sd]{Device Type}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Device Type}
- The Device Type specification allows you to explicitly tell Bacula
- what kind of device you are defining. It the {\it type-specification}
- may be one of the following:
- \begin{description}
- \item [File]
- Tells Bacula that the device is a file. It may either be a
- file defined on fixed medium or a removable filesystem such as
- USB. All files must be random access devices.
- \item [Tape]
- The device is a tape device and thus is sequential access. Tape devices
- are controlled using ioctl() calls.
- \item [Fifo]
- The device is a first-in-first out sequential access read-only
- or write-only device.
- \item [DVD]
- The device is a DVD. DVDs are sequential access for writing, but
- random access for reading.
- \end{description}
-
- The Device Type directive is not required, and if not specified, Bacula
- will attempt to guess what kind of device has been specified using the
- Archive Device specification supplied. There are several advantages to
- explicitly specifying the Device Type. First, on some systems, block and
- character devices have the same type, which means that on those systems,
- Bacula is unlikely to be able to correctly guess that a device is a DVD.
- Secondly, if you explicitly specify the Device Type, the mount point
- need not be defined until the device is opened. This is the case with
- most removable devices such as USB that are mounted by the HAL daemon.
- If the Device Type is not explicitly specified, then the mount point
- must exist when the Storage daemon starts.
-
- This directive was implemented in Bacula version 1.38.6.
-
-
-\item [Media Type = {\it name-string}]
- \index[sd]{Media Type}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Media Type}
- The specified {\bf name-string} names the type of media supported by this
- device, for example, "DLT7000". Media type names are arbitrary in that you
- set them to anything you want, but they must be known to the volume
- database to keep track of which storage daemons can read which volumes. In
- general, each different storage type should have a unique Media Type
- associated with it. The same {\bf name-string} must appear in the
- appropriate Storage resource definition in the Director's configuration
- file.
-
- Even though the names you assign are arbitrary (i.e. you choose the name
- you want), you should take care in specifying them because the Media Type
- is used to determine which storage device Bacula will select during
- restore. Thus you should probably use the same Media Type specification
- for all drives where the Media can be freely interchanged. This is not
- generally an issue if you have a single Storage daemon, but it is with
- multiple Storage daemons, especially if they have incompatible media.
-
- For example, if you specify a Media Type of "DDS-4" then during the
- restore, Bacula will be able to choose any Storage Daemon that handles
- "DDS-4". If you have an autochanger, you might want to name the Media Type
- in a way that is unique to the autochanger, unless you wish to possibly use
- the Volumes in other drives. You should also ensure to have unique Media
- Type names if the Media is not compatible between drives. This
- specification is required for all devices.
-
- In addition, if you are using disk storage, each Device resource will
- generally have a different mount point or directory. In order for
- Bacula to select the correct Device resource, each one must have a
- unique Media Type.
-
-\label{Autochanger}
-\item [Autochanger = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Autochanger}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Autochanger}
- If {\bf Yes}, this device belongs to an automatic tape changer, and you
- must specify an {\bf Autochanger} resource that points to the {\bf
- Device} resources. You must also specify a
- {\bf Changer Device}. If the Autochanger directive is set to {\bf
- No} (default), the volume must be manually changed. You should also
- have an identical directive to the
- \ilink{Storage resource}{Autochanger1} in the Director's
- configuration file so that when labeling tapes you are prompted for the slot.
-
-\item [Changer Device = {\it name-string}]
- \index[sd]{Changer Device}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Changer Device}
- The specified {\bf name-string} must be the {\bf generic SCSI} device
- name of the autochanger that corresponds to the normal read/write
- {\bf Archive Device} specified in the Device resource. This
- generic SCSI device name should be specified if you have an autochanger
- or if you have a standard tape drive and want to use the
- {\bf Alert Command} (see below). For example, on Linux systems, for
- an Archive Device name of {\bf /dev/nst0}, you would specify {\bf
- /dev/sg0} for the Changer Device name. Depending on your exact
- configuration, and the number of autochangers or the type of
- autochanger, what you specify here can vary. This directive is
- optional. See the \ilink{ Using Autochangers}{AutochangersChapter} chapter
- of this manual for more details of using this and the following
- autochanger directives.
-
-\item [Changer Command = {\it name-string}]
- \index[sd]{Changer Command}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Changer Command}
- The {\bf name-string} specifies an external program to be called that will
- automatically change volumes as required by {\bf Bacula}. Normally,
- this directive will be specified only in the {\bf AutoChanger} resource,
- which is then used for all devices. However, you may also specify
- the different {\bf Changer Command} in each Device resource.
- Most frequently,
- you will specify the Bacula supplied {\bf mtx-changer} script as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Changer Command = "/path/mtx-changer %c %o %S %a %d"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- and you will install the {\bf mtx} on your system (found in the {\bf depkgs}
- release). An example of this command is in the default bacula-sd.conf file.
- For more details on the substitution characters that may be specified to
- configure your autochanger please see the
- \ilink{Autochangers}{AutochangersChapter} chapter of this manual.
- For FreeBSD users, you might want to see one of the several {\bf chio}
- scripts in {\bf examples/autochangers}.
-
-\item [Alert Command = {\it name-string}]
- \index[sd]{Alert Command}
- The {\bf name-string} specifies an external program to be called at the
- completion of each Job after the device is released. The purpose of this
- command is to check for Tape Alerts, which are present when something is
- wrong with your tape drive (at least for most modern tape drives). The same
- substitution characters that may be specified in the Changer Command may
- also be used in this string. For more information, please see the
- \ilink{Autochangers}{AutochangersChapter} chapter of this manual.
-
-
- Note, it is not necessary to have an autochanger to use this command. The
- example below uses the {\bf tapeinfo} program that comes with the {\bf mtx}
- package, but it can be used on any tape drive. However, you will need to
- specify a {\bf Changer Device} directive in your Device resource (see above)
- so that the generic SCSI device name can be edited into the command (with
- the \%c).
-
- An example of the use of this command to print Tape Alerts in the Job report
- is:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-Alert Command = "sh -c 'tapeinfo -f %c | grep TapeAlert'"
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-and an example output when there is a problem could be:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-bacula-sd Alert: TapeAlert[32]: Interface: Problem with SCSI interface
- between tape drive and initiator.
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\item [Drive Index = {\it number}]
- \index[sd]{Drive Index}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Drive Index}
- The {\bf Drive Index} that you specify is passed to the {\bf
- mtx-changer} script and is thus passed to the {\bf mtx} program. By
- default, the Drive Index is zero, so if you have only one drive in your
- autochanger, everything will work normally. However, if you have
- multiple drives, you must specify multiple Bacula Device resources (one
- for each drive). The first Device should have the Drive Index set to 0,
- and the second Device Resource should contain a Drive Index set to 1,
- and so on. This will then permit you to use two or more drives in your
- autochanger. As of Bacula version 1.38.0, using the {\bf Autochanger}
- resource, Bacula will automatically ensure that only one drive at a time
- uses the autochanger script, so you no longer need locking scripts as in
- the past -- the default mtx-changer script works for any number of
- drives.
-
-\item [Autoselect = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Autoselect}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Autoselect}
- If this directive is set to {\bf yes} (default), and the Device
- belongs to an autochanger, then when the Autochanger is referenced
- by the Director, this device can automatically be selected. If this
- directive is set to {\bf no}, then the Device can only be referenced
- by directly using the Device name in the Director. This is useful
- for reserving a drive for something special such as a high priority
- backup or restore operations.
-
-\item [Maximum Changer Wait = {\it time}]
- \index[sd]{Maximum Changer Wait}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Maximum Changer Wait}
- This directive specifies the maximum time in seconds for Bacula to wait
- for an autochanger to change the volume. If this time is exceeded,
- Bacula will invalidate the Volume slot number stored in the catalog and
- try again. If no additional changer volumes exist, Bacula will ask the
- operator to intervene. The default is 5 minutes.
-% TODO: if this is the format, then maybe "5 minutes" should be in
-% TODO: quotes? define style. see others.
-
-\item [Maximum Rewind Wait = {\it time}]
- \index[sd]{Maximum Rewind Wait}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Maximum Rewind Wait}
- This directive specifies the maximum time in seconds for Bacula to wait
- for a rewind before timing out. If this time is exceeded,
- Bacula will cancel the job. The default is 5 minutes.
-
-\item [Maximum Open Wait = {\it time}]
- \index[sd]{Maximum Open Wait}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Maximum Open Wait}
- This directive specifies the maximum time in seconds for Bacula to wait
- for a open before timing out. If this time is exceeded,
- Bacula will cancel the job. The default is 5 minutes.
-
-\item [Always Open = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Always Open}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Always Open}
- If {\bf Yes} (default), Bacula will always keep the device open unless
- specifically {\bf unmounted} by the Console program. This permits
- Bacula to ensure that the tape drive is always available, and properly
- positioned. If you set
- {\bf AlwaysOpen} to {\bf no} {\bf Bacula} will only open the drive when
- necessary, and at the end of the Job if no other Jobs are using the
- drive, it will be freed. The next time Bacula wants to append to a tape
- on a drive that was freed, Bacula will rewind the tape and position it to
- the end. To avoid unnecessary tape positioning and to minimize
- unnecessary operator intervention, it is highly recommended that {\bf
- Always Open = yes}. This also ensures that the drive is available when
- Bacula needs it.
-
- If you have {\bf Always Open = yes} (recommended) and you want to use the
- drive for something else, simply use the {\bf unmount} command in the
- Console program to release the drive. However, don't forget to remount the
- drive with {\bf mount} when the drive is available or the next Bacula job
- will block.
-
- For File storage, this directive is ignored. For a FIFO storage device, you
- must set this to {\bf No}.
-
- Please note that if you set this directive to {\bf No} Bacula will release
- the tape drive between each job, and thus the next job will rewind the tape
- and position it to the end of the data. This can be a very time consuming
- operation. In addition, with this directive set to no, certain multiple
- drive autochanger operations will fail. We strongly recommend to keep
- {\bf Always Open} set to {\bf Yes}
-
-\item [Volume Poll Interval = {\it time}]
- \index[sd]{Volume Poll Interval}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Volume Poll Interval}
- If the time specified on this directive is non-zero, after asking the
- operator to mount a new volume Bacula will periodically poll (or read) the
- drive at the specified interval to see if a new volume has been mounted. If
- the time interval is zero (the default), no polling will occur. This
- directive can be useful if you want to avoid operator intervention via the
- console. Instead, the operator can simply remove the old volume and insert
- the requested one, and Bacula on the next poll will recognize the new tape
- and continue. Please be aware that if you set this interval too small, you
- may excessively wear your tape drive if the old tape remains in the drive,
- since Bacula will read it on each poll. This can be avoided by ejecting the
- tape using the {\bf Offline On Unmount} and the {\bf Close on Poll}
- directives.
- However, if you are using a Linux 2.6 kernel or other OSes
- such as FreeBSD or Solaris, the Offline On Unmount will leave the drive
- with no tape, and Bacula will not be able to properly open the drive and
- may fail the job. For more information on this problem, please see the
- \ilink{description of Offline On Unmount}{NoTapeInDrive} in the Tape
- Testing chapter.
-
-\item [Close on Poll= {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Close on Poll}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Close on Poll}
- If {\bf Yes}, Bacula close the device (equivalent to an unmount except no
- mount is required) and reopen it at each poll. Normally this is not too
- useful unless you have the {\bf Offline on Unmount} directive set, in which
- case the drive will be taken offline preventing wear on the tape during any
- future polling. Once the operator inserts a new tape, Bacula will recognize
- the drive on the next poll and automatically continue with the backup.
- Please see above more more details.
-
-\item [Maximum Open Wait = {\it time}]
- \index[sd]{Maximum Open Wait}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Maximum Open Wait}
- This directive specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds that
- Bacula will wait for a device that is busy. The default is 5 minutes.
- If the device cannot be obtained, the current Job will be terminated in
- error. Bacula will re-attempt to open the drive the next time a Job
- starts that needs the the drive.
-
-\label{removablemedia}
-\item [Removable media = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Removable media}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Removable media}
- If {\bf Yes}, this device supports removable media (for example, tapes
- or CDs). If {\bf No}, media cannot be removed (for example, an
- intermediate backup area on a hard disk). If {\bf Removable media} is
- enabled on a File device (as opposed to a tape) the Storage daemon will
- assume that device may be something like a USB device that can be
- removed or a simply a removable harddisk. When attempting to open
- such a device, if the Volume is not found (for File devices, the Volume
- name is the same as the Filename), then the Storage daemon will search
- the entire device looking for likely Volume names, and for each one
- found, it will ask the Director if the Volume can be used. If so,
- the Storage daemon will use the first such Volume found. Thus it
- acts somewhat like a tape drive -- if the correct Volume is not found,
- it looks at what actually is found, and if it is an appendable Volume,
- it will use it.
-
- If the removable medium is not automatically mounted (e.g. udev), then
- you might consider using additional Storage daemon device directives
- such as {\bf Requires Mount}, {\bf Mount Point}, {\bf Mount Command},
- and {\bf Unmount Command}, all of which can be used in conjunction with
- {\bf Removable Media}.
-
-
-\item [Random access = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Random access}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Random access}
- If {\bf Yes}, the archive device is assumed to be a random access medium
- which supports the {\bf lseek} (or {\bf lseek64} if Largefile is enabled
- during configuration) facility. This should be set to {\bf Yes} for all
- file systems such as DVD, USB, and fixed files. It should be set to
- {\bf No} for non-random access devices such as tapes and named pipes.
-
-
-\item [Requires Mount = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Requires Mount }
- When this directive is enabled, the Storage daemon will submit
- a {\bf Mount Command} before attempting to open the device.
- You must set this directive to {\bf yes} for DVD-writers and removable
- file systems such as USB devices that are not automatically mounted
- by the operating system when plugged in or opened by Bacula.
- It should be set to {\bf no} for
- all other devices such as tapes and fixed filesystems. It should also
- be set to {\bf no} for any removable device that is automatically
- mounted by the operating system when opened (e.g. USB devices mounted
- by udev or hotplug). This directive
- indicates if the device requires to be mounted using the {\bf Mount
- Command}. To be able to write a DVD, the following directives must also
- be defined: {\bf Mount Point}, {\bf Mount Command}, {\bf Unmount
- Command} and {\bf Write Part Command}.
-
-\item [Mount Point = {\it directory}]
- \index[sd]{Mount Point}
- Directory where the device can be mounted.
- This directive is used only
- for devices that have {\bf Requires Mount} enabled such as DVD or
- USB file devices.
-
-\item [Mount Command = {\it name-string}]
- \index[sd]{Mount Command}
- This directive specifies the command that must be executed to mount
- devices such as DVDs and many USB devices. For DVDs, the
- device is written directly, but the mount command is necessary in
- order to determine the free space left on the DVD. Before the command is
- executed, \%a is replaced with the Archive Device, and \%m with the Mount
- Point.
-
- Most frequently, for a DVD, you will define it as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Mount Command = "/bin/mount -t iso9660 -o ro %a %m"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-However, if you have defined a mount point in /etc/fstab, you might be
-able to use a mount command such as:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Mount Command = "/bin/mount /media/dvd"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-See the \ilink {Edit Codes}{mountcodes} section below for more details of
-the editing codes that can be used in this directive.
-
- If you need to specify multiple commands, create a shell script.
-
-\item [Unmount Command = {\it name-string}]
- \index[sd]{Unmount Command}
- This directive specifies the command that must be executed to unmount
- devices such as DVDs and many USB devices. Before the command is
- executed, \%a is replaced with the Archive Device, and \%m with the Mount
- Point.
-
- Most frequently, you will define it as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Unmount Command = "/bin/umount %m"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-See the \ilink {Edit Codes}{mountcodes} section below for more details of
-the editing codes that can be used in this directive.
-
- If you need to specify multiple commands, create a shell script.
-
-\item [Minimum block size = {\it size-in-bytes}]
- \index[sd]{Minimum block size}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Minimum block size}
- On most modern tape drives, you will not need or want to specify this
- directive, and if you do so, it will be to make Bacula use fixed block
- sizes. This statement applies only to non-random access devices (e.g.
- tape drives). Blocks written by the storage daemon to a non-random
- archive device will never be smaller than the given {\bf size-in-bytes}.
- The Storage daemon will attempt to efficiently fill blocks with data
- received from active sessions but will, if necessary, add padding to a
- block to achieve the required minimum size.
-
- To force the block size to be fixed, as is the case for some non-random
- access devices (tape drives), set the {\bf Minimum block size} and the
- {\bf Maximum block size} to the same value (zero included). The default
- is that both the minimum and maximum block size are zero and the default
- block size is 64,512 bytes.
-
- For example, suppose you want a fixed block size of 100K bytes, then you
- would specify:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-
- Minimum block size = 100K
- Maximum block size = 100K
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- Please note that if you specify a fixed block size as shown above, the tape
- drive must either be in variable block size mode, or if it is in fixed block
- size mode, the block size (generally defined by {\bf mt}) {\bf must} be
- identical to the size specified in Bacula -- otherwise when you attempt to
- re-read your Volumes, you will get an error.
-
- If you want the block size to be variable but with a 64K minimum and 200K
- maximum (and default as well), you would specify:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-
- Minimum block size = 64K
- Maximum blocksize = 200K
-
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\item [Maximum block size = {\it size-in-bytes}]
- \index[sd]{Maximum block size}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Maximum block size}
- On most modern tape drives, you will not need to specify this directive.
- If you do so, it will most likely be to use fixed block sizes (see
- Minimum block size above). The Storage daemon will always attempt to
- write blocks of the specified {\bf size-in-bytes} to the archive device.
- As a consequence, this statement specifies both the default block size
- and the maximum block size. The size written never exceed the given
- {\bf size-in-bytes}. If adding data to a block would cause it to exceed
- the given maximum size, the block will be written to the archive device,
- and the new data will begin a new block.
-
- If no value is specified or zero is specified, the Storage daemon will
- use a default block size of 64,512 bytes (126 * 512).
-
- The maximum {\bf size-in-bytes} possible is 2,000,000.
-
-\item [Hardware End of Medium = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Hardware End of Medium}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Hardware End of Medium}
- If {\bf No}, the archive device is not required to support end of medium
- ioctl request, and the storage daemon will use the forward space file
- function to find the end of the recorded data. If {\bf Yes}, the archive
- device must support the {\tt ioctl} {\tt MTEOM} call, which will position
- the tape to the end of the recorded data. In addition, your SCSI driver must
- keep track of the file number on the tape and report it back correctly by
- the {\bf MTIOCGET} ioctl. Note, some SCSI drivers will correctly forward
- space to the end of the recorded data, but they do not keep track of the
- file number. On Linux machines, the SCSI driver has a {\bf fast-eod}
- option, which if set will cause the driver to lose track of the file
- number. You should ensure that this option is always turned off using the
- {\bf mt} program.
-
- Default setting for Hardware End of Medium is {\bf Yes}. This function is
- used before appending to a tape to ensure that no previously written data is
- lost. We recommend if you have a non-standard or unusual tape drive that you
- use the {\bf btape} program to test your drive to see whether or not it
- supports this function. All modern (after 1998) tape drives support this
- feature.
-
-\item [Fast Forward Space File = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Fast Forward Space File}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Fast Forward Space File}
- If {\bf No}, the archive device is not required to support keeping track of
- the file number ({\bf MTIOCGET} ioctl) during forward space file. If {\bf
- Yes}, the archive device must support the {\tt ioctl} {\tt MTFSF} call, which
- virtually all drivers support, but in addition, your SCSI driver must keep
- track of the file number on the tape and report it back correctly by the
- {\bf MTIOCGET} ioctl. Note, some SCSI drivers will correctly forward space,
- but they do not keep track of the file number or more seriously, they do not
- report end of medium.
-
- Default setting for Fast Forward Space File is {\bf Yes}.
-
-\item [Use MTIOCGET = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Use MTIOCGET}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Use MTIOCGET}
- If {\bf No}, the operating system is not required to support keeping track of
- the file number and reporting it in the ({\bf MTIOCGET} ioctl). The default
- is {\bf Yes}. If you must set this to No, Bacula will do the proper file
- position determination, but it is very unfortunate because it means that
- tape movement is very inefficient.
- Fortunately, this operation system deficiency seems to be the case only
- on a few *BSD systems. Operating systems known to work correctly are
- Solaris, Linux and FreeBSD.
-
-\item [BSF at EOM = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{BSF at EOM}
- \index[sd]{Directive!BSF at EOM}
- If {\bf No}, the default, no special action is taken by Bacula with the End
- of Medium (end of tape) is reached because the tape will be positioned after
- the last EOF tape mark, and Bacula can append to the tape as desired.
- However, on some systems, such as FreeBSD, when Bacula reads the End of
- Medium (end of tape), the tape will be positioned after the second EOF tape
- mark (two successive EOF marks indicated End of Medium). If Bacula appends
- from that point, all the appended data will be lost. The solution for such
- systems is to specify {\bf BSF at EOM} which causes Bacula to backspace over
- the second EOF mark. Determination of whether or not you need this directive
- is done using the {\bf test} command in the {\bf btape} program.
-
-\item [TWO EOF = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{TWO EOF}
- \index[sd]{Directive!TWO EOF}
- If {\bf Yes}, Bacula will write two end of file marks when terminating a
- tape -- i.e. after the last job or at the end of the medium. If {\bf No},
- the default, Bacula will only write one end of file to terminate the tape.
-
-\item [Backward Space Record = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Backward Space Record}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Backward Space Record}
- If {\it Yes}, the archive device supports the {\tt MTBSR ioctl} to backspace
- records. If {\it No}, this call is not used and the device must be rewound
- and advanced forward to the desired position. Default is {\bf Yes} for non
- random-access devices. This function if enabled is used at the end of a
- Volume after writing the end of file and any ANSI/IBM labels to determine
- whether or not the last block was written correctly. If you turn this
- function off, the test will not be done. This causes no harm as the re-read
- process is precautionary rather than required.
-
-\item [Backward Space File = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Backward Space File}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Backward Space File}
- If {\it Yes}, the archive device supports the {\bf MTBSF} and {\bf MTBSF
- ioctl}s to backspace over an end of file mark and to the start of a file. If
- {\it No}, these calls are not used and the device must be rewound and
- advanced forward to the desired position. Default is {\bf Yes} for non
- random-access devices.
-
-\item [Forward Space Record = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Forward Space Record}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Forward Space Record}
- If {\it Yes}, the archive device must support the {\bf MTFSR ioctl} to
- forward space over records. If {\bf No}, data must be read in order to
- advance the position on the device. Default is {\bf Yes} for non
- random-access devices.
-
-\item [Forward Space File = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Forward Space File}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Forward Space File}
- If {\bf Yes}, the archive device must support the {\tt MTFSF ioctl} to
- forward space by file marks. If {\it No}, data must be read to advance the
- position on the device. Default is {\bf Yes} for non random-access devices.
-
-\item [Offline On Unmount = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Offline On Unmount}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Offline On Unmount}
- The default for this directive is {\bf No}. If {\bf Yes} the archive device
- must support the {\tt MTOFFL ioctl} to rewind and take the volume offline. In
- this case, Bacula will issue the offline (eject) request before closing the
- device during the {\bf unmount} command. If {\bf No} Bacula will not attempt
- to offline the device before unmounting it. After an offline is issued, the
- cassette will be ejected thus {\bf requiring operator intervention} to
- continue, and on some systems require an explicit load command to be issued
- ({\bf mt -f /dev/xxx load}) before the system will recognize the tape. If you
- are using an autochanger, some devices require an offline to be issued prior
- to changing the volume. However, most devices do not and may get very
- confused.
-
- If you are using a Linux 2.6 kernel or other OSes
- such as FreeBSD or Solaris, the Offline On Unmount will leave the drive
- with no tape, and Bacula will not be able to properly open the drive and
- may fail the job. For more information on this problem, please see the
- \ilink{description of Offline On Unmount}{NoTapeInDrive} in the Tape
- Testing chapter.
-
-\item [Maximum Concurrent Jobs = \lt{}number\gt{}]
- \index[sd]{Device Maximum Concurrent Jobs}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Device Maximum Concurrent Jobs}
- \index[sd]{Directive!New in 3.0.3}
- where \lt{}number\gt{} is the maximum number of Jobs that can run
- concurrently on a specified Device. Using this directive, it is possible
- to have different Jobs using multiple drives, because when
- the Maximum Concurrent Jobs limit is
- reached, the Storage Daemon will start new Jobs on any other available
- compatible drive. This facilitates writing to multiple drives with
- multiple Jobs that all use the same Pool.
-
-\item [Maximum Volume Size = {\it size}]
- \index[sd]{Maximum Volume Size}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Maximum Volume Size}
- No more than {\bf size} bytes will be written onto a given volume on the
- archive device. This directive is used mainly in testing Bacula to
- simulate a small Volume. It can also be useful if you wish to limit the
- size of a File Volume to say less than 2GB of data. In some rare cases
- of really antiquated tape drives that do not properly indicate when the
- end of a tape is reached during writing (though I have read about such
- drives, I have never personally encountered one). Please note, this
- directive is deprecated (being phased out) in favor of the {\bf Maximum
- Volume Bytes} defined in the Director's configuration file.
-
-\item [Maximum File Size = {\it size}]
- \index[sd]{Maximum File Size}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Maximum File Size}
- No more than {\bf size} bytes will be written into a given logical file
- on the volume. Once this size is reached, an end of file mark is
- written on the volume and subsequent data are written into the next
- file. Breaking long sequences of data blocks with file marks permits
- quicker positioning to the start of a given stream of data and can
- improve recovery from read errors on the volume. The default is one
- Gigabyte. This directive creates EOF marks only on tape media.
- However, regardless of the medium type (tape, disk, DVD, ...) each time
- a the Maximum File Size is exceeded, a record is put into the catalog
- database that permits seeking to that position on the medium for
- restore operations. If you set this to a small value (e.g. 1MB),
- you will generate lots of database records (JobMedia) and may
- significantly increase CPU/disk overhead.
-
- If you are configuring an LTO-3 or LTO-4 tape, you probably will
- want to set the {\bf Maximum File Size} to 2GB to avoid making
- the drive stop to write an EOF mark.
-
- Note, this directive does not limit the size of Volumes that Bacula
- will create regardless of whether they are tape or disk volumes. It
- changes only the number of EOF marks on a tape and the number of
- block positioning records (see below) that are generated. If you
- want to limit the size of all Volumes for a particular device, use
- the {\bf Maximum Volume Size} directive (above), or use the
- {\bf Maximum Volume Bytes} directive in the Director's Pool resource,
- which does the same thing but on a Pool (Volume) basis.
-
-\item [Block Positioning = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Block Positioning}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Block Positioning}
- This directive tells Bacula not to use block positioning when doing restores.
- Turning this directive off can cause Bacula to be {\bf extremely} slow
- when restoring files. You might use this directive if you wrote your
- tapes with Bacula in variable block mode (the default), but your drive
- was in fixed block mode. The default is {\bf yes}.
-
-\item [Maximum Network Buffer Size = {\it bytes}]
- \index[sd]{Maximum Network Buffer Size}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Maximum Network Buffer Size}
- where {\it bytes} specifies the initial network buffer size to use with the
- File daemon. This size will be adjusted down if it is too large until
- it is accepted by the OS. Please use care in setting this value since if
- it is too large, it will be trimmed by 512 bytes until the OS is happy,
- which may require a large number of system calls. The default value is
- 32,768 bytes.
-
- The default size was chosen to be relatively large but not too big in
- the case that you are transmitting data over Internet. It is clear that
- on a high speed local network, you can increase this number and improve
- performance. For example, some users have found that if you use a value
- of 65,536 bytes they get five to ten times the throughput. Larger values for
- most users don't seem to improve performance. If you are interested
- in improving your backup speeds, this is definitely a place to
- experiment. You will probably also want to make the corresponding change
- in each of your File daemons conf files.
-
-
-\item [Maximum Spool Size = {\it bytes}]
- \index[sd]{Maximum Spool Size}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Maximum Spool Size}
- where the bytes specify the maximum spool size for all jobs that are
- running. The default is no limit.
-
-\item [Maximum Job Spool Size = {\it bytes}]
- \index[sd]{Maximum Job Spool Size}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Maximum Job Spool Size}
- where the bytes specify the maximum spool size for any one job that is
- running. The default is no limit.
- This directive is implemented only in version 1.37 and later.
-
-\item [Spool Directory = {\it directory}]
- \index[sd]{Spool Directory}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Spool Directory}
- specifies the name of the directory to be used to store the spool files for
- this device. This directory is also used to store temporary part files when
- writing to a device that requires mount (DVD). The default is to use the
- working directory.
-
-\item [Maximum Part Size = {\it bytes}]
- \index[sd]{Maximum Part Size}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Maximum Part Size}
- This is the maximum size of a volume part file. The default is no limit.
- This directive is implemented only in version 1.37 and later.
-
- If the device requires mount, it is transferred to the device when this size
- is reached. In this case, you must take care to have enough disk space left
- in the spool directory.
-
- Otherwise, it is left on the hard disk.
-
- It is ignored for tape and FIFO devices.
-
-
-\end{description}
-
-\label{mountcodes}
-\section{Edit Codes for Mount and Unmount Directives}
-\index[general]{Directives!Edit Codes}
-\index[general]{Edit Codes for Mount and Unmount Directives }
-
-Before submitting the {\bf Mount Command}, {\bf Unmount Command},
-{\bf Write Part Command}, or {\bf Free Space Command} directives
-to the operating system, Bacula performs character substitution of the
-following characters:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- %% = %
- %a = Archive device name
- %e = erase (set if cannot mount and first part)
- %n = part number
- %m = mount point
- %v = last part name (i.e. filename)
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-
-\section{Devices that require a mount (DVD)}
-\index[general]{Devices that require a mount (DVD)}
-\index[general]{DVD!Devices that require a mount}
-
-All the directives in this section are implemented only in
-Bacula version 1.37 and later and hence are available in version 1.38.6.
-
-As of version 1.39.5, the directives
-"Requires Mount", "Mount Point", "Mount Command", and "Unmount Command"
-apply to removable filesystems such as USB in addition to DVD.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Requires Mount = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Requires Mount}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Requires Mount}
- You must set this directive to {\bf yes} for DVD-writers, and to {\bf no} for
- all other devices (tapes/files). This directive indicates if the device
- requires to be mounted to be read, and if it must be written in a special way.
- If it set, {\bf Mount Point}, {\bf Mount Command}, {\bf Unmount Command} and
- {\bf Write Part Command} directives must also be defined.
-
-\item [Mount Point = {\it directory}]
- \index[sd]{Mount Point}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Mount Point}
- Directory where the device can be mounted.
-
-\item [Mount Command = {\it name-string}]
- \index[sd]{Mount Command}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Mount Command}
- Command that must be executed to mount the device. Before the command is
- executed, \%a is replaced with the Archive Device, and \%m with the Mount
- Point.
-
- Most frequently, you will define it as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Mount Command = "/bin/mount -t iso9660 -o ro %a %m"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-For some media, you may need multiple commands. If so, it is recommended
-that you use a shell script instead of putting them all into the Mount
-Command. For example, instead of this:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Mount Command = "/usr/local/bin/mymount"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Where that script contains:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#!/bin/sh
-ndasadmin enable -s 1 -o w
-sleep 2
-mount /dev/ndas-00323794-0p1 /backup
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-Similar consideration should be given to all other Command parameters.
-
-\item [Unmount Command = {\it name-string}]
- \index[sd]{Unmount Command}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Unmount Command}
- Command that must be executed to unmount the device. Before the command is
- executed, \%a is replaced with the Archive Device, and \%m with the Mount
- Point.
-
- Most frequently, you will define it as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Unmount Command = "/bin/umount %m"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- If you need to specify multiple commands, create a shell script.
-
-\item [Write Part Command = {\it name-string}]
- \index[sd]{Write Part Command}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Write Part Command}
- Command that must be executed to write a part to the device. Before the
- command is executed, \%a is replaced with the Archive Device, \%m with the
- Mount Point, \%e is replaced with 1 if we are writing the first part,
- and with 0 otherwise, and \%v with the current part filename.
-
- For a DVD, you will most frequently specify the Bacula supplied {\bf
- dvd-handler} script as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Write Part Command = "/path/dvd-handler %a write %e %v"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- Where {\bf /path} is the path to your scripts install directory, and
- dvd-handler is the Bacula supplied script file.
- This command will already be present, but commented out,
- in the default bacula-sd.conf file. To use it, simply remove
- the comment (\#) symbol.
-
- If you need to specify multiple commands, create a shell script.
-
-
-\item [Free Space Command = {\it name-string}]
- \index[sd]{Free Space Command}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Free Space Command}
- Command that must be executed to check how much free space is left on the
- device. Before the command is executed,\%a is replaced with the Archive
- Device, \%m with the Mount Point, \%e is replaced with 1 if we are writing
- the first part, and with 0 otherwise, and \%v with the current part filename.
-
- For a DVD, you will most frequently specify the Bacula supplied {\bf
- dvd-handler} script as follows:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
- Free Space Command = "/path/dvd-handler %a free"
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
- Where {\bf /path} is the path to your scripts install directory, and
- dvd-handler is the Bacula supplied script file.
- If you want to specify your own command, please look at the code of
- dvd-handler to see what output Bacula expects from this command.
- This command will already be present, but commented out,
- in the default bacula-sd.conf file. To use it, simply remove
- the comment (\#) symbol.
-
- If you do not set it, Bacula will expect there is always free space on the
- device.
-
- If you need to specify multiple commands, create a shell script.
-
-\end{description}
-
-%% This pulls in the Autochanger resource from another file.
-\label{AutochangerRes}
-\label{AutochangerResource1}
-\input{autochangerres}
-
-
-
-
-\section{Capabilities}
-\index[general]{Capabilities}
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [Label media = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Label media}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Label media}
- If {\bf Yes}, permits this device to automatically label blank media
- without an explicit operator command. It does so by using an internal
- algorithm as defined on the \ilink{Label Format}{Label} record in each
- Pool resource. If this is {\bf No} as by default, Bacula will label
- tapes only by specific operator command ({\bf label} in the Console) or
- when the tape has been recycled. The automatic labeling feature is most
- useful when writing to disk rather than tape volumes.
-
-\item [Automatic mount = {\it yes\vb{}no}]
- \index[sd]{Automatic mount}
- \index[sd]{Directive!Automatic mount}
- If {\bf Yes} (the default), permits the daemon to examine the device to
- determine if it contains a Bacula labeled volume. This is done
- initially when the daemon is started, and then at the beginning of each
- job. This directive is particularly important if you have set
- {\bf Always Open = no} because it permits Bacula to attempt to read the
- device before asking the system operator to mount a tape. However,
- please note that the tape must be mounted before the job begins.
-
-\end{description}
-
-\section{Messages Resource}
-\label{MessagesResource1}
-\index[general]{Resource!Messages}
-\index[general]{Messages Resource}
-
-For a description of the Messages Resource, please see the
-\ilink{Messages Resource}{MessagesChapter} Chapter of this
-manual.
-
-\section{Sample Storage Daemon Configuration File}
-\label{SampleConfiguration}
-\index[general]{File!Sample Storage Daemon Configuration}
-\index[general]{Sample Storage Daemon Configuration File}
-
-A example Storage Daemon configuration file might be the following:
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-#
-# Default Bacula Storage Daemon Configuration file
-#
-# For Bacula release 1.37.2 (07 July 2005) -- gentoo 1.4.16
-#
-# You may need to change the name of your tape drive
-# on the "Archive Device" directive in the Device
-# resource. If you change the Name and/or the
-# "Media Type" in the Device resource, please ensure
-# that bacula-dir.conf has corresponding changes.
-#
-Storage { # definition of myself
- Name = rufus-sd
- Address = rufus
- WorkingDirectory = "$HOME/bacula/bin/working"
- Pid Directory = "$HOME/bacula/bin/working"
- Maximum Concurrent Jobs = 20
-}
-#
-# List Directors who are permitted to contact Storage daemon
-#
-Director {
- Name = rufus-dir
- Password = "ZF9Ctf5PQoWCPkmR3s4atCB0usUPg+vWWyIo2VS5ti6k"
-}
-#
-# Restricted Director, used by tray-monitor to get the
-# status of the storage daemon
-#
-Director {
- Name = rufus-mon
- Password = "9usxgc307dMbe7jbD16v0PXlhD64UVasIDD0DH2WAujcDsc6"
- Monitor = yes
-}
-#
-# Devices supported by this Storage daemon
-# To connect, the Director's bacula-dir.conf must have the
-# same Name and MediaType.
-#
-Autochanger {
- Name = Autochanger
- Device = Drive-1
- Device = Drive-2
- Changer Command = "/home/kern/bacula/bin/mtx-changer %c %o %S %a %d"
- Changer Device = /dev/sg0
-}
-
-Device {
- Name = Drive-1 #
- Drive Index = 0
- Media Type = DLT-8000
- Archive Device = /dev/nst0
- AutomaticMount = yes; # when device opened, read it
- AlwaysOpen = yes;
- RemovableMedia = yes;
- RandomAccess = no;
- AutoChanger = yes
- Alert Command = "sh -c 'tapeinfo -f %c |grep TapeAlert|cat'"
-}
-
-Device {
- Name = Drive-2 #
- Drive Index = 1
- Media Type = DLT-8000
- Archive Device = /dev/nst1
- AutomaticMount = yes; # when device opened, read it
- AlwaysOpen = yes;
- RemovableMedia = yes;
- RandomAccess = no;
- AutoChanger = yes
- Alert Command = "sh -c 'tapeinfo -f %c |grep TapeAlert|cat'"
-}
-
-Device {
- Name = "HP DLT 80"
- Media Type = DLT8000
- Archive Device = /dev/nst0
- AutomaticMount = yes; # when device opened, read it
- AlwaysOpen = yes;
- RemovableMedia = yes;
-}
-#Device {
-# Name = SDT-7000 #
-# Media Type = DDS-2
-# Archive Device = /dev/nst0
-# AutomaticMount = yes; # when device opened, read it
-# AlwaysOpen = yes;
-# RemovableMedia = yes;
-#}
-#Device {
-# Name = Floppy
-# Media Type = Floppy
-# Archive Device = /mnt/floppy
-# RemovableMedia = yes;
-# Random Access = Yes;
-# AutomaticMount = yes; # when device opened, read it
-# AlwaysOpen = no;
-#}
-#Device {
-# Name = FileStorage
-# Media Type = File
-# Archive Device = /tmp
-# LabelMedia = yes; # lets Bacula label unlabeled media
-# Random Access = Yes;
-# AutomaticMount = yes; # when device opened, read it
-# RemovableMedia = no;
-# AlwaysOpen = no;
-#}
-#Device {
-# Name = "NEC ND-1300A"
-# Media Type = DVD
-# Archive Device = /dev/hda
-# LabelMedia = yes; # lets Bacula label unlabeled media
-# Random Access = Yes;
-# AutomaticMount = yes; # when device opened, read it
-# RemovableMedia = yes;
-# AlwaysOpen = no;
-# MaximumPartSize = 800M;
-# RequiresMount = yes;
-# MountPoint = /mnt/cdrom;
-# MountCommand = "/bin/mount -t iso9660 -o ro %a %m";
-# UnmountCommand = "/bin/umount %m";
-# SpoolDirectory = /tmp/backup;
-# WritePartCommand = "/etc/bacula/dvd-handler %a write %e %v"
-# FreeSpaceCommand = "/etc/bacula/dvd-handler %a free"
-#}
-#
-# A very old Exabyte with no end of media detection
-#
-#Device {
-# Name = "Exabyte 8mm"
-# Media Type = "8mm"
-# Archive Device = /dev/nst0
-# Hardware end of medium = No;
-# AutomaticMount = yes; # when device opened, read it
-# AlwaysOpen = Yes;
-# RemovableMedia = yes;
-#}
-#
-# Send all messages to the Director,
-# mount messages also are sent to the email address
-#
-Messages {
- Name = Standard
- director = rufus-dir = all
- operator = root = mount
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
+++ /dev/null
-#!/usr/bin/perl -w
-#
-use strict;
-
-# Used to change the names of the image files generated by latex2html from imgxx.png
-# to meaningful names. Provision is made to go either from or to the meaningful names.
-# The meaningful names are obtained from a file called imagename_translations, which
-# is generated by extensions to latex2html in the make_image_file subroutine in
-# bacula.perl.
-
-# Opens the file imagename_translations and reads the contents into a hash.
-# The hash is creaed with the imgxx.png files as the key if processing TO
-# meaningful filenames, and with the meaningful filenames as the key if
-# processing FROM meaningful filenames.
-# Then opens the html file(s) indicated in the command-line arguments and
-# changes all image references according to the translations described in the
-# above file. Finally, it renames the image files.
-#
-# Original creation: 3-27-05 by Karl Cunningham.
-# Modified 5-21-05 to go FROM and TO meaningful filenames.
-#
-my $TRANSFILE = "imagename_translations";
-my $path;
-
-# Loads the contents of $TRANSFILE file into the hash referenced in the first
-# argument. The hash is loaded to translate old to new if $direction is 0,
-# otherwise it is loaded to translate new to old. In this context, the
-# 'old' filename is the meaningful name, and the 'new' filename is the
-# imgxx.png filename. It is assumed that the old image is the one that
-# latex2html has used as the source to create the imgxx.png filename.
-# The filename extension is taken from the file
-sub read_transfile {
- my ($trans,$direction) = @_;
-
- if (!open IN,"<$path$TRANSFILE") {
- print "WARNING: Cannot open image translation file $path$TRANSFILE for reading\n";
- print " Image filename translation aborted\n\n";
- exit 0;
- }
-
- while (<IN>) {
- chomp;
- my ($new,$old) = split(/\001/);
-
- # Old filenames will usually have a leading ./ which we don't need.
- $old =~ s/^\.\///;
-
- # The filename extension of the old filename must be made to match
- # the new filename because it indicates the encoding format of the image.
- my ($ext) = $new =~ /(\.[^\.]*)$/;
- $old =~ s/\.[^\.]*$/$ext/;
- if ($direction == 0) {
- $trans->{$new} = $old;
- } else {
- $trans->{$old} = $new;
- }
- }
- close IN;
-}
-
-# Translates the image names in the file given as the first argument, according to
-# the translations in the hash that is given as the second argument.
-# The file contents are read in entirely into a string, the string is processed, and
-# the file contents are then written. No particular care is taken to ensure that the
-# file is not lost if a system failure occurs at an inopportune time. It is assumed
-# that the html files being processed here can be recreated on demand.
-#
-# Links to other files are added to the %filelist for processing. That way,
-# all linked files will be processed (assuming they are local).
-sub translate_html {
- my ($filename,$trans,$filelist) = @_;
- my ($contents,$out,$this,$img,$dest);
- my $cnt = 0;
-
- # If the filename is an external link ignore it. And drop any file:// from
- # the filename.
- $filename =~ /^(http|ftp|mailto)\:/ and return 0;
- $filename =~ s/^file\:\/\///;
- # Load the contents of the html file.
- if (!open IF,"<$path$filename") {
- print "WARNING: Cannot open $path$filename for reading\n";
- print " Image Filename Translation aborted\n\n";
- exit 0;
- }
-
- while (<IF>) {
- $contents .= $_;
- }
- close IF;
-
- # Now do the translation...
- # First, search for an image filename.
- while ($contents =~ /\<\s*IMG[^\>]*SRC=\"/si) {
- $contents = $';
- $out .= $` . $&;
-
- # The next thing is an image name. Get it and translate it.
- $contents =~ /^(.*?)\"/s;
- $contents = $';
- $this = $&;
- $img = $1;
- # If the image is in our list of ones to be translated, do it
- # and feed the result to the output.
- $cnt += $this =~ s/$img/$trans->{$img}/ if (defined($trans->{$img}));
- $out .= $this;
- }
- $out .= $contents;
-
- # Now send the translated text to the html file, overwriting what's there.
- open OF,">$path$filename" or die "Cannot open $path$filename for writing\n";
- print OF $out;
- close OF;
-
- # Now look for any links to other files and add them to the list of files to do.
- while ($out =~ /\<\s*A[^\>]*HREF=\"(.*?)\"/si) {
- $out = $';
- $dest = $1;
- # Drop an # and anything after it.
- $dest =~ s/\#.*//;
- $filelist->{$dest} = '' if $dest;
- }
- return $cnt;
-}
-
-# REnames the image files spefified in the %translate hash.
-sub rename_images {
- my $translate = shift;
- my ($response);
-
- foreach (keys(%$translate)) {
- if (! $translate->{$_}) {
- print " WARNING: No destination Filename for $_\n";
- } else {
- $response = `mv -f $path$_ $path$translate->{$_} 2>&1`;
- $response and print "ERROR from system $response\n";
- }
- }
-}
-
-#################################################
-############# MAIN #############################
-################################################
-
-# %filelist starts out with keys from the @ARGV list. As files are processed,
-# any links to other files are added to the %filelist. A hash of processed
-# files is kept so we don't do any twice.
-
-# The first argument must be either --to_meaningful_names or --from_meaningful_names
-
-my (%translate,$search_regex,%filelist,%completed,$thisfile);
-my ($cnt,$direction);
-
-my $arg0 = shift(@ARGV);
-$arg0 =~ /^(--to_meaningful_names|--from_meaningful_names)$/ or
- die "ERROR: First argument must be either \'--to_meaningful_names\' or \'--from_meaningful_names\'\n";
-
-$direction = ($arg0 eq '--to_meaningful_names') ? 0 : 1;
-
-(@ARGV) or die "ERROR: Filename(s) to process must be given as arguments\n";
-
-# Use the first argument to get the path to the file of translations.
-my $tmp = $ARGV[0];
-($path) = $tmp =~ /(.*\/)/;
-$path = '' unless $path;
-
-read_transfile(\%translate,$direction);
-
-foreach (@ARGV) {
- # Strip the path from the filename, and use it later on.
- if (s/(.*\/)//) {
- $path = $1;
- } else {
- $path = '';
- }
- $filelist{$_} = '';
-
- while ($thisfile = (keys(%filelist))[0]) {
- $cnt += translate_html($thisfile,\%translate,\%filelist) if (!exists($completed{$thisfile}));
- delete($filelist{$thisfile});
- $completed{$thisfile} = '';
- }
- print "translate_images.pl: $cnt image filenames translated ",($direction)?"from":"to"," meaningful names\n";
-}
-
-rename_images(\%translate);
#
DOC=problems
MAINDOC=Bacula_Problem_Resolution_G.html
-IMAGES=/home/kern/bacula/docs/docs/images
+IMAGES=@BUILD_DIR@/images
DOCDIR=`pwd`
TEXFILES=$(wildcard *tex)
MAKEFORWEB=$(DOCDIR)/web.makefile
.PHONY:
.DONTCARE:
-
-updateversion:
- @/bin/bash ../../update_version
+pdfcovers:
+ @echo -n "Linking coverpage and background PDF format..."
+ @(cd $(SVGCOVERSDIR) ; make pdf)
+ @ln -sf `pwd`/${PDFCOVERSDIR}/${COVERNAME}.pdf `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.pdf
+ @echo "Done."
+
+pdfimages:
+ @echo "Generating PDF images..."
+ @(cd ${IMAGES}/svg ; make pdf)
+ @echo "Done."
+
+pngimages:
+ @echo "Generating PNG images..."
+ @(cd ${IMAGES}/svg ; make png)
+ @echo "Done."
+
+epsimages:
+ @echo "Generating EPS images..."
+ @(cd ${IMAGES}/svg ; make eps)
+ @rm -rf ${IMAGES}/png
+ @rm -rf ${IMAGES}/pdf
+ @echo "Done."
+
+epscovers:
+ @echo -n "Linking coverpage and background EPS format..."
+ @(cd $(SVGCOVERSDIR) ; make eps)
+ @ln -sf `pwd`/${EPSCOVERSDIR}/${COVERNAME}.eps `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.eps
+ @rm -f `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.pdf
+ @echo "Done."
+
+commonfiles:
+ @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
+ @echo -n "Linking shared files..."
+ @(for L in $(LICENCES); do ln -sf $$L .; done)
+ @echo "Done"
destdir:
@echo
(cd $(WWW_BUILD_DIR) ; make )
@echo "Done making web"
-
show:
evince $(PDF_DEST_DIR)/${DOC}.pdf
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-DOC=problems
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Problem_Resolution_G.html
-IMAGES=@BUILD_DIR@/images
-DOCDIR=`pwd`
-TEXFILES=$(wildcard *tex)
-MAKEFORWEB=$(DOCDIR)/web.makefile
-WEBFILESTOLINK=$(DOCDIR)/latex2html-init.pl $(DOCDIR)/bacula.sty $(DOCDIR)/translate_images.pl
-#
-# Main directory where to find all the documentation
-DESTDIR=../pdf-and-html
-#
-# Location of documentation in PDF
-PDF_DEST_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/$(DOC)
-#
-# Location of HTML documentation
-HTML_DEST_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/$(DOC)
-#
-# Temporary directory to translate tex to HTML
-WWW_BUILD_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/www-$(DOC)
-#
-# LATEX compiler
-LATEX_TO_PDF= pdflatex --output-directory $(PDF_DEST_DIR)
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: pdftex web mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-updateversion:
- @/bin/bash ../../update_version
-
-destdir:
- @echo
- @echo "Making output directories..."
- @mkdir -p $(PDF_DEST_DIR) $(HTML_DEST_DIR)
- echo "Output directories done"
-
-pdfcovers:
- @echo ""
- @echo "Making covers for $(DOC)"
- @(cd $(IMAGES)/svg ; make pdf)
- @echo "Covers done."
- @echo ""
-
-external-references: updateversion destdir pdfcovers
- @echo " "
- @echo "Building external references for $(DOC)"
- @echo "\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg,.jpeg,.eps}\n" > graphicspolicy.tex
- @export TEXINPUTS=.:../../../latex//: ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC)
- @rm -f $(PDF_DEST_DIR)/$(DOC).pdf
- @echo "$(DOC) external references done."
-
-pdftex: updateversion destdir pdfcovers
- @echo ""
- @echo "Making PDF manual with $(LATEX_TO_PDF)compile..."
- @echo "\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg,.jpeg,.eps}\n" > graphicspolicy.tex
- @export TEXINPUTS=.:../../../latex//: ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC); makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC); $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC)
- @echo "Done"
-
-
-web: mini-clean
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @mkdir -p $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @echo "Adapting $(DOC) tex files for HTML documentation..."
- @(for F in $(TEXFILES) ;\
- do \
- cat $$F | sed -f ../pattern-to-handle > $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/$$F ; \
- done)
- @ln -sf $(MAKEFORWEB) $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/Makefile
- @(for F in $(WEBFILESTOLINK);\
- do \
- ln -sf $$F $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/;\
- done)
- (cd $(WWW_BUILD_DIR) ; make )
- @echo "Done making web"
-
-
-show:
- evince $(PDF_DEST_DIR)/${DOC}.pdf
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
- @rm -rf ../www-$(DOC)
-
-clean:
- @rm -f graphicspolicy.tex
- @rm -f 1 2 3
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.pdf *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f images.tex ${DOC}i.tex
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f ${DOC}.html ${DOC}.pdf
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @rm -rf $(HTML_DEST_DIR)
#
DOC=utility
MAINDOC=Bacula_Utility_Programs.html
-IMAGES=/home/kern/bacula/docs/docs/images
+IMAGES=../../../images
DOCDIR=`pwd`
TEXFILES=$(wildcard *tex)
MAKEFORWEB=$(DOCDIR)/web.makefile
.DONTCARE:
-updateversion:
- @/bin/bash ../../update_version
-
destdir:
@echo
@echo "Making output directories..."
@mkdir -p $(PDF_DEST_DIR) $(HTML_DEST_DIR)
echo "Output directories done"
+pdfcovers:
+ @echo -n "Linking coverpage and background PDF format..."
+ @(cd $(SVGCOVERSDIR) ; make pdf)
+ @ln -sf `pwd`/${PDFCOVERSDIR}/${COVERNAME}.pdf `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.pdf
+ @echo "Done."
+
+pdfimages:
+ @echo "Generating PDF images..."
+ @(cd ${IMAGES}/svg ; make pdf)
+ @echo "Done."
+
+pngimages:
+ @echo "Generating PNG images..."
+ @(cd ${IMAGES}/svg ; make png)
+ @echo "Done."
+
+epsimages:
+ @echo "Generating EPS images..."
+ @(cd ${IMAGES}/svg ; make eps)
+ @rm -rf ${IMAGES}/png
+ @rm -rf ${IMAGES}/pdf
+ @echo "Done."
+
+epscovers:
+ @echo -n "Linking coverpage and background EPS format..."
+ @(cd $(SVGCOVERSDIR) ; make eps)
+ @ln -sf `pwd`/${EPSCOVERSDIR}/${COVERNAME}.eps `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.eps
+ @rm -f `pwd`/${BSYSMANUALDIR}/${BSYSMANNAME}.pdf
+ @echo "Done."
+
+commonfiles:
+ @echo -n "Making version `cat version.tex`"
+ @echo -n "Linking shared files..."
+ @(for L in $(LICENCES); do ln -sf $$L .; done)
+ @echo "Done"
+
pdfcovers:
@echo ""
@echo "Making covers for $(DOC)"
(cd $(WWW_BUILD_DIR) ; make )
@echo "Done making web"
-
show:
evince $(PDF_DEST_DIR)/${DOC}.pdf
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-DOC=utility
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Utility_Programs.html
-IMAGES=@BUILD_DIR@/images
-DOCDIR=`pwd`
-TEXFILES=$(wildcard *tex)
-MAKEFORWEB=$(DOCDIR)/web.makefile
-WEBFILESTOLINK=$(DOCDIR)/latex2html-init.pl $(DOCDIR)/bacula.sty $(DOCDIR)/translate_images.pl
-#
-# Main directory where to find all the documentation
-DESTDIR=../pdf-and-html
-#
-# Location of documentation in PDF
-PDF_DEST_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/$(DOC)
-#
-# Location of HTML documentation
-HTML_DEST_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/$(DOC)
-#
-# Temporary directory to translate tex to HTML
-WWW_BUILD_DIR=$(DESTDIR)/www-$(DOC)
-#
-# LATEX compiler
-LATEX_TO_PDF= pdflatex --output-directory $(PDF_DEST_DIR)
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: pdftex web mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-updateversion:
- @/bin/bash ../../update_version
-
-destdir:
- @echo
- @echo "Making output directories..."
- @mkdir -p $(PDF_DEST_DIR) $(HTML_DEST_DIR)
- echo "Output directories done"
-
-pdfcovers:
- @echo ""
- @echo "Making covers for $(DOC)"
- @(cd $(IMAGES)/svg ; make pdf)
- @echo "Covers done."
- @echo ""
-
-external-references: updateversion destdir pdfcovers
- @echo " "
- @echo "Building external references for $(DOC)"
- @echo "\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg,.jpeg,.eps}\n" > graphicspolicy.tex
- @export TEXINPUTS=.:../../../latex//: ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC)
- @rm -f $(PDF_DEST_DIR)/$(DOC).pdf
- @echo "$(DOC) external references done."
-
-pdftex: updateversion destdir pdfcovers
- @echo ""
- @echo "Making PDF manual with $(LATEX_TO_PDF)compile..."
- @echo "\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg,.jpeg,.eps}\n" > graphicspolicy.tex
- @export TEXINPUTS=.:../../../latex//: ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC); makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null ; $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC); $(LATEX_TO_PDF) $(DOC)
- @echo "Done"
-
-
-web: mini-clean
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @mkdir -p $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @echo "Adapting $(DOC) tex files for HTML documentation..."
- @(for F in $(TEXFILES) ;\
- do \
- cat $$F | sed -f ../pattern-to-handle > $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/$$F ; \
- done)
- @ln -sf $(MAKEFORWEB) $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/Makefile
- @(for F in $(WEBFILESTOLINK);\
- do \
- ln -sf $$F $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)/;\
- done)
- (cd $(WWW_BUILD_DIR) ; make )
- @echo "Done making web"
-
-
-show:
- evince $(PDF_DEST_DIR)/${DOC}.pdf
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
- @rm -rf ../www-$(DOC)
-
-clean:
- @rm -f graphicspolicy.tex
- @rm -f 1 2 3
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.pdf *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f images.tex ${DOC}i.tex
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f ${DOC}.html ${DOC}.pdf
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
- @rm -rf $(WWW_BUILD_DIR)
- @rm -rf $(HTML_DEST_DIR)
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=console
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Console_Operators_Gu.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} .; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/next.eps ${DOC}/next.png ${DOC}/prev.eps ${DOC}/prev.png ${DOC}/up.eps ${DOC}/up.png
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Console and Operators Guide" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=developers
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web pdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- touch ${DOC}.idx ${DOC}i-general.tex
- -latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- -latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making ${DOC} pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
- @rm -f *.eps *.old
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making ${DOC} pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi >tex.out 2>&1
-
-html:
- @echo "Making ${DOC} html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @touch ${DOC}.html
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @rm -f *.eps *.gif *.jpg *.old
-
-web:
- @echo "Making ${DOC} web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f ${DOC}/imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --to_meaningful_names ${DOC}/Developer*Guide.html; \
- fi)
- @rm -rf ${DOC}/*.html
- latex2html -split 4 -local_icons -t "Developer's Guide" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/Bacula_Developer_Notes.html ${DOC}/index.html
- @rm -f *.eps *.gif *.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps *.old
- @rm -f ${DOC}/idle.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/win32-*.png ${DOC}/wx-console*.png ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.pl ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.out WARNINGS
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.pdf *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @rm -f images.tex ${DOC}i.tex
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f ${DOC}.html ${DOC}.pdf
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-# Makefile for Bacula LaTeX Manual
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=main
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Main_Reference.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.ddx -o ${DOC}.dnd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.fdx -o ${DOC}.fnd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.sdx -o ${DOC}.snd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.cdx -o ${DOC}.cnd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Main Reference" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=misc
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Miscellaneous_Guide.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}/${MAINDOC}; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/next.eps ${DOC}/next.png ${DOC}/prev.eps ${DOC}/prev.png ${DOC}/up.eps ${DOC}/up.png
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Miscellaneous Guide" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}/${MAINDOC}; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=problems
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Problem_Resolution_G.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/next.eps ${DOC}/next.png ${DOC}/prev.eps ${DOC}/prev.png ${DOC}/up.eps ${DOC}/up.png
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Problem Resolution Guide" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=utility
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Utility_Programs.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- cp ${IMAGES}/bacula-logo.png ${DOC}
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/next.eps ${DOC}/next.png ${DOC}/prev.eps ${DOC}/prev.png ${DOC}/up.eps ${DOC}/up.png
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Utility Programs" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=console
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Console_Operators_Gu.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} .; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/next.eps ${DOC}/next.png ${DOC}/prev.eps ${DOC}/prev.png ${DOC}/up.eps ${DOC}/up.png
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Console and Operators Guide" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=developers
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web pdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- touch ${DOC}.idx ${DOC}i-general.tex
- -latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- -latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making ${DOC} pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
- @rm -f *.eps *.old
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making ${DOC} pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi >tex.out 2>&1
-
-html:
- @echo "Making ${DOC} html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @touch ${DOC}.html
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @rm -f *.eps *.gif *.jpg *.old
-
-web:
- @echo "Making ${DOC} web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f ${DOC}/imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --to_meaningful_names ${DOC}/Developer*Guide.html; \
- fi)
- @rm -rf ${DOC}/*.html
- latex2html -split 4 -local_icons -t "Developer's Guide" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/Bacula_Developer_Notes.html ${DOC}/index.html
- @rm -f *.eps *.gif *.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps *.old
- @rm -f ${DOC}/idle.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/win32-*.png ${DOC}/wx-console*.png ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.pl ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.out WARNINGS
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.pdf *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @rm -f images.tex ${DOC}i.tex
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f ${DOC}.html ${DOC}.pdf
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-# Makefile for Bacula LaTeX Manual
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=main
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Main_Reference.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.ddx -o ${DOC}.dnd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.fdx -o ${DOC}.fnd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.sdx -o ${DOC}.snd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- makeindex ${DOC}.cdx -o ${DOC}.cnd >/dev/null 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Main Reference" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=misc
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Miscellaneous_Guide.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}/${MAINDOC}; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/next.eps ${DOC}/next.png ${DOC}/prev.eps ${DOC}/prev.png ${DOC}/up.eps ${DOC}/up.png
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Miscellaneous Guide" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}/${MAINDOC}; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=problems
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Problem_Resolution_G.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/next.eps ${DOC}/next.png ${DOC}/prev.eps ${DOC}/prev.png ${DOC}/up.eps ${DOC}/up.png
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Problem Resolution Guide" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#
-#
-# Makefile for LaTeX
-#
-# To build everything do
-# make tex
-# make web
-# make html
-# make dvipdf
-#
-# or simply
-#
-# make
-#
-# for rapid development do:
-# make tex
-# make show
-#
-#
-# If you are having problems getting "make" to work, debugging it is
-# easier if can see the output from latex, which is normally redirected
-# to /dev/null. To see it, do the following:
-#
-# cd docs/manual
-# make tex
-# latex bacula.tex
-#
-# typically the latex command will stop indicating the error (e.g. a
-# missing \ in front of a _ or a missing { or ] ...
-#
-# The following characters must be preceded by a backslash
-# to be entered as printable characters:
-#
-# # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-#
-
-IMAGES=../../../images
-
-DOC=utility
-MAINDOC=Bacula_Utility_Programs.html
-
-first_rule: all
-
-all: tex web dvipdf mini-clean
-
-.SUFFIXES: .tex .html
-.PHONY:
-.DONTCARE:
-
-
-tex:
- @../../update_version
- @echo "Making version `cat version.tex`"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- @touch ${DOC}i-dir.tex ${DOC}i-fd.tex ${DOC}i-sd.tex \
- ${DOC}i-console.tex ${DOC}i-general.tex
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
- makeindex ${DOC}.idx -o ${DOC}.ind 2>/dev/null
- latex -interaction=batchmode ${DOC}.tex
-
-pdf:
- @echo "Making pdfm"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdfm -p a4 ${DOC}.dvi
-
-dvipdf:
- @echo "Making dvi to pdf"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/hires/*.eps .
- dvipdf ${DOC}.dvi ${DOC}.pdf
-
-html:
- @echo " "
- @echo "Making html"
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- latex2html -white -no_subdir -split 0 -toc_stars -white -notransparent \
- -init_file latex2html-init.pl ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- cp ${IMAGES}/bacula-logo.png ${DOC}
- (cd ${DOC}; for i in *.png ; do cp -fp ../${IMAGES}/$${i} . 2>/dev/null; done)
- @echo "Done making html"
-
-web:
- @echo "Making web"
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
- @mkdir -p ${DOC}
- @cp -fp ${IMAGES}/*.eps .
- @rm -f next.eps next.png prev.eps prev.png up.eps up.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/xp-*.png
- @rm -f ${DOC}/next.eps ${DOC}/next.png ${DOC}/prev.eps ${DOC}/prev.png ${DOC}/up.eps ${DOC}/up.png
- latex2html -split 3 -local_icons -t "Bacula Utility Programs" -long_titles 4 \
- -toc_stars -contents_in_nav -init_file latex2html-init.pl \
- -no_antialias -no_antialias_text \
- -white -notransparent ${DOC} >tex.out 2>&1
- @(if [ -f imagename_translations ] ; then \
- ./translate_images.pl --from_meaningful_names ${DOC}.html; \
- fi)
- @cp -f ${DOC}/${MAINDOC} ${DOC}/index.html
- @echo "Done making web"
-show:
- xdvi ${DOC}
-
-texcheck:
- ./check_tex.pl ${DOC}.tex
-
-main_configs:
- pic2graph -density 100 <main_configs.pic >main_configs.png
-
-mini-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.backup *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd *.old *.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.gif ${DOC}/*.jpg ${DOC}/*.eps
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.aux ${DOC}/*.cp ${DOC}/*.fn ${DOC}/*.ky ${DOC}/*.log ${DOC}/*.pg
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.backup ${DOC}/*.ilg ${DOC}/*.lof ${DOC}/*.lot
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.cdx ${DOC}/*.cnd ${DOC}/*.ddx ${DOC}/*.ddn ${DOC}/*.fdx ${DOC}/*.fnd ${DOC}/*.ind ${DOC}/*.sdx ${DOC}/*.snd
- @rm -f ${DOC}/*.dnd ${DOC}/*.old ${DOC}/*.out
- @rm -f ${DOC}/WARNINGS
-
-
-clean:
- @rm -f 1 2 3 *.tex~
- @rm -f *.png *.gif *.jpg *.eps
- @rm -f *.pdf *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg
- @rm -f *.html *.backup *.ps *.dvi *.ilg *.lof *.lot
- @rm -f *.cdx *.cnd *.ddx *.ddn *.fdx *.fnd *.ind *.sdx *.snd
- @rm -f *.dnd imagename_translations
- @rm -f *.old WARNINGS *.out *.toc *.idx
- @rm -f ${DOC}i-*.tex
- @rm -rf ${DOC}
-
-
-distclean: clean
- @rm -f images.pl labels.pl internals.pl
- @rm -f Makefile version.tex
+++ /dev/null
-#!/bin/sh
-#
-# Script file to update the Bacula version
-#
-out=/tmp/$$
-VERSION=`sed -n -e 's/^#define VERSION.*"\(.*\)"$/\1/p' @bacula@/src/version.h`
-DATE=`sed -n -e 's/^#define BDATE.*"\(.*\)"$/\1/p' @bacula@/src/version.h`
-. @BUILD_DIR@/manuals/do_echo
-sed -f ${out} @BUILD_DIR@/manuals/version.tex.in >version.tex
-rm -f ${out}
projects / bacula / docs / commitdiff